Le Nouveau Testament

Les quatre Evangiles - (la vie de Jesus de

Evangile seion Matthieu

Evangile seion Marc

Evangile seion Luc

Evangile seion Jean

les Actes des Apotres,

Epitre aux R o m a i Premiere epitre aux Corinthiens Deuxieme epitre aux Corinthiens Epitre Epitre ai_.. _ Epitre aux Philippiens Epitre aux Coli Premiere epitre aux Tl Deuxieme epitre a

Premiere epitre a Timothee

Deuxieme epitre a Timothee

Epitre a Tite

Epitre a Phile"""-

L' Epitre ai

iere epitre de Pierre Deuxieme epitre de Pierre

liere epitre de Jean Deuxieme epitre de Jean Troisieme epitre de Jean

Epitre de Jude

the :ncew

THENEWTestament

03- Gospel of Luke 04 - Gospei of John n5 - Acls of Apostles,

06 - Epistle to the Ro

07 - First Epistle to the Corinthians

08 - Second Epistle to the Corinthians " 1- Galatians

10- Ephesians

14 - II Thessalonian 15-1 Timothy

16- II Timothy

17- Titus

THE BIBLE

INJIL I MUQADDAS,

ya'se,

HAMiKE KHUDAWAND AUB KAJAT-DEKEWALE

YISU' MASIH

KA NAYA 'AHD-NAMA:

13 KA TABJVMA YtSASi ZOHaN SE ZUbAs I CRtiU MEN BAKaBAS TBAJ.-6I.ATT0S COWKITTfiJE 8K EIT^ <3AyA,

jibb tas,h1h kakkk ab riscirwis

BAH CE'IIAPWA'rE HAIN.

THE BRITISH A^D FORE1GN BIBLE SOCIETY. 1878.

INJIL I MUQADDAS

MATI KP INJIL. MARQUS KI INJIL. LU'QA KI INJIL. YU'HANNA KI' INJIL.

RASULON KE A'AMA'L.

PULUS RASUL KA' KHATT RU'MION KO.

PU'LUS EASU'L KA' PAHLA' KHATT gUKINTI'ON KO.

PU'LUS EASU'L KA' DUSEA' KHATT QUEINTION KO.

PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT GALATION KO.

PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT AFSlON KO.

PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT FILIPPION KO.

PULUS EASUL KA' KHATT CJULUSSION KO.

PU'LUS EASU'L KA' DU'SEA KHATT TASSALUNIOJ'ON KO.

PU'LUS EASU'L KA DU'SEA KHATT TASSALUNIOJ'ON KO.

PU'LUS EASU'L KA* PAHLA KHATT TIMTAUS KO.

PU'LUS EASU'L KA' DU'SEA KHATT TIMTAUS KO.

PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT

TITUS KO.

PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT

FILEMU'N KO.

TBEANI'ON KO KHATT. YA'QU'B KA KHATT I 'A'MM.

PATRUS KA PAHLA' KHATT I 'AMM.

PATEUS KA' DU'SRA' KHATT I 'AMM.

YU'HANNA KA PAHLA' KHATT I 'AMM.

Y'UHANNA KA' DU'SRA' KHATT.

YU'HANNA KA TI'SRA KHATT.

YAHU'DA'H KA' KHATT I 'AMM.

YU'HANNA' FAQIH KE MUKASHAFAT KI KITAB.

INJIL I MUQADDAS,

TA'.VTB,

HAMARE KHUDAWAND AUB NAJA'T-DENEWA'LE

YISU' MASIH

K A NA YA 'AHD-NiMA:

1S KA TABJUMA. TlSsist ZCBAN 6E ZCTAK I UR&t KEN BASiEAS THANST.ATIOK CCIMM1TTEE BK KITA* GATA,

j isis tas,hIh kahke ab FAScnwfs

BAR CHHAPWiTE HAIK,

THE BHITISH A^D FORE1GN BIBLE SOC7ETY.

1878.

MATI KI' INJI'L.

T BA'B.

\TiSI'" Masih,

DAta

X Abirahim ki nasabnama.

2 Abiraham «e Iz,hiq midi hoa ; aur Iz,hiq se Ya'qub paida hiti ; aur Ya'qub se Yahiidih aur uh ko bhiii pai di h u e ;

3 Aur Yahridih so Phiras aur Zi- rah Tamar ke pet kg paida hiie ; aur Phiras 8e Hasrom paidi hiia, aur Has- rim i si* A'rim paida hi'ia ;

4 Aur A'rira se 'Aininadib paidi hiti ; aur 'Aminadab se Nahsiin paidi hiia; aur Nahsiin so Salmon paidi U* ;

5 Aur Salmon so BoV. IlAhah ku

S!t «j paidi Mi ; aur Bo'az ao 'Obed, ut ke pet so paidi Inti; aur 'Ubed 86 Yassi paida IhU ;

O' Aur Yassi se T)AAd baduhih pai- di hiii ; aur Daud badshah se Sulai- man, uh so jo U'riyih ki jorii thi, paida hiid ;

7 Aur Sulaiman se Rahabi'Am pai- di hiii; aur Rahabi'im se Abiyib

E ahli htii ; aur Abiylh se Asi paidi fii;

8 Aur Asi se Yfthta&t paidi hiii; aur Yaluisafat ao YurAm paidi hiii ; aur Ydrim se 'Uzziyih paidi hui;

0 Aur 'Uzziyih se Yutirn paidi Inti ; aur Yiitim se A'khaz paidi hdi; aur A'khaz se Ili/.uiyah paidi hui;

LO Aur Hiwpyih ko Munassi paidi hui; aur Munassi se Aoiiin paidi aur Arrniii se Ydsiyih paidi

jua ke bhai, jis waqt Bibul ko uth

ibu i ,jaun para, paidi hde ;

Aur Bibul ko uth jine ke ba'd,

Yakiiniyih se Salatiel paidi hci ; aur Salatiel so Zanibibul paidi htii;

13 Aur Zarubibul ao Abiud paidi ,ui; aur Abiud se RliyAalm paidi

hiii; aur EliyAnim ee 'Aziir paidi hdi;

14 Aur 'A'ziir so Saduq paidi Inti; aur Badiio, so Akhim paidi hai ; aur Akhim se Eliuil paidi hui ;

15 Aur Eliud bc Ele'izar paida hiia; aur Ele'azar so Matthin paidi hui; aur Matthin se Ya'qiib paidi hiti ;

1G Aur Ya'qitbse Yiisuf paidi htii, jo shauhar thi Mariyarn ki, jis M Tisu', jo Masih kahliti hai, paida

btfa Mi

hui.

17 Paa, sab pushten Abiraham se Diiid tak chaudah pushten hairi ; aur DAud se Bibul ko uth jine tak chau- dah pushten ; aur Bibul ko uth jino so Masih tak chaudah puhtag hain.

18 f Ab Yisii' Masi'h ki paidii»h yiin hit; ki Jab ub ki mi M^riyam ki wMinjnl Yiisuf ke ftitfa hiti, to un ke ikatthe ine ae pahle, w uh Ruh ul Quds su'himila pii gayi.

18 Tab u» ke shauhar Yusuf ne, jo risthaz thi, aur na chihi ki use tash,hir kare, irida kiyi ki use chnp- ke eo chhor da

20 Wuh ia biton ke soch hi mcn thi, ki deklio, Khudsiwaud ko ek

firishte ne us par khwib roen Kohir jhoke kahi, Ai Yusuf, Ibn i Diud, aj>- 11 Aur Yusiyib. se Yakiiniyih aur'nf jorti Mariyam koapne yahin lo ine 3 •* 2

Jl/o/iisi'oji bi Masih pan tina. MAT so mac dar; kytinki jo ue ke rihm lucu hai, bo Rdli ul Quds bg hai.

21 Aur wuh beti jauegi, aur tii kd ndm YIMU" rakhe#i; "kyunlri wuh liput! IogUQ ko un ke gunrtlion ft

22 Yih sab kuchli tnid, ki jo Kliu- ddwand eo nabi ki ma'rifat kahd Lkd pi'ird ho ; ki

2:1 Dekho, ek kiinwari hiimila hogi. aur beti janegi, aur ub kd nam 'Iui- tuaauei rakhonge, jis kd tarjuma yih ii=ii, Kiiuda Jiiuudre aith.

24 'Tab Yusuf ne, aoto se uthkar, jaisS K'lunliiwaud ke tirishte oe uso iarmdya thd, kiyd, aur apni jord ko apne yahdn lc dyd:

25 Tar uh ko na jdnd, jali tak ki wuh apnd palauthd betd na jani ; aur us kd ndm Y1SU" raklid, II BA'ft.

AUR jab Yisu', HcTodls bddshdh ke waqt, Yahudi ya ko Baillabam iiieij paidd lui a, tn dekho, kai maju- fiuu ne, piirab se Yanisalam merj dko,

2 Kati; ki Yahiidion kd bddshdh jo pftidi hiid 80 kalian hai? ki ham ne pdtafc mej "B kd sitara dcklid, aur

. kanta ko do hain.

3 Jab H'Tmlis hiiishab ue yih su- nd, tab widi aur ub ko sdth tamdm Y arti salam ghabrdyd.

4 Tab us ne, sah Rarddr kalunoii aur q aum fce faiplion ku Jam'a Eatka, un se puchhd, ki Masih kahdn paidA boga ? '

D I/nlion ne us se kahd, Yalnidiya ke BaUlahtm mag ; kyi'mki nabi ki ma'rifut yi'm iikhd hai; ki

6 Ai liaitlaliam, Yahrldah ki sar- 7,amin, tu Yahuddh ke anrddron rum knrgiz kamtarin uahin hal; kylinki nijh iiii'i_ se ek Sardar uiklogd, jo meri (lanm Isrdel ki ri'dyat karegd.

7 Tab Herodis ne majusion ko chupke se buldkar un se tahqiq ki, ki wuli sitdra kab dikhldi diya.

8 Aur unhcn yih kabke Baitlaham

I', II, AifnJ ha, gatl hor,6.

men bbeja, ki Jdknr u.i larke ki bdbat kluib darydft karo; aur jab uso pSo, mujho khabar do, ki main bhl jdko use sijda karun,

y Wc bddshdh se yih sunke rawii- na hiie, aur, dekho, wuh sitdra, jo unlmn ne piirab nun dekhd thd, uu ke dge dgo chal rahd, aur us jagah ke upar.jaban wuli larka thii.jSke thahra.

10 Wc ub sitdro ko dekhko bahul hl khuali hiie.

11 1T Aur us ghar muu pahnnch- kar ub larke ko ua ki raa Mariyam ke salh payd, aur us ko dge girku DM sijda kiyd; aur apni jliolidn kholke aoud, aur lubdn, aur muTr, uao nazi* guarana,

12 Aur khwab men agdht pdkar ki Herodis ke pds pbir na jdweii, we ihis- ri rah hb apne uiulk ko phire.

13 Jab we rawana iide, Co dekho, Kr.i-lawaiid ke ek tirwhta ue, Yusuf ko khwab men diklidi deke, kahd, Dth.'ua larke aur us ki md ko sdth le- kar Misr ko bhdg ja, aur wahdu rah, jab tak ki main tujhe khabar ua ddn ; kyiiiiki Herotli» is lafka ko dliuudlie- gd, ki mar dale.

14 Tab wuh uthko, rdt hi ko, larko aur ub ki md ko sdth lekar iiisr ko rawdna hdd :

10 Aur Herodifi ke ruame tak wa- hdn rahd, ki jo Khuddwand ne nabi ki ma'rifat kahd tlii pura ho, ki Main ue apne bete ko Misr se buldyd.

10 T J»b Herodia ne dekha, ki us ne majusion se fareb khayri thd, to nihdvat guswo hud,"aur Iflgon ko bhej- kar tiaillaham aur us ki sdri tatbaa- don ke sab larkon ko, jo do bara -s ke aur ub se chtaote tlie, ua w»qt ke niu- wdnq ki us ne majusion se tahu.iq ki tii, qatl karwdyil.

1T Tab wuh, jo Yaramiydh nabi no kahd thd, piird hiid; ki

IH Hdmah meo ek dwdz sunne men di hai, ndla, aur rone, aur bftf i ki, ki Rdkhil apne larkon par roti,"nur

Yuhannd kd

tasalli nuLin chAhti, is liye ki we

nahin hiiin.

19 K Jab HerodiB mar gayA, to dokho, Khudiwaud ke nrlsnto DB, Min men Yusuf ko khwdb incii dikh- M dekc,"

20 KahA, Uth, aur uh larke aur ub Jti mi ko stlth lekar Israel ke inulk men ja ; kyuiiki jo uh larke ki jan ke khwAhAn t'10 mar g^y-

^1 Tab wah ulba, aur us larke aur HB ki ma ko sdth leke IsrAol ko inulk men a ya.

22 Magar jab suna, ki Aikliilius, apue bAp Hcrodis ki jagah, Vuliusliya HB baashihat karta hai, to wahan jAno 80 dara; aur khwdb men agahi pakar Jalil ki atraf men rawdna bui.

23 Aur ek shahr meg.jis k;i u;iiii Nasarat thd, jAke rahd, ki wuh jo riabfon ne kahd thA pura ho, ki Wuh Nasar! k;ihlaegA.

UT BA'B.

X dinon men Yuhaand baptisma

MATI', III, IV.

t&hir hotid.

D

_ denewdld, Yainidiy.i ke biyab.ii) men zdhir boko, manAdi karne,

2 Aur yih k a bn c laga, ki Tanba karu; kyunki AsruAn ki bAdKhAhat nazdikhai.

3 Ki yih wuhi hai, jis ka zikr Yas'- aiydh nabi nc yih kahkc kiyA, ki Jangal meo ek pukayjuwale ki AwAz bal, ki Khuddwand ki rAb ko durust karo, aur ub ke rastnn ko sidhA bando.

4 Is Yuhannd ki poshak uut ke liab.iij ki tlii, aur chauire ka kamar- baud us ki kamar men tha; nur tiddi aur jangli shahd us ki khiirak thi.

5 Tab Yarusalam, aur saru Yahd- diya, aur Yardan ke s:ili jspAs ke ralmowile, us pAs chale Ae.

G Aur uuhon ne apne gunAhon kA icjrar karkc Yardan men us se baptisma pAyd.

7 1 Par jab us ne dekha, ki bahut se Farisi aurSttdiitji baptisma pAne ku us piU Ae bain, to utihen kaha, ki Ai

sAmpon ke barbel io, tuinhi-ij AuewAlc gazab bo bhdgnA kis ne sikhlAyd ? S' Pas tauba ke lAiq pbal lAo :

9 Aur apne dil ineii aisA knbne ka kliiyiil niat karo, ki AbirahAm ha- mdra bAp hai ; kyunki main turo t>e kalitA hun, ki KhudA inhin pattharon se Abiraharn ke liyo aulAd paidA kar sak t A hai.

10 Aur darakhton ki jar ]wr ab kulhArA rakhA liai ; ]su> bar ek dar- aku"! jo acbchhA phal nahin lata, kAtd aur Ag men daja jAtA hai.

11 Main to tumhon tauba ke liye pani so baptisma duta h i'; n ; lekin wuh jo mere ba'd AtA hai, inujh se zorAwnr hai, ki roain us ki jutidri ut.hane ke lAiq nahin; wuh tumben Rlih i Quds aur Ag so baptisma degd :

12 Us kA siip ub ke hAth men hai, aur wuh apno khulihaa ko khub sAf karegA, aur apne " gehun ko kh^tte num jam'a karega; par bbiise ko us Ag men, jo hargi» naliin biijhti, jatAwegA.

13 f Tab Yisu' Jalil se Yardan ke kanAre Yuhanna ke pas AyA, IA ki us H ki]-itii>ma iiAwo.

14 Par YvibannA Deuseman'a itiya, aur kaha, ki Main tujh bc baptisma pAue kA muhtAj bun, aur tii taat pas AyA hai ?

15 Yisu' ne j:nv;ib men us se kabA, Abhouede; kyurjki hainen mundaib liai.ki yuubin sal> rdstbdzi piiri karen. Tab us ne hone diyA.

16 Aur YisA' baptisma pike wun- bin paui se nikalke upar dya, aur, dekbo, ki us ke liye dwindn kbul gayA, aur us ne KIiudA ki Kuli ko kabdtar ki mAnmd utarte, aur apne upar ate duk ha.

17 Aur dekbo, ki Asniau seek Swia yib kahti di, ki Yih merd piyaia Bctd hai, jis se main. khush hiig.

IV BA'B.

TAB Yisu' Ruh ke waaile ImyAbAn men ldyd gayA, ^a ki Sbaitan

Madi H MATI', IV.

2 Ain jali cMlfl ilin aur ehAlfs rAt rota rakh chuki, Akhir ko bhukha huA.

a Tab AKiimish-karm'wAle ueuKpAi i'.kfi kahA, Asar tu Khudd kA botA hai, to kuli, ki yc paltliar inti lxm

4 TJs ne jawAb mi-» kalui, LikliA i.ai, ki InnAn sirt' roti se nahiri, baiki liar ck bafBe, jo Khuda ke munh se nikahi, jitA hai.

5 'lab Shai t.;)Ti nw iiRiqariilas whahr meB Spne ^iilli k gaya, aur haikal ke kangiire DM khara karke us M kali», ki •

6 Agar tu KhudA ki tetf hai, to «pneta.irt niche j»ira da; kyi'iiiki likba hai, ki VVuli tera liye apne firiahtog lio tivmaegi, aur we tujhe hatimu per uLlid Icijgo, aisA na lio ki tue pa%w ko patthar se thes lage.

T Yi.Mi'neusTe kahA, Yih Mu likha hai, ki Tu KhudAwand apne KhudA ke niat i?.m&.

8 i'liir Shail&n usc ab bare unche ■i 1« ^ti'.i, aur duuyA ki uari bAdshAhateg, aur uii kr fbau o ahaukat, uan dikhAin ;

a Aur uh «; kahA, Agar Ul girko mujhe sijda kaie, to yih nal) kuchh ■Lujhf. diiyua,

10 Tab Yisii' nc iise kahA, Ai Shai- tan, dtir lii>; kyunki likliii liai, ki Tu Khudawand apne K^huda ku njda kar, ' khabar! ki aur US akele ki baiHiayi kar.

11 Tab Sliaitau use cliiior gaya, aur, dekho, firisbton ue ako u* k 1 i I . i ' ■ ■

12 t Jab Yi*ii' no Bund ki Yu- owoi uirifiar hii;i, tab Jalil ko chalA

L8 Aur Niiwirat ko cbhorkar Ka- faniahum men, jo daryA ko katiAre "' lIh'iIi'hi aur Nafuli ki sai'liaudon nion hai, 14 raba: ki

14 Jo Yaa'&iy&h nabi ki ma'rifat. kahA gaya IhA, pura boj

15 Zabulun ki sarzamin aur Xaf-

azTKaya. ja>i" . tali ki snrzamin, ya'ne, gair-qaumon kA Jalil, jo darya ki rAh Yardan ke par hai ;

~16 Un Iojwjij m, jo andhero meu bait.ho thc, bari rosbsl dekhi, aur un par, jo maut ke mulk aur saya men liaitbv t.lie, nur cbamka.

17 V L'KiVaift se Yisu' ne imihaiii l.aiiM. aur yih knhna shurii' kivri, ki Timba karo ; kyfinki asiuan ki bad- shaliat nazdik Af.

18 5 Aur jab Yisti' Jalil ke daryA ke kanAre cliala juta th», to u« ne do hbAi, ya'ne, Sttama'ua ko, jo Patrus kablAtA hai, aur u s ku bhAi AndrvA» ku, daryA men jAl diilto dekhA, ki we

.icbliiie the.

19 Aur unh-;n k ah A, ki Mere efebhe chale Ao, ki main t.iunlitn Admiori ko macldiwe batuiunga.

20 We usi waqt jAlon ko cbhorkar ua ke pichhc ho liye,

21 Aur wahin. ne barhke us ne aur do bhai, ya'ne, Sabadi ke"beto Ya'qdb, aur ub ke bhai Yiihauua ko, npne bAp Zaliadi ke sAtb nAw pur apne jiilojj ki marammat karto*"dekli<i, aur antan bulAyA.

22 Wunhin ndw anr apne chhorkar we us ku pichhe lio liye.

38 T Aur Yirtii', tamim Jalil weo

phirtA huA, un ke 'ibadatkhAnon mey

ta'lim detA, aur bA^lwhaViat ki kluif,!i-

■Adi kartA, aur kigor

ke sAre dukh aiu- bimAri dafa karta

24 Aur us ki khahii' tamani Ruriyn men phaili, aur sab biniaron, ko, jo tarah tarah ki bimAri aur "a^Ab men giriftar the, aur unben jin par defl oharhe the, aur mireihos, %m

mAre hiion k", us pu Em, aur um ne urlicn cn"anga kivA.

25 Aur bari liari bhir Jalil, aur WkApulia, aur Y'arusiilam, aur Ya- bfidiya, aur Yardaii ke par se uk ke pichhe ho li.

i'ahdr par MATI', V. Masih kd wa'z.

V BA'B. 16 Isi tn.mli tumhari mahm Admion

ke saniune chamke, til ki we tiiinhAre nuk kAmon ko dekhen, iur tumhare bap El, jo AaniAii par hai, sitdish harem

17 T Yih khiyiil unit k:.ro, ki main taurel ya iiabum ki kitab mansukh korne ko Aya; main maosukb. karnc ko nahin, baiki puri kamu ko aya- li iin.

m Kyiinki main tum n aach kali- tA hun, ki Jab tak Asruiii aur /amin fal n;i jaen, ek Lyqta ya ek ahosha fauret ki hargiz na m i tega, jab tak nb kuelili purii ua ho.

19 Pas jo koi iu hukinou uien Re, sah se chhotc ko tal dewe, aur wai(j hi admion ko Bikhiwe, aaman ki bAd- shahat men sal) se chhota kahliiegii; |iar jo ki 'amal kare, aur siklilawe, wuhi AsmAn ki badshdhat mefl Uua kahlAegA.

20 Kyiinki main. tumherj kalita liiin, ki Agar tumhari rastliAzi Faqi- hun aur Fa ria ion ki m ziyAda na lio, tum auman ki~badshakat men kiai tarah dAkhil na liogo.

21 f Tum suri ehuk« bo, U ag3os M k ah a gaya, Tii kluin. mat kar; aur jo koi khun karc, 'adAlat men sazA ke laiq kuga:

22 Par main tumhen katili hun, ki Jo koi apno bhai par be-sabab guaea

"tTTUTI bhty ko dekhkar ek paluir

W par chnrh gaya; aur jabbait.lia, UI ke shagird tu l»As Ac :

2 Tab'wuh apni zubAn kh"lke un- hon sikhlane lagi, aur kahii, ki

5 Mubarak we jo dil ke garib hairj ; kvunki asman ki 'badshahat unhiii ki hai

4 Muliirak we jo gamgin hain ; kyiinki we taaalli pAwenze.

5 Mubarak we jo halim hain : kyiinki we zaniin ke waris bOBgB.

' 6 Mubarak we jo rastbAzi ke bhti- tim aur piyase hain ; kyiinki weasuda honge.

7 Mubarak we jo rahm-dil hain kyiinki un jmiv rahra kiya jaegA.

a Mubdrak we jo pak-dii hain kyiinki Wfl Khinld ke dekhense.

i) Mubarak we jo silih kamewAle hain; kyiinki wo Khuda ke fajjiand kahlienge.

10 MubArak we jo rast.bairt ke sa- liab sajie jAte hain ; kyiinki asniAii%i had s h «liat unhin, ki hai.

1 1 Mubarak ho tum, jab mere wistc tumben la'n ta'n karen, nur salilweg, aur liar tarah ki buri bateij jiuitli se tumhare haqq men kaben.

12 Khusb ho aur kliuslii k»KI ; kyfigki Asmin par tumhare liyc bani lunllu hai ; is liye ki uuhon UO un n:il>ioii ko, jo tum ac Age the, isi tarah aatayi hai.

13 *§ Tum stamin ke camak ho : par agar namak kA maza bigar jAe, to wuli k ia chia «e mazadAr kiya jie? wuh phir kisi kam kii n;ihin, siwa u,« ke ki bahar phenkA jae, aur adiuiun ke ]iiii_nvuij tale raunda jae.

14 Tum (lunya k"o inir lio; jo ahahr, ki pahir par IhirA hai, chhip nahin. Bakti.

16 Aur cliirfi^ bAlke [MiimAiia ke tals nahin, baiki chirigdAn par rakhtc Iniij : nb un uab ko jo gbar men )i rosbai detA.

lio, 'adalat mon BazA ke aAbil hoca | aur jo koi apne bhai ko BAplA kaho, Sadr-majliB men sazA ke lAiq hoga ; aur jo us ko Ahuiaij kalie, jahaiinait; ki u ka BaaAwir hogi,

23 Pas agar tii qurbiingah mrn ajui: nasir le jdwe, aur wahan tujlii' ya>: Aw«, ki t*ra iibAi tujh se kuchh ii_w- khAlafat rakhta hai ;

"24 To wahan apni nazr ciurbAngiih ke sAmhne chhorke chalA jA; pahle apne bhai m mcl kar, tab Ake apni nazr guzran.

25 Jab tak tu apne miKkla'i ke lith rAh mejj hai, jald us se m^ja; na ho,

PaUrjwr MATI'

ki niiidda'i tujlie qd/,i ke haw.-Ua kare, nur qizi tujbe piydda ke aupurd karo, aur tii qaid nicn pare.

26 Main tujh ee saoh kahtS Mn. ki Jali tak kauri kauri add na kare, tu wahdn se kisi tarah na chbutega.

27 "T Tum suri chuke lio', ki aglon ho kahd gaya, Tu zina na kor ;

28 Par main tumlien kabtd Inln, ki ■To koi shahwat se kisi 'aurat par nigdh karo, wuh apne dil men u» ke aath zina kar chukd.

29 So agar teri dahini ankk tere thekar khaiio kd bius ho, BM nikal, aur apne pas bo phenk de ; kyiinki tera angon men se «k Isa Di ralniii tero liye ue Be blhtar hai, ki terd sdrd badan jahannam men ddld jawe,

30 Yd agar terd dahina hdth tero liye thokar khdne kd bd'is lio, us lu kiit dai, aur apne pas bb phenk de ; ky- imki tore angon mcn se i?k kd na rnhiia tero liye ns bo bihtnr hai, ki terd sdrd badan jahannam men dftla jde.

:;i Y ih bhi likhd gayd, ki Jo koi nperj torf ko chhor de, usc talaeuiania likh de :

82 Ph main tumben kabtd lu Jo kol apni jord ko, zina ke siwd, kisi aur sabab bo chhor dewe, ub so zini Itarwata hai ; aur io koi ub chhori hui se bydh kare zind kartd hai.

33 1T Phir tum «un chuke ho, ki aglun se kah4 gaya, ki Tii jhi'ithi «asam na khd; baiki apni qosanicrj Khudawand Ise liye puri kar :

84 Par main tunihon kabtd lilin, Hargis aaaam na khdna; na to isman ki, kyiinki wuh Khuda kd takht b*l ;

35 Na zamin ki, kyiujki wuh ub ke pati w ki ekiuiki hai ; aur m Yarujalam ki, kyiiiiki wuh buzurg badakah kd ehahr hai ;

3(> Aur na apne air ki qasam kha, kyiinki tu ek bdl ko Bufed yd kdld nahin kar sakti.

37 Par tumhdri guftogu mori, han ki bdn, aur nahin ki nahin ho ; ky-

VI.

L JO IB

Masih Icd iva'z. -, ziyada hai so burdi so

hotd hai.

38 ^ Tum Bun chuke ho, ki kahd gaya, A'nkh ke badle duk h, aur ddnt ko badlo tldnt:

30 Pir main tumben kabtd hiin, ki Zalim kd nuiqab.tla na kanta; baiki jo tere dahine gdl par tamdncha mdre, dusrd bhi ub ki taraf pher de.

40 Aur agar koi oSahe, k! tujli pai ndlish karke teri qabi h, kurte ko bhi usoleue d e.

41 Aur jo koi tujlie ok kos begdr le j A wc, us ke siitli do kos chala j;i.

42 Jo koi tujh se kuchh inarjge, use de; aur jo tujh so qarz chihe, us sc inunh ua mor.

43 t Tum' sun ebuke ho, ki kaha gaya, Apne porosi se dosti ralih, aur apne (luslimaii mi 'addwat :

ii Par main tuiulien kabtd hiin, ki Apne duahmanon ko piydr karo; aur jo tum ]>ar laknat karen, un ke liye l>ar;ik:it cbiibo; jo tum so kina roklien, urf kd bbali karo ; nur "Jo tumben dukh den, aur satdwcn, un ke bye du'd mdngo ;

45 Ta ki tum apne Bdp ke, jo ds- man par hai, iarzand lio; kyiinki wuh apno suraj ko hadon aur nekon par ugiiti. hai, aur rdston aur nd-rdstoii [iar mcTili barsdtd hai.

40 Kyiinki a.yar tum unhiij ku piyir karo, jo tumben piydrkarte hain, to tumhdrc liye kyd »jr hai? kyd majiaiil-lenewdle bhi aisd nahin karte?

47 Aur agar tum faqat apno bhdion ko saldm kam,to kyd ziyada kiyd'i' kyd mahsnl-lenewalc bhi aisii nahirj karte V

48 Pas tum kamil ho, jaisd tum- hdra Ilip.jo iisindn'par hai, kiimil liai.

VI BA'B.

KHABARDA'K roho, ki tum apne nok kimo-a kologon ke sdrahnc dikhldne ke liye na karo, nahin to tuuiliarr l'.iiji W, Jo dsniau par hai, ajr ua inileira.

Pahdr par MAT

2 ls.liye lab ki tii khairdt kare, apne s&mhnc turbi niat baji, jaise riydkdr 'ibadat k hifiioij aur CMfOO men karte hain, td ki log un ki ta'rif kareij. Main tum ee statsli kahti hiiii, ki W o apiid ajr pa chuke.

3 Par jab tu khairdt kare, to cha- hiye ki teri bayan hith na jdne, jo teri dobiua hath kartd bai ;

4 Ta ki teri khairdt poskida rahc, aur tera Bdp jo poehidag) meii dekbta hai, khud zahir meo tujhe badid dewe.

5 1T Aur jab tii du'd minge, riyd- karofl ki minimi rnat ho ; kyiinki we 'ibadatkhdnon men aur raaton ko kon- on par khare hoke du'a mingne ko dost rakhte hain, ta ki log unhen de- khon. Main tara «e sach kahtft lilin, ki We apna badla pd chuke.

6 Lokio jab tii du'a mdnge, apni kothri men ja, aur apna darwaza baud karke apne Bap ea jo poshidagi men hai du'a mdng ; aur teri Bdp jo poshi- dagi men dekhtd bai, zikir aun tujlif bodli degd.

7 Aur jab du'd miugtc lio, gair- qaunioii ki inaniud be-faida bak 'bak rnat karo; kyurjki we samajhto hain ki un ki ziyiaagoi se un ki suni jdegi,

8 Par unTtT mdnind niat ho, kyuii- ki t umbari Bdp, tumhdre manguo ke jiahlo, jdnta hai, ki tumben km kin chizon ki zariirat hai.

9 Pas tum iai tarah du'a mdngo, ki Ai baindre Bdp, jo dsnidn par hai, Tera ndm ki taqdia lio.

10 Teri badsnahat dwe. Teri mar- zi, jaisi dsmdn par hai, zamin par bin bar dwe.

11 1 lamari rozina ki roti dj ham ko bakhsh.

12 Aur jis tarah ham apne qarz- ddrorj ko bakbslite hain, tii apne dain ham ko bakhsh do.

13 Aur harneii dzmdish men na dai, baiki burdi se bacha : kyiinki badshd- bat aur qudrat aur jahil hamesha tere hi hain. A'iuin,

"9

', VI, Masih kd wVs.

14 la liyc ki agar tum admion ke gunati hajdishogo, to tumhdrd Bdp hhi, jo asmdn par hai, tunihun bakh- sh egd.

15 Par agar tum ddmion ko un ko gimih na bakhnhogc, to tumhdrd Bdp bin lumhdre.gundh na bakhsbcgd.

16 ^ Phir jab tum roza rakho, riyd- kiron ki mdnind apni cliihra udds na bando : kyiinki wo apna munh bigdrte hairj, ki logorj ke nazdik rozadifzdhir hon. Main. tum sg sach kalita hiin, ki Wo apnd badla pd clmko,

17 Par jab tu roza rakbe, apne air par ciiikna lagi, aur munh dhn;

18 T4 ki tii admi par nahiii* baiki tere Bdp par, jo poshida hai, rozaddr zdhir lio ; aur terd Bdp, jo poshidagi men dekhtd hai, iahkiri tujbo badli de.

19 Tf Mil apne wdste zamin par jam 'a na karo, janin Xiri, aur mo,rcha Ithardb karto hain, aur jahdn chor sendh dete, aur churdte hain :

20 Baiki mil apne liye isman par jam'a karo, jabdn na kiri na moreba khardb karto, aur na wahdn chor sc.ndli dete, na chnrate hain :

21 Kyiinki jahdii tumhdrd MuKana hai, wahin tunihara dil blii lagi ra- hegd.

2i Badan kd chirdg dnkh hai ; pas agar teri dnkh adf ho, to terd siri badan roshan hogi.

23 Par agar teri dnkh slf nahin, to terd sdra badan andbera boga. 1^ liyo agar wuh m'ir, jo lujh men bai, tiriki ho, to kaiti ariki th&hregl I

24 Koi ddirudoklidwiiidonki khid- mat nahin kar Haktd: ia liye ki yd ek se dushinani rakhegd, aur diisre se dosti; yd ek ko ininega, aur du3ro ko na-chiz jdnegd. Tuin Kbudiaur daulat douon ki khidmat naLin kar nkte.

26 lw liye main tum se kahtd in'ui, ki Apni zindagi ke liye fikr na karo, ki ham kya khdenge, aur kyd piengc,

MATI' na ai)ii*; badan ko liye, ki kyA pahin- enge. KyA jAn khurik se bihtar na- bi», aur badan posbak se?

26 Hawa ke paraudog ko dekho; we na botc, na laute, na kothiou rocn. jam'a karte hain, tm bbJ tumbai-a iisiniiiii lliip im ko pika hai Kya tum un se bahut bihtar naMrj lu»?

27 Tum raen se kaun hai jo fikr karke apni 'umr nierj ok ghari barha saku tua?

28 Aur pnshak ki kyi'in fikr karte ho? Jangli bowuwo ko dekho, ki we kia tarah m barhti hain ; we na mi h- nat kiirii, na katti hain :

29 Pur main Tumben kahtA htirj, ki Sulaiman bM apni «iri aliAn o shaukat men, un mcn se ek ki mariiiul ] riliinr- ufl thA.

30 Pas, jab Khudamaidan ki ghAs ko, jo aj hai, aiir kal Lani'ir □ ■

jati. yiin paltinAtd hai, fb kyA tum ko, ■ii kam-i'atiqiido, ziyAda na pahina- p.g&'t

31 Is live vib kabke fikr mat karo, ki Ham kya khAengc ? ya Kya pierjge f ya Kya pahinerjge ?

32 Kyiinki iu sab chfzon ki talash men gair-qauini>n rahli hain, aur tum- i.ara a*m6i-i Mp jantd h::i, ki tuni un cnb chi'/.on ke nmhtaj ho.

33 Par "tum pahle Kliudri. ki bfid- shabat aur 08 UrfistbM kodliiindbo, to yib sah chizen bhi tnmbeii milegai

34 Pas knl ki fikr na karo ; kyiirjki kal apni cliizon ki ap lu fikr kar lega. A'i ka dukh aj hl ke liye bas hai.

VII BA'B. f A IB na lagao, ki tum par bhi 'aib A Dii lagayii jAwc.

•i Kyiiijki jiy tamli tum 'aib Iftg&te h o, usl tarah tum pir bhi Wb lagays jAoga; aur jispaimAne se tuiu nAptoho, lisi se tumhare wdate n Apa jaega.

3 Aur kvun ua tinjiti ku, Jo tOM lihai ki auk'li mcn hai, dekhtAhai.par us kaiiri par, jo teri Aukh meg bui, nazar nahm karta?

VTT.

Manh kd «

4 Ya kyiinkar tii apne bliai ko kan- ta, ki Us tinke ko, jo teri dukh merj hai, Ui nikiil ebin ; aur, dek h, khud teri aukh men kanri hai ?

5 Ai riyakar, mhta kanri ko apnf dnkh se nikiil. tob iu tlaks k" apne bhdi ki Aukh so achchhi tarah dekhke nikdl sakegd.

(i ^f Wuh chiz jo pak hai kntton ko mat do, aur apne moti suaron ke Ago na phenko ; aisA na lio ki we un- horj pamdl karen, aur phirke tumben phAren."~

1 1 Mingo, ki tumben diy;i jii^L'i j dhiindho, ki tum iwioge ; kh:iikli:it;i", to tumbare wdstc kbola jiegA i

8 Kyiinki jo koi mangla hal, nse milt* ; aur jo koi dhundhta, bo pita hai ; aur jo koi kbatkhatata, uh ke wastc kholA jaega,

H Ya, tum men se kaun UkwA im, ki agar us ka l*ta ns »e roti mange, ivuh use patthar deweV

10 YAttgaruiachhli mauge, uae samp do?

11 Pas jab ki tum jo bure ho apne larkon ko acbchhi ebizen dene jdnte ho, to kitnft ziyada tumhara BAp, jo asmin par hai, unhen jo ub se mangte hain, achcbhi chizen degA ?

12 Pas jo kuchli luni chAhte ho, ki log tumhArc sAth karen, waisA tum bhi un ke sdth karo ; kyiinki tauret aur nabion kA kbuldsa yibi bai.

13 "l Tan^darwAze se dAkliil ho ; kyiinki chaurA hai wuh darwAso, aur kiinhada hai wuh rasta, jo haJAkat ko paBunoMtt hai, aur bahut hain j" na sedAkhil hoto:

14 'KyA hi tang hai wuh fitrwaza, aur sakri hai wuh r;ili, jo zindagi ko ItthuncTidti, aur thore halrt jo use pate 1

15 f Pur jhntlic nabion nc kbab- ardar raho, jo tumhArc pAs bhflfon ke

: jo, par ha(jtc|at merj pkar- uowAle bheriyr hain.

W Tum'unhaD un ke piiaknj nc

M'ifih ira v

pahcbdnoge. KyA kdnfcon se angur, yA lintkatAron se anjir tortc hnin f

17 0« taruh har ek achchhA dft- rakkt achchhe phal lata, aur burA darakht bure ]>lial latA hai.

18* AchchhA ikrakhl. hiire phal nn- hirj la snkrA, na bura' darakht achchhe phal ia sak t A.

19 Hat- ek darakht. jo achelihephal mihiri hilA, kata aur Ag inen dali jfltA hai.

20 Pas, un ke phalon se tuni unhcn pahchAnoge.

21 Tf Na har ek jo mujlie KhudA- wand, Kbudawand, kiilita hai, d.sniau ki bAdsliAhat men ehamil hogA, magnr wuhi jo mere asniiini Bdp ki marzi par chalti hai.

22 TJb din bahutcrc mujhe kaherjgc, Ai Khudawand, ai Khudawand, kya hairi oe tcre nara se nubiiwat nahin ki. aur tere naiu se dton ko nahin nikah», aur tere uain se bahut si kardniAt zAhir nuliirj kin V

23 Aur ua waqt main un se sAf kahiiris'a, ki Main kal.ln tum se wAqif un ihA; ai badk.iro, mere pAa ao dur ho.

24 ^f Pas, jo koi meri ye bAten suntA, aur unhen 'amal meij l;il.:i hai, main 086 us 'rit^Mjiiiitl ki niAimid thuhrata hun, jis ne chutAn par upiiA ghar 'Tianayi:

25 Aur menhbarsA,aiirbdrhcn ain, aur andhian chalin, aur us gliar mr zor mara ; par wuh na gini, kyiiuki us ki new chatan par dali gayi 1 1 ■ i.

26 Par jo koi meri yc hatcn suntA, aur Ufl par 'amal naliiij karta, wuh us bewuqtif adim ki rniinitid tkahrega, jis ne apoA ghar rcti |iar banayA :

27 Aur menh barsa, aur barhen Air, aur Andhirin chaMn, nur us ghar par zor mArA, aur wuh gir para, aur us ka ginia hauinak wAai'a hiui.

28 AiiraisA l.uA, ki jab Tisu' yih biteg kah duikA, to wuh bhir ub ki ta'lim se daughui:

11 -

MATI', VIII. Ek korlii ko changa hama. 20 Kyfinki wuh faqihon ki iiianiiil

nahin, baiki ikhtiyarwalu ke taur par sikhfatd thA.

VIII BAT*.

JAB wuh un pahar se utra, bahut s: bbfr us ke piehhe ho li.

2 Aur', dekho, ek korhi ne Ake use sijda kiyA, aur kahi,""Ai Kbudawaml, agar td chAhe, to mujlie pak adf kar sakta hai.

3 Tab Yisu' ne liftth harhdke use chhiifi, aur kaha, Main ehtttiMn, tii pffi sAf ho. Aur wunhin us kA korh jAU raha. " .

4 Phir YisiV ne use kahi, Dekh, kisi sr nakahiyo; par jAke «prii- talQ TiAliiii ko dikhA, aur jo na/.r MiisA ne miTqnrrar ki, guzTAn, tA ki un ke liyc gawAhi h o,

TJ T Aurjab Yisii' KaftmAhum nicvi dAkhil hiid, ek sdhadar us pAa AyA, aur us se ininjjat karke kalia, ki

(l Ai KliiidAwaud, merfi ehhokra jhole kA mArA ghar inen para, nur niliayat duk h men hai.

7 Tah Yisil' ne us se kalni, Main Ake use changA karAngA.

8 Stibadar ue kwib rnen kaki, Ai KhudAwand, main ifl lAiq nahin ki tii meri chhat tale Awe ; baiki sirf ek bAt kah, to merA chhokiA changA ho

9 Kyunki main bhi Admi hi'in jo diisre ke ikhtiyAr inen nun, aur sipAhi mne bttkm men bain i atirjabekko kahtd hun, JA, wuh jdtA hai ; aur dtisre ko, ki A', «uh AtA hai ; aur apne guldm ko, ki Yih kar, wuh kartA hai.

10 YisA/ ce yih sunkar ta'ajjub kiya, aur un ko jo piehhe Ate the kahA, Main tum se sach kahtA hun, ki main m aisA imAu IsrAel men bhi nahin pAyA.

i L Aur main tum se kahtA hun, ki Bahutere purah aur pftebch&im M Awonco, aur AbirahAui D I/.,hAq aur Ya'q"db ke sAth AaniAn ki hdiishdhat men iwiithenge.

A'ndhi ko thamd «fcnd. MATI'

12 Par hadahdhat ke farzand biliar ke andhere men dale jaenge; wah a n rona aur ddnt pisnd hogd.

13 Tab Yisti'ne uHsubaddrkokaha, Ja, aurjaiad tii fiudn Jaya, tera liye waisd hi ho : aur usi ghari us kd chhokri changd ho,gaya.

14 K Aur Yisii' ne Patrus ke ghar merj ake dekhd, ki us ki aas pari, aur ns par tap charhi hai,

15 Aur ub ka hath chhud ; aur tap us par se atar g&yf, aur wuli uthi, aur uu ki khidmat kame lagi.

16 T Jab sham hui ua ko pai

baliutoii ko, jiu MI diK) charhti the, Ide ; aur us uo mi ruhon ku kalam hi ne dur kiyd, aur sab k*o jo bimar the uhangA kiyd :

17 TA ki jo Yfw'aiyAh nabi ne kahd thd pura howe, ki Us ue dp hauidvi niaiidagidiik' lin.aur haiudri bimdridrj utlid lin.

'18 "f Jab Timi' ne bahut si bhir apne ds pds dekhi, us ne hukm kiyd, ki p4LJftivoD.

19 Aur ek faqih ne dke us se kaha, Ai UatAd, jahAn kabin tii jde, ntairi tera pichhe ehaldngd.

20 Aur Yisu'uc ussckahd, ki Lom- riou ke liye uiduderj, aur liawd ke jiarandon ke wAsto baserc hain, pai Ibu i A'daro ke liye jagah nahin jalian apitd air dharc.

21 Uake shagirdon men sedusrene us sc kabd, Ai Khudawimd, mujhe rukhsat de, ki pablo jdkur apne bdp ko gdnin.

22 Par Yisti'ne us ae kahd, Tti mere pichhe d, aur murdon ko apno murde gdrne de.

23 1 Aur jab wub naw par charha, us ke ahagird us ke pichho dc.

24 Aur, dekho, daryA raeQ aiai bari andhi tii, ki ndw lakron men. chhip jali tbi ; par wuli aola thd.

25 Tab us ke ahdgirdon ne pds dke me jagdyA, aur kalid, Ai Kbuddwaml, bKDHg bacii, ki bftm balak hote hain.

12

IX. Ek majltij ho changd k triui.

2fi Us ne unheii kaha, Ai kain- 'iatkpido, kyuii dane ho? Tab us ne uthke bawd aur daryd ko diilita, to bard niwd ho gtivd. *

27 Aur log Ci'ajjub l;arkc kalmo h- ge, ki Yih kis tarah ka admi hai, lu hawd aur darya bhi us ki mdnte hain !

28 f Jab us pdr Gargasimm ke mulk men pahuncEa, do shakhs, jin par deo cbarhc the, qabron soiiikalkur use mile; we aiso tutid the, ki koi us rAste se chal na sakfll thd.

29 Aur, dekho, unlioii ne eh il la k e kahd, Ai liati.', KhudA ke Bete, liamen tujh se kyd kdm ? td yahdn Ayd, ki waqt se pahle hamen dukh do ?

30 Aur un se kuclih dur bahut sii- UOQ kii gol chai'ti tha,

31 So deVm ne us ki minuat karko kahd, Agar tu bani ko uikaltd hai, to bameg un wdaron ke gol men janc do.

32 Tab us nc unlion kahd, Jao. Aur we nikalke un siiarua ke gol men gaye ; aur, dekho, suaron kd sdrd gol kardro parsa darya iuce kudd, aur pdni nii'TJ'dub mari.

Tab cliardnewale bbige, aur ihabl men jakar sah^inajard, aur un kd ahwaljin pardeoculirhe tin1, bftyio kiyi.

34 Aur, dckbo, adri sbahr Yisti' ki mulaiidt ko nikla, aur use dekbke us ki iuiuuat ki, ki un ki aarhaddon .se bdhar jdwe.

IX BAU

P HIU ndw pir charhkc pdr utra, aur apno abahr men dyd.

2 Aur, dekho, ek jhole ke mare ko, jo chdrpdi ]>ar pard thd, us pds lae. Yisii' ne unk:L iuniii di'lih ke us jhole ke mare se kaha, Ai bete, khatir jam'a rakh ; tere guiidh mu'di" bue.

3 Aur, dekku, ba'zc hafhog ue apnc ■lil men kalid, ki Yih kutt 1'akj.d hai.

4 Yisu' ne uu ke khi\;:

karke kahd, Tum kyr.n apne dilon men bml-gmiidni karto ho?

ShdgirJon ha roza MATI

5 KyA kahmi asan hai, yih.kiTere gutiah mu'Af hue, yA yih, ki Uth, at ehal ?

C Lokin ta ki tum jdno, ki Ibn A 'dam ko zamiii par gunAh inu'At' kanie kA ikhtiyar hai, ua no us jhola ke maro se kahA, Uth, apnl charpai utlid le, aur apne ghar chalA ji.

7 Wuh uthkar apne ghar chala gaya.

H Tab logon ne yih dukhkar ta'ajjub kiya, aur KhudA ki ta'rif kanie ki a;ni uudrat insan, ko bakhahi.

t( \ Phir jab Yimi1 wakAn se Ago barbi, to Mati name ek shakhs ko Dtttbtdl ki chauki par baithu dekha, aur usb kahA, More pichhe' a. Wuh uthko us ku picbhe chalA.

10 *$ Aur yiin huA, ki jab YimV ghar men khane baithA, dekho, babut su niabsul lenowdly aur guiiabgar akc us ko nur us ke shagirdon ko aath kbane baithe.

11 JabFarision ne yih dekhA, uske ■htebdon ae kaha, Turohara ustAd mahsnl-lonowalon aur gunahganm ke satb kyiin kbata~haiy

L2 Yisu' ne yih sunkar unhen kahA, Bhale diangon ku hakim darkiir naiiiij, baiki bimAron ko.

13 Par tum jake ua ko ma'ne dar- yai't karo, ki Main qurbanl ko nahin, baiki rahm ko chahti hiin; kytinki niaiii lirtbfaofl. konahiri, baiki gunah- akm& ko tauba ke liye'bulAne ko aya I mu.

14 % Ua wAqt YtihannA ke sha- girdon ne ua pas aku kaha, ki Ham aur Paria! kyrin aksar roea rakhtu hain: par tera shagird roza nahin rakhtc ?

15 Yisu' ue unhen kahA, Kyaharati, jab tak dullul tm ko satb hai", udis ho aakte hain? lokin we din Awenge, ki dulki un so juda kiya jiegA; "tab we roza rakbcnge.

16 Koi purAni qabi par Xore kapre ki paiwand nahin la'gata, kyunki wuh

IX. na rakhna.

paiwand qabi se kuchh khainch luta hai, aur us ka cbir barli jitA,

17 Aur nayi mai purani masbkon men nahin bharte : nahin to mashkeu pliut jatin, aur mai bah jiti, aur mash- keg khar&b ho jitin ; baiki nayi mai nayi maskkou mon bharte hain, to donon bachi rahtl hain. .

IH \ Jab wuh yih bAten un ne kab mha tha, dekbo,ek sardar ne akar use sijda kiya, aur kalia, Mori bcti ab tamani bui, par tu ehal, aur apnd hath uh par rakh, ki wuh ji Hfliegi

10 Tab Yisu' utbke apuo shilgirdun ke sath us ke picbho chala.

20 \ Aur, dekho, ek 'aurat nc, lla k;i barah baras se lahii jari thA, us ke piohhe ake us ko kurte kA daniati eh hua.

21 Wuh apne ji men kahtl thl, Agar main sirf us kA kurtA cUtnuingi, bhali changi ho jaiin^i,

22 Tab Yisu' ne picbhe pbirke use dekhA, aur kaha, Ai beti, kbdtir jam'a rakh, ki tere imiln no tujlie «lianga kiya. Pas, wuh 'aurat nsi ghari h changi ho gayi.

23 Aur jab Yisii' ua sardir ko ghu pahuneha, aur us ne bAnsli bajdue- walon aur jami'at ko gul macbAte duk ha,

24 To unhen kahA, Kan&ro ho. ki larki mari nahin, baiki got! I

us par hanae.

25 Jab we log bAhar nikAlit gaye, us ne andar jAke us kA hath pukra, aur wuh larki uthi.

26 Tab uh ki shidjrat us tamAm niulk mcn phailt.

27 D Aur^ab Yiad' wahan so ra- wAna huA, do andhe ufl ke pichhc pukarte Ae, ki Ai Ibn i Ddiid, ham par rahm kar.

2U Aur jab wuh ghar men pahun- chA, we audhe us pas Ae: Yisu' no unhen kahA, KyA tumben i'atinad hai, ki roargyib karsaktAhiinV "Webole. HAn, ai KhudAwand.

Do andhon ko dnkk den A.

MATI', S. Samifon ko kain par bfajna.

2u Tab us ne un ki inkhon ko chhuki> ktthA, ki Jaisi tumhiri j atiqid hai,*waisA tumbire liye ho.

30 Aur uu ki Aukbun khul inviii ; MH Itetf ne unhen tikkl karke kuini, Khnbardar, koi na jam1.

31 Par unhog no jakc mulk tnog uh ki shuirat kf.

32 •( Jis waqt wo biliar nikle, dc- Mw^legdcg^aa ko jU pardeo charhi thd, us pis lioT

33 Aur jtib dco nikala gayA, wub giinga bola. Aur logon ue ta'ajjub karke kahi, Aisi kabhi U>a«l nu-n a» dekhi tbi

34 Par Farision no kahi, ki Wul dcoi) ke siiriliir ki mailad se dt'ori ko nibalta hai.

30" Aur Yisd' un sah shahron. aur bastioy men jiko un ke 'ibadatkhiaon men ta'lfm deta, aur badhhabat ki khushkhahari ki mariadi, aur tafog ki hai ok bluiArf aur dukh dani «iur karta UiA.

36 % Aur jab us ne jami'aton ko dekili, us ko un par rahm ayi ; kyunki to, un bheron ki miliiud, jin ki charwAhA na do, 'ajis aur paresiiAu tiiin.

37 Tnb us ne apno shiginkm se kalut, ki Pakko khut tu bahut bain, par nuuulnr thote ;

38 Is liye tum khet ke milik ki minnat karo, ki wuh apne khet kitne ke liye mazduron ko bhej dewa.

X BATJ.

PHI1I us ne apno birah shigirdon ko pda bulike unheo qudrat bakhshi, ki ndpik niliori ko nikilen, aur Uar tarah ki biiuiri aurdukh dard. ko dur karet).

2 Aur birah rasulon ke yo nim hain ; Pahla, BbauiiTuD, jo Patrus kah- lilA, aur us ki bhAS AndryAB ; Zabadi ki beta Ya'qdbi aiir m ^A bnii YuhanuA ;

3 Fail Ini* aur IWthulftiiia ; Thuma,

J4

aur mahMl-lenewila Mati ; Haiti ka btita Ya'qiib,aur Labbi, jo Thaddi bhi kaiilitA ;

4 Sbamn'un Kaniiri, aur YabudAli Is^anyiki, jia «e use pakajwi bhi diya. tamani I 5 Un birahori ko Yisu* no farniake bbef», ki GattipHimoij ki t;iraf «ajaiii, aiu- Simarion ke kini sliahr inen dakhil n a boni :

G Baiki pahle Ieriol ke ghar ki kboi hiii bheron ke pas jio. "^7 A"ur cbaite hiio manili karo, aur kabo, ki A'smau ki hAdahihat aa»dik

8 Bimiron ko chau^i karo, korbion ko pdk sif biro, murdou ko jilio, deog ko nikilo • tOBB no nu4't ])iyi,"rnuft dn.

9 Na soni, na rilpi, DA tiuibi apni kajiiar men rnkho.

10 Rasto ke liye na jholi, na do kurto, na jiitian, na lithi lo; kyiinki kburik mawUir ki baM hai.

U Aur jia shalir yi baati men di- kliil ho, diiryalt klM ki liiiq waban liaiin hai, aur jab tak walii'm m m niklo, wahin raho.

12 Auriab tutu kiai gbar men jio, uae aalim karo.

13 Agar wuh ghar Jiiq hai, to tum- biri salim use pahunebega ; aur aj^ar Iiiq nahiii, tu turohiri salim tutu par pbir iwegi.

14 Aur jo koi tumben qabril na kare, aur tumbari batoii oa «une, us ghar ya ua ahahr se nikalke apno pinwon kf gard jbir do.

16 Main tifTh ee sach kahia hritj, ki Adihit ka din tSadfim aur 'Amurah ki zamin ke liye us sha'nr ki nistat ziyada asini bogi.

16 K Dtkho, main tumhcg bberon ki minind bbcriyou ke hich men bbejti bun ; [«3 tum «Anirioti ki Urnh hoahyir, aur kabutarou ki miniud be-bad ho.

17 Magaridmtonsckliabnr'l.'ir PallO, ki we tumben apni kauhahriuu inun

Un, Aojtt'dnu, ki tum MATI'

bawal» luHmuB. aur apne 'ibddatkhin- uQ men koro mirotige;

18 Aififi tum mere wiste hikimon

aur bidahihon ke simbne hd/.ir kiyc jioge, ki un par aur guir-qau.niuo par gftw&hi ho.

19 Lekin jab wo tumben hawiln liurpij, tikr na karo, ki haru kis tarah, yd kyi kahenge; kyunki jo kuchh tumhen kabne boga, so uai gkari tum- ben uh ki igihi hogi.

20 KyuijkfTiahiiewAle tum nahin, baiki tumbire Bip ki Ruh jo tum men bolti hai.

21 Bhii bbii ko, aur Mp bete ko, qatl ke liye bawAla karegd, aur larke apne mi bip ki mtikbahlat men uth- eijge, aur unhen luarwaaiUenga.

22 Aur mere nim ko bi'is sah tum so dushmani karenge ; par wuh jo akhir tak bardisht karogd, so hi najit piwegi,

23 Jab we tumben ck shahr men Hfitaweu, to ddsre m e n bhag jao : tum se sach kahtd hfijj, ki Tum Israel ke Bab shabrurt saja na. phir chukoge, jab tak ki Ibn i A'dam na a h.

24 SihAgird apne ustad se bari na- hin, na naukar apne khiwind ae.

25 Has hai ki shagird a.pnc ustad ki> aur naukur apne khdwiud ki ini- nind bo. Jab unhoy ne ghar ke milik ko B»'al-xabul kahd hai, tc kitni r.iyida us ko logorj ko na ka> henge ?

2G Pas un so na daro ; kyiinki kol rim dhnmpi nahin, jo khul na jas, aur na chbipi, jo jAni na jdo.

27 Jo kuchh main tumben andhere nien kabtd hdn, ujalc men kah< j" Jiui'iiii tumhare "kdnon men kahd i;i<\ kothon par n ia nadi karo.

28 Aur un ne, jo badan ko qatl karte, par jin ko qatl nahin kar saktc, mal daro; baiki usise daro, jo jin aur badan, donon ko, jahannara men haldk kar sakti hai.

29 Kyi ek p&iee ko do gaurc nahin

15

X. Injil ke ba'is xat&cj'doge.

ia? aur un men se, ck bbi, tum- bdre BAp ki be marzi, zainin par na- hin girti.

30 Baiki tumlutnj air. ke hal bUi Utfc ginc hue hain.

31 Pas matdaro, tum bahut gaurorj bihtar ho.

32 Ia liye jo koi ddminrj ke Age mord icjrdr karegi, main bhi apne Bap ke dge, jo dsman par hai, us ki iqrdr kaninga.

33 Parjokoiddmion keigcmeriiu- kir kaiegi, main bW apni; Bip ke ige, jo damiu par hai, us ki inkir kiin'med.

34 Yih mat samjhn, ki main zamiu par silih karwine dyi ; sulh karwdno nabin,' baiki tatwdr clialine ko'dyd Ulin.

35 Kyunki main ayd hfin, ki mord ko us ke bip, aur beti ko ua ki mi, nur babu ko us ki ais so judi karun.

36 Aur idmi ke dushman us ko ghar hi ko log honge.

37 Jo kol bip yi mi ko mtijh H Eiyida chilitd hai, mrrc laiq nabin hai ; aur jo kol boti yi beti ko nuijli se Kiyida piydr kartd, mero h'uq naliiu hai.

38 Aur jo koi apni salib uthiko mere pichhe nahfn dti, mere ldiq na- hin hai.

39 Jo koi apni jin bjichiti hai, use khocgi j par jo koi mere wdste apni jin khoegi, ubo piegi.

40 t Jo tumten" qabdl karti, nm- jhe qabul karti hai ; aur jo mujlie qa- bi'il karti hai, use, jis no mujlie bhejd, (jahili karti hai.

41 Jo koi nabi ke nam se nabi ko «jabiil karti hai, nabi kiajtpiegi-, aur jo rastbiz ke nim se idstbdz ko qabul karti, raatbdz ki ajr pdcgi,

42 Aur jo koi ic chhoton raon se ek ko, ahigirdke tidm se, Impit ek piynki t ha tuli pini pilacgi, main tum so B*ch tahta1 hiin, ki wuh apni badld ba piu na rahegi,

Tab Yfihanna ne qaidkbine men Masih ke kimon ka hal aunkar apne

MATI', XI. gtidr otir darja.

XI BA'B. I 13 Kyiinki sab nabi mtt tmiretue

l UR aisa hiia, ki jab Tisu' apne lYiihanna ke waqt tak agc ki khabar ' di.

14 Aur Jliyas jo itnewtUa tha, yihi hai ; chaho, to qabiil karo.

15 Jia kisi ke kau sunne ke hon,

BtlOO.

1G ^ Lekin i» zaman« ke logon kn main kia «e tamsil drin? Wfl uiflar- kon ki manind hain, j» ba/aron meg baithke apne yaron k» pukarke kahte hain, ki

17 Hara ne tuniharo waste bdnsli bajai, pnr tum na nache ; ham no tumhare liye malam, kiya, p«y ftl» i.v chhati na piti.

18 Kyunki Yiihanna kbatapita na- bin aya, aur we kahfcj bain, ki TJs par t'k deo liai.

19 Ibn i A'dam kh&ta pita aya, aur we kahte hain, ki Dekho, ek khaii, aur shar&bi, aur uialisiil lenewalnn aur gunah<;riron ka yar. Par hikmat apiie far/andog kY age ras t thahri,

20 f Tab un Bhahron ko, jin men uh ke bahut se mu'ajiza zahir huo, malamat karne hai, kyunki unhon ne (aura na ki tbi : ki

21 Ai Kurawa, tujh jmr afsoa! ai Bait-Saida, tujh par afsos I kyunki yih mnajize Jo tum uicn dikhae gaye, agar Siir o Saidd dmq dikbiie jiitr?, lo we tiit orhkc, aur k hak men buithkc, kali Ee tanba kar diukir.

22 Pas main tum se kahta hi'in, ki Siir o Saida ka liye 'adalat ko di u tum

ziyada asini hogi.

23 Aur, ai Knfarnahnra, jo asman tak palvunciiaya gaya, tii dozakh itioij giraya jacga : kyiinki yih mu'ajize jo tujh ucn dikhae gaye, agar Sadiim men dikhae jate, to aj tak qdjm rnhta.

*i4 Par main tum 3c kalita bun, ki 'Adalat ke din Sadrim ke umlk par tujh h sdyada a«ani hogi.

25 T Usi waqt Tisu* phir kahuo laga, ki, Ai bap, asniiin aur /amin ku Kliuiiawaud, main, teri ta'rif karta

bara.ii sbagirdon ko bukm de (j)iuka, to wahai) so rawana htia, ki uo ko Ehahrou men ta'lirn aur roaua&i kare. _

na ne qr j ka hal pliagirdon inci] se do ko bheja, aur se puchhwaya, k i

'A Kya, jo artewala tha, tii hi hai, ya bani dusre ki rdli takeu ?

4 YisiV ne jawas meh unhen kahi, ki Jo kucbh tum sunteaurdcklitc lio, jake Yiihanna so baydn karo; ki

5 Andhe dekbte, nur langre cbnlte, korlii pak aaf hote, ftur bahre uunte, aur murde ji utbte hain, aur garibon ko kbush-khabari sunai jati bai.

0 Aur mubarak wub hai, jo mere sabab thokar.ua khde.

7 1T Jib we rawana buc, Yiad" Yii- bauna ki bibat janja'atoD ho kahne lagi, ki Tum jangal nien kya dekbne ko gaye ? Kya, ek sark;inda, jo bawa se bilta hai ?

S Phir tum kya dckhne ko gaye ? Kya, ek mard ko, jo ruihin knpj-a i>a- hine hai V dekho, jo mih'm jwsliak pabinte badshihoQ ke muhallon nu'n

9 Phir tum kyd dekbne ko gaye? Kya, ek nabi? han, main tum se kahta hdn, baiki nabi se bara.

10 Kyiinki yih wuh hai, ji* ki ba- bat likha hai, ki, Dekbo, main upna.

■ :igo bliujta hiin, jo tere ige teri rah durust karegi.

11 Main tum Be sach kahta hiin, ki Un men se jo "auraton so jiaida hie, Yuhanna bapMama-deoeww* »o koi bani zahir naluri bui ; k-kin jo asman ki bailshahat men ebbotd hai, so us se bara hai.

12 Y(ihauna baptisma-denewile ko waqt Ne ab tak asman ki b&dsbahat par /.abardasti hoti hai, aur zabardaet lug use (.'l i liin lete hain.

m

A'rdm.jo W Musik m kata. MATI', XII. Farisian Jei zid-l H babat.

In'ui, ki tii ne in cbi/.on ko ddiiAon aur 'anjuianduii so ehhipaya, aur b par khol diva.

2<i IIAn, ai Bap, ki yunhin tujhc pasam.i a ya.

27 Hero Bap «o Bab kuchh mujko

Zpa gaya, aur koi Bete ko nabin a, niagar Uap; aur koi Bap ku n&hlrj janta, magai Beta, aur wuh, jis par lletd tiso z&hir kiya chdhta.

28 ^f Ai tum los", j" thake aur bara bojh Be dabe ho, sab mere pas do ; ki main tutimetj ariim diinga.

29 Mera jv.a apoe lipar le lo, aur mujh ao aikho ; kyiinki main halim, aur ilil sc khaksdr lifin; to timi apue jion men araiTT paoge.

80 Kyiinki men jua inulaim, aur merd bojh halkd hai.

XII BA'B.

U S waqt Yisii" nbt ke din khetnn nun ee jala iba, aur ns ke abigird bhiikhe tlie, aur we balen tor tor kliane lage.

2 Tab Fariaion ne dekhke us se kahd, Dckli, u.Tu sbdgird wuh k Ain karte bain, jo sabt ke din kami rawi nabin.

3 l'ar ua ne uiibcn kahA, Kyi tum ne nabin pftTbjf fo Daml ne kiyii, jali wuh aur us ke sathi bhuklic thc?

4 Wub kyiinkar Khuda ku ghar men. gaya, aur nazr ki rotian khaiu, jo us ko aur us ko sdthion ko khdnd rawa na tba, magar fsujat kuhinon ko rawa tba?

5 Aur kyd rum ne tauret men na- ':in parha, ki kahin sabt ke din baikal

- ki hurmat nabin karWj tau l:u «B-gunah haTn?

6 Aur main tumben kahtA hfin, ki Yulian ek shakhs hal, jo baikal se bM boznrg bai.

7 l'ar agar twn us ki ma'ni jante, ki Main <]iirbani ko n:ihin, baiki rahm ko chahtd hiin, to tum bo-gunihuu ko gunahgdr na thahrAte.

17

8 Kyiinki Ibu i A'dam sabt ka bbi Khudawand hai.

!! l'bir walnln .se niwatia boke un ke 'ilj:iil:itkhaua men gaya:

10 ^ Aur,dokho, wahan ek ahakhs thd, jis ka InUh ciikh gayd thd. Tab union uv, is irade se ki ua par n aliah karen, us se piichha, ki Kyi sabTke din enangi karud rawa hai?

11 Us ne unben kahA, ki Tum men. se aisd kaun hai, ki jis ke pas ek bher ho, agar wuh sabt ke din garhc mej gire, wuh use pakar ke na nikale ?

12 Tas adui! btier se kitnd bibtar hai? Ia liye sabt ke diu nekf karnl rawA bai.

13 Tab ua ne ua uhakhs ko kahd, ki Apiia hath lambi kar. Aur us ne use liunba kiya, aur wuh duere ki mdnind "dbanga ho gaya.

14 *[ Tab Farision ne bdhar jdkc ua ki zidd par saldh ki, ki use kyiin- kar riiiir dalen.

15 Yisii' yib jdnke wabdn se chala ; aur babat si jamd'aten ua ke pichhe ho lin,auruanc un aabkodiangakiyd;

IB Aur unben Ukld ki, ki raujho /ahir na karna:

17 TS ki wuh, jo Yas'aiydh nabi ne kabd thd, piird ho, ki

18 Deklio meni khadim, jise main ne cluina, aur mera piyarii, jia so merd dil kbusb bai, main apni nih us par daliiuga,aur wub gair-qaumon ae ahai'a liayan karegd. *

l'J Wub jliagrd aur ahur na karegd, aur baziirofl meg koi us ki Awdz na BunegA,

20 Wub masle biie aarkando kt> na toregri, aur dhduwdn uthtc hue aan ko na bujlidwoga, jab tak insaf ko gdlib n a kardwe.

21 Aur us ke ndm par gair-qaumcn asri mkhengi.

22 t Tab us pda ek nndho gungo ko,jia pai deo cbai-hd thd, !Ae, aur ru m uw ohangA kly'd; chutianobi wuh andhii giiugi duklmu boiue laga»

B

Ek andha gunge ko MATI'

23 Aur sAri Vihir dftBg lio gayi, aur

kahne lagi, Kyi y ih Diud ki beti

•J-l I'nr Pnrision ne aunke kahi, ki Yih deog ku naluri nikahi, inagar dtsin ku sarilar lia'al-y.abiil ki raadud

25 Yisti' no un ke khtyalon ko darvift karke onheg kahi, Jo jo bad- ahahat ipas men lurkbilaf ho, wiran hojiili; aurjia Jis ahahr ya gliar lucu inukhalafat ho, ;iMd na i : ■- 1 ■

26 Aur agar Shnitin Hhaitan ko nikalo, Lu wuh atmi hi mukliiilif hila ; jiliir lis ki badshahat kvi'mkar aiim rahegi?

27 Aur agar main Ba'al-zabul ki madad ne d«>n ko nikalti lilin, lo tuni- hire befi uulieii kis ki madad m rnkiltt: linin? is liye m bi tumhdri 'adalat karegge.

28 PM ftgftr main Khudiki Riih se dpon ko nikalti hiin, to a 1 hatta Khudi ki had,-h:ihat timi pi» a pahuncM.

29 Mahin to, kyimkur ho sakti lifti, ki kof kiai -iorawar ke ghar men jakar u» ke asbab hit lo, inagar yili, ki pahle ns aorfwai kubainllie? tabus k&ghar ldte.

30 Jo more sith nahin, meTa mu- klnilil' Jiai ; aur jo men sith jaui'a nabiij kana, l>itbrari hai.

81 T Ia liyo main tum so kahti lilin, ki Logon ki liur tarah ka gumih aur ku IV inn';if kiya jicgi; magar wuh ku&, jo Hiih ke hau^ men ho» legen ko uiu'af na hogi.

32 Jo ko! Ibu i A'dam ko haqq men buri kahe, use mu'if ho eakuga ; par jo ttuh i Quds ke haoo men buni kaho, use hargiz u m' A i' na hogi, na ia j a hiu muTj, na us jahdn men.

33 Ya to diirakht ko achchhi kalm, aur us ke phal ko achchhi, ya darakht ko bura kaho, aur us ka phal buri ; kyuiiki darakht phal hi so pabchaiii jati hai.

34 Ai sampon ke bachcho, tum bure

13

SIT. chaiiyd ftanuS,

jhoie kyiinkar achchhi bit kali sak t e ho? kytinkijo dil men bhara hai; M bi mirah par iti hai.

35 Achchhi fidiui dil ke acliclihe khazane «n achchhi chizeg nikalti hai, aur buri idmi huro khazane Rfl buri ohkes bahu liti.

S Par main tum ae kali ti hiin, ki Uar ■:]; l»*]n'k'.a lnit, jo ki Ji.^ kulifij, 'ailalat ko din uh kii hiwil.t den-.'.

37 Kytinki ttt apnloiton hi so riet- kir elui jaoga, aur npui baton hi so f;iuia]i;;!ir tlialnoga.

1f 1'ab ba'ze faq(hon aur I'au- stog oekwib mq kahi, ki Ai i i d, ham tujh su ek niehiu dekha chibta hain.

3'J TJa no unhea jawib diyi, ki Ia zaniano ke bad aur harAmkar log nislian dhunijjitc hain; pu Yrtuaa nabi ko nishiu ke niwi, koi nishin nuhen dikh- iyi ua jaogi.

•tO Kyunki jaisa Yijnas tin rit diu machlili ko pet men raba, waisa hi Ibu i A 'dam tio rat diu zjutiiu ke andar rahegi.

41 Ninawah ke log ia zamane ke logoii ke sath 'adalat ko diu afhenge, aur unhDn gunahgar thahraengu; ky- iiuki unhon ueYunas ki raauadi par tauba ki, aur, dekho, yauiii ek hai jo Yunaa se bu/urg hai.

42 Dnkhin ki begam is itamine ko logon ke satli 'adalat ko din uthagi, aur unhen gunahgir thahriegi : kyim- ki wuh zamki ko kariare sc Sulaiman ki hikmat sunno ko ai; aur, dok ho, yahan ek Sulaiman so buzurg hai.

43 Jab nii(i:ik riih adud se bahar nikalti, to siikhi jagahofi inen i ram dhundhti phirti, aur jab nahin pati, to ktilili.'ki

4 1 Main apne ghar men, jis w nikli hurj, phir jiungi; aur ako use khali aur jhaii aur lais pati hai.

46 «b wuh jakc aur ait rthon, jo

t«I hain, apne a&th lAi i ; aut

wedakhil hoke waiiin baslihain; so

Bonewdlc aur U} MATI'

us Admi ka piehhlA lidi n?le se buni hota hai. [i zamana ke logofl U hai blii aisa bt hogA.

46 f Jab wuli jnmfi'aton se vih kah viiha lini, dekho, us ki roJ aur ua ki lihai bahar khare ua se bit ki ya ehAhte llic.

47 Tab kiwi no us se knhi, ki lVkh, teri ma aur tere l)hai bahar klmre bujb s(r hat k iya. chahte hain.

4ri Par us iie jawab men khabar- deuewilou .se kaba, Kaus hai meri mi ? aur kaun hain mere bhat ?

40 Aur KpnA bal h apne ahagiruorj ki taraf barbake kuha, ki Dokh meri ma aur mere bhiU

50 Kyuiiki jo kd mera Mp ki, jo bunian par hai, raarzi par eh:i!ia b:ii. mcrf bbai, aur baliin, aur mi, woilii hai.

XIII TiA'It.

U SI' roz Yisii' ghar s<> nikalke ikirvri ke kanaru jii, baithi.

2 Aur aisi bari bhir us pas jam'a bui, ki wuh ek nuw par charh baithi, aur sari bhir kanAro par kuari rabi.

3 Aur wub unhas babat ai laten tamsilon men kahne laga, ki Uokho, ek kisau bij bom* gaya;

4 Aur bote waqt kuobh rah ke ka- il Aro giri, aur chiriyon ne akar use ehug UyA :

5 Aur kucbh patthrili Kamin par girajahan bahut mitti na mili : aur is eabab ki bahut mitti na pai, jald uga :

li Par jab dhupiuii, jalgaya; aur i s liy<' ki jar ua pakri thi, stikh gaya.

7 Aur kucbh kaiitou men giri; kantin ne barhke use daba liya.

8 Aur kuchh achchbi zamin men giri, aur pbal lava, kuchb sau guna, kuchh Bit.li guuA, kuchh tis gunA.

0 Jia ke kati surme ke liyo hon, to

10 Tab shaginlon na pas Ake ua kahA, Tii uu se tamsilon men kyi'm kalam harta1 hai f

11 Us no jawAb men unben kahA,

19

XIII. UtamtH

ki Tumben 'iuAyat bni, ki asmin ki badshahat ke bhed jAnu, par uuhen 'iniyat nahin lnii.

12 Kyiiuki jia pAa kuchb hai, use diva jiega, tui tu ki bahut bariui bogf ; pai jis pas kuobh nahin, us se, jo kuchb ki ua pAs hai, 80 blii le liya jaegA.

13 Ib liye main un se tamsilon men bit karta hun: ki wu dfikbta h m- na- hin (iekhte, aur ;;uiue hiie nahin sunte, aur nabiij samjylit.c hain,

14 Aur un k* haqq men Taa'aiyAb

kS nubuwat puri hui: ki Tum kAuon ae to sunoge, masar Bamjbogc rtaliin, aur Ankbon so dekhoge, par daCTift na karogH : " z*

15 Kyunki is qaurn kA dil mota hua, aur we apua kiimin U linciiA sunte bain.aur unhun ne aani ankhcy mu&d lin, t-A aisA na bo, ki we Ankhog se dL'klu'ii, aur kAuon so aunen, aur dil so samjhen, aur ruju' laweti, aur main iiii]m-;j Changi karun.

lfj Par mubarak tumliAri AukliPn, kyiinki we dekbtin, aur mubarak tum* hiro kan, ki we suute hain,

17 Kyiinki main tum se saoh kabta hun, ki Bahut «i nabi aur riatbAzon no Arzii ki, ki Jo tum dflkbte bo dekhen, pai na dekhA, aur jo tum sunte ho sunen, par na aund.

Iti *i Abtuni lusin ki tamafl rona.

19 Jab koi us bAdshibat ki bit suni:l-, aur nahin Rauiajhta, to wub sharir Ata, aur jo kuchh u» ke dil men boyA gayA le jdti hai; yih wuli hai, jo rah ke kanAro l«>yA gayA.

20 Jo patthrili Kamin men boy4 gaya, wub hai, jo kulim suutA, aur jald khushi B0 inAn kita hai ;

21* Lekin is sakab ki jar nahin pakri, Cba&&-f0ca hai : ki jab wuli

kalam ke Babab musibat mag partai,

ya satayi jati hai, to jald tlmkar kbitA hai,

^2 Jo kantan men boyA gayA, wub hai, jo kalam ko suutA, par is dunyi

Jtij lonewalc ki ««r MATI', XIII. talkh ddnon H tamsilev.

'M Yih sab Iidten Yisii' ne un ja- md'aton ko tamstlon nien kabin : bot

ki (ikr, aur daulat kd farcb, kaldm ko dahd diatfl, aur wuh bc-plia! hoti bal

23 Pfte jo ocliclihi /.amin men boyd gaya, wuh hai, Jo kalam ko mati, aur Sftmajota, aur phal laba, aur taiydr bhi botd, ba'ze men Bau guna, baf s;ifli gund, liaV.i.! men i.is guna.

24 1[ Phir ua iic. i-k aur lamsU lako unhen kahd, ki A'smdn ki badshdhat ua admi ki mdnitnl hai, jis Ba ackchhd bij apne khet men boyd.

35 Var jab log ho gaye, us kd duah- nm» ayd, aur ua ke gfth&S k» dai- miydn karwa dana boke chald guyd.

26 Jiswaq) aukurd nikla, aur hdlon lagin, tab kans-a dana blii {tabir hiia.

27 Tab us gharwdle ke naukaron ne dke ua ae kahd, Ai adhib, kyii tii ae khet men achchhe bij na Ixio the? phir karwe ddna kalian ae Ae ?

28 lfs ne unheii kahd, Kisil dush- man ne yiii kiya. Tab naukftKfl ne kahd, Agar marzi bt>, to bara jako un- hen jaru'a karon.

2i> Us iit! kahd, Nabin ; aiad na ho, ki J(ib tum karwe dantm ko jaui'a karo, w u» ku adili gelmu bhi ukbdr lo.

30 Kdrne ke din tak donoii ko ikatthe barhne do; ki main katne k.; WKjt kar.newdlnn ko kuhi'njgd, ki Pahlekarwedanejanvn karo, aur jaJAne ke mSate un ke gatthe bfedfao; par geiiiin mere khatte mea ja.m'a karo.

SI 1 W uh un ke wanLo ek aur tamsil htjTJ, ki A'smdn ki badskdbat khanial ke dana ki mdniud hai,Jlse ek abakhs nalekeaute khet moa boyi.

32 Wuh sab bljfifj mrri cnnofA; BU Jab uga, 1« *ab tarkdrion st: baya

■■r niwi per hobi, ki cblliyierj : iialion par bascra kartiri.

33 ^ Us ne un k« ek aur tamsil kahi, ki A'smdii ki ba.lshahat khamir Iri minind hai, jise "'k 'aurat ne le-kar ate ke tin jiaimanon mcn niildyi, yahda tak ki wuh sab kaamlra lio

g«yd-

Lie tamsil un se na boltd tbd:

35 Td ki jo nabi ne kah.4 tbti, pura ho, ki Maiii tainsili'Tj lakar kulim kan'ing.i; main un bdton ko, jo dunyd ke ehurii' se ]K>nhida hain, zabir kar- v.ij. i'i.

36 Tab l'iau' un jama'aton ko rukhsat karkc ghar ko gaya ; aur ua ke ibagirdog Dfl m pu tik kalia, Kbi't ke karwe ddna ki tamail bameg Uita.

37 Us ne unhen jawdb men kahd, Achchlie hij kd bunewdla lbn i A'dara hai ;

38 Khct, dunvd bnd; aclnihlic liij, is badsbaliat ke larke hain ; aur karwo dana, sharir ke larzand ;

39 W u h diiMhuiau, jis nc unberj boyd, Bhaitaii hai ; kdtno kd wagt, is dunyd ka dkliir ; aur katuuwdle, tirisbte hain.

40 l'aa jis tarah karwe dana jam'a kiye jdte, aur ag raeij jaldo jate kain, is jahdn ke dkbir raefl ai.~;i, lu hogd,

41 Ibu i A'dam a|>ne firialitori ko bbejegd, aur we sab thuUar-khilaiK- wdli cbJzon, aur badkdrojj ko, us kl bad*hahat moti so chunkar,

42 Unheti ja)U' lauiirnicuddldengoj aur wahan rond aur diiitt jtisni lu iga.

43 Tab" riWbaz ajjiie Uap ki b.id- shahat men dftdh ki niiinind mirani bogge. Ji;o kau Btuvuo ke liye ton,

-14 % Phir, asnidrj ki bddsbdhnt us khazdne ki mdnind hai, jo khet niea gord hai, jiae ok shakha pdke chbipi deii hai, aur khush\ ke min Jdko apnd aab kuchh becbtd, aur ua khei ko mul letd hai.

45 1 Phir, taman kf bddshAhftt us sauddgar ki mduind hai, jo qimali moticn ki taldah men hai.

4G Jab us u ek beBh-tjiattt moti pAyi, to jdkejo kucfab »s kd thd sab bech ddldj aur uso mol liya.

MaehJdt kej'dl ki tamsil.

MATI', XIV. Y>A'-inii<>. ke gir kii h'ita ja-na.

47 t Phir, aamaii ki badahdliat as jal ki maiiiiid hai, 30 daryd meg dahi gaya, aur har tarah ki macbhli samet lava.

18 Jab wuh bhar gayd, OM kanare khaiiioh Ide, aur baithko achchbi lnaehhlian bu n anuti men jani'a kin, par buri pheuk «13.

49 lu jakdn ke dkhir men aiaa hf hogd ; firisliu; awerjge, aur rastbazorj meu su shariron ku alag karegge,

50 Aur utiheii jalte tauiir uuen dai dcnge; walidu roua aur daut piara bogd.

51 Yisii* no unhen kahd, Tum yih eab BauijheV Unboii ne kaha, Han, Klimiawand.

L>li Tab us ne unhen kaha, Itar ek fiicjili jo asinan ki badtduUiat ki ta'liiu pa cbuka, us gharwale ki nuiiiiud hai, jo apuo kliazanc se uayi aur purani chfsei] (likiilta bal

53 T Aur aisa hud, ki jab Yisft' yili tamsitOB kali chuka, to wahin se rawana h i'. a.

54 Aur apue watan men ake us ne un ke 'ibadatkhana men unhen ai.-u la'lin; di ki ive kairan hue, aur kahue laga, ki Aisi hikmat, aur nm'ajize, U3 m: kalian so \&e'(

00 Kya yiii barhai ka beta nahirj ? aur us ki uni. Manyam nuhin kaulari? aur u» ke bluii Ya'ipib, aur Yosea, aur Shama'tin, aur Yahud&h ?

5G Aur ua ki aab bahinon hamare sdth nahin hain.? Pas ua ue yih Bab kuelui kalian, se paya?

67 Unhon ne us so thokar khdi ; par Siali' ue unhen kaha, ki Nnbi apuo watan aur g liar ke siwd, kabin be-'izzat nahin hal

06 Aur us ne un ki be-ia'thpidi ke sabab wahan bahut uiu'ajize nalu'11 dik liat'.

XIV BA'B.

U B waqt milik ki chauthai ke lidkiin Herodis ne Yiad' ki sbuhrat suni, 21

- Aur apoe naukarou se kaha, ki Yih Yuhaniia bnntisina-donewdla hai , wuhi ruui-don men. »0 ji utiiahai; ia liye ua ae iiiu'aji/.<: zahir hote hain.

■'i % Ki Herudis ue Ytibaiiua ko Herodiyds ko aabab, jj us ke bliai Faillhiis ki jorii tlii, giriftar kiyii, aur baodhke qaidkbirie meu dai diya iba.

4 Js liye ki Yuhanua n*.- us «e kaltii

a, ki Tujbe ua ko lakbna rawa nabja.

H Aur Herodia De chaha, ki use iiuir dale, par 'awaimu »0 dara ; kyun- ki we use nabi jiiucc the,

li Par jab Berodia ki salgirih lagi, Hcrtidiyaa ki Udl uu ko darmiyda udclii, aur Ilerodia ko khutfa Ifiyt

7 Chunanchi us no qatam khdke wa'da kiyii, ki Jo kuchh iii tnangOgi, niaiii lujlic dunga,

W Tab wuh, jidsa U3 ki ind ne uso aikhd rakhd tha, lx)li, ki Y'f.hamii bnptisma-denewdla ki sir thali men yahin inujiic ruaugwa dy.

y Bddshah dilgirhiid: parusqa«im ke, aur un ke «abah jo us ku .-aih khdne baitlie the, us ue hukin kiya, ki UM ld «lewen.

10 Tab ua ne logtm ko bhejkar ipiidkhdne men us ka air katwdyd ;

1 L Aur us ka bir tliali men Idke us larki ko diya: wuh apui uia ke pas leai

12 Tab us ke shdgirdoij ne ake laafa uthdi, aur use gara, aur jakc Y'isii' ko khabar di.

13 ^ Jab Tiau' ne auna, to wahdn. we kiabti par liaithko alag ek wiriao meu Wkjii lug yih suriko shahron se nikie, aur khushki ki rali se us k« pichhe ho liyo,

14 Aur Y'isu' ne nikalkar ek hari libir dekbi ; un par use ratun dya, aur jo un men bimar the, utiluaj ohaiigd kiyd.

iii % Aur jab shdm MI, ua ke shagirdon ne us pa» ako kaha, ki Jagah wirdua hai, aur ahaui ho gayi,

Mbutft tctmtmdar por eSe&4. MATI'

logou ko rukiisat kar, ki we b&atfonl nienjdko apae ffitte k bau o ku mol k-u.

['i Yisi'i' ne un sc kabd, U" kd jdi\d fewihb zaito mhin ■, tum yub«$ klidue ko do.

17 Unliim ne HB » kabd, ki Yahdri liiiiiumipits ji;itj( b rofi..niuirdomachh- linu ke mv.ii, kw/lili iialiUi Uni.

18 Wnh bola, ki Uuhen yahdn mara pita Idu.

19 Phir iirf ne bukro kiyd, ki log gfafa parbaifhe&; tabun pandi roH'Hj nur do machhliorj ko liyd, aur aainan ki taraf dflkhkat harakat <li,-,uir ro$Us torki; «hrigirckm ko, nur lUgirdon Jll; logoo ko din.

20 Aur wo tmli khdbe asi'irk hifo; «nr unhon nn t.nkrnn ki, Jo bach rnbe

■ n inkrisin l'liiiii uthdfn.

21 Aur we, jiulion Bfl khdyd tha, siwa 'nuratoii aur larkurj ke, qarib piinch bazar ke inard thc.

22 % Aur us dam Yi~ii' B$ VpBt Shigiraog ko takid sc farmdya, ki kitbti j!!ir dnirliko niere 6gt pir jio, i;ll. tuk in:Uh fogog ko mkEsat kanin

23 Pkir dp, logon korukhsat kurku, ' thi'd ke lij'f pakar par akola charb

: u'jal) slLam hi'ii, wahin akcla rahii.

24 Par w uh fciubtf, M waqt, daryd ke bich pahunelikar lalifon so ilag- DWgitJ t'tii: kyiiuki hawa ruukhalif Uii.

2Ji Aur rat ko piobhle pahnr Yisii' : ■ ili.ilci bu nn |.<is dyd.

26 Jnb shdgirdoQ ne ubo daryd par chalte dekha, wo gnabrSke i ■

Vili l'lnii hai ; aur dnrk*! r.hilld\

27 W'r'iijiiin Yisi'i' ae uiuicii LiH, ki Kli&tu jain'iC rakho; «jam hi buai' mat daro.

2H'Tah Patrna nc us sejawab men ■ KliuiUittiiiii], agar u'ihibai.to mujfce fanoa, ki main. pdm par cbftlke U're pas Aiin.

29 Uh ne kabd, A'. TabPatr'ifikisb

XV. Furision ha mnlamat pand. ti ]iar se utnrke fAni i>ar chalne lagi, ki Yisii* ke pdsjie.

30 Par jab oekhd ki bawd toz hai, todjura; aur jab dtibne laga, chillake kaba, Ai Kbnviawand, mujbe bachs.

g] SVi'inhiij Yir.ii' ne liitb barbake Dge pakar liyii, aur ua st; knha, Ai kam- i'ati<idd, ti kyiip. fihakk liya?

32 Aur Jab we kwbLi i»r de, Siawd tbam gayi.

33 Aur unbon ne, jo kiwliti par tim, dke uae aijda karke kabd, Tu aacb tnucb Kbudd kd lfetd bai,

3-1 11 Phir par utarke Gannt-sarat ko inulk nieij paliuitche.

3.r) Aur wahAii ko logOfl nu use pabohejoke us Uat&ta girdnawdh men sbnbrat di, aur wib binuiioTi ko m pda Ide;

30 Aur us k( minnat ki, ki bqftt ub ki pushak kd ddman cblnlen : nur jit- iioii ne cbbiia, bilkull cbarigeho gayo.

XV BA'B. TpAB Yartisalain ko farphon aur | Fariaitm w. YUd' piis dke kabd,

2 Tore shagird kyibj buziir^orj ki riwdyatorj kr» tdl deta hain'' si ro^ khaim ke warjt npm* Uath iviliiij dlifto.

3 Us ne unheu jawab men kabd, ki Tuiii kiri wtUte apui riwayaiug ko .Siilnib Kliuda kd hukm tal detfl flO F

I Kyunki K'hndd ne' fannayft hai, lu Apne itid bdp k( 'kzat kar; aur jo nid yd bdp par Wnat kara, jan ko mara jde.

6 Par tum kalite ho, ki Jo koi apne bdp yd md ko kalut, ki Jo kuohh mttjhs liijii ko licini wajib thd, so Keliki ki nttjtr Jiuii;

u' Aur apne bdp ya md ki 'izzat ria kari:, tu km lili iiiu/ayarjanaliin. I'au WKi ne apni ri-nay?,t &e KbuAi ko hukm ko batil kiyd.

7 Ai riydkiiro, Yas'aiydh rio kyd khub tunihdre Jiaf[(] inen nubdwat ki, jali kabd, ki

8 YiU log apne niunli 8e meri mz- diki dhilndtitc, aur honthtm ae meri

Ek fcrki ko MATI

'izzat karto hain, par un ke dil mujh bc dur hai n t

9 Lekin iro 'abai tupt'i paraslisb karte hain ; kyunki foi'lim karun men insan bi ke luikra aunitc hain.

10 1T I'liir n> M jamd'at k<i balakar un sc kahd, Simo aur Bamjho :

11 Jochiz munh men jati hai, Aditif b) Tiripik nahin karti, bulki wah Jo uumh sc Dikaiti hai, wuhi wlrnl ko uapak karti hai.

12 Tab lis ko shdgirdon no us pd« &ke iis s? kuini, Kya ni jdntd hai, ki larisi yib bfit Kinkat nira/. Ml V

18 &■ ne nn sc jawab men kah&j Jo paudhd mcre asmdni IMp ne tiuhiri lagaya, jar ae ukhiird jdegd.

14 Unhen jdne do: «o andhe an- dhon ke rdh-dikhlant'wdle hain. Phir agar andhd andhc ko rah dikhdwe, to donon garhe nlt'U g"'''!.1-"--

15 Patrua nc unhcn jawab men kuini, W u h tamsil hamen sunjhd,

10 Yisu' ne kaha, KyA tiua bhi ab tak be-samajh bu?

17 Abtak tum nahin aamajhtfi, kJ jo kuchb tnunh nion jati, pct men partd hai, aur garhe nion jihenka lata r

18 Par wuh baten jo munh sc nikaltfn, dil se ati hain ; wc adim ko napak karti hain..

19 Kyunki ban khiyul, klinn, zina, hardrnkAri, cbori, jh.iif.iii gawahi, kufr, dil bi se nikaltc hain.

20 Vilii lvatena.lfiiikinapakkarnp- w:ili hain: BU UU Shot h&th khami khdna ddmi ko napAk nahin karti..

21 % Tab Yisii' wahiiij se rawan a boke Stir aur Su'ula ki atraf men gayfc

22 Aur, dckho.ck Kati'aui 'aurat wahan ki sarzamta sc uikalke use pukartl lnii, chaU di, ki Al Khuda- ii-anii, Daud ke bete, mujh pnr rahm kar, kl merl beti ek deo ke galbe se behal bal

23 Us ne ktichh jawab na diya, Tab us ke shdgirdon, ne pas akar

23

f XV. changi fcomti,

uh kl minnat ki, ki Use rukhaat kur, kyuiiki wuh ham&rc pichha eh i liati hai.

24 Us ne jawab men kahd, Main Israel ke gliar U khoi bui bheron ke BiwA, aur kisi pin imbin biiejil gaya.

25 Par wuh ai, MU use sijda karkc kahd, Ai Khmliiwaml, mati matlad kar.

20 Us no jawAb diya, Mundsib nahin ki lafkon ki roti lekar kutton ko pHenk dewen.

■21 Us nc kalui, Sacli, ai KhinU- wand, magar kutio bhi, jo tukre un ke khudiiwand ki mcK se girto, khate iiain.

2H TabYisii'nc jawab men use kaha, Ai 'aurat, terd i'atiiuid liari liai : jo chdhti hai, tere liyc ho. Aur uai ghari ua ki beti changi ho gayt

29 Phir Yisu' wahin se rawana hoke Jaiil ke daryd ko nazdik ava ; aur sk pahar par clnulikar waluiu balthi.

80 Aur bnhut jama'ati'n, langrtm, ainllion, gi'nigou, nm tiindun, aur un ke wwi baluiLrroij ko siitb lekar ua pds Ain, aur unheri Yisn' ke pdnwon par dald; aur ua ne unlien changd kiyd:"

31 Aisd ki jab un jamd'aton no de- klnl, ki guuge bolte, tunilc tajidurust hote, langrc chalte, aur andho dekhte hain, to ta'ajjub kiyi, aur Israel ko Klui'i.iivand ki sitiLth ki. " 32 t Tab YUu' na apne sbigirdon ko apno pas bulike kaki, ki Mujhe ia jamd'at par rahra ata hai, ki tin dln merc pAth rahi, aur un ke pas kuchh khdne ko nahiij ; aur main nahin chdh- tA ki unhtn faqa «e mfbaU karun, aisa nn ho ki rah men kaiiiu na-tiqat ho jden.

33 Us ke Bhagird'irj ne us so kahd, ki Iswirano men ham itni ro^lin ka- !,;\'j u piwaa, ki iiisi jama'at ko asiida kares ?

31 Tab Yiaii' ne uuhen kahd, ki

Fartai ek nhhdn nu'tngte.

Tiujilidrr pas kiini rutidij haiii? Wu

bole, S&t, aur kai ek chlmti machhli.

SS T» UI uu jtiuuPaturi ko liukm kiyd, ki zamiu par baith j&we_

.% Phir mi M:'tt rotioii aur niaelihllon ke lckar shukr kiya, aur torkar apne Kliigirdan ku diyd, aur shagirdon bgoii ko.

37 Aur Rah khike asudahne: aur tukron ae, j" bach rana the, unhon ne B&t l'ikviiin bh sukar uthdin.

38 Aur klianewdlc, siwd 'auraton aur larkon ke, chdr hazdr lnard the,

39 Aur jamaaton ku rukhnafc karke klafiti par charbJ, aur Mandau! ki atra f meri liya.

XVI BAU

FARI'.SI'ON aur Saduqfon ne dko azinaish ke liye ub se ekahd, ki Ek dtmiani tuakan haincn dikhd.

2 Us ne jawab men uu kc kabd, ki

.i lioti, tum kahte h«, ki Kal pharahha boga, kyi'mki dsmdn lal hai.

3 Aur eulili ko kahte, ki A'j dndhi chalagi, kyugkiasnian lalaurdhiuidh- ld hai. Ai riyakdro, tum a-sman ki surat ko imtiydz kar sakti) lio, par wai|t(jn ki iiishAiiian naluri daryaft kar Mktsr

4 Is zaindne ko had aur haramkar tog tii.dian dliiiudhie haiti ; par Yiinas nabi ke nisbdii ke siwd" kui undian uuhen dikh&yd na jiegd. Aur wuh imbau ohhorke clia'd gftyd.

5 Aur us ku shagird pdr piilmiiche. aur roti witb leue Vihiil gnye the.

ti T Yisii' ne nnhen. kaha, Farisfog aur Baddolon ke khaniir se khabarddr aur chaukas rabo.

■ i> hai, kiliai

lage, Us ki yih. sabab hai, ki liam roti na Ide.

y Lekfal Yi-'i' M yih daryaft karke kaha, ki Ai kaza-?atiqado, Win apne dil men kyt'm soehte ht>, ki yih roti na line ke sabab n hai ?

& Ab tftk nahirj samajhtc ho? un pduch hazar ki pduch toff&n uahin yad 24

i XVI. .Vti.nA fri babat

takhta, aur ki kitni tokrian bhari uthdin ?

10 Aur na un ckdr bazar ki sat rotidn, aur ki tum ne kitui tokrian bharkar uthdin ?

11 Yih luiit kyiin tiahiii .samajbte ko, ki main ue tum se Mti ki babat nakiu kabd, ki tum Farision aur S:iduL]iou ke kharm'r sechaukiw raho?

12 Tab unhoii ne ma'liiin kiyd, ki ub no roti ke kliamir su nahin, baiki Fariaon aur Haduiporj ki ta"liiu se chaukas ralmo ko kaha thd.

13 T[ Aur Yisu'nc Qaisarij'd Filip- pl ki ati'df men akar apne uiagirdon se piichhd, ki Loa kyd kahte hain, ki maiii, jo Ibu i A'dam hiig, kami hiin?

14 Unhon uo kahd, ki Ba'ze kfthte liain, ki Tu Yiihannd baptisma-dene- wald hai ; ba'se, lliyds ; aur ba'/.e, Yaramiyiib, y.-i nabion men se kol.

15 Ua ne uiihw kahd, Par tum kya liahte Ini, ki main kami hriij 't

16 Shama'un Patrus ne jawab majj kaiia, Tfl Masih ziuda Khuda ka Bata hai.

17 Yisti' ne jawdb men use kalut, iVi Shaiuii'ilu Bar-Yiinas, uiubdrak tu; kyonki jisui aur klu'm ue nahin, baiki more Bdp »e, jo dauidu par hai, tuju. pai yili tabir kiyd.

\H Malg yih bhi tujh sc kahia liiin, ki T6 Patrus hai, aur main is pattbar par apui ka'.iniyi kuiduiigd : aur do- /,akh kd ikhriyar us ]tir na chahwft.

19 Aur nmiii asrudn ki bdd^bahat ki kunjidn tujhe dunga: jo kuchh tu zamiu par hand karegd, dsiudu par baud kiyd jdegd ; aur jo kuchh t d samin par khulega, dsmau par khold ' ' -.i.

MO Tab us ne apne slidgirdon ko hukni kiya.ki ki.*ii se na kalnui, ki mais Swl' Uaaib liiin-

21 i Us waqt ae YiNiVaprie shigir- don ku khabar dene lagi, ki zariirliai ki main Yaruaabu.ii k^ jatui, aur bu- zurgon, aur sardar kahinonj aurl'aqih-

Patrus hl iqrar.

MATI', XVIL J/k si/i Iri surat k& l<adal .}&»&.

o» se. bnhut dnkh uthii'm, aur niari jaili, aur tim iliu ji utlnirj.

22 Tab Patrus uao khiiro le gaya, aur jlnuijhlikar kahne lagi, ki Ai Klni'Uuaml, teri wilamati ho: yih tuju jar kabhi n» hoga.

23 Par usne phirke Patru9se kabi, Ai Sriuitii.il, mere B&mhne se dor ho ; tii mere liyo thokar ka ba'is hai ; kyt'mki Iri Khmli ki biton ka naluri, baiki insan ki baton ki khiyalraklui hai

24 Tf Tab Tisi'i'neapnt' shigirdon bq kalii, Agar kui chahe ki mere pichhe awe, to apni inkir kare, aur upui salib uthako mori pair&ui kare.

25 Kyurjki jo kui apni jin bachayi cliiiie, uso khue^i; par jo kof merfl liyc jan khocgi, um? paiigA.

20 Kyunki admi ko kyi iaida hai, agar tamani jahin ko hasil kue, aur apni jin khowo? phir admi apni jnu ke badle kyi de sakti hai?

27 Kyunki Ibu i A'dam apne Bipkc jalai mcri apne firisliton ka sath iwe- gi ; tab har ek ko us ko a amal ko muw&flg badla iiegi.

28 Main tuni se sach tahta lilin, ki Un rnon se Jo yab.au khare hain, baV hain, ki jnb tak Ibu i Adam k<> apni bidshahat ineri dekh ua len, maut ka triiw.i ua chakherige.

XVII BA'B.

A CR cliba dia bft'd Yisu' Patrus, aur YVquh, aur us ke bhai Vi'i- hanui ko, alag ek unclie puhur par ic gaya,

2 Aur un ke samhne un ki surat badai gayi : aur us ki chibra iftab ka si cliamki, aur U3 ki iwsh&k nur ki maumu sufed ho gayi.

■'i Aur, dekno, Mu» aur Iliyaa us se biterj kartu imheij dikhai di\e.

i Tab Patrus no Yiefi' se jawib merj kalii, Ai KJmdiw.ui.l, huniare liye ya- han rahna aehslihi hai: agar marzi ho, to ham yahin tiu dere bariawen, ck

tero, aur ek Miisa, aur ek Iliyis ku live.

'u W uh yih kahta 1 ■ i tlnl, ki dekbo, ttk nurani budlf ne un par siya kiyi ; aur, dekho, ua badai «c ek iwi/. \m roazmtia ki ii, ki Yih mori piyari Beta hai, jis ae maiti khush hun ; tum us ki su n o,

6 Shagird yih aunke niunh ke bal giro, aur uibiyat dar gaye.

7 Tab YisdJ ue ike uiiLen chliu^, aur kahi, ki Utho, aur mat daro.

8 Aur unhon ne apni ink'h utliike Yiad' ke Biwa aur kisi ko ua dekLa.

9 Jab we pahir se utarte the, Yisti' uu unin'ti tikid ku farmayi, ki Jab tab Ibn i A'dam murdun coejj se ji na ujhe, is roya ki zil;r kisii m na karo.

10 Aur ua ke shigirdon ne us se pik'bha, Pliir faqili kyi'iii kahte baiii, ki |iahle iliyis ka ini zarur hai?

11 Yisd1 ne uiihen jawib diya, ki Tliyaa albatta jiahle awt'^a, aur sab cbimm ki baudobast kan^i.

12 Par main tuiu se kahtA hda, ki lliyas to d chuki, ltjkiu uulion ne ua ko iiahin palichani, baiki jo cTnihi us ki> s;Ll1i kiyi. Isi tjvrab. Ibu i A'daiu bhi un «o duk h uthawegi.

13 Tab BhigirdoB no samjha, ki us ne un u Yiihanni baptisina-denewale ki babet kahi.

14 ^f Jab we jarni'at ko pis pa- himche, ek sbakhs ua pas iya, aur us ke ago ghuttie tekke kalii,

15 Ai Kbudawand, niero bejfl par ralnii kar; kyuii(<i wuh siri hai, aur bahut dukh utbati hai ; ki aksar ig nn girri, aur aksar pani merj,

lti Aur main us ko tore ahigiidorj ,ke jjis Uyi thi, par we use changd na jkar sakeo.

17 YisiV ne jawib inen kahij Ai Iw-i'atiipUl aur terhi qtma, maic kab tak tuiuliare sith' rahiirigi? kab tak tumlftri li;iruj.siit kaflJBgi? u.suyabin mere pis ii.

ld Tab Yigff ne deo ko diiamkayi;

Ek -tiri Admi ko ditingakarna. MATI', wuh n» Be nikal gayii; aur wuh ohhokri usi gkari changa ho gaya.

19 Tab- sMgirdon vio alaa YisiV pas iike kalii, llam kytiri us ku mkul M sukun 'i

20~Yi*u' M umVij kalta, Apni be- Imani ku aabab ; kyunki main tum si: padi kahta" hi'in.ki Agar tambat] rai ke dano ko harabar iman botft, to agar tuui ia puhar m kahte, ki Y'uhiin M wabaii chala jft ; to wuh chala jata ; aur kol bat tuinhari na-mumk'm ua hati.

'Jl Wagar is tarah ke ileo, bagair du'a o roza ke, nahin nikitte jdto.

22 "f Jali w« Jali! meij pniri kasta the, Yisii' ne unhen kalia, ki Ibn i A'da.m logog ko hath men hawala kiyft jaega ;

23 Aur we usc qatl karcngc ; phir wuh tian din ji iith-.'-iii. Tab wo ni- hiyal gamgfii inic.

24 f' Jab wo Kafaniahum men ae, nim- mitrai ke lenewakm no ]ia« ako Patrus bo kaha, ki Kya ttimhara ustad Mijii-in(s.|jiJ ualiin duta ? Us no kaha, Han, dori hai.

25 Jab wuh ghnr men aya, tab Yisii' no ua ke bomo ko pesbtar, ua ae kahd, ki Ai Shama'an, Mi kya ea- m&jhta hai? duayake, hadshih khiraj yii j j /ya ]ria 86 latfl kain '( apofl larkoii su, ya galltm 88?

!'■ l'.im.is ne ua N kalia, Grairtra bo. YW ne lis so kuna. Pas to larke us ho fotid hak

2" l.eTdn ta ki ham unlien thokar im khilawen, tu jake darya men hausi dai, aur jo niaclihii ki pahlo nikk, asa lVkc uh ka munh khoi, to ek sikka ]iawega : wm Toko mere aur apne waatu unhon d».

XVIII BA'D.

U S mujt ihAgvrdO]] uc Yisft' pas akv us sg m'ichhd, ki A'sman ki badshahat men. sab so bara kann hai? 2 liati' ne ek clihota larka bulake use un ki? bScli min khani kira,

m

XVIII. Ta'lim dm&kifarot><.', I

3 Aur kaha. Main tum se sach kahta hun, Agar tum log tauba na kari), aur chhote Wkon ki maulud na bano, 'o Asma» ki baduhahat men har- gii diltbil na hogo.

I ™,}o koi ap ko is hachche ki iiianiud cldidfa ]&w, wuhi asraan ki bddwhahat fiien sab se bani hai.

5 Aur ji.) kui mere ruim par niso Iwchcho ki khalirdari karc, mori kka- tirdiri kart4 hai.

b' Par jo koi in chhoton men ne, jo mujh par iman l.iii: haiy, ek ko tho- kar khilawc, to u* ke Uyu yih bihtar hal, ki chakki kd pat us ko gale meii iatkaya jawe, aur samundarko gahrao tuen dubdya Jas.

7 f Thokar khililitewall ckizon ke sahab diiuya par afsos hai ! ki fhokar kbildnewali diizon kii. ani aaritt; pac afsos us shakha par jis ko aabah tho- kar lago !

h Agar UTii, haili, ji tori pimw,

(njho [dokar khilawc, US6 kat. dai, aur

apne Nuae pbmk ae: I» i iatigri ya

tundihokar/iml.'iui w. -i .■lini .■..!.. tore liye us m bihtar hai, ki do hitfa y4 do pd ii w hoto httmosfaa ki ag men d;ila j4we.

0 tar agar ted ankh tujhethokar khiliwe, use nikil dai, aur phonk do: l.yunki k4na hokar «indahi nien ilii- kliil hon.a toro liyo ua su lahtar hai, ki teri do ankh hon, aur tu jahannam ki ag mes 'ktU jawe.

10 Khabardar, in clihoton men sc kisi ko naotiiz ua janu: kyilnki main tum so kahta hun, ki A 'aman par ua ke firiahte taen l'.a|>kaninnh joasmaD ]«r hai hameslia dokhto Lain.

II Kyiiijki llm i A'dam iya hai, ki khoo luiurj ko dhundhke bachawe.

12 Tum kya samajhte ho? Agar ki3\ shakhs ke pis aau bbet bon, aur

■ i; kho jae, kyii wuh ninna- nave ko ua chkoregd, aur pahipon pai jako uk khoi hrti ku na dbi'mdhega?

13 Aur agar aiaa ho, ki use jijiwe,

Bhaion ko mu'dfkarne kafarz. MATI', XIX. B»-rahm naukar ki tamsil.

main tara.se snch kahti ban, ki w uli ias ko nbab nn ninnAuavc ee, jokho na gayi thin, ziyada khush boga.

14 Isi tarah tumhAro Uap ki, jo AsmAn par b;ii, marzi nahin, ki iti clilioton men «e koi balak liowo.

15" ^ Phir agar tera lihai tera gtmah kiire, ja, aur uso akele u ion sarajr.A; agar wuh teri suno, td ne apno bhai ku paya.

16 Agar wuh na sune, to ek ya do Bhakha upno eath la, ta ki Iur ek liat do ya un gawahon ku lminh se sAbit ho.

17 Agar wuh un ki na m.ino, to ja- roa'at ee k;ih; par agar wuh jama'at ko bfai na raane, to ua ko Bjair-qt,ttm- walo ki manisi be-diri, aur niahsiil- leuewile ko bar» bar jin.

18 Main timi se Moh kahtA hvin, Jo kric-Jih tum znm'm par baudhoge, Asnian par bandhA jAcgd : aur jo kuchh tam zaniin par khologe, asuian par khola jaega.

19 Phir main tuui se kahti nun, A^iir tum nieii sc do shaklis amin p»r kiat bat ke liye mel knrkc du'A mAngen, wuh mere Eap ki taraf se, jo asman par hai, un ke Iiyo hogi.

20 Kyiinki jalian do y& tin mere nam par ikatthe bon, wahan main un ko bich lilin.

21 % Tab Patrus ne us pAs Ake kaha, Ai KhudAwand, agar meri bhai rnera gunAh kara, to main uso kitni marfaiiii mu'af kariin '{ sat martaba tak?

11 Yist't' no usb kaha, Main tujhe Saf martaba, tak nahin kabti, baiki Saitar ke sAt martaln tak.

28 ^ Is liye ki AsmAn ki badshSimt ek badshali ki nntmnd hai, jia ue apno logoB se hisab lene chAhA.

24 Jah hisab loue laga, ek ko pas lae, jia se ua lio das bazar tore panu t h e.

25 Par ia wAste ki us pAs kuchh adi karne ku na thii, us ko kkudawiind ne

27

hukm kiyA, ki wuh aur us ki jorl, aur oa k« MU bachehe, aur jo kuchh ua

kA ho, bechA jawe, aur qarz b ha r HyA

jr'nvc.

20 Tab us naukar ne girko ujn si jda kiyA, aur kaha, Ai KhmlAwand, gabff kar, ki main tera sara o&rz ada kar- ung A.

27 lis naukar ko sAhib ko rahm AyA, aur uao chhorkar qara usu bakhsli diya,

28 TJ si naukar nonikalkcapnesArhi naukaroij men ae ek ki> piyA, jis |iar uh ko sau dinar £te ihe ; us ne us ko pakarkar us ka gala (tbontfi, aur kaha, Jo iTn.'i':i iil.ii hai, mujho de,

29 Tab us kA sithi naukar us ko dbowob WC girA, aur us ki minnat karko kaha, Sabr kar, ki main sab ada kariingi.

HO Par as no na mana, baiki jike usc qaidkhAne men dalA, ki jab tak (jarz adi na karc, qaid" rahe.

31 Ua ko sAthi naukar yih makara rlekbko nihayat gamgin hrtc.aur jakar apne khawind ee tamim iilcval hayiia kiya,'

32 Tab ua ke khawind no use bulA- kar ua se kahA, ki Ai aharir chakar, main ne wuh sah qarz tujhe bakhsh diya, kydnki td ne meri minnat ki :

33 To kyA lazim na thA, ki jaisA ain nc tujh par rahm kiyd, tii bhi

apne ham-khidmat par rahm kartA?

34 So ua ke khAwiud nc gussa hoks n-i ko ii;ir"^a ke hawai* kiya, ki jab tak tamAm qara adi ua karc, qaid rahe.

35 Isi tarah mera asinani Bap bhi tum se karpija, agar bar ek tum men se apno bhAion ke qusdr ko dil se mu'Al'na karega.

XIX BA'B.

AUK yiin hAA, ki Tisii' jab us ka- lam ko tamAm kar chukA, Jalil »e rawdna hnA, aur Yardsn ke par Yahudiya ki sarbadd men AyA;

2 Aur bari hbir us ke picliho ho li; aur us ne uuhen waban chaugi kiya.

Tifl'm ko Masih pas Idnd. MATI',

3 % Aur Varisi ub ki azmdiah ke liye uh pis do, aur us se kahd, Kya rawd hai, ki mard har ck sabab ae upni jorfi ko chhor dewe?

4 Us no jawab mcn u n se kaha, Kyd tum no nahiri parha, ki Khi1i<| n« shunV ku*» unhen ek hi mani aur ek ki 'nurat banai,

5 Aur farmdyii, ki Is liye mani apne nia bdp ko ehhorega, iu:r apiii j"v\i w niild nihega: aur W8 donon. ok lan boogfl ?

6 Is liye ab we do urViiii, baiki ck tau hain. Pas, jise KUuui no jord, use insan tia tore.

7 Uuhon no us so kahd, l'lur Musd m' k yi'm Imkm diya, ki taUojMtau use deke use chhor do ?

8 Uh ne un se kuini, MiifiA ne tuin- hari sabkt-dili ke sabab mm ko npni jordon W chhor dcue ki ijdzatdij par shurii' ae aisd na tba.

9 Aur maig tum se kalita hi'm, ki Jo koi apni jorfi ku, siwa zina ke, aur sabab se chhor de, aur diiuri bb byah kue, zina kartd hai: aur jo koi ua clili-iri bui 'aurat ko bydhe, ziiid kartd hai.

10 % Us ke shaeirdog no ub bo kahd, Agar mard kd lidi joru ke sath yih hai, to joru karnd acnchlid ualiin.

11~ Us ne un se kaha, ki Sab ia bdt ko qabul nahin karto kain, magar we jiuheii di y d gaya.

12 Kyiinki ba'zo kbnjo hain, jo mi ke pct lii se aise paid'd hue ; aur ba'ze khoje'hain, jinhen logon ne bandyd ; aur ba'ae klioju bait», jinhon ne dsnsdu ki bddslidhat'ke liyedp ko khoja ban- dyd hogi. Jo us ko qabul kar saktd hai, io ksire.

13 t Tab log chhote larkon ko us pas Ide, k i wuh un par hiith rakhe.aur du'a kare: par ahdgirdon ne unhen dai Ltd.

14 Yisii' no un bb kahi, ki Larkon ko chbor do, aur unhen inero pds dne

28

XIX. jtfiMift kipoiraui ke anfim. so nian'a na kuro; kyiiijki asmdn ki Ibddshahat aiaon hi ki bui,

15 Aur us no apiia hdth un par ra- kbe, aur wahfin se rawdna In'id.

lu Tf Aur, dekho, ek ne ako ua bq kahd, Ai nek Uatdd, niaiij kami sa Dflfc kdiii karun, ki baiiiesjlm ki 2mdagi pdun ?

17 Ua ne uso kabd, T& kyuri paojhe aek kahti bvuV Dek bo koi nabiij, magar ek, ya'ne, Kimda; par agar tu zindagl mcn dikhil hiid chahe, to huimon pu 'amal ku.

18 Us ne uao kahd, Katui su hukm ? Yisd' ne uao kala, Yih, ki T.i khdn na kar, Zind na kar, Chori ua kur, ,1 ln'ubi gawahi na de,

19 Apne bdp aur npni md ki 'izzat kar:aur,Apno pawai koaisipiydr.kar, jaisd dp ko.

liO Ub jaw;in ne us ae kalid, Yih Bab main larakpan M kg iiiauta iya: ab iiiujlui kya baiji hai?

L'L Yiad' ne kahd, Agar tii kdmii hiid ohihfl, to jiike sab kuchli jo tera hai bech ddl, nur muhtdjon ko de, ki tujhe asmau pu khuzaua niilegd: tab dke mere piclihe ko lo.

22 Wuh jawdn yih aunkar gamgiu clinld gaya: kyiiijki liard tndldar tha.

23 1 Tab Yisii' no apne ahdgirdon so kulid, Main tum so sach kahtd lnin, ki DaulatniMud ka asindn ki liddahdhat inc-ii daklii! bona muihkil hai,

U4 l!u]ki maiiL tum se kalild lnin, ki Cut kd siii ko ndke se guzsr jauu, us ae asan hai,ki ck daulatniand Klui- da ki Mdsliahat inen ddkliil hu.

25 Jab uske shiigiidi>ii Be yih «umt, lu alhayat h*4rdn lioke bolo, Phir kaun Hajat ] 'd tiakta hai '.'

26 Yisii' no uu jmr nazar karke un- lifii kahd, Yih insdu sennhin hosakta; par Khiiila se sjib kuuhh ho siktd bai.

21 f Tab Patrua ne jawib loeO uae kalut, Dekli, ham ucsab kutbhchhord, aur ten picnlic ho liye; pas bani ko,

kya milegi?

Tdkidiln ke mazd&ron MATI'

28 VisiV ne unhcti kahA, Main tum se sach. kahtA httn, ki Timi jo itktc pichhe ho Uye, jab nnyl khilqat men Ibu i A'dam apno jalai ke takbt par hanlw^A, tam bhf bdrah takliton p»r

■ ■■. nur [sriel ki bArah guruhon ki 'nddlat karoge,

29 Aur jis 04 ghar, ya bhAi, ya ba> hln, yA nii'i bii.p, yA jorii, yA bal bacb- dmn, ya -/amin ku, nun n£m W» rlilii'i'iL, san fftuiip4wcgA,aur hauieaha ki zindagi ki wira hogA.

30 l'ar bahut ne jo pahle hnin,

Eichhle ho jderige; aur jo pichiile ain, pahle bojjga

XX BA'B.

KrU'^KI aamail ki badsbafcat us sAhib i khAua ki maubd hai, jo tarke babar niklA, i;i ki apuc angiiris- tdn men masdar lagAwe.

2 Aur us lio niazduron kd ek ek dinar rozfna mmjarrar kurku unben u] aii'Ti'iristiin meii bhejA.

3 Aur u» ne pbir, dia charhe, bahar jake auron ko bazAr men bo-kdr khare dok h A,

4 Aur on fio kaha, Tum bhi angu- ristan inen jdo, aur jo kuclib wajibi hai, tumben diiijga. So we gaya.

5 Pbir ua ho, do pahar, aur tisre pahar ko, bahar jako waisa hi kiya.

b' Ek ghant.A diri rahto, pbir bahar jake lumu ko be-kdr kharo pAyA, aur uu se kaha, Turu ky&n yahAn tamani di» bc-kar kharc rahte ho ?

7 Unbori ne us bu kaha, Ia Hyc ki kisi ue liam ko mazduri juir nahiii ra- kha. Ob ho uubeij kaha, Tur» bhi ua- giiristdn Biefi jao, aur jo kuchh wajibi hai, fio p.iuge.

8 Jab ihim hui anguristdn ke malik lic apne kAniule .-■■ kaha, Mazduroy ko buJil, aur pichhlon bu leke pflMon tak uu ki mazdiiri de.

9 Jab wo, jitihon ne gliante bhar Hiu kiya thd, ae, fco ok ek dinar pdyd.

10 Jab agle 4e, uubou yib gumau

', XX. M to.mstf.

thd, ki ham ziyada piweiigo ; par un- boB ne bhi ok ek uinAr jviyd.

11 Jab unhon rie yib pAyd, to gliar ko mdlik par kurkurde,

12 Aur kahd,' pichhlon ne ek U ghante ka kain kiya, aur tu HB unherj ousan butCbat Ini diyi, jintan M tamdm diu ki mihnat auriibup sahi

13 Ua ne nn mon se ek ko jawib mag kalia, Ai ruiyan, main teri be- InSMi uiihin karia ; kya tCi ne ok diuar par mujh se iqrAr ualdn kiyAV

14 Tu apna le, aur cliilla |A: par main jitnA tujhe detA btiri, piohhle ko bhi dungA.

15 KyA nmjhe rawa naliin. ki tpoa mAl se jo cbAbiin ho kan'nj'? Kyd W la liyc bnn nazar sc dekhtA liai, ki main nek bini

l<i Isi MnkptoBhle pahle horjge, aur pahle piehlilc : kyiinki bahut sa bulae ;aye, par barguzida tliore hain.

17 ^ Aur jab Yisi'i* Varusalam ko jAtA ihA, rAh nierj bArah ahagirdon ko ahvg le jako un se kahA,

16 Dckho, hain yardaalarn ko jAte hairj ; aur Ibu i A'dam sardar kdhiuog iiiir taijilioTi ke hawila kiya jat'^A, aiu' wc us par qatl kA hukra denge,

19 Aur use gair qaumoti ko kawAla karenge, ki fhat.thon mes urAwco, aur kore ludren, aur eaTib jiar "khigehen : par wuh tiare din phir ji uthegA.

20 t Tab Zabadi ko beton ki nid apue beton ko leke us pas A), aur use sijda karke cbabd, ki us &e kuchh 'avz kare.

■II Vb ne ua se kahA, Tu kyd chdhli hai ? Wuh bui), Farma ki mere donon bete, teri badshAhac men, ek turf dahni, aur diisrA teri bAirj taraf bairheu.

22 YiHii' ne jawdb mes kahA, Tum nabin jante, ki kyd mAn'gte ho, Kya wuhpiyAla,jo main piue par hilii, pi aakte ho? aur wuh baptisma, jo main pala lu'in, tum pi nakte? \V"e ua ae Iwle, lima sakte hairj.

-j Ua do uu se kaha, Tum albatta

Farotani karut kafan. MATI', XXI. Masih Yarusalam ko pita.

mera piyAla piogc, nur wuh baptisma, I 2 SAmhne ki basli uien jAo, aur jn ruam pai A mm, pau;i>' ; WtHi Tjit-i'i wahan efc gadhi bandhi, nur uske sath dahni mir n iuri b&in taraf buitlma, |ek bauhcha pAoge : khulke mcre pAs racre ikhtiyar men nahin ki kisi ko lio.

rifiji, magar n» ko, jin ke liye mcrc Bap nc rmiqarnir kiya.

24 Aur jahundason ne yih guna, un do bhAioij pnr guwao hi'ie.

25 Tab Yisu ne unheii bulak c Italia, ki Tura jAnte lio ki g»ir-qBmnon ke hakim uu per hukiiuiat jatah, ikbtiyarwale uu pai apuu ikhtiyar dikhate hain ;

26 Par tum logon men aisA na ho- ga : baiki Jo tum ui«n bara hiiA chAho, tuiiihaia kli:iilhu ko ;

27 Aur jo tuiu men sard&r bana chAhe, tumharA banda lio

28 ChunAnchi Ibn i A'daru bhi is liy- BBbin liya, ki khidmat le, baiki khidmat kare, aur apui jan bakutoron ke liyo lidiya men de.

£9 .Ini' m Yarihu so rawan» hone lago, bari hiu r uk ko pioHhfl bo H.

30 f Aur, dekho, do andhc jo rAh ke kinAre baithe the.jab suni ki Yini'i" chalA jAtA liai, pukArno lage, ki Ai Khudawand, Iba. i Daud, bani pur t.ilun kw.

31 Par jama'at no unken d&utd, ki chup ralien : lukin we aur KU cliilnif. aur bole, ki Ai Khudawand, lbn i Daud, baca par mani kar.

32 Tab Yisii' khnrilraha, aur unhen bulakc kahA, Ttira kyt't chdhto ho ki main tuinhAre liye karun?

3iJ "UDhon ne uue kalut, ki Ai Khu- dAwand, hamAri ankhen khul jden.

34 Yisii' ko rahm AyA, aur un ki Ani; lu m ko tblniA: aur us»i dam uu ki Ankhen bina hi'iiri, aur we us ke pichhe ho liye.

XXI KA.1t.

AUR iab we Yarusalam ke nazdik pahunchkcBaitfitgA men Zaitun ke pahAr pAn Ae, tab Yisii' ne do BhA- girdon ko yih kabke bhejd, ki " 30

3 Aur agar koi tum ko kucbh kahe, to kahiyo, ki KhndAwand ko yih darkAr hain; ki wuii. usi dam imlien bhej degA.

4 Yih sab kuchh hi\A, tA ki jo nabi ne kahA tbdpiira ho, ki

6 Saibiin ki beti ne kaho, Dekh, terS BAdshAh farotani so, gadhi par, baiki -lilin ku bucheho par sawit hoke tuju pas Ata hai.

6 So shAgirdnn ne jAkn, jalai Yisii' ne unln'Ti faniiaya tha, baja lac,

7 Aur lu gadhi ko bachche sametlo Ae, aur apne kapre un pv dAle, aur uso unpar bithlAya.

8 Aur «k bari jama'at ria aptie kapre rAste men bichliao; aur kitnon no liaiuUiluri ki dAliaii kalko nih men chhitrdin.

!> Aur bbir jo uHkeAgn pielibe cbali jati pukArke kahti tlii, lbn i Daud ko ilusii'iMina; Mubarak wuh jo Khuda- wand ke nAm par AtA hai : Use AamAn par IIosh'atuiA.

10 Aur jab wuli Yariinn]imi m"ii dakhil huA, sAre shahr men gul macliA, BUI kalitiolatit, ki Yib kaun bal?

11^ Tab bhir ne kahA, ki Yih JaliL ke NA.sarat ka Yisii' nabi hai.

12 f Aur Yisu' KlmdA ki haikal men gayA, aur un sab ko jo haikal

_ kliurui ferokht kar rahe. ihc, nikil diyA,aur sairAfon ke takhte.aur kabii- tar-faroslion ki uliaukiaii ulat din,

13 Aur un ae kaha, Yih likhA hai, Meri gh»l 'ibAdat kd ghar kah-

latigA ; par tum ne u.-*e chorou ka kLoli bau iya.

14 Aur aneho aur langre haikal men us pas ae; tis ne uahen changA k i y7i.

10 Jab sardarkahinon, aur faoihon neun karamatorj ko, jous DC dikliAiij, aai Lirkon ko haikal men pukarle, aur

Anjir ht dnrdkU par la'nat. MATI', XXI. Bagbanon U famaO.

Ibn i Ddild ko Howh'anna kahto de- se, to Wmm sg darte hain ; kyuyki h M, to bahu t gusse hue,

1<> Aur us se kahd, Tu suntd hai, ki ye kyi kahte haiiiV Yisd' ne un- hen kaha, Han ; kya tam nc kahhi nahin parhd, ki Bachchog aur shir- khwArofl ko iriunh so tu no kdrail ta'rii' karwai ?

17 \ Fhir wuh unkcn chhurko ahahr ko bahar Bait'aniyd men gaya ; aur wahan rat bitdi.

18 Aurjab subh ko shahr inen jant laga, OM bhiikh lagi.

11) Tab anjir kd ok darakht rali ke kindrc dekhkar ns pas gayd, aur jali patton ke siwd us men kuclih na pdya, to kahd, Ah m tujh rnen kablui phfU na lage. Wunhiij anjir ka darakht Biikh gaya.

MO Aur shdgirdon ne yih dokbkar ta'ajjub kiyd, aur kahd, ki Yih anjir kii darakht kya M jahlmikh gaya I

21 Tisu' ric jawab men unheii kahd, Main tum se aacb kahtd hi'in, ki Agar tum yaqin karo, aur shakk na lao, to na fiirf yilii kar sakugo, jo anjir ke darakht par hi'id, "baiki agar ia paharse kahoge, Tii tatkar uaryd men ji gir, to waisd lii hogd.

22 Aur jo kuchh du'a mes raiiigssA .-r ■ paoge.

23 ^ Jab wuh haikal men dyd,aur ta'lim detd thd, tab sardar kdkinon aur n aum ke buzurgon ne us pas ake tahi, Tu kis ikhtiyar ao yih kartd hai ? aur kis ne tujlie yih ikhtiyar diya ?

24 ']'ab Yisu1 ne jawab men unhen kahd, Main bhi tum se ek bat piicbli- liti; agar baiao, to main bhi tumben kiiaiin, ki yih kis ikhuyar ee kartd hdn.

25 Yuharma kii bapUama kahdn se thd? dsniaii se.ydinsan Bc'r Woapne dil men aochuc lage, ki agar bani kation, A'snian se, to wuh hnm sc kahegd, l'hir tum ne use kyun, na m dua ?

2b' Aur agar bani kab.cn, ki Insdn 31

tab Yubauna ka nabi jauh' hain.

Tab unhon ne jawab men, Yiad' se kaha, Iluni ualrin jdntc. Us ne

kahd, Main bhi tumben nahin. batata, ki kis ikhtiyar se yih kartd hum

28 U TCyun, tumkyasamajhteho? Ek ddmi ka uo beto the ; us ne bare pds jdke kalid, Ai beto, jd, dj mere Ujgaristin nieakam kar.

29 Us ne jawab men kahd, Main nahin jaungd ; ciagar pichhc pachh- take gaya.

30 Pliir chliote p:ls jikarwuhi kahi. Us ne jawdb mog kaha, Achchhd, ai khuddwand ; par na gaya.

31 Un donon nn?n &■ kaun npnobap ki nwzi par chala? We bole, Hara. Yisn' no un se kahd, Main tum ee sach kabid hiin, ki Malisiil-lonewdle aur kasbidn tum so pahle Khuild ki hdd- ihdliat men tilik h il hote hain.

32 Kyiinki 'Yiihannd rasti kl rdh se tum pds ay&, aur tum ne us ki na mani, jpar lualisiil-lonewdlon aur kas- bion no ua kl mani ; tum yih dekh- kar picliho hai na pauhhtae ki us ki nidno.

33 1 Ek aur tamsil auno : Ek ghar kd mdlik thd, jis ne angi'iristdu lagdya,aur us ki ebaron taraf riindhd; aur us ko bich men khodke kolha

tara, aur hurj bandyd, nur bdgbdnon u Bompkfl dp paidai g»yi;

34 Aurjab mewa kd mausim qarib dyd, us ne apne mmkaroB ko bagban-

m cia bhejd, ki us kd phal Idwen.

35 Tar un bdgbanon ne us ke nau- karon ko jiakarke ok ko pitd, aur ek ko mdr dald, aur ek ko pattlirao kiya.

3b' Ph'ir us ne aur naukaron kojo pahlon se liarhkar tlie, bheja; unhon ne un kc sdth" bhi waisa hi kiya.

37 A*kbir, us no apne bete ko un pds yih kahkar bhejd, ki We mero bete so dabenge.

38 Lekiu jab bdgbdnon ne beto ko

Shah30.de ke bydh MATI',

rif'Uljii, ipu men knhne Igge, Waris yihi hai ; do, iso inar ddlcn, ki is ki miras uarn&ri ho jAo.

39 Aur om pakarku aur tin ke bdh&r !<• jdkar qatl kiy

40 Jab angiirisfdn kd nialik aire- gd, to in bagbdnon ke sdth kyd ko- regi!

41 We ubo bole, In badon ku buri tarah mar dAlega, nur angiiristAn ko aur Mgbanuii ku somjn-^a, jo mausim par im-wa jcihunchaweii.

42 YiaiV ne unlicn kuini, Kyd tum ne nawishtou mtri kablii nahin parhd. ki Jis patthar ko rfjgftoj] ae iia-paKand kiyd, w uh i konc Ua sini hu'd; yih Kiiiidawaiid ki taraf se hai, aur hamd- ri naxarorj men 'ajib?

43 Is liye main tum se kahtii Jiiitt, ki Khudd ki badshdhat tum sc le 1i jdegi, aur «k qaum ku, jo us ke mcwa Jdwe, rll jdegf.

44 Jo is patthar par girega, chii: ho jiegd ; par jis par wiih gire, use pis rldlega.

45 Jab sardar kdliinon aur Fari- Bion ne W ki yik tamaUsn siinijj, tO uinsjfa gaye ki liamare hi haqq inen kahta hai.

46 Aur unlion ne chdha, ki tue pakar luij, par 'awamm su dare, kyiiij- ki we aba nah? jante tho.

XXII BA'B.

Y ISU" unhen phir tnmsilorj men kahne la'id, ki

2 Almari ki badshdhat ua bddshah ki minimi hai, jis ne apnc bcte kii byah kiyd ;

3 Aur u w ne apne naukaron ku bbe- }&, ki roihmaTmri ko bydh nien buld- wi'ij ; par unhou ne na chdkd ki awun.

4 rbir us ne aur naukaron ko yih Jtahke bhejd, ki Mihm&nun sc kabu, ki Pokho, main ne khdni taiyar kiyd: mere Kail, aur mofe mnte jinmu sabh hue, aur sab kucbji taiyar hai: bydh mon ao.

32

XXII. H tamsil.

5 Par wc kuchh khiydl men na lakttt cbalf goye, A apne kbet, aur dumi apni sauddg;ari ko ;

(J Aur bitjiuij nc us ke naukanm ko pakarke unhen be-lflUt kiyii, aur mar ihlla,

7 Tab badsridh sunknr gnssa hiid; aur apui fauj bhejkc uu klitiuion ko njar ilala, aur un ka shahr piuiuk diya.

S Phir us ne apnn chdkarou rc ka- hd, Uydli ki laiydri to hiii, par we, jin ku liuUyd, ualdi<j the.

9 Pas tum farakon par jau, aur jit- ne tumben inileij, bydh men buldo.

10 So un naukarorj no raston p&r jdke bhalo liuro jo unhen iniU-, sab ko jam'a kiyd ; aur byah kd ghar iniiirn:iri(.iij m-, hhar gaya.

11 t Jab badshah inilimdnon ko dekbne andar dyi, us ne wahdg ek admi dckhd, jo sliddi kd libds pabine

m tl.:t:

12 Aur us se kaha, Af miydD, tii ihadi ke kapro pnhine bagair yalidrj

kydn dyd? 'Us kt zuban baud ho

g^yi-

13 Tab bddehdh ne naukarun ko k:iii:L, Ub ki? liat h pair banuhko use 1^ jao, aur Iidhar andhere meQ ddl do ; wahan rund aur d.int pisud h tiga,

14 Kyfinki wojo bul&e gayo babut hain, par barguzitio thore.

16 f IM» Farfdou 'ne jdke saldh k(, ki use kydnkar us ki bdtun men [ihansiwen.

16 So unlion ne apne shdginlon ko SerodJoQke satH un pds bhejd, ki ua se kanon, Ai Usiad, ham jdntc hain, ki tii sacbcha liai, aur sacbdi se Khu- dd ki nih batiti'i, aur kisi ki kucfah parwa nahin rakhld; kyiinki tii dd- mion ke zdhir lidi par nazar nahin kartd hai.

17 l'as, ham so kah, Tu kyi khi- ydl kartd hai? Qaisar ho jizya di;nd

i :i nahin? lo Par Yisii' ne uu ki sbardrat s;i-

(■'",-ixh)2 nur S<i'lu(,U,n .'n MATI majhko kahA. Ai riyakAro, mujhtt kyun Azmdtc ho?

19 Jlzya k;'i Bikks mujho dikhlao. Wfl ok dinar us pAs Ue.

20 Tab us ne un se kahA, Yih sit- rat nur sikka kis kA hai?

21 Unhon ne kahA, Qai*ar kA. Phir us ne kuhd, Pan, jo clmen Qai- sar ki hain, Qaisar ko ; aur jo Kliudi ki li:iin, Khuda fco do.

22 ('iilmii ne yih sunkar ta'ajjub kiyA, aur uae chhorkar chale gayo.

23 ^ Usi diii Sadi'iqi, jo qiyamat ke raunkir hain, us pas de, aur us se rawi) kivA, ki

84 Ai TTstdd, Hitisf nu kaha hai, Jab koi be-aulad mar jde, to us ka hhdi us ki juru ko bvii )e, U ki fcptu blidi ko liyo nnsi jdri kare.

25 8o hamAre. darmiydn sAt bhaf the ; pahld byAh karke mu piya, ftUl ia BBihftb ki ua ki aulad na tld, apni jorii apue bhai ke wAslc chlior gaya.

2fi Yunhin di'iarA, aur Uari lihi, sAtwen lak.

27 Sab ke ba'd wuli 'aurat bbi m a r gayi.

28 Pas wuh, tjiyaniat merj, un aAt- on raen se kis ki jorii hotpr kyurjki sabiiog no ns «u byali kiyi thd.

"SI Yisu' ne jawab inen un sc kaha, Tam nawishton aur KluidA ki qtidrat ko na jankar guatl karle liu,

■'i'1 Kyiinki cuyamat mon log na byah kurte, na hydlie jd'e hain, baiki auman par Khuda ke firishton ki nia- lliiul Ikiim.

31 Aur niurdon ke ji uthne ki babat Khuda ne, jo tumben farmdyd, wuh tum ne nahin pafhi, ki

32 Main Abiraham kA KhudA, aur Iss,h4q kA KhudA, aur Ya'qiib kA1 KbudA hurj? KhudA murdon kA na- liiii, baiki ziurion ka KhudA hai.

33 .TaiiiA'aten yih sunkar us ki ta'- lim se daog iiuin.

34 1 Jab Fariaion nc sunA, ki us ne

XXIII. -munh haott hoj&nd.

KadiMjion ka miirjh batui kiyA hai, w- jaiu'a biie.

35 Aur un men so eh ari 'a t ke ek sikhiAnewAle ue us se, a/.mane ke liyc, yih pi'iehlui, ki

3(i Ai Ustdd, sliara men bara hukm kaun had?

37 Yisu' ne us se kabd, Klmdawand ko, jo lerA KhudA hai, apue sd c dil, aur apni sAri jan, aur apni sari samiijii so piyar kar.

38 Palli aur bara hukm yihi hai.

39 Aur diisrd us ki niAniiul hai, ki Tu apue porosi ku aisA piydr kar, jaina Apko.

40 Inhin do ahkdm ]>ar «Ara nhar'a aur sab nahion ki baten mauqui' hain.

41 1 Jab Parisi jaiu'a the, Yisu' m un so puchhd, ki

42 Masih ko hoqq nieri tumliard kyi mirurtn hai? Wah ki^ kA beiil hai? Wo belo, Daud kA.

■13 Us ne un ee kahA, Phir Ditid, riih ke Ijatanc bc, kyuukar uso Kiiu- d>iw;uiil kahtA hai, ki

44 KhudAwaud ne mere Khuda- wand ko kahd, ki Jab tak main toro dushmanou ko tero pAnwiin k! chauki na karun, td nipre dahine baith 'f

45 Pas, jab Daud us ko Klmda- wand kalitA hai, to wuh us kA beta kyiinkar thahrA?

46 Par koi us ke jawab mm ok bit na b"l saka, aur us diu so kisi U hiwdo na parA, ki us se phir kuelui suwal kare.

XXIII HA'IS.

TAB Yiaii' logon aur ajino sliapin!- on se kalino laga, ki 2 Fiujili nur Farisi MiisA ki gaddi par baitbe hain j

'A Js liyo jo kuchh we tunilien mata' ne ko kahen, uidno, aur 'amal men ldo ; U'kin un ke so ki'uu na karo : ky- tirjki we kahte hain, pnr karto ualiii:. 4 Ki wo bhSri bojhen, jin kA utha- nA mnafakil hai, bdndhte, nur logon C

Musih kdfaqV>OQ aur HATI',

ke kandhori par rakhte hairj ; par ap unheB nt! ek uigii ae saikauc pai' rizi nahin hairj.

5 We apne sab kfi.ni logorj ko di- khanc ke wasit: kurir hai m ; apne fca'- wi/. el.aure,aurai>ne Jubborj kedamau Iftmbo baiiilo hain,

B Aur mihmauiorj taeg ndrjagah

BUI 'iliiiilrLiUlnimm nu'ij miwal kursi,

7 Aur buang men salam, aur yih ki log unhcn Jtiibbi, Itablji, knlu'ij, ohibte liiiin.

8 Par tum Kabbl nn. kahlao: ky- uijki tiiiuliarii Hadi ek hai, ya"m\ Masih, aur tam ttfa bhdi ho.

9 Aur umbi pnr kimi ko apnfi, bap mat kahu: kyirnki tuinbdra ek hi Ban hal, jo asman par hai.

10 Aur ria timi liatii kahlao: kyi'm- ki tum hara Hadi ek hai, ya'ii", Misili.

11 I'alki jo tum irirn bara hai, timi hara- khadim hoga" ;

12 Aur joapko bara jani'^a, ohhotA kiya jaega ; aur jo ap ko chhota sam- jhegi, wo barf kiya jaega.

13 ^f Ai riyakar faqiho, aur Farisio, linu pai alknl U liye ki auman ki badshiihat ko logon ke age band karte ho: na luni ap us meti jtUe, aur uh jimewftlon ko uh turi; juta dete.

i i Ai riyakar lacpbo, aur Farisio, rum par ai&js! ki bewaoj I. Ii .■ uiwiil jdu-, mu' makr se lambi chauri mumi/ [arliteho; ia sabab tum ziyi- datai saza' paogc.

15 Ai riyakar faqiho, aur Farisio, tum par afros 1 ki tum tari aur khush- ki ka daum ia liye karte ho, ki ek ku :i|iii" iiin mon Jiio, aur jab wuh chnka, to apne kg dumi use julianiic ka" farzand bimrtte ho.

Hi Ai andhe rah-dikhanewalo, tum parafeos, ki kahr.o ho, Apar koi hai- kal ki qasam khdvrc, (o kuchh im;- /ilyaoa nahin; pn agar ba-ibal ke oook ki qat<am khiwe, to us ko pura karun zarur hai!

17 Ai nad&iio, aur ai andhc. kano 34

XX IH. F'.vihf-iii J.o mah'iiwtt harna, bara hai, sona, ya haikal, jo aoao ko pak karti ¥

18 Phir tum kalite ho, Agar kol qurbing&h ki quam khdwo, to kuchh muaayaqa nahin ; jjar agar mur ki, jo um par disirhti, qa*a.m khawe, tO us ko m'ira kami fain hai.

10 Ai nidioo, aiir ai audio, bara kaun hai, atar, ya iiurbanga"h, jo uazr ko pak karti ?

i!0 Paa jo qurbiin.::ili k i qa8am khaiii haf, us ki aui un sib chi/.nu ki, jo us par eharhirj, qasa)ii khaiii.

L'l Aur jo hiiikal ki qaaam kluita liaj, nn ki aur jo ua uieu lahnewdld liai, us ki bhi qasam khita hai.

22 Aur jo umfto ki qaEaia khati

hal, Khudii ke takht aur us par jo balthaewall hai, uu ki bhi qasaru klidta hai.

-."I Ai riyakar faqiho, aur Fftrfsio, tum pai fifeosl kyiiiiki pocuna, aur aniriun, aur y.ira ki liuliyaki lagat6 ho, pai .-li ni'at ki bhari biion, ya'ne, in- saf, aur raluo, aur iman ko obilO{ diya; lazim thd ki tum unhen ikhti- yar karte, aur inlien bhi na chhortc.

2i Ai aiidhe rAh-dikhanewalo, ki maoholihar chhaotte, aur i'mt ko Lignl jale lio.

26 Ai riyakar fturlho, aur Fariclo, tum par aiV.os! ki tum piyila aur rikabi ko lipar se saf karte, par we andar UU aur liur;ii m* liiiare hain.

£0 Ai andhe Farisi, rn pahle myala aur rikabi andar se saf kar, ki we bahar ho bhi tif hojj.

^T Ai riyakar l'aqiho, aur Farisio, tum par al'sus I ki tum MiiVdi phlri hiii nabron ki mauind ho, jo bahar m bahut jwliclilii iiia'li'mi licti h.iin, par bbitur murdou ki haddiim aur liar tarah ki uapikrta bbart hairj.

28 Isi tarah tum bhi ziliir mag

logoii ko raktba>.dikbai dute, j.ar i atiu

■ ir,;uvr (hararat wj bhare ho.

L'y Ai riyiikar l'uqiho, aur Farfrfo, tam par afeoe ! kyiinki Dabtog ki

Slahr u haikal H garat ki HATI', qabtvri Laniito, aur r&ttMwg ki goren snmvarte ho,

30 Aur kahte, Agar hnm «pot Wp- ihuli'LJ k* dirjon m e n hotc, to nabion ke khrin innj un kfi sbarik na bute.

31 Isi tarah tum RpM par gawalii dete ho, ki timi nabion ku qalilun k o farzand ho.

<M Pas apne bapliidou ka painiana bharo.

38 Ai sampo, aur ai samp ku Imuh- ch", tum jahuimaiiL ke 'azab se ky- unkar bhagoge?

34 lf Is liye, dekho, main nabion,

gen, aur laqiium ko tumharu pas bhejt* hi'm ; tum Ufi iiii'ii h hvznn ko qatl karoge, aur salib par khinctiuge, aur ba'zon koapiie'ibadat- khauon meg kore niiiroge, aur shahr

ba shafai sataoae:

35 Td ki sab rastbazon ka khun jo zaiuin par bahaya gaya tum pai aw, Habil rasiba/, ke klii'm se barakhiyah ko bete Kakariyaii ke khun lak, jise tum ne haikal aur ijurbaugah ke dar- luiyan ij:ni k iya.

S8 Main timi mo sach kalilii iuin, ki Yih sab kuchli is zamauu ke logoti . u- im j:''..

37 Ai Yarusalrim, ai Yanisalain, jo n;iliioh ko mar dalti, aur unhtn, jo lujh pas bheje gaye, pathrao karti hai, main ne kitni bir chaha ki tera larkun ku, jis tarah inurgi apne baeh- ch'jn ko paroy tale ikatthc kani hai, jam'a kanin, par tum hu ua chaha I

38 Dekho, tuinhara ghar tuinliat'i: liyo virau. clahora jala hai.

31) Kyi'inki uuiitj tum se kahta hnn,

ki Ab M tum rnujiiu phir na dekhogo,

jab tak ki kahoge, Mubarak hai wuh

jo KUudawand ke ndm par ata hai.

XXIV BAB.

AUR Yiau.' haikal se nikalkc cliahi gayi; aur us ko BLagird ns pas ie, ki usa haikal ki 'imaraleii dikhd- wen.

2 Y'mi'i' no uu se kahii, Tum yih sab

XXIV. Hator,jia Jfiwfl "e Sf/a h H. chizen, dekhte lio? main tum sc nacii kaht4 ln'iM, ki Yah.in ck p^itthar pat- thar par na chliutega, jo giraya ua

3 ^ Aur jab wuh Zaitun ke pahar par baithi tha, ns ke thagirdoti uo klialwat lucu us pax aku kaha, Ilaui >:o kah, ki yih kab boga? aur tfi« aua k,i aur zainana ke akldr lione ka ni- hIij'ui kyii hai ''.

i Tah Yisd' ne jawab mrn un se kahii, KliaLpardiir, koi uunheii giinuiili

i kare.

b Kyiiijki bohutera mtsra nAin par ;i.wcrige, aur kalungi), ki Main MauiJi luin; aurbahuton kuguinrah kftrejjge. Anr tiun laraion anr laraiuii ki afwiilion ki khabar Bimoge ; khahai- dar, mat gliabraiyo: kyiinki un sab biton ka hona zardr hai, par ab tak akhir mihiii hai.

'l Ki <|aum tiuum par, ruir badshii- hat Liidyliahat par charh awegi, KUI kal aur mari paregi, aur jagah jagah bhunelial awengo.

« Yih nah Stuohh nmsibaton ka shuftV hai.

!J Tob we tumlion luiyat nien d,il dengo, aur tumheB mar Halengo ; aur mere uam ke sabab sab qaum tum su kina rakhengi.

10 Us wai|t bahutere thokar kliaim- •10, aur ek dusre ko pakarwacg», aur ek di'isro so kina rakhega.

11 Aur bahnt jhiltho nabi uthenge, jo bah u ton ko guuirali karetige,

1^ Aur bc-dini ke barh jam H ba- hutou ki niahabbat tiumdi ho jaegi.

13 Par jo akhir lak taliuga, wuhl najitt pawega.

14 Anr badshdhat ki is kluislikha- bari ki luaaadi taniam duuya nicij hogi, ta ki sab qaumon par jawabi ho; bab akhir hoga.

15 Pas, jab tum u» winln karnewali makruh chia ko, jis ki khabar Daniol nabi ne- di, pak jagah merj ktttft deklioge, (jo parhe, bu sainajli U :)

'A'l'ihd karne ke liye MATI',

lfi Tab jo Yrthndiya mnj bon., pa-

hSmn par bhdg jA*n :

'l7-Aurjii kothe par lio, na utre ki

tijHic ghar s« kuclih nik&ln.:

18 Aurjnkhet men ho, pichbe na phirc, ki apne kapre le.

19 Par un par nisos, jo un dinon pehvAliAn.wurdudh-pilAnewAHAri bon !

80 Bo tam du'A mangu, ki t umbara bMgns, jdre men., vi eabt ke din na lio:

23 Kyiinki ua waqt aini bari mu- wbat hogi, ki dunyA ke shuru' ra ab tak na hal, baiki oa kabhi hogi.

JJ2 Aur agar we din ghatAe na jAte, to ek tan najAt na pAtA ; par b&rgusl il<.in ki khatir yn din ghatAe jAenge.

23 Tnb acar koi tura k kahe, ki Dekho, Masih yahdn, ya wahan bai; lu uh na mdnnA.

24 Kyunki Un'il-lie Ma.nili aur jlu'ithe i : i otneggej iur fcifle baw nishAn aur kardmaten dikhdwenge ki, agar bo sakld, to wc barguaidon ko bhi guuirdh karte.

25 Dekli n, main tumben Age hiokah il '-■

20 Pa«, agar we tumben knhen, ki Dekho, wuh bayaban men bai, to bahar na j%<>;' ya ki, dekho, waU. kothri men bai, to na/nAuiyo.

27 Kyiinki jaisi biili piirab se kfundbke ifii'lit'libiui tak chamaktt, walsa h) Ibn i A'dam ka anAbMhogd.

28 Kyiinki jnliAn murddr ho, wahAn giddh bhi jam 'a bonge.

29 T Undiiion ki musibat ke ba'd, turi. stiraj aiwlherA ho JA?kA, aur chdnd apni roslini na degd, aur sitere AsmAn M gir jacngc, aur AsiriAn ki qi'nvat.en hi! jAeggi r

30 Tftb Ibn i A'dam kd nislian As- nidn par 7-Abir hogA; aur un wnqt /.amin ke Btiro gbnr&tio chhnt.i pitenge, aur Ibn i A'dam ko ban qudrnt aur jalai ke sAth AsmAn ki badliorj par Ati uekhcnge.

31 Aur wu.li narsiii^c ke bare slior

30

XX f V.

M'ts i h fa

fa -a.t)i apne firishum ko bhejegA, aur we us ke bargu/.idon ko, chAron tarat se, AsmAn ki i» hadd se us hadd tak, jam 'a karengo.

,12 Ali anjir ku dnrakbt seok tamsil bikini, ki Jab us ki dali narni hoti, aur pmtto nlkalte, bom jinte ho ki (jaml nazdik bai :

33, Ini larah jab yib sab deklin, to jdno ki wuh nazdik, biilki darwdze bi par bai.

34 Main tum B6 sm.'li kubtd htin, ki Jab tak yili sal) kucbh ho na le, is zainAnc ke log gui-,ar na jaenge.

35 A'stnAn aur Kainin lal jAeijR'', pai incl'i baten bftrgbS M t:il''lJ.L'i.

30 % Lokin un din aur un gbari ko. men BA|t ke siwii, AHmdn ker Brifthtoj) tak koi naliin jantA,

37 JaisA Kiib ko dinon men h6i, waigf lii Iba i A'dam kA AnA bhl hega.

33 Kvi'mki jis tarali un dinon meij tufan ke .ign, kbAtc, pilu, by:ih fcarte, liyalic |ate tlu\ us din tak ki Kuli kisliti jwir cbarhA,

39 Aur na jAnte llie, jab tak ki tu- lari iya, wr tui mA ko Ia &.fi", fa! tarah Ibn i A'dam kAAnA bn I Dgi,

40 Do Admi kbet mm bongc; ek pakrft, $&wi chhora jAt-ga.

41 Do 'aitraton chakki plstian hoggl ; ck pakt-i. ihisvi ohhofi jicgt

42 'f Ts liye jagtc rahoi liynil- ■ tuiiiliuij ma'iiim nnliiij ki kie glinri tumliarA Khudawand dwegA.

43 Par'yib tum jantc bo, ki agRt phar ke itiAlik ko iiia'lum liota ki c.hnr kin ghari AwegA, to wuh jagtA rabtA, aur apne pliar moa «sndli mArni' n a dot A.

44 Ts liye tum bhi taiydr ralio: kyiinki jis gbari tumben gnm.ln na ho, Ibn i A'dam AwegA.

4t> Pas kann hai, wuh diyAnatdar anr hosbyar khadim, jine ua ke kbA- wind ne apne naukar cbakarnu par mnqarrar kiyd, ki waqt par unhei.i kbdna de ?

kl iiishiiiiiun.

MATI,

4t> Mubarak hai wuh khddim, jiwo us k;i khawind Akar aiad iii karte pawe.

47 Main timi sc aach balita hi'm, ki Wuh use apnu sab mal par mukhtar karegd.

48 Par agar wuli had khddim kpM <!il men kahc, ki M era khawind due imsn iler barta hai ;

4it Aur apne haiu-khidmaton ko m&rnc, aur rnatwdbm ke aath khane

phw lage;

50 Uh naukar ki khawind ini din dwegd, ki wuh us ki rah na take, aur m gharl, ki wuh uh. j:ino,

BI Aur om do tukre karke us kd hiaaa riydkdron ke sath mutjarrar karegd: waluiu rona aur ddnt piand bogd.

XXV BA'H.

U S waqt dsmdn ki bdtlshdhat dus kimwarion ki maniiid hogi, jo apne mash'ak-ii lebar dulhd ke isli<|bsU ke wdsto niklin.

9 Uti men pauch hosnyir, aur panah u.'ulan iliin.

3 Jo ndddn thifl, unhon no apne itiash'ale liye, magar tel sath na liyd ;

4 Par boHhydmn 06 &prjfl mash'alon ke nilh liartanon men tel liya.

o Jab dulba no der ki, nah i'inghue UtgfO, aur H gayiii.

'i A'dlii rat ko dbum machi, lii Dflfcho, dulba ala hai ; ua ke istiqbdl ko wiste niklo.

7 Tab un sab kimwdriim iic uthkar ajnii iiiash'alen durust kin.

5 Aur luidanun ne boahyirog H ■;aiid, Apne tol mori m bunsg bbi do, ki luiuiai'i mash'alen bujbi jdti liain,

0 Par hoshyaron ne jawab men kahd, Aisa na ho, ki hamdrc aur tuni- liare waate kilayat na kare: bihtar hai ki beelmewakm ke pas jdo, aur apne w&tte mol lo.

10 Jab we kburidiif! gayfj), dulhd a ■ il.iii'']i;i, auf vn jo taiydr tbin na ko

37

XXV. Ti'ron H tamsil.

siitb shadi ke ghar iui-ii f;ayirj : aur darwa/a bumi luia.

11 Picbhe <re dilari kuuwdridn bbi liiij, aur kahne lairin, Ai khudawand, ai khuddwaml, luimaic liye darwdza khol

12 Tab U3 iic jawab uicn kalut, Uairj tam u meh ubta l-r.ij, ki tum- ben uhin uahrjhanta.

19 la liye jagte ralio, kynnki timi uabiu jauto ki kami H iliu, ya kauri si glutrL lini i A'dam dwega.

14 f' Ki wuh us admi ki mduiud iiaijjis uo dt'ir mulk men anfar kfirte waqt apne iiaukaron ko bulakar uiiben apnd m di supurd kiyai

16 Bk ko pdncb tore, du.-trc ke do, tiftro ko ek ; bar ek ko us ki liydiiat ke itiuwaliij d i ya ; aur turt «Uar kiv:i.

16 't'ab jis sb jiaucb tore pdc tbe, jdkar aur ku den tarku panen, tore aur jiaiiia kiye,

17 Yiiuhm us ne bbi, jis« do iniie tlic, do aur kanide.

18 Par jis no ek pavd, gaya, aur Bjuafn khodkar apne kiudawand ki; rupiya ^ar diye.

10 Muddat ba'd, un uiuikaron kd klidwiuil dyd, aur un se bisdb loiie laga.

20 So jis no pdnch toro pac the, pdnch tore aur bhi lekar dyd, aur kfr> hd, Ai khuddwand, tu ne nnijhe paueh tore BOfflpe; dekb, main ne un ko siwa pdnch tore aur bbi kamair.

21 Us ku kliawind us us so kabd, Ai achcbhe aur diydnatddr naukar, shdbdsb 1 tu tb'irc, men diydnatddr nikla, main tujho babut cliizon pat ikhtiyar duriga: tu apne kbdwiud ki bliusiii men sbamil ho.

22 Aur jis ne do tore pdc the, wuh bbi dkar kahno bi^d, Ai khudawaml, di ae mujba do tore sompe : dekh, un ke siwd mairj ue do toro aur bbi kiyc.

23 Us ke khdwind ne us se kalisi.

A'khiri 'addlal MA1T,

Al Bohehbe aur diyiutitdar nauknr, ■hibiahl lu thops mag dlySnatdiF iiiklA, main tujhe bahut chtaen par ti.i.klii Ar kanlngfii atpM khnwind ki khushi ihcl idiiinil ha,

1M Tab wuh bhi, jis nc ek tora pAvA tbi, aku kuhuc Iag6> Al klui-lu- w siuri, «min tujlte «k sakbt aiisaj admi jautd thA, ki jaluin Bawa bayi, wahifl t.t'i kdttS, aur jahaij nahin chlntrayA, wnba-j jamta kaiti haj ;

■ ,.iih ila ii, aur .jakt- U.Tii turS, «amin mon rlihipAya; dekh, teri jo hai maujlSd hai

2tl I7s ke milik ne jaw&b mcn (B 88 kahi, Ai had nur mM IHMlkar, lii (M jAni, ki main waliin kaiti hiirj, janin nabfg IkivCl, nur wididn jaui'n kartd, jalniii naluri clihiupi:

27 Pn tujhe muniaib iha, ki mcre rdf&ya wirraf"i_i ko deti, ki main Ike apni mil sod tomat piii.

2d Bo Ib m jdh tera ehhi&kar, jis ] .As <i;i- ("V'' h ain iific do.

29 Kyuijki jis pin hadbh hai, mM diyft jAegA, aur D8 ki barhti liogi ; nur j:.- pai kuchb nahin, us se, wuh blii jo liil.l.ti'L ho, la liyi jiogA.

30 Aur ih iiikamuii' aaukar ko bi- liar audhare mag dai do: waiig ronA aur ildnt pUni hogi.

31 *j Jab Ibn i A'dam npne jalai

i, .iur sah p4b firiahte u k. eatb, tab wuh apa» jalai ke takht p*r baithega* :

32 Aur sali KUD Ut b ., I ki jaengl: nur j» taf

rorj ko bakrion se Jadi kai ok ko dusro ,«<■ juoA knn'jiii.

33 Aur bhertni ko dahi;.". rfon i;" basg kuari k.iregA.

84 Tab badshah u»h.erj jo us ke da- hjM baiQ, kahega, Ai maro Bip ke mubarak logo, ua bidahihat ke, jo dunya ki bunyad d&lte lii tumhnre liye taJv*' ki gaji, mfraa nu-ij lo:

85 K; -nki main bhukhi Min, timi m: liiuilir khAiia kliilava : main piyasi

XXV. HoAtpi/,

tliA, tum nc ituijho ]inni ]>iltiyA: ma% paroesi tlia, tum no mojha apuc gbar nicn utArA:

86 Nanga tbi, tum ncinujhe kajini imbindyA: bimAr tbi, tim M BWrl i'yibl:it ki : qaid nieii tliA, (um merc pie fa.

-'7 Ua Mwl rastbaa aae jivv.ib mcn kabegee, Ai ^budiwantL kafe bam nc tujhe bhdkhAdekhi.Bttt tcUtol kbili- j'A? yA piydsa, aur pial |iilAya P

38 Kah liam ne tujhe pardcddekba, (HUT avine ghar mcij utArAV yi

aur kajira pahiniyi?

39 Ilmu kab lujlie Mrair \:1 oiaci mcn dekhkar Uijb j4s &eV

40 Tali Hidshali uu M jawab mvij kabegi, Uabj tum se «ach kabtA biln, ki Jab tum ai men un aab m obboic bbitog men kg ok ke sAth kiya, to mere sAtli kiyri.

'l"! Tab ivuli liAin tarafwAlnu nc bhl kabega, Ai mal'iiiio, nnare sfenbne se us hanwaba ki ag man jAo, Jo Bhaitto nur us ko firishton ke liyc taiyir k:, gay! baii

12 Ky6nl;i mabj bkiikliA tbA, pat tum ae unobe kbioa ko iu diyA : pi- yaaa* tbi, tera m nmjM pftnl ua pi- JAya:

^3 l'aniobi tliA, tum ne mujlie apno giiar ulen aa utara: nangA lini, tara ne mujliu kapri oa [linbayt: bimir aur qaid men tbi, tum ne mari khabar na li.

44 Tab we bbj }«w4b imn ua b kabegge, Ai Kbudiwand, knb liam nc tujhe bbukbd, y* inyasji, jnl pardesi, yA n:iut;ii, ya biniAr, yi qaidi ciekha, aur torl khidmat ua ki 'i

i» Tab wuli uiiherj jawib men ka- hegA, Maiis tum H wicl kabti hun,ki Jab tum ne mpro in eab bo cbfiefe bhAiou meg se ok ke Bit h na kiya, u> mere Hit h bhl na kiyA.

46 Aur we bamesha ke 'azAb men jiengo : par rfctbiz bamesha kl zin- ilr.'i DMQ>

Manlh par 'U? fltiltid.

XXVI J1AT5.

AOB yi'in hiia, kijab YisA' yili sah baten. kar cinika, fc.t us ne apne ab&gtrdOB H kabii,

MATI', XXVI. 'J./» i •: «i *•;.»>■<" U aitwtf.

jahle dui, shigirdoii ne Y isu' pas ikar aim Ke kaha, To kahin cMhti hai ki haiii tero liye &cah taiyarkiire», ki ti't uae khae'.'

2 1 uh" |&nte ho ki do rrwbaM 'M i 18 Us ne kaha, Shahr Enen fulanc

{asah iioyi.nur lbiiiA'dsm Imwiikk i: ■ i, l i salib jiar Brffichaj4we.

8 Tab sardar kahiu, aur faqih, nur qaum ke huzurg, Qayafa nama .sardiir kabin ke ^har meij ikalthe liiie,

4 Aur sahih ki,"ki Ylwu' ko ftttofe pakarke mtfr $tteg.

5 Tak uuho'n ne kaha, Td ko tubin. ua lio ki lo#m mi'ij l'nsv.l machn.

<i ^ Jis w«f(t Yisu' liail'amyi mvn S 'i'iiH:-."i',,n knrlii ke gbar nu'u iba,

7 l'"k 'aurat sang i manuar ke 'ilr- ilan nien oltaatl 'itr ua [)is Jai, aur jnb'wuh khine baithi, us ko sir par dbati.

8 TJs ke sbigird yili dekhkar kbaTa li'.kf kabut laga, K*he ko yth baftada klmrch hiii?

B Kvi'inki yih 'itrbarcdam par bik la, aur wuli muhlajou ko diya jati.

10 Visi'i* ne yih jtittkar unaeo kaki, Kyon. is 'aurat ko taklif dek hal ni (M t', initg iatb nok kam kiya.

11 Kytfulsi mulitaj hninesha tem- 1 1 A r»1 B&tb baiii; par main bameski luinharcsith na rahunga.

(L' Ki us ne jo meru badan ]iar 'i! rihala, to yili mere kafan ke liyc kiya bal.

/:> Main timi se «aeli knlita biitj.ki Tamani dunyi men, jabati kabin is Injil ki manadi hogi, yih bhi,io us ae kiya, is ki yadgari ke Eya kaba bte«L

1 1 *i Tab mi barnh mag bb, ek ne, jla ki nim Yahidib Iaqariyotf tha, turdarkihimm ks pas jakar kahi,

16 Jn maiQ usa tttmbm pakarwi dufl, tojnujbe kya doge? Tab unuon ne us »e tlsrupiya ki iu/ar kiya.

16 Aur wuli ub waqt seuikepakaf- uiiiji ki: liyc (pilui dhuudbta tba.

17 ^ So, be-kbamiri rotion ki'idke

skakbs fwlfi jakar us se kaho, ki D«t4d

farmiia hai, Mcra waot nazdik pa- huneba ; main apuc siu'igii.lou smnet tere yahan 'id i fosali karOEgi,

1!) So jaisi Yinu' ne aiiaginhiii ku luikiii kiya tha, wc bajd lac, aur foaaii laijir kiyi,

20 Jab iba» biit, wuh mi batabon ke >&fa khane liaitha.

21 Jab we kba faho the, us M kaha, Maig tuni se sauh kali ia hiitj, ki Tum meij soek raujhe i^karvva dega,

22 Tab we nihayat dilgir hiie, aur liar ek uu mci] fio us ku kaline la^A, Ai Khuiiawaiid, kya main htin ?

23 Us ne jawab mon kaha,.ln mera s:iih tab4q tuetj htitli daliii liiii, wobi

ujIm> ia;,.irwA dfgft.

'24 Ibu i A'dam, jis tarah us ]:•■ haqq meg liklia hai, jdla hai: l'.kiu ub shaklis par afejs, .jis .so I bn i A'dam giril'tdr l;anvnya j&ta; agar wiih shakhs paida na liota, ua kfl liy hi},i':ir thi.

26 Tab Yalniilah ne, Jo UB ki )>a- karwiiutwiilii tha, jawib nifii kabft, Ai IJnbbi, kya mai^huii J Usneknha, Til ne Ap hi kaha.

26 T Un ke kltSte waqt Yisii' do roti li, aur harakat maagk» tori, phir sluigirdon ko dekar kahi, Lo, kbao; yih mera Iwdau hai.

27 J'bir piyali lekar ehukr kiya, aur uiiheti deiiar kaha, Tum sah i.« iwv ne piu ;

28 Kyauki j-ib mori labfi liai ; a'ne, oaye'abo kii laini, jo bahutoti .e gimihon ki mu'al1! ke hye bahaya

jati.

2fl Main tum se kabti kiin, ki Anulir ke pliiii l;a ras phir it;i (»iurj^, us ilin tak ki tumhire silh ap ki b&cUb&h&t men nayi na piiin,

A!fi mag Kutik UjfabwL MATI',

30 Phir wegitgak e Zaitun kepahdr ko gaye.

31 Tnb YisiV ne un se katai, Tum sab isi rit mara sabab thokar khAogo . kvi'mki hkhd hai, ki Main garariyeko imirunga, aur galle ki bheren littur hit.ta.i- ho jAengi.

32 Lalim iiniiij apue ji ut.hne ke ba'd tum kg iga JaKl ki> jruingA.

83 Patrua nc jawab merjUBse kahA, Agarchi sab teri babat l-hokar khacii, pflT main kabin Jaokar mv khafiijga.

34 Yiad' nc ussekahd, Main tujli a sudi kfthtfi ln'ih, ki Ti'i isi rat, murgki bAn j di ne ke pahle^tfo bar mori iaiir karega.

36 l'atnis iip as sn katai, Agar tere s.ifh inujhe marnd bhi zarlir ho, tau lilii tera itikaf na kart'mga. Aur sab shagirdon iie bhi yih kafan.

36 K Phir Yisu' un ku sath Gat- semani n ani ek rm-upim meij AyA, aur shagirdon bc kahA, Yahdij bnilho, jab tak main wahan jakar dn'a niiingiin.

87 Tabun ne Putra» aur Zabadi ke do b'.'i.i- cith liyc, aur ganigin aur Hi- kayat, dilgirhotie laga.

3b* Tab us ne un sc k a ha, ki MerA dil nihayat gaingin hai, baiki meri iiiiiiit ki m baiat liai : tum yahdn thah- ro, aur merc sath jAgtc raho,

:i:i Aur kuchh ago barhko ituirili ku bal giri, aur diVa mdngte huokahA,ki Ai mete BAp, agar ho sake, to yih ni- yala mujh «e srussar jAe: tau bhi mori khwahisb nahin, baiki teri khwahish ko mutablq ho,

40 Tab shagirdon ke pis AyA, aur imhen. ao£e pakui' Patrua #e kalid, Kya tum mere sAih ek glumta naluri jig eakte ?

11 J&gO, aur du'i maiigo, la ki ini- titain uwii ua (lajo : n'.h to iiiiista'idd, par jism suat hai.

■J'J Phir us nc do bara jAkar duit mangf, aur kabA, ki Ai inure Uap, agar nici-p pine ke bagair yih pivala 40

XXVI. Masih H

jinujh H nabi 3 guzar sakti, to teri

| matai ho.

48 Us ne Ake phir unhon sotc jm'ivA : kyiinki un ki ankhen niud «e bliari tldn.

44 Aur unhen chhorkar pliir gavA, aur wuhi bat kahkar tiari bAr du'A mangi.

45 Tab apne shAgirdori ke pifl Akar un se kabi, Ab sote raho, aur Aram kam ; dek bu, wuh ghari a pahunchi, ki I bn i A'dam gunaligiron ke hath hawdla klyijiti hai.

46 Utbo, cbalen : dckho, jo vnujhe pakarwdui hai, u:i/.dik hai.

47" \ Wuh yih kah hi rahd thA, ki dekho, Yahi'idab.jo un birahon men so ek tliA, AyA, aur us ke wit.h ek bap hliir talwAren aur IdthiAn liye, sardar kaiiinnn aur qauin ke buaurgon ki taraf se A pahuiK'.hi.

48 Us ke pakar wiaewik w unherj yih kalike pati diyi thd, ki Jise main chiirorin, wubi hai; u w pakar lemi,.

49 Us ne wuijhin Yi.sti' pas Akar kaha, Ai Habbi, salam ; aur UH eluiiu liya,

50 Yiaii" ne asa kahd, Ai miyAn, tu kahc ko AyA ? Tab uuhun ne pas Akar ViMiV par bati. dnlc, aur UBS pakar liya.

51 Aur, dckho, Yiuu? ke eitbioj] men *u 8^ ne hith barbAkar apni tal- war khincai, aur eardir kAhin ka

nikar [iar ebaldkar ua kA kan ari diyS.

52 Tab Visn'ne us se katili, ApnJ talwAr miyAn mon k-ir; kyiinki sab jo tahvdr khiachte hain, ttlwii hl le oiire (ienaa.

58 Kya n'; ualiia jduld, ki main afabj apne BAp se ming sakta hun, aur wuh lirisbluu ko liArah turnau se «iyAda

irc liyc hazir kar degi V

54 Par n&wlabton ki Wt, ki yun- hin houA zariir hai, tab kvunkar pari

55 Uhi ghai'i Yisil' logog fe kahne

pukarivdi/d jdni. MATI',

lagi, ki Tum, jaise chor ke Bye, tal- ivaren nur hiihian. lekar mere pakarao ko nifelo- lio ? main liar roa haikal men tiiinlniri: s'lili batyhka ta'liin detA tk£, pur tum ne mujhe na pakrd.

56 Lckin yih aab is liye liua, ta ki nahiorj ku uawishte piirc bon. Tab aab shAgird use eli)»>rke bhitg gaye.

57 T fto jiuhon ne Yisu' ko pakrA, wo-uso QayafA dAhi sarddr kAhin pas 1« gaye, jahAn faqih aur bu/

the.

58 Patrus dfir ddr us ke rjfehltti MT* lilr kAhin ke (rji*1' tak chalA Bayi, aur andar jAke naukanm ke sdth bakhil, ki dekhe, ki Akhir kya liota hai.

59 Tab sardAr kAhin aur btworg nur sari majlis Yiati' par jhnthi gawAbi dlniiidhne lag«, ta ki oh uulr daleu ;

00 Par na pil; aur aflaronl hahut jhtithe gawah ae, par kni hat na thahri. A'khir, do jhtitlie gawAhon nc akar,

'i L Kali A, ki Is nokaha hai, M Main Khud&ki haikal kodlii sakti, aurphir tiri din men nse banA saktA lilin,

62 Tab sardar kAhin ne uthkar us m; kahi, T u kuchh jawab nahin detd ? ve tujh par kya gawahi detc hain ?

63 Par Tisu' cbup raba, Tab sar- dar kAhin ne us se kaha, Main tujlm zinda KhudA ki qasam detd liuri, ki agar ui Masih, Kbuda ka Beta hai, tfl hain se kali.

64 Yimi' tifi us se kahA, HAn, wuh JO i'i kahta hai : baiki main tum se kahLa iiiin, ki Is ke ha'd tum lbn i A'diun ko Qadir i madu ki ilahini taraf baithu, aur AsmAn ke badnlan par Atc dokhoga,

lio Tab sardAr kAhin ne apnc kapri' phArkar kahA, ki Yih kufr kali chukd lial ; ah baincrj aur g&wil) kyA zartir' tum ne Ap us ka kufr suna.

66 Ali UiinhAri kya salAh? Unhoi_ 11« jawab men kaha, Wuh <]atl ke lAiu. hai.

67 Tab uuhog ne us ke munh par

XXVII. Patrus H intcdr karnA.

thuka, aur UM ghunsd mArA, aur diu;- ron ne use tamAiaha rnArki; kaha, ki

68 Ai Masih, hamen nubdwat so batA, ki kis ne tujhe mArA?

69 t Jab Patrus bahar dalan men baithA thA, ok laut) d i ne us pan Aso kahA, Tu bhi Tisu' .ialil! ke sath tha.

70 Par us no mil: ke samhne inkAr karko kahA, Main nahin jantA ki ti'i kya kahti hai.

71 l'hir Jab wuh usare ki taraf bAhar chala, ek diisri uc uso dokokar un se jo wahAn tbe kaha, ki Yih bhi Yisti' Simti l.i1 sath tha.

72 Tab us nc qasaiu khAko phir in- kAr kiya, ki Main us ahakht ko nabirj jAntA.

"'i Thori der ba'd unhon ne jo wi« hAn khare tlie Patrua pA& Akc kaha, Boshakk tii hhi un nun so hai, ki turi buli tujhe aahir k arti hai.

74 Tab us no la'nat bhejkar aur qa- sam khAkar kahA, Main is shaklis KO iiahiii jantA. Wunhin inurg ne bang

75 Tab Patrus ko Yisu' ki bdl. yAd Si, jo us no us se kahj thi, ki Murg ke liAng dene se pable u'i tiu bar merA inkAr karegA. Wuh baliar jake air zar royi,

XXVII BA'B.

JAB subb. h d i', sab sardAr kaliinon anr rraum ke buntrgon ne Yisd' ki bAliat salAh ki, ki uso kyiinkar cjatl kart'ij :

'l Phir SM handhkar hAhar lo gayc, aur Puntius Pilatim liAkim ke hawala k iya.

3 ^1 Tab Yahv.dAh, jis ne use pa- kanvA diyA tha, dekhkar ki us ka q*tl ki iiukm huA, pachhtiyA, aur wuh tia riipiyc sardir kihinon aur btusorgog pAs pher laya,

i Aur kahA, Main tic gunAii kiyA, ki hc-gunah ko uatl ko liye pakanvA- ya. We bulu, Hamen kyA? tu jan.

5 Tad wuii nipiyo baikal ineu

Masih hi PUatm ketiyc dni. MATI', phenkkar chala gayd, aur jdke dp ko jihdnsi'di.

6 Par sarddr kdliinon ne ru futr» lekar kabd, luhep klu17fi.no moa ddlnd rawd nahin.ki yih kbiin kii dam hai.

7 Tab uuhoij H «atth karke un ru- ■ ■■ i iimuLdr kd khet, pardorierj ke

yrirne ke liye, kharfda.

8 Is sabab d'j tak wuh khet. Khun M khet kahlatf hai

O Tab wuh jfi Yaramiyih rabi ki marital kabi gayA thi, ptirA hiia, U Unbori ne wuh tis rupae liye, ua ki thahntf bui ofroat, ji.-s ki sirnal ban) iurdel lucii H ba'zon 06 t hahrdi ;

10 Aur uuboii ne wuh rfLpae knm- lidr ke khet ke wdstc diyc, jnisa Klm- dawand ne mujhe formdyd.

1 1 Tliir Yisii' hakim Ke nibnrti klia- nl Ihd: aur lidkim uc oa Be pii.'Lha, K ya U'i Yalmdioii kd Badshdh lini? Ywtf ne un sc kabd, Hifl, W thik kaliiil lini.

12 Aur us wan, t saruar kdliin aur buang B* pr faryad kar rahe the, par wuh kucbli Jawab na detd tlid.

1^ Tab Plldtus ne uso kaha. Kyd tfi ualiiri .«unta, ki y e iujli par kitnl l^awdhidn dftte Lilin ?

14 Par us ne us ki ok bat ka bhi ja- wab na iliyd; chundiiehi hakim ne i.iln:! ta'ajlub kiyd.

lj) Hakim ka diatur thi, ki bir 'W kl khdtir ck bandhui.jiBe we elidluc, ehtior deta thi.

](! Ua wai|t uu kd Harnhluis ndme ek nmahbrtr bandln:

17 So jab wo ikali lu.- t» ■ ne un-se- katul, Tum kias chahte bo,H maijituinlidre liye ohhardu£ ? Parah- bds, yd Yisii' ko, jo Masih kabldtd hai ?

18 Kyiinki wuh samajh gayd, ki unhon ne use ddh sp lunvala kiyd.

19 % Aur jab wuh masmu! par bai- tlid, us ki joru nc use kaili bheji, ki i'ii is caatbac bc kuchh kain na rakh; kyiinki main nc Aj kliw.'iL meii us ke «aba b lahut lasdi'a pai.

42

XXVII Mattk par /«('■•« hottd,

20 Lekin Bax4&T kdliinnrj nur lm- zurRorj ne logon ko uhhdrd, ki Parab- bas ko mdng Ten, aur YinV ko qatl kini-n.

j 21 Hdkim ne jibirim n kabd, Tum in doiimi men fif kise clidiita lio, ki main tumlidre liye chhor diin V Wfl IkiIp, BarabbdH ko.

22 Pildtus ne un se kabd, Phir Yi- Kii' ko, jo Maeih kabldtd hai, main kyd karuQ ? Uli sabbon ne us se ka- ha, Use salib de.

23 Hdkim na kabd, Kyiin 't us ne kyihadf ki? l'ar imh<m ne aur bhi .'liilliil^.' kaha, ki !*«•? wilili da.

24 f Jali l'iidlus ne deklid, ki kuehh bau naliiu nafta, Laiki aur bhi bullar liold hai, to ji'ani leke Ltiir I ■■■ ii^o apnt hdlh dhoe, aur kabd, Main is rdstbdKkektji'mpeiidk lilin ; tum jdim.

25 'l'ab aab logosj ne jtmtb d»b knhd, Us kd kMn ham j»r, aur ham- dri aulad nar bo.

2(i T Tab ua nc Baiabbaa ko un ke liye chhor <liyd, aur Yi^i' ko kor.- uiarkai- l.'awdla kiyd, ki salib pir khim'mi jawe.

27 Tab hakim ke wipdbioT. ne Yi^ii' ko diwaQ-khaii« m«g (e jiiW apnl latodm gumb us ke giri jam'a ki.

2H Aur us ke kapre utdrkar use qirmii!i jiairdlian pabindyd.

29 U AurkdnUm kd tdj ban i ke a i n nikha, aur ek sarkandd us ke dahine hdth inen diyd, aur us k.' age ghatne tekkar us pai thatthd mdrke kabd, AJ Yahudion ke Hddftbdli, Saldm!

80 Aur us par tluika, aur wuli uar- k.'iii'ia lekar us ke sir pai nidrA.

31 Aur jab wc ua w |hiitj»jbi kar cbuke, t» Oli )nirdli!in ko llfi par BC afairkar phir tim ka kapre use pahi&ae, aur aalih parkhrnohfie ko use to ohale. Jab bdbar jite tlie, unhon nc ek Qurf n! ddmi Shania'nn uame ko pliyS : uw begar jiakii, ki us ki salib u$hd le cbalo.

U* io ia'na dm&. MATI',

•13 Aur pk iunqdm (idlgatA n Ani c

ya'no, kliopri ki jabali par, pahanehka,

34 \ Titt niilA Hud sirka w pinc ko diyd : us ae chakhkc na chAka ki jiif.

35 Aur unlmi) ne usc salib jrar kbiiichd, aur ub ke kaprun par chitthi daMke unhen bdnt Hya, ta ki to nabi iip kahA t h A, pfirft DO, ki Uuhon nc roere knpre Apas incn hnnt liyi1, aur ii ii T,> lilu'is ]i;it uliittiii ddli.

30 Phir wahAn tiaithkous U iiigah- bdni ksmo lage;

87 Aurus ke tjatl kd tabah likhkar us ku sir se i'uicfid iAng divA, ki Y1H Visi" YAllU'Dl'O^ KA' liA'D- SHA'H HAL

38 Anrus ke sdth do chor bbJ salib

Rar fchbjcha gaya, ek dahJJae, diisrd (en,

30 • Aur Jo idhar udhar ae f&te, sir biiakar une makin ia t kari" tln\

40 Aur kahte the, Wali! Tri jo baikal ka dliAiiewnhl, aur tiu din iuri; I m; i .\uiiii hai, Ap ko baciid. Agar n'; Klmdd kA Betd hai, salib par uc utiir il.

-U Yiinhirj sarddr kdhinorj nc bbi (aqiboa nur buzurgun ke sdth thatlkd niiii'kn kaha,

42 la cc auron ko bachdyA, par Ap ko nahin bachA sakti; agar Isrdcl kd B&dahdli hai, to ah wi pai se utar iwa, to haru oi jiar SmAn ttwagge,

43 TJa no KhudA par bharosA rak- lia ; a^ar wuli us ko chdhtA hai, to wuh CO us ko rhhurdwe : kyfmki wah kahrd tha, ki Main KhudA kd ltcta lui U.

44 Isi (arali n-e ehor bhi, jo uh kp t&th salib pat kkirjchc gayo the, usc ta'na mdrte thc.

45 Tab chhathweij ghantc m lekc tmraj ghaute tak, edri tarfftflrfr par ondhart chiia gayi.

48 Nawen gnanteka riarib, Yisu'ns hare ehor Be chilldkar kahA, EH, Kli, lama Babaqtanf ? ya'ne, Ai merc Khn- 43

XXVII. N'ttiit. hi. d'ifi' kiy&jano. dd, ai mete TThuda, lu w. kyim mujln' dibor diyt ?

47 "Un nien &e ba'zon M Jo w;didii khafc the sutikar kalid, ki wuli liiyaw ko pukdrtd hai.

i& U'ujiliiu un mejj aeek ue daur- kar badai liyd, aiir airka moa bbi- goyd,aur narknt par rakhkur use cini- sdyi.

40 Bdrtior, no kahd, nah jd, ham dckbcn, Iliyds utw cbhurauo AtA hai, ki nabin.

50 Tf Aur Yitu' nc ph'ir bare shot ae cldlldkar jdn di,

51 Aur, deklio, haikal ]fi r i'i|*T se iiichc tak phat jiuyA ; aur za- miu kdmpi, aur jiatthar taruk gaya;

52 Aur qabreu khul gayin ; aur bahui Idahen jidk Jogon ki, jo drdra uion thc, uthin :

53 A or lis ko uthne ke ba'd, qabrorj sp nikalkar, aur nmqaddas Bhahr merj jikar, haluitno ko Daur ain.

54 Jab aiihaddr ne aur jo ns ke Hdth Vist'i' ki iiigahbdni karte tho, liliiiiirl^al aur wira majard deklid, k> iiihaya* dar gaye, aur kahiio lage, Yili iio^hakk'Kliudd kA lVt.A tliA.

55 Aur wahdfl bahu t si 'auraleij, jo Jalil BoYisiVkc pichho pichhc uski idiiiituai kaiti di Uiin, diir bc diikii r'ahiri:

56 Un nico Mariyaui KagdaHnt, aur Ya'qrib aurYiiaee kimd Miriyam, aur Zabadi kp beton ki lud tlilu.

57 Jab Bhfiro hfii, Yusuf liAme Ara- matlyd kA ok daulatmnud, jo YisiV k;i bhi sbAgird tlid, Avd.

58 Vs ne l'ildtUH pda jAke Yist'i' ki IAbIi mAnpi. Tab FilAttis ue hnkiu diyd, ki law'n OBB den.

59 Yasuf M Idsh lokar ariti aAf chadar men lapeti,

60 .\kc apu] uayi ijabr taen,jo cha- tin merj khodf tbi, rakbi : aur ok hhiiri ]iatthar qabr ke muuh ]>ar dhal- kdke chala ttyi,

til Aur Mariyani Magdaliui aur

Ushejii'U.n- MATI',

di'isri Mariyatn wahin qabr ke mfanhmi baithi thin.

62 T Di'usrc roz, jo taiyiri ko din ke Iwi'd hai, simlar k.ilimun aur r'ari- uion nr milkar 1'iliUun ku pas jam 'a hoke kaha, ki

93 Ai lihmiiiwiind, hamen yad hai, ki wuh dagabaz apnc jito ji kaliti tha, ki Main tin din beM ji uilnin^a.

64 Is liyo huktu kar, ki tisre din tak qabr ki mgahbdni karen, na ho ki iis ki-sliagird rit ko akar ubc churi lo jien, aur logon se kahen, ki Wuh murdon nn-n sejiuthi; to yih pichkli fa reli |ialilc so had tar hngA.

65 PilAtus ne un se kaha, Turuhire pas pahrewale hain; jiikc magdPJ bhur us ki niyahbani kara

C6 Unhon nc jikar iis patther pai iimlir kar di, aur pahre bithakar qabr ki nigahbani ki.

XXVm RA'B.

SAUT ke ba'd, jab hatta ke pahlc din pau phatue lasi, Mariyam Mngda-Kni aur diisri Mariyam qahr ko delcsoe ain.

2 Aur, dekho, ek bati blnmckal aya thi: kyriijki Khudawand ki firishta atasan H utarke aya, aur patthar ko qabr se dhatkike us par baitli gaya,

Ji lis ka chihra bijli k.i si, aur us ki BORB& sufwl bar f ki si thi ;

4 Aur ub ko <lar H n igali ban kamp uthe, aur murde se h n gaye.

6 Par firishte ne mukhitib hokar un 'aurjitiin M kaha, Tum mat daro: main jinti hiin ki iinn Yisii' ko, JQ silih yur kbiiiclia gaya, dhundhti ho.

ti Wuh yahari naiiiu hai; kyiinki jaisi us ne kaha tha, wuli uthi hai. A'o, yih {agah, jahit) Khudiwaml pari thi, dekho.

7 Aur jald jiikc lu ke ubajprdon so kaJio, ki Wuh murdon men so ji u Iba li.ii: aur, dekho, wuh tumharo Ago Jali! ku jati. hai; wahAn tum usu de- khoge: dekho, main ne tumben jati u iya.

44

8 We jald qabr par ae hara khaiif aur hari khushi ke sith rawina hukar us ke shagirdon ko khabar deno dati- rin.

0 T Jab we us ke ahigtrdarj ko khabar dene jati thi D, dok lio, Y bui' nnhcn mila, aur kaha, Salam. Unhon ne pak ikar us ko qndnm pafcre, aur use sijda kiya.

10 Tal> Viisu' ne unbon kahii, 3Iat daro; par jiiku iniiro bhaion Re kaho, ki dalil ko jiwen ; wahan mujlie de- kheuge.

1 1 ■[ Jab wc chali jiti thin, dekho, jwilirowilon men s« kitnon no shahr men ikar eab kuchh io huii tha, BM- ddr kdhiuon so bayan liya.

12 Tab uiilum ne lni/uigon ke sdth ikatthe hokar salali ki, aur un pahl*- w&lon ko bahut nipae diye,

18 Aur kaha, Tum kaha ki Hit ko jab ham soto tlie, un ke nhigird ake ubo ohuri le gaye.

14 Aur agar yih hakim ke kan tak pnhunclie, batu use sauijiiiikiii ui:hI.-h khatre so baehii leii^e.

15 Chuninolu unhon nc rupafl Ifl" kar sikhlane ko muwi)i(| kiya: aur yih bitaj tak Yalnidicn ineu mauhMr hai.

16 f Phir wc gyiirali sliisird Jalil ke us jialiar ko, jahan Yisii' ne unlieij farmiyi thd, gaye.

17 Aur use dekhkar unhon e ko sijda kiyi; par btt'zo dufcdhc meji r:dii',

IS Aur YisiV ne pas ikar uu uo kaha, ki A'sman aur /ninin khtiyir lmijiie diy:i nyi ;

10 l' Is liye tnui jiikur sab qaumon ko Bhigird karo, aur imlirn Bip 6W l'ete aur Kiih i Quds ke nain se bap- biama do,

20 Aur unhon sikhl&o, ki un sab batas !,;Lr' i'11 k& niairj ne rum ko hukm diyi hai, 'amal karen j aur, de- kho, main zamane ke taiuiiu titmu (ak bar roz tumhiro silb liari. A'min.

MAEQUS KI' INJIL.

I BA n.

TTHUDA' ke Betc STtatf Masih ki XV iojii k& riiuru';

2 JaUA nabioit ki kitdhon men. lilthd hni, ki Dokii, main apne rasul ko tere Age biiejti hrtii ; wuh teri rah ko tere Mimlini' uiyar karegA.

3 Bayahiiii men ek pukdrnewdle ki ti.wdz hai, ki Klmddwand ki rAh ko

'■s: uh ke raston ko sidha karo.

4 Ydhanud baydban hi men bap- ti-i,i:i detA iba, aur -imabofl ki mu'dfi I- Hye taubit ke baptisma lu manadi kartd iba.

5 Aur aari sarzamin i Yahi'idiya kr- am- Yarusalarn ke rahnewale ua pAi niknl ir, aur wibhon ne apne gtuiAhon kd iqrdr karke Yardan ke daryd men 01 B6 baptismu pav;t.

6 Aur YfirmiiiiA ttnt ke lidlon ki pofihak pahino, aur chamre kd katnar- TwiTid npni kamar men handhe tba, aur tiddi aur jangli shahd khara tba ;

7 Aur maiiadi karld t ha, ki Mew pichhe ck mujli se zorawnr dtd hai, aur main i3 ]iii<i nahin ki jhukke us ki jiition kii iasma kbolun.

H Main no to tumben paul sc bap- tisma diyd; par wuh tumben B&h i Q?ids ;»■ baptitma degd.

9 Aur uabin dinoii men aisa hua, ki Yinu' ne NAmmt i .Talil nc Akar Yardan mcij Vuiiaiina ke liat h u bap- tisma paya.

10 Aur jyiLiiliiTi wuh ]*ani so bahar ay;i, us ne asindn ko kimia, aur Mh ko kabutarkl manind apne d par utarte dekhA;

11 Aur dsmdn ee ek Awdz di, ki Tu

45

merd 'aziz BotA hai, jis ro main rdzt hiin.

I- Aur Ruh uw) filfaur bayahin meii lc gayi.

13 Aur wuh waiidn baydbdn men ckAIis din tak rabke Shait&n eu &■/.- mAyd gayd; aur jangal ke janwamij ko sdth tahtd tlia ; aur firishte us kl khidmat karto the.

14 Pliir Ytihannd ki giriftdri ke Wd YisiV ne, .Jalil mm fte, Kkudd ki badshdhat kl khush-klialNm ki manddi ki,

15 Aur kabd, ki Warjt pi'irA hild, aur KliutU ki baduhdiiat nnzdik &f; tauba karo, aur Tnjil par imdn lAo.

lfi Aur Jalil ke dsrvA ke kiiidnf phirte hi've uane Shama'dn, aur us ko bhii Andryds ko, darya morj jii! dai tv dekbd: ki wc machhw(> the.

17 Yisti' ne nnhen kahd, Tum men pfchhe chalo Ao, aur raain tumlicn ailinictn ke macliiiwe bauduijgd.

18 Aur we wunhin apne jdlon ko chhorkar uh ku pielilie lio liyo.

19 Aur walidii ao thori durbarhke us ne Zabadi ke bete Yu'ipih, aur us ke bhii Yi'ibanna ko bhi, klakti par apne jdkirj ki maranunai karle dakhA.

20 Aur dlfaur unhen biddyd, aur we apno bap ^alwdi ko kidJiti men inazdiiron ko sdth ohborke us ke piclibe lio liye.

21 Tabwe KaiUrnrflium men ddkbit h(ie; aur wuh fllfaur saht ko din k o 'Lbadat-kluine men jdke ta'lim dene lagd.

22 Aurweuski ta'iimaehairAnlu'ie, ki wuli mi ko, iklitiyrirwale kl tarah, na. faqihon ki mAnind, ta'lim detd thA.

Masih ki baAutere MA1IQUS, N.

23 Waluin un ke "ibadatkhdne men c k sliakhs tkd, jis men ek ndpak nih thl; wah y lin kaliku eTiillayd, U,

24 Ai ilrt* .Ndsari, clihor dej ha- mcn tuju ec bya kini ? tii haluan, balak kamu aya hai V main tujhe jdnta hilD. ti ti\ kaun hai, Khuda ka (juddna.

25 Yisii' no nn danl/i, aur kaba, k Chup, aur us iupi.i *e nik;i] ja,

26 Tab napak ruh use marorku, RUT bari awa/, ^u ihillaku, iu niknl njrii

27 Aur wo Bab hair&n noka Apu ii'rn yih kali lu hi'ie bah» karte tbe, ki Yih kya hai ? yih ka.isi nayi tftlim hai? ki wuh a£p&k riilmu ko hhi iijl.i tlar se bukni karta hai, anr we us ko juatiti hain.

28 Wunhin us ki shuhrat dalil k: chdron taraf pbail gayi.

29 Aur we lill'aur 'ibadatkhdne w nikalke Ya'qiib aur Yiihaiina ko s:illi Shamit'un aur Andryas ko ghar men

gam

80 Aur Shaina't'in ki sis tap se pari ihi ; tab unhon dc filfatir us ki khabar UM di.

31 Ua nn dke aur us ka hath pa- kaike use uthaya; aur fill'aur ue ki tap j:L'.' ia! i, aur ua DB uu ki khidmat ki.

32 Sliam ko, jab siiraj ili.b gaya, saru bir;iarrm aur uu tab ku jii: deo ■ ■liarhi: lho us pas Ide.

33 Aur sdrd shahr darwdze par jam 'a hiid tha.

84 Us ne balutan ko, jo tarah taiab ki bimariun w.<-i\ giril'tar the, abtigi kiyd, aur bahu t se deon ko nikahi ; aur deon ko bolu e ua diya, kyiinki unhon ne use pahelidna lli;i.

itu Aur baru tarku ku.chb.rat rahte, wuh uthko nikld, aur ok wirdn jagali men jdko wahan du'd niiingi.

'Mi Aur SbatnaMn aur ua ko sdthi ub ke pfchhe enak'.

37 Jab unhon ne uae paya, to ua sejus mafliij ku kaba, A i L» t o, tere gunah kahd, ki Tujhe sab dhiindhtc hain, j mu'al'hiie.

marizon ko changii harnA.

38 Ua no unheij kahd, A'o, aspds ko shahron men jawen, la ki maiti wahan hhi nian adi karun; kyiinki main bn liye nikla biiij.

39 Aur wuh sdri Jalil ke 'ibadat- khduoy men mauddi karta, aur daon ko d u r karia tlia.

40 Tab ek kurhi no aku us ki uiiu- nat ki, aur us ko Mfeoh&a Rliutiu; (ek- knr us so lxi]a, ki A^ar tii chahe, to mujhe pdk kar sakta hiii.

41 Yisii' no itu par rahm karke hath barhaya, aur use chiiiia, aur us sc ka- hii, ki Main chahhi lum ; tii piik lio.

42 Yih bat kabto hi uu kd kurh ja;a rahd, aur wuh pak hl\a.

43 Aurusne usc takid karke jaM ruklisat kiyd,

44 Aur ushc yih ktilui, H Pukh.kisi kc kuokh mat kah, baiki ja, aur apno ta,in kdhin ko dikhd, aur tpne pak hono ki babat un chfaag ko, jin ka lmkiii MunI ce diyft, guzran, td ki wo un pai ^.iH'iihi bon.

45 Par us no bahar jako bahut bdt<'n kabin, aur khdss karke is tdt ko aisd niashhnr kiyd, ki Yisii' zdhird sh;vhr men ddkliil na bu wikd, par bdhar wiran jagahon men raha : aur

chdron taraf so us |>iis avit kive. II BA'If.

AUR kai diu ba'dwnh Kafarnihum men pbir ayd, aur sund gaji ki wuh ghar men hai.

2 Tab hJiaurwalidn itne Admi jaiu'a hiio, ki darwdzo ki dahli/. tak l/ni uti ki samai na hi'ii ; aur us ne unhcn kalam kah suiidyd.

3 Aur ok maflfij ko char ailmiun sa ut hwake us pds le de.

4 Jab wc bhir ke aabah us ko naz- dik ua d sakeij, to unhon ne us chhat ku, jali an wuh ibd, k bui diyd ; aur jali khodke utird thd, to us kbatolo ko, jisi par mafiiij lutd tha, latkadiyl

5 YUu' ne nn kd i'iitinad dfkhkar

Som m rakhie MAKQl'S.

(i Par ba'ze la<ph, jo wahan baithe the,apiig dilon ulcm khiyal karne lage,

7 Yih kyiin aiai ktifr bukti hai Klnidiike siwa kaua ganih. mu'&f km

sakti hai ?

8 Aur ulfaur Yiku' no apni ruh malam k.irke ki m KpBS diloii me» aiae kliiy:il kftrta hahj, uahm kalni, ki Tuin kyi'm npne diion nien aisu khiyal karte ho 'i

9 Us mnfluj ko kyi kabna lUantar hai, yih, ki Tere gunih muai' bude, yjt yih, ki [fth, aur ui>ua khatola ie «hal?

10 Lckin ti ki tum jino, ki Ibu i A'dam /amin par guuabon ke mu'af karne ka ikhti ydr takhta hai, us no us luafluj ko RUM,

11 Main tujhe kahti hiiii, Yih, aur apna khatola uthiike apue ghar ko jil.

12 Aur wah fill'aur utha, aur apna khatokl utliakar UB sah ke sainbne nikal s;aya; aur sab ilang ho gaye, BUI K'iU-ia ki tarif karka bole, ki II am ne ia (arah ki kabid ria dekha t h a.

M) Aur wah phfe bahar daryi ki kinare Raya; aur siri bhir ua pas ai aur us ne unhen ta'liiii di.

14 Aur jatti ht'ia Halia ke bete Ijewl ko malu>ul ki ehauki par baithe (ioklisi, aurus Ke kaba, Mere pichhe ho k\ VV'uh uthke km n pichhe ha l'iyd.

15 Aur jab wuh us ke ghar uien kli;un' lu\itha, tlia, yun hud, ki bahut «e luahaiU-k'NewiUe aur gunthgitr Yisu' aur ua ke shagirdon ke H&tll baithe; kyi;nki we bahut t lio, aur us kcpichhe ho liye.

16 Aur jab !aqihon aur Farision ne :■ iii»:-i-lt'in-wali>n aur gunahgaron

ko situ kbite dok ha, tab us ke sha- girdon so kaha, Yih kya bai, ki wuh mnrwnl kmirffilnn aur gunahgaron ko Nilh khita pilii hai?

17 Yisu' ue suukur unhen kaba, Un ke liye ji> iaiidurustJiaiii, hakim kuchb

47

fo sah b. zarur nahin, baiki un ke liye jo biimir hairi : main listba/.on ko nahin, baiki gunahairoa ko bulane iya, him, ki m tauba karen.

18 Aur Yiibanna aur Farision ke 3hagirdro.zarukht.othe: unkon neake us se kaha, ki Yuhanna aur FarWon ke sbagird kyiin roaa i'akliK! baiij, aur tere Bbijprd KH» uahiu rakbtoV "

19 YibiV ue unhen"kaha, ki KyA barati, jab tek ki diilba un ke ■-. I. hai, rum rakh sakto haiu i' wo jab tak ki dulha un ke i-ath hai, roza rakh naliiii aakte,

20 ia'kiu we din &weQga, jab duliui un se judi kiya jaega, tab unhin diiwu nien TT6 roza riibliciigo,

21 Kore than ke tukrc sc purdui ptthik uien koi paiwand nabiu kartA ; nahin u>, wuh naya tukra jo ua uien li.giiyil guya bai porine ko khinehia hai, aur wuh cliir tmrh jati hai.

22 Aur nayi mai ko puraid moshk- on nien koi nuhirj. bharti hai ; nahiu to, iua«hkoTi nayi mai se phat j;ifi liain, aur uiai bah jati hai, aur"iuashkc"_i barhdd hoti hai» ; baiki nayi mai ko nayj Duistikoii uien raklina chaliiye.

23 Aur yun hiid, ki wuh sabt ke diu kheton meti hokfl jara thii, aur us ke sbdgba rak inen chalte htie balcn ton j e lage.

L' 1 Aur Farision ne us se kaha,Dekh, ki,s liye . we sabt ko diu wuh kita. karte, jo rawa nahin hai ?

25 Us ne unhen kaba, Kva Uun no kabhi nahin parhit, .ki Kami ne, jab wuh aur us ke sathi muhiaj aur bliilk- ho the, kya kiyd ?

2(i WuIl kyiiukar Hj.nlar kdhiu Abiyatur ke waqt men Klmdakeghar men gaya, aur nazar ki roti a n, jin kii khini kiibinon ke siwd kisi "k o rawa ua tha, khiin, auratme lAthioii ko bhi din ?

27 Ub ne unhen kaha, Sabt ki din insdu ke wiiste hud, na, mada sabt ko din k'.' wiate.

\&th ehanga kami. MARQUS, III. Bdrah rasMon ka cltuiia jd»d. 28 Pas Ibn i A 'dam sabt ke din ka' 13 Phir pk pahar par Raya, aur jin bhi K huda wand hai. ko ap chahta tha, unhen pas bulaya ;

III BA'B. aur we uh pas ae.

W UH 'ibadnikhann mei_i phir dii- U Aur BJ U Mutah ko muqan,ir khil h ria ; wahan rk shaklis kiyft, ki we uh ke sath raherj, aur ki

tha, jis kn. ek hath srikh gaya tha.

2 Aur we ua ki ghat men lage, ki ii^iir wuh u» sah t ke diu changa knrc, to DI par ualish karen.

5 Ua ne ua shakha ko, jis ka hath mikli gaya tha, kuda, ki Itieh meri khara lio.

4 Aur us ne unhen kalut, ki Sul.l ke din neki karni rawa hai, yaba<li kami? jiin baehana ya jan ae mama ? We chup lio rahe.

6 Tali us Be mi ki sakht-dili ke aabab gamgiu huke gufiseae un sab ki taraf dekbii, aur us suialj}n kokaha, ki Apna hath barha. Us ne barhava; aur us ka hath, jaisa diisra tha, misa chaosj lio caya.

6 Tab Farision ne filfaar bahar jakc Herodiorj ke sath us ki Kidd meii niaHliwurat ki, ki UM kyurjkar qatl karoii.

7 Aur Yisu' apne sha.airdraj ke sath darri ki talai jdiira» aur ek bari bhir Jalil, aur Yahiidiya,

B Aur Yart'iHalam, aur Adum, aur Yardan ke par se, us ke pichhe ho li ; aur Hiir aur Saidii ke a.-pris se bhi ek bari bhir yih khabar sunkc ki kais* ban kaui us ne kiye, itu pas ai,

9 Uh ho «pun shagird* >!} ko kaha, ki Rhir ke tabab ek cliliut i si ki-hti m ke liye t&iyar kar rakhen, ki we uae daMnadalee.

10 Kyunki mne bahutunkochangd kiya tha, yahau lak ki m jo tahui i> : i i| men giril'tiir the, us par giro parte the, ki use clibi'i Icn.

11 Aur najnik ruhej), jab OM dtikb- tiri, ua ke azG siir parti ibiri, aur pu- karfco kalitin, k: Vf K\ui\\i ka I-llil hai.

12 Tab us no unhen bari takid ki ki uae mashliur na karen.

48

un ko luanadi karne ko bhcje,

15 Aur ki we sab bimarfon ko cliaitg» karne, aur deorj ko nikalne ki qudnit rakhen :

16 Ya'ne, Shama'un ko, jis ka nara Patrus rakha ;

17 Aur Zabadi ke lieto Ya'qnb ko, aiir Ya'qi'ib ke bhai Yrihanua ko, jin- hen lloannrjea nam rakha, ya'ne, Dani Ba'ad :

18 Aur Andryas, aur Failbda, aur IS:\i tiinlaiii;!, ani MaLi ko, aur Thr:in;i, aur Halia ke bete YaViiib ko, aur Thartdi, aur Shaina'fin Kau'ani ko,

19 Aur Yalnidah iMkariyiiti fco,jc us ka pakai-waucwala bhi thd : aur we ghar men ae.

20 Aur itno log phir jani'n bde, ki we roti bhi na kha saki'u-

21 Jab us ke nAteHaron ne yih au- Jii., to we usc pakarnekonikk'; kyrij- ki unhon ne kalia, W uh be-khud hai.

22 U Tab faqihon ne,jo Yarftaalam se ae the, kahd, ki Ba'al-ssabul us ke sath hai, aur wuh dflag ke sardat ki ruadad ae deon ko nikalta hai,

23 Tab us ue unhen pas bulakar niiiisiliiii hk'tj linlid, Kyi'tnkar ho sakti hai ki Sliaitan Shaitau ko nikale ?

2+ Aur agar kisi biiiUhahat men phut pare, to wuli b'ni^hiibat qaim rah nahin sakti.

2:"> Aur agar kiflf ghanbM men phut ]>nn'. t" wuli gliarana qattn rab iialiin viki;i.

L'i; Aur acar Sliniian npna Li mn- khalif hoke ap se ])hvit kara, i" wii'i qaim rah mihin sakld, baiki us ka akhir ho iawegi,

'27 Kisi Boriwnrko ehtx men ghiia- ke us ke asbfib kn koi Irit nahin sakti, iabtak ki wuh pahle us wrtwai ko na bandhe, tab us ke ghar ko lu tega.

JiiJ honewale MARQ1

28 Main tum se sach kahtd him, ki

dam ke sab gunah aur kul'r ju wo bakte Kain, niu'df kiyo jdenge:

29 Lekin wuh jo Kuh i Quds ke haqq men kufr bako, iis ki miuifi hai-^iz nahin hoti, baiki wuh hameaha ke 'azab kd sazdwdr lio chuki:

30 Kyi'mki unhoti M kahd thd, ki Us ke a&th ek napak ruh hai.

31 *f U b wocjtus ke bhdi aur m ki md di, aur biliar kbare ruhku use bulwd hlu'il

82 Aur jamd'at us ke ds pas haithi thi, aur uuhoii m u* m kahiuki Dek h, teri mii aurteru bhdi bdhar tujhe talab kurte hairj.

33 Us no unhon jawab diya, Kaun hai meri mil, yd rucre lihai 'i

84 Aur un par jo ub ke as pfc bni- $ho tho, nigdh karko kahd, Dekfao meri md aur mere bhdi !

35 Is liye- ki Jo kui Khudd ki mant par ctialta hai, meri Midi, aur meri bahin, aur md, wuhi hai. IV BA'B. "lTT"Un phir darya ke kindrn par V' V lalim karne lagd : aur ek ban bhir US paw jinii'a hiii, aisi ki wuh daryd men ek kihhti ]iar onari baithii -. aur sd;i bhir khushki men daryd ke kindre pnr rabi.

2 Tab us ne unken tamsilon men bahut kucbh sikhldyd^aur apni ta'iim men. un su kaha,

3 Suuo; Dekhiyc, ek Hafal bone ko gaya

8 Alir kuehh aehchhi samin ineo gira; wub ugd,airrbarhkephald,ba'zc tis guna, ba'ze sdth, aur ba'zc sau gun£

!l Pbir ih ne unherj kahd, ki Jis ko sunneke kdn bon, sutie.

10 Aur jab wuh akela liria, unimu ne, Jo us ke «Uh tbc, uu bara h se mil- ke as ne us tamsil ke ina'ue pfiohhe.

11 Us ne uuhen kahd, ki Khudd U bdil-hiliat. ke bhod ko janud tumben diya gayd hai, par un ko liye jo bahar hairj, eab bdten tamsilon men hoti

12 Td ki wo dekhne men dpkhen, magar Mjhen nahin ; aur kau sc sunen, par samjhcn nahin; na howe ki we kabhi phirerj, aur un ke guudh bakhshe jden.

13 I'hir us no unhen kahd, Kyd tum yili tamsil nahin BUtajhW J ti> Bab tamsilon ko kyiinkar samjhoge ?

II S Kisdn kaidui botd hai.

15 Aur wiih jo us rdh ke kindre pard, jabdn kaldm boyd jdtd iiai, we luiirj, ki jab uuhon ne sund.to Sbaitin fitfanr dke ua kaldm ko, ji un kudilog men boyd gayd thd, lc jdtd hai.

16 Aur usl tarah jo sangin zamin men boyd gayd, we hfdn, jo" kalam ko sunke filfaur khushi so qabdl kar lele Iriin;

17 Aur dp men jar nabirj rnkhte, baiki tbori muddat ke liaiij: akhir, Jftb U kaldm ke wistfl taklii oAtfl ya .satdc jdte, to jald thokar kiidle

4 Aur botp wa.|t yun Inia, ki kuohli liain. rah ke kin.lre pra, aur bawd kc| 18 Aur jo kdnton kedarmiyan boyd

paittndfl dke use chug gaye. 5 Aur kucbh sangin /.amin par cird.

gayd, we iiain, jo kaldm Mimte bai_, IH Aur diinyi ki fikrerj, aur daulat

jahan^use hahut. mini na r.iili ; rarjki dagabd/.i, arir aur chizoQ kililaen,

ub jald ueji, kytinki us ne daldar .'.amin na pdi :

6 Aur jab Bdiaj nikla, wub jal gayd. aur jnr ua rakhne ke salmii siikh gayd.

7 Aur kucbh kdnturj men gird, aur kdntnn ne bnrhke use daba divd, aur wuh phal na Idya.

4J

ddkhil b(.ike kaldm ko dabd deto hain, aur wub Iw-phal hotd hai.

20 Atnr jo aehchhi /.amin men "boyd gaya, we hain, jo kaldm ko sunte ham, aur qabdl kar ke pbal lita bain, b»'» da gani, ba'zo with, aur ba'ze sau goni,

D

Khardal ke rl,

21 5 Aur lis nc unben kahji, Ky» chira<* ih liye. ht4, ki psimaaa ya pa- lang ke tua rafchen, aur clurigdan P&r na rakhrn?

22 Koi cliiz poshida nahin, jo zfibi: »;i ki jiw«; aur ca chhipi lioi, magar i liye ki zuhur rooij awo.

23 Jis ko uunne lu kau hnn, sune. 21 I'lik us nfl unhan InbaVld GJam

karo ki tuin kyii smitoTio ; jispahiiaiio 60 tura nfote iiu, tisi se tumharu liye napi jacgA ; aur tumben jo auute ho, ziyada diya jaupii

26 Is liye fei'jis ke pas kuchh liai, usediyi jacgA; aur jia ke pas kafiWi nahin, us ue wuh bin jo m ke pas hai te liya jaegd.

36 li Aur m ae kal.fi, KhudA ki biid.thahaf. aisi hai, jalai ck Bhakha jo zamiu men bij bowe;

27 Aur rit o din wub sowe, uthe, aur wub b! j ia tarab uge aur barbe', ki wub na jttne,

28 Ih liye ki samin Ap sg &p phal lati hai, pahle sahsf, pbir bal, ba'd ke bal men taiyar dana

23 Aur jab dina pak cbuka, te wuh filfaur hansiia hhijwari bai, kyiinki kfttne kti waqt. pahuncha bai.

30 t Pbir us ne kaba% ki Hain Kirabi ki bidabihat kt. kis ne akibat karcn, aur us ke Liye kaun si misal liwen ?

31 Wuh khardal kedineki manisi liai, kt jab zamin men buya jati hai, zamiu ke sah bijorj se chhtila'bai :

82 Par jab boyi gaya, to ugtii hai, nur aab iaik;irii>n bo barh jati, aur hari diliari nikalta, yaliari tak ki hawi ka para&de (u ke Raya KtOfi baseri kar sakit" hain.

33 Aur wuh un se aisi bahuteri tamsikm mon, ua ki saninjh kt luu- waficj, kalam tahta thi.

34 Aur be-lamsil un se biten na

MATIQUS, T. kitamwl.

35 Usi din, jab shim hrij, us j»o unben kaba, ki A 'o, bam p&r jawen,

3fi Aur *ra us jarua'at h» rukhsat karke use, jis tarah se ki kishti par thi, le clmle. Aur ua ke sath aur bhi tbbofi kishtian tftfg.

37 Tab bari indhi chali. aur lshren kishti par yaluiti lak lagin ki wuh jiani se libur chali thi.

38 Aur wub pst.wii.rki taraf sirtale lakyarakhko so raba tba; tab unhori ne use jagake kaba, AJ UMad, tujfae flkr nahin ki bam sah halak biota hain?

39 Tab ua no nthkB hawa ko dauti, aur darya ko kaba, Tbalicir ja; tbania rab. To bawa thabar gayi, aur liari nfwA ho gaya,

40 Phir urihuii kaba, Timi kyi'in aise khaufnak biii\ aur kdbu ku i'ntKpid nabin rakhte?

41 We nibayat dare, aur apas men kahne lagi*, Yih kis tarali ka bai, kl bawa aur darya bhi us ke farmanbar- ddr hain ?

V BA'B.

AUR we darya ke pdr fiadarimou ko mulk mt'ri pahunche.

2 Aur jyi'm wub kisliti se utra, wunhin ek ddmf, jis nen ek a&ptk ruh Ibi, iiabron so nikaTte hue use mili:

3 Wuh qabron ke dartniyan ralui kartd tha, aur koi use zaujiron 8o bbi jakar na sakta tbi:

4 Ki wuh bir bar berion aur zanjir- j se jakra gayi tba, aur us ne zanjir-

on ko tora, aur U-Hoii ka jfokre tufepe

kiyo; aur koi uso fab'i men na lawikii. 6 Wuh haniesha rat diu i^haron ir qabron ke bieh chilliyi karti, aur

ftpM (a,]'i_i jiattharuri se katta tba. 6 Par jyiin us ne Tin' ko diir as

deklia, dauri, aur use aijda kiya, Aur Imri awiz s

. .-. cbillike kaba, karti; lekm khalwat mag apnfl sha- Al Khuda 'l'a'iitd ke Bo(e YW, majhe

girdon ko sab bilon ke nm'iio batlataltujli se kyi kira V tujbe Khudi" ki ,lltt- |<iasam doti brjn, mujba na sati.

Murii, ■ k i><hni to chiiiird/ii, MAltQUS,

H Kydnki us no om kaha thd, ki Ai ndpak ruh, us aumi mag bo nika! A.

9 Pliir ua ne us se~pdchhi, Tera kya n ini hal ? Tab us ne jawab diyi, ki Jlerd nam Tuuian h:ii, is Uy» ki bom bahut liniij.

10 Phir us ne us ki bahut iiiinn.it- ki, ki haiiiey is uarzamin se niat nikil.

11 Aur wahan naliuion ko nazdik BttafOB ki ek bara gol ciiarti tbi,

12 So Bab deon ne ne ki minnat karke kaha, ki Ilam ko un sdaron ke ■ianniyan bhej, ta ki ham un men paithen.

13 Yisd* ne filfanr unhen ijissat di ; aur m uapak nihon nikalke sdaron men pai Ih gayin ; aur wuh gol karirc [iar se darya men, kuda ; aur we oarib do bait ko tho, jo darya men ddbko lcar gaye.

H Aur wn jo rfum ko chardte tho bhige, aursbahr aurdihat men khabar pahunchii. Tad we ua mijare ko tk'khne ko iiiklt',

15 Aur Yisd' pia ae, nur ua dtwdno ko, jis men deon k a tuinan thi, baithe, aur kapre pahiue, aur husbyir dekhi: aur dar gaye.

16 Aur jinhon ne yih dekhi thi, us diwane ki Riri ahwil, aur sdaron ki tamani majard, un se bayan kiyi.

17 Tab we ua bi minnat karat lago, ki un ki «arhad<l se nikal jiio.

16 Jydn wuh ki.shti par ayi, nsne, jis men deo thi, us se minnat ki, ki us ku sii.Ui rahe.

19 Lekin Yisd' ne uso ijiznt na di, baiki uw kaha, ki Apao Koar ja. apae logog pas, aur unhen khabar de ki Khudawand ne lujh jiar rahm karke t'ujh sg kya kara kiyi.

"0 Tab wuh traya, aur Dikdpulis ke mulk men, un kamon ki, jitno Yisd' no us ke liye kiye the, manadi kame lagi; aur sabhon ric ta'ajjub kiyi.

21 Aur jah Yfsd' kishtt par phir pir iya, lari bhir us jiAw jam'a hui; aur WOh darya ke nazdik t ha.

fU men bahttt deo Aft

22 Aur, dekho, ki 'ibddatkhdne ke sa.rdaron inen se ek shakhs, jis ka naiii Jiiirus thi, ityd, aur uso dekhkar Ud ke (jadamoij uar giri;

23 Aur yih kahke ki Meri chhoti betf marno par hai, us ki bahut min- nat ki, ki wuh awe, aur apne bitli us pir rakhe, ki wub changi boj to vuh

24 Tab wuh Us ke yathgayd; aur bari bhir us ke picbhe chali, aur ttse daba I iya.

26 Aur pk 'aurat jis kd birali baras se lalui jari thd,

2f> Jis no bahut se hakfmon ki dawaen khai tliin, aur apni sab mil kharch karkc kui-hh faida na piya thi, baiki us ki bimiri aur bhi barh gayi ihi,

27 Yisu' ki kbaliar sunke nn bhir niffli us ku pii'hhe se ii, aur us ke kapro ko eblui liyi.

2& Kyunki us ne kahi, ki Agar main airf us ke kapre ko clihii lun, to changi ho jaVingi.

29 Aur tillanr tis ke labu kd sotd band ln'ul; nur us M apne badan ke ahwil si; jaiin, ki main us alat so cbftogf liui.

30 Tab Yisd' no filfaur apne men ni, ki Mujh men se <piwat nikli, un

bhir ki taraf mutawajjil» hoknr kaha, ki Mara tapfC ko kia no chhiii?

31 Us ke shigirdon ne us st! kahd, Tu dekhli bai ki log lujh |uir gire

iarte hain, pbir td kaliti hai, Mujhe tis ne chhiii ?

32 Tab us no cbaron taraf nisrdb bi, t a ki use, jis ne yih katu kiyi thii, dek b e.

33 Aur wuh 'aurat sab kucbh jin- kar jo us par wiqi' bdi thd, dnrti aur kampti ii, aur us ke ige gir pari, aur sab sach sach us se kahi.

34 Tab us no ubo kahi, Ai beti, torn iiniri no tujhe baohayi ; saldmat

r apni ifat se bacin rah.

Jab wuh yibi kabti thi, 'ibi-

Jairtis M be/j. koj'ihind. . MARQUS, VI. Masih H hilal logon H rde.

datkhanc ke sardfir ke yahan se logop 1 ne ako kaba, ki Turi Ticti mur guyi, ab j kyun Ustad ku ziyiWa taklif detil hai? i

3f> Yltiu? ne ii» bit ku, jo wo knh rahe the, aiintc hi, 'ibadat k hane ke > lardai ko kaha, Mati Iur, tfcqa£i'atto>4d 1 rakh.

' Aur ua ne, siu-ii l'ntnw, aur Ya'aAb, aur Ya\|i'ih ku bbai Yuhanna «i', ki.fi k/j apnu Mith jam' na diri,

3H Alir 'ibadat-khane ku f&rofr ke ghar nieii dke sbot aur gul, nur logon ko bahut tote pitte dekha.

■'W Aur bbitM jaku uuhen kaha, Tum kahe ko gul karte, aur lOta bor larki innr nahfn gayi, baiki unti hal

40 We us par hanso; lekin w uli sab ko bahar karke larki ke ma bap ku, aurapno siithioii ko toke, jahan wub larki pari thi, andar aya.

41 Aur us larki ka inif.h pakarkar nafi kaha, Talirha qnuii ; jin ka tarju ma jrib hai, ki Ai larki, main tujh kain a. hi'uj, tith.

42 W'dijliirj wnh irtrki nthkechalae lagi; kyuiiki vvuii harah bara* ki tbi. Tdb wf kihufc bi iiairan iiiie.

43 Fhir us rit! uuhen bubut takid hc huktn kiyji, ki Yib ko: ua jaiie; aur r.iriiulva, ki Uw kuciili kkaue ko den..

VI liA'B.

PU I II wabiin so rawan» htH, apBfl walau map iyaVj aur us ke shigrrd us ke pfchhe ha liye,

2 Jab sabi. ka iiiu hr.a, wub 'ihri- dfttkhone ic i«rj i:i']iin dana lagi: aur bahutog ne miakB hairin bakai kaha, ki Yih bsiten uh ne kalian se p&in? :iiir yih ky:i hikmat hai, Jo usedi Bayi bal, ki uisi keramat us ko hith n zahir bott haiQ?

be-'izzat nahin hai, magar apne walau aur apne kunbe, aur apuu ghar inen,.

6 Aurwuli koi rmi'ajiwi waintn na ■likhlii saka, siwi in ko, ki thnre ro t ■ i u i ri i«. ■ r i p;u hathrakhkuutinencJiangiL kiya.

0 Aur us no ua ki bo-fmani pe ta- 'njjub kiya. Aur fiupaa ko g&QW0Q lu'-ii tii'lim datA (ibira.

T Aur un l»arah ko buiaya, aur un ki> do do karke bhejna slnirii' kiya, uuhejj na^ak ruhon par ikhtiyar diya;

S Aur unhen mikni kiya, ki eafar ko liye, aiwa lathi ke, kiloah na lo, na jholi, na roti, na tfue kanuubuud inen paise :

li UaflU ji'itian pahino ; par do kurto ruat paltiuu.

10 Aur unlitit kaha, JahSij tum ki- si ghai uu'ii ilukhil lio, to jab talt tum ua jagai sc jao, wahin raho.

11 Aur jittio tuiuheij 0*M1 na ka- 2, aur tumhari tu kuiU'ji, to jab tum

wabau se niklo, apue pariwun ki ^urd jbar (lena, ta ki un par gawahi ho. Main tuiu n eaeh kahta hiin, ki 'm Irilat ko din, Saib'un aur 'Amiirah ko liye, us shaiir ki banUbat, barda«ht karni iahaj hogi.

12 Aur unhun nojako mand4.li ki, ki Tauba karo.

13 Aur bahot ao daoQ ke di';r klj i, aur haliLiuin ko, jo bimar the, un i>ar tel dlialko changa kiya.

14 Aur jab OOKtffl bdd^hdh ne sn- na, (kyiinki us ka nain mashhiSr hua Iba;) tab us ne kaha, ki Ydlmniia ba|Hisina-dent)wii!ii murdon inen saji ufhi, isi liye ua ho bari ulsir-bakhsh

a Kya yih Mariyam ka Hcli liarhai karamaten hoti hain. nabin? aur Ya'qiib, aur Yv.ecs, aur lo Auron ne kabil, ki Wuh EOyii V.iiii.-;.'i!,. n ShftBja'u» ka bbrii cahin l' hai. J-'hir aurwi ne kaha, Yih ok na- aur kya us ki bfthineg baiuaK pfojbi hai, ya nabkm mon su k;4 ki mi- yaban nabtr bah}? Aur ttnhojj na us nlad bai. ih thokar khrti. | 10 l'aT Hcrodis ne mrikar kahfi, ki

4 Tab Yhui' ne unhen kahil, Nabi Yih to Yahauni bai, jis kd sir main 52

Yiihnna kd sir KAEQCS, VI. M/djnmK

iic katwiyi hai ; w uh mtirdon men &e aur m lnrki ko diyd ; aur us larki ne ji utha hai. apni md ko diyi.

17 Kyiujki Hen>di.-< nedpHerodiyds' 2El Tali us ku ehdgird sunkar de, ke wdate, jo uakc lihai FailhriNki jorii aur us ki liitili ko utbdke oabr men tbi, log bhejkar Ynhannd ko pakar-rakha.

wdke qaidkhdno men band klya';| KO Aur «ipiU Yisu' ke pil jam'a kyiiiiki us lio us Ke bydh kiyd tha. [htie, aur jo k nol ih unhon ne kiyd, aur

IH Aur Yuhanna u Bero'iis ko;jo kuchh sikhlaya tha, jsuLj us Beb&ylm

kahd tha, ki Apne bhdi' ki jorti rakh na tuju par rawa nalnn.

19 I» liye Herndiyits us kd kina rnklui, aur chdhti tlii ki us<; jin se nidro ; jwir wuh na kar sak t :

20 Is wdste ki Herodis, Yuhannd ko mani i rdstbaz nur muuaddaa jankar us sc dartd, aur us ki piadirl kartd, aur us ki sunkar bubut si baton par 'amal kartd, aur uh ki bdten kliushi sc Buutd thd.

21 Alihir, qdbu kd din dyd ki He- rodis ne apni sdlgirih men apne bu- zurgon, aur risdladaron, aur Jalil ke amiron ki zivdfat ki ;

22 Tab Hen-liyds ki beti andar di, aur uachke Herodis aur us ku mih- iiidnoa ko khush kiyd : tab bddshdh ne us larki ko kahd, Jo tii elidhe, so tii mang, ki main tujhe dtiflga.

2.3 Aur us hc Msam khai, ki Mcri aillii bUsbihat tas, j" km-hh td mujh se ma-jge.main tujhe diirgd.

24 Aur wuh ehali gayi, aur apni md

i.'i, ki Main kyii mdngun? Wuh boli, ki Yuhannd baprisiua-de- nowdlo kd Hr.

25 Tab wuh fitfaur bddshdh ke pds ehdldki so di, aur us «<■■ 'a r z kaike ka- hd. Main chdhti ain, ki tii Ynhannd baptisiiia-denewdle kd air ek thaii men ablii imyhe de.

26 Itadsliali bahu t garngin hi'id, par apiti (pisaui, aur sdth bailltnewalon ke ubah na ehdhd ki us se inkar kara.

27 Tab bddshdh ne fil&Uf jallad ko hukm karke bhejd, ki us kd sir lawe. "Us no jdkc us kd sir (jaidkhdue mcti kdtd,

2B Aur ek thali men rakiike lavd, 53

kiyd.

31 TaJi Dsne unhen kahd, Alagwf- rdna men chalo, aur zarra SNBtio, is iiye ki wahdn bahu!- log; dte jdtc ilie, anr unhen khdnd khdite ki bhi fnrsat

tlii.

32 Tab we aku: kishti par charhke ek wirdne men gftj«.

Par logon ne unheii jdte dek h d, aur bahuton ne use pulichdnd, aur ndre viiiiliiun m klinshki khushkl udhar daure, aur un H d^e jd jiahunche, aur ikatthe lioko us pas du.

34 Aur Yisu' ne niknlke hari bliir ko dekhd ; OM un par ralun livi. kv- linki w« un blienm ki mdnind the, ki jin kagararlyi nahin ; aur wuh unhen balint si Ivdten sikhldno Ingd.

35 Jab din baliut •)\\-A\i, us ke sha- girdon ne us pds dke "kahd, Yili Jagal wirdn hai, aur bahut der hui :

36 Unhen rukhsat kar, td ki we chd- ron taraf ke pdnwon, aur hastion men jdke apne liye n.iti mol leii ; ki khdne' ko im pds kuchh nahin.

37 Us ne unhen jawdb men kalta, T u m unhen khdne ko do. 1»D W* bole, Kyd huni jri.hr do sau ilinar ki rotidn mol leij, aur uuiun kliilaucij V

38 Us ne uuhenkalni, Tumlidre pan kitni rotidn liain V jake dekho. Un- hon ne 'darvdl't karko kahd, Piach rotidn, aur do machhlidn.

30 Tab uw M unhen hukm kiya, ki Un sah ko hari gbas par paut pint karki hithlio.

40 W o sau sau, aur pachds pachas, pint men baithe.

41 Tab usne wuh pdncli rotirin nur do maehhlidu lekc dsiudn ki tar;if

PA'n-h htwAr ko khihi/td. MAKQl'S, VII. Ftirisitm H riivatj'ilr»,

doklike harakat ch&hi, aur rotian to-jshahr, yi gin w men gaya, iltlIh.ii ae riij, aur asoe akagisdi ri ItO diij, ki uii[ biuifLion ko biiiron men rak hi, aur us koigcrakheii ; «urus ae wedomuuhu- ki minmu ki kis;rfuski ponhik ke liin un sab inefl bantin. datiuin ko dihii i«n ; nur jituoii ne use

42 We eab khike ser hue, chbiia, aehcbhfl ha gwe,

43 Aur \iti!i-.ij ae t ■ il; i- 'U W birali : VII BATtV fokriiirj bharin, aur kttCci maoiihikirj fTIAH Fatfei atar ba'w &qfe Yariisft-

X lain mi' akc us paa jam'a hue,

'i Jub unimu nc us ke ba'ae ahigird- on ko napak, yu'ne, bin dhoe Lithori w) mti khite dekili, to 'aib higiyi.

8 U liye ki l-'ami, baiki .sah Yahudi, buzurgon ki riwayat par 'amal karke, j;ib tak ki apne hath kabul tak uadko ii'ii. u k:.. ■u.',

4 Aur bazar se ike jab tak gas! tia kar Icij, uahir, khute. Aur bah u t ei aur biten baiti, jin ko we riwij ke Babafa mute Imiri, jaise piyilon aur Lojofl aur timbe ke bartanon aur char- pafog ki dboni,

5 Tab KarUion aur feajhog ne us se pdefabi, ki Tew sbagiid btuargeg, ki riwayat par kyun naliiii diulir, pat- roli i.in diW hitfaaa kh;ite hain ?

6 Ub ue urilich jawab owgj kabi, ki Yas'aiyih nn tum rijAktroT) ke hauq tua]] kyi khiih Dubowat ki hai, jai^a ki likhi bui, ki Ye log Yionthcm so oifti bu/.urji karte hain, par mi ku .lil (UUjh se dftf haiii.

1 Aur we be-i'iida mori paras twh kartir lini», kyiiuki ju ta'lim we sikh- lite kain, iriNau ku aiikiiiu iiain.

H Ia liye tum Khudi ke liuk m ko tark karke insan ki riwayat, jaise loton aur piyilon kii dhotii, maute ho; aur aise bahutere kim hain, jo tum karto ho.

9 Aur «s ne unht'n kafaa, 'J'nm Khudi ke hukra ko bakhubi batil karte ho, ta ki apui riwayat ko <j;iiiu r:ik hn.

10 KyiSnki JSAei ne kahA, ki Apno bip aiir apiii rn;i ki tiiV.iiu kar ; aur, Jo koi l>a[> ya nia ko koge, wuh jiin se mini U&

11 Pai1 tum kahte hcij Agar koi ap-

i bhi uthiiin,

44 Aur wo jinhon ne rotiin khiiii, paiich bazar mani ko qarib the.

45 Aur filfiuir us ueapuo Bbiffirdog ko takiii n iiukiii kiya, ki Jab tak i l i r l i [_i logog ku rukhsiit karun., tum kit-liti par charho.aur us pir liaiUuuda ko age jao.

4ti Aur dp unricii rukhnat karko pahar par du i untuiuie ko paya.

■17 Aur jab ahaiu Inii, ki.dui bich daryi men thi, aur wuh akela khush- ki pai tha.

48 U» no dekili, ki we kbswnfl Bi bakui Umg haiii, kyiitiki lmwi un kt mukhalif thi; tab pkliiile pakar rii k'> wuh «arya par chalti h tia uu ku j-iis liya, aur curiiid ki uji he tiga bafkfi.

49 Jab uuhon no uso daryi par clialte dekhA, khiyal kiyi, ki bhiit luii, aur chilli uthe :

50 Kyiijiki »b no iiho dekia, aur ababnie, nt wah OJfiuu un se kalain kuke unhen kahae k«i, KhAtir-ja-

.'.i . imMio; niiiin iiiin ; niat daru.

51 l'hir wuh kishli par uu piaehap- !iii, aur bftwjf Uiam ptyi ; tab iiulujti uo apne ililoii BtsQ niliiyai hairan hokt? ta'ajjab kiya.

62 Ia liye ki uulion ae rotinn ke jiiuajiaa ko r.ji saujjlii tha; kyi'iuki uu ke dil Nakhc the.

53 Aur wo |iir gasuike Quum mnl !,: mulk Hi'-Tj :ie, «UT duit iiir lajriiy.L.

54 Jlib we kihhti pat ae utre, ihlaur l)Qg use pahdianki!,

55 Uh mulk ki bar taraf se daure, aur bimiroii ku ohirpiioo par rakhke, jahin nnhog no niaa thi ki wuh hai, !<• jaiio lage.

5ij Aur wuh jahin knkin bawti, yi &4

Paki aur nApdki ki bdhat. MARQUS, VII. ne bip ya md ko kahu, ki Jo fdida niujhe tuju ko pahuuchdnd thd, 30 Qurban, ya'ne, hadya hiid ;

12 So turi om us ke bdp ya uh ki md ki kuchh minimi karuo nahin deto ;

13 Yun tum Kbudd ke kaUm ko apni riwayat se, jo tum ne jari ki hai, batil kartu lio ; aur aisd bahut kuchh kart« bo.

14 ^j Phir ub ne sab logon ko pas bulake kaha, ki Tum nb ke aab mori Buno, aur samjho : ■

15 Aisr koi chiz ad/ni ke bahar na- bi» hai, jo us nu-n dakhil buku itts odpdk kar sake; uar wub clii/'-ij jo IU meg se nikahi hain, we M adiui kn □apak karti baiti.

16 Agar kUi ke kdn sunnc ke hon, toBuue.

17 Jabwuh bbirkepassegbar men gaya, ub ke sha;rjr<lun ne us «e us tam- sil ki babat puchbd.

1S Tab ua ne unhon kaha, Kya tum bhi aise nd-samajh lio i Kya tum na- hin jfotc bo, ki jo chiz bahar n lidmi ke bhitar jati hai, usc ndpdk nahin kar sakti ;

19 Ia liye ki wub us ke dil men na- hin, baiki pet men jati hai, aur pae- khane men mkalli hai, yuij sab khaue ki najasat eb ha t jati hai V

20 Phir ua ne kaha, Jo drlmi men se tiikalta hai, wulii aumi ko ndpdk karta hai.

21 Kyunki andar, ya'ne, ddmi ke dil hi ne, bure andeaba, zinakarian, hardinkdrian, qatl,

22 ChorFag, Idlach, badi, makr, ma>ii. l«id-uaziiri,kulr,iihckhi, nddani, rtikalti bain :

J£k bakire ko chniKjn fatnu'<,.

25 Kyunki ek 'aurat, jia ki chhot.i ln'ii mag oiaik ruh thi, us ki klia- oar sunke di, aur us ke panwon par Siri :

26 Yib 'aurat Yunani aur nauin ki Surufiniki thi; us ne minnat ki, k i wuh us deo ko ua ki liet! par ac utdre.

27 Par Y!b4' ne uso kahd, ki Pahle farzandon ko »er boae de: kyrinki i'ar/aiuloii ki roti leke kutton ke dg« ddlna laiq uahin.

lir! Us ne jawab mm kaha, Han, nj Khudawand, lekin kutfce niez k» tale farzandon ki roti ke tukrun meii .so kha-te hain.

29 Tab ue ne «so kahd, Ia bat ko sibalj m ehalf jd; wub deo teri beti par se utar gaya.

30 Jab wuh ghar men pabunchi, to kyd dekhA, ki deo dfir ho gaya, aur i h -t i i)ii'iihaun'' par j «iri hai.

31 t Aur pbir wuh Sfir aur Hai.la ki sarhaddon ae rawdnahud, mu Di ka- pal]* ki sarliadd'iti men hokar Jtttl ke darya ke pas Ayd.

32 Aur Union, ne uk balibe ko jis ki zubdn men luknat thi w iias Idke us ki minnat ki, ki ajma biith ua par rakhe.

33 % Wuh ua ko bhirrneri se kina- re le gayd, aur apni ungiian us ke kdu- OD men dalin, aur apiid thdk leke us ki /uban par lagdya ;

'M Aur asi 1 liii ki tam f nazar karke ek ah ki, aur use kaha, Htbitah, ya'ne, Kliul i do.

35 wunhin ua ke kdn khul gaye, v& us ki zulian ki girah hbikhul {yiyi, aur wuli kluih bolne higd.

36 Aur ua ae unhim hukm diyi, ki

23 Yib aab buri eiiizen andar s*' ni- kiai ne na kabeti ; lekin jitnd ua ne kaiti hain, aur admi ko ndpdk karti mnu'a kiyd t.iiii,, we utuaziyada iiiash- hain. liur karLe the :

24 T Phir wabdn se titbke Stir auri 37 Aur uuhon ne nihayat bat&B Raidi ki wfttddDB mcn givHt, aur ek Imko kaha, Us ne sah kuchli achohhii gbar men dakbil hoke obdhd ki koiikiya: ki bahiron kn sunne ki, aur U ji'-n.' j b kin p^sliida na rah saka. 'gungoij ko hulno ki tdqat deta hai.

55

Ekandheko MAI'.QU

VIII BA'B.

U N dinon, men jab bari bhir jam'a thi, aur uu pas km-l.li kbaun fco Uli Tiiii, Visu" m- apne ^lisi^ii Jun kupas buliikc unlien kahd,

'2 Mujhe ia bhir par rahm dti. hai, ki ab tin diu puzrekiye Ing merona t h haiii, aur un ke pas kuohh kiidue ku nahin. :

3 Agar main unhcij bliukho jdne ko ruklisat karun, to we rah uien. mdnde paivn^e : kyrinki ba'ze uu. men, liain, jo dor m ati bain.

4 U* ko «bagirdun ne uBe jawab diya, ki Ih winine inci; kabin se kot admi roti pdwe, ki iriben ser kare r

5 Tab ttt m- un.se piichha, ki Tum- baru iws ki mi rotian hain V W e bule. Bit.

G l'hir ub nc leburi ko hukm k iya. ki 2Ai»in par bnith jaen; aur uh ne wulii t4t rotian lir, aur fibukr karke tivrin, aur apne sbagirdon ko din, ki un ke age rnkhen ; aur urihon nc logon ko ■:'_:: rakh din.

7 Aur un ke l>an kat ek ehhoti maehhlidn thin ; bo us n« harakat mdnekc bukm kiyd ki unkcn bhi uu ke age dhaivti.

B Chimanchi unhon ne k baya, aur eer hiio: aur uu tukron ki, ju bacb rahe the, sat tokrian utliain.

9 Aur khdnewale chdr ha^dr ke naiih ilio. Tbir ub ne uiihen rukhsat k iya.

10 T Aur wuh apne &Iidpirdon ke Balb fauran kislitl parcharhku DaFma- unta ki atrdf men iya.

11 Tab Fa risi uikle, aur us se htij- jut karke ub ke imtihdn ke liye denidn ho kol undian chaha.

1*2 Ub lio apne dil se ah kbfnchkc Italia, 1b mndnu ko log kyrtn nisha» cliiibto hain/ main tum t,e sacb kahtd bilii, ki lu zam&ne ko logon ko koi nbd iin diya ua jaega.

13 Aur wub un ne judo* hoke phir kislili par cbarhke par gaya.

S, VIII. dnkh dtnA,

14 % Aur w© roti lene kobhnlgaye the, aur kishti jiar, siwa ck roti ke, ini pAa kurhli na tlia.

15 Aur us ne unhen yi'in farmdya, Khalardar, Farisiun ke khainir, aur Herodis ke khamir we parhea karo.

Iti Tab we apaa men giiftngt'i kai'kc k:iiiiic [a^e, Viii is Hy« iiiii, ki iiaiiuiru MUh !"■ -r i liabin.

17 litd'ne yilidaryai't karkcunben fiinnayn, Tum kyiijj kiiiyal karte ho, ki yili i- liye bai, ki Jimiiare «itli roti uidiin? kyii tuni ab tak nabiij jatite, aur iialitn sjuiiajhte 'i kya timUnira dil ab tak saklit bai 't

IH A'nklien bote hiic, tnm nabin dekbte? nur kau hote hue, nahT^ sunte? aur kya tumben yad nabii, f

H* Jis watjt main ne wuh pancli rotian panen bazar ke liye torin, timi ne tiikroij ag kifui t<fkria(i bbari iii.l,;-; n_. 'i UnhoH ne ua se kabd, IldraL.

20 Aur jib woqt aat char ha/Ut ko liye torin, tum ne tukron sc kitni tokrian bhari utliain V dnLffl tte ka- Li, BH,

21 Tab us nounben kahA, Pliirtum kyiln uabiri nauiftjhMa?

22 T| Pfiir wuh Baitsnida men Sya ; aur m vk tituUit: k» us pd.s liie, aur t»s ki minnat ki, ki wuh DW chhi'nw.

23 Wnk luandheM bith pekarke use liasti ke babar le paya, aur Ua ki ankbon meu tlnikke ajinc hiit.li us pai" rnkbe, aur us se iniehlia, Kyatu kuchh dekbtahai?

24 Ub ne nazar i'ipnr uthakc kabd, Main durakliton se idmiuji ko cbalte dekii ta hiiii.

25 Tab ub ne phir ua ki ankbon par apne liat h rakbo, aur pbir ipar dekli- ne ko farmayd ; aur wub ehanird bua, aur sftb ko acbchlii tarah deklul.

S6 Aur uh ne use yih kaliku ghar bheJ4 ki Battf men na ji, aur Buni — Qfl kisi bo mat k;di.

27 t Tab Tiri* aur ub ke ehd ird Qaiaa*fyB Filippi ki bastion men «ayo,

Patrus ho maUmat barnd. MAKQUS, IX. aur nili in.-n n.- ur ,i ■ piichbA, aur niibrtj kaha, ki Log kyA kalnc haiTj ki main krnin bmi?

2» Unbon Dfl jawab diya, ki Yfi- Jiainii l'uptisma-deuewa'Ift, aur ba'ze Iliy:v, pai ImV.i' nabiog men se ek.

2'j Pbir us ne unhen kali A, Tum kya kahte lio ki maiii kami h*D Patrua ne jawab men us se kaha, Tu !■: .Mii.-ih boL

30 Tab us ne unhen tAkid ki, ki nieri babat kisi «e yih ruat kat

31 Fbir wuh unlien sikhlAi ki Znnir bai ki Ibu i A'dm bahut"sA dukb uthawe, aur wuh bnzurg<_ samar kAbinon aur faqihon se ra<ld kiyA jAr, nur inani jAe, aur tin roa ke ptchhe ji uthe.

3" Aur u> iifl yih bat Riif babi. Tab FateUi UM alag lo jAke us par jhunjh- lAno laga.

33 i'inis ne phirke, aur apne rIiA- giriioij par nigAh karke, Patrus par jininjhiAyA,aur kahA, Ai ShailAn,merc Bambu*: se dir ho : kyi';i_iki r.u KbudA ki ebfsog ki niibiij, baiki insAn ki cbin?B ki fikr kurtahai.

84 5 Tab ue ne mi iogon ko apne sbnjiniou ke sdih bulak e un hc kaha, Jo kol men plchhe Aya obuta, chAbi- yo ki wuh apno sc iukAr kare, aur apiii salib kn uthAke mcri pairaui kare.

35 /s liye ki jo koi eliabtn ki asnl jAn bachawe, asa i^anwAtgA ; par jo koi nier? aur Injil ke liyc npui jiin ko gimwai^a, wuhi use bachawe^A.

3G Kyunki agar koi ddmi Pari dunya ko hasil kare, aur aimi jau ka iui-i^Ali uthAwe, to uae kya. fAida hmai ''

37 Aur Admi apni jAn ko badlemen kya ■■„■_■,.. I

3£ Kyunki jo koi is /makar aur khatAkar zamAna merj mujh se aur meri Mtog se shanmi. ei, Ibn i AMaca

bhi, jab apne Bap ki bashmat se j^klki pakta IliyAs ka ana zariir Briahtag ke sAth iwj», us se sbar- 12 U» ne jawab moa uni

mauga.

Masih M surat ka badai jiind. IX BA'B.

U 9 no unheii kahA, Main. tum rc. sacb kublA bi'jn, ki Tu muj t^e jo yahaii khare hain, bu'ze bain ki jab tak Kluidaki baiisbilbat qudrat st* ati iir dekben, maut ka maza na cba- kherjge.

li 'j Aur eliha din ba'd Tiad' ne Patrus, aur Ya'o/ib, aur Yubauiia ko satb liya, nur nnben ek tinche pabir par alag ie gaf« : aur un ke Age us k'i slirat bada) ffktL

3 Aur us ki posbAk cbamakti. aur babut sufeii, bart' ki tarah ho gayf, ki waisi duuyd nien koi dbobi mAcl im kar sake.

4 Tab IliyAs Musa ke «Atb unbpri ilikhAi diya; aur we Visii' se gufUigd karte tim.

o Patrus no nuikluitib beku VinV

kabA, ki Ai Kabbi, hainiin !iv.

bibtar liai ki yabau ta&tea, aur tin

dere banAweii, ck tcre, aurek Musa ke,

aur ek IliyAs ke live.

b' Kyiiilki wub im jAnt.4 tbA.ki kyA kabtd; ia Jiyc ki we babut dar gaju the.

7 Tab ck bAdai ne un par saya kiyA ; aur us badai intiij so ok Awas; Ai, aur yib kabti tbi, ki Ylh nierA piyara lieta hai : us ki suno.

b Aur ekAok uubon ne idbar udhar naear karke Visu1 ko wiwA ki.^j ko apne 'Al.li na di'klia.

i) Jab we pabAr se utarte tlie us ne uuhen hukiti kiyA, ki Jo kuchb tum ne dokbA bai, jab tak ki Ibu i AMam murdon men so ji na ut.be, Ub>i to ua kabnA.

Aur wo ua kabSm ko Apaa hi

_ nikhke cbaroliA karte tb<>, ki nmiiioii nn'ii se ji utbmt ke kyA nia'no hain.

11 T Pbir unbon ne us so kaliA, aur puohliA, k i Fauib kyiin kabtc hain, t1!"Ab kA AuA zarur lini V

jawAb nifii unlien kabA, ki Iliyas to i»alile AtA liai, aur sab

Sk 'jii-mji ruh ko

kuchh bahal karta hai;

1U|I| i

ii:ii, ki Wuh tahui sa ranj uthawega, aur hatjir kiya jaega ?

ia Lckin main tum se kalita Ini n, ki Iliyas a ehuka hai, nur jaisa M ke haqq men likha gaya tha, unhoT) nojo kuohli ki chiiliA, iu ko with kiya.

14 T Aur jab wuh apne shdgirdon, ke pas aya, Un ki diaron tat&f kiri Lini-, aur BMjitoB ko, uu so bahs karte dek k a.

15 Aur filfaur sari bhfj use dekhk: nihayat hairan lnii, aur un \As, daurke use giiUiri kiya.

H) Tali uh ne faqihim se piichha, Tum un se kya bahs karte ho ?

17 Ek no uh bhir meti si; jawab diya aur kaha, Ai Ustad, main apne bete ko, jis men guugt ruh hai, tere pas laya hiin.

18 Wuh jiihan kabin use pakarti. pitak doti hai ; n,ur wuk kaf hhar lata Ini, aui kpu« dant pinta liai, aur wuh siikli jdti liai : main no tere shagirdurj M kaha thii, ki we use bahar kar den, pir wo na kar saken.

19 Ufl na ub ku jawAb men kaha, Al be-fenan naum, main kab tak tum- hire sat.fi rahim? maifl kafe Lak tum- hiiri barddsht kurun ? use mere pii» lao.

20 W c useuspAs la.e ; aur jalin* ne oae dekba, fdl'nur ruh ne OM ainthaya : aur wah mula pw ^h;!, aur bu BOW Jake lotne lagi.

'Jl Tah lis ni! us k'- 'i ;i)i -" pii< liliii, Kitflf niuddat se j ih is ko hiU? Wuh bvla, llachpan se.

22 Aut lalim bdr use dg DOW aur pjini nien daiti thi, ta ki use jin ko indre: par "agar Ui kuchh kar saktd hai, tt> bani par rahm karke human madad kar,

23 YisiV no use kalia, Agftl r.u iman Ia sake, to i mandar ke liye sab kudik brj saktd hai

24 Tab illfaur us larko kd brip ckiilaya. aur ant-ii buhake kalia, Ai

58

MAI1Q1JS, IX. mkdlnn.

Ibu i Khudawnnd, main iman iatdhan; tfi meri be-tmaui ka chaia kar.

25 JabYisd'nedekba ki lt>g daurko jaaVa hote babi. tu (U) uapak riih ko malamat karke na bo kaba, Ai gdngi bahrl riih, main tujhe hukin karS hiiii, ia se babar nikal, aur is men pliir kabhi mat ddkhil ho.

liii Wuh ckillaknr, aur use bahut aini.liakar, OB M nikal g^yi : aur Wtlb murda ni lio gayd, aM ki bthstog M kahi, ki Wnii mar gaya.

27 Tab Yiaii' no u« ka bath pakar- ke use utliaya, aur wuli u t b kar k hara bua.

28 Aur jab wuh ghar nieij iyi, ih ke .•■ii-'(.]ii'i"ii m khahvat mag ta m piR'Idia, ki "kam uso kyiin na. nikal haken 'i

'i\i TJsne unhen kaba, ki Vih jit^, siwa du'a aur rosa ke,, kisi aur tarah ac nikal nalun sakti.

30 % Phir we wafcan bc rawio* 1ii';c( ani- Jalil mag hoke fpuai gaye, aur us ne cbaha ki koi na jane.

::i [ ■ ,'-.-.■ ki i,-;... ko rikhlAyS, aur unbuy kaha, ki Ibu i A'datn logon ke luiili men giril'tar karwdya jatd hai, aur V6 we Hll (cari'ri^r: aur wuli niard jake tJ«r*> <lin pbir v iitnegA.

S2 Lekin uriboii ue yih bat na samjhi, aur us «o piiuhlmc iin-ij daro.

Sii V Phir wuh Kafarnalium men aya, aur ghar mori pahunuiike OB H pLiuliha, ki Tum raste men bahaui kya blba karte the?

34 Par we chup raho, is liye ki we rdb men ek di'isre ae bahs karte the ki hai n men se bara kann hai ?

35 Phir us ne baitliki' un bir&fa ko bulaya, aur unhen kulih., Agar koi chaiic ki pahle darja ka ho, wuh sah tnefl plobbw, aur wali ka khidim bogi.

3(i Anr ek elibote larke ko kk« un ke bich men kliara kiya, aur jab use godj iiicri liy.i tha, un se kaha,

37 Jo kol niere aim ke liye ai^ie

SJtdyirdo/i ko nasihat Jttirnu. MAI!Q.US, X. Tnlaq dene ki Idhitl.

larkon tiivii N«k keMpibiil fcn.ro, mujhejrakhte hi'io jahannam ki ag men dahi qabtil kartA hai; aur jo kot mujhejjAwo: q:ibiil karta hai, na mujhe, baiki Usa, 43 Jabati im ka kira uakin mari d,

i niujlie bheja liai, cpihiil karta

38 K Tab Yuhanni M uso jawab deke kaha, Ai Ustad, bam nu f k k o tere ndm se deon, ku uikaUe dckhii, aur wuh hamira pairati uaiiiij : aur ham IH tUfl mari 'a kiya, kyiiiiki wuh haniari pairaiti nahin karld.

3!) Tab YiuiV no kahA, Use man'a na kam; kyilnki :us:t kol nabin jo : :i lckc koi kaniimU kari.-, nur mujiie lilfaur burd kali saka.

40 Wuhfo liainttrdinukbilif nahin haiuari tam t' hai.

41 Im Bya ki jo koi mert> nani par e k piyaia pan i mmheii. is waste.ki tuin ktaau Ice 00, pim> ku da, main tam bb Mefa kajati biin, ki wuh apuii ajr kabhi na kiiuega.

42 Aur jo koi in chbolojj men, se. jo tnujh pur iman late hain, ek ku thokar kiiiidwe, ua ke liye yiii biluar Uni, ki chakkl ka pAt us ke gaLe lu t; n bandhA jAwe, aur wuii sanutudar weij dalA jawe,

43 Aur agar teni hAth tujhe t.ho- kiir khilawu, t-> uae kit dai ; ki ziu- dagi men tunda dakliil Imna tvru Uji* us K bihtar hai ki do liALb rnkhw h&e jaliiinnaiu ke bkb, us ag mag jo kabhi D»hifl bujhti hai, daia jAa:

44 Jahan uu ka kira iiahin ruarta, aur ag nahin bujhti.

^5 iur agar teri panw tujhe thokar khihiwe, u.*o kat 'UI: kyiinki zindagi men laugra dAkhil houA tera livo ua ae liJiiur hai ki do pan w rakhte iuir iabannaui ku liicb, us Ag nieii ju kabhi miliin bujbti, dala jdwe :

•IH Juiiah im kii kiri tiahin marta, aur ag nahin bujhti.

47 Aur agar teri aukh tujhe rhnkar khiiawe, use nikdl dai : ki KhudA ki badsbdbjit men kdiia dakhil boBa taru liye iu so bibtar hai ki do aukliun

nahin bujhii.

49 Kyuaki bar tik shakba Ag se namkin kiya jacga, auv bar «k iiui'hdai liarnak se nainkiii ki jaegi.

50 Naraak auhuhiii ebiz hai : lekin agar naniak be-mnza lio Jiwa, lo kis •B use UBMtdJS fcaroge? Pas Ap men muuak rakbo, aur Ajiaa men irulan kam.

X i: A 'i:.

Pil I R wah wjiliau te uthkar Yardan ke | >iir Yalnidiya lu uarbaiidun men ij'dj aur Ing us pas phir jan:'a bui) ; aur wuh apne daatiir ke miiwAili; pbir linhen ta'liin karne laga.

2 % Aur Pftrtflfofl nc ua pas aku iintihitii ki rfth so us se pochha, Kyd iiiwd hai ki mard Juni ku talAq iie 'i

3 Us no miheg jawab men kahA, ki Miisa db tumben kya hukm diya?

4 We Vxile, Miisa no to ijazat di hai ki talaq-narna liklike talaq deg.

5 Tab Yisii' no jawab diya, aur unhen kaha, Us ue tuinliari sakbulili ke sabab se tuutliare liye yih hukm likhd.

B Lokin kliilijut ki ibtida ee to KhudA H unhen ek uar aur ek mAiia lia.na.ya.

7 Is sabab se mard apne nia bap ko . mrapaijorf h mlUl raJiega:

B Aur we doaog ck tau huiige: m we ab do tau nuluii, baiki h tau Iiain.

U Pas jiae Klmda ne juri hai, Admi juda na karo.

10 Aur gliar men hoke ua ke s!.,i.- ginbnj nt' uu we is bat ki b&bat puchba.

11 Uh nc unhen kali A, Jo koi jorti ko chhore, aur duk «e byah karu, to us ki alabal zinA kartd hai.

12 Aur agar jorii apne ahauhar ko :hhor de, aur dt'iKre se byahi jfa, M

wah bbi Kina kard hai.

13 t I'hir we chhcite larkon ko us

Lnrtcn ko MARQ

pa- I;ir, t.i ki wuh unhen ehhrie ; pat elid^irdon ne un linewalun ku daiihl.

14 Yitu'i' yih dekhke ua-khindi biid, aur uiihejj kahd, Cbbcte larkorj ko morc paa dne do, aur uiihen nian'a kar.i: kviinki Khudd ki badsbdhat alaog hi ki bal

15 Main tam ia meb kahta hi'm, Jo koi Khudd ki bddahahat ko chho- te lnrkc ki tarah qabiil na karc, wuh us men ddkhil na hoga,

16 Ph i r us no unhen apui god men liya, aur un par hath rakhko uukeii harakat di.

17 T Aur jnh wuh nih men chala jata tlia, tk mhakhs ns pil* daurti dyn, aur u* ke Agc ghutiio tokke us sc piichha, Ai nek Ltrtad, main kya kariAii td ki hatnesha ki nindagi ka waris hun 'i

18 Yisu' no us sc kahd, Tu mujhe nok kyiin kahta hai? ki nek koi ua- hig, mag» ok, ya'no, Khudn.

19 Tu hukinoy ko j:iiitd hai, ZltlR na kar, Kbiin na kar," Ohori na kar, Jlii'itlii ^iwdhi na do, Farcb na do, Apne ma bap ki 'izzat kar.

'M T"s no jawab mori use kahd, Ai Ustad, main ne jawani bq in sab ko uaiid hai.

21 Tali YifUi' ne ub par nigdh karke use piyar kiya, aur ub h kahd, Ek chi?: tujh men baui hai; j A, aur ya kuchh teri lio, beuh diil, aur gaiibon ko dc, to tu Asiudn par khazdna pdwegd; aur iiihur a, aur salib uthake mere pichhe ho le.

22 Wuh u« hat se ud&s hdd, aur gam kli:'ii:L iiv.a chala gayd, kyiinki bara uialdar tha,

23 1 Tab Yiwu' ne eh Aron taraf nazar karke ftpne shagirdon bo knha, Kliuda ki bidahahat tnerj dnulatiuaud ka ddkhil honA kyahi mushkil hai]

24 fehdgird us ki balon bo hair&n ln'iL', Tah Timi' tta phir jawAb men

linimu katili, Ai Iftffco, .j" log 'hllht

par bhnrosa rakhte hain, un ko liye o'O

U8| X. harakat >te»n.

Khuda ki badabakat men diikhii lumu kyA hi mushkil hai!

25 Ki siii ke ndko so tint ka jdnd, Khuda ki biidahdhat naii daulatmand ke ddkhil hone se, dsan hai.

UB VVe babat hi hairdn hokc apas tnen kahuc bg«, Phir kaun najat j.a sakta hai?

27 Yisu'no unki taraf ntjrih karko kahd, ki Insan ke nazdik nd-niuinkin hai, ]iar Khudd ke nnzdik naiiirj ; kyiinki Khuda ko nazdik aab kuchh ho saktA liai.

28 f Tab Patrua m ne k«hne Inu'd, Dttkh, hsffi ne nah kuclih ofahofi, ;inr terc pichiie lio liye.

"'J Yi-ii' B6 bw&b men knha. Main tam H Heb kahta h\\n, Aisa ki7i naliin, jis ne ghar, ya bhaion, ya bahinon, yd bdp, yd md, yd jora, yd larke balon, yd kiu't<>n ki; mere a'ur Injil ko liye clihor diya hai,

30 Jo bilfi'iil is jahati men sau guna na ptlwo, ghar, aur blidi, nur Uihin, nur md, aur larke, aur khet, taadi'flg ke sdth ; aur dnewdle jahdn nun haniesha ki zindagi pdwoga",

31 Lckin bahuturtt, jo ag!e hairj, pichhlo; aur jo piohhle, a^Ie feonse.

32 ^ Aur jab wc r:Ui men hoke Yarfcalam ko J4te the, Visti' un se age l-iiriii'i; tab wo hairan hdo, aur pichhe chalto chnlto baluit dur gaye. Aur phir Mrahofj ko luke jo kuchh u» par honcwdld thi un ae kahne lagd : ki

33 Dekho, hain Ynnisahni ko y'dr hain, aur Ilm i A'dam Wrdir kahinojj aur J'iiijiliHij ke hawalekiya j.iogd ; aur

.is ke qntl kd hukin derjge.aur use

^lir-'j.iurnon ko hawalo karciiL"' :

31 Aur we us H hansi kan.ijL'e, aur

e kore martjijae, aur us par tlu'ikongo,

aur use nail karenge; aur wuh tisro

diu ji ntlu-^d,

35 1 Tab Znbadi ko lieton YaVjiib itur Yuhniuid ne us rjrfs ako kiiliii, Ai Ut-tdd, ham chaltCc baig ki ju

Bhogirdon Jco maria Isamd, MARQUS, XI. ki apni bardi na chahen.

kue h h ham mdngen, tu haindro liye I 47 Aur yih sunkar ki wuh Yisii'

Ndsari hai, chilbiuo mir kabue lagd,

""i Ua ne un m kahd, Tum kydlAi Daud ko boto, Yisu', mujii par

chdhto bu, ki main tumhdro liyc k ani n ?

37 Unhon ne oa ne kahd, Bam ko bakhsh, ki tera jala! men, ham, ek teru dahine hdih, aur dusra tere bden hdth, biitlivn.

38 Tab Yisii' ne iinhen kahd, Tum uahiu j:littc ki kyd mdngte ho : kyd

wuh ]ii\iU:t, ji ilti pfaut pH lii'.ti.

tum pl sakte ho? aur wuh baptismu., b main jiiiuo par him, tum pd saklc ho?

39 Unhon ne us se kahd, ki ITatii ■akta hiliri. Yisii' dg unhi-n kaiid, Tum towuh piydla, jo main pita h titi, >,./. . iur wuh buptwuia, jomain jiane pai' lilin, ]':h'L:.' :

•10 Lekiu mero dahine aur bden hdth kisi ko baithne dena, merd kain naliitj, magar uu ko, jiu ke liye yih tiiiydr kiyi gaya liai.

•11 Jab un dason ue sund, to wu Ya'qub aur Yuluumi par khafa koue lage.

42 Tab Yinii' ne unhen apne pati buldyd, aur unlien kahd, Tum jdnte ho ki we jo gair-i|aumon ke sarddr kahlate hain, un par kliawiudi kartu haiu, aur un ke buzurg un par huku- inat kartu li..ij.

43 Pte tam men aisa na DGjia : baiki jo tum men hara hud chdhe, tmiihdm khddim hugd:

44 Aur tum mon sa jo koi sarrtar hiid ohahe, wuh Bab ka bauda boga.

45 Kyiinki Ibu i A'dani bhi nahtn aya ki us ki khidmat ki jdwe, l>alki tip khidmat kare, aur apni jan bahut- (jii ke liye kai'ave mag aewe.

4U ^ l'hir wu Yarihuniende ; aur jab wuh, aur uh ke sliagird, aur ck BRfj hliir, Yarilui M nikahi tht, Timai ka beta Bartimai, jo nmlha tba, r Ah ku kintire baithd hua bbikh mingtd tim :

01

mluii kar.

48 Aur harchnnd lmhuton no usc ddntd, ki chup rahe, par wah aur bhi ziyada chilldya, ki Al D Atid ko beto, luujli naf mliiii kar.

49 Tab Yisu' ne khare hoke hukm kiyd, ki Uae buldo. Unhon ne na andhe ko yih kabko bulayti, ki Eh .i- tir-jam'a rakh, uth; wuh tujlie bu- ldtd hai.

50 Wuh apnd kapj-d phoukkcuthti, aur YisiV pas Ayd.

51 Yisu' ne mukhatib hoke us se kaba, Tu kyd uliahtd hai ki main tera liye kariin ? Us andhe ue us se kahd, Ai lialil'i, yih, ki main apni aiikhen {Kiiin.

52 Yisu' ne us se kabd, Ji, tere Enutn ne tujhe bachaya. W'unhirj u$ ne aiikhen piiin, aur rah mc-ii Yisii' ku phihhe chald.

XI BATI.

JAB we Yanisalam kn nazd!k. Zait- un ke paliar ke pas, Hailtagdaur Iiiiit'aiiiyd men ae, us ne apuu s>hi- girdon men bg do ko blicja,

Aur uu bp kahd, ki U* Iwisti men, jo tumhdre samhne hai, jdo, aur jab tum us men dAkhil ho^e, ek gadhi ke bandho hiie bachche ku pd'igi', ji,- |iar kablii kui Mwil nahin hua; use khoi- ko le do.

.'! Aur agar kol shakhs tuiuhon kahe, ki Tum yih kyuii karte ho? tum kabiyo, Kbudiwaiid ko u» ki zarurat hai ; to wuh iihaur use yahaii bhej dt-gd.

i Wo gaye, aur us bachche ko dar- wdza ke na/,dik liihar bandba hiid, ja- b&B do-rahd ihd, i>dyd, aur u* khola.

5 Ba'fcou ne, uu iin'n K jo wahan khare the, unherj kahd, Yih kyd karte ho, ki gadhi ke bachche ko kholta tu '.' I ij Unhon ne, jaisa Ylsd' ne l'inuaji

Madh shiihana tuurpar MAT1QT"S, XI. Tarusalam men /iakhi! kota.

, kabA; tab unhon no ua ko jauelyih suni, aur flkr men thc ki use

lUya.

7 We iis gadhi kebachche ko YisiV paslae, aur apne kapre ns jiar dai diye: aur wuh ue. par rawAt hua.

y Aur bahu ton ne apni pophak ko nih men bkhhava; aur auron. ne darakhton kl dalian kaike rah men bithrain.

1» Aur we ]o &es pirhhe jatc thi»,

Kakfeke kiilitf the, ki Boahfaanf i lubarak wuh jo Khudawand ke nam I«r ata hai :

10 Itamare Mp Daud ki badabahat jo Khudawand ke nam «ssti hai, Mu- barak! 'Alam i bala men UnsVanna ] ) Yixu' Yaruflalam mag dakhil hfii, aur bnikal men Aji; aur jali obArOfl taraf sab Datang par raulahana kiri, wub uji barahon ke «aib Bait'- miivi ko gav», kyiinki shain ka waqt thi

12 1 Dfim din ko, jab wc Tbi.it'nn iya ko biliar ae, ua ko bluikh lagi :

13 Aur d u r «« anjir ki ek darakhi pattaE se lada hua dekhke wuh gaya, ki ftfityad tu men feucrih piwo; jab wnii ob pfia iya, to pattori ko »iwa kuchh napaya; kyiinki anjir ka mau- »im ria iba.

14 Tab YisiV ne UI M khilab karke kiii,;i, J\<;i tujh se pbal kablii na khawn; aur uu ku »hagirdon, n« yili suni.

15 T We Yanianlnm men ao; aur YisiV baikal men «hikhil hoke unhen, Jo l.aikal men bttthfea IDI mol lele tho. baliar uikalne lagi, aur sarrafoii ke takhta, nur kabutar-bechiiewAlon ki chaukian, ulat din ;

16 Aur kisi ko baikal men lioku bartan le jine na diyi.

17 Aur unhen yili kahke saTnjliiyA, Kyi yib nahin likhi lini, ki M era ghareab aaurnon ke Uye 'ibadatkhaua kahliegi f le.kin lura tie iisu oWon kii gar banaya bai.

18 PaofllOjj aur saruir kobioon ne

62

I kisi tarah jari w mirrm ; kyi'mki us se darte ihe,is liye ki sab log uski tn'lim h dana bo g»je the.

li) Aur jabsliim bui > wub shahr ko

kiictr BtJ*.

20 ^ Aur sulih ko, jab we udhar se jtuzre, to dekhi ki wuh anjir ka damkbl i:ir se siikh gaya.

21 Tab Putrns ne vid karke ita se kahii, Ai Kabbi, dekii, anjir ka yih ilariiklit, ji« par tu ne la'nat ki ihi, sukh gaya hai.

22 Yiaii'ne jawab men unhen kah4, KbudA jiar i'aHqad rakho; ki

2t Main !,um se saeli kabti hun, Jo koi ia jaliar ko kalie, Utli, aur daryd men gir par, aur apne dil men shakk OB la wo, baiki yaqin knre ki yib baten, jo wuh kahta bai, hojicngi, to jo kucbb wuh kahegi, so hog&.

'^4 Is liye main tum ne kalila ln';n, ki Du'a Dien jo kucbb turn m&ngtc bo, yaqin lao ki milega, to tum pii'-gc.

25 Aur jab ki tum du'a ke liyc kharo hetfl bo, agar tumhen kisi par kuchb shikayat bo, to use uju'af karo, la ki tumblra Biip bhi, Jo asunan par liai, tumhiire ipimiron ko mu'af kare.

26 Aur agar tmn mu'af na karoge, b> tiiinliara Bap, jo tanin pai bal, tumhiire oumir bbi mu'af na karega.

21 «i Wo pbit Yaruaalam men ac. .liili wuh lniikal men jiliirta tbi, aar- ddr kdhin aur faipb aur buzui-g us ko p&a ac,

28 Aur u9 ee kabi, ki Tii kis ikhti- yar m yih kitu karti hai ? aur kit> no tujbe ikbtiyar diya ki yih kam karc?

29 Tab YisuV n« jawab men unhen kaba, ki Main bhi tum ne ■■!■. bal puchhta lilin ; tum jawab do, to main tinulu'ij baliliiii^a ki main kis ikhti- ar se yih kam karta bon.

30 Yuhanna ka bapti.sma asman so thii, yi insan se ? mujhe jawab do.

iil Tuli «*e apaa men aochke kahno tage, ki Agar batu kahen, Asinan se,

Tdkistdn ki tati $U, MARQUS, XII.

to wuh kahega, Phir tum kyiin us par uu&n. naiiin \m- '.'

3:i Aur agar haru kahen, Insdn se, to logo n. se oarte; ia liye ki sah Yu- Lanui ko nai>i barhao/] jdnttj tbe.

33 Tab unhon ne Visu' se jawdb men kaha, Ham nahm Unta. Yisi'f nc jawab men unhen kaha, Main bhi tum .-t! naiiin kahfd ki main kis ikhtivar M vih kain kartd hun. XII BAU

PHIR Maih unhen tiimsikm men kahno lagd. ki Ek ahakhs Dfl aiigtir kd bag Jagdyd, aur ua ki chdr- m taraf ghera, aur kolhii ki jagah khodi, aur ek burj liandya, aur us.' WjbanOB ko SUpnw karke pardes gaya, 'l l'Iiir mausim mag us ne ek nau- k;i: ko b£gb£aon [■as bhcjd, td ki wuh bdgbdnon M angiir ke bag ke phal im-u si- kiii.lili le.

3 Unhon nc use nnkarke mara, aur khdli hdth bheja.

4 Us ne dobdra ek aur naukar ko un p&a bliL-ja; unhon nc* us par pat* thar phenkke ua ka sir phora, aur be- hunnat karke pher biieja.

5 l'hir us ne ek aur ko Lhcjd: unhon ne use (jati kiya; phir aur bahuteron ko; un taen se ba'zoti ko pita, aur ba'zon ko mdr ddld.

6 Ah us k;L ek hi beta' thd jo us kd ptyard tha. akhir ko us no usti hhi un pas ylh kahke hheja, ki Wu meru bete tse dabenge.

7 Lekin un Ldglwinon ne apas men kahd, Yih waria hai; do, bam uae mdr il;ileu, to miris hamdri lio jdejji.

a Aur unhon na use pnkarks qatl kiyi, aur angiir ko bag ke bdhar pheuk diyd.

8 Pas bag M mdlik kyd karega? wuh dwegd, aur un bagbatuog ku bar Idk karke angiir ka bdg aimin ko dega.

lizyn c

e ki b£bai.

i 1 Vih Khuddwaod ki taraf sc bud, aur hamari na/,aron men 'ajib hai ?

12 Tab unhon no ehdhri- ki use pa- kar len, par logon ae darte the ; kyunki wc samajh gptyv the, ki us ne yih liuusil un par kalii; aur we uae chhorke chah: gaya.

13 1f Phir unhon ne bn'ze Fariaion aur ] 1 1 ■ 1 1 1 1 3 i ■_. ti ko us |ida bhejft, ki uae us ki h.-iton se pbande men dalen.

14 Aur jab we de, to ue bv kalid, Ai T'stad, ham jaufi> luiin, ki tfi wachcha hai, nur tujh ko kisi ki parwa nahiu, kyunki tii logon ki twafddri Dflhfrj kara, baiki Khuda ki rah rasti se batdtd hai; Qaisar ko jizya dcnd tewi hai, yd nahin?

15 Ham dewen, ya na dcwrn ? Us ne un k d makr Kamajhke unlien ka- hd, Tum mujlie kyi'm dzmdte ho? ek dinar mujh pds lai>, ki main dekhiin.

16 We ldo; tab us ne u&te puebra, ki Yib kia kf surat, aur kia kd aikka hai ? Unhon ne kahd, Qaisar ka.

17 Yiaii' ne jawdb nien unhen kahd, Jn ch'm-.t} Qaisar ki hctin, Qaisar ko, aur jo cliiwn Khudi ki hairi, Khudd ko do. Tab wo ua w hairdn hue.

18 1 l'hir Kaduq[, ju .|iydmat kd inkdr karte hain, us pds de ; aur un- hon ne us sc suwal karke kahd, ki

l'.* Ai Uetdd, hamdre liye Musa no likhd hai, ki Agar kisi ka bhdi mar jde, aur us ki jorti rahe, aur rkrea&d ua ho, to us kd bhdi un ki jonl ko lewa, td ki apno bhai ke iiyo aulad paldi k a re.

20 Ab sdt bhdi the; pahio ne jord ki, aur he-aul-id mar gayd.

21 Tab ddare ne uh liyd, aur mur gayd, us kd bhi kol farzand na rahd ; aur nsi tarah .se tinro ne.

t'2 Yunbin sdton ne use liyd, aur auldd naiiin elihor gaye; aab ke pi-

10 Kyd tum ne yib naviahta nahiu i:)ilic wuh 'aurat bin mar gayi. parhd, ki Wuh patthar, jiBe mPamironj TA Qiydmat men jab we uthengc.

I ud-iiasand kiyd, wuhl kooe kd aird wuh

biid :

| kyunk

nien se kis ki joni hugi? wuh saton ki jorii hiii thi.

Ekfayh ke mwal kj. jawab. MAUQU8, XIII. Ganh hcwa ke do ■■hha-b'<m. 24 Tu&'va jawab men unhon ka-jAur ba'd ua ko kisi ne jur,at na ki,

ha, ki Kya tmii la sabah'ao bhtifnien ki a

iiahin pare ho, ki tam ua unvishton' ke, na Khuda ki qudrat k o jamu ho?

35 lf Phir YisiV haikal men wa'z karte Iii'wj kohne lagi, ki Fai]ih~kyTm-

26 Kyi-jjki jab mnrde utheiige., tolku kahte hain, ki Masih Daud ki

wc ua liy:lii kimti^c, mi livak: jaen«e, baiki jelse firiahtejo asman par hain, WHtM hortgo.

'2(i Aurtnurdon keji utlmc ki 1 li- bat kya turn iio Miisa ki' kitab men nahin parha, ki Khuda no jhari meri se us ae kytinkar kaha, ki Main Abi- rahamka Klnuhi,, aur l/.liiuikd, Khuda, mi r Ya'i|iiii ka Khuda. In'nj?

27 Wuh murdog k& Khuda- nah iri, baiki zindon ka Kbuda hai; pa» tuui bari pila.r.i karte ho.

28 t Tab fa-nlmt; men sc ek jis un ka suujil o uwifa mnka samjha ki us ne unhen khiib jawab diya, pas .iya, aur ua ko puchha, ki Sab hukinorj mag auwal kaun bai?

29 Yisu' ne ua se jawab men kaha, ki Sab hukiuon morj amval yih bai, ki Ai Israel, sun ; "Wuh Khudawand, jo iiamara Khuda bai, ek hi Khudawand hai:

30 Aur tu Khudawand ko, jo torsi, Khnda hai, apne sare dil sg, aur apni sarijan se, aur njmi siri 'aql m, aur spna sirire aur ee, piyar kar; auwal lnikii: yilii hai.

31 Aur .irisra jo ua ki manind hai, yih bai, ki Tri apm> papotij ko apne barabar piyar kar. Ia se bara" uur koi hukm nahir. bai.

32 Tab uh faqih no us se kaha, Kya khtih! Ai Ustad, tu ne sach kaha, kyiiiiki Kbuda ek hai; us ke siwAaur koi nahiii:

33 Aur n« ko sare dil se, aur uari

beta hai ?

86 Kyunki Paiid ap hi Rilh i Quds ke hatane se kanta hai, ki ^imWwftnd nc mere Khudawand ko' kaha, Tii inere dahiriw harh baitb, jab tak main teredushmanonkotere j-fttiwimrakbuo ki chauki karun.

37 Daud to ap h! ukc Khudawand kahta bai ; phir wuh ua ka beta ];viirik;ir hai 'i Aur "awamui khushi ae uh ki sunte the.

38 ^ Us ne apni talfm mon imhen kaha, Faqibon so lioshyar raho, jo tambo j;i;iu' pahinke nb kurmi, aur bazar un mvQ Kalamon k o,

S0 Aur 'ili.iriatkhanon men sadr kursiim ko, aur ziyafaton raen uochj Ja«bojj ko, chahto hain :

40 W e bt'-won ke gharon ko nigalte haiii, aur makr'se nainiiz"ko tiil dete hain; uulien /.j y ada aaza hogi.

41 K l'liir 'Vi-ii' l.:ut-u)-T[iiil ke TOinhtic baitbkar dekb raha tha ki log bait-ul-mdl iiu'ij palsu kis tarah oaltt

liain; aur labur daulatmandofl ne

bahut kncdih dala.

42 Aur ek girib bewa no dkc do

chhadira, ya'ue ek adheia, us men dala.

48 Tab us re apne ahairirdori ko

bulake unhen kaha, Main nun ee each

kahta biin, ki Is kangal bewa ne un

ib se, jo bnit-ul-mil mea dalte hain,

iyriiia d.ili bai.

U Kyiiiiki sobhotj ne apne bahu t

mal meg MU kucbh dalii, par uh ae

\v[\ *e, aur sari jaa ne, aur sara zor tu, Bfarf ^aribi se, jo kuch'h ki u.s ka thi,

piyar karua, aur B^me partai ho npna npni sari punji dali.

l'uriilMrmuhabbatraklma.hahsrjkbtoni ipirbanion aur zablhon se hihtar hai.

34 Jati Yisu' no dekha ki tu ne danai h few£b diyi, to us «e kabd, Td Khudi ki badsbab.it w &6i naW 64

.XIII lU'R.

JAR wub haikal se babar jAta tha, us ke itMfghdog men se *k ne ua ne kab.A, Ai Ustad, dekh, ye kitne bare pattiar, aur kilnl bari Wsmtcg hain!

Dukfijo shiiyird pawrnge. MAT»QUS,

2 Yistl' ne jawab mcn us se kahd, ki Tii in bari 'hnaraUin ]wr nig&h kartU hai? yahdn patthar par patthar na chhutegd, Jo girdyd na jdegd.

3 Jab wnh Zaitun ke pahir pai haikal ke sdmhne baithd thd, Patrus, aur Ya'qub, aur Yiihannd, aur Andryds ne uinile men us ae pnchha,

4 Ram ne kah, k i yih kafe hogd, aur uh waqt kd, jab yih sab kuthh pfird hogd, kyd uishfin hai 'i'

5 Yisu' ne jawab mcn unhcti kahna ihurd' kiyfi, Hoshyar ratto, ki tumben koi gumrdh na kare :

6 Kydijki bnhuterc mcrd nam lcke dwenge, aur "kahenge, ki Main wuhi hiin, aur bahuton ko gumrdh karenge.

T Aur jab tuiu laraian aur lardioti ki afwahen suno, mat ghabrdiyo; kyunki un chizon kd waql hona Bft- nfr hai ; lokin dkbir abhi nahin hogd.

8 Kyiinki oauni qauiu par, aur bdtUhdhat bddshdhat par charhegi, aur kitni jagahon men E&lzale Kongo, aur kdl parongi1, aur fasdd uthenge; y>h musibaton ka shttru' hai.

9 1 Par tum &\> so khabarddr rabo; kyiinki we tumben niajlison ke ha- wdle karenge, aur ibadatkhamm meg tum nidr khi'mgc, aur hakinion aur badsbahon ke dge inere wdste hdzir kiye j&ofl», la ki un par gawdhi ho.

10 Lckin «arni bai, ki pahlc Bab qaumon ke dge Injil ki manddi ho.

11 Tar jab tuuihen le jdke hawale karen, age se fikr na karo, ki ham kyd kahenye, aur na soclio : baiki jo kuchh us ghari umihen batayd jdwe, wuhi kahiyo; kyiinki kabnewdle tum na- hin ho, baiki Iliin i Quds bai.

12 Bhdt bhdi ko, aur bdp bete ko <qn.t l ke wdsto pakarwdegd; aur Wke ma bin kd samuni karke unhcn inar- wd ddlenge.

13 Aur luiTd ii.'Lin ke sabab se sah tumbare dushrnan honge; i*ir jo koi akhir tak sabr karegd, wuhi inijat piwegt.

XIII. A'fatenjo YahMioiipar 6,wengc-

14 ^ Jiswaqt tuin us kliardb-karne- wdH makruh chiz ko, jis kd Ddniid nabi ne /ikr liiyd, 08 janah inerj, jahan uh kd khard hona rawi nahin, dekrit), (jo parhtA hai, so samajli le,) tab we jo Yahudi ya mon hon, paltaron pir bhdgen :

15 Aur wuh jo kothe par ho, ghar men na utre, aur apiie ghar se koi obu nikalue ke !iyo nn jde:

1C Aur jokbet men bai, apni poshdk ulliauu ke iiye pichhe na phire.

17 Aur un par jo un dinon men hamiU bon. aur un par jo dudh pild- tidn bon, al'so,- hai !

18 Aur du'd mdngo, ki tuiuhdrd bniena jtn men na ho.

18 Kyunki un dinorj met] aisi taklif hogi, ki ibtidd e khilqat w, jise Khu- dd ue khalq kiya, ab tak, na lidi, aur na hogi.

20 Aur agar Khudawand un dinon ko na gbat.dtd, to ek ddini na hicKta ; par un barguzidon ke waate, jin ko us □e chund hai, un dinon ko ghatdya.

21 Us waqt agar koi tumhcn kahe, Dekho, Masih yahdn, yd dokho, wahdn hai, io yaqiu na ldiyo :

22 Kyunki jlnitbe Masih aur jhu- the nabi uthen-ic, aur nishdnidn aur kardmdt diklildenge, ki agar ho maktd, to barguzidon ko bhi gumrdh karb;.

2'i Par tum khabarddr raho ; dekhn, main ne tinnhen sah kuchh pahle hi kali diyd hai.

24 Tf Aur un dinon men, us taklif ke ba'd, niiraj andhc-ra boga, aur ch&pd apni roshni nu degi ;

25 Aur Asiudn se nitdre girenge, aur asuidn ki quwaten Mlai jdengi.

26 Aur us waql Ibn i A'dam ko bddalon j)ar bari qudrat aur Jalai k< sdth atedekhcnge.

27 Aur us waqt wuh apne finshton ko bhejcgd, aur apne barguzidon ko, zainin ki hadd se demdn ki liadd tak, chirofl taraf s" il;:Llfliu karega.

28 Ab anjir ke darakht so tamsil

E

Jftntt far '#r m-Jaa, MARQU8, XIV . Masih id dHiri fawh Mana.

eiklio; Jab us ki iiiiroi tlalf hotf, aur

INilto nikalto ham, tiib tum jduti: ln> 1 .: ^ijniii ruizdik hai:

L?y U si tarah tum bhi, jab dekho ki yih abn-d! hone lage, to jduo, ki wuh nazdik, baiki dazwwe par hai.

30 Main tum se snch kanta In'm.k h /amane ke log guzar na jaongc, jab tak yiti sah kjBcEh wa^'i na howe.

31 A'sman aur «amin tal jdcngo, par mori bdteri na talengi.

32 T Magar us din, aur us ghari ki babat, siwd l(ap ke, na to firishte jo dsmdn par hain, aur na Beta, koi nahin jiutd hai.

JH Tum khaharddr ho, jagte raho aur du'd nia'ngo : kyfinki tum nahin jdiite ki waijt kab hai,

M Yih ai&d hai, jait;d ek shaklisjo nptii ghar chhorko pardes gaji, aur apae naukaron ko ik htiyar dekar bar ck ko us ka kara diyd, aur darban ku hukm kiytl ki ja<;td rsbe.

35 Ie liye tum jd^to rnlio, kyunki tum mUiin janto ki ghar kamalik kab awuga, shdm ko, yd ddhi rit ko, ya inurg ke bang dete waqt, ya aubh ko ;

33 Ta aisi na ho, ki achdnak ake wuh tum ko mte paive.

37 Aur jo kuchli main tum se kan- ta hi'ui, eab se kabta hun, Jdgto raho.

XIV BA-a

DO din ke ba'd f»«ah aur fatiri roti ki 'id thi ; aur saniar kdhin aur t'uqih tadbfr kar rahe tho ki use kyun- kar makr se pakarkc jau se niaren.

2 l'nr unhon ne kaha, ki 'I'd ke din nahm, aLad na lio, ki logon men balwa.

3 T Aur jab wuh Bait'aniyd men

Slniiiia'iin kurbi ko gharkbdiie baithd* ck 'aurat jataindsi ka bosh-qimat kbd- lis 'itr marmar ke 'itrdan men UU, aur rlibiyd torke 'itr ko us ke air par 4hala.

4 Tab ba'ze apno dil men dzurda hoke kahne lage, 'Itr ki yiir^barabi kislivehfit?

5 Kydnki yih 'itr tiii sau d(mtr ko bik sakti, aur garibon ko diyd jdta. Aur we inw nmlamat karnc lage.

fi Tab Yi*ii' nekaha, Use chhordo; kyun nm aatate bo'i* u» ne mere sdth aoliulihi BoJfik kiya hai.

7 Is wdste ki garib gurbi hamesha tumhare sdth hain, aur jab tum chalio un sekeki kar sakte ho; iiar main hatnewha tumharu sath na rabunga.

8 Jo kuchh wuh knr aaki, ao kar obukf , us ne sabqaikarke meru badan ko kafan ke liye mu'atiar kiya,

9 Alaiii t'irii eo sach kahta haQ, kt Tam&m elunya men, jah.in kabin yih Injii manadi ki jat'gi, yih bhi jois ue kiya hai, U ki yadgdri ko liye bayau kiya jaega.

10 1 Tab Yahi'idah Iaqariyiiti, jo un barahon men se thA, sardar kalun- on ]i;ih gaya, ta ki uae un ke hath pakar w a dewo.

11 We yih sunke khush hde, aur us ko riipiyo dcue kd iqrdr kiyd; tab WUh (ikr men laga, ki kis tarah qabu pdkc use pakarwd de.

1U t Aur 'id i fatfr ke pable din, jab wc fa.tah ko zabh kartu the, us ke fcbacirdon ne use kaJia, Tii kahdy chalitd hai ki luun jaerj aur taiyaii karen, ki tu fiisah ko khfcwe?

13 Ub ne apue Bhigirdog men se do ko bheja, aur uuhetj kaha, Sliahr men jdn ; wahdn ek sbnkhs pdni kd gliaia uthae hiio tumlion. milegd; ua ke pichhc chale jdo,

14 Aur wuh jia ghar men dakhil howe, tum uh gbar ke nni/ik ae kaho, Usidd kahtd hai, ki Wuh utame ki jagab, jahdn main apne shdprdon ke sath fasah khiiiin, kahdrj hai ?

L5 Wul, ,-k Twra baldkhana farsh bScbbi aur drdsla tumben dikbawegd ; «■alian liamdre liye taiyrtri karo.

16 Tab us ke ahdgird chale gaye, aur shahr men dke, jaiai us ne uiiben k.'ilui ihd, waisd hi pdyd, aur lasad taiydr kiyd.

17 Jab tshdm hiU, wuh U ItB MUI :iv;i.

18 Jab wc baitlike khdne lagc, YisiV ne kahd, Main fcoin se sach kahtd liiin, ki Ek tum men .se, jo m t' re sdth khitd hal, mtljhe pakarwdegd.

10 Tab we garngro. hone lage, aur un men so ek ek ksrke us se kain»' lage, Kyd main min? aur dusrd, Kyd main has ?

20 Ua ne jawab merj un se kali A, ki Rambun men se ek hai, jo incrc sdth basan men hdth ddltd hai.

21 Ibu i A'dam to, jaisd uh ke haqq men likhd hai, jdtd hai ; lekin afac* us s, hak L s nur, jis ke wasile Ibn i A'dam pukiirwdyd jdtA hai ! M ddmi ke liye Dibiar thd, ki wuh paidi na hotd.

22 1 Jab we khdte the, Yisu' ne roti uthai, aur shukr karke ton, aur unhen dekar kahd, I/>, kbdo; yih nierd hadan hai.

23 Phir U8 no piyala lekar ahukr kiyd, aur unhen diya; aur un sabhon ne u» se piyi.

24 Aur us no unhen kahd, ki Yili raera naye 'ahd kd laliu hai, jo bahu ton ke liye bahaya jati hai.

26 Main tum ac sach kahta hiin, ki Main anulir ka ras, jis din tak Khudd ki kulsdidhat meg use naya na pilin, phir na pitirjgd.

2(i ^ Tab we ek zabtir gdko bahar nikle, aur Zaitun ke pahdr pft* IKK.

27 Aur YisiT ne un se kaha, Tum sah dj ki rdt mi're haqi[ men thokar khdogc, ia liye ki yih likhd hai, Main garatiyo ko mininga, aur bheren pard- gaiida ho jdengi.

28 Par main apne nthno ke ba'd tum M dgo Jalil ko jdunjjd.

29 Tab Patrus ne us ne kaha, Agar- ebi sab thokar khawen, par main na kJjaiiij^A.

30 Visu' ne ua se kahd. Main tujh BS sach knhtd huu, ki A 'j 'm hi rat ko, murg ke do bdr bdng dene ke dge, tu tin bdr mord inkdrkaregd.

MAHQUS, XIV. fcrf UI

bdrahon' 31 Tab na ne bir bdr kahd. Agar tera aat-h mori marnd sar&r \m. t»u

bhi hargiz terd inkdrnakariingd. Aur un sabhon nc blil waiad hi kahd,

Phir we ek jagah men, jis kd

ndm Gatsomane Uid, de; aur ua ne

■ne shdgirdcin ko kaha, .lab tak ki

main du'd mdngun,, tum yabdrj baitlie

Aur Patrus aur Ya'uiib aur Ytl- bannd ko apne sdth liyd, aur wuh ghabrdne aur bahut udds hone laga ;

34 Aur un so kahd, Mori jdn k» j>am maut kd sd hai ; tum yahdrj thahro, aur jdgte raho.

36 Aur wuh thord dgc jakar zaniin par gira, aur du'd tilangi, ki a^ar lio sake, to yih ghari mujh ae tal jac.

86 Aur kahd, Ai Abbd, a'i Bip, sah kuchh tujh so ho sakti hai ; is piydlu ko mujh se til de ; lekin na wuh jo main chdhtdhi'm, baiki jo tii chdhtdliai.

37 Phir wuh dyd, aur unhen tuta pdyd, aur Patrus ko kahd, Ai Bh*- raa'iinTtii soti hai? kyd td ek ghari jdg na nak A ?

38 Jayt* raho, aur du'd mdngo, td aisd na ho, ki tum Imtihan men paro : nih to musta'idd, par jis m sust hai.

39 Wuh phir gaya, aur wuhi bat du'd men nidngi.

40 Aur phir dke unhen sote paya, kyunki un ki dnkhen biidri thiii, aur we nahin jdiite the ki use kyd jawdb dewen.

4l"Phir tisri bdr dke unlien kahd, ki Ab sote raho, aur drdui karo ; lui.s, waqt d pahunehd ; dekho, Ibu i A'dam poTidh^amri ke hdthon mi.n hawdla kiyd jdtd hai.

42 Utho, ham chalon; dekho, wuh |o mujhe pakaprAttl hai, nazdlk hai.

43 1 Wuh "yih kahtd hi thd.ki fil- laur un bdrnh men st: ek Yaln'id.'ih ndme, aur us ke s&lh BardAr kihinoj aur f:i(|ihoii aur buzurgon ki taraf se ek haribhir, talwircn aur latliiln lokc d pahunehi.

Malt ih par

44 Aur paksrwAnewdle ne unhen y ih palA diyA tbA, ki Jis kA main I Mina Un, wulti hai; uso tum pakarku bila- zat 90 1g jAo.

45 W uh Ake filfaur ub pAs gaya. aur kaha, Ai Kabbi, ai Kabhi, aur u«e dihina,

46 ^ Aur unhon ne us par hdtli dAlke usc pakar liyA.

47 Ek nc, uo men se Jo wahAy hA- f.ir thc,tahvAr khincLkar sardir kabin ke ttakv ko lagai, aur ub ka kAn uiyA.

48 Tab YisiV nn se niukhAtib hoko kahnp laga, KyA tum talwAren aur lAthiAn teh» mujhe chur ki manind pakanie ko Ae ho?

49 'Main to har roz tumhAre pAs liaikal mctj taliin detA tbA, aur tuin no nnijhe naliin pakni; lekiu yili hua ki navinhte pi'irc howeii,

50 Tab we Bftb use chhorke bhag gaya.

51 Magar ek jawan, Jo sriti chAdar apne badan par oftto tha, ns ke piclihe ho liyA, aur jawAuon no use pokra :

52 Tar wuh suti ehAdar un ke hAtli- un n>«n chliorkar rianya bhagA,

'b'A ^ Tab -m Yis& ko aardAr kA- hin pin le gaye ; us ke yaLAg Bab ^ardAr kAliin aur buzurg aur ia.ph ikatthe Ae.

54 Aur PatriiB dur se ua ke pichhe sariAr kahiu ke dALAu ko Bndu tak ho livA, aur naukaron ke sAth baithkar :ir' tapne taga,

56 Tab Barito kibinwj aur sAri sadr laajlis De Yisu' par gawahl dhundhi, ki use jAn ko Diaron ; par ne, pAi.

5ii A^ardii bariton p«us par jliutbi gawA-hi di, par uu ki gawahiAn nmwA- ti.j u Ihiij-

57 Tab ba'/.on ne uthke us par yih jhuthi jawabi di, aur kahA, ki

6iH Ham ne use kaht« aunA hai, ki Main b haikal ko, JO bath sc baui bai, ijhA dflnea, aur tin dia mvn ck diisri ko, jc-i hAlh se na baBfl, baiiAutjgA. 68

MABQU9, XIV. jhvijiiwih^h k<r><.L

59 Tia par bbi uu ki gawahi mu- wAfifj ua thi.

60 Tab sardar kAhiu nc bich rneii khare ho Yisu' se puchha, KyA tu kuchh jawftb naliin detA? ye tujh jiar kya jawabi di-t,e bainV

CL l'ar wuh chup nihi, aur kuchh jawAb ua diy.l Pliir aanlAr kAhiu ne us se piichhA, aur us se kaliA, KyA ti'i Misili, as Muliarak kA l*tA bot?

(Ili Yi.sii' M us N kaha, Main wubi luin ; aur tum Ibn i A'dam ko Alq_adir kedahiue bath baithe, aur Asinin ke bAdalon par Ate dekhoge,

«3 Tab sardar kAbiu ne apne kapre pbArke kahA, Ah hanien aur jiaivali kyi'darkAr liain?

(34 Tum no yih kufr miua; tum ko kyA ma'lom hotA hai? Un BHhhon ne fatwA uiyA, ki wuh qatl ke laiu luii.

(J5 Tab kitne ua par thiiknc, aur us ka inuiib dln'unpne, aur use plninse mArne, aur uae kahno lage, Nubiiwat se khabar de: aur uaukaroii ne liAth

U80 thapere mAre.

66 1 .fab' l'atrus niclie ddlaii tneri thA, aardAr kAhiu ki laundiem men u

. w ah;i 'j A! ;

07 Aur PatruB ko Ag ta>te d*kb,-

;r, ua ki taraf iiaaar karke, kabne lagi, Td bhi Yisfi' Nasari ke uAth tha.

68 Us ne yih kabie inkAr kiyA, ki Main uue nahiu jant.a, aur nahin wa- niajhtA ki tu kyA kaliti hai. Aur biliar salin ineii gayA; aur murg ne bang di.

69 Phir wuh laundi uae dekhkar i se jo wahAn khare tlie kahne lagi,

Yih unhin mon se ek hai.

'0 Us'ud phir inkAr kiyA. Aur

iri der pichhe phir onhog nc ,)o

wahia k'nare the, Patms ko kahA,

Saob n'i imb'in nien ee hai, kyiinki ui

Jalili, aur teri holi waisi hl hai.

"1 Par wuli U'uat karne, aur qnsam khAne lagA, aur kahA, ki Main ub shakhs ko, jis kA tum alk* karte ho, [nahiti jAnti.

MmH ba Piidtits

72 litiari liar murgno bang di. Tab l'atrus ko wuhi bat, jo Ytsii no tut no k&hl tiii, yad Ai, ki Peshtar ns «e ki mnrg do bar ban.K ilu, til lio bar mori uikar karega, Tab is ka gaur karte kartu wuh roM lagi.

XV BAT».

J OH subh hiii aardar kahinon DO b'izurgon aur faoihon aur i4H saur majJis ko aAtb. mashwarat karke Yisii' ko bfedb*.

MARQUS, XV. V % ihard hond.

main us ko, Sw tum Yahtidion k A Kud- Hhah kahto ho, kyA kari'iu ?

1 3 VW )ihir chill&e, ki Uso salib de.

1 1 Piliitua tie phir UH se kaha, Kyiin, ia no kyA burai ki hai''' Tab we aur bhi ziyadu chilli'u', ki U mi salib de-.

15 1 Tab Pilot us ue, loguri ki raza- maudi chabkar, uii ko liye Bu-abbas ko dibor diyii, aur Yimi' ku kate mar- ka liawile kiya, ki salib pi»r khinoh»

uh: lc jakar jae.

PilAtus ke hawAk- kiya.

2 PilAtus no us uu prii-hha, Kva Ui Yahu.ili.iu ki btdabifa hai? Ua ne jawab mcn us se kaha, Tii sauh kanta hai.

y Aur sarddr kahinon no us par biihut ni faryaden kin: par us ue kucjhh jawab na diyd.

4 Tab PUittw m us rc yih kahke phir mii.'lihil, Kya tii kuchh jawab na- bin tlctd? dekil, we tujh jar kinu gawahian dete hain.

5 Tau" bhi Yisii"' ne kuchh aur ja- wab na diya, yahan tak ki PilAtus nt- ta'ajjub kiya.

6 Aur 'id mun wuh ok qaidi ko, jisc we chahte the, mi ki khatir chhor detil thsi.

T Aur ek abakus BarabbAs nauie uu logon ke sat.ii (j/M ihl, ju iVsdd meii us ke aharik hiie the, aur ki (biliun ne fcMulhimenklmnkiyA thA.

8 Tab bblrcfcilUke «■ n 'w tawne lagi, ki Jaisa tera dastiir hai, waisA hi haniare waste k ;< r.

y PilAtus ne unhon jawab diyd, aur kaha, Kya tinn uhAhto lio, ki main rum haru liye Yahudioii ko ItaushAh ku ehhor diin 'i

10 Kyonki wuh jdntd thA, ki sar- dar kiUiiru itj ue ha.su i se us ku hawale kiyA tba.

Ll Par sardar kahinon ne kwog ku ubhard, ki wuh bar'aks un ke liye IlarabbAs ko chhor de.

L2 Tab PilAtus no jawab deke phir uu ac kaha, Ab tum kya chahte ho? 69

lfi Aur wipalii ua ku Ufl djtttt) meii, jahan hakim kamabkaiua ti isi, lugayn: ; aur aairs rtsita ko Ocatjjha kiy.-i.

17 Uuhuu ne uh argawlni fcttp»

pahintic, aur kiiuton ka tdj sajko us ko Bir par rakha.

18 Aur use salam karnc \.\>z<\ ki Ai Yalu'ulidij ko BiidshAh, Salam!

19 Aur we us ke sir per narfcaf so mArte the, aur ns per thiikte the, aur ghutue tokko use sijdo kai'lo lho.

20 Aur jab us se liausi kar chuke, to us par so aryawani kapro utire, aur usi ka kaprd uso pahiiuike salib dene ku 1« chalo."

21 AurukshakhsQ.uriiii ShamaVni uaine, jo Sikandar aur Riifus kii biip thii, dihiit se lito hiie udhar sc gilsrf ; tmbon ue use begar pakri, ki us ki talib uthii lo chalo.

22 Aur wre use maqam i Guli:ut:i i, jis kA tarjuma Khoprl ki jagah

!:»,■-

'±'<1 Aur mai men murr milake uso pfrw ku diya : juir us no ua liya.

24 Aur unhon no use salib par khSnchko us ko kaprc bante, aur un

t mr uiir'a dtila, ki liar ek «liaklis kya ya le.

25 Aur tiara" ghautA thA, ki unhon

s ko s

i. -H.

26 Aur nalishndma, jo us par likhii thi, s., yih iba, ki Y1II YAIIU'DI'ON KA' BA'DSIIA'II HAI.

27 Aur unhon ne us ke sAth do Cihoron ko, ek ko dahine bath, aui ddsre ko batin, salib per khinchi.

Matih kd salib par jan dena. MAF.QUS, XVI.

Ut kd d'/n kiiji JinA.

28 Tab wiih nariahta, kd, ki Wuhbadkdrori mori gind gaji, pura lidi.

2S* Aur we jo udhar sc jdto the, air hiliilt; tim, aur Tifa kaliku om mala- rnat karte tlie, ki Wah, td p haikal ko dbdtA, aur tin diu mori liaudtd thd,

30 Apne ta,in bacha, aur salib par si! n tar a.

31 Isi tirah sarddr kahinon ne bhi :ii u merj faoihorj ke wiili tbftflbe kart-B hiio kaba, Us ne auron ko ba- cbaya ; apne ta,in bachd nahin sakti.

32 Boni WdU lfcidshdh,~ Masih, ab salib par se ular awe, td ki iirun dokhen, aur iman hiwrn. Aur inhon nu bhi, jo ua kesath salib par khinche gaya, uue tnaldmat ki.

33 Aur jab clihatha ghanta hiid, us sari Bttiiarniii jiar andhord obhd gnyd, aur nawen ghante tak rahd.

34 Aur nawen ghanto Yisii' bari awilz eo chilldke bold, Eli, BH, kuna sabarjtdiii, jis ki tarjiinsa yih hai ; Ai mere Khudd, ruere Khudd, tu ne niujhe kydn clihora?

35 Baze un merj, jo wahdrj kharo the, yih sunke bolu, Dikho, wuli lli- yas ko balita hai.

36 Aur «k ne daurko isfanj ko sirke meij bhiguko, aur ek narknt par rakli- ko, uso chusdyd, aur kahd, liat tto, bani dokluen t«, ki Iliyds uso utdrue iwo.

37 Tab Yisu' no bari iwiz se chil Uk*r dam chhor diyd.

38 Aur imikal kd jmrda dpar se niche tak phat gayd.

3« T Aur us sdbaddr no, jo ua ke sainhrio kirnya thd, usu yi'm uhilldti aur dam enhorte dekLlCO kulia, ki Yih Bhftkbl saeb ruuoh Khudd kd Beta thd.'

40 Wahan kai 'aura t r n dni sc daki rabi thm: un rneii Mariyaui Hfogda- lini, aur Mariyain uhlioto Ya'qfib aur Yuses ki nid, aur Sahmu thiri.

41 Uithon uo jab wuh Jalil merj

tbd, us ki pniraui ki, aur us ki khid- mat bhi ki tlii ; phir aur bhi babat si 'mualim thin, jo us ko sdth Yard- salam mun ai fliin.

4L' % Aur jab ki shdm hrti, is liyo ki taiydri kd diu thd, jo sabt se pahit;

43 Yusuf Arimatiyd, jo ndmwar rnusbir, aur wuh kliud Khudd ki bad- ■shdliat ka inuntasur thd, ayi, aur dilari se l'ildtus pds jdke Yoaii' ki Idah mingL

44 Aur Pildtus ne muta'ajjib hokai' shubha kiyd, ki wuh aisd jald m. u gaya, aur sdbaddr ko bulakc us ->■ piichhd, kyd der Mi ki wuh mar gayd ?

45 Aur jab suhaddr se aisa ma'lum kiyd tbd, to lasli Yusuf ko ditd di.

41 Aur us ne mihin siiti kapra mol liya thd, aur uso utdrku us ka[>re mi kafndyd, aur ek qabr men, jo chatan ke hicli kbodi gayl tbi, uso rakhi, aur us >[abr ko darwdzu par ck jiaith.ir dhalkd diyd.

47 Mariyam Magdalini, aur Yiises ki uid Mariyam, us ja^ah ko, jahdn wuh raklid gayd, dekh mbi thin.

XVI BA'B.

JAB sabt ki din Kiusr gaya. Ma- riyatu Magdiilini, aur Ya'.pih ki ma Mariyam aur Kalomo ua khushbu cbizen mol liu, ia ki dukar us pir uiakfu.

'J Aur hafte ke pabla din bahnt sawure sdraj uikalto hiio qabr |iar ain.

3 Aur apa» nian kabut* lagin, ki Hamdru liya patthar ko, qabr ku dar- wdzo uar so, kauu dhaikdegd?

4 Jabunlioti no nii;dh k i, to us rat- Lliar ko dhftftiji hda dekha ; kyujiki wuh bahut bhari tbd.

5 Aur qabr mcn jdkar unhon no ok jairtta ko Siifl 'l jima p.ihine dahim taraf luit.ho hiio dokhd, aur gbabrd

C Us ne urihon kahd, Mat ghabrdo;

Masih keji uthw, LU'QA', I. aur asman parjiine kd ahiual.

Tum Yi«u' Ndsari ko, jo salib parjab we khaniOwiithe the, dikhdi diyd, khincha gaya, dhundhtian bot wuh, aur vm ki lm-imarii aur sakht-'lili pw ji uthd lini; wuh yahdn nnhin; dc- mulamat ki, kyunki we un ki bdtuii kho yih jagah, jis men unhon ue use par, jitihoii M ua ko ji nthno ke ba'd rakha thd. luse ilekha t h d, yaqin na lae the.

7 Ah tum jdo, aur ub ke shdgirdonl 16 Aur uh ue unli.'ij kahd, ki Tum ku aur 1'iit.rus ko kaho, ki Wah tum J taindm dunyd mim tfke tuli ek makl.-

j dge Jalil ko jatd hai ; aur jaind ua m' tumben kahd thd, tum uae wahdn

>l<-l;tn !::

8 Aur we jald nikalke qabr se bhd- gin ; aur larzish aur haibat ue unhen liyd; aur we kisi se kuchh ua boliii, kydnki darti thin.

9 1T llaflo ke pahle roz wuh sa- were uthkar pahle Mariyain Mug'ht- liui ko, ji.s men se ua ne sdt deo ni kdle the, ilikhdi diyd.

10 Ub ne jake ua ko aatliion ko, jo uh ke liyu gamgin aur rute the, khabar di.

1 1 We yih sunke ki wuh jitd hai, aur use dikhai diyd, yaqin na lae.

12 f Ub ke ba'd wuh. dtiwri B6rat. men, uii meri s-e do ko, jis waqt ki we paidal chalto the, aur dihdt ki taml' jdte the, dikhdi diyd.

IA Unhon ni' bhi j;Vku bdqi logon ko khabar di; magar un [>ar bhi we ynqiu n a Ide.

14 1T A'khir, wuh uu gydrahon ko,

luq ke sdmhue Injil ki manddi karo.

16 Jo ki iiiiiin l&td, aur baptisma pdtd hai, najat pacgd: aur Jo iman nnhin ldtd, ua par nazi kd hnkiii kiya jdegd.

17 Aur we jo Imdn ldenge, uii kn s.'itli fe 'alaman-n hongt; ki we mere ndm ee deon ko uikdletigc; aur nayi zubdnra bolenge j

18 Sampon ko n t ha lenge ; aur agar koi hnlak-karnewdlf uhiz pN^ge, unhen kuchh nuqein ua boptj W binidron par hath rakbenge, to chiiup' ha \toaae,

19 *j[ Q*ru, Khuddwaud unhen aisd farmdue ke ba'd aaimln par utli- dyd gaya, aur Khudd ke dahine hath baitha/

20 Phir nnhoii ne hdhar jakar bar jagah manddi ki,n.ur Klmildwaii'i Hath hoke krim anjdm detd thd, aur kalam ko, un rnu'aji/.orj ke wasile U fe) 9i ke suiidne ke h-.\'<\ liote thu, sdbit kiin.'i rabd. A'iniu.

LU'QA' KI' INJIL.

1 BA'B. I 3 Main ao bhi mnnasih jdnd, ki

CHU'liKl bahuton ue kamar bdn-isab ko sire se sahih taur par daryaf't dhi ki un kdmon kd jo nlwaqi' | karkc tere liye, ai buzurg Thecfllus,

L jC_~ .1 .-•-., ',-^A ,* hiiUa> Iii'hj li-n-'in Ih'i turlili liL'luni

hamdre darmiyda anjdm hiie, bayan karcn,

2 Jis tarah se unhon ne, jo shurii' se khud dekhnewdle, aur kalam ki khi(imat-karuewale the, liam se riwa- yat ki ;

71

ba tertib liknog,

4 Td ki tii vm bdton ki haq(qat ko, jin ki tu ne ta'liin pai, jdne.

5 ^.TTAHUTIIYA ke hddshih

j Besodis ke dinon men, Abij';Lli ke l'ariq men ife Zakariydh

EkfirMUi U LU'QA'P I- Zakariyah ko,

nimoclckAhinthA: u» Itf joni H4ruti:iinV kytinki main bikha hiin, nur H ln-ii.iri raag t* tlii, aur us kA nam. meri jnni ki ban 'umr Ihii. llisabat tha. " lfl Firishle ne jawab men U «c

6 We donon KhudA ke huziir rAst-l kahA, Main Jabrik hiin. ju KhudA ke

baz, aur KhudAwand ke sar« linki _ aur cjanunon par W-'aib chalnewale tlie.

7 Aur uu ke larkA na thA, kyi'inki IlisabAt banjh tliij aur doOOfl bahu t din ke tho.

8 Aur aisa huA, ki jab wuh KhudA ko busur, apno fario_ ki hari par, kabin ka karubar kartA tha,

9 KAhini ke dastiir par us ki chit- thi nikli, ki KhudAwand ki haikal men jAke khushbui jalawe.

]"0 Aurlogon kl «ari jama'at, khush- biii jalate waut, bahar dua mang rahi thi.

11 Tab us ko KhudAwand ka firiah- ta, Umshhui 3fl.lo.1u? ke. mutah ki dahini taraf kharA hmt, dikhiii diyA.

12 Zakariyah' dekhkar ghabrAyA, aur babat dara.

13 Par firishte ne us se kahA, ki Al Zakariyah, mat dar, ki teri du'A suni gayi, aur teri joni Uisabilt tero liye ek beta janegi; tii us ka nam Y('ili:ii]ii:i rak lini.

14 Aur tujbt! khushi o khiirmmi bogf : aur bahutere ua ki paidaiah se kiiush horjge.

lfl Kyiinki wuh KhudAwand ke huziir bu/,urg boga, aur na inai, aur na koi nasha piegA ; aur apni ina ke pet hi se Ruh i Quds se bhar jAegA.

16 Aur bani UEMJ men ae bahuton ko un ke KhudAwand KhudA ki taraf pherega.

17 Aur wuh ua ko age IliyAs ki tabi'at aur qiiwat ke »Ath chutega, ki biijidadon k* di Ion ko larkon ki taraf, aur na-farmanbardaron ko raatbfeOB ki dAnai ki taraf phcrke, KhudAwand ke liye ek muata'idd qauin taiyar kara.

huzur kharA rahta hlirj i ««r bhuja ^ iya ki tuj'he kaln'm, aur yih khush- kh'abari tujhe dtin.

20 Aur,dekh,tugungahojaega,nuT jin din tak kiyili cbizi-n wtoi'na bon, bol na sakegA, la liye ki tii U owrf balon ko,jo apcewaqt par puri hoiv^i, yaqin nn kiya.

81 Aur ]i>g Zakariyah ki rahdekhte the.aur haikal mori ua ke derkarnese ta'ajjub karte tbe.

22 Jab wuh bahar dko un se bol na saka, urtbon ne uaryAft kiya, ki us ne haikal incjj kof roya dekhi thi : aur wuh un aelahara karta thi, aur gunga

tali mfi,

23 AmaWhui.kijabaiki khidmat ke din piire biie, wuh apne ghar gaya.

24 Aur un dinorj ke ba'd us ki juru IlisabAt harnila hui, aur ub ne panci» mahine tak apne ta,m yih kahke cbhi- paya, ki,

25 Jin dinon men Khndawand ne mujh par nazar ki, meru sdth aisd kiya, ta ki logon men se meri sbarmindagi ili'ir kare.

26 Aur chhathe mahine Jabriel firishta Khuda ki taraf se Jalil ke ''k shahr r/i'en, ji» ka uAui Nasarat tha, bhejii gaya,

27 Ek kunwari ke pas, jis ki Yiisul namo ek maril -se, ]o Daud ke ghar&ne se iha, mangni hiii thi; aur us kurj- wari kA uAm Mariyam tha.

28 Us Grishte ne u» pas* kodal aka kabA, ki Al pasaudida, salam I Kliu- dAwand tere sAth : tu 'auraton men mubarak hai.

20 Par wuh uso dekhkar us ki bat ae ghabrAi, aur soehne lagi ki yih kaisa saiiini hai.

30 Tab tirisbto ne us se kahA, ki Ai

IH Tab ZakariyAb ne firUhte kol Mariyam, mat dar; ki 14 ne Khudi kabA, Main is ko kyunkar aach JAa-Jke huafir fazl (AyA.

r phir Mariyam ko,

LU'QA', I.

31 Aur, <iekh, t6 hamil» buH, aurildi, ki yih bdtog,, jo Kliudawaud ki beta jatiegf, aur ua ki nam ?BU" | taraf so kahi giijin, puri hongi.

■Lkl.i-";.

32 Wuh bnsurg hogd, aur Khudd Ta'dld ki Beta kahldega ! aur Khudd- wand Khudd "us ke bap Daud ka tak h t uuo dega ;

33 Aur wuh nada Ya'ufib ko ghrtr- duc ki bddshahat karegi; aur us ki liadsliahat lik Lir as bOB.

34 Tab Mariyam ne ririshte bb kahi, Yili kyuukiir boga, jii hal lneii main tnard ko nabin jinti? "

35 Firishto ne jawdb men us se kaliii, ki Ruh i Quds tujb par utrogi, aur Khudd Ta'ili ki qudrat ka <;i.ia t-ujli par ln'iia : is safaab se wuli oed- dufl bhi jo paidi boga. Khudd ka Beta kaliiiii-.'.'a.

36 Aur, dekh, teri rishtaddr Bisabdt ko bhi burhape mon beta honewdla liai ; aur yih us ka, jo biiijh kaulari Lai. chlialba tiiahini hai.

37 Kyiinki Khuda, ke ago koi bat ahlimu nahiu.

38 Aur Mariyam no kaha, Dikii Khuda wand ki batidi ; mujb }«ir tere kahne ke niuwatiq howe. Tab fimhta us ko pas se chali gaya.

39 Aur unhiij diuon men Mariyam uthkar jaldi ae pahamu par Yahiidah ke ek shahr ko gayi ;

10 Aur Zakariyah ka gbar men ddkhil hokcilisabit ko aaldin kiyd.

41 Aur aisi hiia, ki jonhin Ilisabit no Mariyam ki saldin suni, larka us ke pet men uclihal pard; aur Ilisabit ltub i Quds se bhar gayi :

42 Aur zor se pukarke kahi, ki Tu 'auratog mori mubarak hai, aur teru pet kd pria! mubarak hai.

43 Mere liye yih kyunkar hui, ki mere Khudawaud ki mi muih pas di? ki,

44 Dekh, tere salam ki dwiz jonhin mere kari tak pahunchi, larka mere

-■ mej kim-tii so uchlial para.

45 Aur mubamk hai wuh jo [mdu

73

4G Aur Mariyam nc kaha, ki Mori jau Khudawaud' ki barai karti hai,

47 Aur mori nih mere najdt deue- waio Khudd se khush hiii.

48 Ki ui> ne apni bandi ki pas t ha! i par nazar ki : is liyc, dekh, ab se liar zamine ke log mnjh ku mubarak k&henoe.

49 Kyunkiuane,joqudraLwaIihai, mere liye bare katn kiye liniu ; aur uh ki nim pak liai.

50 Aur us ki ralim iiu par, jo ub 86 $arte faasj, pu&Ut dar puaht liai.

51 U» ne nptie hazii ki zor dikha- yd; aur un ko, jo apu u dil ko khiy.il men aptie ta,iii hari Baiuajhte haiij, jiaroshan k iya.

52 Qu.dratwair>n ko tak rit se giri diyd,aur past-lidlorj kobuhnd kiyi.

53 Ub ne hbuklion koathchhichiz- on se dauda kiya; aur dauIatniaimY.ti ko khili hdth bh«ja.

54 Us neapnc baude Isrdel ko sam- bhdl liyi, us rahmat ko y M karke,

55 Jo Abirahini aur us ki aulad par sadd ko tbin, jaihd us ne liamaro bap- dddon bo farrciyi tbi.

51 j Aur Mariyam tin ruahine ke qarib us ke sath rahke npna gbar ko pli iri.

57 Ab Ilisabdt ko janne kd waqt pabuncha ; aur beti jani.

5H Aur us ke paronion aur riwhta- ddron ne sund, ki Kbudiwaud ne us par Iuri rahmat ki; aur unimu ne us kesdth khusbS ki.

5W Aur yiin h n d, ki wc ithwcn din larke ki khaiua kaiue de; aur M kii uim Zakariyah, jo OH ke bip ki th;i, rakhnc lage.

60 Par us ki md ne jawab men kahd, ki Nahin ; baiki us kd nam Vuhannd rakbi jdwe.

GL Unhoii u us so tahi, ki Tere gharane men kisii kd yih uaui uahiji.

(ki Tab unhon no us ke bip ki taraf

Mariyam ke thitkfAnt ha ylt. LU'QA', II. ishira kiyd, ki wuh n» kd kyd udm rakhi chdlita hai.

63 Db ne takhtf mangdko likhd, ki Yuhaund uh kd ndin hai. Aur sabhon ne ta'ajjub kiyd.

64 Aur usi dam us ki rnimh aur zuban khul gayi, nur wuh bolnu laga. aur Khudi ki ta'rif ki.

65 Tab rire Ah pas ku rahuewdle dar gaye: BUI Yaliuiiiva ke taTiidru kohistan men 'm sab baum kd chavebd

138 Aur sabbon ne, jn sunte the, apnc dil men socbkar knhi, ki Yib kuat larka hogd ! Aur Khuddwand ki hath us piir tua.

67 Aur uh kd bap Zakariyah Ruh i Quds se bhar gaya, aur nubuwat ki rfib n kahne laga, ki

68 Hamd Khuddwand kf, Jo Intel ki Khudi hai; kyuiiki us ne apne logon par nazar ki, »01 unlicu uhlmt- ka.ro. diyd,

69 Aur hjunAlB liye najftt ka sing Mnt bude I.Viiid ke gliar men se □ikilke khara kiyd ;

70 JaisA ns no apue pak nabiorj ki luari fat, jo dunyd ke sauri' sc hote ae, ka lia :

71 Ham ko hainare duskmanoD ee, aur uu ko hitli se jo ham se kiua raklite hain, riliai bakhshi ;

72 Ta ki wuh rtihiu, jis kd hamdre bri.iwiadon ke ftaih oardr kiyd, ki ftj>no pak *ahd ko ydd nkhfl ;

73 Usi tjasam ko, jo us no hamare bap Abirahdm se ki, ki

74 Wuli liatuen yjh degd, ki apne duahniaium ku hdth ee chhutkdrd

ntora,

75 'Umr bhar us ko age, iidkizagi aur sachdi Ke, be-khauf ub ki b&odftj ' karen.

76 Aur,ai Iurku, tt'i Khudi Ta'alit kd nabi kabhlcgd : kyuijki tu Khuddwand ke dge us ki rdhon ko durost karta jdegdj ki

f 7 "H* ke logou ko najit ki khaba:

Zakariy6& M jmMngtn.

dewe, jin ao un ke gunahuu ki inu'dfi howe,

8 Jo hamdre Khudi ki khdss rah- mat, se hai ; jis ko sabab subh ki roshni upar se ham tak pahunchi,

79 Td ki uu ko joaudheroaiirmaut ke saya murt baithu hain, ror-liiii liakli- she, aur hainari hidayat kara ki sald- nmti ki nih par oadam inaron.

80 Aur wuh larka barbtd, aur ruh. en qnwat pdti gaji, aur apnt' ta,m

Isrdel par Bihlr katne ke din taJt bayibdn men rahti.

II UA'B.

AI.H; un dinoD men ydn htid, ki Qstisar Augustus ki taraf m liukm uikiii, ki hiu- basti ke logon ke udui likhe jden.

2 (Auryili pnhli istu-nawisf t.hi, jo Suriya ke hakiui Qureniu» ko wtn|t iiii-ij h<H.)

3 Tab har ek apue apiifl ahahr ku uim likliain.' cbald.

4 Aur Yusuf bui Jalil ke sbahr NisaMt st, Yiiln'uliya mi'n Difid ko sbdtt ko, jo Buitlaham kahldtd hai, gaya ; ia liye ki wuh Ddiid ke gharane aur aidad ko thd ; ki

5 Apni ruaugetarMariyam ke sdth, jo hdmila thi, udiu likkdwe.

6 Anraisa hr.ii.ki j;il> wewahdn tLe, ua ke janne ke din pure hiio.

7 Ani- i|-i.- ; i.l n' ii l ii. r?, i.nii. ;n i us ko kajiru men lapetke charui men rakhd; kyiinki uu ko sard men jagah na mili.

8 Uh miilk men garariye the, jo i r i r i i ■ I : L l i awfl ralite, aur rdt ko liari ban apue jhund ki chauki karie ihe.

9 Aiu, deklio, ki Khudawand kd ek flriabte un par sibir hai, aur Khudd- waucl kd ntb" un ke chacgird chainka ; aur wo nihdyat dar gaye.

10 Tab Srisht'e uu unben kabd, Mat dii.ro: kvuijki, dek bu, main tumhep bati kbushi ki khabar detd liun, jo MD Io;t(>ij ke waslc liogl, ki

11 Daud ku abahr men dj tumhdre

Mrfih ka taim'htd.

H;'Q,A', II.

Masih kd kfattna ho;

liye ek Najdt-dcnewdlapaida htid ; wuh jera, ya kabiitar ko do bacl:,chequrbaiii

Masih Khuddwaud hai,

12 Aur tumhdre liye yihi pati hai ;

ki tam ok larke ko kapre men lapeta

.i iiiL-ii rakha ln'ia |. .

YA Aur ek bargi us firishte fee Bdth asmdni lashkar ki ek jami'at Khuda ki ta'rif karti, aur yih kahti zahir bui, ki

1+ Khuda ko dHmdu par ta'rif, aur zaiuin par saldmati, aur adtnion se razauiaudi howe.

15 Aur aisa iiiia, ki jab firishtc un ko pas ao asinku |Hir guye, garariyon Ki' apu owg kaha, ki Ao, bara liuii- lahaui tak jaen, aur is bit ko jo bui hai, jis ki Khudawaud uu haiucij khabar di hai. deklien.

Itj Tab unhorj nu jaltlt Jtke Mari- yam, aur Yusuf ku, aur us larke ko charui men rakin'i bud paya.

17 Aur dekhke us bdt ko, jo is larke ke hiiqq nieii un se kalii gayi thi, nbaUdyi.

ld Aur Bab yunnewilon no in baton se, jo garariyon ne unhen kahin, ta'aj- jub kiyd.

l'.) I 'ar Mariyam ne in sah bdton ki apne dil men gaur karke ydd rakhd.

20 Alir garariyo in sab baton k' sabab, jo unhon ne sunirj, aur jaisi m n kahi gayi thin, dekhin, Khuda ki ta'rif aur barai karte htie ph

21 Aur jab dth din pure hiie, ki larke ka khat.na ho, us ka ndmYISU'" rakhd gaya, jo us ke pet. ruerj panie ke dgc lirisihtu ne rakha thd,

22 Aur jab Musa ki s ha r i 'a t ki rauwa6q us ko pak honc ke dia pure hue," wc im krko ko Yarusakm rnen hie, ti ki Khudawaud ke age hassir kareg ;

2o (Jaiaa ki Khndawanrl ki slsari'at men likhd hai, ki liar ek palauthd brka Khudawaud ko liye u tak ha u s kahlaegd ;)

-l Aur ki Khudawand ki shari'at ki- hnkm ke muwdttq, Qumrion kd ek

karerj.

2y Aur, dekho, ki Yarusalaio men SharuaYni nim ek shtikhs tlid, jo rdstbdz, aur diiiddr, aur Israel ki tasalli ki rdh dekhti tlid, aur Riil t i Quds us par tlii.

26 Us ko Mh i Quds uo khabar di thf, ki jab tak Khudawaud ko Masih ko ua <iekh le, maut ko na dektugii.

27 Aur wuh Huh ki hiddyat se baikal men iya: aur jis waqt mii bap us larke YisiV ko andar Idte tlie, ta ki

ke bye shar'a ke daatiir par 'amal

28 Us ne use apue hdthon par uthd liyd, aur Khudd ki ta'rif karke kaki,

29 Ai Khuddwand, ab td apue bando ko, apne kalam ke muwah^, saldmati

rukhsat detd hai :

30 Kyuuki mori dnkhon no teri iiajat dekhi,

8] Jo tu no sab logon ke age taivdr klhai;

12 Qaumon koroshan karne ke liyo ek mir.aur apne log Israel ke liye jalai.

38 Tab Yusuf aur Yisu' ki mi uu un bdton so, jo us ku haq<i meij kahi gayiu, ta'ajjub kiyd.

34 Aur Shama'iin ne unhetj du'd di, ir us ki ma Mariyam ko kahd, Dekh,

yih Israel men bahuton ke glrne aur uthue ke liye, aur khilaf kabno ke uishdn ke Waste, rakha liud hai ;

35 (Aur talwdr teri jdn ke andar bhi guzar jdegi,) ta ki baliuLon ko dilon ke khiyal khul jaeu.

36 Aur AVer lio {fhardnc sc Annd nam Fdniiel ki beti ek uabiya tbi, jo bubut burhi titi : aur as ne apue kuri- waripau se sdt baras ek khasam ke sath iiibdh kiyd thd ;

37 Aur wuh bcwa qarib chaurasi baras ki thi, ki haikal m Judft na bui, pai rOU rakhne, aur du'a mangue se rat din bandagi karti rahi.

3tt Usneuai ghari akar Khudawaud

Yuhanna H LU'QA', ITT. wa'iz ke fatn

ka shukr kiyii, aur un sab ko, jo Yarv'i- aur Khuda ke aur insan ko uazdik

salam men ulihutkare ki rah dekhte the, us ki babat k'aha.

39 Aur jab we KhudAwand ki shari'at ke nmwAfiq sab kuchh kar chukc, to Jalil men apue shahr Nasarat ko phir gaye.

40 Aur Uirka barhtA, aur hikmat bharkarub menquwat pAtarahA: aur KhudAwand ki fad uh par tha.

' 41 Vs ke ma bAp har baras 'id i fasali iiuti Yanisalam ki' jate the.

42 Alir lab wah Urah LuiraskAhuA, aur we 'id ke cku-tur par Yarusalain ko gaye the,

43 Aur uu dinon ko pur.i kiya tha, jiid phirne lage.wuh larkA Yisu' Yaru- salain men rali gaya; par Yusuf aur us ki ma ue na jAnA.

44 Baiki yih samajhke ki wuh qiitile meii hai, ek man/.il gaye ; aur IUH ritduadAron aur jAn-palLclaui>ii men sah kahin dlnlndhA.

45 Aur ua pakar us ki talash har kahin kartu hue Yanisakm ko phire.

4(1 Aur aisA hria. ki unhou uo Un roa piehho nse haikal men ustadon ke Web. baithe hile, un ki aunte, aur un a» tsuwal karte payA.

47 Aur sab jo us ki sunte the, u ki samajh aur uh ke jawaborj se diiuj the.

43 Tab w<3 use dokhkar hairAn hfio aur us ki ma ne us se kaha, Ai Bute, kis liye tu ne ham se aisa kiya V dekh, tari !>Ap aur main kurhte hiie tujhe dhundhte the.

4!f "Us ne unhen kari A, Kyiin tum nmjhe dhiindbte the? kya tum ne ua jiiua, ki nmjhe apne bdp ke yahan ruhna zanir hai?

50 Par we is bat ko, jo us ne nnlien kahi, na samjho.

51 Aur wuh un ke sath rawina hokar Nasarat men ayA, aur un ku

maui liliyal tuwj, laraqqi karia gaya.

ih u a' k

A B Tibcrius Qaisar ki badshahat ko ptttidrahweti baraa, jab 1'undus PiLAtus Yalui'liya ka hakim, aur Herodis Jalil ki cbauthai ka, aur 01 ka bhiii Fail bus Itiiriya ki cbauthai aur Trakonitis ke umlk ka, aur LisAniyas Abileno ki cbauthai k a hakim tha,

'S Ji» mqt AnnAs aur Qayafas sar- dar kahin the, Khuda ka kalam ha- yaban men Zakariyili ke bete Yu- hanna ko pahuneba.

'A Aur wuh Yardan ke eire aspas ke mulk men ake gunahon ki muafi ke iiye tauba ko baplisma ki inaiiadi kari a raha ;

4 Ghunanchi Yas'aiyah nabi ki balon ke daftar men yih liat likhi bal, ki llayiibiiu men uk pukarnewale ki awaz hai, ki Tum Khudawand ki rah ko durust karo, aur us ke rdstun ko sidha karo.

5 Har ek garha bhara jae^a, aur wab jwiharaur tile niche kiyaJHEBgfr) WB {«riil jagahori ttdhi, aur bihar rahen baribar banen^i ;

6 Aur liar uk inaan Khuda, ki najat dskbegi,

7 Tab ua ne un gurohog ko, jo uh se baptisma pane ko nikli thin, kulia, Ai sampon ki nasi, tumben kis ue butayil ki anewate ga»ib se bhago ?

8 Tas tauba ku laiq mewe lao, anr apne dilon rnon khiyal na karo ki Abirabam hamara' bap hai; kyinjki main tumhen kahti hun, ki Khuda Abirahaiu keliye iri pattharon se larke paida kar sakta hai.

9 Aurdarakhton ki jar pnr kulhdri taklii hai : ao jo darakht aehcbhe phal nahin lata, kata aur 'ag merj dala jali hai.

liibi' raha. Aur us kima ne yih sabi 10 Tab un gurohon ne us se piichha, baten apne dil mon iskbirj. Iki Phir ham kyi karen?

52 Aur Yistf, hikmat, aur qadd, f 11 Ua no un ee JftwM mou kahA, ki

ihuru' kanui. Jis ke c.

LCQA\ III.

Masih k'i nate&tl&ma.

kurto bon, uh ko, jia ke pds I 23 Aur Yisti' ap baras tis ek kd hiia

i W„+ J... „... ;;.. i.„ „i ' :_v .1 ji li_/ ,..,,.

nahin hai, bant di? ; aur jis ke pds khdne ko ho, wub bhi aiea hi karc.

12 Tab mnhsul-lciipwdlo bhi bap- tisma pane ko de, aur us se kahd, ki Ai ustad, bani kya karet) ?

13 Us ae un «c kahd, ki Tumhare liye jo muqarrarliai,us seziydda nalo.

14 Sipdhion ne bhi us se puchha, ki Hani kya karen? Us ne unhcn kahd, ki Na kisi par zulm karo, na iRtunat l&g&o ; aur apne rozine par rdzi raho.

15 Aur jab log mun?nxir the, aur Bab aptie dil mcii Yiihannd ki babat Bochte tho, ki kya wub Masih hai ki nal iiii ;

Hi Yiihannd ne un sab ke jawdh raen kahd, ki Main lo tumben pani sc haptisnia deta kurj ; ]iar 111 1 1 j 1 1 m t' k qawitar dtd hai, jis ki juti ko band kholne ko main ldiq nahig hiiii : wub tumben l!uh i Quds aur dg ae baptisma degd.

17 Us ke hiith men sup hai, aur wuh apno khalihdn ku khubwir kar- ena, aur gehtin ko apni kothi mag jam'a karogd ; par bhfisi ko us dg men, jo nahin bujhti, jal&wttga.

18 Aur wuh logon ko nasihat kf bahut aur hdwn karta, aur khushkba- bari dctd raba.

19 Par Htrodli chauthdi Uo hrtUim ne, apne bhdi Fail bus ki joni Hero- iliyas ke sabab, aur un sab badion ke liye jo Herodis ne kin, Ytihanua se ruaiamat uihdke,

20 Sab par yih ziydda kiyd, ki Yii- hannd ko qaid rakhd.

21 Aur aisa hiid, ki jab sab log

jab shurti' kiyd, aur (jaisd ki guman tha) wuh Yusuf kd bon thd ; aur wuli Heli kd,

24 Aur wuh Matthdl kd, aur wuh Lcwi kd, aur wuh Mnlkhi kd, aur wuh Yannd kd, aur wuh Yusuf kd,

25 Aur wuh Mattdthiyds kd, aur wuh Amus kd, aur wuh Kadin kd, aur wuh Asli kd, aur wuh Naggai ki,

26 Aur wuh Mdliata kd, aur wuh Mattdthiyds kd, aur wuh Sima'i kd, aur wuh Yusuf kd, aur wuii Yiidd kd,

27 Aur wuh Yuhmind ka, aur wuh Resd ka, nur wuh /arubdbal kd, aur wuh Saldtiel kd, aur wuh Nol k.i,

28 Aur wuh Malki kd, aur wuh Addi kd, aur wuh Wusdm kd, aur wuh Almn.liitn kd, aur wuh 'Er kd,

29 Aur wuh Ynses kd, aur wuh Ili'azar kd, aur wuh Yorim kd, aur wuh Matthdt k d, aur wuh Lcwi kd,

30 Aur wuh Shama'un kd, aur wub Yahuddh kd, aur wuh Yusuf ka, aur wuh Yiindn kd, aur wuh lliydijim

31 Aur wuh Malaya kd, aur wuh Mainan kd, aur wub Mattathd kd, aur wuh Ndtan kd, aur wah DAud ka.

32 Aur wuh Yassf kd, aur wuh 'Obed kd, aur wub Bo'az kd, aur wuh Salmon kd, aur wuh Nahsun kd,

33 AuTwuh'Aminaddbkd, aur wuh Ardm kd, aur wuh Hasroni kd, aur wuh Pharas kd, aur wuh Yahuddh ka,

34 Aur wuh Ya'tjiib ka, aur wuh Iz,hdq ka, aur wuh A hi rahim kd, aur wub Tarah kd, aur wuh i'ahur kd,

35 Aur wuh Sdrnkh kd, aur wuh Ra'ri kd, aur wuh Fdlik kd, aur wuh

haptisnia pd chuke the, aur YisuV bhi 'i'br kd, aur wuh Silah kd,

baptisma pakar du'a mang rahd tha, dsmdn khul gaya,

22 Aur Ruh i Quds jism ki aurat men, kahutar ki tarah, ua par utri, aur asuidn ae ek dwaz di, jo yih kahti thi, ki Tu merd piydrd Beta hai; tujh se i;;ain rd/i lu'.n.

3(5 Aur wuh Qiudn kd, aur wuh Arfaksad kd, aur wuh Sim kd, aur wuh Niih kd, aur wnh I-amak kd,

37 Aur wuh Mathiiaildkd, aur wuh Uanuk kd, aur wuh Ydrid ka, aur wuh MaliLilaliui kd, aur wuh Qindn kd,

38 Aur wuh Anua kd, aur wuh Set

Musik Shfiitdn w dzmfiya j\itd. LU'OA', IV,

Musih ku mi'k }■■

ka, aur wuh A'dam ka, aur wuh Khu- .1.1 kd tim.

IV BA'B.

AUR Visi* Ruh i Quda bc bharA MA Yardan se phirA, aur Jtiili ki rahnuruAi «o bayAbAn raets gaya,

2 Aur cbAlis din tak ShaitAn se limiayi gaya. Aur un dinop, men. kitchh na kliAyA : jali wuh dia purc Inic, akhir fa>bUkfii Mi.

3 Tab Shait4,ii ne ua se kaiti, ki A(H t.ri Khuila ka Befi hai, to is ) miliar ku kali, ki l'.iti bau jAe.

4 Yisu' uc jawab uicjj us se kahA, LikhA hai, ki IntAn siif roti se tiah'ta, baiki KhudA ki har ek bAt'se jitA hai.

5 Aur Bhaitan no usc ek i'mche ]>ahAr par le jAke dunyA ki siri bid- siiahaten ok dam mert dikhAin.

6 Aur ShaiiAn ne US so kaha, ki Main yib sArA ikhtiyAr, aur un ki shAn oshaukat, tuihe diirjga: kyfVnki yili Timili ko souipA gaya hai ; aur jia ko chAhtA hi'ia, dotA hun.

7 Pan agar tii mrijlie flijda kare, sah lori hogA.

8 Yisu' ne use jawAb men kahA, ki Ai ShaitAn, more sAmbne se jA: ky- iiyki likbA hai, ki Tu KhudAwand apue KhudA ko eijda kar, aur sirf usi ki handali kar,

9 Wuh use Yarusalam inen lAyi, aur haikal ke kangurc uar k h: . karke us «c kahA, Agar tu KhudA ka Beta bai, to fcjpae ta,in J'abAn se girA

10 Kyunki UkhA hai, ki Wuh tere liye apue nrisiiton ko 1'armAwegA, ki turi khnlwdAri karen :

11 Aur tujlio hatbon par utba Jcn, kahin aifA na ho ki tere p&nw ko jtat- thar se tlics laga.

1 'J Yi'-itL' m; jawab nicn use farmAyA, ki kahA gayA hai, Tii KhudAwand apne KhudA ko, mat AzmA.

IH Aur Shaitftti jali tamAm AzmA- ifili kar chukA, muddat tak ub ne dur nhi-

14 ^ Aur Yieii' Mh ki uiiwat se .Talil ko filiira; aur sAreaspAa kemulk men u ki abahrat Ml

15 Aur wuh un ko 'ihAdat.khanon men ta'Jfm detA raba, aur sah us ki tii'rirkarte the.

1G f Phir wuh NAsarat ko, jahAn parwarifth j:Ai thi, AyA, aur apue dastur DAI Ifcbt kfldlfl 'ikidalkliaueniengaya, aur parhne ko fcbnrA had,

17 Anr Vas'aivah DtM ki kltibu ko di gayi. Aur kitAb kholkar wuh maqAm j>AyA, jabAn yib likhA tha, ki

18 Kliudawaiid ki HCih mnjli par hai ; us n« is liye mu.jht> Masih kiyA, ki garibon ko khusliklialiaii dan ; mujh ko bhejA, ki tflte dilon ko du- niht kariin, qaidii>u ko chhiUne, aur andhou ko dekhue ki kliabar sunAiin, aur jii bep.Fii ae gbAyal hnin unhfln cbhurAr.u,

19 Aur KhudAwanu ko sal i mailbiil ki manAdi kaniii.

20 Aur kitAb hnnd karke, aur kiid- rmtt-kan]e\v.i]fi ko dekfl, wuh baith gaya. Aur aalihon ki Aiikhen, j n 'iba- datkhAne men tbe, us par lagi tbJo.

2i Tab wuh uniirn kjluU iftgi, ki A'j yih navishta, jo turo ne sunA, piira hi:L

22 Aur sab ne us par gawAbi di, aur uu fa^l ki bAton se, jo ua ke mitOD se tiifcaili lin'n, ta'ajjnh karke kahA, K ya yih Yusuf kA l>eLa nahiu?

23 Ua ne unb'eri kali A, ki Tuni be- sbakk yih masai mujh par kahoge, ki Ai hakim, apue ta,in changA kar; jo jo ham ne sunA, ki tujb se Kafaraa- bunt men hdA, yahAn apne watan men bhi kar.

24 Par us ne kahA, Main tam H nab kahti bos, ki Koi nabi apne. wa-

meji miwjbnl unhhj hobi.

"> [..-km nuiin l.uin m sach kahta Ma, ki HiyAs kedlnon men, jab sarhe tin baras AsniAn band rahA, yahAn tak ki siri sarzamin nien imrA kAl parA, bahut si bewAen IsrAel moij thin;

Ptofrtu /.i t&t /.'f changA hima. LU'Q 26" Par IliyAa im men eg kisf ke pds

na bheji paya, magar Saidike Saraptd

meij ek I-"/ 6 ke j i Aa. 27 Aur i1-: : nabi ke waqt Israel

men bah u t sc korhf tho ; par un men

n koi, Na'aajin Suriyani ke siwa,

cliaiiRti na hud.

2B Tab wo jo 'ibadat khdne men t.he,

ua balon ku a uu 1.0 lii gussa se bhar

29 Aur Uthc, aur usc shahr ke bi- lur nilkdlke ua pahdri ki choti uar, jis [Kir :iti kA shahr baua tha, lu chale, ici use «ir ke bbal giri iiua.

30 Lekin wuli uu ke bich se nikalke r:i w Ali a h u d,

31 AurKafamahummeg.jo Jafil kti ek shahr hai, iya, aur sabt ko dinon men unhen ta'lim diyd kiyi.

32 Aurwe uu kl ta'lim sc dang biie: kvunki us kA kalam oudrat ke sath tha.

33 T Aur 'ihAdatkhAna men ek shakhs iba, jis men sbaitan ki uApdk n'iii thi; wuh bari awdzsc yih kabkar chillaya, k i

34 Ai l'isu' JfAsarf, chbnr de; ham-

S kya kain? tii hamon balik karne iya hai; main jAntA hiiti ki tii kauu hai ; Khuda ki QuuUua. "

35 Tisu' ne uwe dhamkdke kahd, Chup rah, aur ua men se nikal jA. Aur wuh shaitdrj uao bich men patuk k e us ■e nikal gaya, aur u» ko nuu^iu na jnlnincb&yi.

3ti Aur Eab nihdyat bairan hue, aur a pas mon kahuo lape. ki Yib kaisd kalAtn hai f ki wuh ikhtiyar aur qud- rat se ndpdk ruhon par hukm kan.d hai, aur we nikal jati bsin.

37 Aur dspds ke mulk ki har jagah mon us ki ahuhrat phaill.

38 % Pliirwuh 'ibadatkbAnoscuth- kar Shama'un ko g h a r gayA. Niiama- 'un ki bAs ko bari tap charhi thi ; aur uiihon na us ko liye ua se 'arz ki,

39 "Tab khard hoke us ki taraf ibukd, aur tap ko dhamkayd, to utar 79

A', V. MacUUon kd gol ha/h !.,,,..,',.

fayi; aur us ne jhat nthkc un k i _hidmat ki.

40 H Aur jab fciiraj diilttd thi, m sah, jin ke yahiiu marfa tbe, jo tarah tarah ki bitnariuii men gitiftdr the, uu ko us nas Ide; ub db un men se har ek liar hdth rikljkar unhen cbjuigd kiya.

41 Aur bahuton men. so shaydein chilldkar yili kahke nikal gaya, ki Ta Masih Khuda k:i Be(,A hai. l'ar uh ir> i.lhaj|]kak:u- un ko bulno ua diyd: ki utibori uc ua palicliand, kiwuli Masih hai.

42 Aur jab din hiiA, wuh nikalkar ek wirdne men gayd : aur log use dhundlitc hue ub pia do, aur u»e rokd, ki un ke piw ae na jde.

43 Par us ne unbon kahd, Mujhc i-.avur hai ki aur sliahron men bhi Kbudd ki bddshihat ki khusb-klia- bari dtin; kyimki main ia hi Jiye bheji gayd.

44 Aur wuh JnJil ke 'ihidatkhdtion mes nianddi kartd raba.

V BA'B.

A ISA' hild, ki jab Khudd ke kaldm auune ko log us par giro parto the, wuh Ganncsarat ki jhiJ ke kinare kbuni tbd,

2 Aur ub ne jhil ke kiuare do kSsh> ti lagi dekhi: par machlwe un par se utarke apne jal dbo taha the.

3 Ue dc un kishtion meri se ok par, jo Shama'un ki thi, eharhko us uc ilarkhwdst ki, ki kamire sg tbori bata le cLalo. Aur wuh baithkn logon ko kishti par ae ta'lim deno lagd.

4 Aur jab kalam kar chukd, to Shama'un se kahd, ki Gahre men le

bal, aur tum alukiir ke liye apne jal dalt>.

5 Sharua'Gn ne jawab men ub ae kahd, ki Ai SAbib, ham ne adri rit miliiiiit ki, par kuchh na jiakru: ma- gar tera karue se jdl ddltd biin.

6 Aur jab unhon nc yih kiya, tu

Eh mvjlfy M I.U'Q

RUbchhlkg k;i bara gol gber iyi: aisa ki uu ka jal plmtiu; laga.

7 Tab uuhon n*; apne sathfon ko, ja diisri kiahti par the. ishara kiyd ki Ake un kl madad karun. We ie, aur donoj kisktuuj uisi bhardin,ki diibne labili.

8 Shama'on Patrus ne yib dekhkar Yifii' ke pdnwon par girku kali d, Ai Kliuddwand, meru \>6& se ja; ki main gunakgdr hi'm.

i) Kyiinki un rn&chhlion ko shikdr se, jo unhon ne pakri thin, wuh, aur wc aab jo uh ke sdth the, hairdn the :

10 Aur Kahfldt ke beto Ya'qub aur Yuharma bhi, jo Shama'un ke eharik tli«, hairdn tho. Tab YimV ne Kha- ma'riu ko knhd, Mat dar; is dam se iti admtog ka Khikdr-karnewaJd bogd,

] 1 Wc kishtion ko kanaro par kliineh l!te, aur wab kuchh ehhorfee uh ke pichbe chale.

12 4 Aur aifia liud,ki wuh ek shahr rnen t h d, aur, dekko, ki ok mani ne, jo knrli w; bhara, thd, Yiuu' kodekha, aur mim h ke biiul girke us ki minnat karke kaha, ki Ai Khuddwand, agar tu cMlic, mujhe changa kar sakti hai.

18 Uh uo bdth barhdyd, aur yih kabkar uae chlu'ni. Main chdhtd hun ki tii pak naf kiyd jde. Aur wunliiu us kdWh jatdrahd.

K Aur us ne un MkM ki, ki KWi *p mal kali : baiki JifcW apne ta,in kabin ko dikbld, aur jniaa Musa ne faukm kiya hai, apne pak sdf houe kl ■piriiiirii kar, ta ki un par gawdhi ho.

15 Lekin us kd ziyada cbarchd phaild: aur bahut se log jam'a Inii-, ki us k( aunen, aur us ke hath m apui bimariutj n onange kiye jdwerj.

lb f i'ar wuh liaydban uicrj alag jake raba, aur du'a mai.gtA tbd.

17 Ek din ai.ia hiia, ki jah wuh ialLm do raba thd, kai Farisl aur i.liari'at. ke sikhlanewalo Jalil ki bar ek bftStt, aur Ynhiidiya, aur Yaniea- Um ae iike pd» Uilhi: ihe: aur Khu-

A', V. nhhat fidna.

ddwand ki ip'iwat unhen clnmga kanu1 ku maujud thi.

18 U Aur, dekho, ki kai mard ek shakbs ko, jiso jhole ne mara thi, eharpai par lae : aur ohahte the ki

o andar idke us ke dge rukhen ;

19 Par blnr ko sabab ae andar le jdne ki rah na pai ; tab kothe par ubarh gaye, anr khaprail k;itl;n un cbdrpii samet bich men Yiaii' ke &ge latkd diya

'ZO TJb ne nn ka imdn dekhkar iue kahd, ki Ai mard, lere gunah mu'al hde.

21 Tab faqih aur Fanai soehne lage, ki yih kaun hai, jo kufr bakta hai ? Khudi ke siwd kaun gundhon ko mu'df kar aak la hai '/

22 Tab Yisn' ne uu ke kliiydl dar- ydft karke jawih men un se kaha, ki Tuni apue dilon meij kytt soobte ho?

23 Kaun ziyada dsan hai, yih kah- nd, ki Tere guuah mu'df biie ; ya ytli kahni, ki Utli, aur chal?

24 I^kin 'td ki tum jano, ki lbn i A'dam ko zamin |iar gundhon ke mu- 'df karno ka iklitiyar hai, (u s ne us jhole ke mdre hiie ko kahd,) ruam tujhe kahta hiin, Utb, aur apni t:li,it- pai lekar apne ghar ja.

"5 Aur wuh jbat un ke dge utha, jis par para tba, uso lekar K hudsi ki ta'rif kart'd hud apne ghar chal» gayi-

26 Tab un sab he hosh jdte rahe, aur Khuda ki ta'rif karne la.ge, aur bahut ilarko bole, A'j ham ne bare acbambhe dekhe.

27 ^ Aur in bdtorj ke ba'd wuli bdhar gayd, aur Lewi ndin ek mali- Miil-lciiewdle ko chanki par baithe de- kha : aur uso kaha, Rfure piciihe d.

28 Wuh sab kuchh chhorke utha, aur U« ke plchhe chald.

29 Aur Lewi ne apna ghar men us ki bar! ziyatat ki : aur walidn maii- Bvll-lenewdlon aur auron ki, jo ub ke ,*dth kliaiie baithe tbe, hari bbir thi.

Jiot.a niTakhve h'i m

LU'QA', VI. Farition ko matdmal terna.

KO Tab wahAij ke fiiqihon aur Fa- risknj ne us ke shagirdon ae takrir fe&rke kahi, ki Tum kyi'in niahsiil- Viirwiikrtj mir guaabgfiroB ke sith khaie pite ho?

31 Visti' ne jawab Tnon unben kahi, Hhrtlu-chftugon ko hakim darfcto na- luri, baiki bimaron ko.

32 Main ristbiw>2 ko taiba k<- Rye hulauu nahin iyi, baiki gunah- |p2Bg k...

'■'•'■i H Aur uuhon tie us se kahi, ki Yuhanua ke «Ingini k y u n aksar roisa raklite aur d u 'a mangte hain, aur isi lainii Farisioii ke shiginl bhi; par Un khite pito hain?

34 Us tie u n se kahi, Kyi tata ba- raiiuu ku, jab tak dnllia un ke sith lai, ihb rakkwi snkte ho?

;i.ri I'ar »t din aweijsri-, ki dulhi nti sc judi kiyii j&og* ; nu dinun BWn, wc alkuia rOM rakbunge.

36 ^ Aur us m; un se ek masai bhi kahi ; ki Koi purine kapre par nayo kapre M tukra kicke paimtod nahin lagita; nahiij to, wuh naye ko pharta hai, aur naye kapre ki paiwand pnr- fen H ui'i btd n.iiiiij khata.

37 Aur nayi mai purani mashkon nien koi nahin bharti; nahin to, nayi mai maslikon ko phirke liah jaegi, aur

Mii barliid hon^i.

38 Italki nayi mai nayi masliki _ iiK'ti vakhni chahiye; ki donon bftchi rahetid.

3it Aur purani .pike kof lisi dam nayi nahin chdhti: kyiinki kakui hai, ki I'uriai bihtar hai.

VI UA'B.

AUR dnsre bare eabt ko yiin hni, ki jad wuh khetun ke bicb se jati tha, u* ke shagiid bal<;n torkar, aur hathon ae malkar, khine lage.

2 Tab baV.e Farision ne anbej ka- hi, Tum kyiin wah karte ho jo sabt ke diaorj men kami rawa nahin?

3 Yteti' bb unhen jawab meg kahi, Kvd Mm ne itua nahin parhi. jo

81

Daiid ne kiyii, jab wuh aur us ke b&- thi bhiikhe the;

4 Wuh kyiijikar Khudi ke ghar mert gaya, aur nnzr ki rnlian, jo ki- hinon ke aiwa trfcre ko k'biui fftwi na tha, lekai kbain, aur apnfl sithioii ko bhi din ?

5 Phh U9 IH unliru kaba, ki Ihn i A'dam Mtat ka bhi KTm.idwaiul hai.

6 Aur dusre sabt ko blii yi'iij htU, Iri «uli lbidatkWto», men jakn ta'Piui dene lagi : aur wahati ek ftdmi tha, jis ka dahinii Viath tt£h S»ya tha.

7 Tab faqih r> Farfd us ki tak tnen lage, ki ahayad wnh sabt ke dln clianga kare, lo us par faryid karne ka liaijw pawen.

8 Tar us ne im ke kbivalon ko jan- kar us admi se, jis ka hatii suklia tha, kaili, ki Uth, aur bieh men k hari lio. Wuh uth khari hui.

9 Tab yisi'i' De unheij kahi, Main tum ae ek bit piichbialiun ; ki Sabi. ke din kyi kami rawa liai y hhnla karna, ki bttc4? jari baobaoa, ki jin mama ?

10 Aur un Bab ki taraf dekhke us admi se kahi, Apna haid pfialla. Us DC aiwa kiyi: aur us ki hatii diare ki raonind thangi ho gayi,

11 Tab we sab diwanagi se bbarke ipas meri kaiine lage, ki Ilam Yisu' ke sith kyi karen 'f

\2 Aur un diiuiri men aisi hui, ki wuli jiabir par du'i m&ngno ko gayi, aur Khud'i se du'i m&EgCB mm r;it bitii.'

13 T Aur jab dln bui, us ne apno shdginlon ko pas buhikc un men se barah ko chuni, aur un ki iiam rasiil rakhi ;

14 Ya'no, Shama'nit, fjis ki nira Patrus bhi raklii,) aur ub ke bhii Aiuiryji.-, Ya'uub aur Yiihanni, Fail- bua aur Bartfcfilama,

15 Mati 0 Thumi, Halfi ke bcte YaV|iib, anr Shania'un jo Zelotcs kah- lata tha,

F

Baraku! o la'nat ka zikr.

LU'QA', VI.

Mamh kd lown ko

16 Ya'qiib ke bhdi Yahud&h, aur liye harakat clmlio: jo hnoheg >a-

Yahuddh Jskariyuti k o, jo us kd pa- karwanewala hiid.

_, tiii ke liye du'd miugo. 29 Jo tere ek gil par raare, ua ko

17 5 Aur un ke sdth utarke maidin ! diiard blif (ibcr d.© ; aur jo koi teii

iiicri k hari hiid; wahdn uh ke ahi- girdon kl jamd'at tbi, aur logon ki bari bhir, jo sire Yahddiya aur Yaru»a]am, aur Siir o Saidii kesamuudar ku kinare se un |*is di tlii, ki we 01 ki suuen, aur apnl bimdrioii se cbange bon ;

18 Aur wo bbi, jo napdk riihon se duk L pate the, de ; aur cbange hiie.

19 Aur sab log cbdhte tbe ki uso chliuwcn : kyunki otfwat us so nikalti, aur nah ko changa karti thi.

20 T Fbir ua ne apne shagirdon par nazar karke kahd, ki Mubarak bo tum, jo garib ho: kydgki Khudd ki bid- ah iba t tutiiliiiri hai.

21 Mubarak ho tum, jo ah bhfikhe lio: kyiinki duiida boga, Mubarak bo tum, jo ab rote ho : kyunki liansoge.

22 Mubarak bo tiun, jab lbti i A 'dam ku liye log tum se kina rakhen, aur tumhen kharij kar den, aur ma- lam a t karen, aur tuuihdra ndin bura janke nikdleii.

23 Ua din khnsh ralio, aur khushi se ucbblo: is liye ki, dekbo, damdn par tumhdrd bard badld hai : kyiinki uu ke bipdiiloTi ne irnbion ko sdth aisi h i kiyd.

24 Magar afaoa tuui par, jo dau- latmaiid 00 1 kyiinki (uni npni tasalli pd chuke.

25 Afson tum par, jo asini» ho! kyiinki bhukhe hoge. Afsoa tum par, jo ab hanato bo! kyuuki {jam karoge, aur rooge.

2C Afsos tum par, jab sab log tum- ben bbald kabcn! kyunki un ke bdp- dade jnutho uabiuu w aisa lii suluk kartu the,

27 f Par tumben jo sunteho, main kabtd hiin, ki Apne dushnianon ko piyar knro ; jo tum aa kina rakhon, uu k;i. l-kalii, karo;

28 Jo tumben la'uat karen, un ke

82

qabd lewe, kurt-a lone se bhi mau'a na kar,

30 Jo koi tujh se feuchh mdnge, use de; aur ua so, jo teri mal ie, pliir niat mang.

31 Aur jaisd tum cbdbte bo ki log tutn se karen, tum blii uu se waisii iii karo.

32 Aur agar tum unhrn, jo tumben piydr knrte hain, piydr karo, (■> tum- haid kyd ihsin hai? kyunki gunahgir bbi apne piydr- kar newdlon ko piydr karte hain.

33 Aur agar tum un kd, jo tumhdrd bhald karen, bbald karo, to ttnnhara kyd Diadu hai? ki gunahgdr blii yihi karte hain.

34 Aur agar tum unhen, jin bo phir panu ki ummed hai, qan do, to tum- hdrd kyd ihsdn hai V kyunki gunahgir bhi gimahgdron ko qare dete hain, ta ki u» ki badli pawen.

35 Pas apne dusbmanon ko piydr karo, aur bhald karo, aur phir pane ki ummed ua rakhke qarz do, to tumhard badia bara hogd, aur tum Kbudd Ta'dla ke famud hoge: kyiinki wuh Qi-tlmkK>Q aur tshari'ron ]iar bbi mihrbdn hai.

36 Paa, jaisd tuinhdrii Bdp rahim hai, tum rahim ho.

37 'Aib na lagdo, to tum par bbi 'aili lagayd na jdegd: aur mujrim ua thahrrio, to tum mnjrim na thahrde i'ioge : mu'df karo, to tuui bhi mu'df kiye jaoge:

38 Do, to tumben bhi diyi jdegd; aebchbd uapiii dab dib, aur hild hi- Idko, niunh-a-muijli girld Inid bharke, lumhdri god meu denge. Kyunki jis paimdnt se tum napte ho, usi se tum- iiiru liye bhi ndpd jdegd.

39 Phir us ne un se ek tamail blii kalii, ki Kyd aiuiha amlhe ku ruh

tallm 'lemi. LTT'QA'

dikha sakti lini? kyd we dotion garhe mori »!t girenge?

40 Bhagird apne ustdd se bard nahin: baiki jab taiydr hud, apuc «atid Kii hogd.

41 Aur us linke ko, Jq tere bhdi ki Ankh mog hai, kydn dekhtd hai, par ns kimli par. jo teri ankh mon hai, iiahiu kiiiydl karti?

42 Ya tt'i kymjkar apne bhai ko kali Faktii, ki Ai bhai, ruh, yih tinka, j" teri ankli mon hai, main nikal diiii. par us kdndi ko, jo teri ankh men hai, n;ihiij dekhtd? Ai riyakiir, puhlu lis kdudi ko apui ankh men un nikal, tab h'l oi tiuke ko, jo tcre bhai ki ankh men hai, achchhi tarah dckhke nikal sakegd.

43 Kyunki achchhe darakht men burd phal nnhin lagtd: aur na bure darakht men achchhi phal lagtd,

44 Pas har ck darakht apne phal se pahchdnd jatd. Ih liye ki log kan- ton se anjir nahin torle, aur na bhat- kataiye se angur torte,

45 Achchhi admi apne dil ke ach- chhe kha/.ane so achchhi cliizen ni- kaiti hai; aur bura lidini apne dil ke buru khazine ee buri rhmfl bahar iata : kyiinki jo ilil men bhard hai, so hi iminh par at.a hai.

46 f Aur tum kyfig mujhe Khudd- wand, Khudiwand, kahte bo, aur jo main kahta hiin, nahin. kartu?

47 Jo koi inero pds dtd hai, aui meri bdten sunkar un par 'amal kar- ti hai, main tumben hatdti hnn, ki wuh kiK ki niinind hai ;

48 Wuh us shakhs ki manind hai, jin ne ghar banite lu'ie gahrd khodke chatdn par new ddli : jab barh ai, to dhir us ghar par zor se giri, par use hila na saki : kyunki us ki new cbatdn |K thi.

49 Aur wuh, jo sunkar 'amal men nahin ldtd, uh shakhs ki manind hai. jis ne zamin par be'-new ghar baniyd ; aur dhir ua par zor se giri, aur wuh

83

VIP. Ek guhim kd sihhaf panti-. thal yir pari; aur us ghar ki bari barbadi bui.

TTI RA'B.

AUR jab wuli iogon ko aprn siri biten suni, cliuka, to Kai'ar- nahum men iyi.

2 Aur ek subaddr kd gulim, jo ub kd bahut piydrd tbd, bimdri so ruarne par thd.

'A Ua nfl Yiait* ki khabar sunke Yahddion ke kai ck buzurgon ku us pds bhejkar us ki minnat ki, ki akar ub ke guldm ko changd knro.

4 Aur uuhon m Yisii' k<- pds Ake us ki bari iniimnt kurku kahd, ki Wuh is liki hai, ki tti us par yili ihsan kare:

5 Kyunki wuh hamili qaum ko piydr kartd hai, aur hamdre iiye ek 'ibadatkhdiia baniyd hai.

6 Tab YisiV un ko stith chald. Aur jab wuh ua ke ghar se dor na thi, subaddr ne doston so us pd* kahli bheji, ki Ai Khuddwand, taklif na kar : kyunki main is Idiii nahin, ki td miTi CLWial talfl awe:

7 Isi sabab main ne apne ta'in Ijlii is liiq na jand, ki tere pis Aiiti j airf kali de, to inera olihokrd cbangi nogd,

8 Kyunki main bhi diisre ke ikh- tiydr meQ hrtrj, aur sipdhi mere hukm men hain : jab ek ko kahti hiin, Jd, wuh jati hai; aur &Un ko, A', wuh dti hai ; aur apne guldci ko, ki Yih kar, wuh kartd hai.

9 Yisu' ne yih sunkar ta'ajjub kiyi, aur phirke u n logon rb, jo us ke pichho dte the, kab:i, Main tum se kahti lilin, ki Aiad bari iman Israel men bhi na piya.

10 Aur we,Jo hhru'e paye the, jab ghar men phir de, to us bimdr gulam ko chaagd ))Ayd.

11 % Aur diisre din aisd hiid, ki wuh Xlin ndm shabr ko rawdua hda ; aur ua ke bahut se «hdgird aur bari bliir us ke sith thi.

[ 12 .iad wuh us skalir ke phitak kt

J' i), h «r. n iiii. ki baiat. LU'QA

nazdik palmiicha, to dckho, «k rminla k" bdhar leiate tbe, .i" apni mi k A, k) Injwa tbi, ikiautd bebt thd: aur riuhi ke bahut sc log ua ke Baih tllS.

13 Aur us ko dekhke Khudawand ko us par rahm dyd, aur use kaha, Mat ro.

14 Aur pAfi ake tdbit ko chbiid ; aur utMnewale tlialiar gaye. Tali us Ot kaiti, Ai jawau, main tujh se kahtd hiin, Uth.

1"j Aur wuh miirda uth bahha, nur bolne lagd. Aur us uo uso KU ki mi ko sompa.

16 Aur sah ilar gnyc, aur Kliniki ki ta'rif karke bo'le, ki liard nabi ham m u utkii; aur Khuda ue apne logoti pai Bazar ki.

17 Aur us ki yili bal sdre Yahtidiya, aur tamani aspds ke nmlk nien phaili.

IH Aur Yubaiind ke shdgirdon ue u.*o in sab bdton ki khabar di.

19 ^ Aur Yi'ilmuna ne apnn sha- iziuhm men se do ko bulakar SW ke pds kabid bhcjd, ki Kya jo anewdld thd, ti'i hi liaiV yii ham diisrc ki rdh takeij 'l

20 l.'n nuurdoB ne uh pas jake kahd, ki Yilbanua baptisma-deiiLwsLle ne ham nc tere pas kabid bheja, ki Wuh, jn duewdla t ha, ti'i hi hal? yd hajii diate ki idh taken?

21 Us EO ufii gbari bah u ton ko bimdrioii, aur baldon, am' had rulujn .se, chiiuga kiyd; aur bahut H amilum ko iokhai

22 Aur YisiV ne jawab nWD un M kabd, ki Jake jo tum ue dekha aur nini Yuhanna M kabo, ki Audbe dyklii.d luiiti, lamire chalte hain, korbi ohange hota kain, bahire sunte latin, murde jilae jate hain, garibon ko khu&hkhabari sunai jdii bai.

23 Aur mubarak wuh bai, jo icujh se thnkar ua k bau.

24 T Jab we, jinhiij Yiilmmiii CM bhcja tha, gaye, lab \"n>\\' Yuhauuaki

84

VII. Us pir Masih ki gnwahi,

ibdhat logon so kahne lagi, ki Tum jaiifral mm kya dekhne gaye? Kyd ek aarkandd, jo hawa se biltd hai ?

25 Phir tum kyd dekhne gayo? Kyd ek mard, jo rniilaiui kapre pahine hai? Dekho, \vo, io'umdaposhak ]>a- binte, aur 'aish nw;n gunrdn kartw, lnidshalum ke niabalion meti hain.

20 Phir lum kyd dekhiuj ^ayc ? Kyd ek nabi ? Haii, Bttdjj lum a« kali- td hiiij. baiki nabi se bard.

ih wiihi hai, jis ki bdbat likhd iLai, ki Dekh, main apnu rasul ko tere age bhejia hun, jo teri rdh ko tere dge durust karega.

L!K KyMnki main tum so kalitd blin, ki Un men se jo 'auraton se paida huo, Yubaiind bajitiMiiianliJiicwalu ao koi nabi bara nabin : Ickiii jo Khudd ki ii;i'isii:iii:ii. m c n ehtiot^ hai, us so hara hai,

2Vi Aur sah Iflgog ne Rinike, aur mahnuJ-lonewdloii ne Khmia ko sach nianko, Ytihannd se haptisma liyd.

30 Par FarisfOD aur shun'at-sikb- luuewdhm 110 apni nishat Khudd ke irada ko ndchi'z janke us se bapiisma ua liyd.

SI *[ Aur Khudawand nekahd, Pas is zamane ke logon ko ki< Re ui>h.it di'm, aur kis ki mdtiind kahun?

li^i We im larkon ki mdnind baiQ, jo bazdr men baithke ek diisre ko pukarkur kalite, ki Ham nc t u nih si rc liye baijsli bajai, aur tum ria ndche ; aur hain ne tuvnhdre liye nidtaiu kiyd, par tum na roe.

38 Kyiinki Vdliannd liaptisma-de- newald dyd, jo oa roti khatd, aur ua inai piki thd: aur tuui kahio ho, Us par t.-k shiiitdu hai.

ii4 ]l»u i A'dam dyd, jo khdtd pird hai ; aur tum kahte ha, ki Dekho, ok li.irii l.hiui aur mai-khor, aur mahsiil- leuuwiloy aur gunahgaron kd dost 1

36 l':u hikmat apue Bab larkon se taadk pdti,

Sfi 1 l'hirek Farid m-us se'arzki,

At<mh lec jyinwon par LU'QA'

ki Mere sath khd. Aur wuh Farisi ku I ghar jdke khane baitlui.

37 Aur, dekho, us «h alir men ekj 'aurat, jo gunahgdr thi. jab jAiia ki! wiih Furi.si ke ghar khano baitki hai, sang i marmar ke 'itrddn dipij 'm- l:ii,

38 Aur wuh piehhe pdnwon ke [jas kiwi tlii, aur ro roke ausii M us ke pdnw dhone lagi, aur aptie sir ke balon ■e poochhks ua ke pdnwon ko shauq M ohuma, aur 'itr nmJa.

39 Aur iiB Fariai ne, jis ne ua ki da'vvat ki thi, yih deklikar dil men kaha, ki Agar yih nabi ln.ta, to jdntd ki yih 'aurut, jo use chhuti hai, kaun alir kaisi hai : kyunki gntiahgar hai.

40 Yisu' ne use jawdb mag kaha, ki Ai Shama'un, main. tujh se kuuhh kaha chahta h d n. Ua ne kaili, Ai Ustad, k a h.

41 l".k shnkhfl ke do gandar the : ek pan sau diuar ka, dusra padias

ki.

42 Par jab un ko ada karne ka maudiir na thd, donon ko haklirtli diya. So kah, un mag ae kaun us ku ziyada piydr karega?

18 Bhaaut'nn ne jawab mag kahd. Hari danist- meu wuh, jiseua mr/.iyada bakhshd. Tnb us ne use kaha, Ti ne titik fmsal kiya.

44 Aur us 'aurat ki taraf mutawaj- jih lioku Shama'nn se kaha, Tii ia 'au- rat ko dekhta hai? main tere ghar aya, tii ne mujhe pan w dhune ko pani tia diya : par is ne iuere pdnw du.-wn sc Jhoe, aur apue air ke balon se pon- chhe :

45 Tfl ne mujh ko na chumi : |iar ia no, jab se main aya, mere pari w shauq m chdmnd ua chhord :

46 Td ne mere sir par tel na mala : par is ue mero panwoij par 'itr mala.

47 Is liye main kahti hi'm, ki Us ke gundh jo bahu t hain, mu'af hue ; kyunki us ne bahut piyar kiya; par jis ke tlwre uiu'af hue, wuh thori pi- yar karta.

, VIII. tHr mah.'i.

48 Aur un 'aurat se kaha, Tere gunih uiu'af hue.

49 Tad we, ju us ke sath kasino baithe the, dil nien kalmc lage, ki Vih kaun hai, jo guuah bhi uiu'af karta hai?

50 Par US ne 'aurat ko kahd, Tere iman ne tujhe bachdyd; «alamat chali

j*-

VIII BA'R.

AUR us ke ha'd ynn hud, ki wuh shahr shahr aur gdnw gdnw jd- ka uianaili kaila, aur Klimia ki bid- skdliat ki kliushkhabari deta Uni: aur WB barah us ke sdtli the,

2 Aur kitni 'auraten, jo had riilmu aur biriiariun se changi h di thin, Mari- yaui, jo Magdalini- kahlati thi, jis ee sat deo nikal gaye the,

3 Aur Yuanna, Herodis ke diwan Ki'i/.a ki jord, aur Kiisanna, aur bahu- teri aur, jo apne nidl se us ki khidmat kaiti thin.

4 "J Aur jab liari bhir Mi. aur bar shahr ke log us ke ]>as dte the, us ne tamsil men kahd : ki

5 Ek kisdn bij bone gaya; aurbotfl waqt kuchh rdh ko kinare giri; aur wuh raunda gaya, aur asindn ki chiri- yuTj m; uML't'hug liya.

(i Aur kuchh ehatan par giri ; aur - ■gka siikii gaya, kyuijki use tari na [lahuiidii.

-7 Aur knehh kautim nteg giru ; kati ton ne sith barhke use dal>d liya.

8 Aur kuchh tchehhi Eamin mag gira, aur ugke sau gima phala. Yili kahke \ts ae pukiri, ki Jise sunne ke Itiiu hun, sune.

9 Us ke shagirdon ne us se piichha, ki t'ih tamsil kva Hai ?

10 Us ne kahd, ki KhudA ki Md- shahat kd hhcd jdnnd tunihen diyi gayd hai : par autou ka tamsil mag;

;ki wedekhtehue nadekhen, aur nuote hoe na i-amihen.

11 TuBunt yih hai: Mj Khuda, ki k aki i u hai.

Bij-b&neitH&e kl tamsil. LCQA'

12 Jo rdh ke kindre hain, \ve hain ki (iimtfi hiliri : tab Shaitan ake ia ka- lam ka un ke SU so nikiil la jati hai, t,i k i aisd na liu k i iman ldke najat piwao.

13 Aur chntan pnr ke we hain, ki jab kaJam ko smitc hain, to kbushi H tjabul kar lete liain, lokio jar uahiii rakhta ; kuehb diu j mau ldke d/.mdisu

ke warit phir jate. 14 Aui '

Aur jo kdnton mcin giro, we liiiin ki santa, aur chal nikalte, aur fikr, aur daulat, aur zindagdui ki Wah, urihen dabd deti hain, aur pfaal ke jnkne ki naulut uhln paho&ohtf.

lo l'sir ju achchhi zamin par gire, wo haiti jo achchhe aur BttH ou n kalam ko sunke ydd rakklc, aur sabr liarku phalte.

16 i Koi chirag jaldke bartan se nah m oliliipatd, na paiang tale rakhtd, buiki abirdgdfa pai rakhta hai, ta ki andar lini'ivalii iirijilla dekhen,

17 Kyiuiki kuchii poskida nahm. jo Bihlr na hona; aur na koi chhipd, Jo maldm na ooe£, mu- khul ua jdegd.

IB Pan dekiio, ki tum kin tarah riiu- tehoi kyrinki jo rakhtd hai, use diyd jae^a ; aur jo nahin rakhta, ns se, ju apnidanisL men takhta hai, liydjacgd.

19 % Tab ua ki md aur us ke bhai uh pas ae, aur bhir ke sal>ab us ec nmldrjdt na karwnkeii.

20 Aur use khabar htSi, ki teri lari, aur tere bhai, bahar kharo tujh.ed.ckha chdhta hain.

21 Us ne jawab mori uuhorj kaba. ki Hari mi, aur mere bhai, we hain, ki K'lmdii kd kalam sunte, aur us par 'amal kar t e hain.

22 ^ Aur ck din aisd hud, ki wah aur uh ke shagird naw par chariie, aur us ne uu U k;iiia. ki AV», jldl ke par <:h;iKn. 'IVo welechale.

23 Par jab ndw cbali jati thi, wuh so gayd; aur jhil pir liari aiidhi di, aur naw piini se bharne lagi, aur wc khatre men pare.

, VIII. Matil hi tindM ko roknd.

24 Tab we us jjas de, aur use jagd- ko kahd, ki Sahih, ai sihib, ham balik bote. Tab us ne uthke bawa aur pan! ki lahron ko dhaiukaya ; to tnam gayirj, aur niwA hua.

25 Aur nn se kahd, Tumhdra iman kahan hai '! We dar gnye, aur ta'ajjub karke apas men kalme lagi', ki Y ih kaun hai ? ki hawa aur paui par hukm kurta hai, aur we ua ki maute haim

26 H Aui" we Gadarinfon ke raulk men, jo us par Jaitt ke samlnu? hai, naw chrtiako iiahunche.

27 Aur jub wuh kiuaro par utra, to us shahr ka ck mard, jin par muddat m deo tlie, aur na kapre pahinta, aur na ghar men, baiki qahron ke darnu- yan rahta tha, use mild.

28 Jab us nc Yisd' ko deklia, cliil- lake us ke panwon par gira, aur bari awdz se kabd, ki Ai Yisif, KbuddTa''- dld ke Bete, nmjli ko tujh se kva kdni? teri mimiaL karki. liiin, ki iuu- jiw dttkh uade.

20 (Is liye ki wuh us ndpak ruh ko liukin kart.il thd, ki is ddmi se nikal jd. Kyiinki aksar uee pakan i thi, aur harcliand usc Mujitnii aur lierion so jakarke khalmrdaii karte the, parwaii zanjirM ko tortd thA, aur deo use ba- vali.iii i:ieti ilanrat.a thd.)

30 Tab'Yisii'' ne us se piirhha, ki Teri kyd ndm hai? Wuh bola, Tu- inan : kydiiki ImliuC deo us par tlie.

31 Unhot) ne us ki minnat ki, ki Iianieri athah garlie men jano ka hukm na kar.

lili Wabdg sl5aroij kd bard gol rwt- hdr par ehartd thd: unhoi; ne oa ki minimi ki, ki hamen un men jaue de. Us ne jane diya.

33 Aur deo us adm! pe nikalke su- aron par charhe : aur gol karare par se jhifmerLkud'kardiibgaya. '

34 Chardnewale ns hdl ko dekhke bhdgc, aur jakc shahr aur ua ki nawalii men khabar di.

| 35 Tab we us hal ke dekhue ko

fibay&C» ka tk sol nikdlnd. LT"QA', IX.

Jdirus ki beti kojildna.

nikle; aur Yisu' ke pis ae, aur us ddmi ko, jis se deo nikal gaye the, k&pro pahine, aur hoshydr, flrf ke panwori ke pil baithd pdyd, aur dar gaye.

30 Tab dekhnewdlnn ne mi ko kha- bar di, ki wiili jis lui-ii deo the kis taruh changd hiid.

37 % Aur ri:idarink>a ke ispds ke mulk ke sah logon ne us se darkhwast ki, ki haradre pas se chald jd; kyuriki un men bani, dar paith gaya th&; aur wtili niw par charhko phira.

38 Aur us mard ne, jis par se sha- yatiu atar gaye the, us ki minnat ki, ki Mujhe apne sdtb. rahne de ; par Yisti* ne use rnkhsat karke kahd, ki

39 Apne ghar ko phir, aur we bare kdm.joKhuda ne tere saih kiychain, bayan kar. Wuh gayd, aur un bare kamera ko, jo YistV ne us ke sdth kiye the, tamam nlianr men sunayd.

40 Aur aisa hiid, ki jab Yisui1 phira, logurj ne us kii istiubal kiya, kyunki sab us ki rdb takte m

41 K Aur, deikko, ki Jainis ndnie A shakhs, JO 'ilvidfitklidue kd sardar thd, dyd, aur Yisu' ke qadauii'n par girke us ki minnat ki, ki Mere ghar chal:

42 Kyunki us ki ik lauti beti, jo baras baYah ek ki thi, manis pu ihi. Aur jab wuh jaiie laga, log us par gire

[■■: !■ ■ ., i,

43 K Aur ek 'aurat ne, jis ku Mmb baras se lahu jdri thi, aur apnd sdra mal hakimon par kharch kira, pai* kisii bo changi na ho saki,

44 Us ke pichhe dke us ki posnak kddaman chhiid; aur usi dam us ka lahu bahnd band ho gaya.

45 Tab Yisu' ne kaha, Kis ne mu- jhe dibuai1 Jab sab inkdr kame lage,

mujhe chhnd; kyunki main jantdhun ki tpiwat mujb mey se nikli.

47 Jal> us 'aurat ne dekhd, ki chhipti naliirj, kampti lu'ii di, aur ua ke panwon par girke sab logon ke aainhiM use Vmydn kiya, ki kis liye chhua, aur kls tarah se usi dam changi ho gayi.

48 Tab hb no use knhd, ki Ai beti, khdtir-jam'a rakh, ki tero imdn ne i ...■!..'■■ ■ >i

49 f Aurwuhyih kali rana thd. ki 'ihadai.khane ke sardar ke ghar so ek nu akar use kahd, ki Teri beti mar gayi ; Ustad ko taklif na do.

50 Yisrt' ne mmke jawab BWQ use kahd, ki Mat dar: sirf iman ld; wuh bach jdegl.

51 Aur jab wuh us ke ghar ayd, to Patrus, aur Ya'qub, aur Yuhanna, aur 01 larki ke md bdp ke siwa kisi ko andar jane na diyd.

52 Aur sab us ke liye roto pitte the; par us ne kahd, Mat roo; wuh mar nahiu gayi, baiki soti hai.

53 We us par hanso, kyunki jdnte the lti raar gayi hai.

54 Magar us ne sab ko nikalke us kd hdth pakrd, aur pukdrke kahd, ki Ai larki, uth.

55 Aur us ki nih. phir di, aur wuh usi dam u|hi; aur Yisu' nc hukin kiyd, ki Use khine ko do.

5Q Tab us ke md bdp hairdn htie : par us ne unhen takid ki, ki yih jo hiid kisi se nd kaho,

IX BA-B.

U S ne apne bdrah slidgirdon ko ikattha karke tiuhe-n sab shai- tdnon par, aur litniariuTi ko dafa kamo ke liye, qudrat o ikhtiyar liakiishd.

2 Aur imhen bheja, ki Khuda ki bidsfaihat ki matiadi karen, aur bi-

fatrue aur us ke sdthiun ne kahd, ki maren ko changd karen.

Ai >i\h\h, Ifig tujh |>ar gire parte liain, aur dabae lete, aur t,ii kahta h.ii, ki Kis ne mufhfl chhiid?

46 Par Yisu' ne kaha, ki Kisu ne

Aur un se kahd, ki Rdh ke liye kuchh na lo, na chharian, na jlioH, na roti, na rupiya; na ddmi pieblie do kurte.

Itaaulon ko kampar bhrjnt'i. LU'QA' 4 Aur jal> kisi ghar ineu dakhil lio,

wahin raho, aur wahin Re rawiua h:>. R Aur jnli log tiiiiilun qabul na

k-.ireij, to u| duUM biliar jike apne

piijworj ki k hak un par guwilii ke liye

jliani.

(i We rawiua hokc liar basti nien

giutrte, aur liar jaoah khush-khah

sunate, aur ohnuga karie the.

7 f Aur ehauth.il ko Mkim Hc- roiiis no, jo kuchh Y isii' n e kiyi thi, «uni: aur ghabrayi, is liye ki ba'ze kahte the, ki Ytihanni murdon mtin m ji utha hai;

8 Aur lia'ze, ki lliyas Kahir hiiii hai; aur diiare, ki ek agle nabion oien

u Lini hai.

9 Par 1 1 1 1* "lis no kahi, ki Main iic Yilbanni ki sir kat (Jala : magar yih. jis ki bAbat. aisi liaU.ni Bunti hun, kauu bai? Aur cihihi ki um dek h e.

10 Tf Aur rasiilou ae phirke jo kuehli kiyi tb.i uh sc bayan kiyii. Aur wnh un ko leke alag Bai t sa i di iisinie (dialir ko efc wiraiic mi'ii gSYa.

11 Aur log jinko ub ko piekhe cliale: wuli un ko Khudi ki bidshi- hat ki biteri karne lagi, aur jo change hone ke uiubtij the, unben changi k iya.

liJ Aurjab din ikbir hone lagi, mi binimu iiu iike u st' k:ihii. ki Logon ko rukhaat de, ki aspd» ki basti o n aur un ki iiawihi im-ii jika tiken, aur khauu ki tadlur kareu : kyriuki baui yakin wirdne men Lain.

13 Ua iie un «j krdii, kl Tum hf uh k'.> khaui do. Unhoii ne knha, ki Haniaro p4s, riwi piuok roti aur do BMObhtl ki', kuohh u:diin bui; OMK hiu, ham jiko in sab logon ke liye kit«U[ iiinl lerj.

14 Kyiinki we paneh hazir mard ke rjarib the, Tab uh ne apne sbi- girdon se kaha, ki TJn ko paulidu I ii ;..is kl p;tnt karke bit hio.

15 Unhon neuai tarah kiyi.aur sab ko bitbivi."

'88

. IX. Sh'ijfirdt-v ki kuini ■•hal rhahiye.

16 Tab u» ne un pin eh rotfcn aur do mschhlion ku Inke, aur aamin ki taraf ddchke, un ko barakat di, aur torke apue shigirduri ko d iya, ki logon ku Age lakhen.

17 Aur unhon no khiyA, aur aab isdda hi>: aur un tukrnn ki, jo mi ho baeh rahe, barah tokriin. uthiin.

18 % Aur yrin bui, ki jab ifua ni- rale mendua miugui thA, slid^irtl uh k< satli the; uo im un se puohhi, ki Log mujb ko kyi kahte hain, ki main kauu ban 3

19 Unhon ne jawab nu-n kahi, ki Yiihanna baptifema-drncwiia; aur ha- 'ze, lliyas; aur diisre, ki ek a^le ua- bion se phir uthi hai.

20 Tab uh no un m kahi, Tum kyi kahte ho, ki main kaun luiij? Patvus ne jawab n iuri kahi, ki Kiiuda ki Masili.

21 V.h no un so tak i d ki, aur fitr- miyi, ki vih kisti Be na kaho;

22 Aur kahi, ki Zanir hai ki Tbn i A'dam bahut dukh Hkbe, aur buzurg- on aur sai-dir kabinnn aur fin|ilioii w radd kiyi jiio, aur mari jie, aur ti.sre uiii ji ulin.-.

23 *j Aur uh no sah ne knhi, ki Agar koi clialie ki mere pichbe awe, to ftpoi iukar karu, aur apni galib liar [■o» ntliakt* iiii'ri [lairaui kara.

24 Is liye jo koi chibe ki apni jin bnchiwc, uae kbocgi : par jo koi mere liye apni jin khwga, wulii We bath;i- wegi.

25 Kyiinki idmi ko kyi laida,agar tamim dunya ha.-il kare, par apni jin kUo do, yi wuli barbid bowe ?

26 Kyiinki jo luujk se aur meri biton se sharmiegi. Iba i A'dani bhi, jab apne aur apne Bip aur pik lirirth- ton ke jalai ke sitb awegi, ua Be sharmiegi,

27 Par main tum se sauh kahtd hiin, ki Ba'n un nien se yahan khnre hain, jo na niarenge jab tak ki Khudi ki bfdsbUutt ua dsKoen.

Ek buri nih ka LfQ

28 ^ Aur in M ton ke roz a^h ek ba'd aisii lniii, ki wuh Pitrua aur Yii- hauna aur YVqiib ko sith leko pahat' par diri maiigno gaya.

29 Atir ilu';i maiigte lii aksi ln'ia, ki uh ke eh ih re ki surat badai gayi, aur

bak mil'ed barriiq ho gayi

30 Aur, dekho, do mani, jo Musa aur Uiyas the, ua se gnftogti karte the;

31 Yih jiiliil men dikhii diye, aur uh ke nur iio ka, jo Y arti .salam rnerj waqi' linu*: par thi, atftt kari* thi.'.

32 Hanr Patrus aur u» ku sithi nind H bhare the: jab jige, U> ua ke jalai ko, aur un do niardon ko jo u& H Nitli klmre tim, dek ha.

33 Aur aiaa hiia, ki jad we ns se jmia hoUfl UgB, Patrus ue Yisu' se kaha, ki Ai sihib, hamari yahan rahni nehchhi hai : tin dera banawen ; ek tere, aur ek Musi, aur ek Iliyis ke liye: aur nahin jin t a t ha, ki kya kahti hai.

34 Wnh yih kanta hi thi, ki badai iya, aur un par saya k iya : aur badai men jdiie se we dar gaye.

3~5 Aur badai se ek awiz nikli, ki YVh mori piyiri lleti hai : us ki

BUllO.

3fi Aur iwaz ato hi, Yisii' ko akela piyi. Aur we chup rahe, aur unhon ne, jo kucbh dekili thi, uu dinoti men ki.-u as ua kaha.

37 1 Auraisa lnia, ki jabwepabar se utre, to dilsre diti ek hari bhir usu a miU.

38 Aur, dekho, ki ck ir.ard ne bhir men se chillikc kaba, ki Ai ustad, main teri tniiuiat karta luirj, ki mere bete par nazar kar; ki wah meri ik- lan la hai :

39 Aur, dekli, ek ruh OM pakapi hai, aur wuh ekiek chilliti hai; aur ua ko iilsiL aiuthiti, ki wuh kaf hhar lata hai, aur us ko kuehalke ua pai se niushkil se utarti hai:

40 Aur main ue tera sbftgUdog ki

»9

& , IX. niHhui.

minnat ki ki use nikilen; lukai wo ua sakmu

41 Tab Yisii' as jawab men kaha, ki Ai be-iuian o terai pusht, main kab tuk tumhaie satli raliuiigi, aur Uim- hdri bardisht karungi'? Apne bete ko yahtin 11

42 Jab wuh iti thi, dao ue use pa- takke aiuthaya. Par Yisii' no us napik nih ko dbamkayi, aur larkokueliau^.i kiyi, aur use us ko bap ko aompa.

43 T Aur nah Klmda ki buzur$;i dekbkc liairan hue. Jab sab, un obi- B0Q ke sabab jo Yisii' uo kin, ta'ajjub karte the, ua ne apuo shagirdon se ka- ha, ki

44 Tum in batorj ko apne kanon men rakhuj kyiinki lbn i A'dam \^,u

lu niiili in-';; hamUa kiy.i i^eoA

45 Par we isbat konaaanijhejiaiki wuh uh se chhipi thi, ki we USB dary- aft na karen : aur is bat ke pik'hhuu men us we darte llie.

46 ^ Tiiir un ke darmiyau yih bnbs u(hi, ki ham men sab se bara kaun hai V

47 Yisii' ne un ke dilon kd khiyal jiuke ek larke ko liya, aur apne pas khara kiyi,

lr! A i.i r un se kaha, ki Jo is larke ko merc nam par o^abul kare, raujliB qabul karta hai; aur jo mujhe qabiil kare, ua ko, jis no mujhe bueja, qabiil karta hai ; kyunki j0 tiun men sah se ehluili hai, wuhi bari hai.

40 T Yuhanna ne jawab men kalii, Ai t-iiliil), ham ne ek shakhs ko tere nam se deoii ko uikalte dekhd ; aur us ko rok raklia, kyiinki wuh hamaro sath pairaui uahin karta.

.50 Yisii' no us se kaha, ki Uao rok na rrtkho, kyiinki jo haniare birkhilat' nahiii, bamari taraf hai.

51 1 Aur aisa hiia, ki jab we din, ki jin men wuh lipar uthaya jae, pura houe jjur the, Y'ani^ilam ko jane par qasdan apna rukh kiya.

02 Aur us ue apne age [«igam-dt-

Apnl barai na chahnA. LU'QA'

ncwalebheje: we iakefctimarioTi kiek basti men. ddkhil bd«, ki us ke liye taiyiri karen.

53 Lekin unhon ne uh ko nabul na kiyd, kythjki us ka munh Yardaalaiu kl taraf jane ko tha.

54 Us ke shAgird Ya'q(Sb aur Yrt- bnimtl M yib dikhkc kaha. ki Ai KiiwiawaDi!, kya tii chahui bal ki jaisA lliyae ne kiya, liam hukm karen ki tinta se ag nazil howe, aur unhen jalawe ?

86 'lab ijs ne phirko unhen dham- kaya, aur kaha, Tum n&hin ji-nte ki tum kaisi rdh ke lio.

56 Kyt'mki lbn i A'dam logon ki jan b&rbad ka.rnenahin, baiki bachaue iya. Tacl we dilari baatf ko chale.

;>7 % Aur nlsal bM, ki jati wo rah mi'ij ciiali) jate the, kisu ne us-o kalia, Ai Khudawand , jahan t n jdtA hai, main tero piclihe tJj.ih'iii^A.

58 Yisii' ne oee kubis, ki Lomrion ku liye iDjindt'ij bain, aur ehiriyon ke liye basere ; par lbn i A'dam ko Uni jiynh iiiibiij ki apna air rakhe.

59 Phtr us ne diisre M kaha, Mere pichhechal. Uh ue kahA, Ai Ktmda- wand, mujhe nikhsat de,ki pahle jSke. apne bap ko garitn.

60 Visu' ae oh fcnhS, Jane do, ki murda apne murdon ko gAfBB : pai" l-i'i jako Khudi ki bicUh&hftt ki khabar dc.

61 Dfare ne bhi kaha, ki Ai Khn- ddwauri, main tero pielibe chah'miia ; lekin pdhle jsnijhe jiiiip dc, ki apne ghar ke loeog se rukhsnt bo Aiiu.

62 Y'isu' ne uko kaha, ki Jo koi SpnA haik bal pai riikhfcn pkth&B dekhta hai, wub Kbuda ki hAd.shahut ke laiq nabi y.

" X BA'n.

U S ke ba'd Khiidawand. ne eattar aur inuqarrar kiye, aur apne samhne bar nlin.br aur ha.r jnjrah men, jahin a;.i jaya cbAbtA tha, utiben do do karko bbeja; 90

.', X, Satlar aur wd'iz chuntip. M, hd?.

2 Aur un ne kaha, ki Fas! to hahut bai, par rnazchir thore : is liye khet ke m pf i k ki niinnat karc, ki mazdtir apne khet men. bhoje.

3 Tum jAo; dekho, main tumben barron ki iniiniiid hlieriyi .'ii imin bhtjta hdn.

4 Na batiU le jtio, na jbnli, na jutiiin : aur rah inen kisi ko salam na kij'yo.

5 Aur jisgbar unmilakliil bo, pable kahu, ki Is pw ku ul£m.

fi Airnr «alauiali ka beta wahan b'"^a, tmuharii salam us par thahr- e;:a : nwliin U>, tutubart tara/ phir awe^a.

7 Aur usi ghar men Taho, aur jo kiichh m ki taraf x<; uiile, khio, pio: kyi'inki mnzduri mamliir ki baqq hiu. Gh;ii' gbar n pWra.

H Aur jin «bJkbr men dakhil bn, aur m tniiilu'ii <.]nbul karen, jo kuchh bonoMn saiubne rakha jae, khan :

9 Waban ke biuiaron ko chanpS. karo, aur un se kaho, ki Khuda ki Mrkbabat tiunbare nazdik di.

10, Aur jis shahr men ki diikin! bo, aur we tumben oobil na karen, to ba- har jake wainln ki sarakon par kaho, ki

1 1 Is frard tak, jo tumhare slcihr se ham par pari, ham tum par jhAr dete hain : magar yib jano, ki Khuda ki MdsbAhat tUTahAro tuunik ai bah

li; Maig tum se kahti Mrj, ki Us din Sadiim kd hdl us nhahr ki bania- bftt riyida ipihil bardfcbt. ke hogi!

13 Ai Kor&ziit, t-ujh jwr afsos ! Ai Baitnnida, tujli par afsoK ! kyiinki yib karji.ui:Ueij, jo uimliire darmiyan ili- khai payin, a^rar Siir o SaidA uien di- kbai jatin, to unbon ne tat orhke, aur khak mog baithke, kab ka ta'uba kiyi hotA.

14 Ma^ar Riir o Saidd ke liye tum- hiiri oi*b»1 'adalat men bardaaht kar- iib, :'u-,in hoga.

15 Aur,ai Kafarnilhtiin, tu jo&sruan

Vn kd manndi knrke phir

LU'QA', X. Ek shari'ahhin h'i sum'O.

tak pahunchAyd gayA hai, dozakh men ,ki hamesha ki zindagi ki waria

girAyA jin «A.

16 Jo tumhAri suntA, meri suntA hai ; aur jo tumben haqir jantA hai, mujhe haqir jAuta hai: aur Jo inujhe haqir jAntA hai, nse jia ne mujh ko bhejA hai, ha<|ir jAntA hai,

17 ^ We satUir khusJit ae phir Ake kahne lago, Ai Kliudawand, tere nani bo Bhayatln bh'i hamArc tahi'

18 Tab lis ne nn se kahA, Main nc Shaitan ku bijli ki mAnind Asman H girte dek ha.

19 Dckho, main ne tam ko sirap aur bicbehliii ke raundm; B»r, aur dusknian ki sari nudrat par, ikiitiyar diyA hai; aur koi kistf tarah tumben nuqsAn na pahunchawega.

W Mugar isi pmr khu.-di na bo ki nihen tumhire tahi' hain ; fetaJjtd \- liye klmshi karo, ki tumhare iiam tfmtm par likhe hain.

UI 1 Usi ghari Yiku' nc ji men khush hokn kahA, Ai BAp, tanin aur zaniin ko Kliudawand, main teri ta'rif kartA htm, ki tu ne in chiswn ku lianaon aur 'oiilniaiKlnn se chliipiiya,

£ar bachehon par zahir kiya : han, ai .ip, ki yiinhi lero huzur men pasan- dida hi'ii.

22 Aur mere BAp ne sab kuchb mujhe sorupA hai : aur koi nah i y JAntA ki Bela kaun hai.magar BAp; aur BAp kau n hai, magar Beta, aur wuh jin par Beti zAhir kiya cba'he.

23 1 Aur shAginhui ki taraf rniita- wajjih hoku mi se nirAle men kahA, Mubarak we Ankheii, jo yib chJUSD dekhtin, ki tura dekhte ho,

24 Kyunki iiiamtum se kabtA hun, ki Bahut se nabion aur badsluilmn m- chabA, ki jo tinn dekhte ho, dekheg, par na dekhi ; aur jo kuchb. sunte ho, HOMO, pai na sunA,

25 Aur, dekho, ek shari'at-sikhlAne- wAla uthfi, aur yih kahke tu ki :i/.- niAish ki, ki Ai ustad, main kva karun

91

26 Us ne use kahA, ki Shari'at men kyAlikhA hai? tii hiu tarah prirhtii hai?

27 Us no jawAb meri kahA, Tu Kliudawand ko, jo tera" Khuda hai, apne «Are dil, aur apni lari jan, aur apne sarezor, aur apni uari samaib se, piyar bar; aur jaiaA Ap ko, waiaa bi apne parosi ko.

28 Us ne use kahA, Tu ne thik jawab diyA: yihi kar, to iiogA.

29 Par us ne yih ehAhke ki apne ta,ir_ Hfetbic thahrAwu, Yisu' se kaiiA, ki MerA parosi kauu hai?

30 Yisii' no jawAb men kahA, ki Ek ehakhs Yarusalam se IrihA ko utar jAtA thA, aur dAktion men jA para. ; we use nangA aur ghAyal ka'rke idh-mflA

Ciuiul' i^iiye.

3 1 lttifaqan ek kAhin us rAh se ja niklA : aur us ko dekhke kiuAre se cbalA gayA.

32 Isi tarah ek Lewf bhi us jagah AyA, aur use dekhkar kinAre ne cbalA gayA.

88 Par ek musAfir SAmari wah Ari AyA, aur us ko deklike rahm kiyA,

34 Aur us ke pA« Ake us ke zakb- nion ko tel aur riai dhAlko bAnd'ha, aur apne jAtiwar pir' sawir karAke MarAe men Le gayA, aur us ki khabar- dAri ki.

35 Aur dusre din jab jAne lagA, do diuar nikalkar libat hiyaiv ku m;. ■.. t kahA, ki Is ki fchabardiri kar: aur jo kuobh is se ziyAda kiiarch hugA, main phir ake tujlie ada kunilai,

S6 Ab in tinon meo" se, us ka, jo dAkiion men ja parA thA, tu kis ko parosi jAntA hai?

37 Us ne kahA, Us ko, jis no us par rahm kiyA. Tab Yisu' ue use kahA, Jii, tu bhJ aisA hi kar.

38 1 Aur aba hiid, ki jab jAte the, wuh ek basti men paliuneliA : aur Martil» tiAme ek 'aurat ne use apne ghar men utara.

Du'a mtbngne fcd taur. LV QA', XI. Farmon par 'aib lagiuta,

39 Aur alariyam n;ime us ki ek uthkar uw n, i degii, mugar ua ki U-

hahin thi, jo Yisd* ke pdrwon ptelfiay&f kesahab uthega, aur jitni dar-

baithke uh ki kalam sunti tbi,

40 Bar Martlid ue, bfthut khidmat se ghabrai bui, ua ke pas fJse kflht, ki Ai Khudiwand, k ya tujha [mrwa B*- bin ki mari batin ne niujhe akela khidmat iiii-ri chliora hai? «b use kali, ki meri madad kara,

41 Tab Yiau' 06 jawab mon use kaha,Martha.aiMartha,tu bahul cMz- on ku wastenkrugbiibrahat meii had i

■lli Par ok dii/. >.aiiir bai : 60 Ma- riyam ne wuh achcidia hissa dunia bai, jo ua no uber liyd ua jaoga. XI BA'B.

AUR aisa bila, ki wuh pk jagah du'a uiangta tbi; jad mang chukd, ek 06 U» ki; slitigirdon. meij se us ko kahii, Ai Khudiwand, batu ko du'a mdngua siklia, jai.-a ki Viihauiia n+! apuc slidgiidi>9 ko sikhayi,

2 Us ue uu s- kaha, Jab tum du'a mango. Do kabo, Ai haiiiare Bap, jo Amnin par bal, 'i'ere dahi ki taqdis bo. Teri bibUhahat awe. Teri nmrad jaisi asman par, zaniin par bhi bat awr,

3 Hamari roz ki roti bar roz hamen de.

4 Aur hainure giuiahon ko bak bah ; kyiinki bam bhi bar ek ko, jo hamara «jarzdar hai, bakludite baui. Aur haiu- erj azmaish mag ua dai; baiki lima ko burai ae chhma.

R Ua ne un se kaha, Tura men, se kaun bal jia M ek dost ho, aur wuh adbi rdt ku us ke pas jake kabc, ki Ai dottj MUJhe titi reli ttdhirdo;

G Kyiinki mera dos t saiar h lririv nas liyi bai, aur nn?re pas kuchh ua- bin ki uh ke age rakkiin ;

7 Aur wuh andar sg jawab mej) k.'iiir, ki Hujhe taklif na de: ki ab daiwa/.a bumi hai, aur mere larke mere eatb btohhaune pai hiin ; main. uthkar tujbe do nahin sakta,

8 Main tum we kahta hiin, Agarcbi wub ii sabab ki wuh ua ka dost bai,

92

kar hai, use deua.

9 So main bhi tumben kabta hnn, Mango, to luTiiUoy diya jacgd ; dhiiu- dbo, to paoge ; kliatkbatao, to tum- barc liye k hobi jaega.

10 Kviiiski bar uk jo BtAogtfl' bai, Ifla hai; aur jo dhi'mdbt.-i hai, pita hai; aur jo khatkhatata hai, ua ke Uye kholdjaega.

11 Tuiu meu se kauu aisd bap bai, ki jab us k& bela roti mauge, use y&t- tharde? ya machhii mauge, macbbii k t' hadlc use aainp de ?

12 Ya agar anda mangu, ua ko bicli- '■liini de?

li Pas jab tum bure hokar apne larkon ko achchhi ehi'/.uii deno jante tto, to wuh Bap, jo asman par bal, kitna ziyada un ko, jo ua «e mangte hidu. Bab i Quds degi?

H 1 Aur wuh ek deo ko, jo gnnga tba, nU.il t a iba. Aur aisa hua, ki jab dco ujkal gaya, wuh gungdbola; aur logoii oe ta'aijuh kiya.

15 Par ba'/on ne un meij ue kahii, ki Wuh deiig ke nanlar Ua'al-Kabiib ki iiiaitaii ae di'oii ko nikdita bai.

IB Auroii ne azmaish ke liyc us se ek asiuaui uishdn matigi.

17 Par u» ne un ke kbiydlon ko jdnke uu kc kalid, ki Jo jo biidshabut apas men tnvrk tiildf holi, wirau lui jait hai; aur aisii. liar ok gbar jo apna barkbildl' bai, ujar jdtd hai,

la Pas agUMUnto apoe w khilaf ho jac, m n., ki badshdhat kyunkar qaim rtihegi ? kyiinki tum kahte bo. Main dcon ko Ba'al-Babiib ki madad

nikilta hdn.

19 Bliald, agar main deoaj ko Tta'al- stabiib ki madad sc uikalta luin, to tuinli.'irti bete kis ki madad se nikdlte

_f i» liye we hi tumhari Insaf karenye.

20B«r agar mam Khudi ki ungli we deoti ko uikalta hiin, to be-yhakk

w

UJUV, xr.

z&hiri UU,

Kliudtl ki baduhahat. tumhire pin 4- 32 Xinawah ko log 'adalat merj is

[Hkb<

21 J ab zorawi

pot ghar ki ehauki de, us ka mal b;ti'li;i rahta hai:

22 Par agar koi uh se zoriiwar us par charh awe, aur uao jlto, t» wuh sab hat'hyar, jin par us ka bharosa tba, ehhin letii hai, aur us ke kir. Ih mal ku baut deta hai.

23 Jo moro sath nahin, mera mu- kluilit" hai : aur jo nifire satu. jam'a ualiitj karti, so bithrata hai.

24 ..lab milisi k ruh admi se brihar nikalti, tfl siikhi jagahoij rnen aram dhuiniliti phirti ; aur jab uahin piti, kahti hai, ki Main anoa ghar ko, jis «f uikli lidn, phir jaiingi ;

25 Aur aku KM jhara aur lais pati

2fi Tab jak«i aur sat ruhen, jo uh se

W.ltar hain, apne sslih lili hai; aur

we us meii dakhil lioku wahaii hasti

hain: aur uh admi ka piuhhla hal

■ bur» linta hai.

27 Tf Aur aisa hiU, ki jab wuh yih bfttafl kahta vha, ok 'aurat ne bhir BMn ae pukarke use kaka, Mubarak hiti wuh pet, jis men tu raba, aur wuh eliliatian jo Mi ne pin.

28 Us'iie kaha, Hta, mubarak we hain Jo Khuda ka kalam sunte, aur use mante hain.

29 % Aur jab ban bhir hone lagi, us ne kahna shurii'kiya, ki Is «amani- ke log bure hain : we nkh&ii dhun- dhte hain ; par koi nishan un ko oiva na jaega, niaga r Ytinaa nabi ka nishan.

30 Ky utiki jaisa Yunus Nniawah ke logon ke liyc nishan htia, usi tarah lini l Adam bhi is zamane ke logon ke liye hogd.

31 'Adiilat tncrj dakkhin ki malika is zamami k* logon ke Raih ut.hegi,aur unhen gunahgar thabrawegi i kyunki wuh umfri ke kami re «e Sulaiman ki hikmat sunne ii ; aur, dekho, yahAn f- k La- ji> Sulaiman n& bara hai.

i»3

zamace ke logon ke sath nthengc, nur tebal halhyAr bau- ! unhen guunlig;ir thahriwengi;: kyi'mki unimu ne Ytinas ki mau Adi se tauba ki; aur, dekho, yahan Ydnas ah beri hai.

33 Koi chirag jalakc chliipe makan men, ya paimane tale, uahin raklna, baiki chiragdan par, ta ki andar jane- wale roshni dekhun,

84 Badan ka cliirag ankii hai : i* liye jab teri linkh achohhi hai, to teri sara badan nwhaa hai; aur jad bini hai, to tera badan bhi anilhera hai.

35 Pas khabardiir, liafi na ho, ki wuh mi r, ju tujh men hai, ti'uiki im jae.

36 So agar tera tamani badan man- au ho, aur kui 'azii andhera na rahe, to tamani tuhan hoga, Biaa ki jatM eidrafj apnt chamak nv tujlie roshau kare.

37 f Aur jab wuh liat karta tha, ek Farisi no usseilarkhwastki,ki merc «arh khiina bhaiye ; tud wuh andar jiike khiine bait ha.

38 Aur t'arisi ne yih dekhko ki us ne khine ke age nabin uahaya, ta'aj- jub kiya.

311 Par Khudawaiiil i»; at ko kaha, ki Ai Farihin, tum piyala aur rikabi ko tifiar se »Af karte ho; par Umihdni andar hit. aur bunii se bhara hai.

40 Ai n&dano, kya jis ne bahar ko lianaya, andar ko bhi na banftyi ?

41 l'as jo chi/.i'ti t.uinhare via ma> jud hain, un men M khair.it. kvo) aur, dekho, eab kuchli tumhare liye p&k hog&.

42 Par, ai Fari.sio, tum par afsos ! ki tum podinu, uur siuiali, aur har ek tarkari ki dahyaJri detrf ho, aur insaf aur Khuda ki nmhubbat ko tarah dete : ohahijnj tba, ki in ko karte, aur ud ko bM na chhone.

43 Ai Farisfo, tum par afsos! ki tum 'ib.adatkhanon men wnlr japah, aur bazaron men salam ko chihto ho,

Masih kd ta'lim dend, M log LU'QA

44 Ai riyakar faqlho, aur Farisio, tum |ia,ra(Mis! ki tum cbliipi gang

ki minimi ho,ki frlmf ju un parchalte hain nahin jaute.

45 <j Tab Hhari'at ke ftikldanewal- on men 86 ek nc us ke jawab men kalii, ki Ai Ustad, in bAtotj ke kahno se tii hainen bbi malamat karta ha:.

46 Us ne kaha, Ai shari'at ko sikh- lariflwalo, tum parafnoflI ki tam aise hojb, jin ka uthaiia niuahkil hai, nd- BUegm Udtaao, aur ap ok ungli se un bojhorj ko naluri eiduite.

47 Tum par afsosl ki tum nabion, ki qabrorj ko bansf.o ho, aur t umbar? bipaidorj ne un ko qatl kiya.

48 Pas tum apne bapdidon ke kam liar gawahi dete, aur us se rii/i ruhi. ■. kyiinki unhort ne un ko qatl kiya, aur tum un kf qabren banata bo.

49 Is liye Klinda ki hikmat ne bhi kflhd hai, ki Main nabion aur rasul t m ko un ke ])afl bhejfiriga : we un men se ba'zorj ko qatl kurerjge, aur sati- werjge:

50 Tft ki Bab nabion ka khi'in, jo duitya ke «huni' .se bahaya gaya, is zamani- ke logon se talab kiya jas:

51 ITabil ke khi'in se !eke Zakariyah ke khuu tak, jo qurbaugah aur haikal ka bich men mira (jaya : harj, main tmii sm kali*» hrin, ki ls h/ zamana ke logon se tulah kiya jaega.

52 Ai ahari'at kesikhlinewalo, tum par afaos i ki tum ne ma'rifat. ki kan- ji le li : tum ap dakhil na hue, aur daklii[ honewiion ko bbi nok rak ha.

63 Jad wuh yih haten un se kari raha tba, fiiqib aur Fanai DBB bc-tarah chimatne aur chhcrne lage, ki w uli bahut W-ten kue :

54 Aur ghat lagake talash men the, ki us ke munh Ke koi bit r>akar pawen, t» ki us par nallah karen. XII BA' U.

ITNE men hazarnrj admi ki bhlr jam'a hiii ; is tarah ki ek dtlsre ' par giri parui tha. * us ne bab se pahle 04 '

XII. rii/'ikdri st' r'f-uiko.s rahen. apne shagirdon se yili kahna" shurri' kiya, ki Farisiorj ke khaiuir so, jo riya hai, ehaukas nih o.

2 Kyuuki koi chiz dhanpi nahin, jo khul na jae ; aur na chhipi, jo jam na jae.

3 Ia liyo ki jo kuchh tum ne an- dhere men kaha hai, tmj41fl men su- naya jaega ; aur to kuchh tum ne ki'thrioii iih'B kanun kau kaha, koth- on par manadi kiya jaega.

4 Magar main tum se, jo tnere dost lio» kahtti hiin, ki Un se, jo badan ko qatl karte hain, aur ba'd uh ke kuchh aur kar nahin sakte, mat dam.

G I,ekiu inaiii tumben batata hiln, ki kis se dam: Uh sc daro, jia ko qatl karne ke ba'd ikutiyar hai ki jahan- uani men d;ile ; lian, maiti tumben kahta lu'm, ki Dai as dam.

tj Kya do paise par paneh gauriyii liahio "biktiij? par kihi ko un nien se Kbuila bhiila nahin.

7 Baiki tumharo sir ke sah hal bhi giue hain. Pas niat daro : tum bahut [liiuraiyi'Ti se bihtar ho.

8 Aur main tumben kahtS hurj, ki Jo koi admion ke a?e inera iqrar kare, Ibu i A 'dam bhi Khuda ke firishtcn ke age us ka iijrar karega:

9 Par jis ne admion ke age mera inkarkiya hai, KJnida ke firishion ke i'ige us ka inkar hogi.

10 Aur jo koi Ion i A'dam ke khi- laf koi bit kabe, us ko mu'aT hogi : par jis ne Ruh i Quds ke haqq men kulr kaha, m ko niu'af na hogi.

11 Aur jab we tura ko 'ibadatkhAn- on men, aur hakimon aur ikhtiyar- wilon ke pas le jaen, to Hkr na karo ki kaisa ya kya jawab doge, ya kya kahoge ;

12'Kyiirjki Rdh i Quds usi ghari tumben sikhawegi, ki kya kahni clia- hiyc.

13 % Aur bhir men se ek ne use kaha, ki Ai Ustad, mere bhai ae kah, k i Mujiie miras baut de.

Ldlach aur dunyAwi ckhan LU'QA't XII.

14 I'ar «s TiO ubc kfchi, ki Ai admi, kis ne mujlio tum par qa.zi ya ban$- newala muijarrar k iya ?

15 Aur ua nc un se kaha, ki Kha- bardir raho, aur lalach se kanam karo : kyiinki kisii ki zmdagi us ke mil ki ziy adati ae nahin.

1G Aur U« ne un se ek tamsil kuhi, ki Ek daulatmand ki kheti bahul lagi:

17 Wuh apne dil men sochks kah- ne laga, ki main kya karun, ki mere yaliaii jagah naliiu, jahag apna haail jam'a karun ?

IH Tali ua ne kaha. Main y ih kar- linga; ki apiii kothian dhauiiga, aur ban' bana&nga; aur wahari apua ta- mim hasil aur mal jam'a kaninga :

19 Aur apni jan se kabirnya, ki Ai jan, tere pas babu t «a mal barasuti ke liye jam'a hai; cbain kar, kba, jii, khush rah.

20 Magar Khuda ne ua»! kahi, Ai nadiii, isi rit teri jan tujh se ruang- enge : pas jo t\i no t&iyar kiva, kis ka liogi ?

21 Aisa bi wuh hai, jo apne liye khazana jam'a karta hai, aur Khudd ku liye daulat nahiri jam'a karta'.

22 T PMr un ne apno shagirdon se kaha, Is liye main tum m kahta hiin, lii Apni jan ke wasta tikr na karo, ki ham, kya khawyie; aur na badan ke liye, ki kva pahinotjgo.

23 Ki jan khurak se besh b badan posbak ae.

24 Kauwon ko dekho, ki na bote, na katte hain; aur na un ka khatta, na kuth i hai; taU bhi Khuda uuhen khilata hai : tum to chiriyog se kabin bibtar bo ?

25 Tum men ae kaun hai, ki fikr karke apni 'umr ko bath bhar barha sake :

2ti Pas jab itni chhoti bat nahin kar sakte, to kis liye baui chizon ki fikr katte bo ?

27 Soauun ko dekho, ki kis tarah

M fikr M Ubat. barhti hain : wena milinat kavti, u.i katti hain : par main tumben kahti biiii, ki Sulaiman bhi apni s:iri sbftn shaukat mes un men so ek ki ma- nind paliine na tha.

28 Jab Kliudaghasko.jo ajmaidan men hai, aur kal tam; r men jhouki

, aisa pahinata, to, ai kam-i'atiqa- do, kitna iiyada wuh tumben pahiu-i- wega?

29 Aur tum is ki dnryaft men na raho, ki ham kya khaenge, ya kya. pienge, aur na ghabrao.

30 Kyunki in sab chizon ki talilah uiya ke log karte hnin : par tumhari

Uap janta liai ki tum un ke imihtaj bo.

31 1 Baiki Khuda ki Mdshahat dhundho; ki tumben yu sab chissoft bhi milengi.

32 Aicbhutejhund,matdar; kyiin- ki tumhare BA p ko pasand dya ki badshahat tumben do,

33 Jo kuchh tumhdrd hai becho, aur kbaivat karo ; apne liye batuo jo puranu nahin bote, aur kba/.ana jo uabin ghatta, auman par, jahan chnr nawlik nahin atA, aur kira nahin kbi- t-d, jam'a karo.

34 Kyunki jahan tumbara khazana hai, wahin tumhiira dil bhi rabega.

35 Clianiye ki tumbdri kamar ban- dhi rabe, aur tumbara diya jalta rahe;

;16 Aur tum khud un (idmion ki maniud bo, jo apne khawitid ki rah dekhte hon, ki kab wuh ahadi men fo awe ; ta ki jab iwe, aur khatkhatawe, jhat us ke wiste darwaza khol den.

37 Mubarak hain wa uaukar, jin ko un kA khdwind ake jagta pavre: main tumben s:u'!t kihin fedn, ki Wuli ap kamar bandhke unhen kbann ko bithawega, aur pas ake un ki khidmat

k:lH/. L.

'66 Aur agar wuh duare palrnr, yA tisre pahar, awe, aur aiaa |«iwe, to mu- biiak iiain we uaukar.

Mwiki Hudimon LU'QA'

39 Yih tnm ku ma'lnm hai, ki agar ghar k i malik janta ki ehor Ha ghari iwegi, t<i jajrta ralita, aur &pne ghari mcTj sindh m&rne na dcta.

10 Pas tam bhi laiyar raho : ki ji« ghari tutn khiyal naiii'n karte, Ibn i A 'dam (iwcga.

41 ^ Tali Fatrus ne nse kaha, ki Ai Kiiudiiwaud, tii yili tamsil tam hi ■e kahta hai, ya Bab seV

■!'J Kiiuduwaud ne- kaha, Kaun hai wuh (liyanafalar ;iur d>i»a khansnmau. jin ko khawnnl apne uaukaron par iiiu.|arr;ir kare, ki mi ke bina ki roti Wiqt par diya kare ?

43 Mubarak lini wnh nauknr, Jise uh ka khawmd aku alga ki karte pawe.

■J4 Main tum m nch k:il i t:i lniij, ki wnh UH |jn N.ire mal pir mukhi&r karega.

j 5 l'ar agar wnh naukar apne (lil meg kaha, ki Sfara khaiviml ani; men di'i karta hai, aur <mliim lauiicliim ko mania, aur khana pilui, aur inusl houa slmni' kare ;

40 To us imukar ka khawind aisc din, ki wuh us ki rak na take, KUT ai.si gbtti, ki wnh na JanO, awegit aur us ko do tukre karke us ka hhwa Ire- inninoii ke nAlIi muqanar kurega.

-17 Par wuh uaiiktir, jin ne apne khawind ki outnsi jiini. pa apne l-u.in laiyar na raklui, aur us ki mur/i ko iiiiiwali'i na kiyil, bubut mar kh&tga.

Ih l'ar jis ne na jan&, aur mar khane ka kain kiya, tteori mar khae,- Ra. So jise bahut diya gaya, us se bahut hisab legjni aur jise bahut iiiyada soinpa gaya, us se /.iyada man- gB&ge<

4y 1 Main Barain par i? lasane ayi brirj ; aur main kya hi chahta lilin, ki Ug cfmki hoti !

00 l'ar mujhe iJc baptiuma rana hai : aur main kaisii tiing In'iii.jab tak ki pura ua ho 1

M Kya tum guman karte ho, ki main /amin par mol kivrwane aya| W

, xrrr. Mfl*%

lii'in? Naluri, main tatahan k*htii h lili, baiki juddt.

52 Kyiinki ab se ek ghar ke pdnch liilmi, tin do ke iiarkhilaf honge, aur do l.in k.'.

53 Aur Wp beto so, aur bel4 bdp se, anr uni. lili se, aur Mi ma P", mr sa-s bahu se, aur bthd eJbl M bnrkhilrif boaC

54 lf TJa ne lagcm «i yih bl.i kali;i, ki Jab turn hadli rnrh.'iiliim m; uthtt dekhtu ho, to jliat. kahte, ki Menh ata hai; aur aisa hi Imta.

55 Aur jab tum dukhte lio l;i ila- kldoi u!i:ilti hai, to kabtfl ho, ki Garuii hogi ; aur aisa hi hoti.

54 Ai riyakaro, tum lamin aur asmau ko imtiyiK karue iautuho; is zainane ko kyiin nalii[i iintiydz karte ?

57 Aur tum Ap hi kyrin. tiuhin thah- rate, ki ivajib kya luiiV

ii« T Aur jab tu apne mudda'i ka nftth hakim ke pas jiita hai, rah men kosiiish kar ki tu us se chlmniva \:\>- ; nisS. an hti, ki wuli tujlr ku hakim p&S kliimih lc jav, aur hakim tu'|li ko piya- d& k e luiiviilr kate, aur piyada tujli ku i|iiid men <l:Uo.

5!J Main tujh sc kahta li i'i n , ki Jab tak kaiiri kauri ada na kare, ivnliuij m

h;l obfaAtejga.

X1JI BAB,

U S wnqt ba'te hii/ir the, jo uw un Jalilion ki khulMir dete the, jin ka khun i'ilatus ne uu W ipiri-aiiiun ke siith mildya thd.

2 Yisii' ne nnhen jawab men kaha, K ya tum samsjlite h<>, k i ye Jah'H >iif- rlaliliim ^ Kiyilda ^iinah^ar the, ki aisa duk h paya?

.'! Miiiri tum se kahta hi'n>, Nahin : pai agar tum timba na karo, aab isi tatah iialak hoee.

4 Ya wo atharab, jin par Siloam men hurj gira, nur dab mare, kya smiajtite lio, ki we Taruaalam k<' sali rahntwalou ne tlyada giuinligar the?

u Main tum .-n.' kahta lnin, Nahin :

Anjir ke tfaraJeht !,-i faimtf. LU'QA', XIII. Khanlal ke dana H tnmsil.

par agar tauba na karo, tum sab isi tarah haldk hoge.

U 1 Aur us 11« yih tamsil kahi ; ki Kiai ke anjur ke hdg mori ek anjir kfi darakht la<;d thi : us ne ake us ka mewa dhundhd, par na paya.

7 Tab us ae bagbin ae kahd, Dekh, tin baras ae main ake is anjir ka phal dliuririhtd hun, par nahin pdtd: iisu kat rial ; kdhe ko zainin roke hai?

8 Us ne jawab men use kahd, Ai Khudawand, is sal aur use rahue de, ki us ke giril thald kltotlun, aur khad ddli'm :

9 Shiyad ki phale : iialsiii to, ba'd '.is k c kat daliyo.

10 Aur sabt ke din wuh ek 'ibiidal- khdne men ta'lim deta thd.

11 *$ Aur, dekho, ek 'aurat thi, jiM ko athdrah harus se kisi ruh ke ba'is kamzori htU, aur wuh kubri ho gayi thi, aur apne ta,fn inutluu, sidhi ua kar sakti tlii.

12 Y isu' ne use dekhke pos buldyd, aur us sc kahd, Ai 'aurat, tu apni kamzori se chhuti.

IS Aur ua ne apne hath uh par rakhe: wunhin sfdlii bo gayi, aur Khudd ki ta'rif karne lagi'.

14 Tab 'ibadalkhino kii sardar, is liye ki YisiV ne "sabt ke din changa k t ya, k ha fa, hiia, aur jawab deke loguii ko kahne la^d, Cliiia din bam jin nun kain kami rawa hai : pas un meii ake change ho, na ki sabt ke din.

15 Tab Khudawand ne use jawab men kahd, ki Ai riydkdr, kyd bar ek tum men se sabt ke din apne bail ain gadhe ko than se nahirj kholtd, aur pdui pildne nahin le jdtd ?

16 Pas kyd mundsib na thi, ki yih jo Abirahdm ki beti hai, jis ko Shaiiaii ne, dekho, atharah baras se bdndh rakhd thd, sabt ke din us band se chhurai ide?

hue: aur sari bhir \in jalil kartion se, jo us se hiie, khush bui.

18 t Phir'us ne kahd, Khudd ki bddslidhat kis ki manind hai? main use kis se uisbat diin?

19 Khardal ke ddna ki mdnind hai, jis ko ek idrai ne leke apne bdg men boyd; wuh ngd, aur baji per hnij aur ebiriyou ne us ki dalion par baserd kiyd.

20 Aur phir us ne kahd, Mu i u Khudd ki bddshdhat ko kis m nisbat d'un?

21 Wuh kharnirki manind hai, jjee ek 'aurat ne luke tin paimdna ate men mildya, yahdij lak ki wuh Bab kha- inii'd ho gayd.

22 Aur wuli Yariisalain ko jate hiie shahr sindir, gauw gdnw, phirke ta'- lim deta tlid.

23 Tab ek ne use kahd, Ai Khuda- wand, kyd thore hain, jo najat pdte? Us ne un se kahd, ki

21 ^ Jan ee koshish karo, ki tum tang darwdza se ddkhil bo: kydnki main tum se kanta hi'rn, ki bohutere chdhenge ki ua se dakhil hon, par na sakengo.

25 .lab ki gliar ke mdlik ne ut.hke darwdza band kiyd ho, aur tum biliar kliara boni, aur yih kalike daneaza khat.kiiatand abuto* karo, ki Ai Klni- ddwand, ai Klmdiiwatid, limnare liye khol ; wuh andar se jawab men tum se kahegd, ki Main tum ko nahin pah- chiluta, ki kah^ ke ho :

26 Tab tum kahne lagoge, ki Ham ne tere huzur khaya piya hai, aur lu nehurodrigali kuchonnicn ta'lim di hai.

27 Par wuh jawab degd, Maifl |l|hl ie kahta hiin, ki tum ko nahin pah- chdntd, ki kalian ke ho; ai badkaro, tum sab nuijh se dnr ho.

28 Wahdn nniii aur ddnt pisnd hopd, jab Abirahdm, aur Iz,biq, aur Ya'qub, aur sab nabfun ko Khudd ki bdilshiihat men slnimil, aur dp ko

17 Aur jad wuh \ ih baten kahtd hd, us ke sab mukiudii' sharminda bdhar nikalihud, uekht>g< 97

Yarumhim par

LU'QA', XIV.

:vha karno.

29 Aur log piirab, pachchhim, ut- tur, dakkbin se dwenge, aur Khtuld ki bdd^hdhat aien Iwiithesga.

30 Aur, dekho, jo pichhle hain. pahle horjge; aur jo pahlo hain, so pichhle bonge.

31 % L'si dlo hn'ze Fnriston ne dke use kaba, ki Kikal ja, aur yahan se rawdna bn: kyinkiHerodis tnjheoatl kiyaclialita hal

32 Ua ue mi so kaba, ki Jdke us Jomri ue kaho, ki Dekh, main shai- tanon kn uikiiltd huu, aur aj o kal cbanga kar rabi buQ, aur tisro diri apn:i. U:\rn pura kari'iijga.

33 Pas ninjho zarnr liai, ki Aj o ka.1 aur parson «air kanin : kytinki uahin ho Bukti, ki nabi Yarusalam ke babar balak b o.

34 Ai Yarunalam, ai Yarusalam, jo nabioTi ko qatl karti bai, aur uti ko, jo lorepas bhojo jiii>'c',par,tlirfti> karti bai : kai Mr main ne cbaba ki tere larkon ko jaina karun, jis tarah niurgi apne bacbohoTi ko apne paron. tale jam'a karti hai. par timi ne na chaha '

d5 Di-kho, tumbara ghar tumhire liye ujar ehbord jata bai : aur main tumben sach k'abta lunj, ki Mujh ko na uekbogc us waqt tak ki turn ka- boge, Mubarak hai wub jo Khudd- wand ke nam par ata bai.

XIV BA'R

A ISA' hild, ki wuh sabi ke din buzurg Farisi'un mcn se ek ke ghar kbane gayi, aur we us ki tak m e n t lu-.

2 Aur, dekho, ki ek shakhs us kn sambne thd, jiso jnlandhar tha.

3 Yisii' no jawab men shari'at ke siklldnewdlon aur Farision sg kaha, ki Sabt tte din cliauga kanta rawa bai, y i mihrri ?

4 We ohup rahe. Tab us nn uae pukarke changa kiya, aur dibor diya ;

f> Aur jawab mon un H kihfi, ki Tinn men ao kami hai, ki agar us ki W

gadlii ya bail kue men gire, «uh tut't sjiiit ke din us ko ua nikale?

6 We us ki in bdton kd jawab na de pakon.

7 1 Aur mihmaiion ko jab dekhd, ki we kyuykur sadr jagalien pasaud kartc liain, un se ek tamsil kahi, ki

8 Jab kol tujhe sliiidi men bulawo, uah ee nnche mat baith; ki shdyad tujh se bbi kisi bare ko buldyd ho ; ,

9 Aur jis no teri aur us ki inibindiii ki hai, dke tujh se kahe, ki Yih uh ko de; aur sharminda hoke tujb ko sab su niche baitbnd para.

10 Baiki "jab teri mil imani bo, sah ae nichi jagah baith; td ki jad wub, jis ne tujh ko buldya bai, awe, tujh ko kahe, ki Ai doflt, A, nnchi jagah batyh ; tab un ke aaumnc, jo tcro sitb kbaue baitke liaiti, teri "inzaX hogS.

11 Kyi'mki jo koi ap ko bara thak- rdta hai, cbhota kiyd jaegd; aur jo apuo ta,ig ohhotd tliabratd bai, bara kiyd jdega.

12 ^f Aur us ne apne mihmduddr se kaba, ki.Titb tudin kd, ydsbdm ka, kluiua laiyar karo, to apne dwtOfc yd. bhaion, yd rishtaddron, yd daulatmand parosioa komatbuld; tdua b" ki ws bh'i tujho buldvvon, aur tera badld ho jiii'.

13 Baiki jab tii ^iydfat kare, to

faribon, lanjuti, laugnm, andhon ko uli:"

14 Tab tii mubarak hoga; kyiirki un ke pas kucbh ualiin, ki tera badld. den : par tujhe rAstbd/.un ki uiydmat ruen badld diya jdegd.

15 Tf Aur ok ne un mcn ee, jokbdnc bait hw tho, yih sunko us s? kaha, MuMrak wub jo Kbudd ki bddshdhat nteji roti khdegd.

16 Aurusneusckabd.ki Kkshakhs nesbam ka bara khdnd taiydr karke babuton ko buliyd.

17 Aur khdnc ko waqt apue naukar ko bhejd, ki mihmdnon ko kahe, ki A'o ; ab sah kuetib taiydr bai.

Bare Ithdnii ki tamdl.

18 Is |>ar sablion ne milkar \t/.r karna ahunV kiyd. "Pahlo ne use ka- hd, ki Main ne ek khet kharidd hai ; Hrdt hai ki jake uso dckhiin; main teri minnut karia hiin, ki mori taraf 0 Nar kur.

19 Diisre no kahi, Main ne panch joribai! kharidi hain; jsitii hi'iii k i mu ko dzmdun; main teri minnat kartf hun, ki mere liye 'u/r kar.

20 Tisre ne'kahi, Main dc bydh kiyd hai, is sabab se nahin a sakta.

21 Pus uk naukar ne ake apue khu- ddwand ko in baton ki khabar ilf. Tab ghar ke milik no gussa hoko apnc uaukarse kaha, Jalil shahr be biziron aur galion meg ja, aur garibon, aur lunjon, aur laugron, aur amilum ko y aba n Id.

22 Naukar ne kaha, ki Ai kbudd- wand, jaisa ti uo farmdya-, hi'ii; tau bhi janah hai.

23 Khuddwand ne ub naukar pc kaha, ki Hahoii aur klict ke dandim ki taraf jd, aur jis tarah bane, logon ko ld, ki meri ghar bhar jdo.

21 Kyi'mki main tum m: kahtdhrin, ki Koi ihakbi uu men se, jo bulat) gaye, mera khana na diakhegd.

25 ^ Aur bahut loir, us ke sdth chale: aur us no pbirke un se kaha, ki

2fi Agar koi mere pAs Awe, aur ap- ne biip, aur mi, aur jon'i larke, aur bhai bahin, baiki apni jan ki dush- mani na kari), merd shdgird ho nahii sakti.

27 Aur jo apni salib uthdke mere nichhe nah i n ata, mera shdgird nahin lio nak i d.

28 Kyiinki tum men kaun hai, ki jad ek burj banaya chahe, pahle baith- kc kharch ki hisab na kare, ki mam un se taiyar kar ■afcdngd?

2'.> Aisd na ho, ki jad new dfi.li, taiyar na kar sak A, to jo log dekhen, ii8 par hnnsne lagen ;

30 Aur kahen, ki Is shakh: 99

LU'QA', XV. Kliai hui hlier ki tamfil.

ndna shuru' kiya, par taiyar :~:i kar

saka.

!l YA kami badshah dusrc Mdahah larai karne jae, jo baithke pahle

salah Dakaru, ki main dan lia/.ar admi.

ke sAtli, us se ki bis bazar ddmi leke

mnjh par dtd hai, mmpibala kar sa-

kungd? .

32 Kabin to, jad wnh hanoi*; d«r hai, paigdm bhejke silih, ko liye min- nat karegA.

33 8o Ui tarah jo koi tum men se apne ndremal bc kanai.i ua kua, mera ihdsrird nahin ko sakti.

31 T Namak achchhd hai : lekiu agar namak bigar jac, to kis ebi?. bq mu«ddr hogd?

35 Na zamin ko, na khad ke karn

kd hai; baiki use bahar plieiik dete

hain. Jia ko kin sunne ke hon, sune.

XV BA'B.

TAB sab maliRul-Iencwdle aur gu- nahgdr us ke ua^dik dte the, ki us ki sunitn.

2 Aur Fanai aur faqjh kurkurake kaht« the, ki Yili shakhs gunabgiron ko qabtil karta hjii, aur liu ke sath kh itii lial.

3 T 1'ab us ne un se yih tamsil kahi, ki

l Tam n i'.' n u kwm hai, jis ki> pa> sau bher hon, agar un men se ek kho j;ii>. ii(i iiiiiiinawr ko bayalmn men na clihore, aur us khoi hui ko, jali tak oa pdwe, dhiindhd na karc?

5 Aur pake khushi so apno kdnclho par utbi na le ?'

C Aur ghar meg jike dostog aur paroslon ko buldke na kahe, ki Meru sith khushi karo; kyunki main ne apni khoi bui bh« pil?

7 Main tum se kahtd bun, ki Is hi taur dsman men ek gunahgir ke wdsre, jo tauKa kartd hai, ninanawr> rfistbdzon se, jo tauba ki hijat nahin r.ikhtp, ziyada khushi bo^i.

8 K Ya kaun 'aurat. hai, jis pds das dirham hun, agar ek kho jai;, chira^

Musrif befe

LU'QA', XVI.

k i tamsil.

bdlke ghar ko na jhdre, aur jab tak tia pdwo, koshish n dhuiidha tia kare?

9 Aur jab pawo, doston aur (liirusion ko bulike na k&he, ki Mere sdth khoshl karo; ki main ne apni khoyi hud dirbjua piydV

10 Main tumhon kahti hun, ki Khudd ke firiehtoij ko Age ek guuali- gar ke liyo, jo tauba kartd hai, khushi hoti bai.

11 T Fhir us m kahA, Ek shakliB k o .l.i bc-te tb

12 Un men ae chhote ue bip se kahd, ki Ai bap, mal ki hissa, jo mujbe pahunchti bai, mujkc de. Ub no mil unhen bdnt diya.

13 Aur tliore din ba'd chliote bot.c ne sah kuchh jam'a karke ek dur ku milik ki nalar kiyi, aur wahdn apnd mil bad-chili men nrayA.

14 Aur jab sab kiiarch kar chuki, us mulk men bara lidi puri ; aur wuh muhtaj hone lagi.

16 Tab us nmlk ke ek ra,fs ku ya- han i;i laga ; ub ne use apne khetun m e n lillar «-'harane bhejd.

1~0 Aur uso drzn thi, ki un chhilkon se, jo suar kbatc hain, apni pct bhare : ki kol use na detd thd.

17 Tad liosli men dke kalia, Meru bap ke kitne inaniluron ko bah u t roti hai, aur main Muikhon marta Mti !

lfl Main nfliko apD*.' bap pds jaiin- gd, aur uso kalulngd, ki Ai bap, main ne iUrnaii ki aur fcero hazm guroili kiyi hai,

19 Aur ab htUiq nahin ki phir teri beta kalil&ug : mujbo apne mazdaron men se ek ki mdmnd bani.

20 Tab uthke apne bdp pas chala. Aur wuh ablii diir thi, ki us ko ikkh- ke ub ko bdp ko rahm .Iya, aur daurke us ko gale laga HyA, aur bahut diurai.

21 Bete n.) ua ko kalut, ki Ai bap, ne asman ki aur tere huziir

gundh kiyi, aur ah i.s qabil nahin ki phir tera beta kahliun.

22 Bdp ne apne naukaron ko kahd/sAradn uahin rah sakti. 100

ki Achchhi sc achcbhi poshdk nikdl Ido, aur use imhirino ; aur us ke hdth men augutbi, aur pari w. j m nienjuti:

23 Aur palo Me baehhro ko lak e zabh karo, ki khdeu, aur khushi nia- nacij :

24 Kyunki inerA yih beta nnia tha, ab jiyihai; khogayd thd, ab mila hai. Tab we khufilii karnc lugi:,

25 Aur ur ka Iwira beta kbet oicii Iba : jab ghnr ke na>idik Ayd, gdne aur ndchne ki awdK suni.

2G Tnb ek naiikar ko bulake pii- chhi, ki Yihkydhai?

27 Us ne uae kaha, ki Teri bbdi Ayd hai; aur tere Mp ne pald hui baelihni zabh kiyd hai, is liye ki use bhald changd pdva.

28 th na kbai'A holte na chdhd kt andar jae : tab us ko bdp ne bAhar Ake um: maudyd.

29 Us ue bdp se jawAb men kalid, Dekb, itnc baraa se main teri khidmat kartd him, aur kabbi tere hukrn ko barkhildf na chald : par tii ne kabhu ck bakri kd bacbcba majhe m diyd, ki apne dostoii ke sdih khushi nw- nAiiri :

30 Magar jab terA yih beti Ayd. jis ne terA uidl kasbion men uraya, tu ne ns ke liyo motd bachhrd zabh kiyd.

31 Us n© us ko kahd, Ai bet«, tu aadd more pds hai, aur jo kuchh merA hai, so terd hai.

Par khushi mandna, aur khush hond, liani thd ; kyunki teri yih bbdi mvlA thd, ho jivA hai, aur k&o gav;i thA, ab miU hal

XVI BA'B.

AUR ua ne aun.0 shagirdorj se bhi kahd, ki KUu daulatmand ki ek khAnsimin tha; jis ki togog ue ua so gila kiyd, ki yib UtA mal urati hai.

2 Tab us ne us ko buldko us se kahd, ki Kydnkar hud, ki main tere haqq men yih suntdbun? Apni khdn- Miimdui kd hisab do ; ki ah se tu khan-

Be-imdn naukar ki tamsil. LU'QA',

3 Us khausaiuiiu OS upno ji HMD fcahd, ki Kya kariin? kyunki mera mdlik khan=amdui mujh ue lc letd Ini; main khutl nahin wikta, nur bhikb mdngne sc mujbe sharm ati hai.

4 Ab jan gayi ki kya kartun, ta ki i«d khinsamini se chhut jiun, mujbe log apne gharon men rakherj.

5 Tab fljiuo 'iqi ke sah <iarzdaron men ae liar ok ko pas Imlako pB,h lu so pikhha, ki Tu kitni mera milik ka dharitd hai ?

6 Uh ne kahd, Sau paimann tel. Tab us ko kaba, ki Apui dastawez le, aur jaid baithke packis likh dc,

7 Pbirdusrcue kahi,Tu,kitlli dhar- itd hai ? Uh ne kaba, San paimaua

Selu'm. Uh k:ili;i, ki Ajini dattiwez ■, aur assi iikb dc.

8 Tab milik nc be-iman khansa- iiiau ki ta'rit' ki, is liye ki us na bosb,- yiri ki: kyiinki dnuya ke log apne waqt men nur ke (arzandon se bosh- yar haiii.

9 So main tum so knhta biin, ki ■'lu'. :iii daulat se apne liye dost pakla karo; ki jad tum jdtc raho, hameslia ke makinon men jagah den.

10 Jo nihayat thore men imdndar hai, so bahut men bhi iiuandir hai ; aur jo nihayat thoi-o uicii berfm&n liai, so bahut men bhi be-irnin hai.

11 Jab tuui jhiithi daulat mon [man- dar na ralie, to sachchi tuniheii kaun Ml|'i|]'l k;ir.-_;;i 'i

12 Aur jab tum begine ke mil meii unindar na rnbe, tu kaun wuh dega jo tumhari bi ho?

13 1 Koi naukar do khawimhm ki khidmat nahin. kur sakti: is liye ki ya ek ki dushmani karcgd, aur ddsru ki dosti ; yd ek ko tninegi, nur dusre ko na-chiz jinegd. Tum Khudd aur daulat donou ki khidmat nahin, kar sakte.

U Aur Farisi, jo daulat ko piyir karte the, in sab hiton ko sutike tbat- thc incn urine lage. 101

XVI. Mdlddr aur La'azar ki tamsil.

15 Tab 08 lio UU ku kaba, ki Tutu we ho, jo idmkm ke dge ip ko rdstbiz zihir karte baiu ; lekin Khudi tum- bire dil ki jiSnUi hai : kyunki jo ad- mion ki nazaroe men bara hai, Khuda ko dge makruh hai.

16 Shari'iit aur ambiyd Yilhanni tik the; tab se Khuda ki b&Uhaoat ki khushkhabari di jiti bai, aur bar ek eor marka ua men dakliil nota hai.

17 Para.sniauaurzaTulnki tal jana, shart'at ke ek nuqta ke mit jiuu sc, bahut dsilii bai.

18 Jo shakhs apui jord ko chbor di^, aurdtisri sc byab karu, ziuii kani hai : aur jo koi us 'aurat ko, ki chbor di gayi, bydhe, zina kari , i hai.

19 1 Ek daulatmand thi, jo lal aur iniliin kapro p:ibiutd, aur roz ruz sbiu o shaukat se 'aisb knrla tlia.

20 Aur La'azar Uanie ek girili ddnii, jo nasiir se bhara thd, jise us ki dew- rbi }iar dil jdto the;

21 Aur w uh drzii rakhtd thi ki un tukj-i.u h j" daulatmand ki roez m girte the, apui pot bbare : baiki kuli-.' ike us ko ghdo ch'atte the.

22 Aur ni^ii hmi, ki wuli garib mar gayi, aur ririshton ne usc lv jdke Abira- him ki god mon rakbi; aur daulat- mand bhi miid, aur giri gayi ;

23 Ua nc dozakh ku dai'iniyin 'azdb nun hokfl apui ankbi/n uthain, aur Abiraham ko dur se dekhd, aur us ki god mon La'azar ko.

24 Aur us ne pukarke kahi, ki Ai bdp Ahirahdm, mujli par raiim ka1, aur La'aaai ko bhej, ki apni imgli ki siri pini se bhigoke meri zubau thandi karo; kyunki main is lau men tarapti h uij.

25 Tab Abiraham dc kaba, ki Ai b te, yid kar ki lu apni licdaaf mag aohchhi chizyn le ehuki, aur La'azar buri chizon: so ab wub tasalil pita hai, aur tti taraptd hai.

26 Aur in sah ke alwi hamdre tumliire darmiyiu ek bani garlid dbari

I'mdn se iqtidar LTJ'QA'.

gaya hai : aM ki we jo yahan se tuiu- ' iidre piU jaya chahen, ria ja sakeu ; aur na we log jo wahdn hai n, is par h&marfl pas a sakfce.

27 Tab us ne kaha, Pas, ai bap, teri mirmat karta hiiii, ki tii use mere bap ke ghar bttej :

28 Kytinki mere p&nch blidi hain; tf ki un pai gawalii den, aisa na lio ki we bhi is 'azab ki jabali mcij awen.

29 Abinihdni ne ukc kaba, ki Un ke iids Musa aur ambiya hain ; chd- iiiye ki we uu ki suncn.

30 L'a nu kahd, Xaliin, ai bap Abi- raham; par agar koi murdon m un ke pas jde, we tfi.uba karenge,

31 Ua ne uso kaha, ki.lab we Musa aur nabion ki na warta, to agar mur- don rueg se koi uthe, to us ki na ininerige,

XVII ItA'R

PTITR 08 ne shdgirdon se kahd, Yih naliin bo sakta ki tbokar khil- dnew&li chizen na dwey : par afaos us par, jis ke ku bab aweij !

2 Aaar chakki kd pat us ke gale rucn bandhd buta, aur w uli samuudar men phenkd jata, to yih us ke [iye un se bibtar bota, ki wuh ek ko in chhot- oq men se thokar khikiwe,

if ^ Khabardar raho: agar tera lihai tera gunah karc, use &&a{ ; agar taiiba kare, hbc mu'af kar.

4 Aur agar ek dia men stit har tera guuah kari', aur ek <lin men sdt bar aku kahe, ki Tauba kartd huti ; use iim'Af kar.

5 Tab rosulon n e Khudawaiid se kahd, Haiuara iman ziyada kar.

6 Kbuddwand ne kaba, ki Agar tim men kbaruiil ko ddua ke barabar iradn ho, to jab tum is tiit ke darakht ko kaho, ki Jar se ukharke darya men lag ja, to turatidri manegt

7 Aur tum meg se kauu hai, jis ka ik naukar bal jote, yd uharwahl kare, jab khet se dwe, uao kahe, ki Jald a, aur khdoe bakh?

102

XVII. jokotd.

8 Aur we na kahe, ki Mera aham ka khaua taiyar kar, aur jab tak k hina piiin kamar bdndhke mari khidmat kar ; ba'd u» ke tu Ap kha pi 'i

9 Kya wuh us naukar ka, ihsan manta hai, ki jo kam us ne fanude tbe, kiyo ? main. jantd hitn, nahig.

10 Iai tarah tum bhi, jabsab kuchh jo tumhdro liyo farmaya gaya, kar chuke, to kaho, ki Ham niKMHTUf bunda fiaiii ; kyririki jo ham par karri.i wajib tha, wuhi kiya.

i I \ Aur aisd tnia, ki jab Yanisa- lam ko jatd thd, Samariya aur Jalil ke bich se guzra.

12 Ain ek basti men jite hiie daa korhi use mite, jo diir khare tlie :

13 Unhon ne chilidko koha, ki Ai Yiad', ai sahih, ham par rahm kar.

14 Ua ne dekhke uuberj knlid, ki Jake apne ta.iij kahinon ko dikhao. Aur aisa hua, ki we jate hue pdk sal' ho gaye,

15 Aurek ne un men sejab dekhd ki changa hiid.bari awaz se KhuuYi ki ta'rif kartd hiia phird,

16 Aurniuiih ke lihai Yi.-u'i'ke pdn- won pdB girke un ka shukr kiyd : aur wuh Samari tha.

17 Tab Yhiu' ne jftwib men kaha, ki Kyd dasog pak sdf »a hiie? phir we nau kalian liuiu?

18 Kyd siwa is pardesi ke koi na mild, ki phirke Khudd ki ta'rif karo?

19 Aur use kahd, Uthke rawana ho : tero iman ne tujhe bachdyd.

20 K' Aur jab Farision ne ub ee piloiiha, ki Khu-M ki bidahdaat kab awegi? ua ne jawab men un se kahd, ki Khuda ki batUlidhat lumuld ke adth nahin Ati :

21 Aur we na kahengo, ki dekho yahin! yddekho wahaii hai ! kyi'mki, dekho, Kliud.i ki badbhahat tumhare diirniiyaii hai.

22 Aur tihigirdon se kaha, We din jab arzii karoge, ki Ion i

Khudd H hdihltdhid kibdhat. LU'QA', A'dam ke dinon uien se ek ko doklio, aur na dekhoge.

23 Aur we tmn ko kabenge, ki De- kho yah&n, y», doklio wahdn hai : tutn mat niklo, aur pichhe na jdo.

24 Kyunki jaisa bijli, jo AsmAn ki ek taraf se kaundhkc luari taraf cha- inakti hai, waisd )ii Iba i A'dain bhi apne din inen hoga.

25 Lekin pahle zarur hai ki wuh bahut dukh ufhdwc, aur is zamane ke logon ao radd kiya jawe.

2b' Aur jaisd ki Nuh ke dinon men hiia, isi tarah Ibu i A'darn ke dinon mori bhi kogd,

27 Ki log khdte, pite, byah karte, bydhe jdte the, us ain tak ki Nuh Uabtl mag gaya, aur tdlau ue dko sab ko barbdd kiya.

28 Aurjaisaki Ldt ke dinun incn hiid, ki log k bata, pita, aur kharid GWofcht karte, aur pef lagate aur ghar bsnata the ;

29 Far jis din ki Lut Sadum n nikld, ag aur gandhak ne daruan se b:irn-skc sah ku barbad kiya ;

30 So isi tarah hogd, jis din ki Ibu i A'dam zAbir hogd.

31 Us din wuh jo kutim par bu. aur us ki asbab ghar mcn, IW ke leue ke waste nlche na aive ; aur jo khet uien lu.), waisd hi pichhe ua phiri

■V2 Nih ki juru ko ydd karo.

88 .1" ihfcfhi cbiihu ki apni jAn , use khoegd ; aur jo shakli apni jau khowe, use bacbdwegd.

'H Aur main lum se kanta-' hurj, ki Us rat do admi ek lii miang par bOfigB ; ek pakra, dusra chlii'ra JAegi.

35 Aur do 'auraten, jo ek sdth chakki piati hongi ; ek pakri, ddsri ehbori jacgi.

36' Ain- do Admi", jo khct men honge ek prikni, dusra chhora jaega.

37 Onhon no jawab men use kahA, ki Ai Khudawand, kalian ? TJa nc un IB kahd, Jahdn ki murda hai, giddli wabin jam'a honge. 103

XVIII. .Ifutatj&zi bewa ki hahaU

XVIII BA'B.

P HIU us ne, is liye ki un ko liamt- sha du'd rneg lage rahna, aur susti na karai zariir hai, ek tamsil kahi, ki

2 Kisu shabr men ek qdz.i thd, jo na Khudd ae dartd, aur ua lidrui ki kuohh parwd rakhtd :

3 Aur uni shahr men ek bewa thi, ,o us ke pas ati aur use yih kahti thi, ki Mere dushman ke hath se uitrd inadf Iur.

4 Us ne kuchh din na clidhd: lekin piclihe apue ji men kabd, ki Harchaud main na Khudd se darta, «ur na admi ki kuchh parwd rakhtd;

5 Tau bhi is liye ki yih hewa mu- jhe bahut satati hai, us kd insaf kar- ungii; aitid na ho, ki wuh bahut dne sc akhir ko merd dimdg khrt.li karo.

b' Khuddwand ne farmaya, ki Sunn, jo kuchh is be-insdf <\rt,zi no kahd.

7 Pas kyd Khudd apne bargualda logon kd, jo rdt din us se farydd karti.', iusdf na karegd? kyd un ke waste dtr karegd ?

8 Main tuui se kahtd hun, ki Wuh jald un kd iLsaf karegd ; magar kya Ibu i A'dam ake zanuu par iman piweg*?

9 ^i Phir us ne un se, jo apne upar bharosd rakhte the ki raathaz hain, lekin auron ko ndchiz jaute the yih tamsil kahi, ki

10 Do sbakhs hsikal mcn du'a nadugue gaye; ek Fami, diisrd raah- sul-lenowdld.

11 Farisi alag khard hoke yiin du'a rudugtd tha, ki Ai Khudd, main tera shukr kartii, ki auron ki nianiml lutora, Kdlira, Kindkdr, yd jaisd yih raahsul-lonewAId hai, nahin lum,

12 Main nafta rucn do bar roza rakhtd, aur main apne sare mAl ki dahyaki detd hiin-

13 Piir uh mahstil-Iuiiewillo ne dor .se khard hoke itna bhi na chdlid ki |dsmau ki taraf dnkh uthiwe, baiki

Ek amir ke suwdl LU'QA'

diliati jiiltS.aur kahtA ihii, ki Ai Khu- d;i, rnnjli gunahgaf pan ralun kar.

14 Main tum so kahta min, Yili shakhs dusre se rtbtbd/. thaharke apne ghar gaya: kyunki jo ap ko bard thahrdtd hai, cuhotd kiyri jdega; aur jo apne ta.in chhotd tlialiratd hai, baja kiya jauga.

15 Phir we chliote In.jknn ko us ke pds Ua, ki un ko chhtie :'par shdgirdon ue dek h ke un ko ddntA.

1G Magar Yisu' ne baclidion ko pas buMke katai, ki Lajkoji ko mm jias dne do, aur unhon mana u» kun»: kyiinki Khudd kl badskdhnt aisog hi k i hai.

17 Main tum se sacb kahid hiin, ki .lu koi h'hud» Vi btdiMhat ku ohnofe larfcfl i;i mdnind uabul nahin kavta, us i'jcn kabhu dakbil na hogd.

18 Aur ek sardar ne us Be puekha, Ai uek ustad, main kyd karun ki liameshn ki zitukiiii ka waris b.oun?

1!) Yisu' ne us ko kahd, Tu kyihi uiujU ko Dek kahtd hai? koi nekj iialitn, magar t'k, ya'ne Khudd.

20 Tu lmkmon kojdntd hai, kiZind; na kar, Qatl na kar, Ohori na kar,. ,llii'it.ki gav&hi na de, Apne bdp aur Kpai nid ki 'iazat kar.

21 Us ne kahd, Yih sab iarakpui m niiiiii iiuiiitd dyd.

22 Yi*u' no yili sunkar use kahd, Tiiu nhi tujh ko ek chiz baqi hai : sab kuohfa Jo d-rd liai beoh, MB garibori ko bdnt do, to dsmin men tere iiye khazdtia hogd: aur dkar nieri pairaui kar.

28 Wuh yib suaka bahut gamgin hiid, kyiinki bara daulatniand thd.

24 Yifid' ne us ko bahut gamgin dekhkar kahd, ki Un ko, jo bahut mdl raklirc liain, Khudd ki bauskdbat men ddkliil hond kabid muahkil hai!

2fi Kyiinki unt kd siii ke ndke meij no gu/ar jdnd us se dsdn hai, ki koi lianlatinand Khudd ki bddsbdhat men dakbil lio. 104

XVIII. kd jawab.

liC Aur jinhon, ne yih sund, kahd. Pas kaun nujdt pd saktd liai?

27 Us ne kahd, Jo insdn ko nazdik r i ;i - 1 1 1 ii a i j U i ii hai, Khudd ke nazdik lnutukin hai.

28 Tab Patms ne kahd, Dekh, hmn ne sab kuchh cbhord, aur teri pairaui kf.

29 Us ne un se kahd, Main tum se sach kahtd liun, ki Koi nahin, jis ne gbar, yd md bdp, yd bhdion, yd jorfi, ya larkoG ko, Khudd ki bddshdhat ke wdste chlior diya bal,

30 Ki is zamdne men us se kabin ziydda na pawe, ain- uh jaluin mag hamesha ki /indagi,

31 T[ Aur us ne barahoij ko sdth leke nu se kaha, ki Dokho, ham Yani- salam ko jdte kain, aur sah ,ji> imbiur, ki ma'rifat Ibu i A'dam ke haqq men liklid hai, piird hogd.

82 Kyi'mki wojh gair-([aumwaion ke hawalit Iciyd jaega, aur we us ko thatthe men uriwenge, aur he-'izzat kaicnge, aur ua par thiikenge :

33 Aur ua ko kore mdrke qatl kaienni aur wuh tisre diuji uthegd.

34 Lekiu uuhon ue un men se koi bit na saiujhi : aur yih kaldm un par obbjpfi rabd, aur in baton kd matlab zarra un ki saumjh men na dya.

35 % Phir aisd hud, ki jab wuh Yarihu ko nazdik dyd, ok andbd rdh par baithd bldkh mdngtd thd :

36 Us no jdneivdlon kd shor sunke ptichhd, ki kyd hai?

37 Tab unlion ne usc kahd, ki Yisu' Nlsari jatd hai.

::n Us ne pukarko kahd, Ai Yisu', lbn i Ddi'id, mujli par t-ahm kar.

39 Unhon ne jo age jdte the, us ko ddntd, ki cliup rah : par wuh aur bhi diiliaya, ki Ai lbn i Ddtid, inujh par rahiu kar.

40 Tab Yisu' ne thaharkft farmdyd, ki Us ko mcro pds'ldo. Jab nazdik dyd, us ne ub se puehhd,

41 Tii kyd chdbta hai, ki main tere

m/i Znkki khiraj'ijii-

LU'OA'. XIX.

ke{fharjiU<r.

i:.'in? Uh ne kahd, Ai Khu- . iwiiiifl, yih, ki mujl.i: d 11 klien mil.']].

42 V isu' ne us eo kahd, ki Phir iiin;i lio: tere iuidn nc tujhe changi kiyd.

43 Wuli uh! dam dekhne lagi, aur Klunid ki tn'rif knri-d hiid ub ke

Sichhe chala. Aur sah logon ne ckhkc Khudd ki ta'rif ki. XIX KAU.

AUR wuh Yarihn inen hoke jdtd tha.

2 Aur, dekho, Zakkf udine ek mard ne, jo mahsu l-l«uewdlon k& sardar aur daalatnuDd tha,

3 (.'halia ki Yisu' ko dekhe, ki j dawand, tori mind kaun hai; lekin bhir ke eabab dekh'kin. na saka, kyiinki nati tha.

4 Tab dge daurku ek gdlar ko per l>ar ckarh gayd, ki use d>-khe : kydnki wuh usi lah se jdue ko tha.

5 Jab Yisii' ua jagah pahunchd, «pai1 nigdh ki, aur use dekhke us se kahd, Ai Zakki, jald utar d ; kyunki aj mujho tere ghar rahrid zarur hai.

6 Tab us ne jald utarke khushi se us ko (jabdl kiyd.

7 Jab sabliog ne yih dekhd, kur- kurdke kahd, kfWuh ek guuakgdr ke yafidn ja utrd hai.

8 Par Zakki no khare hoke Khudd- wand sa kahd, Dekh, ai Khuddwand, main apni adhd mdl gari'bon ko <lota biig, aur agar kisi ka kuchh dagabaid Be fiyd hai, ub ka ck&uguna detil lu'in.

9 Tab Yisu' ne us ko kahd, ki A'j ib ghar mon najdt di, is liye ki yih bhi Abimliani ka betd hai.

10 Kyiiiiki Ibu i A' dam dya hai, ki kboe hue ko dhiindhe aur bochdwo.

11 T Aur jab w'cyiheun rahe the, ua ne, is liye ki Yariisalam ke nazdik llia, aur we khivdl karte the ki Khudd ki badfihdhat ablii sihir hnd clidhti hai, ek tamsil bhi kahi ;

12 Aur yun kahd, ki Ek amfr dur ke miilk ko chald, td ki apne liye bddahdhi leke phir dwe,

105

13 Us ne apne naukaron roen se dus ko bulake dua niind uu ko din, aur uri se kahd, ki Mere phir dne tak hyohar karo.

14 Lekin ub ke shahr ko ddrai us se dustnnani rakhte the; aur us ke pichhe payam bhejko kahd, ki Ham nahin cha'hte ki yih ham. par bdd- sbdhat kari:.

15 Aur yun hi'iti, ki jad wuh bdd- shdhi leke phir dya, i n naukaror, ko, jinhen riipiya Bonipc the, bula bhcja, ki jane ki har ek nc kaiad byohar kiyd.

Iti Tab pahle ne ake kahd, Ai klm- das mind paida

Us ne uae kahd, Shdbdsh, ai achchhe taukar ; 'm liye ki balmt thora mcii t& fmdnddr nikld, ab ti'i das shai'ir par ikhtiyar rak h.

18 Aur dusre ne dko kahd, Ai khu- ddwand, teri mind ne piiich mind ] liiiihi kin.

19 Us ne uso bhi kahi, Tn bhi pduch ahahr kd sarddr ho.

20 Tiat» ne dk« kahd, Ai khudi- wand, dekh apni udna, jis ko iiuun uu riiindt mun bdndh rakhd hai :

21 Kyt'mki main tujb «e dartd thi, ki lu sakht adu ii hai ; ki t u leta liai jo nahin rakhd, aur kdttd hai jo nahin boyd.

22 Us ne use kahd, Ai namak-ba- rdm naukar, main tujb ko tere hi nmuh se qdil kitrta hiin. Jab tii nc jaiia ki main sakht admi lnin, aur jo nahin, rakhd, letd, aur jo nabib boyd, kdttd h tiii ;

23 To mere rfipiyoc ko sairdf ki kothi inon kyiin ua rakhd, ki main dke use siid «ainct letd ?

24 Tab us uo un se, jo us ke psa khare llie, kahd, ki Wuh miud us se lu, aur das luiudwalo ko do.

25 (Tad uuhon no use kahd, Ai Khuddwand, us ke pas dua miud to haiii.)

J/W/i hi nawiir JtoJce LTJ'QA', XX. Tarumlam mtn ddkhil Jioita-

20 Is liyc main tum se kahta hiiij,jMain tutu se knhti h6n, ki Agar ye ki Jib ke pds bal, ue ko diyd JAagst j chup rabun, to MtthWelulUegge,

r jis ke uahin, us se wuh blii jo us ke paa hai, h liyi jaega.

Ii7 Pnr ttWt 6B1 'lnsliTujinoTi ku, jinhon ne na chdhd ki main mi par hadsh&hi karun, yaliin lao, aur nuere tjmfciw qntl karo.

2* K Aur jab yih balenkah chuka, £ga hirlike Yanisalam ki taraf eh a la.

29 A.ur aisd hrta, ki jab Baitfaga aur Bail'aniya ke ntfdfk us patuk ke pas, jo Zaituni kahldta hai, aya, apne shik'irdon men w do ko yih kahke bheja, ki"

30 Sarahce ki basti nicu jao ; aur us men ihikliil hote hue «k gadhi ki baclicha liaudha paoge, jis par kabin kuiddmi sawarnahin rifii : use kliolke lao.

31 Aur agar koi tum ao puchho, ki Kyi.;n kbolte ho? use yiin kahu, ki Yih Khudawaud ko darkar hai,

32 Su bhcje hi'ioc nejake, jaiaa us ue un sci kaha, waisa hi paya.

33 Aur jab gadhe ka baoheha khol- ne lage, us ke inalikoii ue un bu kaha, ki Is bactiche ko kyuu kholte ho?

34 Unhon ne kaki, ki Kbudawand ko darkar hai.

35 Aur wo us ko Yibu' ke pas lae : tiur apno kapra us bacbcbe par bi- ihliike YisiV ko sawar kiya,

36 Jab jaid tha, unhon do apne kapre nih mvn biohiae.

37 Aur jab wuh mudik, baiki Zaitun ko pabdr ki utdr par pahunehd, us ke sbdgirdon ki sari jama'at sab kardinal* m ke sabab, jo dekhi thin, khush hokc bulaud awaz se Khuda ki ta-'rif karoe lagi ; ki

38 Mubarak hai wuh badshah, k Khuda wand ke ndm si.' ata hai : asman [Hir sulh, aur 'diam i bala men. jaldl,

39 Aur us bhir mori se ba'/e Farisf- on ne use kaha, ki Ai ustad, apue shd- gfrdon ko dant.

40 Um nu jawjib men ira se kaha,

ioti

■1 1 1 Aur jab mudik like sbahr ko dekha, us par roya,

42 Aur kaha, Kash ki tii apne isi din men im liaton ko, jo teri salamati ki hain, janta 1 par ab wo teri aakhon ao cKhipi hain.

43 Kyiinki we din tujh par dweTige, ki tere dublnuau tere gird niorcha lii'unllike, aur charon or gherke, tujhe sab taraf «e tBEts kareu-^c,

44 Aur tujh lio, aur tere larkon ko, Jo tujh men hain, kliiik men miia- wengu ; aur we tujh mcii patthar po jiatthar na clihorenge ; is liye ki tu ne us ivaipi ko, ki tujTi par nigah thi, na pahcliaua.

45 Tab haikal men jaku unben, jo us meg bechteHur kharidte tlic, nil;:ti ue laga ;

4G Aur fin se kaha, I.iklt.-i hai, ki Mera gliar 'ibadat ka ghar hai ; pir tum ne us ko cborou kd khoh banaya.

47 Aur wuh har roz haikal men ta'lim deta tha, Magar sardar kdhin, aur faqih, aur qaum ke aardir, chahte the ki us ko ii«tl kareg,

48 Par yih karae ki koi tadbir na pdte the ; kyunki sab log us ki suuno ke liye us se lage rahe.

X£ BA' B.

AUK iinhin dinon men ek din, jab wuh haikal men logon ko ta'lim aur khush-khabari duta tha, aiaa hua, ki sardar kahiii aur faqil), buzurgon ko sath, us ke pas a khai'e huc ;

2 Aur kuline lage, ki Uam m kah, tii kis ikhtiyar se yih kartd hai? aur kauii hai, jb no tujh ko yih ikhtiyar diya ?

3 Us ne unhen jawdb men kaha, ki Main bin tum bo ek bdt piichhta hun ; mujli sekaho;

-i Yiihannd kd baptiama aemdn se tha., ya lUlmion seV 5 Uuhon nu Apas men salib ki, ki

Tdkittdn H tamsil. LIJ'QA'

Al'ilt ham kahen, A'srnan se ; to wnhi ittuveeft, l'hir timi ne uso ky&n mi mana 't

'j Aur agar ham kahen, ki A'dmioa se; to sab lo^ ha.ni par patthrau kar- fflge: kyunki unheri yaijiu hai, ki Yuhanud nabi thd.

7 Tab unhon ne jawdb diya, ki ham nahin jantu, ki kahan se thd.

6 Yisfi' ue u» ko kaha, Main biii tum se nahin kahtii, ki yih kis ikhti- ydr se kuda lilin.

y 5" l'hir wah logon se yib tamsil kabnu laga ; ki Kisi shakhs nt ek an- giir k» bag lagake use bdgbduon ke HUpurd kiyd, aur wuddat tak pardes men ja raba.

10 Aur maushtt par ek nauknr ko baghaiion ku pas bheja, td ki we us angiir ke bag ka phal us ku den ; lekin b£gbaBQB ne ua ko pitko khali hati;

pii,:i-d.

11 Pkir us ne di'isrc otoku ku bbeji ; iinhon ne us ko bhi pitke, aur be-'izzat karke, khdli hdth pnerd.

12 Kiir us ne tisre ko bhejd ; un- hon ue gbiiyul karke us ko bhi nikal diva.

13 Tab us bdg ke mdlik ne kaha, ki Kya kariiij? main apno piyare bete ku lilujiinga: shdyad use dekhkardab i.i'-ij.

14 Jab bdgbdnon ne uhc dekha, fcpU mq) salah ki, aur kaha, ki Vih waris hai : do, us ku mdr dalen, ki Mnv:is imuijri ho jae.

15 Tab us ko bag ke bahar nikalke mdr d.ilii. Ab bag ka malik uu ko satu kya karegi?

18 wuh dwega, aur un bagbanon ko qatl karegd, aur bag auron ko som- poga. Unhon ne yih sunku kahd, Aisd na howe.

17 Tab ub ne un ki taraf dekhke kaha, Phir wuh kya hai, jo likha hai, ki Wuh pattltar ji»e raj^inm ne radd kiyd, mifci kone ka Kira hud?

18 liar ck jo us patthar par giru,

107

', XX. Qai&ar ko jizyt dtme ki bibit. chur hoga ; aur jis par wuh gire, use pis dalega.

19 ^ Tab earddr kahiuon aur faqi- hon ne cbdha, ki uni wnqt us par hdth dalcn ; par logon ee dare, kyiinki jdiid ki yih tamsil unhin ke liaiju. men kahi.

20 Aur us ki tak men the, aur un- hon nc kai jasuson ko bhejd, ki rast- ba>.on ka bhes ikhtiyir karke uh ki koi bat pakar pdwen, wi ki us ko hakim ke ^abzaoikhtiyarnjeit haivalakarcn.

21 Tab unhon ne uh se piichlia, ki Ai Ustad, ham jdnte hain ki tu du- rust kahtd aur sikhatd hai, aur zdhir uar nazar nahin karta, baiki sachdi se Khudd ki nih batara hai :

22 Hamen Qaisar ko jizya dena rawa hai, ki aahin ?

23 Par us ne un ki dagftbdzi daryaft karke un se kaha, ki Mujh ko kydii daiuato ho ?

24 Ek dinar mujhe dikbdo. U» par kis ki surat aur sikka hai? Unhou ne us ke jawab men kahd, Qainar ka."

25 Tab us ue uu se kaha, Pas jo (Jaisar kd hai, Qaisar ko do, aur jy iylmdd kd hai, Khudd ko.

20 Aur we logon ke dge us ki bat pakar na saken : aur us ke jawab «e ta'ajjub karke chup ho rahe.

27 1 Tab Sadnqiog meg se, jo qi- yamat kd inkdr karte, ba'eofl nc jhU ake us ae yih kahke piichlia, ki

28 Ai Usidd, Miisd ne hamilre liye likhd hai, ki Agar kisd kd bhdijuru (.■hhorkc mar jde, aur wuh be-auldd mar jae, to \w ka bhai tu kl joni ku iewe, aui1 apuo bhdi ke liye nasi qdim kare.

20 Ab sdt bhai the : pahlii, joni karke be-auldd mar gayd.

30 Tab dusre ne us 'aurat ko liyii, aur w uli l.ilii be-aulid mnd.

31 Tisre ne us ko liyd ; isi tarah un sdton nc; aur sah be-auldd mue.

Aur sab ke ba'd wuh 'aurat bhi

33 Pas ojydinat mcti un men se

Qii/amat ki babat. LU'QA'

wuh kis ki jorfi kogi? kyunki w uh sdton ki y>vn tlii.

34~ Y isu' uc jawlb men un se kaha, ki Is jahin ke log bydh karte, aur bydhe jitu hairi.

35 Lekin io log ns janin ke aur uiyimat ku shar'tk hone ke ldiq Jhn- harfe, lia bydh karte hain., aur ua bydbo jdtc ;

36 Phir nahin marnc ke: kyunki wo (irishton ki manind haijt; aur qiyamat ku bete lioku Khuda ke bete hain,

37 Aur murdon ke ji uthne par Miiwa ne bbi jliari ke ahwdl ke bayan iii.n Lahan kiya ; chuiianchi Khudd- wnml ko Al'imliiiin kd Khuda, aur Iz,- haq kd Khuda, aur Ya'uub kd Khuda kalita hai.

38 Lekin Khuda murdorj ka Khu- da nahin, baiki zindon kd hai : ki sab us ke pda zinda hain.

30 f Tab ba'zc fiuphon ne jawab men use kabi, ki Ai Uetdd, tii ne kluili farindyd.

40 lia'd us ko kian kd hiwdo na pari ki us «o kuchh piichhe,

41 Aur uh ne un se kahd, Kis tarah kahte hain, ki Masih Ddiid kd Be$d hal '?

4- Aur lWid Zabur ki kitdb men np kalita hai, ki Khudawand ne nicro Khudawand ae kahd, ki Mere dahiue lullli mi baith,

43 Jab tak ki main tere dushmauon ko tere pdnwon ki cliauki karibi.

44 Pas Ddrtd to use Khudawand kahtd hai, phir wuh m kd betd kia tarah hiid?

45 % Jab sah log sun rahe the, ua ne apne ehdgirdun w kaha, ki

4ti Faoihon se khabardar raho, jo lanibi posliak pabine phirnd chihte, aur bdziron men talam ko, aur 'ibd- datkhanori men aadr kursion ko, aur liiilunaiiiorj mon lipar ki jagahon ke muhhtdq hain;

47 Webcwon ki-gharonkokhdjite, 108

, XXI. Oarib bewa kr. do ckhadam. aur dikbdnc ke liye lanibl diauri na- mdn karte hain ; pas unhin ko ziydda saza uiilegi.

XXI BA'B.

U S ne ankh uthake dauUtmand >ij ko, jo ki npni nazr liaikal ke khazdna men dalte tlie dekha.

2 Aur ek kangdl bowa ko bh( do clihaddm ddlte dekha.

3 Tab us ne kaha, Main tam ia saoh kahtii lilin, ki is kangal bewa M sab se ziydda dala :

4 Kyuijki un wabkon no apne ziyd- da tnfi u Kliudi ki nazrog men ddld: ]wir us ne apni garibl ki sdrf piiuji ddli.

5 *{ Aur jab ha'ze liaikal ke haqq men kahte the, ki wuh nafi» patihai- on aur liadyon sc drdsla hai, us ne kabd,

C We di n dwcnge, ki un merj se jo tura dekhte ho, patthar p:ir jiatthar uit chliiitegd, ki girdyd na jac.

7 Tab unhon ue ub m pilckud, ki Ai TT«tad, yih kah bogd? aur ua ke hone kd kyd iiUlian hal V

8 Us ne kahd, Dekbo, koi tum ko gumrdb na karc: kyiinki bahutere mere ndm par awenge, aur liaiienge, ki Main wuhi biin j aur ki Wacjt naz- dik hai : i«ir un ko pichhe na jdiyo.

9 Am jab lardlori aur fasddon ki khabar suuo, tt> na ghabrdiyo: kytin- ki pjihle uu kd w4qF hond zarur hai ; par ab tak akhir ualiin.

10 Plilr us no un se kaha, ki Q,iuin qaum par, aur badshihat badshdhat par e hari i dwcgi.

11 Aur jagah ba jagah bare bare bhuncbdl dwerjge, aur kdl aur mari paregi : aur bhaydnak chizen aur bare barc ni&hdn dsman se ^aliir hongc.

12 Lekin in sab bdton se pahle we mere nam ke sabab tum par hdth (ldlcnge, aur BatawaggSj aur 'ibadat- khdnon aur qaidkliduuQ mori k>gon ke hawdla kareDc;',, aur hadsbdhon. aur liakhnon ke pas khincbeijge.

Yarit&alam A-t garatjo hogi. LXT'QA'

13 Aur yih tumhare liye gawahi :haiiri'i;i.

14 Pas apne iVil meg thaliri raklio, ki haru pahle sc likr ua karen, ki kyd jawab dejjge.

15 Is liye ki main tumben aisi zubAn aur hikmat duiigii, ki Uinihdro sal» dnshnian khilaf kahne, aur adnihna kamc kii maqdur na rakhenge.

16 Aur tum nid bdp, aur bhAlon, aur rishtaddi-orj, aur doston se bhi giriftiir kiye jiogo ; baiki wo lum men 80 ba'zog ko qatl karenge.

17 Aur mere ndm ke sabab sab log tum Ke kina rakhenge.

18 Lekin tumhAre sir ki t'k bal bhi giraya na jiegi.

1U Tum sabr 6e apui jin baehao rskho.

20 Aur jab tum Yarusalam ko fau- jon se ghira dekho, to jdn lo ki us ka ujar bumi nazdik hai.

)il Tab we, jn Yahiidiya men hon, juihanm par bhag jaen, aur we, Jo shahr men bon, bahar nikal jaen ; aur we, jo dihat mun bon, bhi tar na iweft,

22 Kviinki we dm intiuam ke hain, ki Bab, ju likhd hai, pdrA hogA.

23 Far un dlnon men iietwalion, aur dddh-pildnewalion par at'aos ! ky- tinki zainfn par hari tangi aur is qaum par ga^ab hogd.

24 Aur we talwdr ki dbdr sc gir jaenge, aur asi r hoke sab qaumon ke darmiyin pahunchae jierjge, aur jab tak gair-qaumon ki \vaqt puri na lio, Kusulam gair-qaumon se raundi jacgi.

25 % Aur siiraj o chdnd aur tiron men nishAnlAn hongi j aur zamin par qiunniin ki niusiliat, aur uamundar aur us ki lahron ke shor ke sabab ghabrd- h:U bwrl :

20 Aur logon ki, dar ke roire, aur un chi/.on ki jo zamin par atl hain rali dekhne se, jin men jan na rahegi ; is liye ki Asmin ki miwaten hflai i;t<'Uirj.

109

XXII. Mtttth ke pftfr une ki bafxil.

27 Aur tab log Ibn i A'dam ko badli men qudrat aur bare jalai ke sath ate

deknegge,

28 Aur jab yih ehi/.en hone lagag, sidhe hoko Bir lipar utbAo; is liye ki tum hara chhutkira nazdik hai.

29 Aur us nc un se ek tamsil kahi ; ki Anjir ke darakhtaur sab darakhtou ko dekho ;

30 Jab un men konpalen nikalti hain, tum ip hi dekh karke jAiite bo ki ab garmi nazdik ii.

■'U So isi tarah tum bhi, jab in obizon ko hote dekho, to jano ki Khu-

ki badsbahat nazdik Ai.

.'■- Hain tum sc sach kalita Iiiin, ki Jab tak yih sab lio na luwe, yih pusht hargiz na gtizregi.

33 A 'aman o zamin bal jienge : par meri baten kabhi na talungi.

34 1 Apne se khabardar raho, aisi na howo ki tumhara dil babut khdne, nurmatwdld h'.me, aur Kindagi ki iiknuj Ke bhdri ]u\ aur wuh diu tuin par aclia- nak a pare.

35 Ia liye ki wub, jal ki tarah, za- min ke sah rahiiewalon ko glier legd.

3C l'ae jdgte raho, aur har waqt du'i mdngo, tA ki tum in sab chizon sc, jo honewili bain, bach jane ke aur Ilm i A'dam ke simhne khoro hone ke iaiq tiialiro.

37 Aur wuh, din ko, haikal men ta'lim doti, aur rit ko, biliar jAko Zaitilni ndme pabir par rabti tbi.

38 Aur subh ko sab log us ki bAten sunae ko haikal mon Ate the.

XX IT BAU

A B 'Sd i fatir, jia ko 'id i fasab kahte hain, nazdik Ai. 2 Aur sardar kAhin aur faqih tadbir meo tbo ki us ko kis tarah mir dAlen ; kytinki logon se darte the.

;t ^f Tab SbaitAn YahudAh men, jo Iwkariyiiti kahlAlA, aur barahou ki ginii men tbd, aamdyd.

4 Us uo jAkc sardar kihinon aur

A'khiH *id ifamh LU'QA'

sipdhiorj ke wnnlar se saldh ki, ki us ko kia tarah un ke bawila kaie.

5 Wo khush hiie, aur uae rupiya den o ki iqrar kiyd.

G Usaemtin liyA^ :mr n.i>>i'i (ltnindh- ta thd ]tl bagair hangama ke use un ko hawdla kare.

7 \ Tab fatfr ka din, jis metj Tasah Babi kanta fitri! tbd, iya.

■i Yisti' ne Patrus aur Yukannd ko yih kaitke bhcjd, ki Tum lio, bamire liye (asah taiy&r kato, td ki klideis.

9 Unhon ne ubc kabd, Tu kabin chdhtd hai ki baui taiydr karen?

10 Ua uo un Be kabd, Dekho, jab shahr ntim dakhil hoge, ek ddmi pdnl ka. ghard liye tumhi'n roib^a ; jis <:har trterj wiih jde ot ke piclthe cbaie jao.

11 Aur ghar ko milik ne kaho, ki Ustid bahti hai, ki Wuh roihmin- khana kanan bai, jis meu main apne shairinltm ke sdth fasali kodim?

12 Wuli tumben ek bani i>dhikhd- na farab bichha dikhdwegd : wahln taiydr karo.

13 Unhon ne jdke,jatsd us ne un ne kaha thd, pdyd, aur fasah taiydr kiyd.

14 Aur jab waqt dyd, wuh anu barah rasulon ko sdth' khdne baithd.

15 Aur un se kaki, llujbc ban khwdhish thi, ki duk h e ah n e ke dge yib (asali tumhftre sath khdiin :

W Kytirjki main tam nokahtdhtiri, ki Use phir kabhtS na khdilngd, jab tak Kbudd ki badshdnat menteri na ho.

17 Aurpiydla ko leke abnkr kiyd, nur kaha, ki U ko k>ko lipan men birit lo:

18 Kyunkimain tum sekahfdhun, ki Angur kd ras pbir na piuggd,jab tak Ktiuni ki Mdshihat na km,

19* t Phir roti li, aur shukr karke teri, aur yih kaiike un ko di, ki Yih iricrd badan bai, io tambar* wdste diya jdtd hai: yib meri yddgdri ke waste kiyd karo. 110

XXII. H babat,

20 Aur isi tani) kh&Le ke ba'd us piyala ko lekar kabd, ki Yib piyala tuero labu se, jo tiimhire waste bahaya jatd hai, ek naya 'abd bai.

21 1 Par, «Ykho, us kd hdth, jo mujbe ghiftir karwiti bal, awet anti tuez par hai.

22 Bo rbn i A'dam to, jaiad ub ke- Aste muqarrar hai, jdtd bai : magar s Bbakhs parafso\jo nsegirifiAr kar-

wdtA bai I

23 Tab we Apa* nmii puchbnfl lage, bt ham men m wuh kauu hai, jo yib karogd ?

24 ^J Aur un iimn takrir tbi, ki ha.m men so kauu nal» se bara tbahre.

2.'i 0a ne un se kaha, ki Qaiunon ke bddsbdh un ]jar bukiimat karb:; bain ; aur jo log un par ikhtiyar rakh- te hain, kluulriwaud i ui'amat kahlitt.

26 Tar tum aise na ho; baiki jo tum men bard itai, cbhote ki, aur koiwind khidiuat-karocwdlc ki iitit- niud ho.

27 Kyiinki kauu bara bai, wuh jo khdne bailTid, yd wuh jo khidmat kar- td bai? kya w n b nabin, io khane liaithdhai? lekin main tumhdre dar- miydn kiiuluiat-karnewdle ki miiiind hun.

28 Tum wc bi ho, jo meri dzma- isbon men sadd mere siitb rahe.

29 Aur jaisd mere Bdp ne mere liye ek bidah dbai muqaxrar ki, main l»hi tumbin liye rjauqarxar karti hun ;

30 TA ki meri bidsbdbat men me- ri mes par khao, pio, aur takhton jtar baithkar Isrdcl ke bdraii gharinon ki 'adilat karo.

31 t Phir Khudawond ne kahd, Sbama'dn, ai Snarria'iiii, dekh, Sbai- tdn ne cbdhA ki tumhen gehi';n ki taralt pbatke ;

32 Lt-k'in main ne tere liy.! du'i mdngi, ki terd imdn jdtd na raba i aur jab tii phire, to apne bhatag ko maa- b6t kar.

33 Tab us ne use kabd, ki Ai Khu-

Patrvs H bdbat peshingoi. LU'QA' ddwand, main tere sath qaid hoiie, baiki tnarne ko taiyAr lirin.

34 Tad ub ne kabd, Ai Patrus,

main tujh se kahtA hun, ki dj murg

i dega, jab tak tu tin martaba

mera inkar na kare, ki main use na-

hiri jAntd.

SG Aur 110 ne un sc kaha, ki Jnb main ne tmnhcn bc batuc, aur be jholi, aur be ivition ke bhejd, k y A tum ko kisti ebi/ ki hajsit Mi ? Unbon ne kahA, Kisu ki nahiii.

36 TJs ne unhen kaha, Par nb jis ke pas hat.i'i A bo, lewe, aur isi tarah jboli bhi; aur jin pAs nahiy, ai>ue kajiru beckke talwar kharide.

'■'■'• K > i'i ijU i main tum se kabtd hun, ki yih nawishta, ki Wuh bedug n "'L! ginA gaya, sarur liai ki mere haqq mtn uiirA ho : is liye ki yib baten, jo mori babat hain.anjdm taknahuLchtiii.

38 Unhon ne kaliA, ki Dekb, ai Kb.ud.wami, yakin do talwAr haig. UH nn un se kaha, Bahut hai.

39 *{ Aur wuh nikalko apne das- tur |»r Zaitiin ke pabdr ki taraf cha- Id : aur tis ke shAgird us ke pichhi! bo Uye.

40 Aur ua jagak pahunehke ua nc un se kahA, Du'a mangu, tA ki A/.md- iah men na paro.

41 Aur us ne un se tir ke ek jpppe par barbke ghutne tekkar du'A nian- gi, aur kaha, ki

42 Ai Bdp, agar tu cbdhe, to yih piyala mnjli sc dur kari: ; lckin nafiri onani turbin, baiki teri niarzi ke mu- wdfiq ho.

43 Aur dsmdu se ek firishta us ko dikliAi di ya. jo usu quwat detA thA.

44 Aur wuh jdukani men phan*fc6 bahut girgirdke du'd mdngtd thA; aur us kA paai'na lahu ki biind ko mAnind liukiir /.amin par gind thA.

45 Aur du'A se uthkar apne shd- girdon ke pda dyd, aur unhen yam s* Bote pdyd,

4(i Aur «n se kabd, ki Tum kyun 111

', XXII. Masih foi giri/tar ftoRti

sote ho? uthkar du'd mSngo, tA ki AzmAJah men ua paro.

47 1f Wuh yih kah rahA tha, ki dc- klm, ek bhir dikkiii di, aur ek uu ba- rahon men se, jo Yahudah kahlutd tba, uu ke Age Age Lukar Yiku' pit d ya, ki us ko cliunte.

48 Tab Yisti' ne use kaha, k i Ai Yahudah, kya tu Ibn i A'dam ko bau se pakarwdta hai 'i

49 Jab unhon ne, jo us ke ird gird the, wuh lidi ju houewdld thd dek ha. to use kabd, Ai Khuddwand, kya bam talwar chaldwon ?

50 1 UB men se ek ne sarddr ka- bin ke naukar ko lagai, aur u ka dahind kdn urd diyA.

51 Tab Yisti' ne jawdb men kaha, Itne hi par rahno do. Aur DJ ke kdn ko chhukar us ko changd kiyd.

"i2 Phir Tisii' ne sarddr kAbiimii.

haikal ke Hardaruii, aur btunrgOfl

jo ns par charh Ae the, kuini, ki

Tum jaise chor iwktirae ko taiwarei.

aur ldthiAn tekar nikh' ho?

63 Main hai n» haikal men tum- bdre sd<h thd, aur tum ne mujli ptt hdtb na ddlA ; lekin yih tundiaii ghftrf, aur zulmat ka ikhtiyar IilU.

54 T Tab we use jiakarke le chale, aur aarddr kdhin ke ghar men le gaye. Aur l'atnis diir dur us ku pohhe elialA jata tha.

55 Aur jab unbon nc ddldn ke bieh men dg jaldf, aur uiilkar Itiuthe the, Fatrus un ke bieh men baitha.

5(3 Ek laundi ne uae Ag ke ji.is hni- thA dekhkar us par kbiib ni«Ab knv- b babi, Yib bhi us ko sAth thd.

57 Par us ne us kd inkdr karke ka- bd, Ai 'aurat, main use nahin jdnta.

68 Thori der ba'd kisi aur ne use dekhkar kabd, ki Tu bhi un men ae hai. Fatrus ne kahA, ki Ai Adrai. main naliirj linu.

59 Ghauje ek ba'd aur kisi'i ne td- kid sc kah A, ki Yih ddmi be-shakk us ke sdth thd: kyunki Jalili hai.

Yahiidi ug par fatwa dete.

60 Pfttrua ne kaha, Ai shakhw, main uahin aamajhtd ki lu k ya tah- ta hai. Yih knh hi rahd tbd, ki jhat niurg ne bau g di.

61 Tab Khuddwnnd ne phirke Patras par tti^rih ki. Aur l'atrus ko Khnddwand ki bat jo usc kahi, ki uurg ki bdng dene ite dge tii incrd titi bar inkar karena, ydd ai.

62 Aur Patnu bahar jdke zor zar voya.

63 T Aur we mard, jin ke baw&le Yiaii' tha, lis ko that.the incn urane aur marmi lago.

64 Aur us ki dnkh mdndke rminb. par taraslnchn mAre, aur us ne yih kahke pnchhd, ki Nubtiwat M kali, ki kis ne tnjh ko mara?

ti."j Aur «s ke ha.qq mcn aur bhi bahu t kufr bake.

06 ^ Aur jab din hiia, logon ke lni/.ur'ioij, aur sardAr kdhinon, aur faqihon ki jama'it lagi, aur we use ;t.pni 'adalatgah msn laV, aur kaha,

67 Agar tvi Maxih hai, to ham se kah. (Jh ne un «e kaha, Agar ranin t.tim ae kanun, to tum yaqin na kar- ogo:

68 Aur agar puchhtin bhi, to mujhe jawab na doge. aur na chhoroge.

68 Ab se Ibn i A'dam 'Kbuda ki qurtrat ke dahiuu hati) baitM rahegd.

70 Tab sabhon ne kahi, Pm kva trf Khnda ka Beta hai ? Us ne un se tahi, Jo tum kahto ho wuh hi main hdn.

71 Tab unhon ne kaba, Ab namun aur gawdbi kya darkar '< kyugki hai?} ne us hi ke niunb se sirna.

XXIII BA'B.

AUR sari jama'at uthke ubo Pildtus pas le gayi. 2 Aur ua par nalish karni sburiV ki, ki ise bain ue qaum ko bahkatc, aur Qaisar ko malmil dene ae man'a tuirto, aur apne ta,iu Masih bidahah kahte paya.

Tab l'ilatus ne 112

LU'QA', XXIII. Vs ko Pi?ri(«sjKi« Ujand. Kyd tii Yahudion ka Badsbdh hai ? Ha ne us ke jawab men kaha, WuM hai jo td kahti.

i Tab l'ilatus ne sardar Vahinorj aur logon m kahd, ki Main is shakhs ka kuchh qusiir nahin pata.

5 Par unhon nc aur bhi tundi se kaha, ki Yih Jatil sn lokar nara Ya- hiidiya men, yahiin tak, ta'lim de de lo^ron ko ubharia hai.

(j Hilatus ne .lalil ka nam sunkar ' piichhd, ki kyd yih admi Jalili hai ?

7 Jad jaili- ki Hcrodis ke 'amal ka hai, ase Herodi» ]<&», jo un diuoii Ya- nisftlam men thd, bhejA.

H ^ Aur Herodis \i-\C ko dokhke bahut khush hua: kyunld muddat se chahta tha ki usc dekhe, is Iiye ki us ki babat bahut, kuchh auna tha, aur ua ki koi karamat tlekhnc ki uni- 1 1 K' d thi.

U Aur ua no us sc bahu teri bdtcn puchhin ; par us ne uae kuchh jawab na diya.

10 Aur sardar kahinon aur faqihon ne khare boke ua par siiMdat so ni£ lis h ki.

11 Tab Herodis ne apni fauj garnet use nacbin thahrdya, aur usc chatn-

:hamatf poshtik pahiniiku us ka ta- n.iskhur kiyd, aur phir Piliitus kane bheji.

12 U Aur uni din Pildtus aur Her- ndis dpas rnen dost hn gaye; kyunki dge un men dnshmani thi.

13 ^ Aur Pilatus ne aarddr kahin- on, aur sardaron, aur logon ko pas buliks un se kab.'i, ki

14 Tum is shakliH ko mcre pds yih kahte Ide, ki Yih logon ko bahliata hai : dekho, main no tumhdrc dg(i taht]iq ki, par un (]usi'irori men se, jin ko tum us par thahrdte ho, main ne

shakhs mcn kuchh na paya :

15 Aur na llerodis ne : kydijki mairi m tmtihi.-n us ke pds bhejn, ; aur, de-

Ikho, us kd koi nisi'i l.dm na thahrd.

piichha, jo (jati ke hii'i ho.

feo ,-hhor <J«,><i. LWQA', XXIII.

Ifi Tb liyo u» ko tarnbih kfcrfc thhor ddy.ga.

17' (U«e har 'M nieij znrur thA: kisd ko uu ko wdste chhor de.)

.Wf.-iJi io «titt demi,

31 Kyiinki jab hare darakht ke sdth aisd karte hain, to sukhe ke sdth

i ' k yd uh k iya jdegd ',•

32 Aur we do nur Admion ko, jo

18 Tab sab milke chilUe, ki Use badkAr the, le chale, ki us ke sdth le jd, aur Barabbds ko hamdro liyo mdrejAeij. chhor. 33 Aur jab we us jagah par jise

10 ('W uh kisd faaad, ]o sb.abr m 05 hua tha, aurkhi'm ko siibab, qaid tha.)

20 Pildtusne yih didhko ki Yisi'i' ko chhor de, phir unhen samjhdyA.

21 Par unhon ne ohillako kaha-, ki Us ko salib de, salib do,

22 ftarf bar usnc 1111 so kahA, Kyd[i? uh uc kyd badi ki hai? main uo us roen qatl ke latcj koi qusur na paya: i» Hyc main use tambih karke chhor dungd,

23 Par unhon ne shor machdke use tang kiya, aur chaba ki use salib ilf

i'le. Aur un ki, aitr fsard&r kahinon :l jiwa/.en galib lu'iiu,

24 Tab Pildtus ne hukm kiya, ki «n ki khwAhish ke muwAfiq ho.

25 Aur un ke waste us fchftkhl ko, jo faaad aur kbun ke sabab qaid tha, jise unhon ne cblha tha, chhor diya ; aur Yisii' ko un ki marzi par hawai» kiyd.

26 Aur jab us ko le jate the, Sha- ma'i'm nam Qurcni ko, jo dlbdt se At-A tha, pakarko salib us ]>ar rak h di, ki Yisu ke pichhe pichhe le cliale.

27 % Aur logon ki ban hhir, aur 'auraten, jo uh ke waate chhdti pitti aur ro rahi thin, us ke picblie pfchhi chalin.

28 Virtii* ne phirke un se kahA, ki Ai Yard salam ki betio, mujh par roo, baiki Ap jwir aur apne larkoii ]>ar roo.

29 Kyiinki, dekho, we din tite hain. jin men kahenge, Mubarak hain ban- jlicn, aur wuh pet jo na jnne, aur we chhdtidn jinhon ue diidh im pilAyd.

30 Tab paharon se kahna ahurii' karerjge, ki Hain jiar gir paro pahdrion se, ki Hamen chhipAo.

' m

Kalvari nam mkhle, n&hunche, to wu- han use salib di, aur badkdron ko bhi, ek dahine aur diisra bani.

34 1 Aur Yisu'nckaha.ki Ai BAp, un ko mu'df kar; kyfinki we nahin jdnte ki kyd karte hain. Aur unhon

chitthi ilAlke us ki |«»shdk birit li.

35 Aur log khare dekh valie the. Aur sardar un ke »Ath tliaitba kacke kahte the, ki Auron ko baehayd ; agar yih Masih Khudd kd barjjuzida lini, to Ap ko bachawe.

3ti Aur sipdliion nebhi usparhan-i ki, nur pas jdkar aur use i-irka dekur kahd,

37 Agar td Yahudion kd MiUltil .i, to apne ta,in baehd.

38 Aur us ke i'ijiar YiVndni, Rnmi, r Ibrani m'en yih nawishta likhd 4, ki YIH YAIIU'Dl'OK KA'

HA'DSHA'H HAL

3',) T Aur ek un badk:i:urj meg se, jo salib par latkfte gaye the, use ta'na nidrke kahta tha, ki Agar td Ha*ih hai, to Ap ko aur hatn ko bachd,

40 Ddsro ne uso maldiuat karke jawdh diyA, Kyd td bhi Kb.idd se na- hiri dartA, jis hdl bi is lii asi ihcii giriftdr hai*

41 Aur bam to wajibi, kyiinki apne kdmon kd hadld pdte hain : par us n e to koi bejd kdiu uahln kiyd.

42 Aur ua ne Yisd' se kaha, Ai Khuddwand, jab t& apni tAdahahat nien Awe, niujhe yad kijiyo.

43 YisiV ne ueo kahA, Main tujh se sach kahta bdji, ki A'j ti'i mere sAth bibisht mon hogd.

44 Aur chhatliwcTi ghante ke q»rib thd, ki i<ari zamiu par anaheri chhd gayd, aur nauwen ghante tak rahA ;

Masih ji utftke «/> ko LU'QA",

45 Aur Kilraj tarik ho gaya, aur hai- kal kaparda bich se phat gaya.

46 1 Aur Yisu' uc bari iwaa ne pukarke kalut, ki Ai BAp, uiahj "I"1' nih tere hilhon ruen aoniptaluin: yih knhke dam chhor diyi.

47 Aur sii badar ae yih hal dekhkc Khu.ia ki ta'rif ki, aur kalia, Be-sliakk, vili admi ra«tbdK tha.

48 Aur eab log, jo yih taruaHha dekhno ae the, jad yih wiqi'at dekhin, dihili pitte phire.

41) Aur U8 ko aab janpahdiin, aur ttl 'aurateii, jo Jalil ae ua ke aath ai tliin, diir kbari hoke yih hal dek h rabi thin..

60 T Aur, dekho, ek nhakhs Yusuf oame uiut>hir, j*» nek aur rastbaz tha ;

51 Aur wuh un ki salah aur kim uieti «harik na bila: yih Yahud ion ke shahr Aramntiya ki tha; aur w uh khud Khuda ki badalutliat ka intissir Urti th:i:

5'2 Ua hb Pilatua ke pas jake liati' ki lish luan^i,

53 Aur ua ko utarke kattin men lapets, aur ek q»br men, p pntthar uiiu kliudi thi,jah:Ln koi kabhu rakhd na gaya tha, rak ha.

54 Aur wuh iaiyiri ka diu tha, aur sabt ke diu ki ]«u phatnc lagi,

55 Aur we 'auraten. libi, jo ua ke sulii JaUl ae ai thin, pichlie pichbe clialiy,, aur qabr ko aur us ki Uah ko, kl ku tarah rakhi yayi, deSfcti thin.

56 Aur phirke kiiushbuiin, aur murr taiyir kiyi; lekin ahar'a ke muwafln Bati ki> din aiilui kiya.

XXIV BA'B.

AUR we hafte ke pahle diu bon tarke, un khu&hbuiog ko jo tai- yir ki thia, leke qabr par ain, aur un ke sath kai aur bhi thin.

2 Aur unhon ne pattliar ko qabr par ae dhalkaya luia paya.

3 Aur amlar jake Khudawand Yisu' ki lasli ua pai.

4 Aur aiaa htia, ki jad we u» bit se

114

XXIV. thagirdon par z&hir kartA. bairan thin, dekho, do shakha cham- chainiti posli&k pahine u n ke pas kbare the:

o Jab we darti, aur apue sir zamiu par jhukati thin, unhon U un ae kaha. Timi kyviii /.imia ko niurdun men dliuudhtiiUi bo?

6 Wuh yahan nahin hai, baiki ntha hai ; yad karo, ki han<>% jab Jalil men tha, tum bo kyi kahd tha, ki

7 Zarur hai ki Ibn i A'dam gunah- ^.ivin kl hiith men hawala kiya jae, aur salib diya jae, aur tiaro diri utlic.

8 Tab us ki hiten unhen yad ain.

9 Aur qabr par sc pbirke uu gya- rahon, aur sab baqi logon ko, in sab bat. m ki khal>ar di.

10 Aui'Miii'iyani Mandul ini, aur Yli- anni, aur Mai-iyain, Ya'uiSb ki ma, aur duari 'auraten, jo aath thin, inhun tie rasiilcm ae yih baten kahin.

11 f'ar iu ki l>iten unhen kahdni si samajh patin, aur uu kA i'atibar ua kiya.

ia Tab Patrua uthke qabr ki taraf daura; aur jhukkar dekha ki eirt' kafan pari hai, aur is majare ae ta- 'ajjub karta ht'ta apue ghar cliali gaya.

13 T Aur, dekho, usi din un meij ae du admi us kasti ki tftraf, jis ka nim Ainmius, aur Yarusalam se pamit char kos ke faaila par h»i, jate the :

14 Aur we uu aab batnn ki babat, jo waqi' h m thin, apaa men bit-chit kart« tbe.

15 Aur aiaa bi'ia, ki jab we bitehit aur pi'ichh-pachh kar raho the, Yisu' Ap nimiik ike un ke aath chala;

16 [,1'kin un ki dnkli<n band ho gayi thin, ki ua ko na pahcliftni.

17 Us na un so kaha, Yih kya bdtcn hain, jo tuTii nih mon ipjiB mtn karto jati.' lio, aur udashote?

18 Tab ek ne jis ki nim (Jliunas thi, jiiwdb mon u-se kahi, ki Kyi akeli tii hi Yarusalam men pafdeaf bal, ki jo Icaahh Lu dinog ua men Ma Iiai, naliiri jauta?

Mtt& ji i/fhke dp ko LU'QA',

19 Us ne un ne katili, Ky* ? Unhon ne usc kaili, Yisu' Kasari ke majare, jo nabi tha, aur Khuda aur sdri qaum ke sanihne karn aur kalam men qud- ratwald :

20 Aur kyunkar sardar kabin aur harmire saidiron ne ub ko rjatl ke hukm he liye hawdla kiya, aur salib di.

21 Par ham ummed rakhte the, ki yihi Israel ko makhlasf deno ko tha: aur iri si-b ke niwi, ;ij i isra roz hai ki yih wdqi'dr. huin.

22 Aur haru meii nc kai'auratim ne bhi ham ko gliabra rakha hai, ki tarku U3 ki qabr par gayin, ;

23 Aur uh ki lisk ko na piikar ain, aur bolin, ki Ham ne firishton ki royat di;khi, jiuhun ue kahd, ki W uh ziuda hai.

24 Aur lia'/cj nc harnarc sathion men se qabr par jake, jaisa ki un 'aur- ftton m kaha, pava; par us ko aa dekil

25 Tab un nc un se Italia, ki Ai na- dano, aur nabion k i Bari lidton ke mdnue inen sust-mizajo;

26 Kya zari'ir na tha, l;i Masih yih dnkh uthawe, aur apne jaldl men dd- khil ho'?

27 Aur Miisd ae, aur eab rabion se, ahurtf karke w uh baten, jo sab kitabuii

e h:t.iq ineii hnin, un ke liye tafsir kiri.

28 Aur we us baati ko, jahdn jate the, nam.Uk pahimcbe: aur ain ma- 'iuni pari, ki wuh age barha cfaahta hai.

29 Tab mihon ne use yih kahke rok a, ki Ilarnare satli rab : kyiinki Hharn htia chahti hai, aur din diiuld. Tab wuh bhitar jdke un ke sath rahd.

30 Aur ai.ia bila, ki jab wuh nn ke. sdrh khiine baitha thi, roti Sekar OH imitabarrak kiya, aur torkn un ko ni.

31 Tab un ki ankhen khul gayin, aur us ko pahehana; aur wuh un ke pas se gaib lio gayd.

32 Tab imhon ne Apu s men kahii,

115

XXIV. sha-girdon par zdklr karld. Jab rak. men ham so b&'en kartd, aur hamare liye ki tabun ka bbed kholtd tha, to kya ham logon ke dil men josh na hila ?

33 Aur usi ghari uthkar we Vani- salum ko pliire ; aur gyarahun aur un ke sathion ko ikatrue paya,

34 Jo kahte tuu, ki Kbndawand h.-ic1i nnicli u tha, aur Shama'iin ko dikhai divi hai.

36 Tad unhon ne nih ka bal bayan kiya, aur yih ki kyunkar unhon ne us ke roti torne men use pabulidml.

36 1 Aur we yili bilten kar raiie the, ki Yiafi' dp un ke bich nan khard hiia, aur un se kaha, Tumhcn salai n.

37 Par uuhou ue ghahrike aur dar- ke khiydl kiya, ki kisi nih ko dek'hte liain.

38 Magar us ne un se kaha, ki Tum kyun ghabrdhat meii lu>? aur kain- ku tumhare dilurj men andeshe paida bote?

39 Mere hath pdnwraj ko dekho, ki inaiii hi hfiii, aur inujiu: ehhiio, aur dekho; kyiinki nih koMsni nur haddi nahtn, jaisa nnijlt men ilekhtc ho.

#0 Auryib kalike uuheg apne li&th aur ] Jiiuw dikhde.

41 Aur jali we ni:irc kliuuhi ke i'atibar na karte, aur muta'ajjib the, us nu un so kaha, ki .Kya yahaij tum- hiire pis kuulih khane ko hai 'r

42 Tab unhog. ne bhiini hril maohh- U ki't ek l.ukra, aur shabd ka ek ehbat- td us ko diyi.

43 Ua ne leke un ke sauihne khaya. i4 Aur un Be kaha, ki Yih we hi

biten hain, jinhra main no jab ki jtiinihdrts ^;ltii tha, tum se kahd, ki Zarur hai ki Kab kuchh jo Mfisa ki tauret, aur nabion ke nawishttjn, aur za buron, men, tneri babat likhtl hai, pura ho.

45 Tab un ke rihnon ko kholi, ki kitdbon ko namjlieii ;

46 Aur un m kalia, ki Yiin likha

SaiAn YU'HANNA', I. mujassam hud.

hai, aur yiin M zarnr thd, ki Masih I »0 Tf Tab wuli uuhen wahan se ba- dukh ut.hiwc, aur tlsre din murdun har lkit'aniya tak lo gaya; aur apne m,.!, n,. i'j ntlu-: hdtb. uthdke uulu.n harakat di.

!~7 Aur 'Yantealam «o leke sari 51 Aur aisi bui, ki jak> wuh unhpr qamnim men tauba aur guuihog ki.barakat do rana thd, un se judi hii;i, nm'all ki nianadi ub ke u;iiu se ki jae. I aur aHmdn par uthaya gaya.

18 Aur tum in bdton. ke gawih bo. 52 Aur unhon no ub ko uijda kiya, ■19 5 Aur, dekli», main apne Uap 'aur ban khushi so Yaruealam ko ke uh mau'fid ko tum par bhejtd iu'in : phire :

lekin ram, jab tak 'diam i haid ki| 68 Aur haiuesha haikal mcij Khu- (jiiwat bu nwhbbas na ho, Yanisalam dft ki ta'rif aur shukr karto ralie shahr men thahru. I A'iuin.

YU'HANNA' KI INJIL.

I BAU

IBT1DA' men Kalam thd, aur Ka- limKhudake sdtli tha, aur Ka- )im Khmfi thd.

2 Yilii ibtuli men Khudd ke sith tha.

3 Sah cliizen iib se maujud hiiiij ; -iur koi chia maujud na thi jo hagair iib ke h lii.

■1 Zuidagi ua raerj thi ; aur wuli rimja«l insan kii niir ihi.

5 Aur aur tariki men chamakta hai : aur tariki u« uae dnrvaft aa kiya.

Bf Elt shakhs Khiidd ki taraf se hheja giivii tiiri, jin kii nam Ytihannd thd.

T Yih gawdhi ke iiyo ayd, ki Nur par gawdbi de, ta ki sab (ia ke ba'is H iman lawen.

)< Wuh Niir na tha, par Nur par gawdhi denc ko dya tha.

H Haqiqi Niir wuli thi, jo dunya nvin dke har ok admi ko roshan kartd

10 Wuh jahil] i lUi

i thi, aur jahau

u» bi se maujud hiid, aur ja&an ra

use na jana.

11 Wuh apnon pds iya, aur apnon no use qabul na kiya.

12 Lekin jitnon no use qabul kiya, us uc unhi'iL i'|Lidar bikliHlii, ki Khu- di ko farzand bon, ya'ne, unhen jo ns ku narn par iman lite Lain.

113 Wo na lalui ae, na jiam kikhwa- Iiiaii se, na mard ki khwihiah ae, magW Kbudi k« paidi hue liain.

li Aur Kalam mujassam hui, aur wuli fazl aur ristt se bbarpdr hoke ham&rv diirniiyaii rnlii, aur baui m- US ki aixi jaliil dekha, jaisi Bip ke eklaute ki jalil.

15 H Yuhanna ne us ki bdbat gawibi di, aur pukdrke kabi, Yili wubj hai jis ki zikr main kartd tM, ki wuh jo mere pichhe di mujh se muqaddam hai ; k mujh se palilo thd.

lfi Aur us ki bharpuri i aa piyd, baiki fazi par fwd.

17 Kyunki shan'at M (Isi ki raa'- rifat sg di g.vyi, niagar fazl aur sachai Yisd* Ma.-ili so pahunehi.

wili hai

n k i wuh

i huni w! b

Mitiih ki babat Yultaana

18 Khuda ko kisi ne kabhi na de- kliil ; eklautd Betd, jo Mp ki gud. uien hiu, usi ne batla diva.

fa f Aur Yrihauud kS gawdhi yih thi, j«b ki Yahiidion ne Yaniaalam se kdhinoij aur Ldwion ko bbcju, ki oa se puchhen, ki Til kaun hai 't

20 Aur w ne iqrdr kiyd, aur inkdr BN kiya; baiki iqrir kiy;i, ki Kain Masih nahin hi'm.

21 Tab unhim ne us se ptichha, To aur kauo? Kya t (i Hiyds hai? TJs m; kahd, Mairj naluri Iniii, Paa, dyd tu wuh nabi hai ? Ua ne jawab diya, Naluri.

22 Tab unhon ne us se kaba, ki Tu kanu hai 'f td ki haui unhon, jin- hnii \i<- huni ko bhejd, koi jawab den. Tu apac haqq mcii kya kahtA liai ?

23 Usnekaha.ki Mairj.jaisd Vas'- aiydh nabi ne kahd, Baydbdn iniii eh piik;ini<'walu ki dwd/, lilin, ki Turn Khudawand ki rdh ko dumst karo.

24 Magar ye Faritdori ki taraf se biicje gaye the.

25 Aur iinhori ne us se isuw.il kiyd, aur kahd, ki Agar tu na Masih liai, ua liiyas, aur na wuh nabi, paa kyiirj baptismu deU hai V

26 Yuhanni ue jawab moa unhon knhd, ki Main pdni se baptisma detd lilin : par tmuhare darmiyan ek khard hai, jise tam nahin jdnte ;

27 Vib wuhi hai, jo mero pichhe anewala t ha. aur rnujh se muqaddain tiid, jis ki juti kd tasma main kholne ke ldiq nahin htin.

28 Yih bdten Bait-'abdra moii Yar- ilau ke pdr, jahaij Yiihannd baptisma detd thd, wdid' huin.

2i* % Pusri: diii Yiihannd ne Yisii' ko apne pds dte dekbd, aur kahd, De- kho, Klrudd kd Earra, jo jahdn kd -unali ut ha le jdtd bai.

30 Yih wuhi hai, jin ke haqq inen main ne kahd, ki Ek mard mere pi- rhhe dta hai, jo mujh se muqaddam ■ :::\, kviinki wuh mujh st' pahlc thd. 117

YU'IIAXNA', I. ki gawahijo us nt di.

31 Aur rnaig to uae na jdntithft:

par b liyo main pdni au baptiama detd dya, ta ki wuh Isrdel par rfhii ho.

32 Aur Yiihaund ne yih kahkc gawdhi di, ki Main ns Rrih ko kabu- tar ki tarah aamdn se ittarle dekhd, aur wuh ua par titah ri.

33 Aur main 'u»e najdntdtlni : pv jis no mujhe bheja, ki ]iani w buptia- ma duu. ua ne mujhe kahd, ki Jis par tu Ruh ko utarte aiur thabarte deklie, wuhi bai jo Kiih i Quds ae baptisma detd hai.

dekhd, aur gawdhi di, ki yibi Kbudd kd Beta hai.

35 ^ Phir diisre din Yiihannd aur do us ke Mhdgirdon ineti se khnro the i

36 Tab Yi'ihannd ne Yiafi' ko chal- to dekhkar kahd, Pekho, Khudd kd Barra!

37 Aur un do shdgirdon ne us ku kalam karte suni, aur Yhui' ko ptohhe ho Hye,

38 Tab YiHii1 ne munh pherke, aur miliki pichbe dte dekhkar, un ko ka- hd, T um kyd dhitndlite ho? Unhon ne us bc kahd,'Ai Rabbi, Qia k;i tnr- juma yih hni, ai Ustdd,) tu kahdn rnhtd hai ?

39 Ub ne unhen kahd, Chalo, do- kha. Pas wc do, aur jahdn wuh rahta tlta dekhd, aur us roz us ke nSth rabfl ; aur yih daswig sd'at ke qarib thd.

40 Ek un donon nien Bejinhog m Yuhannd ki suni, aur ua ke pichhe ho liyo, Shama'dn Patrua kd bhdi Audryls thd.

41 Us ne pahle apno bhdi Shatna'un ku fidyd ; aur us se kahd, ki Haru ne Masih ko, jis kd tarjuma Kristus hai, pdyd.

42 Tab wuh use Y'isu' pis Idya : aur Yiaii' no ua par nigdh karke kahd, ki Tii Yuuas kd lietd Shama'un hai : tu Kefda kahldwcgd, jia kd tarjuniu I'ai ms hai.

43 1" Dusro din Yiau' ne chdha ki

.tfatti'i Qdnd men pdni h.' YU'IIAN Jalil men jdwe, aur Failhus ko pdke kahd, Mcre pichhii dml.

44 Aur Failluis Baitsaida kii, jo AndryAs aur Patrus ka ahahr hai, biahinda thA.

45 Failbiia ne Nathanad ko paya, aur uso kahd, ki Jis ka zikr Musi oc tauret nu-ij nur nabi<nj H kiyd hai, liom ne use payA,- wah Vtinnf ka beta tisu' NAsari hai.

46 Nathanai-1 ne ub si) kaha, K ya Ninarat se kof achchhi cbl/- DwaJ sakti hai? Failbus no kaha, A' aur dekh,

47 Yisii' ne Nathanael koapui 1:vr:if ato dekhkar us ke bttN toBO knbi. Dokho ok&achcbaiaraeli,jisnien raakr iiahirj hai !

iH Nathanael ne us k kaha, Tu ■mujhe kahau se jauhi hai ? V isu' ne jawab diyd, aur uae kahd, Us se pahle ki Failbiis ne tujhe buldyi, jab tii n lir ke darakht tale thd, main ne uijhe dekhd.

49 Nathanael ne jawib men ns se kahd, Ai Kabbi, tu Klm.li ki Beta, tu Isrdt'l kd bddslidh hai.

50 Yisu' ne jawdb diyd, aur us «e kahd, Kyd tii is Hye iman lAtd hai ki main ne tuju ae kalid(ki Main cis tujh ko anjir kedarakht tale dukhd? fcti in se btiffl majare dekhegd.

51 Phir vis oo kahd, Main tum ae sach sach kuhtA hiin, ki Ab se turo Asman ko klniU^inir Khiidakn (irisi i ton ko upar jdte aur Ibn i A'dam par utarte dekhoge.

II BA'B. 4 UR tisrf: diri Qdna e Jali] mrii kisi A ka bydh hi'td; aur Yisii' ki mi vvahdn tlii :

2 Aur Yisu1 aur us ke shdgirdon ki bbi us bydh. men riVwut thf.

3 Aur jab mai ghat gayi, YisiV ki md ne us ae kahd, ki D n ke pds mai na rahi.

4 Yisii' no us se kahd, ki Ai 'aurat,

118

XA', IL mailandtd.

mujhe tujh bg kyd kdm? meri waqt hanon iNiliin dyi.

5 Ua ki ina ne khddirnon ko kahd, Jo kuchh wuh tumben kahe, m karo.

6 Aur wahdn. |>atthar ke chha matke talnimt ko liye Yahddiori ke diis* i'ir ke muwifiu dharc the, aur har ck men do yd tin isian lu sauidi thi.

7 Yisu'ne Hiin.cn kaili, M.-ttkon men Dani bharo. So unhon ne un ko lab A ab hhara.

8 Phir us ne unhen kaha, ki Ab nikdlo, aur majlia ke aardAr pds le jao. Aur we le fraye.

'J Jab niir i majlia ne wuh pdni, jo mai ban gaya thd, cbakhd, aur uahin jdna ki yih kahaij se thi, magar l liakur, ki jinhotj ue wuh pdni nikdli thd, jdnte the, to m i r i majlia ne dulho ko buldyd,

10 Aur usc kahd, ki Har ahakh.3

pahle achchhi mai kharch kand hai,

aur ndqhs ua waqt ki jab piko chhak

nye : par tti no achchhi mai ab tak

.k f. i clihorf hai.

U Yih' pahld mu'ajiza Yisii' M QAna e Jalil men dikhdyd, aur apni jaldl zAhir kiya, aur us ke ehdgird ua par iindn Ide.

12 1 Ba'd ua ke, wuh, aur us ki in'i, nur ua ke bhdi, aur shagird, Kafanidhum men gaye ; par unhon ne wahan balmt dinoij tak luaudni ua kiya.

13 t Tab Yabiidion ki 'id i fasah nawiik thi, aur Yisfi' Yarusalam ko gayi.

14 Aur haikal men, bail, aur bher, aur kabiitar-faroshon ko, aur sarraibn ko baithfl lido, pdyi:

15 1*ab ub ne rasai kd kord bandke un aab ko, bheron aur bailon samet, hatkal ae nikdl diyd, aur sarrifon ke take bikhrd diye, aur tak hte ulat diye ;

16 Aur kabiitar-iaroahon ko kahd, In chisorj ko yahirj »c 1g jd : mere Bip ke ghar ko byopar ki ghar mat bando.

Masih K nasihat jo u$ ne YU'HAN!

17 Aur u&kctradgirdon ko yid dyd, ki yun likhi hai.ki Terc ghar kigairat raujhe kha gayi.

18 f T» b Yahridion ne jawab men. use kahd, K ya idahan tu hamey dikhliti hai, jo yih kira kartd hai ? '

19 Yisti' ne jawdb dekar uuhcn kahd, ki Ia liaikal ko dha do, aui main uso tin din meu khard karunei.

20 Tab Yahudlon ne kahd, Cbhiya- lis baras bc yih baikal ban rahi hai, aur tfi use tin din inep. khard karegdV

21 l'ar us ne apne badan ki haikal ki babat kahd i hi.

22 lu liye, jab wuh murdon ji uthd, to u» ke aliagirdon ko yad dyd, ki us ne yih mi si- kahd thi: aur «t kitdb aur Yisii' ke kalam par iradn lie.

23 Tf Aur jab ki wuh Yanisalam ke hich 'id i fasah men thi, to bahutere u n mu'ajiKon, ko jo us ne dikhde dekhke us ke nira ]>ar iradn Ide.

24 Lokin YisiV ne apne ta,in un par na chhori, ia liye ki wuh nb ko jinta thi,

25 Aur muhtdj na thd ki kol insan ke \v.v\q men. gawdhi de: kyttnki wuh d[>. jo kue h h ki iii^dn men thi, jdtitd thd,

UI BA'IJ.

FARI'SI'ON u.en se ek slmkhs NiqudemusnimYahiidion kiek sarddr thd:

2 Us ne rdt ko Yisu* pds akar us se kahd, ki Ai Habbi, bara jdnte hain ki i.ii Klnidi ki taraf ne ustad hoke dyd : kydnki koi ye mu'ajize jo tu dikbdtd hai, jab tak ki Khudi us ke s&th na ho, nah i n iiikhd sakti.

H M ne jawi b dekar us hg kahd, Main bujh se sach sach kahtd hiln, Agar koi uar inau paidd na lio, towtih Klmda ki hidshdhat ko dekh nahin ■akta.

4 Niqudemua ne us se kahd, A'dmi jab bt'irha Ini paya, to kyiinkar paidd ho saktd hai? kyi us men yih taut

ny

NA', III. Niyitdtmm ne ki thi.

hai, ki do-b&n apni mi ke pet nieti dar de, aur paidd howe ?

5 Yinn' no jawdb diya, ki Main tujhe sach aach kahtd hiin, Agar idmi pdni aur B6h se paidi na howo, to wuh Jthudiki bidsbdhal imai dikhil ho nahin sakti.

6 Jo jisra se paidd h fiil bai, jinm hai ; aur jo Ruh se paidd bui hai, nih hai.

I Ta'ajjub na kar ki main. i- tujhe kahd, ki Tumhen sar i Dau paidil honi Mftir hai.

8 Hawdjidhar chdhti bai chalti hai, aur tu us ki iwd?, suntd hai, par lialini jdntd ki wuh kalian ae iti, aur kabin ko jiti hai : bar ek jo Riili se paidd luiii nisi hi hai.

t* Nhjudeinus ne jawdb men US M kaiia, Vih biten kyiinkar ho sakti hain?

10 Yisii' ne jawdb diya, aur us se kaki, K ya tii bani Isrdel ki ustdd bai, aur yih bdtcn uahiii Santa?

II Main tujhe sach sach kahtd hiin, ki Jo hara jdnte hairj, kahte haiji, aur jis« bnm ne dekhd hai, us par gawibJ dete hain : aur tum hamdii gBWihj ijabiil nahin karte.

12 Jab main ne tumben zarain ki b.iteii knhin, aur tum yaqin uahiii karte, phir a^ar main tataheg famili ki bdtcn kahdn, to tum kyiinkar yacun karoge V

13 Aur kol ismdn par nahin gayd, siwd us shakhs ke jo dsmiin par s.' utrd, ya'ne, Ibu i A'dam jo damin par hai.

14 \ Aur jis tarah Musi ne sirap ko baydl>du men bulaudi par rakhii, usi tarah »e Karfir hai, ki Ibn i AViam bbi nthiyijie;

15 Ti ki jo koi us par imdn liwe. halik n« liowe, baiki hamosha ki

'udagi [liwe.

16 % Kynnki Ehudi ne jahan ko aisd piydr kiyd hai, ki us ne apnd iklauti Buti bakhsha, ta ki jo koi \\n

Fman aur b<.-imdni YL'HANNA', IV.

par iman l:iwc, balak na, howe, baiki liiuiieslia ki ziudagi pdwe.

17 KyLiijki Khudd De apne Bete ko ■ahAn Btorj is liye nahin bbeja, jaban par VU& k A bukm kate, baik liye, ki janin ns ke sabub uajdt pdwe.

18 1T Jt> us par irudn latd hai, us ke liye Rttd kii bukm nahiij : lekin jo us [tar imdn nahin lata bai, us ke wdste pa/.a led bukni ho eliukil ; kyiinki wuh Khudd ke iklaute Bete ke nain par imdn na Uiyi.

19 Aur s:izd ke liukiu ka sabah yib bai, ki nur jahan inen, ayd, aiu* iusdn ne lariki ka iii'ir se ziyada piydr kiyd ; kyiinki un ke kam lmre tbe.

20 Kyiiiiki Jo koi burai kartd liai, wuh uiir .se duabinani rakhta hai, aur mir ke \t&$ nahin dtd, ta aib» na ho ki us ke kitin fisb bo jdwen.

21 Pai1 wub jo haqq karta hai, nur ke pds dtd bai, td ki uw ke kiiiu zahir howen. ki wo Khudd ki mani se bain.

22 t Ba'd liu Mtoii ke Yisu' aur ua ke shagird Yahudiya ki sarzanrin uien do ; aur wub wahdu un ku sdth rahd kartu, aur bapfciama detd tbd.

23 f Aur Yuhannd bbi 8iliin ke garfb 'Ainon men baptisuia detd thd, kyi'mki wahdri pdni bubut thd; aur log de, aur baptisma pdyd.

24 Ki Yubaniid lumoz qaidkhdno raerj ddld tia gaya tlid.

2"> ^T Tab Yuhannd ke aMgirdon aur Yabiidif)Tj ko darmiydn, twlidrat ki babat, bahs bui.

2(i Aur wo Yuhannd pds de, aur us se kahi, ki Ai Rabbi, wub jo Yardan ke |nir tere sdth thd, jis par tii ne ga- wdhi di, dokb, ki wub baptiaiua detd hai, aur sab uh ke pdw alu Lain.

27 Yiihannd ne jawab diyd, aur kahd, ki Koi insan kisi cliiz ko, magar jis bdl ki wuli usb dsmdu »e di jdwe, pa* D&hfrj sakta.

29 Jis ki dulhin hai, wub dulhi bai ; par dulho kd dost jo khara bai, aur us ki suutd bai, dulho ki d'wdz sc babut ktiush botd bai ; pas meri yib khuani puri btii.

30 Zariir bai ki wub barho, par main ghatiin,

31 Wu'h jo lipar se dtd hai, sab ke lipar hai : wuh jo zamin se hai, zaiuini bai, aur zamiu ki kahtd hai : wuh jo dsman so dtd bai, sab ke lipar hai.

32 Aur jo kucbh us ne dek h a aur sund hai, us ki gawdbi detd bai, aur koi shukhs us ki gawdbi qabtU nahin karta.

33 Jis iio us ki gawdhi qabtil ki hai, mulir ki bai ki Kbudd Mdh6bJ hai.

34 Ivyiinki jise Khudd no bbejd bai, wuh Kbuda ki batoii kahtd hai ; kyiiij- td K'ini.iii p;aLi];'usb karko Ruh uahnj dotd.

86 IldpBeto ko piydr kartd hai, aur sab chi/en us ko liath men di bain.

36 Jo ki Bule par imdn Idtd bai, hamcsha ki zindagi us ki bai : aur io Boto i»r imdu naliirj Idtd, haydt koua dckhegd, baiki Khudd kd qahr us par t'iiiil X bab

IV BA'B.

AUR jab Khudiwnnd nc jand, ki Fariaiojj ne euna, ki YienV Yii- hannd se Eiyada shagb-d kartd hai, aur baptiama deU hai,

2 (Hdlanki Tiaii' dp naliirj, baiki us e shdgird baptisma dete tbo,)

3 Tab wuh Yahudiya ko chhorke Jalil ko phir gayd.

4 Aur zariir ibd ki wuh Samariya hoke Jiwe.

5 Tab wub Sdmariya ke ek shabr uien, jo Siikdr kahldtd hai, us milkiyat ko liazdik jo Ya'qub no apne bete Yunuf kodi thi, dyd.

" Aur Ya'quh ka kila wabin tba.

28 luiu kbud meru «aw&h bo, ki.Chunauchi Yiau' safar se indndahokb ajain ne kahd, ki Maig Masih nabinJus kue par yiin hi baitbd Yib magar ua se dge bbejd gaya hiin. [cbliatbi ghari ke qarib thd. '

Masih 'k Samari 'aurat se YUHANNA', IV. guftogu, kartu.

T Tab Samanya ki ek 'aurat pduijddwaud, inujhe ma'ldinliotahai, ki ap i :ii, Yisii' nousse kaha,Mujhc pabi haiu.

jtm ko de.

20 Hainire bdpdadoi

B Kyunki us ke shagird shahr men par parastish ki ; aur tum kulit* lio, ki gaye tlie, "ki kuchh khane ko mol len. \ w uh jagab jaban narasilah karni cha- 9 Samariya ki us 'aurat nc use hiye, Yardsalain men hai.

21 Yiaii* ne us se kahd, ki Ai 'aurat, Bwri hdt ko yauin rak h, ki wuh ghan iiti hai, ki jin m«n tum na tu is pahir par, aur na Yanisalam uien, JJap ki parastish karogo.

22 Tum ua ki, jise iiahiij jante ho, paiastiali kartu lio: baui uh ki.jise jante liiiin, parutlah kartu haiu : kyun- ki uajat Yahudion men se hai.

23 Par wuh ghari dti hai, baiki ab hi hai, ki jia mim saehche parau tar riili aur rasti su Bap ki parastish kareiige ; kyunki Bdp bhi apue pirastarou ko oliabta hai ki aisc howen.

24 Khuda Kuh hai, aur us ke paras - taron ko f&r/. bai ki nih aur rasti se p.irastish karen.

25 'Aurat ne ua se kahii, Main janti hun ki Masih (jia ki tarjuma Kristus hai,) ara hai ; jab wuh awega, to bam- oq sab bdton ki khabar duga.

26 Yisti' !!<■ u,; :■,■ kaha, Main, jo tujh se hilttt inin, WnU luiii.

27 1 Itno men us ke shagird ae, aur ta'ajjub kiya ki wuh 'aurat ae liaten karta iba ; par kisi ne na kaha, ki T u k ya ehabta hai? ya, Us sc kis Iiye bdten karta hai 't

28 Tab 'aurat nc apna ghara chhora, aur shahr men jake lo^on se kaba,

20 A'o, ek mard ko dekko, jis nc sab kain jo main ne kiyc niiijhe kahe : kya yih Masih nabin. 'j'

30 Tab we shahr bo niklo, aur ua pas de.

31 \ Is 'arse men us ke shdgirdon ne us se darkhwast karke kaha, ki Ai Habbi, kuchh kbaiye.

32 Lekin us ne unhen kali d, Mere pas khane ke liye khurak hai jiae tum nahiii jante.

33 la liye shagirdon ne apas men

kaba, ki Kydtikar tu, jo Yahudi hai, mujh se, jo Samariya ki 'aurat bun, pani piae ko maugta hai"? kydnki Yahudi Saiuarion se subbat nabin rakhte hain.

10 Yisu' ue jawab men, us se kahd, Agar tu Khuda ki bakhhhiflh ko, aur us' ko jo'tujh se kaljta liai, Mujhe pine ko do, pabcbanti, ki wuh kaun hai, to tu us so niaugti, aur wuh tujhe jitd pani duta.

11 'Aurat uo us se kaba, Ai Khuda- wand, tujh pas jiani khinchne ko kucli li naliin, aur ki'ia gahra hai: phir ta ne wuh jita pani kanan au piyi?

12 Kya tu hamdre bap Ya'qub se, jia ne ham ko yih kua diyi, aur kbud

1 m:, aor us ke beton n e, aur us ke charpayon ne us se piya, bara bai ?

13 Yisu' na jawab diya, aur us se kahd, Jo koi yili pani piu, phir piy*asa boga:

li Pur jo koi wuh pani, jo main use diingA, pie, wuli abatl tak jiiyasa na boga ; baiki jo pani main use deia bun, us men pani ka sota ho jaega, jo hamesba ki ziudagi tak jari raiiuga.

15 'Aurat ne us sc kaha, Ai Klui- diiwand, yih pani mujh ko de, ki main piyasi na hourj, aur na bharne ko ya- ban diin,

16 YislV ne us sc kaba, Jake apne shauhar ko huld, aur yahdn d,

17 'Aurat ne jawab diya, aur kahd, ki Main be-shauhar biin. Yisu' ne us se kaba, ki Tu ne durust kahd, ki main bu-shauhar bun :

ltt Kyunki tu fSaoh khaham kar chukf hai, aur wuh jo ab tu rahhti hai tcrd kliasam nabin; tu ne yih sach kahd.'

l'J 'Amat ne us se kaba, Ai Khu- 121

Masik -;A- Samari \

YU'IIAKSA' liye khini

kahd, kj Kyd ];■>! IdyA hai ?

34 YiBiV ne unhen kahA, IferA khdni yib hai, ki anne briHJnowAU? ki marzi baji lAun, aur ns k;i kain pura karun.

35 Kyd tum nahin kabte, ki Abhi

!/'■/'<':'■' '•"'■b''.

46 Aur Yisu' phir QAnao Ja'i) man, jahin us lio paui ko mai bandya thA, AyA. Aur badshdh kd ek iimlAzim thA, jis kd betd Kal'arudhuiu raen. bi- uiAr thd.

47 Jab suna, ki Yisii' Yahudiya se JalH men AyA, us pds gayA, nur ub ki

chAr mahine bani haig., lab faal Awi-gi ? minnat ki, ki dwc, aur us ke bete ko dekbf, niaig tum se kahtd hrin, Apni ebangA kare : kyunki wuh marne par

ankhen uthdo, aur kheton ko dekni ki wc kdtne ku ttye pak chuke hairi.

36 Aur katnewdld mazduri pAtA hai, aur hamesha ki zindagi ke Iiyc mm jam'* kartd hai, ta ki wuh jo botd liat, aur wuh jo kdttA bai, donorj bdbam kliush howen.

37 Aur ub liar yili masai tilik dti bai, ki Ek botd hai, aur drisra kdttd hai.

38 Main ne tumhen bhcja hai, tik: use, jis men tum ne inihnat nahin ki, kdto : gair logon ue miunat ki, aur tam mi k i' milmat men sbatnil titi u.

39 K Aur us shahr ke babut se Samari us 'aurat ke kahne gawdhi di, ki Us nu Bfcb kuchh jo main ne kiya liai mujkc kahA, us iman lae.

40 Aur un Hdmarion ne us pds Ake us ki minnat ki, ki hamare satii nh : chunAnchi wuh do roz walidn rahd,

41 Aur unke siuri ani babuture uwi ke kalAm ko sabab f mau Jat'j

42 Aur us 'mirat ko kahA, Ab bani lai|at tere kuhne ko iman naluri ]:ile; kyiinki hain ne khud mi ria, aur jante hain, ki yib filhain'riat juhdn kd NajAt- denewAld Masih bab

43 K Aur wuh do KM ba'd waliAn Be rawdua bokar Jalil ko jtayA,

44 Kyiinki Yisii' ne khud gawdhi :iisdre hain.

thd.

48 Tab Yisii' ne use kahd, Agar tum iiisliiiiian aur kardmaten na dokhogo, to iman na laoge.

4'J Bidtthi.li ko mu lazim ne us H kahd, Ai Khudawaml, ptahtal us se ki mera larki mar jawi.-, ular a.

50 Yisu' nc use kabd, JA, terd betd jitdhai. Aurusmard ne us bdt kd, jo Yisii' ne uwe kabi, i'atiqad kiyd, aur cluiia mi

51 Aur wuh rdh hi men thd, ki uh ke naukar use milc, aur khabar |>ahunchdi, ki Terd betd jitd hai.

52 Tab us ne un se rmeliha, ki Use kis waqt se drdm hone laga? Unhtin ne kahd, ki Kal satwin j;hari us ki tap jdti rahi.

53 Tab bdp nc jdna, ki wubi gbari tbi, jab Yisd ne ub se kahA ihA, ki Terd beta jitd bai, Aur wuh khud aur us kd sArA ghar, imin l.iyi.

54 Yib dusrA ma'njiM hai, jo Yisu' Yahudiya M Jalil nu-tt dke dikJi-

idyd,

Y BA'B.

BA"I> us ke Yuluidiou ki ek 'id thi, aur Yisii' Yanisalain ku gayd. 2 Aur Ytininalain men bher-darwazu ke p4a ek hauz hai, jo TbrAni dmb Bait-IIasda kabldtA hai; us ke pdnch

di, ki nabi apne watan men 'izzat nahin pAtA.

45 Aur jab wuh Jalil men AyA, to .Talilion ne us ki khAtirddvi ki, ki aab kAmon k<>, jo us ne Y:in'isalain ke bich 'id men kiyo the, dekha thd ; kyiinki we bbi 'id men gaya the. 122

3 Un men nA-tawdnon,aur andhon, aur ianttron, aur pazhmurdon ki ek bar! bhir jiari thi, jo jjdiii ke hilne ki niiHita/ir tbi.

4 Kyuuki ek lirislua ba'ze waqt. us bom mag utnrke jjAhi ku hildtd thd, aur paui ko hilne ke ba'd jo koi ki

\ ek bimar admi ko YU'HANNA', V. changii ftttrft.

i~ S Lekin Yisii' ne unben jawab

diyi, ki Meri BAp ab tak kdm kiya

karti hai, aur main bhi kini kiyii

18 Tab Yahutlfon iie aur bhi ziyada us ku (jiiil karne chdhi ; kyunki u» na n& ftioal sabt hi ko &a mana, baiki Khudd ko apni Bap kali k t apne ta,in Khuda ke harabar kiya.

19 Tab Yiail' ne jawab diyd, aur nn se kahi. Main tnm ae sach Nu kaliUi bar,, ki Beta Ap se kuehh nabin kar sakti, magar wuh jo Uap ko kartu dekhe ; kyunki jo kuchh ki wuh kartd hai, lio t i bhi uni tarah se kartd hai,

20 I» liye ki Bap Bete ko piydr karta hai, aur wah kuchh ki k had karti bui, use dikhdti hai : aur wuh un se bare katn usc dikhiega, ki tam ta'ajjub karoge.

21 Is liye ki jis tarah Bdp murdon ko uthdta hai, aur jildtd hai, Beta bhi jinhuu chahta hai jildti liai.

22 Kyunki Bap kisi shakhs ki 'addlat nahig karta, baiki us 'ne sari 'nddlat Bete ko somp di hai :

23 Td ki nah Bete ki 'ir.zat karen, jis tarah se ki Bap ki HtzsA kafte iinirj. Jo Bete £i 'izzat nahirj karta, Bip ki, jis ne use bhtjd hai, tsaat nahin karta.

24 Main tum se aneh s.ich kahti hiiu, Wuh jo mori kalam siinta hai, aur ua par, jie ne mujhe bhoja hai, latin latd liai, liamesha ki zinda^i us ki bi.i, aur us par saza ka hukm nahin, baiki maut mo guzarke wuh zindugi uien pahuneba hai.

86 Miun tum «e Rach sach kahti hi'iTi, ki Wuh ghsrt iti hai, aur ab hai, ki jis men murtlo KhudA ke Bete kl Awdz Bunerige, aur wo tuinke jienge. 28 Kyiinki jis tarah BAp Ap men /.indagi Takhta hai, usi tarah ue ne Bet.e ko bhi diya bai, ki apne mon ne yih kdm sabt ke.zindagi rakhe ;

| 27 Baiki OM ikhtiyir bhi diyi bai,

pahle uf mi'n utarta, kaisi hi bimiri nion giriftar bui ho, ub se chanai ho

Aur waban ek sbakhs thi, jo «ttitis baras se iia-tawini meti giriftar ho rabi thi.

fi Yisii' ne jab use pare lirto dekbi, aur jini ki wuh hari muddat m us hilat merj hai, to us ue kuna, ki Kya tu chihti hai ki cbangi ho jie?

7 Us ni-tawin ne use jawab diyd, ki Ai Khudiwand, mujh pas Admi nahiji, ki jab yili pilui hilayi jae,"to mujhe haius men ddl do : aur jab tak main ip se Aun, dt'isri mu j h se |iahlo utar ra \;Ui hai.

8 Viau' no use kahA, Uth, aur npnd khatoliuthikarehaliji. '

0 Wonhi wuh Bhakhs changi ho sayi, aur apnd kliatoii utha liyi, aur chala uyi : aur wuh nbl kd din thi.

10 ^[ Ia liye Yahudi on ne use, jo dtt&gi lnia iba. kulii, ki'Yih sabt kd roa hai; tujhe rawa nahin ki kliatolu ko uthi le jiwe.

11 Us ne unben jawdb diyi, ki Jis ne mujhe ehangd kiyi, ai nfl mujiic farmiya, ki Apud kijuloli uthdkc chali i&,

12 Tab uahon. ne us ne piichhi, ki Wuh kaun shajjihs hai jia no cujbe l;ahi, Apni kbatoli uthdke chali ji 'r

13 Ua no, jo changi htfi tba, na jd- nA ki wuh kaun hai, is liyo ki Yisu' wahaii se tnl gayA thi, kyfiiiki us jagah men bhil thi.

14 Ba'd u» ke Yisn' ne use haikal men pdyd, aur iia se knhi, ki t)okh, tti obangd ho gayd, phk gundh na kami, H howo ki td us se badtar balA men pare.

15 Wah ahakh» rawina hui, aur Yahiidion ko ittild' di, ki jie ne mujhe duuigd kivi, Yisu' haL

10 Ia liyo Yahiidion ne Yisu' ko ■satiyi, aur us ke qatl" ki ghit men laga: kyunki roz kivd thi. 123

Maxik hl apne Bap kiyawdM, YL"HAN'\A'J VI. ki 'addlat kure, is liye ki wuh ]lm A'dara hai.

28 Ia se ta'ajjub na karo, kyunki wuh «hari dti hai, ki jis mefl wu sab, jo qabron mon b.nig, uh ki dwdz sutienge,

29 Aurniklenge ; jinhon nc neki ki ■.'i. /i tulari ki i.jiyam.at. l;o wdstc, aur Jlnhflj) ae bodi ki hai, snzd ki qlytonat ke liye.

30 Main dp sc kuchh kar naluri sakta: jaiKa main sunta hun, hukm kartd liiin : aur nicri 'addlat duruttt hai ; kyiinki apni' marzi ko nahin, par Bap ki marzi ko, jin ne inujke bhejd, chdutd hun.

31 Agar main apne par gawdhi dtin, to meri gawdhi haqq nahin.

32 T Diisrd hai, jo nmjh par ga- wdhi dctd hai; aur inaij_i jdutd luiii ki wuh gawdhi, Jo uiujlj p: u- ditla hai, haqq liai.

33 'I'uiu ne Yrihaund ke pas paydin bkeja, nur us ne haqq par gaivalri di.

34 Lekin main insan ki giiwahl nahin chahtd; par main yih bdten kabid hun, ta ki tum najdt pdo.

35 Wuh jaltd aur chamakta chirdg tlia ; aur tum chdhte thc ki lhori der lak us ki roslini se khush ruh u.

• W Lekiu tnujh pas Yukannd ki ga- wdhi se ek hari gawdhi hai : ia liye ki ye kdm jo Ddp ne inujhe sompe haiij, id ki pure karun, ya'ne, ye kau» jo main kartd nun, uiujh par gawdiii dtite haiii, ki Ddp lio ruujho bhejd hai.

37 AurBapJis do niujhe blieja hai, U3 nc ipinujh par gawdhi di hai. Tum lio kublii us ki dwdu nahin suni, aur na us ki .surat dekhi.

38 Aur tum uh kd kalam apne dilon mon nahin rakhte ; kynrjki tuin us par, jise us ne blieja, imdn nahin Mte.

3fl ^ Tum nawisliUm mondkundh- teho: kyunki tum gumAn karteho

ur l'iiJiantui ki,pah lund.

40 Aur tum nahin chdhte ki mujh pas do, la ki ziudagi pao.

41 Main uh 'izzat ko, jo insan ki taraf se hoti, manzfir nahin kartd.

42 Main tumben jantd hi'in. ki tum meri Khucid ki muhabhat. nahin.

43 Main apue Bap ke ndua sg dyii hun, aur tum mujhc cpibfil nahin karte; agar koi dusni apne nam se dwe, to tum use qamil karoge.

44 Tum jo djas mon ek duare ki 'izzat chdhte BO, aur wuh 'izzat, je akule Khudd se hai, naliin dhuncllite, kyiinkar fmdn la nkte bo9

4o Gumdn mat karo, ki main Bdp ke pds tumhdri farydd kMtduttt ek to hai tumlidri farydd kanioivald, ya'ue, Mn.sa, jis jwir tumhard hlmrosd hai.

4d Kyunki agar tum Miisd par iman lace, to nuijli par bhi imdii late. is liye ki us ne mero haqq miin likhd

47 Lekinjis hdl ki tum u» ke na- wi.shtun ku yaqiu na karoge, to mert bdton ko kyiinkar yaain karoge? VI BA'B.

Y ISU" un bdton ke ba'd Jalil ke daryd ke pdr, jo daryd e Tibari- yds hai, g&yd.

2 Aur ek bari bhir us ko pichhe h o li, kyiinki unhon ne us ke mu'ajize, jo us m' l.imaron par dikhde, dekhe tiic.

3 l'iiir YisiV pahdr par gaya, aur wahdn apue shagirdori lie «ath baitha.

4 Aur Yahiidion ki "id i faaah nazdik tlii.

5 ^ Pas jab Yisii' ne dnkhen uth- j, aur ueklui ki hari bhir mere pas

dti hai, to FailbuB se kaha, ki Ham kahan se in ke khdne kfl liye rotidri khariden 'i

(i Par us ne yih imtihdn ki rdh ee kahd tlid, kyunki wuh dp jantd thd jo kiya uliahtfi tha.

Failbiis ne use jawab diyd, ki Do

ki un men tuinhdre liye hamesha ki Isau diuar ki rutidn un ke liye bas na ziudagi hai; aur yih we hi bain, joj hoijgi, ki un mes se liar ek thord sd uiujh par gawdhi deto hain. pdwo.

124

Masih panch iiazdr admimt ku YU'UANXA', VI.

8 Ek ne us k*? sbdgirdon men Shama'un Patrus kd- bhdi Andriyds

■ kahd,

9 Yalian L'k clihokra hai, jis ko pas jau ki panch rotidn, aur do ehhoti madihlian, hain ; par yili -itno logon men kya hain ?

10 Tab Yisri' ne kahd, ki Logcrj ko bithdo. Aur us jagah bah u t ghau thi. So ginii men takhminan panch hazdr niard baithe.

11 Aur YiaiV ne rotidn utha lin, aur shukr karke shdgirdon ko din, aur shagmlon lio unhen, jo baithe tlie i'iniiM | aur isi tarah machlilion ■S, jid qadr ki we ch&lite the.

1^ Aur jab we eer ho chuko, to us ne apnc shagirdon so kahd, ki Un tukfog ku jo lxtch raha hain jatu'a kii'u, La ki kuohli khmab lia howo.

18 Cliunanehi unhon ne jain'a kiye, aur jau ki pdueli rocioti ke tukron se, jo un khanowaloB se bach raiie thc, barah tokrian lihnriij,

14 Tab un logon ne yih mu'ajiza, jo Yifiu' ne dikhdyn, dckhkar k;ilia, PUhaqiqat wuh nabi jo jahdn ineu dnewdla tha yihi hai.

15 T Pas Yiaii' mg ma'Iiim karke ki we chiihte hain ki dwejj, aur use zabardasti [.«karke bddshdh karen, dp akcli pahar ku jiliir gayd.

lu' Aur jab ahdin hdi, to uh ke shagird dnryd ku kinare gaye;

17 Aur kishti par charhku darya par Kid'arnahum ko chale. Us watjt andherii ho chala tha, aur YisiV un pas *i.i ava llui.

ly Aur ajidlu ke sabab darya lab- ranc laga.

19 Aurjabwcqarib puehisya tis K r partdb ke kheo ohuko thc, unhon ne Yiaii' ko darya par chaite, aur kishti ku qarib ite dek ha, aur dur gaye.

20 Tab us ne unhen, kaha, ki Main "■'" daro inat.

kgttt) par, jihdii we jate the, jd pa- huuchi.

2'J ^ D&sre din, jab bhir ne, jo darya ke us pdr kbarf tbi, yih deklut, kl wahdg siwa us ek ke, jis par us ke shdgird charh baitho the, toi dusri kishti na thi, aur yih ki Yisu' apne shagirdon ke sdth us kishti par na gayd tnd, baiki sirf us ke shagird gaya the;

23 (Par aur kiahtidn Tibariyas su us jagah ke nazdik, jahdn Uflhotj ne Khudawand ke shukr ke ba'd roti khai thi, ain :)

24 Pas kb m hhir nc yih dekha hai, ki wahan na Yisii' aur na, us ke Nhagird buiii, to we bhi kishtion par oharhe, aur Yisii' ki talash men Kal'ar- nahuiu ko i'n'.

2i"i Aur unhon nc use rtaryd par pd- ke us uh kahd, ki Ai Rabbi, td yahdn kab dya ?

2ii Yisd' nc unhon jawdb djytt, nur kiiha, ki Main tum se snch sach" kahtfi

'_. ki Tum inujhe dhi'indhto ho, fa liye ki tum ne mu'ajize dekhe, so nahiri, baiki is liye ki tum rotidn khdke ser hde.

Fdni khurdk ke liye nahig, halki u b khdno ke liyo naihimt kam jo hamesha ki zindiif;! tak thaharra hai, ki Ibu i A'dam wuh tumhen dogd; kyiinki Bdp ne, jo Khudi hai, u par iniihr kar di hai.

'OH Tab unhon no us so kahd, ki Hain kyd kareg.'td ki Khuda ke kdm hajd ldwen 1

li9 Yiau' ne jawdb men utthen kaha, Khuda kd kdm yih hai, ki tum us par, jise us ne bheja, imdn ldo.

30 Tab mihon ne na se kahd. Pas tii kauu sa niwliau dikhdtd hai, td ki bani dekhke tujh par iman ldwen? tu kya kartd hai?

31 Hamdre bdpdddou ne baydbdn eg mann khdyd; ehundnchi likhd

liL Pliir unhon ne khitah! se usc hai, ki Ua ne unhen asmdn se ro$ kishti pir le liyij aur kishti filfaiir iis|khinc kodi.

Masih dp ko zindagi

YL"HANNA', VT.

fct roti thahr&ta.

32 Tali Yisft' oo unhen kahd, Main t uni ae sach sauh kanta, hun, ki Musa 110 tumben asuidui roti naliiu di, baiki merd Bdp tumben nobohl dsmani roti detd hai.

88 ls liye U Kliudii k! r.>ti wuh hai, jo daman so ntnrti, aur jah&n ko zindagi tiak hslili bai.

34 Tab unlion ne us w kaha-, Ai Khuddwand, ham ko haniesha yih roti diyd kar.

35 \ i' isu' ne imken kaha, Main zindagi ki roti liiin: jo mujh pas ata hai, nargiK bhukhd na hogd: aur Jo mujh par iman lata hai, kabhf piydsa n a hogd.

3li Lekin main ne tumhen kaha hai, ki Tum ne to mujhc dekhd, par im&n nabi n Ide.

37 Harck,jiBC R;tp ne mujhe diyd hai, mujh pas dwega ; aur use jo mujh pas ata hai main hargiz n ikal na dungd.

3H Kyunki main asmdn par no is liye nahin utri, ki apni marzi par, baiki na ki marzi i>ar chaluii, jis ue mujhc hhejd hai.

39 Aur Bap, jis ne mujhe bhejd hai, yih chahta hai, ki main uu an s*1 j<i us no mujhe diyu hain kisi ko na khoiin, baiki use akhiri din phir uthdun.

40 Aur jis no mujhe bhrja bui, ns ki marzi yih hai, ki har ek jo liete ko dekbe, aur uh naf iman Idwc, hamesha ki zindagi pawe; aur ki main use akhiri din meri uthatin.

41 Tali Yahudi us par kurkurae, is liye ki uh ne kaha, Wuh roli, jo as- man se utri, main hun.

42 Aur unhon ne kaha, Kyd yih Hati' Yi'iHtif ka h«t£ nahin, jis ke bdp aur mi ko ham jiiiite hain ? phir wuh kyuiikar kalita hai, ki Main asmau M utra hiin 1

43 Tab Yiati' ne jawdb men un ko kaha, ki A'pas men niat ktirkurao.

44 K.oi shakhs mujh pas a nahin

126

sakta, magar jia ha! ki Bap, jis ne mujhe bheja hai, use khinch lawe ; aur main use akhiri din nirn ullidlinga.

45 Nabiorj ne yih likhd hai, ki We sah Khuda ke sikhldc hi'ie Imrige. B liye har eh soak h s, jis ue Bap se auua aur sikliti hai, mujh pas ata hai.

4(i Yih imhiri hai ki kisi shakbs ue Bap ko dekbd hai, magar wuh jo Khu- da ki taraf so hai, usl ne Bap ko dckkd bai.

47 Main tum ae sach saeh kahta hun, Jo mujh par iman lata hai, hamesha ki zindagi usi ki hai.

48 Zindagi ki roti main hi hun.

49 Tumhdro bapdddon ne bayaban men manu khdyd, aur mar gaye.

50 Roti jo asmau se utani hai wuh hal, ki koi ddmi use khako na mare.

51 Main hiiii wuh jiti roti, jo dsman se utri ; agar koi shakhs is roti ko lehae, to abad tak jitd rahegd; aur roti jo main dnnga, mera gosht hai, ju main jcdi&n ki /.imlagi ko liye diinga.

52 Tab Yahudi yih kahke apas men bahs karne lage, ki Yih mard apnd gosht kyi'mkar hamon do sakta hai, ki khdon?

53 Tab Yiau' ne unhen kahd, Main

i M :-iieh sach kanta hun, Agar tum

Ibn i A'dam kd gO«bt na khao, aur m kd lahtl na pio, to tum men zindagi nahin.

54 Jo koi meri gosht kbdtd hai, aur merd labu pita hai, hamesha ki zindagi usi ki hai ; aur main use akhiri diri lilhaiinga.

55 Kyfinki mera gosht nlhaqiqat khdne, aur merd lahil iilhaqiuiat piue ki chii hai

56 W'ili jn niM-ii gosht khatd, aur nmrd labu pitd bai, uni j h men rahta bai, aur Tilam us \m:\i.

57 Jis tarah sc ki zinda Bdp ne ninihi' l'liijd, aur main Bap ae zinda lii'.ij ; isi tarah wuh bhl jo mujhe kbiild bai mujh se zinda hoga.

68 Wuh ruti jo ieaata fe ntri, yib

MadL ke biid'O

hai ; ri» jaisA ki tumhAi mana khake mar gayc; wuh jo vili roti khavA hai, abad tak jitA rahegA. 59 Us ne K: i fam ih u m men ta'Hm

YUTIANNA', VII.

hApdAde

ux se tukar karvd. VII BA' B. ke Yisu" Jalil nicrj sair

B. karta raha, ki Yahudiya nu:n Mb kami na chAhA, ia liyo ki Yahudi deto hi'io 'ibadatkhane men yih baten ii» ke qatl ki fikr men the. kabin. 2 Aur Y&Mdion kT 'id i khfma naz-

I Tab uh ko ahAgirdon uierj

bahuton uc sunke kahA, ki Yih sakht

kalam bal ; use kaun sun saktA bal ?

61 Yisu' iio az khud jdukar ki us k*; shAgird A|>as men ia bat par kurkurate hain, unhen ksM, KyA yih tum ko thokar ka bA'is bal ?

62 Pas agar tum Ibu i k'3taa k.. A par jAte, juhan wuh Age tha, dekbogft, t n kya hogA?

63 "T: ii"!* hai wiiii, Jo jihiti hai; jisin 8C kmhh iaiiia nahin; yih baten jo main tumben kahti hiin, ruh Lain, aur zindagi hai n.

64 ?ar tum men ba'/.e hain, jo iman nahin late. KyiSyki Yiail' ibtida se jAnti tlia, ki wejo iman nahin liit-e, kaun hain, aur kaun uao nakarwaegA.

65 Phir ua ne kaha, la liye main nc tumben kaha, ki kui shakhs, siwa us ke jiso men BAp ki taraf se 'inAyat huA, mujh pas nahin A saktA.

66 T "Us waqt se us ke shA^rdon men se bahutere ulte phir gaye, aur ba'd us ke ua ke *Ath na obalo.

67 Tab Yiaii' ne bArah'.m ki> kalut, KyA Unn bui chdhte ho ki cbale jao?

68 Shama'iin Patms ne BM jawAb diyA, Ai Khudawand, ham kia ke pas jaen ? basMataa ki zindagi ki bdteii to tere pAs hain.

69 Aur ham to iman lAc hain, aur jAn ji,aye hain, ki tti zinda-KhudA kA Beta Masih hi

70 YisA' nc unliefi jawab diyA, KyA main ne tum bAralion ko nahin chuna, aur ok tum men sc shaitan hai ?

71 Us nc Shama'tin ko bete YAhii- dih Isbariynti ki bAbat kahA : kyiinki wuhi us ko pakarwaue chAlitA, aur un bArahon mim «o tliA.

ia? ~

dik Ai.

Tab us ke bh*io£ ne us se kahA, YahAn ee rawAna ho, aur Yahudiya m. n ja, IA ki un kamon ko, jo tii karta hai, tere shAgird bhi dekhen.

4 Kyunki aisA kol nahin jo kuchh kAm chhipke kare, aur chAhe ki ap niashliiir hio. Agar tu ye kfim karta hiii, to apne ta,in jahAn ko dikhA.

5 Kyiinki us ke bhAi bhi us par iman na lAe.

(i Tab Yisu' ae unhcii i'urmAyA, ki MerA waqt hauuz iiahin aya : par tum- hara waqt har dam banA hai.

7 DunyA tum se 'adAwat nalrin. rakh sakti ; par mujh sc 'adAwat rakbti, kyiinki main us par gawAhi dctA hiin. ki us ke kAm bure hairj.

Tum is 'id men jAo ! main abhi h 'i'i men naliiij jani, ki mci» w;iqt banoz pdrA naliiii hsiA.

9 So wuh yih biitorj unhen kahke Jalil men ralia.

10 T Lokin jab ns ke bhAi rawan» hue the, wuh bhi 'id men gaya, zAhira nahin, baiki chhipke.

lfTab Yahudi 'id men use dhun- dhne lage, aur kahA, ki Wuh tahan hai?

VI Aur logon irn-n us ki babat bari takrar thi: ba'zc kahto tbe, ki Wuli nek Admi hai : aur kitno kahte the, ki Nahin, baiki wuh Jogon ko gumiAh ku r t A.

18 Lokin Yahi'idion ko dar se koi shakhs zibirA us ki bAbat ua kalita thA.'

14 % Aur jab 'id Adhi guzar gayi, Yisii' ne liaikal men jake ta'lim di.

15 Tab Yahudi ta'ajjub so bole, ki Ismardko bagairparlui kvtitikar kitAb- t» kd'iltu bat f '

MuMtah/rae YD'HANNA', VTI. Masih U Vd,.'(.

16 Tisfi' nn unhen jawabnir-n kah,i, chAnte, nur jilnte ho ki main kaitan ki Meri ta'Iim meri nabi n, baiki us ki kd hun : nur main an m nnhin ayli hai, jis ne mujhe bhejd. 'lain : magai mori bhe.jnew&14 sachchA

17 Wuh tthakhs, jo us ki marzi par | hai, jis se tum watp'f nahin ho. chald cbAbe, jAnegd, ki yih ta'Iim ' 29 Main use jAntd hun ; ia liye ki Kiiuda ki hai, ya ki main Ap se detAjmain us ki taraf so hiin, aur 01 M

hun.

mujlio bheja bui. 30 Tab unhun ne chalid ki aso pa-

13 Wuh jo apni taraf se kucbh| kahtA hni, apni Dtunugf chahtA riai:.kar len: par is liyo ki us kd waqt hanoz na pahuncha" tha, kisi ne us par hdth na cbUA.

31 Aur bhir mpn sp bahutere us par iman Ide, aur bnle.ki Jab Masih dwegd, to k ya m ae, jo ia ne dikhde hain, ziyada mn'ajize dikhdwogd ?

32 1 Farisiog no jamd'at ki takrar, jo us ki babat ho rahi t.bi, suni; tab Faritiion aur sarddr kali i mm no jiiyade lilicjo, ki use pakar leg.

33 U.i waqt Yiau' no unhen kahA, Ab lu tbori der tak main tmnhare sAth lniij. aur us pas, jis no majhe liliri:!, jiita hun.

34 Tum mujhe dhiiTtdhoge, aur na pdoge, aur jahan main hun, tum a na

iekin wuh la us ki bosom chAhta hai,

jis ne use bheja, so wuhi sachchA hni, aur us men ndrdati nahin.

19 K ya Musa ne uimhen shari'at na di, lckin koi tum men ne shari'at par 'amal nahin karta ? Tum kyt'm ID8M qatl ki fikr men ho?

20 Lo'ji'ij ne jawab diya, aur kaha, Tujh pAs ek deo hai ; katm tujhe qatl kiya chdhtd ?

21 Yisu' no jawab men unbeQ kaha, Main ne ck kaiti kiya, aur tum sab us ko ba*is ta'ajjub kartc ho.

22 HiUA nc tumben khatna ka hukin diya, lialarjki w uli Musa se na- liiij, baiki bdpdddon so hai ; bo tum salii, ko diu admi ka khatna karto ho.

23 Pas agar nabt ke roz Admi ka khatna kiya jdtd hai, tA ki MiisA ke shar'a se 'udiil na bo, to k y. 'l tum is liyo mujh par gussa ho, ki main ne sabt ke din ek inard ko hilkull changd kiy4?

24 Zahir ko muwAiiq 'adAlat na kain, baiki wajibi 'adAlat kara

25 Tab ba'ze Yarusalamfon ne kaha, Kya yih wuh nahin, ki jise qatl kiya cbahte haiji?

2(! Lekin,dckho, wuh to be-dharak boltA hai, aur we use kuchh nahin kahtu ; pas kya sardAron no bhi yaqin kiya, ki filhaqiqat yihi Masih hai?

27 Lckin hauien ma'lum hai.ki yih kahdn ki hai; par Masih jab awega, to koi na jAnogd ki wuh kahdn ki bai.

28 Tab Yisu' haikal men ta'Iim deta hiie yun pukArA, ki Tum mujhe pah-

1LJ8

35 Us waqt Yahi'uiinn ne dpas mon k ah d, ki Wuh kahdn j4eg4, jo use baru na pawenge? ky4 wuh un logon ke pas, jo Yunanion men paraganda hiie, j4eg;4, aur Yiin4nion ko ta'Iim do°4? 86 Yih ky.'i hit hai, Jo M ne kabi, Tum mujhi dbi'mdhoge, aur na pdoge: aur jahan main lilin, tum u a sakoge ?

37 Phir 'id ke pichhle din, jo bara n hai, Yisu' kliara hni, aur pukdrke .ha, Agar koi ]>iydsd ho, mujh pas 4we, aur pie.

3H Jo mujh par imdn lata hai, us ke badan se, jaisd kitdb kahti hai, jite pAni ki nadian jdri hongi.

39 Us ae yi'h Kiih"ki bdbat kabi, jise we, jo us par imdn Idu, pAnc par the; kyuaki Biih i Quds ab tak na utri tlii, is Uye ki Y'isn' hanoz apee jali! ko na pahtmeha tha.

40 "J Tab un logon men se bahitte-

Vi-IIANNA', VIII,

Ziudkdr 'aurat

ton ne yih eunkac kaha, FiLhattitja.t,

yilii wuh Nabi hai.

41 Auron ne kaha. Yih Masih hai. Pai- ba'/.on uu kaha, Kya Masih Jalil se ata hai 'i

4'.i Kya, kitalwu 111«» yih bit nahin, ki Masih Daiid ki nasi se, aur Bait- laham ki basli so, jabari Daud tha, atd hai?

43 So logon men us ki babat ikhti- laf hua.

44 Aur ha'zon ne chaha tha, ki use Bakar ]<ti i par kisi ne UU par hiiih ua «lale.

45 1 Tab piyade sardar kahinon aur Farisiort ke pas ae; aur unhoy, ne ua ne kaha, Tum use kyiin na lae P

H! Piyadon ne jawab diya, ki Ilar- giz kisi s'naklus iic is adiiii ki maulud kalam nahin kiya,

47 Tab Karision ne unhen jawab diya, Kya turn bhi guiurah kiyo gaye ho?

48 Ky& koi enrdaron ya Farision men se us par iman laya ?

4~9 Par yo log, jo sbari'at se waqif Ilahin, la'nati hain.

50 Nhiudemus ne, jo rit ko Yisu' pin aya tha, aur un men se ek tiui, unhen kahi,

51 Kya hamarf shari'at kisi ko, piislitar us se ki us ki aune, aur jane ki wuh kyi kami hai, guiiahgar thab- rati hai ?

5 U Unhon ne us ku j» w ah men kahi, Kya tu biii Jalilse hai? Dhi'iiidli.aur d»kh : ki Jalil men se koi nabi barpa nahin hai.

53 Phir har ck apne ghar ko gaya. V IH BA'B.

PAR Yisii' koh i Zaitun Oto gaya. 2 Aur aubh sawere haikal men pbir dikiiil bila, aur Bah log u» ke pas ia ; aur us uo baitbkur unhen ta'liin di.

3 Tab faqih aur Farisi ok 'aurat ko, W' zina men pnkri gayi thi, ua pas lae, aor ueo bicii men khara karku 129

M ktibttL 4 Us se kahi, ki Ai Ust.au, yih

'aurat zina men 'ain fi'al ke waqt pakri

Rayi

o Mdsa ne to Taurat men bam ko

hukm diya hai, ki aision ko sangsar

karun; par tu kya kahta, hai?

U Uiihon ne azmaish ke liya yih

kaha, ta ki ua par nalish ki wajh pa-

weri. Par Yisii'jhukku ungli se samin

par likhne laga,

7 Aur jab w e as se Buvtal karte ga- ye, to un ne sidhc hokur unhen kaha, JO ki tum men be-gunah hai, pahle wuhi uso patthar mare.

8 Aur phir jhukkezamin [«r likha. i) Aur we yili sunkar dil hi uil men

ap ko gunahgar samajhke barun ku loke chhoton tak ek ek karke chalo gaye : aur Yisti' akela rah gaya, aur 'aurat bich uieij khari rabi,

10 Tab Yisu' ne sidue hokar 'aurat ku siwa kisi ko na dckha, aur u.s M kaha, Ai 'aurat, we U;ri> nalish-kanie- wale kalian Kain 'i kya kiai nts tujh par hukm na kiva?

11 Wuhboli, Ai Khurliwand, kisi IM nahin. Yiaii' ne us ae kaha, Main bin tujh jiar hukm nahin karti; ja, aur phir gunah na kar.

12 % 'i'ab Yisti' ne phir un ne khi- tah karke kaha, Jahan ka nur main hun; jo meri pairaui karti andhere men na chalega, baiki zindagi ka nur pawega.

1J 'i'ab Farision ne us se kaba, Tu apne haqq men gawihi duta hai ; teri gawahi saeh nabin.

14 Yisii' ne jawab diyA, aur unhen kaha, Agarchi main apni babat ga- w:iiii dct;i hiin, btu bhi meri gawahi sachhai: kyiinki m&in jauta hiin, ki iiiuiij kalian so aya hiin, aur main kahaii ko jati lirtn ; par tum nahin jaute, ki main kabag se aya bufi, aur kahan ko j&ta hdn.

15 Tum jism ke mutabiq hukm karir hu; main kisi par liuk m nahig

Apui ta'Hm ko haq<i thohr&ke YtT'HANNA', TITI. Tahttditm kofiwdhd-v.

16 Aur agar main luikm karun, to mara hukm haqq hai; kyunki main, ftkeU nahin, par main aur Bap jin ne nnijho bheja.

17 Tumhari fihnri'iU meg yih bhi

likliit hai,ki doadmion ki gawahi sacl hai.

18 Kk to main hiin, jo apni babat gawahi deta bi'm, aur llip bhi, jis niujba bheja hai, mere liye gaw&bi dcta hai.

lit Tab urihon ne ub ue kaha, Tera Dap kalian hai? YimV ne jawab diya, Tum na ruujhe janfce, aur na mere Wp k" ; ini tam mujhe jati w, to mere Bap ko blil jante.

20 * inti' no yih batcri haikal ko an- dar bait ul mal men ta'Iun dete hiie kabi]) ; aur kisi ne lis par hath na dale, ki uh ka waqt lianoz na a y a tha.

21 Tab Yvb6' ne phir unhen kaha. Siam jata hiin, aur tum miijlio dhiin- dhoge, itu apne gun&h men maroge ; j/iJuiTi iiiiiin jala hiln, tum a nahin nkte ho.

22 Tab Yabudion no. kaha, Kyii wuh apne ta,in mar dalega'r jo kabta hai, Jabari main jaia lilin, tum a nahin sak i u h o.

23 Uh tie imken kaha, Tum niche »e bu; main lipar kg Inig: tum ia ja.liau ke ho; main 'u jahan k:i nahin Imii.

21 Isliye iuaiq ne tumben kaha7 ki tum apne gunahon men maroge ; kyun- ki agar tum iman nablg Hio, ki main hi bun, to tum apne guTtahmj moij maroge,

25 Tab unhon ne us se kaha, T'u kauubaiV Yisu'ncunbcn kaha, Wnlu jo main ne tumben akuru' hi u kaha.

2fi Miij h pas bakat batcn kain, ki tutnliare haqq men kahiin, ~anr hukm karun: par jis ne mujho bheja hai, Bacheiia hai : aur ruam bhi, wulii bat- en, jo main ne tu » aunl hain, jahan ko kabta fidn,

27 VVe na Hamjbe, ki wuh un m Sapki babat kakui 04, 130

2S Phir Yiaii' ue uuheu kaki, Jab tum lbni AMaui ko i'mchc par charh- aogo, tab tum Jaaoge ki main liiiri, aur main ap ne kucbh nahin kaita ; magar jo mere Bap ne mujho sikhiaya, mairj wuh liaten kabtd hiin.

2i) Aur jis mu mujhe bheja Jiai, mere wath hai: Bap ne mujhe akela uahin chhura, kyiinki main hamesha uiw kam karta hiin.jo nnekhuBh atc hain.

30 Jab wuh ye batcn kabta tha, to bahutere ns par imdn lae.

31 TabYiKii' ne im Yahridion ko, jo na paj iman lati the, kaha, Agar tum mi'ri liat par sabit rahoge, to tum t&kqlq mere BnArfrd hoge j

32 Aur aachai ko janoge, aur sach- (ii tum ku a-^ad karegi.

33 1 Unhog ne uao jawab diyd. Ilam Abirahiim ki nasi hain, aur kisi ke (mlam kabhfi na the; tii kyimkar kabta hai, ki Tum azad kiye jaoge?

34 Yisii'ne unhen jawab diya, Main tum »e sat'h aach kabta lain, ki Jo koi gumih karta hai, gunab ka gulam hai.

35 Aur gulam abnd tak ghar men nalilij raiita ; Beta abad tak rahta hai.

3tJ Pas agar Beta tum ko azad kar- egd.to mm tahqiq faad hoge.

37 Main janta Ini n, ki tum Abira- hiim ki naisi ho ; lekio tum mere qatl ki fikr men ho, kyriuki tum men mere kalam ki jagat naliin.

38 Maig ne jo kuchh apne Bap ke pas dekha hai, wuht kabtd hiin : aur tam wuh. jr.. tum ne Wpae liap ke pis dekbi hai, karto lio.

39 l.'iiiniii no jawab meiius so kaha, IlamdrA bap Abiraham hai. Yisii' ne r.nli.n kaha, Agu tum AVjiraham ko faraand hote, to tum Abiraham ke se kam karto.

40 Par tum mujhe qatl kiyachabto ho, jo aisa ahakliw hai, ki hftqq bit, jo main ne Khiiita w suni, turnhen kahi ;

ib A bual lilin ne naliin kiya. i ^1 tata apue bap ke kam karteho.

TaUdioz U YU'IIASNA', !X. fttflfr rfWMl Jml&m.

Tab unhon ne us sekaM, Hain haram J mIhi k J i a morc kalani par 'amal* kare, se paida nahin htie ; hamard Bap ck U) ahad tak maut ka imun ua cha-

hai, ya'ue, Khuda.

42 Yisa'ne uohenkaha, Agiir Khu- da tumhard Mp hota, to tum mujhe 'aziz jante; kyi'irjki main Khuda sc tiikla. aur dy& haji; kyunki main Ap sc nahin aya, par uh ne mujhe bheja.

43 Timi mori 'ibarat kyi'm naliin samojhtc ? is liye ki incrd kaldm sun lialiin s:ikk\

44 Tum apne bapSliaitansebo, aur chahto lio ki apne Mp ki khwalibdi ke muwifiq tua. Wuh to shunV u f|atil thd, aur sachfti par sAl)it M raha; kyunki us men sachdi nahin. Jab wuli jhutb, kahtd hai, to apne lii se kahta hai; kyunki wuh jluUtia bal, aur jhuth ka bani bai.

45 Par tum is «abah se ki main sach kahtd hiin, mujh par iman naliin bite.

4*1 Eann tum men sc mujh par «misili sabit karta hal? Agar main Hicfa kahti hiin, tum mnjh par iman kyun nahjn Idte?

47~ Jo Khuda ka hai, Khuda ki b6tes sunia hai : tum h liye nabii) suutu ho, ki tutn Khuda ke nahin lio.

4a lab Yahudion ne jawab men u* sc kuini, Kya ham aehdihd nahin kahte, ki tu .Samari hai, aur tere satu ek deo hai J

49 Tisu' no jawab diya, Mere sath doo nahin ; par main apne Bap ki 'i /.zat kami hiin, aur titni meri be-'izzati karte ho.

50 Aur main apni buzurgi nahir dbundhrd; ek hai, jo dliutidlita hai aur hukm karta hai.

51 Main tum ne sach sach kahta liv'iii, Agar koi abakus mere kalam par 'amal kare, to wuh abad tak maut ko banzia na dekhoga.

52 Tab Yahudion ne us se kaba. Ab ham ne jdnd, ki tujh pas ek doc bai. AHr&hiim bub gaya, nur am- bivil bin. aur tu kahta hai, Agar koi

131

khega.

5S Kya tu hnraare bap Abirahdin

buzurgtar hai, aur wuh mar gaya ? atnbiya l>hi tnur gaya; tu apue ta,in kya tbahrdta hai?

54 Y isu' ne jawab diya, Agar main apni buzTirgi kaiti hiin, to meri bu- zurgi kuchb nahin : par mera Bap bai, jise tum kahtc ho, ki hamara Khuda hai, wuh meri buzurgi karta liai.

y i"i Tum ne use nahin j&nd ; lekin main use jdntd hiin; aur ani maig kahiin, ki main use nahin jari t a, (o main tuinhari tarah jlniljui bunga : «r uiain use jdntd lilin, aur, U ke alam rai 'amal karta hiin.

50 lumharu bap Abiraham bubut ruishtaii thd ki men diu dekhe : chuudDcbi us ne dcklui, aur khush hud.

57 Tab Yahudion ne ub se kahd, Teri W to pachas harus ki n.ibin, aur kya til 00 Abirahaui ko dekhi hai?

f>B Yi&ii' no mihi'n kaba, Main tum m each sach kahtd luiii, Paahtar us w> ki Ahiraham ho, main ln'nj.

69 Tab unhon ne patthar uthiie, ki use mdron ; par Yiau' no apne ta.iu ponhida kiyd, aur «n ke bich se gu- /.arkar haikal se nikl.i, aur yun cbald

<;:iy:i

IX BAU

PHIIl us ne Ute biie ek sbaklis ko, jo janam ka audhd tlid, dekha.

•1 Aur us ke shagirdori ne us se puchha, ki Ai Kablii, gunali kis ne kiyd, is sbakhs no, ya us ke iiil'l l>ap no, ki yib umllia pabla hua?

3 Yisd' uu jawdb diyd, Na to is slmklis at iiuinib kiyii, na us ]n: toi bap ne; lekiu yiin lnia, i:i. ki Khuda ke kain tti men sAhil howttm

i /in'irhai ki jls ne uiujho blieja, main us ke kamort ko, jab tak ki dui

M atidht ka, dnkh pana. YU'HANNA', IX. Faritivn teii be-imaU i

hai, kurdi; ; rst &t\ hai, aur koi us waqt kain uahin kar sakti.

6 Jab tak main janin mcn huiJ, jahdn ka m'ir hm_i.

6 Yih kahko us ne zamiu par thukd, nur thiik se mitti gdndhi, aur wuii mitti uh audhe k{ aiiklunj par lop ki,

7' Aur usta kahd, Ja, aur Bilodtn ke batu mag, Qi> ka tarjuma, UhejA lni:i Ini), uahA. Tab w uh jAke uihAyA, aur bina hofce AyA.

8 ^ Tab lmmaayojj ne, aur jinhon ne age ow andhd dekui thA, kahd, «vi'yili wuh nahin, jo baithA luiii bliikh miogU thA?

fl lla'zon ne kahA, Yih wuhi hai l aurun ijo kahd, Y1I1 uh ki manind hai; uh ne kahA, Main wuhi hun.

LO l'liir unhon M us so kahA, Teri ankhen kyrinkar khul tfayiij ?

11 f" s lio "jawab diyA, aur kahA, ki Uk rnard M, jib ka ndm Y isu' hai, mitti guiidhi, aur racri daklioti par lag'a'i, aur mujhe kahi, ki SiloAm ke haus DUS j*\ *ar 'i»h4, So main jdko nahdyd, aur binA liuA.

12 "lab unhon ne us ra kali S. ki Wuh kahdn hai"V Us ne kahA, Main nahin jdiuA.

lfT*j[ We use, 30 pahle andhd thA, Farision pia lc ff»re,

14 Aur jab ki Yisti' 110 mitti gtindh- ke us ki Ankhcn khuli thiij, Wlt k** «liu ilid.

15 Pl'ir Fariaion ne bhi us ne pd- chlla, ki T6 ne apni Ankhcn kyunkar pAiti ¥ Uh ne nnhcn kahd, ki Di mari Anklmij pai gin mitti lagdi, aur main nahdyA, aur binA hiia.

Ui Tah Farwioij men se batara ne kahd, Vib mard KhudA ki taraf so r.ahfn, kyiinki sabt ku din ko nahin HidutA. Aurorj ue kahA, Kyutjkai ho aaktA hai, i;i franahgAr insdu ais<: tuu- 'njJHO dikbAor' So uu men ikhtilaf thA.

17 Unhon ne uh andhe shakbs ko phir kahi, fii us ke bac|q ibsq, jis na 182

ieri Aukhen kholin, kya kahtA hai V Wuh bott, ki Wuh afc nabi hai.

IH I'ar Yahfidiori ne yih bat yaqin naki, ki wuh andha thA, aurbiua hiil, jab tak ki unhvij ne us ahakhs k« mA bap ko, jo binA hiiA thA, bulaya.

19 Aur un so yih kuliku pudiha, ki Kyd yih tuinliAra betA hai, jise tam kahte ho, andhd paidd hiia? phir wuh afa kyiiijluir dakuti hai?

20 Uh ke ind bdp iie jawAb meij uiilion kahd. Hara jaute hain ki yih hamdra lieti hai, aur yih, ki wuh andhd paidd luhi ;

'Jl Lekia yih ham naliin jAiite, ki wuh ab kyiinkar deklitd hai; yA kia ne us ki Ankliert klioli hain, liam na- hin jAnto ; wuh balig hai ; ua t» pii- chlio; to wuh apnf Ap kabesa.

T2 Us ke md bAp Yahudion «e dar- 1.1! lho, aur is liye unhcm no yih kahd: kyt'mki Yahudion nt' «k A kiya ilid. ki agar koi iqrdr kare ki wuh Masih hai, to Ibidatkhino se kharij kiyd jAwe.

23 Ih wd.ste us ke md Iwlp nc kahd, ki Wuh bAlig hai ; ua sc puchho.

24 Tah unhuri ne us sliakha ko, jo andhA thA, phir buldkar uh ae kahA, ki IjhudA ki liuz.urgi kar ; hara jdute hain ki yih mani gooahgat hai.

25 U» ne jawdb diyA, aur kahd, ki Main nabin jdutd ki wuh Kunah<.-dr hai, ki nah i» : main ek bat janlA hun, ki main andhA thA, ab binA min.

2(i Tab unhon ne ria so phir puchhd, ki Us no tujli ae kya kiya¥ kyi'mkar

1 no teri dnkhi-u kholirj 'i

27 Ub ne unhen jawdb diyd, Main ue to turnhoii abhi kahA, aur tum no na annd: kyd tura phir suna chahUs hu? kya tuinbhf ua ko ahduird bom}

2H Tab unhon no nas malAmat ki,

s kahA, Ttl us kA ibigird hai ; laun MdWi k« shairird hain.

29 Huni jdute hain ki Ivhudi ne Musd ke sAth kaldm kiya; par ham naiin jaote ki yili kalian ka hai.

30 Us shakhs ue jawab 111011 iinhon

ndmi ko kharij karrni. YU'HANNA', X. Manh ne.k ch-tuptin hai.

kahi. Ia men ta'aijub hai, ki tum i hin jAnte ki yih kahin ki hai, aur ne meri iukhen kholi hain.

31 Hain jinto haig ki Khuda ;rui>;ilit;aroii ki nahin Kimia; par agar koi Khuda- paraui ho, aur us ki rnam j*r chale, lu as ki wuh sua t a hai.

32 Dunyi ke Bhuxu' ro suunc men nak i n iyi, ki kiai ne janarn ke andhe ki inkhen kholi bon.

33 Agar yih. mard Khudi kl taraf se tia h.it si., to kuchh na kar sakti.

34 Unhon ne jawab men us so ka- hi, Tii lo bilkuli gunihon nien paiihi Inii, aur kyi ham ko sikhlrit;i hai V Tab unhon ne use kliirij kar diya,

35 Yisii' ne «uni ki unhon 11« tua kharij kar diya ; tau us ne A» pakar ub so kahi, Kya tii Khudi ke IJete par iman lata hai?

3ti Usne jawab men kaha, Ai Khu- diwand, wtih kaun hai, ki main uh par iman laun ?

37 Yisti' ne us se kaha, Tu ne to use dcklia hai, aur jo tujli se boiti hai, wulii hai.

38 Ufl ne "kahi, Ai Khudiwand, main iumn liti hdn. Aur ub ne use s<ijda kiva.

3!l % Tah Yisu' ne kahi, ki Main 'adilat ke liye is dunyi men iyi htin, ti ki wo jo nahin dekhte hain, dekhcn, aur jo dekhte ham, andhe ha jiwen.

40 Aur Farision ne, jo us ke sith the, yih biten sunke us se kaili, Kya ham bin andhe hain?

41 Yisii' ne unhen kahi, Agar tum andhe hote, to giinahgir 11.1 hote: par ab tum to kahte lio, ki Ham dekhte h:iiij ; is liye tumhiri guiiak raliti hai.

X BA'B.

MA1N| tum ae sach aach kali tahun, Jo ki darwiy-e se hherkhine men dikhil nahin hota, baiki aur taraf se ipar charhti hai, wuh chor aur ■.ifii.ir hai. ' 133

2 Lekin wuh jo darwiM ne dikhil hoti hai, bheron ki unrariyi hai.

3 Us ke liye (Urban khulti hai; aur bheren uski iwiz sunti hain j aur wuh apui bhemn ko mim loko hulitd .hai, aur unheu bahar te jati hai.

4 Aur jab wuh apni bheroii ko bi- har nikilti hai, to nn ko ige (m chalti hai, aur bheren ai ke pichhe ho leti hain ; kyinki we us ki iwiz pahehinti hain.

fi Aur we begtafl ke pichhe nahin latin, baiki us se bhagt.i hai n ; is liye ki beginon ki iwiz nahin pahehintin.

6 Yiftu' ne yih tamsil unhen kahi ; lakin we na samjhc ki yih kyi biteii thin, jo wuh un se kahta tlii.

7 Tab Yi«u' ne nnlion piir kahi. Main tum se sach sach kaliti htin, ki bheron ki darwiza main hun.

8 8ab jitne mujh se ic;e ae, chor aur batmir hain : par bheron ne un ki ua suni.

Darwi/a main hun : agar kol shakhs mujh so dikhil ho, to najat liiwegi, aur andar biliar iyi jiega, r charigih pi«ga.

10 Chor nahin ita, magnr churine, aur qail kanie, aur halik kame ko : main iyi hun, ti ki wezindagi pawen, aur /.iyida hisil karun.

11 Achchha garariyi main hun : achchhi garariyi bheroii ke liye apni jin deti hai.

12 Par mazdur, aur wuh jogarariyi nahin, aur bheron ki milik nahin,

.iya ite dekhkv bheroii ko ehhor deti hai, aur bhi» jiti hai ; aur biie- riyi nnhen phirti hai, aur bheron ko parigniida k arti hai.

18 Mazdiir bhiyti hai, kyCinki wuh mazdur hai, aur bheron ku liye likr nahin karti.

14 Aolichbi gararivi main hun, aur apniou ko pahehinti hun, aur meri niujhu |«ihchinti hain.

15 Jia tarah so Hip mujhe jdnti hai, us tarah main Liap ko jinti hiin :

M'.tsih aur Bup k\i

YU'HANNA', X.

e k thuharna.

aur main bhernn ke liye apni jari detd b 'i n,

III Aur meri aur bhi bheren hain, ]d is bherkhdne ki nahin ; zan'tr hai ki ruairj cmherr bhi ha'nj, nur we meri awaz aunengi ; aur ek hi gali», aur ek hi garariyi hoga.

17 Bdp mujhe is liye piyar karta hai, ki main apni jati detd liuti, td ki main uae phir liiu.

18 Koi shakhs uso mujh se nahiij leti, pnr main use ap hu detd liiiij; atari ikhtiyar hai ki usu duri, aur meri ikhtiyir hai ki usc phir liin. Yih hukm main :ie ajjno Bdp «e paya.

19 1 Tah Yahiidion k«bicli,m bit 03 ke afttab, pl.ir ikhtilaf bui.

20 Aur bahu ton ue un rutin se ka- ha, ki Us ko sdth sk doo hai. aur wuh siri hai; tur» us ki kyrin sutitc ho

21 Auron ne kahi, Yih baton 1

ki nahin, jin men dsa hai. K ya deo andhe ki ankhcii khol sakti hai ?

22 II JaruBofam msrj tajdid ki 'id hiu, aur jaro kii rnaiisiiN tJui.

23 Aur VisiV haikal kuandar JSulai mani usd-re nicrj phirta tha.

24 Tah Yahiidkm 110 use i gheri, aur us si k:ili:i, ki T d kab tak hamdre dil ko adhar meii rakhogi? Agar tu Ujufh hai, lo liain ko naf kah de.

25 Yisi'i' M unhen jawab diyd, ki Main M bo Uniiiinj kalui, uar linu ue y., jin ua kiya : jo kira main apnu Bap ke nim se karta lnin, yih niere gawdh hain.

24 Lekiu tnm iinau naMrj lain, kyiiiiki jala* main u tumben kafaa, ium mori bhcron nien se nahin.

27 Meri bheren meri dwi/. sunt! hain, aur main uiilieij jiutd hit n, aur we mere piehhe ohalti hain.

28 Aur main nuhen hamesha ki zindagi baklislui hun . aur we kabhi balik na lioiigi, aur koi iirihcii mere hdth se chhin na lega.

2!l Meri Bap, jis 06 unhen ruujhe diyd hai. nah se hara hai ; aur koi 134

unhen incre Bap ke bith ho chhin nahin le sak ia.

30 Main aur Bap ok hain.

31 Tah Yahiidion ne phir patthnr nfliaV, lii us par paUhrau karun.

32 Yimi* ne unhen jawab riiya, ki Main ue gpne Biip ki] bnliut H aelielihe krim tuiuhen dikhae hain ; un iiicti su k i s kain ke liyu luui mujbe pattlirao karte bo ?

3J YiiMdion ne uue jawab diyd, aur kalid, ki II ain tujiiu aclichhe kdm ko liye nahiij, baiki is liye tujhe Dfttthrio karto inim, ki td kttfr kahtd h;ii. nur 'mn&u boko apue ta.ij» Kbuda baudtd hai.

84 Viwu' ue unhen jawab diyii, Kya tuiulian shari'iit rnen yih nahin liklid hai, ki Main ne kaha, Tum kbudi

ho y

35 Jah ki ua no unhen, jin ke pas Ktuda k,i kalam dya, khuda kaiio, m r niuuikin naliin ki kitdb bdtil bo ;

86 Tnm BM,iiM Khudii. ne luakli- stis kiya, aur jahil) men blteja, kahte ho, ki Tu kul'r baklii hai; ki main ne kaha, Main Khuda kd llw.a hun.

87 Agar main apu e Baji ke kdm nahin kuna, to mujh pai' intan niat lio. "

38 Lekin agar main karta luin, to agarehi mujh pir iman na Ido, tau bhi kini o n par imau liio, ta ki tum jiino, aur yaipu koio, ki Dap mujh men hai, aur maiii un uicn Lu.11.

39 Tahunlinn no phir ofaihi ki uae pakar len ; par wuh un ke itdthog se tiika.1 gayij

40 Aur Yardau ke pir, m jogoh, jaliatj Vubanni pahle baptisma diyd kai li tha, phir gaya ; aur wahin raha,

■11 Aur Imhulun ne us pd» jako kaha, ki Ydhannd no to kol mu'ajUa nahin dikhdya ; par eab bdten jo Yii- hoafii ue 19 ke haqq men kabin sach- chi thin.

42 Aur wahin bahut sc us par imdn

lio.

A

ka,

XI BA'R UR La'nzar Ddme ek

Bait'aniyd kd rahnewala,

YU'JIANNA', XI. marjami.

14 Tali Yiflo' ne unhen saf kaba, ki shakhs, La'aienr m»r gaya.

15 Aur main Uunhdre liyi- is par

Mariyam M» us ki bahiti Mart.hd ke. klmsh hi'.ij, ki main. wahaii ua tlid, td

gayw kd tha, biiudr Ihd. (Wuhi Mariyam, jia

ki tum Iman Jao; par do, bam us pa.-j Khudd- j den..

wand ko 'itr maid, nur apne balon w 16 Tab Thumd us ke pdnwon ko poaohha tha, uai ka bhrii La'a/.ar bimar tha.)

3 So us ki bahiuon. ne us ko yih kabid bhejd, ki Ai Kbudawand, dekh, jisu tu piyar karta hai, bimar hai.

4 Yisii" no sunkc kaha, ki Yiii maut ki bimar! nahiy., lekin Khrnid ki buzurgi ke liye hal, td ki ua ke nahab kg Khudd ke Bete ki buzurgi ki jawe.

6 Aur Yisti' Martha ko, aur us ki bahin, aur La'asar ko, piyar karta tha.

U Bo jab us ne aund ki wuh bimar hai, aur do roz us jagah, jahdn wuh tha, rahd. *

7 Tab ba'd us ke shdgirdon N kalia, A'o, ham phir Yahiidiya meij jaeu.

H Shagirdon ne us se kaha, Ai Kabbi, abhi Yahudion. ua chahd tha ki tujhe patthrdo karen,; aur tii wahdn phir jritA hai?

9 Yisii' ne jawab diyd, ki Kyd din ke bdrah ghante liahm? Agar koi din ke waqt chale, t*> wuh thokar nahin khdtd; kyiinki wuh ia jahdn ki roshni ik'khla hai.

10 Par agar koi rdt ke waqt chale, to «nih thokar khdtd hai, kyi'iriki us nua rotan! uahin.

11 Usneyih bdicn kabin; aur ba'd us ke uu bo kahii, ki Hatnara dost T.a'azsr so gaya liai ; par main jatd liun ki usc jagalin.

12 Tab us ko shagirdoii nc kaba, Ai Khuddwand, agar wuh sota hai, to ohanga ho jdegd.

13 Yisii' ne to us ki maut ki bdhat kaha ; par unhon ne khiyal kiya ki wuh oiud ki: ar&iu ki babat farindtd tha.

135

i Didiraiuit

kahtc haig, apne hani-pairaunn «o kahd, A'o, ham bhi cbalen, td ki us ke -alh i: .uvri.

17 Pas Yisu' ne dke darydft kiya ki chdrdin hficki use qabr ineij rak b d.

18 Aur Bait'aniyd Yarusakm se nawHk. takhminan ek pakku k(M ke qarib tha.

19 Aur bahut sc Yahudi Marthi aur Mariyam ke pas de the, ki un ke bhdi ki bdbat uu ae mdtam-pnrsi karen.

2U So Mart.hd ne, jojj sund ki Yisu' dtd hai, us kd istiubdl kiya; par Mariyam ghar mei) baithi raki.

21 Tab Martha ne Yisu' ko kahd, Ai Kbudawand, agar tu yiilidn hotd, to merd bhdi ua marla.

22 Lckin maiij juiiti hdfl kt ah bhi jo kuchii tu Khudd se nidnge, Khtjdd tujhe degd.

■12 Yisu' ne us se kaha, Teri bhdi phir jl utlicgd.

21 Martha ne us se kahd, Main jdnti liun ki qiydinat nien picl.iih- <iin phir ji uthegd.

2f> YiKd' ne us se kahd, (jiydmat aur /.indagi main bi hdfl ; jo inujh par irndn Idwe, agarchi wuh mar gaya ho, tau bhi jiegd :

26 Aur jo koi jitd hai, aur mujli par imdn lata hai, kabbJ 01 uiarega. Kyd tu yih yaqin rakliti hai V

27 Ua ne us se kahd, Ildn, ai Kbu- dawand, mujlie yaqin hai ki Khudd kd Bctd Masih, jo dunyd mtm auewala thd, tii h/ Ini.

28 Wuh yih kahke chali s;ayi, aur chu]ike apni bahin Mariyam ko buldke kahii, ki Ustad dyd hai, aur tujliu bu lata hai.

Matihh&uiM YU'HANNA', XT. ijabr par

29 Wuh yih bit sunte UI jald uthi, flspis khare ham, main m yili kadi

aur us pas ii.

30 Aur Yisii' banoa basti men na pahuncka tbd, baiki «isi jagah thi, jaliirj Martini UH mili thi.

31 Tab Yahudi jo ua ke nith ghar men the, aur use tasalli dete tho, yili d'klike ki Mariyam jald uthi, aur binar gayi, yun feahte hu« us ke pi- chhe ho liye, ki Wuh qabr par roiie jati liai.

32 Aur jab Marivam wahin jahirj Yisu' tha Ai, aur use dekha, to us ke fladamorj par girke uh se kahi, Ai Khudawand, agar t. u yabau hoti, to nicra bhai umr na jati.

88 Jab Vinil' lio IH k» dekhi ki roti hai, aur Yahudion ko bhi, j" ua ke sath ae the, ki rute hai n, to dil sc ah mari, aur initam kiya,

84 Aur kaiia, Tum ne uae kahdn rakhi? Unhon ue kalii, Ai Kbudi- wand, i, aur dekh.

86 YM' roya.

3C Tab Yahudi boTe, ki Dekho, uw kilua jiivilr karti thi I

37 lia'aim ne un mim se kahi, KyA yih mard, ji» ne andbe ki inkhen kiiolin, na kar taki ki yih shakhs bhi ua niarta'?

38 Tab Yisd' apno dil sc phir ih karti hui gabr par iya. Wuh ck gir thi. aur us par ek patiyi d hari thi.

39 Yibu' farmiii hai, ki Patiyi uthao. Ub raurda ki bahin Marthi ua M ];aliti hai, Ai KhuriAwand, us ne to ah badbu iti hai, kyiinki use chir diti ln'ie.

40 Yisii' uu w kahti hai, KyA main ne tujhe nahin kahi, ki Agar tu imin liwe, lo KhudA kA jalai dekhegi ?

41 Tab unhog ne patiye ko wahan «c, jahin wuh murda gari thi, uthiyi. I'hir Yinu' ne apni ia klen uthiiti, aur kahi, Ai Uap, main teri shukr karti hi'm ki tu ne meri suni hai.

!'J Aur main ue jani ki tu mori nit imnti hai : p.i; in lugun ke bi'is, jo 136

ti ki we imiu liweii ki tu ue mujhe bheji hai.

+3 Aur yih kalike buland Awiz se chillAyi, ki Ai La'asw, bihar nikal i.

44 Tab wuh jo mar gaya* tha, ka- fan se hith o pinw bandhe hiic nikal iyi: aur ua ki chihra cinin^iiil niniAl se Lipat A hi'ii thA. Yisii' ne unlvrj kahi, V m khul do, aur jine do.

4-5 Tab Yahudion inerj se bahutore jo Hilirmu kane Ae the, aur ye kim jo Yisu' ue kiye dekhe the, us par imin tie.

4G Par un men se baV.on ne Farinion ke pas jike we kim, jo Yisii' ne kiyo the, bayan kiye.

47 1 Tab sardir kihinon aur Fari- sion ne Sadr majlis jatn'aki.aur kahi, ki Ham kyi karte liain ? ki yih mani bahut mu'ajize dikhati hai.

48 Agar ham usc yiinhi chhoren, to sab ua par imin liwerige; aur Kiiuii ikc hauiira inulk aur inuuuiyat ko bhi lu lenge.

4H Aur un men se ek ne, Qayifa nam, jo us sil sardir kahin thi, un se kahi, Tum kuuhh nahin jinte,

50 Aur na andesha karte hn ki hamire liye yih Uh tar hai, ki ek idmi qaum ke badle mare, aur na ki «liri cuuim lialik howe.

51 Par us no yih apni taraf sc na kahi ; lekin uh sabab so ki us baras sardir kihiu thi, peshkhabari ki ki Yiai'i' us qaum ko wAntw marcfji ;

b'i Aur na sirf us qaum ke wiste, hal k i is winte bhi, ki wuh Khudi ko farzandon ko, jo pariganda htie, baham jam'a kare.

53 flo weusi mz se ipaa men mash- warat karne lage, ki ua ko jin bo miron.

54 la liye Yisu' Yahudion men ige ko zihiri na phirA, baiki wahAu se bayibin ki nawihi ki; ririim nim ek shahr men fjayA, aur apue ahigirdon ko -sath wabiji guzrAn karue lagi.

Masih l-o YU'TTANNA', XTT.

65 f Aur Yahfldion ki' IA i tanah ki Ija'azar ko, j rnzdik Ihi; aur babutere 'id ke nahleidekheri. us nawAhi su Yariisalam ko gaye, tA ki apne ta.in pak kareti.

5t> Tab unhon ne YisiV ki tulilah ki, ruAren :

TToak'anva bahtid. t ub Le jilayd thA,

10 T Tal> sardSr kahinon ne maish- warat ki, ki La'azar ko bhi jan se

»ur haikal nien khure hoke Apas men tlhl. ki Tum kyA guniAn karte ho, ki wuh 'id men ua awega?

57 Aur sariiar kahin.>n aur Farision no bhi hukm diyA thA, ki Agar koi iiinta ho ki wuh kabin hai, to dikh- iawe, ta ki use pakar len.

XII BA'B.

PHIR Tisu' fasah ae cblia iro: Age Bait'aniyA men, jahan I-a'iv/.nr tha, jo miiA tha, aur ji«c us ne murduu TLiL-n h iitliiiya tha, iya.

2 Wfthftn unhon ne M ke liyo ziyA- fnt ki ; aur Martili" khidmat karti thi ; ]wir l.a'azar ek UB men St) tha jo ua ke sath khAne baithe'the.

3 Tab Mariyam ne Adh aer khAlis Alir qimati jatamAsi ka 'itr lekar V ke pAnwon |>ar mala, aur apu e balon ko ua ko i>Anw ponehhe ; aur ghi ki bii «e bhar Raya thA.

4 Tab Yuluidali Iskariyiiti i" Shama'un ka beta, aur us ke shAgirdon men se ek tha, jo uso pakarwAyA chAhtA tha, kahA, ki

5 Yih 'itr tiu aau dinAr ko kyun na becha gaya, aur muhtajou ko na diyA gaya?

(i Us neyih naia liyokabA.ki muh- t/ijon ki kuchh likr kartft tha, p:ir U liye ki wuh obor tha, aur thailA sath rakhta tha, aur jo kuchh us men parta tha, utha letA tha.

7 Tab Visi'i1 u kahA, ki Use chhi _ de, ki us ne yih mere kafan dafan ke din ke liye rak ha tha.

8 Kynnki muhtaj bamesha tum- hare «alh rahte; par main hamesha i umbari' sal h

9 Aur Yahuuion ke bahut log jan gaye ki wuh wahAn hai, aur we Ae, na siri' YwiV ke sabab, baiki is liye bhi

1ST

11 Kyurjki ua ke sabab ae bahut Yahudi phir jAte, aur Yisi'i' par Emfia lAto the.

12 1 IWsre roz bahut log, jo 'id men ae the, yih suuke ki Yisu' Yard- aalam men Ati hai,

13 Khajur ke darakhton ki ddlidn lifl, aur ua ke istiqbft'l ko niklc, aur

ikAre, Ilosh'anna: MubArok wuh jo Kjtudftmod ke nAm sc AtA hai, L-rAid ka llft-ishAh.

14 Aur Yisii' ek sadhi ki bachcha pAkar ub par aawAr liiid; jaisA ki li- klui hai,

15 Ai Saihtiii ki Iieti, mat dar ; dckh, ut» Btojb&h gadhi ke bachche par aawAr hokc AtA hai.

1(1 Ub ke shAgird pahle ye bAten na samjhe ; lekin jab YisiV apnejalaTkn pahunchA, tab unhon ne yAd kiyii ki ye bAten us ke ha.|q men likhi thin, aur yih, ki unhon ne tisi su yiii suluk kiyi.

17 Tab un logon ne jo us ku sath the, jia waqt us ub La'aaar ko rjabr se bahar bulAyA aur murdi>Q rncn se uthAyA tha, gawAhi di.

18 la bA'is wuh bhir ua ke isttnliAl ko nikli, kyi'mki unlion ne buiiA ki us ne yih nni'ajka dikhlayA.

IH Tab l''arisiori no A]>aa int--n kaha, Tum dckhte ho ki tum Be kuchh ban uahin partA? Dekho, ki ek 'Alam us ka pairau ho chalA.

20 1 Aur un ke darmiyAn, jo 'id men parastish kanie Ae the, bi'/.c Yi'uiAiit the.

21 Wc FailbuB ke pa>, jo BaitsaidA e Jaili kA tbA, Ae, aur us se 'arz ki, aur kahA, ki Ai sAhib, ham chAhte hajn, ki Yiail' ko dekliun.

22 Failbna ne Ake AndryAs se kaha : aur phir Andryaa aur Failbda ne Ywii' ko khnbar di.

ifasih ki nhikdi/ut

23 % Yisfi' ne unhcn jawab d iya, aur kahA, ki Wacit Ayd ki Ibu i A'dam jalai pAwe,

21 Main tum se wieh sach kahtA Iii'lii, ki Gehuii ka dana, agar zamiu men girkc mar n» jAwe, to akela rahta hai ; par agar wuh mare, to bahutsd phaJ lata hai.

25 Jo aimi jan kfl "ada rakhtd hai, use khoegA; aur wvili, jo i.-* jahdu men apni jjiu se 'adawat rakhta bal, DM hamesha ki ziudagi ke liye mahfuz rakhega.

26 Agar koi meri khidmat kare, to cliahiyu ki wuh meri patrauf kare j aur jibjagah main hiin, meri khddim bhi wuliin hogd: agar koi meri khidmat kare, to liiiji uh ki 'izzat karogd.

27 Ab meri jati ghtibrdti hai; aur main kya kahon ? ki Ai Kap, mujhe is ghari «e bacha? lekio main to Lsf ghari ke liye aya hog.

28 Ai Bap, apne nam ko jalai bakhsh. Wuijhiii asmdn «u awiiz ai, ki Main ne jalai bakhahA hai, aur phir jalai bakhshdgga.

29 Tab logoti ne, jo khare the, yili suuke kaha, ki Uada'l garjt : auron ne kaha, ki Kirislita us ae bola,

uO Yisii' ue jawab diya, aur kaha, ki Yih away, mere waste uahiij, baiki tumhare liye ai.

:'l Ab U dnnyd par hukm hotA hai : ab ih duuya ka sardar nikal dfyA jaega.

32 Aur main jo liilij, agar zamin se lipar uthdya jalin, Lo Bab ko apne pas kliinchiingi.

33 Vs" uo yih kahke pati iliya, ki wuh Via maut so marue par hai.

YU'IIAXNA', XII. b' log iman nahiv hit* fli ■ai. Jab tak ki n i'; r tumhare pas hai, :halo, na ho ki tariki tumben jA pak re ; aur wuh jo andhere men ehaliA hai, naliiy jan'la ki kUliar jati hal,

36 Jab tak nur tatahan paa lini. nur par iniAn liio, ta ki tuiu nur ke fanand ho. Yisu1 ne yih liAtim kah-

,aur jake apue la.in un se eliliip:i> :i.

37 ^ Aur agarchi us ne un ke ni ba rii itne mu'ajize dikhac, par wc tik par iman na Ide :

38 Ta- ki Yas'aiydh nabi U kalam, jo us ne kaba, pura howe, ki Ai Khu- diwand, hamArc paigain ko kis ne y»qin kiya hai? aur Khudawand ka bau kis pai zAhir hua hai?

89 ls liye we imdn na la saken, ki Yas'aivah m; phir kaha,

40 Ub ne un ki ankheg andhi km, aur un ke dil sakht kiye hain, ta ua ho ki wc ankhon ee dekhen, aur dil «t ttatnjiieii, aur rujiV lAwen, aur main unhcn changA karun.

41 Yas'aiyah nc yih farmayd ihA, jab us ke jalAl ko dekha, aiu- uh ki ba- bat biton kiii.

42 ^ Hawujiid us ke sardAron meri so bhi bahut us par imdn Ide; magar Kaiisiuii kr 1>:l'ls niilmit iur iijrar ua kiyA, na ho ki 'ibadatkhane sk khAiij kiye jAerj.

43 Kycnki we us buKurgi ko, jo insan se bot:, us buzurgi se, jo Khiuiii

toraf se huti, ziydda 'aziz janre

34 Logon ne us sejawab mon kahd,' mere bhej ii«wdl« ko dokhld hai.

Ham ne shari'at se suni hai ki Masih alwd tak rahegd : phir tii kynnkar k ihta hai, ki Zarui hai ki Ibn i A'dam uthAya jieV yih Ibu i A'dam kaun hai?

36 Tab VihiVuoiuiheij kaha,kiNiir tlmri aur dcr tak tumhare darniiydn ' 138

the.

44 % Yisii' ne pukArkc kabd, Wuh jo itiujii pai iman lata hai. tnujh par nahiii, baiki us par jisne mujhe bheja, iuiAn lata hai.

46 Aur wuh jo niujli? dekhtl hai,

46 Main jahAn men bui hoke dyd hiin, tA ki jo koi mujh par iman lawe, ainllnT« men na rahe.

47 Aur ai;ar koi shakhs meri bateij ,-iuiL', aur iman ua ldwe, to main us par hukm naliin kartd; kyfnjki trtalg is liye nahiii Ayd, ki jahdn par hukm

.Vmili msilan ke sikhlata. YITHAN'STA', XIII.

karun, baiki ib liye ki jahan ko back-

ki wf'irotani hiren. 9 Shama'i'm l'atrus no us se kahd, ki Ai Khudawand, sirf mere pinw na- radd kar detd.jhin, baiki hath aur sir h\\\.

' 10 Yisri" ne u» 30 kaha, W uh Jo

kuna,

4ti Wuh jo mujh aur men bdtug ko quiml mili

«w ko liye ek liukiu karnewala hai : nuhl.iya gayahai, siwa panwdhoneke j ih'un, jo main ne kaha hai, wuhi us'muhtaj tubin, baiki sarasar pak hai:

ko pichhle din gunahgdr thabriegi.

4y Kyiiyki main nc to iip se nahir. kaki, bailkr Bdp ne jis ne mujhe bheja mujhe fanmln diyd, ki main kya bol- i.n, aur main kya kalu'm.

60 Aur mam jinta hun ki us ka fitnnan hamesiia ki ziudairi hai: pas fa kuchh ki main kahta hiin, jis tarah Bdp ne mujhe kaha, usi tarah kahta nun.

XIII BA'B, J T'D i fasah se pahlc, jab ki Yisu' ne J_ jiiia ki mera waqt a pakumoU hai, kl is jahan se Bap pas jdun, jaisa wuh ags apnon ku jo dunyi men the piyar knrta iba, waisa hi akhir tak piyar karta rahd.

H Aur jab ijbiim ka khani chund gaya thd, ie liye ki Skutati ne Shama- lin ke beto Yahiidab I.-kariyiiti ke dil men dald th.i. k i om pakafwac

3 Tisu' yib jankar ki Uap H sah ebi zen mere hatkoti men din, aur main Khudd ke pas se aya, aur Khuda ke pas jati hiin,

4 Klian*.' M ufha, aur apne kapn Uar rakh», aur rumal h: k w apnl kamar men bandha,

5 Ba'd us ke ek bdsan men pani

iv shdgirdon ke pdnw dhoni\ aur 08 rumal se jo kamar men bandha tha, ponchhne lagi.

i: l'iiir wuh Slumia'un Fatrus tak aya : tab us u iu se kaha, Ai Khuda- wand, tu mere panw dhotd hal (

7 Yisu' nu jawab men us se kaha, Jd ki mam karta hiiii, ab tti nahin janta, par ba'd us ke jdnegd.

8 Patri is ne us se kaha, ki A'prnere paijw kabhi na dhowen. Timi' jawab diya, Aiiar iii:inj tujhe oa i to mew tath tura hissa na liogi

139

tum pak ha, lekin aab naliii_ 1L Kyiinki wuh to apnc pakar wane-

wale k« jauta tha, is liyu us ne kaha,

Tum sah pak nahin ko.

" ' Jab wuh un ko panw dho chuka

thd, aur apne kapre liye. the, plii:

hait.likar uulu-n tim, A'ya tum jante

ho ki main ne tum se kyd kiya '!

mujhe Uetid, aur Khiuhi-

wand, kaha karte bo : tum khub kahte

ho, kyiinki main hiin.

14 l'asjabki uuijh Khndawund aur Ustid ne tumhdris panw dhoo, to tiiui- hen bhi lazim hai ki ek dte< ku panw dboo.

15 Is liye main no tumben ek na- muna diyd hai, ta ki jaisa main ne tum se kiya, tum bhi karo.

1G Main tum se sach sach kahtd hun, ki Naukar apne li.pi so bar.i na- hin, aur ua wuh jo hhcja gaya" hai, apne hhejnoivale ^'.

17 Agar tum yih haten samajbte, aur un [«r 'amal karte ho, to mubarak ho.

18 \ Main tum sah ki babat nabin kahta ; main jauta hiin jiaiwjj niain ne chund hai : lekin yih nota ta ki nawishta pura howe, Us no jo mere Nath roti khati hai, mujh par latutbii hai.

19 Ab main tum se is ke waipi' hone sopahle kahta hi'iu, ki jah wuh wuqu' mi.ii awi', to tum iman lao ki main hi hiin.

'10 Main tum se aach sach kahta lniij, Wuk jo us ko jise main bhejta hiin etftbdl karti hai, mujhe qabul karr.i liai ; aur wuh jo mujhe qabul iisu karta liai, UB«, jis ne mujhe bheja, i, ijabul kartd hai. | 21 Yisu'yun kahks dil men ghab-

Mntih khtibnr (fafii raya, aur gawati! dcke bola. Main tum m sach sach kahta lilin, ki Bk ttOO uien se mujhe pakurwnoga.

22 Tali shagird sini b h a mnj hoke ki us ne kiw ki babat kaha, ek dusre ko dekhne lnjr.e.

23 Aur uh ke shafiirdon merj se ek, jiso Yisu' piyar karri tha, Yisu' ki <lihii1i ki taraf jliukii hua kliau.* iiiru ahatuil t liii.

24 Tab Shama'un Pafcrua ne use ishara kiya, ki daryaft kare ki wuh, jia ki babat uh ne kaha, kami hai.

25 'Jab us ne Yisu' ke simi ki turi ziyada jhukke m se kaha, Ai KhmhL- waiid, wuh feaun hai V

2ti Yisii1 ue jawab diya, Jise main niwdlc ko tar karke deta hfin, wuhi hai. P)iir us ne niwala tar karke Hbaina'iin ke bete Yahiidah Iskariyut.i ko diya.

27 Aur ba'd us niwala ke Shaitan uh men samaya. Tab Yisu' ne une kaha, Jo kuchh ki tii karta hai, jald kar.

28 Par un men hc, jo khane baithe the, kisi m na jana ki yih ua no use kis liye kaha.

20 Kyfinki bnV.nn ne guman kiya, ki is liye ki Yahfidah ke pas thaili ilii, ki Yisu' use yih kahta tha, ki Jo ham ku 'id ke liye darkar hai, mol le; ya yih, ki muhtajon kokuohh do.

30 Pas wuh niwaLa lekar tilfaiir nikla; aur riit tlii.

31 1 Jab wuh ehala gaya, Yibu' ne kaha, ki Ab Ibn i A 'dam ne jalai paya, aur Khuda M uh ke ba'is jalai paya.

32 Agar Khuda ne uh se jalai paya ho, tu Khuda use bbi apno se jalai dega, aur use filfnur jalai desa.

33 Ai bachcho, main thori dor tak tumharesath hun. Tum niujln' iUiuu- dhogo, aur joisa Iti main ne Yalnidimi se kaha, ki Jalian main jiit.a hun, tuvn nahin a sakte, waisa ab main tumben bbi kahta hrin.

140

YI.'llANNA', XIV. H ia»i

use paharw&tgA,

31 Main turuhen ek naya huktn deta h (S n, ki Tum ek diisre «e rauhabfaal rakho; jaisa main ne tiira ae nnbabtat rakiii, aiso bi tura bhi ek dusre se muhabbat rakho.

35 la se Bab janerjgo ki tum mere ibigird ]i",:i.:;ir Lumapasmen muhab- bat rakho.

36 % ShnmaMn Patrua no us se kaha, Ai Khiidawand, tii kahan jata hai ? Yisu' ne use jawab diya, Jahan main jata Imn, tii ab meru piehbe a nahin sakti ; par agc ko mere piehbe awega,

37 PatruB ne use kaha, Ai Kfiuda- wand, main tere piehbe kyi'm ab nahin ' aakla ? main tere liye apni jan diiuga.

38 Yisii' ne use jawab diya, K ya tfi mere liye apni jan degi? Main tum se sach sach krahtt buri. ki Murg bang na depa, jab tak ki td tin martaba intrii inkar na kare.

XIV BA'B.

TUMHA'RA'dil na ghabrawc: tum Kbuda par fmaii late ho, mujh par bhi imanlao.

2 Mere Hap ko ghar men bahut makan hain: nahin to, mnin tumhen kahta. Main jata hun, ta ki tumharo liye jagali taiyar kariin,

3 Aur jia hal ki main jata, aur tumeare liyo jagAh taiyar karta, to phir aiinga, aur tumheg apno tath liinga, tji ki jalniij main ht'in, tum bbi h oo.

4 Aur jahan main jati hiin, tum jante ho, aur rah bhi jdnte ho.

5 Thnma ne use kaha, Ai KhmU- wand, ham nahin jante ki trt kahan jata hai ; aur hari kyi'mkar us rah ko jan sikon?

(i Yisu1 ne U»e kaha, Eah, aur hai]q, aur Kindagi main hiin ; koi bagair men wasile Dap ke pa» a nahin aakta bot

7 Agar tum mujhe jante, to mere litip ko bhi jante ; aur ab se tum uau jrintt! ho, aur use dekhahai.

iTaa&t. Jltih ke

YU'HANNA', XIV. bhejne U wa'da karta.

8 Pftilbi'w ne asa kaili, Ai Khuda- wand, Uap ko hamen dtkhla, ki hainen

kafi 1,:U.

y YisiV ne ufc kabA, Ai Failbus, main itnl muddat se tumhare sAth hiin, aur tu ne mujhe na janaV fi( ne mujhe dekhA hai, «ia no BAp ko deklia hai ; aur tu kynnkar kahta hai, ki BAp ko ham e n dikhlA?

lO K ya tu yaqiu Dan i n kartl ki mairi Uap men hun, aur Bap mujh men hai ? yib bAten jo main tumben kahta );iin, main Ap Ke nahiri kahta; lckin I'pl'lii, jo iiuijh men rahta liai, wah yo kiitn harta hai.

] I Mari bat yaqin karo, ki main Uap men hun, aur Ban mujh men hai; uuniahiii u>, in kiiuiuii ke suilab mujh par iman lio.

12 Main timi m sach aach kahta hun, ki jo mujh par iman lAtA hai, ye kain, jo main kartU hun, wuh bhi karegi, aur to se bhi bare kain karena ; V. v iijki main apne Bap paa jati hnn.

I :t Aur jo kuchh tum mere nAm sc BUEngpge, main wuhi kartinga, ta ki liap Bete men jalai pAwe.

1 4 Agar tum roera nant se kuchh maugo^e, to main wulii karun ga.

15 % Agar tum tUBJhe piyar karte ho, to mere hukmon, par 'amal karo.

16 Aur main npue liap si: darkhwast kaningA, aur wuh tunihen diisra Ta- salli-denuwAla bakhnhega, ki hame- sha tumhare mlI.Ii rain: ;

17 Ya'ue, Kiih i Haqq> jise dunya hasil nahiji kar saku', kyiiuki use na dekhti hai, aur na use jAnti hai ; lckin nun uscjantohu, kyi'iiiki wuh tumhare tath nihti hai, aur tum ineti huwegi.

18 Main tumben yatim na chhor- iijitta: main ttmiiniro |i;U Alingi.

19 Ab tliorider hai ki dnnyi mujhe phir nadekhegi; par tuuituiijiu-dflilito ho, nur is liye ki uuiii jitA hun, tum Lhi jioge.

20 u« «'z tum jAnogo k main Bap

m

men, aur tum mujh men, aur main tum wm htm.

21 Jis pas mere alikim hain, aur wuh un par 'amal karta hai, wuhi mujh se ninliabbat rakhti hai; aur wuh jo mujh se niuhabbat rakhti hai, mere Bap kA piyArA boga, aur main use piyar karuugA, aur apno ta,in m par zaJiir karunia.

83 YaluidAli ne, na wuli jo Iska- riyutf thA, use kabA, Ai KhudAwand, yib kytinkar hai, ki tu Ap ko ham par zihir kiyA chAiita, aur dunyA par na- bi ij ?

23 Yibu' im jawAb mim use kaha, Agar koi mujhe piyar karta hai, wuh mere kalAui par 'amal karegA, aur mera Baip uae piyar karuga, aur ham

; pAs awenge, aur UI keutb rali:ngi-.

'M Jo mujhe piyar nahin karta, nmre kalAm par 'amal nabin karta; aur yih kalam, jo tum suute ho, merA Dahin, baiki BAp kA hai, jia tie mujhe bhejA hai.

25 Main. no yih battn, tumhare sAth hote biie, tum bg kabin.

26 Lekin wuh Taaaili-dmawfSi, jo Riih i Quda hai, jise BAp meru mim. be bbejegi, wuhi tumhen sab chineti sikb- lAwegA, aur «ah bAten, jo kuchh kl

ne tutnhetj kuhi hain, tumben. j$i dilAwega.

17 SalAoi tum logog ke liye chbor- ke jita lnin ; apiti saiamati main tum- ben dota hiin ; na jis tarah so ki dunyA deti hai, maifl tuothen deta htin. TumhiirA dil na ghabrae, aur na dam.

28 Timi sua chuke ho ki main ne tum ko kahA, ki Main jdtd hun, uur tum pAa phir Ata htin. Agar tum nuijhe piyAr karto, to tum mere is kahne se, ki Main BAp pAs jAta bdn, klmah hoto; kyiinki mera Bap mujh so bani hai.

i'» Aur ah main ne tumben U8 ko wiqi' hone ho peshtar kaba, ta ki jab wuh wnqA' men Awe, to tum imAn lau.

30 Ba'd ia ke main tuai 6e bahut

Shaijirdon ko Metrik mrn YU'HAN

kalfuri im karringd; is liye ki is jahdn kd sarddr dtd hai, nur mujh meri iis ki kol ebiz nahin.

31 Lekin is UhAK se ki dunyd jdne ki main Bdp se muhamiat rakhtd lilin, jis tarah BAp ne mujhe farnid diyd, main waisd hi karUi hun. Utho, vahdn sechaleri.

XV BA'B.

MAIN eachche Wg&t kd darakht. ht'nj. aur im-rd l'>dp brtgbdn bui.

2 Jo da.li mujh nien mewa nahin ldti, wuh' uae obbdnt ddltd hii: nur bar ek jo mewa lali, wuh un (if kar- td hai, td ki wuh siiydda mewa lawe.

3 Ab tum ua kaldm k« wabah, jo main ne tumben kahd, pak Inie.

i Mujh men qdiin DO, aur main tum men. Jin tarah ki ddli Ap au mewa nahin Id Bakti, magar jab ki wuh angtir ke darakht men ipiiin ho, usi tarah lum bhi nuhiij, inagar jab ki mujh men qdim ho.

5 Angur kd darakht main Ini n, tum dAlidn ho: wuh jo mujh rnen tjiim hotd hai, aur main ua men, wuhi ba- hut mewa Idtd hai; kyi'mki mujh n juda tum kuchh nahin kar aakte.

6 Agar koi mujh mag qdim na ho, to wuh" ddli ki tarah phenk diyd jdta, aur siikh jdtd hai, aur log unherj ba- turte hain, aur Ag raeg jlmukie kain, aur »8 jal jati hain.

7 Agar tum. mujh men qdim, aur meri hdten tum men qaim howen, to jo chdhoge, mdngoge, aur tumhdre liye wuhi hogA.

8 Kere Bdp kd jahil isi se hai, ki tum bahut mewa lio, m tum mere shajjird boge.

9 Jftisd Bdp ne mujhe piyiir kiyd, waisd bi mitiij m- tumben piy&l h Ij i ; tum meri muhnbbat men adbit raho.

10 Agar tum mere hukmon jiar 'amal karo, to tum meri Bttuhabbat men qdim hoge, jaisd ki main ne apne Bip K« bukumu par 'amal kiyd, am- is ki muhabbat men q4im lnm.

142

NA', XV. Blidmil hotie h vnk anjam.

11 Main ne yih bdten tumben ka- hin, td ki meri kbushi tum men haul rahe, aur tumhdri khushi kdmil ho.

12 Merd hukm yih hai, ki Jalai main no tumhen piydr kiyd hai, tum bhi ek Uilere ko piydr karo.

13 Kol ehakhs us se ziydda mu- halilmt nabi n kartd, ki apui jdn apne doston ke liye de.

14 Jo kuchh ki main ne tumben farmdyd, agar tum karo, to mere dost ho.

lf> Ba'd is ke main tumhen khadim uh kab'iiigA, kyitnki kbdditu nahin jatitA ki u» kd kbudawand kyi kartA hai : baiki main ne tumhen doat kahd hai, ki Bab bdten, jo main ne apne Bdp se suni hain, main ne tumben batldiii.

16 Tum no mujhe nahin cbund hai, baiki main ne tumben <;himi hai, aur tumheij muqarrar kiyd hai, ki tum jdo, aur DMWB lao, aur tuiulidia mewa bdqi rahe ; td ki tum merd mim leke jo kiiehh Bdp se mdngo, wuh tumhen dewe.

17 Main r.umben yih hdten, farmdta luin, ki Tum ek iliisru ko piydr karo.

18 Agar dunyd tum bc du^hmani kartl hai, to tum jdnto ho ki ub no tum se age mujh M duHhmuni kl.

Y.) Agar tum dunyd ke hote, to dnuyd unog ko piydr karli: leklo is liye ki tum dunyd ke nahin, baiki main ne tumhen dunyd ee chunke juda kiyd bai, is wdMto dimyd tum 60 dusb- mani k u r t i hai.

20 Uh bit ko jo main ne tum se kahi, yrtd karo, ki Naukar apne kbd- wind M bari imbiij. Jab unhon ne mujhe satdya, tn m tumberi bhi «atd- vMmm ; agaf unhon ne mere k:iLuu ko mand hai, to wo tumhdrd bhi md- neage.

'41 Lekin yih sih knehb mere ndm ke sahab tum se karenge, kynuki we uae, jiK uo mujlie bbi-ja bai, ualiiu jan t e.

'S2 Agar main na aya hotd, aur uu-

Ut tiis-tUi ki babat jo Ruhse YU'HANJTA', XVI. 0 Masili m honewali (M. hen nakahta.toun kagunah nahula: jf&lda hai: kyiiiiki a^ar main najAi'ir, lek~i» ab uii pas ua ku gunah ka 'uzr to Tasalli-denewala mm pas na awega ; nahin. par agar main jiiuo, U> main use tum

2<fWuh jo mujh bo 'adawat karta hai, mere Uap m bhi 'adiiwat karta hai.

r main un ke bich men ye kain, Jl- kisi iltisru M nahin kiyr, na kiye hota, 10 un ka gunah na nota; par ab to utihon ne riekha, aur mujh seaur inere Jiap po dushmaui ki.

26 l:''kin yih hiia, tak i wuh kalam j.i mi ki sh:ii-i\il iiii'n likha hai, ki IJulion ne mujh au be-sabab dushmani ki, pura lio.

26 Par jabki wuh'l'asalli denewala, jisc main tumhare liye Dap ki taraf sebhi'jun^A.ya'ue, lluh i Kami, j" Map Mi nikalli" hai, iwe, to wuh mere liyo gawihi degfc-

27 Aur'tmn bW gftWfhl dofO, ky- uiiki timi Kburii' se mere si ih ho.

XVI BA'B.

MAIN ne ye baten tumben kabin. ta ki tum thokar na khao.

2 We tum k o 'ibatiatkhar.uri ne ni- kal dejge; baiki wuh ghari ati hai, ki jo koi tumhen qatl karc, gumau kari'^a ki main Khudd ki bundagi baji lata hun.

3 Aur luin se aisa suluk is liyo kar- ou^f.-, ki uuhon ne na. Bdp ko jaua, na iiiujbo.

4 Aur main ne yih batinj lum kabin, ta ki jab wuh waqt awe, to tum yad k*ro ki main ne turn H kabin : aur main ne shun'i' iiimj ye baten tum- ben na kabin, kyiinki main tumhdre sath i ha.

5 Lekin ab main uh pas, mujhu bheja, jata hun ; aur tum men U k"i mujh se nahin puchhta, ki Tu kabag jiita hai?

G Baiki ia liye ki main ne ye baten ! iliin, tum hara ilil gamsebhar

pas bhej diinga,

a Aur wuh takar dunyi ko gundh Ke, aur t&ttf «c, aur 'adiilat se, taqsirwar tliahraoga:

0 Gundh ao, ia liye ki we mujh par iman nahin, Ide;

10 Basti se, is liyo ki main apne Bap pas jata hun, aur tum mujhe phir na dekhoge;

1 [ Ailalat m\ ia liye ki is jahan ke nrdil par hukm kiyilgaya hai.

""eri aur bahut mi baten hain, ki main tumben kaln'ai, par ab tum uu ki bardashl itahin kar sakte.

L8 Uikin jab wuh, ya'ue, Riih i Haqq awe, to wuh tum ko siri sachai ki rali batawegi; is liye ki wuh apnl

kahegi ; lekin jo kuehh wuh sunegi, ao kahegi ; aur tuinhen ayaude ki kha- baren d>-gi.

14 Wuh ineri buzurgi karegi ; is liye ki wuh mori chizon men »c pawegi, aur tumhen dikluiwf^i.

15 8ab cbizeri, jo Bap ki hain, meri hain : ia liye main ne kaha, ki wuh mori chiitot) men se legi, aur tumhen dikhiwegi.

lli Thori der, aur miijbo na de- khoge ; aur phir thori dor, aur niujhe dekhoge: kytinkt main Bap ke pai1 jata hiirj.

17 Tab us ke ba'ze shdgirdorj ne Apai men kab:i, Yih kya hai, jo wuh li:iiiii'i_i kabiu hai, ki Thori der, aur tum mujhe na dekhoge; aur phir tborl der, aur tum inujhc dekhoge j aur yih, Ih liye ki main Bap pas jata hun V

IS Phir unlion u kaha, Yih kya hai, jo wuh kahta hai: ki Thori der V haui nahin jaute, ki wuh kya kahiii hai.

19 So Yisu* ne jaua ki we cbahte

hain ki mujh se suwal karen, Lekin main tumhen soeh kahta ,unhcn kalid, Tum apns men UB ki i, ki Tumhiire livu paeri jaua hi j babat piiohbto ho, jo main ne kaha, UB

Masih H akhiri 7iusihat. YU'IUNN.V, XVII. U» ki du'a ranalon k* Vye.

ki Thori der, siur tiim mujtie- na de~ khoge, aur phir thori iler, aur tum

mujhe dekhogeS

20 Main tum ne sach fiai-h kahta litin, ki Tum rooge, aur uala karoge, par dunyd kiiualt hoffi ; aur tum gaui- gin hoge, lekiu tumhari gam khushi bo jiegd.

21 Jati 'aurat janno lagi i liiii, ti.

f*mgia hnti hai, is liyo ki us ki gin . paEuncbi : lekin jali larkajani, to is kSushl we ki duiiyi nien. ek ddmj juiiiia liiia, uh dard ko phir ydd nah i j karti.

22 Pas tuni ab eamgin lio ; par main tumben phir «lckfi UEga, aur tum hara dil khush boga, aur tuinhari khusbi kui tura se i-'jtiiin ua legd.

23 Aur tum us din uiujh sc kucbh suwdl ua karuge. Main tam se eacli Mfih kahta hu», Jo kucbii tum nierd iiu.ni leke Bdp ae mangogo, wub tum to degd.

24 Ab tak tum ne merc ndm kuchh nuhiu mau «a ; mangi>, ki t paoge, La. ki tuinhari khushi kamil

25 Main no je bdterj tanisilon men tumben kabin ; par wuh w»qt dt~a bai, ki mairj tumben, tanisilon men phir na kuluiravi, baiki Bdp ki adi' khabar tum- ben d ungsi,

26 TJs din tum merc mim se mang- oge, aur main tumben uahin kahtd ki main Udp so tumhdre Jiye darkliwasi karungd ;

27 Is liye ki Bdp tn dp hi tumben }Ay&r kartd hai, kyiinki tum ue mujbe piyar kiyd, aur imdn Ide bo ki main Knudd im n i k la Ini n.

2n Main Uap se nikld, aur dunyd men dya rum : phir dunyi ae rukbeat hota, aur Bap pas Jdti lnin.

29 Un kti nhdgirdon nc use kahd, Dekil, ab tii Hal' kalitd hai, aur tamsil nitii nakiii kahta.

30 Ab haiu jdnte hain ki tfi aab kuelili janta hai. aur niuhtaj naluri kil

114

koi tujh aesuwdlkarn; la 80 baui iiuiiu la.1 ki tu Klmdd se nikld hai,

SI Yisti' ne unhcn jawab diyd, Kyd ab tum imdu Ide hoV

32 Dekku, gliari iti bai, baiki d □hulu, ki tum men se har ek paia- ganda boke apni rdh legd, aur tum mujhe akdd chhor doge; tan blij main akeld uahin, kyunki Bdp meru nal I i hai.

Uli Main ne tumben ye bdtenkahln, tdki tuminnjli un-n itminan pdo. Tum dunyd men miisibat ufbaugfi ; li kirt kliatir-jani'a rakbo, ki main ne duiiya ko jita hai.

XVII BA'B.

Y ISU" ne ye biten farmdin, aur apui diikhen dsman ki Uraf uthdin, aur kahd, Ai Bdp, ghari d piiliuuchi liai; apne Bete ko jaUL Ifiikbsh, td ki tera Butd bbi tujhe jalai baklisbe :

2 Cliundnelii tii ne use aab jismon ptr iklniyar diyd bai, td ki wub un aab ko, iiuherj tu nt> use bakhsha, hamesha ki zindagi duwe.

3 Aur haiiu'sba ki /.indagi yih hai, ki wc tuju ko akeld sauhelid Kbuda, aur Yitid' Masih ku jise tii ue bheja liai, jdnen.

4 Main ne zaiuin par teri jaldl zalirr kiyd )iaj : main u.s kdm ko, jo tii ne mujhe kanie ko diyd hai, tamdm kar cbuka.

5 Aur, ai Bdp, ab tii mujhe apne siitli tu jalai se, jo main dunyi ki paiddisb se peslitar ten .-atb rakbtd tba, lni/uj-gi de.

(1 Mniii netere ndni ko un ddmion par, jinben tii ne dunyd men se mujhe diyd, zabir kiyd bai : we tere the, aur td ne unhen mujbe diyd bai, aur un- hnn ne tere kaldui par 'amal kiyd hai.

7 Ab uuborj ne jAna- bai ki sab v.\\v/a:u jo tu ne mujbe din teri taraf we bai n.

8 Is liye k i main ne we lidten, jo tii ne luujhu bata diii, unben bati di

Masih ki du'd YUTHASS

hain ; aur unhon Be unhen qahi'tl Iciji, aur yaqin jana ki main tujh se nikld iinri, aur we imAn Ide hain ki tu ne mujlii' bhijA hai.

I) M.Vin un ku liyo darkhwdst kartA hun, main dnnvd ke liyo nalntj. tOttaf un ke liye, jinlicn tii ne mujhe diyd hni, darkhwdst karti hiin, ki we tere kain.

10 Aur Bab mere tere hain, aur tere raere hain ; aur main un sc buzurgi ftJbt in'iij.

11 Main dunyA men dgc na rahun- ga, par ye dunya nwn hain, aur main tujh pAs Atd 'hun. Ai quddus BAp, kpm lii iiAtu ko unhen, jinhen tt'i ne mujhe bakhslid, hifawit se rakh, tiki we batuan tarah ek ho jdwen.

12 Jab tak ki main un ke Bflth dunya mert thd, tab tak main ne tm nam ye un ki hifdzat ki, baiki jin ko tri ne mujhe diyd hai, main nc un M nigahbani ki: aur kol nn men se, kiwA haldkat ke farzand ko, balak nahiii hua, td ki nawislna pfird ho.

13 Aur ab main tujh pas Ata ban. ; aur main yili bahti dunya men kahta hun, td ki meri kbosbf nn men kamil ho rahe.

14 Maitj ne teri kalam unhen diyd, aur dunyA ne un se dttshmanf ki, ii iiye ki jiii^i main dunyA kA nahin htin, we bhi dunya ke nnhin hain.

1 j Main vih darkhwdst nahin kartd. ki tu uniierj dunyA men sc uthA le par yih, ki tii unhen 08 sharfr bo ha- chae.

16 JaisA ki main dunvA M niihin lilin, wc lihi dunya ke nahin hain.

17 Unlniti apni sachdi bc pdk kar teni kalAm sachdi hai.

18 Jis tarah tfi ne mujhe dunyA men hhejA, main uo bhi unhen dunyA men hhejA hai.

IH Aur un ke wiate main apni taq- (Hl kartd hun, td ki we bhi aachAi «t njuqaddas hun.

20 -Main nirf unhin ke liye nahin, 146

A', XVIII, raaulon ke liyr.

baiki un ke liye bhi, jo un ke kalAm H miLJli par imdii ldwenge, darkhwdst kartA hun ;

21 Tiki we sab ek howerj, jaisdki tii, ai Kap, mujh metj, nur main tulh men, ki we bhi ham men ek bon ; td ki dunyA imdii !Awe ki lu ne mujhe bhcjd hai.

22 Aur wuh jahil jo tii ne mujhe diyii hai, main ne unhen diyd hai ; td ki we ek hon, jis tarah so ki ham ek hain.

23 Main un uien, aurtti mujh men, td ki we ek hoko kamil howen ; aur ki dunyA jAue ki tu ne mujhe bhejd h:ii, aur jis tatah ki trt no mujhe piyar kiyA, tii ne unhen bhi piyftr kiyA hai.

24 Ai Bdp, main eh ah t A hi'm ki we bhi, jinhen tu ne mujhe bakhshA hai, jatian mabj) hiin, more sdth howen : tA ki we mere jaldl ko, jo tii ne mujhe bakhshd hal, dekhon : kyiinki tii ne mujhe dunyA ki paidaish «e Ago piyar kiyA hai.

Sg Ai 'Adil BAp, dunyd ne tnjho uhfrj jiuiH, magar main ne tujhe jAcA hai, aur inhon ne jana hai U ta U mujho bhojA.

20 Aur main ne terA ndra nn par zahir kiyA, aur zAhir karungd: ta ki wuh piydr, jis bo tri no mujhe piydr kivd hai, un men ho, aur main un merj htin.

XVIII BAU

Y ISU" yih biterj knhke apne shd- L'inii'ij ko sdth Qidriin ke ndle ke. piir piya, jabdn ek bA.gcha thd; ua men wnli aur oa ke shAgird ddkhil hde:

2 Aur Tahudah bhi, ji« ne use pa- ka.rwa diyd, wuh jagab jAntA tha. ki Yisu' aksar apne ehAgirdon ke sdth walidn idyd kartd tha.

3 fabYahiiddh mpihion kA ek gol, aur snrdAr kdliinon aur Farision bo piydda leke, mash'alon aur chiragon aur halliyaton ke sath, waluin dyd.

4 Aur Yiisii' ne sab kuchh, jo u^ par

JftW kd 2'ahra jand. YU'HAXNA', XVIII, Patiiia m se in&dr kartu. honewAla tha, jAnke Ago barha, aurlju sardar kahiu se kuclili jin-pahchAn > kalisi, ki Tum klise dhiindhte rakhta tha, babar niklA, aur us se jo

ln.y

!i Unhon ne use jawab diya, YihCi' Kasari ke, Yisu' ne uuhen kftlid, ki Main hiin. L's traqt YahiUiah bhi, ];■• 110 use pakarwAya, un ke sath khara thi

(> Aur jonhin Qa ne uiihcn kahA, ki Main hun, wu pichh.fi hate, aur zamin par gir pare.

7 Tab us nc uii se ph i r puchhA, ki Tum kiso dhundhte lioV We bule, Yisu'NAsari'ko. '

8 Yisu' iio jawab diya, Main ne tumben kahii, ki Main hun: pas agar tum mujhe dhiindhte ho, to inheu jAne do.

9 Yih ia liye hiiA, td ki wuh kalam, jo ua ne kahA, parA ho, ki Jinhen tu ■ l- ■ niiijiie diya, main ne un men ko bhi nun ua kiya.

10 Tib Sliauia'un Patrus ne talwAr, [o us pas ihi, khinchi, aur sardar k:ifii.n ke naukar par chalai, aur ua k A dahinA kau urA diya. Ua naukar ka jiam Malkus tha.

11 Tab Yisii' ne Patrus sc kaha, A pni talwAr miyan men kar ; kya wub l-iyiila jo mere BAp ne mujh ko diya, main m pilin ?

12 Tab sipAhi, aur Bubadar, aur Yahudioa ke piyAdon ne milku Yisu' ko psikrn, aur use Ijandha,

18 Aurpahle uso Animspaslugnye; kyi'mki wuh Qayafa ndm us baras ke nardar kabin ka ftaaura tha,

14 Yih wuhi Qayai'A tha, jia ne Yahtidion ko salah di, ki umm.it t ke badle ek kii marnA bihtar hai.

15 K Par Hhama'un Patrus aur ddfrf slwiird YistV ke ptoUtt bo liye ; kydnki ua shAgird aur harddr kAbin men kuchh jAn-pahchAn thi, aur wuh Yisu' ke ssath sardAr kabin ke dAlAn men gaya.

Ifi Lekin Patrus ctarwAze par hiihar kharA rahA. Tab wuh diiwrA shAgird,

' Hb'

tlarbani karti thi kahke Patrus ko andar le ay£.

17 Tab u» chhokri ne jo darbAn thi Patrus w kaha, KyA tii bhi ia sbnkhs ke s-liauhdon men se nahiii? W' uh bolA, ki Main nnbin lilin.

IH Par naukar aur piyAda koelon ki Ag sulgakar jAro ke Mbtb H kharc hiie tApte tlio ; aur I'atrus un ke sath klmni tap rahA thd.

l'J \ Tab sardAr kabin ne Yisd' se us ke abA^irdon aur us ki lalim ki bAbat suwAl kiyA.

20 Yisd' ne u»g jawab diya, ki Main ne ashkara 'alam ae baten kin ; main no hamesha 'ibAdat-kiiiiin-, .nu haikal men, jahin Yahudi har waqt jam'a hote iiain, ta'liui di, aur poshiila

.1, kiidliti naluri kahA.

21 Tii mujli se kyi'm puelihtA hai? un ms piichh, jinhon ne umjh se auna, ki main ne unhen kya kahA ; dekh, ki we jAnte hain, jo main IM kahA.

22 Jab us ne yih bAten kabin, tab piyAdon men se ek ne, jo pas klnu'a tha, Yisii' ko taniAncha niArke kahA, Kyiin tu sardir kabin ko :iiJa jawab detA hai ?

23 Yisii' ne use jawab diyA, Agar main ne bura kaha, to lnmti ki gp,wuil de; par agar acliehhi kahA, to tu mujlie kyuri unirta hai '?

21 \\a- Aiimis ne use bandbA bui Qaydia sardAr kAhin ke pAs bbejA.

25 AurShama'un Patrus kliara ini/i

iAp rahA. Sounhon ne use kahA,Kya

tii bhi us ke shAgirdon men n naliiii

Ub ne inkAr kiya, aur kahA, ki

Main mihiii hiin.

16 l'lur MHfw kabin ke naukaron mon se ek ne, jo us shakhs k A, ki jis kii krin PatrtM tw kar d;ila tha, ri^lir.i- dAr thA, kahA, KyA main ne tujhe us

sAth baKehe mefl nabin dekha?

?7 T;ib P.itnis ne phir inkAr kiya ; aur wunhin morg ons bang di.

Pildtus kd suwdl. YTJUANNA', XIX. *

28 1" Tata Yisii' kO Qaydt"A pas se

diivdn-khdne men lao, aur yih subh ki waqt thd, aur we khud diwdu- khdne meij na gayo, ta ki napak na howcn, baiki fasah khawen.

29 Tab Pilatus un pAs niknl dyd, aur kahd, Tum ismard parkydfaryad karte 1 1' ■ '.'

30 Unhurj ae jawab mon uh hc kaba, ki Ajjar yih badkirdir na hoti, to ham uso tero hawdla na karte.

31 Tab Pildtus ne uuhen kaba, Tnm use le jdo, aur apni shari'at ke mutd- biq us ki "adalat karo. Yahudi'on ne tO use kahd, Ham ko rawii uabin ki kisi ko ]dn se mareri.

32 Yib is liye hfia, ta ki Yisd'ki bat, jo us ne apni maut ki tarah se lahan karko kahi thi, puri howe.

33 Tab Pildtus pidr diwdn-khane men dakhil hua, aur Yisd' ko bulake uh se kahd, liyd td Yaluidion kd BA<1- ahah hai ?

34 Yiad' ne use jawab diyd, Tu yili bat dp ao kabta hai, ya ki auron ne mere haqq men tujh so kahd hai i

35 Pildtus ne jawdb diyd, Kyd main Yahudi hdn 'i Teri hi qaum oe aur sanlar kdhinon ne tujh ko mere hawai» kiyd ; td ne kyd kiyd hj

Ma&ih ftc kor? m&rna,

39 8o tumhdrd dastdr hai, ki mam fasah men t umbara liye ok ko chbor duti ; kyd tum chdhte ho, ki main tumbarc liye Yaluidion ko Bddshdh ko ohhor ddn ?

40 Tab un sabhon ne phir ohlllake kahd, ki Is ko nah m, baiki Barabbas ko, Par Barabbds bal.indr (ha.

XIX BAit.

TAB Pildtus ne Yisd' ko pakarke kore mdre.

2 Aur sipdhion ne kdnton kd tAj sajkc us ke eir par rakhd, aur use argawdni ptwhdk pahindi,

3 Aur kahd, Ai Yahddion ke BAd- shdh, Salam! aur uulion ne uw laui- auuhe mi re.

i Tab Pilatus ne phir bahar jikis nnlirii fcaha, ki Dekho, main use tum pas bahar 1« dyd bdn, td ki Uun jano ki main us kd kuehh BuHk nahin pdtd.

5 Tab Yisu' kdnton kd tdj rakhe, aurargawdni pushak pahinehue bahar dyd. Aur Pilatus ne uu se kahd, Dekho yih ddiui !

(i So jab sardar kabin aur piyddnn ne use dekhd, to ehillaka kaha, ki Salib dc, Salib de. Pilatus ne unheg kahd, Tunihin use lo, aur salib do,

3(i Yisii' ne jawdb diya, ki Meri kydnki main us tni'n kuehh ipisiir — naliiti pdtd.

7 Yahddion ne use jawab diyd, ki Ham shari'atwdle bain, aiur hamari sbnvi'ar ke nmtabiq wan .|atl ke tftkj hai, is liye ki us ne »poe t*4fl Khudi kd Unta thahravd.

8 % Jab Pilatus ne yih bat suni, to ziydda dard ;

y Aur diiviiti-khdne men phir an- dar jakv Yisii' se'kahd, Tu kahar, ka hai? Par Yisd' ne use kuehh jawab na diya.

10 Tab Pildtus n use kaba, kl Td nmjh se nabin. boltd? kj-d tu naMg jin t a, ki mujhe ikhtiyar Imi, cliahi'm, to tujbc salib dus'' aur uhiihr.ii, to tujlii! L'lihor ddn ?

hadshahat la jahdn ki nahiri : agar nieri bddsbahat ia jahdn ki hoti, to mere uaukar larai karte, td ki matg Yahudion ko hawdla na kiyd j;ii;i ; pai ab tiiuri bddshdhat yahdn ki nahin hai.

:17 Tab Pilatus ne use kahd, So kyd tu bddshdb hai ? Yisd' ne jawdb diyd, ki Jaisd dp larmdte, main bdd- shdb lnin. Main is liye paidd hud, aur is wdste dunyd men dyd, ki haqq pu gawdhi ddn. So jo koi, ki haqq se hai, meri dwdz suntd hai.

38 Pildtus ne use kaba, ki Haqq kydhai? Yih kabke pita Tnluimon pU Itdliar raya, aur iniheii kaba, Main us kd kuehh nusdr nabi» pdtd. 147

Mtuth ke Imrt» par

YTJ'HANNA', XIX.

U Yisii' ue jawab diya, ki Agar Bdduhah niat lildi, luilki yih likh, ki yih tujbe dparse diydmi, jiitd, tomujh U* M kahd, ki Main Yabudion k:i

par turi kuchh ikhtiyar na hotd jis ne niujke tere hawiila kiyd, ua ka gunab tlyida hai.

12 tls wwjt se PiUtUS no cluihi'v ki • isi! clihur de; pas Yahud ion no chil- ! iki-r kulii, ki Ac;iir tii is mard kodihor detd hai, t» tii Qaisur ka khuir-kliu-iih iiiihin ; jo koi anno ta.in biidshdh tfaahrati hai, wuli Qaisar ka mukhdlif Loke boltd hai.

13 f Pildtus yih bat sunkar Y isu' k o bahar lavfl, aur uh inaqdm mwj 'y Chabdtura, aur Mbrdni mag Gabbritha kablaia hai, uiasnad par bait ha.

14 Aur fasah ki taiydri ka din tua.

[ladshdh liur}.

22 Pildtus ne jawdb diyd, ki Main ne jo likhd, m likhd.

23 1" Pliir sipahion no, jab Yira' ko salib pai khinch chllke, U> us ku kaprori ko liya, aur chdr blan ki\v, iiar sipalii ke liye ek hissa ; aur «s ke kurto ko lihi liya: aur knrtd bin siya sardsar bind hiid thd.

24 Tri liye unhon ue ajian men kahd, ki Ham use ua phdren, baiki uh juir chitrlii ddleg, ki yih ki» ka boga : yih i« liye Md, ki nawishta Jo kabid hai, ki Uuborj ue mori poshdk baut \i, aur mero kurte ku liye ehitthidn daliri,

uhhathu ghmito ke qarib thd. jpnra howe. So Bipdliio& ue aisa hi rhir ua iie Yahdaiorj ko kahd, ki kiyd.

ilvklMi iLjmi Badshiih!

25 f Tab Yisii' kt salib jm»

15 Tab wo chiltae, ki Lo jd, le jd^md, aur us ki rad ki baliin, Harbam iiae salib de, Pildtus no cmheg kasa, nUfapaa kl joni, aur Mariyam Mag-

Kyii uiain tumhare B&tahjh ko salib dan i Santai kahinon ue jawab diyd, ki Qalsat fcealwa hanidr,ikoi birtatih nahiu hai

10 Tab ua ne use u n ke hawdla kiyd, ki OM salib di jdwc. Aur we Ylsd' ko pakarke lc gaye.

17 So wuh apni salib uthde hua us Engab ko, jo khopri ka maaaro kablata hai, jis ka tnrjiiiua 'Ibrani men Gdl- gdid hai, nikal jjayd:

18 W anda unimu ne use aur ue ke sath do aur ko salib par khinehd, tar- fein men ck ek,aur liafi* ku atcfa mag,

19 % Aur Pildtus no ok kitaba likha, aur salib [iar laga diya. Wuh likhd vili thd, ki YISTJ" NA'SAIII' TAHUTU'OS KA' IIA'DSHA'JI.

KO Da kitdbo ko bahut m Yahu- diori ne parhd, ia liye ki wuh maqdm, jahil) Yisii' salib par khiijchd gayd thd,~shabr ke niudik thd; aur wuh 'Ibiani, aur Mnani, aur Latiui men likha thd.

21 Tab Yahudiunkesarddr kdhinor no Pildtus ko kahd, ki Yahudion ka 14»

dalini, kiiari ihin.

'M Yisd' no apni md ko, aur ua «bdgird ko, jise wuli piydr kartd thd, nas khare litio dokhkar apni md ko kahd, ki Ai 'aurat, dekh, yih tera betd!

27 Plur us ne us shagird ko kahd, Dekh, yih teri md! Aur usi gbari se wuh ahdgird use apno ghar le gaya.

88 "J UaM us ke Vis;'i' ne jdnke ki ab sab bdteu puri ho cbukin, yih knbd, td ki Dawbhtt pura hewe, ki Hai u pljaaa hun.

'J'] Wiihan ek 1>artan airke se bhard hiid dhard tba: uniion ne isfanj ko sirke nun tar karke.aur Kiilaki liautlii par rakhko, us ko munb men diyd.

30 Pliir Yisii' ue, jab sirkd ehnkhd, to kahd, Pt'ird hdd; aur nir jhukdke jin di.

31 Pliir Yahddiun M is libas se ki tatdug nbt ke din saiilion DKr na rah jawen, kydnki wuh din taiydri kd thd, baiki bara hi isabt thd, I'ildtiiH m diirkhwds'r ki.ki un ki hinp'ii tef^aur Idsh'eu utdri jaen.

32 "Tab aipdhion ne akc pahle aur

Masih ki maut o dafar,

duaro ki tdngeg, jo ua ke sdth salib par

khinehe gaye the, tong.

33 I .«-kin jab unhog ne Yisu' kl taraf rike dckha ki wuh mar chuka hai. t.i ns ki tangen natorig :

34 Par sipihion men ao ck ne bhd- le m us ki puli chhedl, aur filfaur uh Be labu aur pdiii nikld.

33 Aur jis ne yih dckhd, gawaht di, nur us ki gawibi fiaehehi hai, aur wuh jdiita bai ki sach kahtd bai, ta ki timi [mau Ido.

36 Kyfinki yih bdten huin, ki na- wishta pura howe, ki Us ki koi haddi tori ua jdegi.

37 Aur phir di'mri nawiakta is maz- niun kd liai, ki Wfl ua par, jiac. unhog ne chhedi, nazar karcnge.

38 1 Aur lia'd ua ke Yusuf Ara- niatiya ne, jo Yisu' kd shdgird thil, lekin Yahudi. m ke dar Be posbida mag, l'ildtus Be ijazat chahi ki YibiV ki lash ku h Uwft; aur Pildtus ua ijdwit di. So wuh ake Yisu' ki ldsh le gaya.

39 Aur Niuudemus bbi, jo pahle Yiau' pds rit ko gaya tha, iy&, aur pwhu iffl ki atkal murr aur 'fid miidke laya,

40 I'hir unhog ne YisiV ki ldsh leke use sufi kMM meij khuahbuiorj ke sdth, jis taiu se ki dafan karne mefl YaMdion kd dastiir hai, kaniaya.

41 Aur wah jin, jis jagab ki use sulih di gayi thi, ek bag tha, aur us brtj^ nieij ck uayi qabr thi, jis Eien knbhii koi ua dhari gaya 1 1ni.

42 8o unhun nc Yisu' ko Yahud i<>n ki taiydri ke dTn ke bi'ia wahin rakbi, kvunki yih nabr iiaadik thi.

XX BAT5.

H A FT E ke pihlu din Mariyani Magdalini tarke, aisd ki hanoz andhcra tha, uabr ]>ar di, aur pattliar ko <jabr sii tdia hdd dckhd.

2 Tab wuh, Shama'iin Patnn ub dusre shdszird pas, jise Siri' piyar kartd thi, dauri di, aur unhcn kahi, ki Khudawaud ko qabr se nikal le

' ua

YU'HANNA', XX. Uskajiu{hna.

iy«, nur ham uahin jante ki unhog i use kalian mkha.

3 Phir Patrus aur wuh diisra shd- gird nikle, aur gabr ki taraf gaye.

4 ChunancM we donorj ik:» tt 'Jl- daure, par dtisri Hhdgird Patroi M barh gaya, aur qabr por pahlfi pt> hunclia.

5 Us ne jhukke sdti kiii.ru pare dekho; par wuh andar na gayd.

6 Tab Shama'iin Pat.rus ua ke pichlie pahunchd, aur qabr ke andar gaya, aur si'iii kftpifl pare \\w dekhe.

7 Aur wuh rumdl, jis m urt ki *ir bandha th.i, un suti kaprorj ko tiiHh uahin, par judi lapeta hud ek Jagab para, dekha.

'b Tab diisrd abigtrd bhl, jo qabr juir pahle iya tbd, andar gaya, aur dukhke yaqin kiyd.

9 Kydnki we hauoz ua nawisate ko na jdnte the, ki murdon uien, ae us kd ji uthnft zarur bai.

10 Tab wc shdgird apne apoe gliar uien pbir gaye.

l"l % Latin Mariynm bahu oatr

r roli khari tahi, aur rota hAejab

omhf lucu jhukke nazar ki,

12 To do firiahte auffld jHMihdk men,

ek ko sirhane, aur dtisre ke piindm-,

jahdn Yisu' ki Idah rakhi thi, baith.'

dekVio ;

18 Jinliog ne use kahd, Ai 'aurat, tii kyfin roti hai ? Us ne unhen kahd, ia Byu ki we mere Khudiwand ko le gaye, aur main uahin janti ki unhun ne us» kahdn rakhi.

14 Jab wuh yun kab chuki to [liclibc phiri, aur Yisu' ko khare dekha, aur na pahckand ki wuh Yisu' hai.

lu Yisu' ne use halia, ki Ai 'aurat, tfi kyi'uj roti hai? kis ko dhtindhti hai V Us nc ua ko bdgbdu jdnke ub rc kaiid, ki Ai sihib, agar us ko yahdu se utliiya bo, to mujh se kah, ki use kabin rakhi bai, ki main oh le jdungi.

1(> Yiad' ne use kahi, Al Mariyum.

Mati h kd n6Mr )«ma. Wuh mutewsjjft ln'ii, i

YU'HANNA' ■ uso kaha, Itabbiinf ; ya'ne, Ai TJatad.

17 YisiV ne ub se kaha, Mujh ko mu t chliti ; kyiiiiki main mUtOE i'ipar apne Bap ko pas nahin, gaya: par mete Wiftion pd» Ta, aur ujlhen kah, ki Main ujmr apne Uap aur tunihdre i'.n|i pin, aur iipiii' KlnuUaur tumhare Khoda pas, jati him.

J8 Mariyam Maydaliui ai, aur sha- sirtUn w kaha, ki Main ne Khuddwand ko dekhd, aur ua ne mujli sc yih bAtisn kabin.

]!l 1 I'hir «si dmjohaftekiipakld (Hnth*,flham ko waq t, jab wahdn ke dnrwiize, jabari shagird jam'a htie tbc, Vitljutlion ko'ditr U bara the, Yiufi' Ayi, aur" bioh men khara haa, aur imhen kaha, Tuni par salam.

20 Aur yun kahke apne hatimu aur pasif ko unhen dikhava. Tab shagird Khudawand KO dekhke klmsh. hiie."

21 Aur Yisu' ne pliir imhen kaha, Tam wur taJam; Jli tarah Kap ne

Tiiujhe bbeja lini, main bhi uaf tarah

ntnili ti bhejtf nun.

22 Aur yih kabke us ne un pnr phi'inka, aur mi se kaha, ki Tum RiV i Oudi leo :

23 Jin ke gunahon ko (uni luikh- sho, un ke gunab hiikhsho jate hain ; jiriben tum ua bakhabogc, na bakhsbe "ia,, n 20.

L'-l «J Par Tliiimfl un barahon raen s,: ek, jis k;i la*|ab DidumiiR tha, Yiru' ke 6Xe want un ke with na tha.

25 Tab aur shdgirdon ne nwo kabd, ki Bam ne Khuddwand ko dckhd hal, Par ua ue unhon kaha, Jab tak ki main ub ko bathon mpQ biluu lit;' DIBOM na dekblin, aur kilon ke nish- auon men apni unglf na dalun, apne hath ko ub ke pahM mes, dakhil ■1 1 karfln, ksfeha yaqta na karangi.

20 1 A'throz kebaM, iabiiBkesba- (rird pbir andar the, aur tlnima un ke *ath tha, to darwaze band hote hiie 150

XXI. Thi'rmd H he-i'vtiqadi. Yiwu' aya, aur bich men khara hoke bola, Tum par salam.

27 Pbir ua ne Tbiuna ko kaha, ki Apni ungu* pas la, aurmere hathon ko dekh, aur apnd hdth pas la, aur use inero pahlii men dai ; aur be-hndn mat ho, baiki iman la.

28 Aur 'J'luirad ne jawab men use knhd, Ai mero Khuddwand, aur ai mere Rhndi,

29 Yisti' ne usc kaha, Ai Thiima, ls liyo ki tti ne mujho dekhd, tu iman layd hai: mubarak WO baiu, |inborj

i nahin dekha, taubhi iman lae.

30 T Aur babutsc aur mu'ajize, jo is kitab nietj likhe nahhj gaye, Yisi'i' ne apne shagirdon ke satuline dikhae :

31 Lekin ye lfkhe gayc, ta ki tum in,:in lAo ki Visii" M:Lsih hai, Khuda ka Heta, aur ta ki timi iniAn ttke Bfl ko nam t*e zindagi pao.

XXI HA'B.

A Uli ba'd na k« YisiV ne phir apne t;»,iij daryde'I'ilwriyns ke kindro par shdgirdon ku dikhayii, atu' h tarah zdhir bua, k i

2 Shaina'i'm Tatnin, aur Thuma, ju Diduinuft kablata hai, aur Nathanael, jo Qiind e Jali! kd hai, aur Zahadi ke bcto, aur us ke shdgirdon men se aur do ikalthe the.

3 Shama'vin Patru» ne unhen kn)i:i, ki Main macbbli ke sbikiir ko juta biin. Unkofl ne ua w kaM, llau, lln irro sdtb chaTengc ; aur nikalke filfaur kisliti |iar rliarbe ; par us rat, ko kuchh na pakra.

4 Alir jab taVh 1 1 11 i, to V itfS1 kiudre par khara thd; lekin shilgirdoii Ofl U jdnd ki wtth Yisti' hai.

5 Tab Yiau' ne unhen kabd, Ai larko, kvd tumhare pds kucbh khanc ko )iai? Unlioij ne jawab diya, ki Nahin.

G l'ar ua ne un se kabd, Kisbti ki dubni taraf jal ddlo, to tutii pdoge. Pas unhon ne dala, tab maohhlion ki bahutayat B0 usc kliinth na saken.

Tihri takidjo Masih n>

7 U live us shdgird DO, jise Yisii' piydr kartU thd, Patetis se kahA, ki Yih Khuddwand hai. So Shama'iin Patrus ne sutike ki wuh Khuddwand hai, chddar kamar «t bAndhi, kyrinki wuh nangA lliit, aur apne ta,in daryA men dAl diyA.

8" Aur baqi shagird' mrietililion ka jiU kbinchte Wkishti parae; kytinki WB kindre se diir iia the, mftgU do MU hdth ki atka.l.

9 Jon kio&re par Ae, wahan HBbO| ne koelon ki Ag, aur us par niachhli rakhi hiii, aur roti dekhi.

.1.0 Yisi'i' ne unhen kahd, Un machh- lion men se, fa turo. ne pakrin, lio.

11 Shama'iin Patrus ne charhke jAl ko ck sau tirpan bari niachlilion se. bharehiie kliinchd: aurngarchimachh- KAn us bahutdyat sc thin, par jAl np phatA.

12 Tisu' BA unhen kahA, A'o, kliana khAo. Aur shagirdtm men *Q kiBi ko jur,at na hai ki us ne piichhe, ki Tu kaun hai ? kyunki We jantc the ki wuh Khuddwand hai.

13 Tab Yisti' ne dke roti lt, nur un- hen di, aur visi tarah Ke machhlt di.

14 Yih tiara martaba thd, ki Yisrr n<!, niurdon men so ji utlroe ke ba'd, apne ta'in shAgirdonko dikhldyA.

18 1" Aur jali wokbanA khachuke, tM Yisii' ne ShamaVm Patrus ko kaha, Ai Shama'iin, Ytinas ke bata kya tu mujhe in se ziyada piydr kara hai V Ub ne nse kali A, Han, ai Khudawaud; tu khud jAntd hai ki main tnjbe piyaf karid hug. Us ne use kali i, ki Mere barre charA,

16 Us no do bAra nac phir kaha, ki Ai Snama'un, Yunas ke beta, Ayd tu iiinjir- piydr kartA hai? Wuh bola, ki Hio, 'ai KlmdAwand, tii to jdutA hai ki main tujh ko piyAr kartu bnn. Us ne nne kaha, ki Merf bhcreri eh ii r 4.

17 TJs nc use tisre martaba kahd, ki Ai Shama'iin, Yiinas ke bete, dyA to

151

YU'HANNA', XXI. Potnts ko ki.

mujhe piyar kartA hai V Tab Patrus, is Liye ki us uc tisri bdr us se kahA, ki A'yd tu mujhe pivdr kartA bai, dilgir Inid, aur use kahd, Ai Khudawand, tii to sah kuekh jdntd hai; haiki tujhe ma'Uiin hai, ki main tujhe piyAr kartA hlin. Yiail' ne use kaha, Men bheren charA.

IH Main tujh se sach sach kahtd hit n, ki Jah tak ki tii jawAn thd, td Ap apul kamar bdndhtA thA, aur jahdu kahiij chahta thA, chaltA phirtd thA: par ja'b ti'^biirhd hojA, to apne hdthon ko phailaeRai aur dusrd teri kamar bSdttbflgi, aur wah*n jahAn tii na ehAhc, tujhe le jdegd.

19 Ub ae in bAton sc pa1A diyd, ki wuh kaun si maut sc Khudd kA jalai 7,Aliir karegA; aur yih k'ahke use phir kahd,kl Mere picbhe lio le.

20 Tab Patrus ne phirkc us goigtrcl

ko, jisH Yisu' piyAr kartA thA, aur jis sliAm ke khAne men un ke riBfl Dftl jhukke piichhA, ki Ai KhudAwand, wuh jo tujhe iwkarwali hai, kaun hai 'i pichho Ate dekhd.

21 Patrus ne use dekhke Yisii' ko kahA, Ai Kbuddwand, ia shakhs kd

22 Yisii' ne use kahd, Agar main 1,'haln'm ki jali tak main dnu, wuh yahin thuhre, to tujh ko kyA ? tii mere picbhe ho le.

23 Tab bhdion rnen yih bAt raash- hiir hiii, ki wuh ahigird na marecaj lekin Yisu'ne use nahinkahd, ki Wuh na maregd, ma«ar yih kahA, ki Agar main ehAbiin ki mere Aue tak tbahre, to tujh ko kyA?

24 Yib wuh BhAgird hai jis ne in kimon ki gawdhi d(, aur in liAton ko liklid ; aur ham. ko yaqin hai ki ub ki gawahi saob hai.

25 Tar aur bhi bahut se kdm hain, jo Yis6' no kiye, aur agar wo judA judA likhe jAtfl, to rnain guman kartA inin ki kitdben jo liklii jalin dunyA men na sanid saktin, A'min,

ACTS

RASU'LON KE A'AMA'L.

I BA'B.

Al Theofilus, wub pahli kaifiyat main na tssnif ki, un sah baion ki, Jo ki Yittu' shuru' M kurtd, aur sikbata rabi,

^ Ua din tak ki wuli apne rasuloii ko, jinlicii UB ne chu.ua thd, Rub i Quds ee hukru dokar, upar ulkdyd

3 Un par ub ne iftu dukfa othfa

ke pichho dp ko bahut si MU» ui- ahdufon so zinda zdhir feiyd, ki wub eh Alis diu tak unhen. nanar dtd, Khudd ki badahdiat ki bdtey kahti raba;

4 Aur un ke satb ekjd hoku hukm diya, ki Yarusalam ac bdhar ua j:io, baiki Bdp ko us wa'de ki, jis kd zikr 1 1 i i ■. i maja se mu chuke hv, rdh dekho.

0 Kyiiijki YlUiatuid M tO pdiii M K'ijiftMK.-i djyd; par turu thore dlaaij ka la'd Hiili iQ.udsso baptismu pdogu.

6 Tab unhog ne, jo ikatthe tbe, ua ae pikhhd, aur kaha, ki A\ Khudd- wand, kyd tti ini Wtqt Israel ki bad- abaliat ko pbir buiial kiya cbilita hai?

7 Par ua nt unheii kaha, Tumlidrd kdm naliiii ki un wao,tun aur mau- siinoii ko, jinhcn Bdp ne apue bi ikhtiydr uien rukbd bai, jano ;

6 Lekin jab Ki'ili i Quds iiuu par dwe^i, Uiui qjiwat pdog<0| aur Yaniau- lani, aur adre Yahiidiya, u Samanya men, baiki samin ki Ladd tak, meru gawah boga.

i' Aur ivuh yiu kahke, un ke dekh- t« biie, tipar u{hdyd gayd ; bui badll ne uee un ki tuturan aachhlpd livA. 152

10 Aur ua ke jdte hiie, jab wc dsmdn ki taraf tak rabe tbe, dekho, do mard siifod j-oahak pahiue uu ke pis kbare the ;

11 Aur kabne lage, Ai Ja.iJi DWdo, tum kyurj kliare dsiunn ki taraf dekhie ho? yibi Yisii', jo tumhdra pda so damdu par uthaya gayd bai, asi tarah, \h taruh tum tiu use damdu ko jati* dekbd, pbir dwogd.

12 Tabweua pahdr se, juZaitiiij ];■! kalihitri, Jo Ya ni -ia la r n na nazdik, baiki faqat ek sabi, ki niauzil dur bai, Yan':- sajam ko phiro.

13 Aur jab dikail hue, to ek bdld- khdue par gaye ; wahdu Patrus aur Ya'iidb, aur Yulianni aur AndrydM, fTulnia aur Thumd, Rirtbulamd'aur Mati, iialfa kd beta Yu'qiih, aur Sba- in&'un Zcdotea, aur Ya'qilb kri Iduii Vafuklab, tahta tbe.

li Yo sab, 'auraton, aur Yiaii' ki md Mariyom, aur ua ko bhdion ke sdth, ek-dil hoko du'a aur nuuuat kar ralm tbe.

15 T Uultin diuoQ, Patrus abdgird- in ke darruiyda, (un sab ke udm

ruitke ek sau bis ke qarib the,) kbard bokc bold,

16 -Ai \)hiio, zariir thd ki wub nawishta, jo lliih i Quds ne, DdAd bi /.ubdui, Yiilu'idab kobaci'i meij, jo Yiad* ke pakarncwdlon kd ralmuma tbd, dgt' ae farmayd, pi'ird liowe,

17 Kyiiiiki wub hain men giud gayd, aur uu ue ia khidmat mcii liiasa payd thd,

18 So uh ne apni kadi ki m&zduri se ek kbet mol liyi, aur aundbe luurib

fanteWit ke dia men A'AMA'L, II.

gira, aur uh ka pet phat gaya, aur uh ki tamaiu antrian nikal parin.

19 Aur yih Yariisalaui ku sab rah- ncwahm ko uia'lum hiia; yahan tak ki tU kliet ka ndtii unhin ki /.uban inen Htinal-daiaa hiia, ya'ue klu'm ki

Zauiill.

20 Kyunki Zabur kl kitab men Ukba hai, ki Ua ka tuakan ujar jae, aur us mcri koi basnowaia narahe,aur us ki ta'inati ka 'uhda dtiara '

21 Pas cbahiye ki iu tnardon mon se, jo liar waut hanuire sath raho, jab Khudawand M' huni mun aya jaya ku ria t Ini,

22 Yuhanna ku baplisma se li.-ko us din tak ki wuli hamare pas se upar utkaya gaya, iu inen bc ek hainsire sath us ke ji utbnu ka gawah howe,

28 Tabunhon ne do kokhnra kiya, ek Yusuf jo Barsabas ka'ulata, jis ke laaab JukIus tha, aur diisra Mat- tliiyas.

24 Aur yih kabke du'a maugi, kiAi Kimdawaud, sab ku dilog ke jaunu- walo, dikha ki in donon luun su ui nu kia ko cbund bai, ki

25 Wub itt khidmat o risAJat inen hissa le, jis se Yabiiddh k h ari j hokc apni kias» jag&h ko gaya.

26 Aur unhog ne un pai ebittnian. dalin; aur chitthi Matthiyas ku naui par uikli; tab wuh gyarah rasulon men ttbumar kiva gaya.

II BA'B.

AUR jab Pantekust ka din aya tha, we sab ek dil hoke ikalthe OJ&e. 2 Aur akhftrgf asinan suuk Awaz Ai, jaiso buri aiidhi uhale, aur us se sara

Patrui ka w'az kun

ghar, janin we bai the the, bhar gaya.

3 Aur unhon judi judi Ag ki si zubaneg dikMi din, aur un men se barek par bailbin.

4 Tab we sab liiih i Quds se bhar gaye, aur gair zubanen, jaiwo Ruh ne i.:il i- n bolnc ki qudrat bukbshi, bolne lage.

0 Aur Khuda-tars Yahudi bar ek 153

ipuim men se, jo AsmAn ko tale bai, Yarusalaiu mon a rahe the.

b' So jab yih awaz di, to bhir lag gayi, aur sabdang In'it!, kyunki bar ek ne tuihen apni ajjui boli bolte suni.

7 Aur sab hsirau hoke, aur ta'ajjub karko, apas men kahne lagu, Dekho, kya yih sab jo bolte kain, Jalili nahin ?

8 Pan kyugknr har ek ham men m apu* apne watan ki boli s u a t a hai?

i) Partbi, aur Modi, aur 'Elami, aur rahnewAle STa*uputdmiyar Y'ahi'nliya aur Qapj)adui[iya, Pun tua atu* Asia ke,

10 Prugivi aur Pamtuliya, Misr, anr Libya ke us biasa ko jo Qureno ke 'ilaoa meri liai, aur Ruini musatir, Yahddiaur Y'abt'idi murid,

11 Kreti, aur 'Arab boke ham apni apni zubanim ineii unben Khudi ki bari baten bolt.c suiuu li.iin,

12 Aur sab bairau bfif, aur gbab- rdke ck ddare se kahne laga, ki Yih kya hiia chahtd hai ?

13 Auron no tbattlio se kaha, ki Ye nayi mai ko naslie Jiien hain.

14 1 Tab Patrus no un gyarahon ko sath kharc hoke apni awaz buland ki, aur un ho kaha, Ai Yalnidi maidu ■ ' Y:Lr,'i.-iilam ke sab rahnewalo, yih janu, aur kAu lagaku rueri baten suno :

15 K.i ye, jaisi tuin suinajhte ho, riashu men nahin, kyunki abhi pakar din ayit bai.

lb' Baiki yih wuh hai, jo Y'uel nabi ki lna'rilat farmaya gayd : ki

17 Khuda kabta bai, ki Akhiri ilinon. mag aisa boga, ki main apni liiih mun so sah adinion par dbaidngd : aur tuiuliaru Lete, aur tuiuhari beti&n, nubiiwat karungi, ain- tnmhare ja'wari roya dokhenge, aur tunilidre buddhe khwab:

18 Aur main un ditmu tam apne bandon aur bindion par apni Rih meg se dhilunga: aur we nubuwat karenge.

ly Aur main opar asman men

Bahut lof/on ka A' AMAT*, TT. murid h-mii.

achamMia, aur nichc ndl par ai- j ke ji uthne ki ttkf feJyai, W us ki jan

shaniarj, lalui, aur Ag, hidui, dikhAiingA:

20 Surai andhera, aur cbdnd lahii ho jaegA, peshtar uh k<' ki Khuddwand kd DUEtUg aur nadir din dwe ;

'J L Aur yiin hogd, ki harek jo Khu- ddwand kA ndm legi, najAt pawegA.

£2 Ai IsrAcli mardn, yu bAton suno, ki YisiV N asari ek mard thd, jis kd Khuda kl taraf se honA t.um par sdbit h'rVA, »11 rau'aji/.uri nur achambhori aur nishdnion se, jo Khuda M uh ki nia'- rifat tumbAre hu'li men dikhdin, jaisA tum Ap hhi jAnte bo :

23 Usi ko, jab KhudA ke thahrAe hiie irade aur 'ilm i azali se sompA guyd, tum ne pakrA, aur be-dinon ke hatb se kilo garwAke q.itl kiyA :

24 Usi ko KhudA ne, rumit ke band kholkr, uthayd : kyiinki rmim- kin m Iba ki wuh uh ke qabze men rahe. •

25 Ts liye ki Daud iw ke haqq men kahtd hai, ki Main ne Khuddwand pnr, j» sadA mere sAmhne hai, Age se nazar ki, ki wuh meridahni taraf hai, ■:> ki main na hatur» :

2(» Im wibali m'erA dil khush hai, aur meri zubdn nihal hai ; baiki merA badan bhi ummed men chain karagA:

27 Is liye ki t(t meri jAn KO 'Akan i gaib mi'ij na chhoregd, naapnequdduB ko sarne degA,

28 Tu ne mujhe /.indagi ki rdhen batdin ; tu ne mujhe apne didAr ke bAHl kluishi se bhar diya.

2!) Ai lihdhi, mujhe uanm ke ra.is DAi'id ko haqq men be-aharak kahne do, ki wuh moa, aur tiapi Ma gaya. am- al tak iis ki qabr hamdre danniyan maujud hai.

30 So is sabab sc ki nabi tha, aur jantd tbA ki KhudA ue us se qamm khAi hai, ki main teri nasi se Masih ko jism ke n'i h sahi* karnggi, ki tere takht par baithe ;

31 Ue ne vih rahle se idnkar Masih

154

dhfiTjweri kA 'Alam i gaib men chhori na gayi, : ke badan ne sarno paya.

88 I 'b) Yiftii' ko KhudA ne uthdyd ; ua ke ham sab gawdh hain.

33 Pas KhudA ke dahine hath bu- land hoke, aur BAp se Ruh i Quds kA wa'da pdko, u» ne yib, jo tum ab dekhte aur suiite hn, dhdld.

34 Kyrinki Daud Asmdn par na gaya; lekin wuh khud kahtA hai, ki Khuddwand ne mere Kliudawaud H kahd, ki Mere dahine baitb,

16 Jab tak ki main teredushmanon k. . ten pdnwim ki ciiauki na karun.

30 Pas TsrAel kA sArd gharaud ya- , nan jAne, ki KhudA ue usi Tisu* ko, jise tum ne salib d!, Khuddwand aur Masih bhl kiyA.

37 ^ Jab utihon ne yih sunA, torm ke dil clibid gaya, aur Patrus aur baqi rasrtlon se kahA, ki Ai bhAiu, baui kya karen V

:ihr Tab I'atrus ne un se kahA, Tauba karo. aur tum men se bar ek, gunahon ki mu'AH ke liy, Tisli' Masih kenaiii par baptiama lc, to liuh i Quds kd in- 'dm pdoge.

39 Ib liye ki yih wa'da tum se aur tuiiihdre larkou se lini, aur un sah se, jo ddr hain! jitiiori kw hamAi'd KhudA- wand KhudA buldwe.

40 Aur wuh bahut aur bdtorj kt gawahidn layA, aur yih kahkc nasihat ki.ki Apie ko is f erhi qaum se bacbAo.

41 % H" jinhon neuski bat khuahi se qubdl ki, bapfiftna paya: aur usi roz tin haair Admi ke qarib shdmil iirte.

42 Aur msulon se ta'Um pAne, aur subbat rakhnc, aur n>ti torne, aurdu'A inAngnemeri liga rahe.

43 Anrliar ek jAu ko khanf Ml aur Iwibut Ke acliambhe aui rasdloo se Kdbir bi'iin.

14 Aur sab jo iman Ide the, ikat- Mic raba, aur Bttl obiBOfl nieii sliarik

Ihe:

Ek Itttigre ko

A'AYA'L, ITT.

chuiKjd kan> d.

milkiyat aur asb&b | chai\*rd hiid tha, Patrus aur Yiihanui l>echke, harek ki wuiU.it ku muw«flq, ko liptd jdta Uii, sab ]>% nihuvui, hai-

sab ko baut detfl Uufc

4G Aur bar roz ek-dil hoke Laik;).] SnJaiman kd kahldtd liat, mon rabe, aur giur ghar rotidn torke daure ae.

rdn hoke uh baratnada ki taraf jo k o pan

kbusbi aur sidhe dil se khana khdte ibe,

12 T| Tar Patrus ne yih dekbkar loj*on n kaba, ki Ai leraeli uiardo, is

47 Aur Khudd ki ta'rif karto the, par tum kynn ta'ajjub karto? aur sab lojjori ke na/dik 'azi/. tho. kyiin liamen aisa dekli nhe ho, ki

Aur Khuddwand bar ros im ko,

n u nftj&l pai, faUWyfl mm mil:U:'t h

tha.

III BA'B.

PAS Patrus aur Yiihannd^k siil.li du'd ke waqt tisre pahftr Imikal ko chale.

2 Aur log janam kd ok langrd liyo jdte tue, jise har roz Idke haikal ke us darwaze par, jo Khubsumt kahldtd hai, bithdte the, ki haikal ke jdnewdlon so bhikh mAnfir ;

3 Jabus uePatru* BUI Yiilianiiri ko haikal mi;n jate dekhd, un se bhikh mangi :

4 Par Patnis ne Yuhanna ke sdth un par nazar karke kaha, ki Hamari taraf dekli.

5 Wuh lo is ommed par, ki uu ae kuchh pawe, uti ko tak raha.

6 Tab Patrus ae kaha, Rupa aur soua niere pds nahiii ; par jo niere pds hai, tajin detil lilin; Y\s&' Masih N asari ke iiiim «e ut.h, aur chal.

7 Aur us kd dah'ini hath pakarku minya; usi dam us ke paijw aur taklme mazbiit ho gayc.

H Aur wuh ki'uike k hara hud, aur chalnc laga, aur kiidtd phdndta, aur Khudd ki ta'rif kartd, un ko sdth haikal meij gaji.

9 Aur sab logon ne use chalte phirte aur Khudd ki ta'rif karto dekhd:

10 Aur unkopahchaua.kiyih wuhi hai jo haikal ko Khubsurst dlrwto

bhikh nidngno bait ha tha: aur

iya bani un apni qudrat ya ilimlari

us shakhs ko chalnc- ki taqat di ?

18 Abirahauiaur Iz.h&M aur Ya'qul> ke Khudd ue, hainare bapdddou ke Khudd ne, apne Bet.e Yisu' ku jaldl liiyd, jise turn ne hawdla kiyd, aur Pilatiis ke huziir, jab us nechhordcnd insdf j&na, inkdr kiya.

14 Han, tum ne us Quddiis aur Tldstkdr kd inkdr kiyd, aur ohdhd ki ek khuni tumhdre liye chhord jde :

18 Flii rindag) ko Malik ko qatl iyd, jise Khudd ne murdon. men ae uthdyd ; aur haru usko gawdh hain.

lf) lisi ke ndm ne, us iman ke maflfl j" aa ke bAxb par hai, is absklu ko, jise tum dekhteaur jaut.e ho, ma» but kiyd; tidri, usi iman ae, Jo 08 ki tvkf ae hid, yili kaniil t.auduruKti tum sab ke sauihne uaedi.

17 Aur ab, ai bhdio, main jdntd hnn ki tum ne yih ndddni kg kiyd, jaisi! liimhirc sardaruti ne bhi.

iw l'ar jin baton ki Khudd ne ap- ne sab nabiun ki zubani dg« sc kha- bar di tlii, ki Masih dukh uthawegd, BO puri kiri.

1^ ^( Pas taulwi karo, aur pbiro, ki tumhdre gunah mit.de jden, td Ki Khu- dawand ke huaur se tdzagi-ljakhsh rtiyaui :v.v>u :

20 Aur wuh YisiV Masih ko phir bhejc, jis ki manddi tum logog ke dsrmiydu dge so h(ii.

21 Zan'ir hai ki asmdn use liye rahe, uu ^amdnon tak ki sab eldzen,

niajarc se, jo u*i par gtizrd thd, dangljin kd zikr Khudd i

aivr hairdn hue. 11 Aur jis waqt wuh lai 155

aab pak

nabion ki zubdni dunya ke skuni' ae ;ra, jo [kiya, apni hdlat pnr dwen.

I'atrtts aur Yuhannd A'AMA

22 Kyunki Musi ne to bapdidon so kiikA, ki Klmiliiwiiud, fa tumhari Khudi hai, tunihire bkaiog men se tumhdre liyu ok nabi inori milnind barpd kaivgA; jt> kuchh wuh tumben, kahe, us k i sah suno.

23 Aur nii.ii hogA, ki bar nafs jo us nabi ki na suno, wuh qaum men se nest kiyA jdegA.

21 Baiki nab nabion ne, Sarauel se loke pichhluii lak, jitnon no kalam kiya, in dinon ki khabar di hai.

25 Tum nabion. ki nulad, aur us 'ahd ki ho, jo Khudi ne hamAro KAp- iliid.iij ■■■■•- b&ntibA tuu, jab AMrahun se kaki, Baiki teri aulad se diuiyi ke sire ghardne harakat pawenge.

26 TumhAre pas KhudA ne apne Beto Yisii' ko utkike pahlo bhejA, ki tum men se bar ek ko us ki badion se phorko harakat dc.

IV BA' II.

JAB wo logou se yih kah rahe the, kabin, aur haikal ki «ardir, aur Sadikp, un par charh ie ;

2 Kyunki naraz htie ki we logog lin sikhiim tho, aur Yisii' ke sabah $ti murdon ke ji utbne ki khabar dete tho.

3 Aur utilion nc un par hAth dalu, aiu- diisre din tak paure men inklii: kydiiki sbim ho gayi thi.

4 Par kakutero un nion so, jinborj ne kalii.ii] suni, iman lie ; aur un logon ki ginti jidnek hazAr ke qarib thi.

5 % Aur diisre diu yun ki'iA, ki un ko sardiir, aur buzurg, aur faejih,

6 Aur sarddr kdhin Annds, u Qayi- fi, aur YnhannA, aur Iskandar, aur jitne audit kabin ke ghariue ke tlie, YaniKalam men jam'i lu'ie.

7 Aur mi ko ldcb men kliarikarke pdchha, ki Tum ne kis hjtiddr aur kis nain se yih kivA ?

8 Tah Patrus no Ruh i Quds ma'mfir koke un se kahA, Ai qaum ke sardar». aur ai IsrAal ke buzur;

156

L, IV. Sadr Majlis ke dge lidzir hote.

U Agaf sij ham ne is ihsan ki liA- bat, jo is za'if ndmi par hai, ptichhd jata hai, k i wuh kyuiikar changd hda;

10 To tum sab, aur Iuraiil ki siiri qaum ko, rna'ldni ho, ki Y isu' Masih NAaari ko nam se, jis ko tum no salib di, aurjise Khuda ne munhm ineij H phir utkiyi, usi se yih mard tumhare sduihno bhala changA k bara hai.

1 I Vili wuhi patthar hai, jise tum mi'amaron no nachiz jinA, jo koue ka sira ho gaya.

12 Aur kisi diisre se najit nahirj : kyunki Asinan ko tale admiog ko koi dilari nim nahin baklmhii gayi, jis se ham najit pd saken.

13 1 Jab unhon ne Patrus aur Yuhanna ki dileri dokbi, aur daryiil't kiyi ki we l>e-'ikn aur 'awAmm men se Jiaiii, to ta'ajjub kiyi : phir ma'liiin kiyi, ki we Yisi'i' ke satli the.

14 Aur us shakhs ko, jo changi hrt;i thi, itu ko sath kliare dekhke kuchh khlldf na kab saken.

15 Par uubeii bnkiii karke ki maj- lis se babar jao, ipas men saldb karne lago,

1G Yih kahke, ki Ham in ddmitm sckydkaren? kyi'njki ok wirih mu'- ajisy» mdiMn ne dikhlaya, jo Yardbalnm ke aab rahnewalon ]iar zaliir bai ; aur ham is ki inkdr nalu'n kar sakte,

17 Lekin td ki yih logou mon ziydda maslihur na ho, ham unhen khnb dbamkdwerj, ki phir is ndm se kina iidiiii ko na bolen.

IH Tab unhen bid'ake tikid ki, ki Yisu' ke ndm par hargiz na bolen, aur ta'iiin na derj.

19 Par Patrus aur Yuliannd ne ja- wab men unhen kahi, Tum hi insdf karo, ki Khudi ke nazdik yih durust bai, ki kara Khudi ki bit ae tumbari bit ziyAila suii«i.

20 Kyiinki mumkiu nuliin, ki ji> ham nc dekhi, aur suni hai, so na kabem

Rihdi par unfai nhnhr !:ar>,d. A 'AMAT,.

21 Tab unhog ne un k» aur dham- kdke olifaor dlyd, kyiinki logon ke tabitb un ki sazd deue ki koi rih na ; ;ii, i- Hya ki nah log, BI mijare ke bd'is, Khudd ki tarif karte the ;

i'ii Ki wuh (bakhs, jis ko changd karne se yih rmi'aji«a zdhir hiid, cha- Ufi baru ke iip.tr thd.

23 % Ph r w chhiilko apno logon ke pis gaya, aur jo kuchli sardar kdhinon aur buzurgon ne un se kabd tha, ba- yan kiyi.

24 Jab unhon ne yili sund, tu ck- dil hoke Khudd ki taraf dwdz buland [L nir kulisi, ki Ai Rabi), til wuh Kliuda hai, jis ne dsman, aur /amin, aur samundar, aur sab kuchh jo un men. hai, paidi kiyd ;

25 Tu no kpne hande Didd ki zu- hani knha, ki Uair-qaitmon ne kyiin dhiim niachai, aur logon ne batil khiyal kiye?

26 Klmdawatid aur us ke Masih ke barkhiiaf hoke zamin ke hadshih uf.hu, aur sarddr hdhum jam'a hde.

27 Sach, ki tere quddiis Hetc YirnV ke, jise tii no Masih kiyd, barkhiiaf lioku BmmUi aur Puntius Pilitus ^lir-o^unuon aur Israel! logon ke s&th jam'a luii:,

28 Ta ki jis ki honii tere liith tere iradc ne ige ae t h ah r A rak h a 'amal men lawcti.

29 Ab, ai Khuddwand, un ki dliain- kion ko dckh : aur apno bandon ko yih bakhnh, ki «e kamal dileri m terd kalam «imdwen,

30 Jab ki tii apnd hdth changi karne ko phaild de ; aur tere qiuldus Ttitu Yisi't' ko i ia tn se nishdnian aur achainbhe zdhir DOB>

31 T| Aur jab we du'A mdng chu- ke, wuh makin, jaluiu we jam'a tlic, hildyi gaya : aur sab Rdh i Quds ne bh&f gaye, aur Khudd kd kaldm iileri te maiae lage.

3L! Aur imdnddron ki jamd'at ek-dil aur ek-jdn luii : aur kisi ne apno mil 157

T, Handntydh n S'i/ira kdjhuih.

i apnd na kalia, baiki sdri uhizon

s'N sharik the.

3*3 Aur rasiilon ne bara iqtiddr m Khuddwand Siri' ke ji utune par gawdhi di : aur un sab par bara lasi

m:

34 Kyugki k"i un inen muhtdj na tliiL: is liye ki jo log zamin o makdn ko mdlik the, un ko lieehke un ki qimat lite,

35 Aur rasiikm ko ptffwog par rakhte the: aur liar ek ku, us ki zaru- rat ko muwdfi'i, baut diyd jdtd thd.

30 .Aur Yriscs, jis kd rasfilon ne Rarnabds (ya'ne, Nasihat kd betd,) ndm rakhd, jo qaum kd Ldwi aur paiddiiih so Kunrusi thd,

37 Ek khotrakhtd thd, uso Wchke, aur us ki qimat lake, rasulon ke pdn- par rakhi.

V BA'B.

ATTR Hananiydh ndme ek niard aur us ki joni Safird ne apni milki- yat btehi,

2 Aur qimat men se kuchh rakh chhont; bo us ki joni lihi jani.i thi ;

kuchh ldke ra.au Ion ke pdnwon par rakh».

3 Tab Patrus ne kahd, Ai Hana- niydh, kyun Shaitan tero dil men samdyd, ki "tii Hiili i Quds se jhuth boU-, aur namin ki qimat men se kuchh rakb ehbore?

4 Kyd jab tak tere pds thi, teri na thi? aur jab bechi gayi, tere ikhtiydr men na rahi? tii ne kyfiri is bit ko apne 'dil men jagah di i tii ailinion se nahin, baiki Khudii ne. jlnith bo!i,

5 Yih bdten BUUte hl HaiidniyAh gir para, aur us ka dam nikal gaya : aur sab ko jinhon ne yih sund liari khauf dya.

6 Aur jawdnon no uthko uso kaf- naya, aur bdbar le jake gara.

7 Jab ghante tin ek g'uzro, us ki joni is inijaro so be-khabar hoke bhi- tar di.

8 Patruri ne OM kahd, Mujh se kah,

Busaiun hi,q<nd tsechltttf jchia. A'AMA'I Kyi zamiu itne lit par bechi? Ub!^ nc k ^ Ini, Hiu, itne par.

i* Fhir Piitrus ne use kaha. Tum DC kyvhj ekd kiya, ki Khudawand ki K'ih ko izmdo? del;h, tere shauhar ke gdrnewalou ku pdnw darwaze par halo, aur tujlie bhi bahar lu jAuiiye.

10 Tab wuiiliin ua ke parnmij pas girke uh ka dam nikal gaya; aur ja- wdnon ne bhitar Ake uae murda paya, aur bahar le jike us ke sbauhar pas gdra.

• 11 Aur taradm kalisiyd, aur aab, jiiiImuj ue yib suna, bahut dar gaye.

12 If Aur ruBiilon ke hathon se balmt si ninhinlan aur mu'ajizc logon ke danniydn ziihir kiye gaye; (nur we sab ek-dil huke Sulaiman ke bard- made men ikatthe the.

13 Par auro'n meii nc kisi kd hiwdo ua para, ki un meQ ja mile : magar log uri ki tu'rif karte the.

14 Aur aur bhi ziydda mard aur 'auratey, baiki guroh ki guroh, Khudd- waod pai iman lake un men, slidmil kote the.)

15 Yahin tak ki log liimAroii ko sarakun par kike charpakm aur kha- tol&n par rakhte the, Ia ki jab l'atrus awi!, uh kd sdya hi un men so kisii juir H| jaw.'.

ib' Aur chdron taraf ke shakron ke log bimdrort ko, aur un ko ju napdk nih'j'j tas satdo the, lake Yarusalam men jaru'a hue; so sab change kiye gaye.

1T ^f Tab nardiir kabin aur us ke sab sdtbi, (jo Saddqi ke firqe ku tlu.i dijh H bliarko u the,

18 Aur raHiloii pai LaLh dai t, aur nnbt'u i^aidkhduu i 'amin nun band kiyd.

19 Par KlmdawiWid ke A firinhte M nil koqaidkkdne ku darwaze kkole, nur uiilic'Tj liaiiar lu aku kahd,

20 Jao, aur haikiil men khare bnke la zitidagi ki sab bdten logon s*1 kano.

21 We yih sunke l:nki- haikal men

158

Un ka, 'uzr iikhlinu [gas, Par sardar kabin aur us ke eathion nc dke Sadr Majlis ko aur lm.nl Israel ke buzurgflg kijama'atko ikatl.be kiyi, aur qaid- kliani! men kahla blu'ji, ki unh™ laweg.

22 Magar piyddoy ne r«ihi:uchke imhrn qalokh£ae iiiru n:i paya, aur phir dke khabar di,

23 Aur kalia, ki Haui ne to qaid- kbane ko ban khabardari se band, aur chaukiilAron ko bahar darwazon par khara paya : par jab khola, to kn6 ko andar na pAya.

21 Jonhin sardar kabin, aur huikat l;r wneOt, aur sardar kahmon ue yili bdt suni, un ki babat ghabrf gayo, ki kya horf.

25 Tab ki^iu nc ake unlicrj khabar di, ki l>ekho, wo mard, jinben trum nc aaiukhane roen dtila tha, haikal mau fehare logon ko sikhliite bain.

26 7»b haikal ka sardir piyadon ke sdth jftke unhen laya, lekin zalar- dast.i M naliin : kyaiiki Ujm se darto tbo.ki alaS nn ho ki ham parpattbrao karen.

27 Aur unhen lake Majlis ke bicli rnen khara kiyii : tab sardar kabin ne tiu H yili kanta jn'n'hha,

28 Kyi ham nc tura tw bari takid na ki, ki is nain par ta'lim na denaV par, di'kbo, tum ne Yan'tsalam ko apni ta'lim se bhar diya, aur i» «haklu ka kitin ham par l:lya chaht« ho.

2il T Tab Patrtw aur rasulon ne jawab men kahd, Ham ko Kkudd ki buku aVmiion ke. tiukm £ti ziydda liiaiina farz hai.

30 Hanidre bd|idddou ke Khuda ne Yisii' ko uthAyd.jise tum ne kdth par laik Ake mar daki.

81 U'al ko Khudi ne Milik aur NajAt-denewdta ihahrako npne dabinc lidth par buland kiyd, tdki Israel ko lauba aur gtmahon ki niuail bakbehe.

32 Aur ham in baton par us ke ^awali hain; aur liiili i Q.uds bhi, jiae

Haj i i* kr. sdmhne. A'AMA

Kliuda ne unimu, jo us ki tabi'-dari kartu naifi, bakhshd bai.

33 ^ Wh yib aunkc kat gaye, aur s4du.li ki ki unlit'ii qatl karcu.

34 Tab Garnaliel iidmock larisi ne, jo ariari'at k% inu'altim, aur anu iogon nien 'uwtdar thd, UljjUa men utukt bukm diya, ki rasuki n ko mrra bahar lojao;

35 Aur unhen. kabti, ki Ai Isrieli mardo, ap ae khabardar lio, ki tum in admiorj ko s&th k.vi kiya cbabte bo;

3o fvyiinki indinon ku dge Theudds a« uthke kaha, ki Main kuclih lilin aur takbftiinan cbar sau mani u» w mil gaye ; wuh mara gayit, aur sab

t"ine uh ke tdbi' tbc, pareshan o tabib de.

37 Ba"d us ke YaliudAh Jalili i*m- cawlsi ke dirion men utha, aur baliut

■ .-;ipii'/ i'ifhha khinchi: wuh bbt balak hua,aur sab,jitnuuaket4bi' tbe, cbliitar bitar bo gayc.

38 Aur ab main tumben kabtil hun, ki Iti admiog su kinfira karo, un ko jane do : kyfmki agar yib tadbir yd kaui insan se hai, to zdi' hogi :

iti) I'ar agar Khuda se liai, to tum BflB zdi' nabi n kar aakte ; aiad ua bo kitum Khudd se bbi larncwalc tliabro.

40 Unhorj riH ua ki mani : aur ra- sdlon ko pii» bulake koj-e marc, aur Imkin kiya, ky Yisu' ka uam par bal na karna ; tab unhen cahor diya.

il K Pas we Majlia ke huzur ae chalegaye, aur khush biie, ki baru [a Uiu to tlmhro k'i un ke nim ke liye be-burmat howen.

41i Aur we hai1 Kffl liaikal men, aur «bar gitar sikhlane,aur Yili1 Mtrifa ki k Mistik babari dana K bir, ua rake.

VI BA'B. N umur; un Jafe shagird bahut hote the, Yunani-iua.il Yahudi 'Ibr&nicn ss kurkurauo lagc, kyunki un ki bawaon ke tOB ki khnbargiri iniin eafiat hnti taf. 159

C

'L, VI. &U admi cftune jdie.

U Tab un barahon ne sbagirdon ki'. gol ko bdham bulake kahd, AchehM nahifl lagti ki ham Khuda ke kalini ko ubborko ruezori ki'kbidmat karey.

3 Pataj ai bhaio, apne nion te i» mii'atabat abakhs ko, jo Kdb i Quda aur danai se bharc horj, ubuno, ki baiu un ko U kam par munarrar karerj.

«i Aur bain dp dud aur kalam ki khidnmt nit'n niaahgill rahengt.

5 ^ Aur yib bac sari jaruii'at ko pasand di : aur unbon ne Btafknils nirae ek mard ko, jo iman aur Hiih i Quda se bbard thd, aur FailbdB, aur Prukhtwus, »nr Kiqduur, aur Tiumu, aur Pdrruauds, aur Niqulas Antaki ek Yalnidi murid ko, c huni :

U Inuen rasiikm koage khara kiyd ; aur unboii ne du'a maugke tipm.' liiilb UD BU raklu'.

7 Aur KJiudaka kalam plwil gayi ; aur Yatusalarii mun shagirdon, !id ahumar habut bi barb gaya : aur kaliiuoii ki bari gurob iman ke tdbi' hul

8 Aur Stafauus iman aur ijuwat se ma'tnur hoko bare baru mu'aSse aur iiisbdiiian logon ku bicb ndbir karta rahd.

9 f Tab us 'iMdatkbane se, jo Liljarlinon ki 'ibadat.k'jdi)a kaiMti hai, aur Qurenum. aur lakandarioii, aur uu a\en ac jo Qiliv\iya aur Asia ae an, ba'zc nthkii Hiaianus se btibs karno lage.

10 fttrwe M dduat aur n'ih ka, jin no »mli kalam karta thri, sdmbni ua kar nfc«B<

i; Thb ualion no ha*x0 mardon ko ;anthd, ki kaborj, ki Hant no us ko diisi aur Kbudd ki ni.sl«; kui'r hiktu aund.

i Tab unborj ne logon, aur hu- «urgou, aur £aqihorj ko ubhS.r4, aur us pai' cbiiru ae, aur pakarku Siidr Majlia men \n gaye,

13 Aur jbuthe gnwabon ko khara k yii ; unhoii no kaha, ki *ii «iiakni

Sttywntu apm hichno

is jidk ninkdn aur slmri'at k( nisbat

kuf'r baknp H biK naliiij dtd :

14 Kyunki liam ne use yih kahte sirna, ki'WuM Yisfl' Naaarf ifl makan ];'■ diiaegd, nur un rasnmn ko>jo Musa ki ma*rSkt hamen pahunchig, bada! dilegA.

15 Tab sabhnn ne, jo majlis men baitao tho, us par gaur se nazar ki ; unherj us ka ehihra firislitu ka sa ehihra, nazar dyd.

VIT BA'R.

TAB sarddr kdhin no kaha, Kyd yc hdr.en y&nhia hain?

2 Wnli hobi, Ai bbaio, aur ai (Iba, stmo ; ki KhudA c zn-1-jald) hamirfl bdp Abirahdra par, jis waqt wul MasuputArniya mcn tha, peshtar us ke ki wun H amin meu $4 bui, zabir lnia,

3 Aur use kaili, ki Apne mulk aur apnckhanddn meu u nikul ja, aur us mulk mcn jise main tujhe dikhdnngd chalii jd.

■1 Tafc KhaHion ke mulk so bahar jdkc liarrin mcn ja raha : aur wahdn se,ua kcbdpko nmrne ke ba'd,Khudd n« us ko is mulk mon.jia men tum ab rahte ho, pahimchdyd.

5 Aur us ko kuchh miras, baiki cradam rakhiur ki jagah, «s nien na di : par wa'da kiya, ki Main yib Basahi tujhe, aur tere ba'd teri nasi ko, iluij^i, ki terf milkiy.Jt ho jdo, ftgarobl us ka kol larkd na thd.

6 Aur Kbudd ne yiin farmaya, ki Teri nasi begano mulk incn ja rahcgi ; aur we im ko gulana *nen rskbonin, aur cbar sau haras tak bad-suluki karengEO.

7 Phir Khndd ne kalii, ki Main us tpHim ki. p ki gulami roerj wo ra- henge, 'adJJat karunia : aur ba'd us ke m biliar awem;", aur isi jagah. mori bandagi bazenge.

y Aur ub no us ec khatne ki 'atid kira ; so us so iz,Mq paki» bdd, aur dthwen din na ka klmtna kivd; aur "100

A'AMA'L, VII. 'uzrkarta.

Iz,hdq se Ya'qob, aur Ta'qdb se bdrah gbnrdno» ku bani paidd hi'ie.

9 Aur ntd&roQ no riah so YucuF ko bechd, ki Miwr rneu le jden. : par Kbudd ua ko sath tha,

10 Aur use us ki sab musibaton so nikala, aur use Misr ke badshau Fira'- fin ko buKur maqbdttyat aur hikmat liakbshi : aur us ne use Misr aur apiio Ndie ghar ka mukhtar kiya.

U Ab Miur ke saro mulk aur Kan- ":lii men k:i.i i>ara, aur bari muciibat di : aur hamarc bdpdddon ku kbdud mu- yausar nahin Ata tha.

12 I.fkin YaJq«b ne sunko ki Misr men andj hai, hamdre bapdddon ko pahli bdr bheja.

13 A ur duri bar Yilsiif npne bhdion par zdbir Im gaya ; aur Yusuf ka ghariuj Flra'fo no nia'lum hua.

14 Tab Yrisuf ne apne bdp Ya'rjiib aur uh ke sare kunbc ko, jo pacliliattar ibakha the, buld bheii.

15 Aur Ya'nub Misr men gayd; wahan wuli aur hiimare bdptladtt mar

lfi Aur wo ua ko Sikm mcn lo gaye, aur us mautmre men, jia ko AbirabAtn no bani Hai nur Sikm ko bdp so rfipiya deke mol liyd tbd, s*!^-

17 Pas j'ih us wa'da kd waqt, jis k( Kbudd ne AbirahAm i«oqasftin khdi thi, nazdik dyd, lu^ Misr men barline aur bahiit bone lage,

18 Us waqt tak ki dusrd U&Bh£h nthd, jo Y6suf ko na jdntd thd.

19 Us ne hamdri qaum se fitrat karke hamaro bapdadim se bad-suluki ki, yahdrj tak ki us ne un ko chhote larkon ko phenkwd diya, td ki wo jiie na ralicn.

20 Us waqt Miisi paidd hud, jo nilidyat khubsurat tbd ; us ne tin iTialiiuo tak apne bdp ke ghar men panvarish pii :

21 M agar jab ki wuh phenkd gaya. FiraYm ki beti m use u tha liyA, aur us ko apnd betd karke ]>dl(L

$t<zfanus apne bachao ineii A'AMA'

22 Aur Miisa ne Mi^riun ki tamani I hikmat inun tarbiyat pai, aur kalam n kain men wihtb i iijtidir t lift.

23 Aur jab wuh piire ctiilis baras ki hiia, us ke ji men Ayi, ki jakc apne lihai baui Israel ki khabar h.

24 Tab t-k ko zulm uthate dekhkar us ki himayat ki, aur Miari kojinse marke us ka, ji» par zulni hu.i t ha, badla liya :

25 KyTiiiki us ne khiyal k iya, ki mere bhai nsajbegae ki Khmta BMN liith so uuheri chutkari degi : l>ar we na namjhe.

2fl Phir dusro din, jab we larte tho. unhen dikhii diya, aur un lio yuQ kahke mila dene ehihi, ki Ai inardu, tum to bhai bo; kyiin «k dusre par zulm kartc taf

27 Ltkin us ne, jo apne paraui par buIiu karfa tha, use yih kahke batara, ki Kib ne tujhe ham par hakim aur <pizi thahriyi hai?

2ti Kya jis tarah kai us Misri |C0 (jati kiya, tu mujho oatl kiya chahta

bal?

2'J Musi to is bit par bhagi, aur Midyan ko mulk men ji raha; wahaii us ke do belo paida hfic.

30 Aur jab chalis baris pure huc, tab Khudawand ka Srishta, Sini ke ;>;ili ir k>- kiyabiii men, ;il' k i lau men, jhari'kc Viich, mu dikhai diya.

31 Musa ne yih royat dekhke ta'ajjub kiya: aur jab daryaft kar- ne ko uazdik cbala, Khudawand ki awaz use pahunchi,

32 Ki Main t-ere bapdadoB ka Kbiuhi, Abirahain ka Khuda, aur Iz,haq ka Khuda, aur Ya'qub ka Khu- da hun, Tah Musa kamp gaya, aur use daryaft kanio ki jur,at na bui.

33 lab Khudawand ne use kah&, ki Jiiti apno parjwoji se utar: kytinki yib jagab, jaiiAn tu khari hai, pAk zamin hai.

31 Main nigih karke apne logon ki, jo Miar men hain, munibat dekh 161

T,, VII. W harta.

raha hun, aur main ne un ki ah mami suni, aur unhen, chhuraue utn't linu. Aur ab a, maiti tujhc M iur luey bhe-

35 TJsi Musa ko, jis se unhon ne ink&r karke kahi, ki Kis ne lujLe hakim aur ejazi bauiya ? usi ko KhudA no, us iirishte ki ina'rifat jo use jhari mi:u nazar ayi, bhejA, ki hakim aur ohliutkarA-deuewAlA ho.

36 W ubi uuheri m'kil liyA, aur ffin ke miilk, aur i,al Marnuudur, aur chalis bnras bayabdn men, mu'ajize aur nishaniac dikhata raha.

37 1f Yih wuhi Miisa hai, jis nc bani Israel m kaha, ki Khudawami, jo tumhara Khuda hai, tuniharu l>KiJ!n!j men se, tumhare liye, mujb sa ek nabi zahir karega; u.-» ki suno.

38 Yih wuhi h;ii, jo bayaban raen majiis ke dariniyan, us uriahte ke, jo us bc Sini ke pahir par bola, aur hamare bapihUlon ke, satu (ha: usi ko zindagj ki kalam mili, ki linu lu pilmncha de:

3fl Par hamai'e Iwipdadon nc us ki tabi'dar boni na eliihii, laiki us ko radd kiyi, aur un ke dil Mjw ki tami' phire:

40 Aur Hirun se kahi, ki Hamire liye aise ma'bt'td barui, jo hamire a^e ige chaleg: kyiinki yih Musi jo hamen Misr ku mulk w; nikal laya, ham nahin janle ki use kyi hui.

41 Aur un dinog unhon ne ek bachhri ban iya, aur u» but ko tpnbiiii charhii, baiki apne hithon k.- i;:lm par khushi manik

42* Tab KhuiU ne phirks unhen chhor diyi, ki ismdn ki fauj ko pujen ; jaisi ki nabion ki kitab men likhi hai, ki Ai briw ke gharanu, kyi Uuu ne mujh ku bayabin men ehalin baraa zabihe aur nazren cbarbiin?

43 Tum ne Malik ke khaiuie aur apne ma'bud Bamfau ke tire ko, ya'ue, im surat»» ko jinheii tum ne sijda karne ko baniyi, utui liya -, pas

main tumben nikalke llabul ke pari bauaiingi.

44 Shahadat ka kiaimu, jaisA Miia& se baten-karnenalo ne fanu;iy;i. th;i, ki Ua namune ke niuwAfii], jo tfi ne dekh£ thi, bani, bayiibati men hamire bip- didon ke darniiyan thit.

45 Usc hamire bapdadc aglon se [wko, Yasku' ko aath, un oiiamog ki miras leto waqt, jin. ko rjhuda no hamarc bapdadon ke wimhne ."e nikal diya. Ide; yih hal D&iid ke dinon tak raha;

40 Jib par Khuda ko huzur so fazl hi'ia, aur us ne ijazat mangi, ki Ya'qiib ku Khudi ko wasto maakan ka thikina. dhundho,

47 Tar Sulaiman nc us ke liye makan ban&ya,

48 Lckin Khuiii Ta'Ala un haikalnn men, jo hath se ban e hain, nahin ralifca ; chuminebi nabi kabfci hai, ki

40 Khudawand farnititi. hai, A's- min mera takht, aur zamin men pSnw ki cbauki hai; tura mere liye kaunsa gliar hanaogo? yi kaunsi jagah mere aram k i hai ?

M) Kya more hath ne yo sab diran nahin ban&in ?

51 % Ai aarkasho, aur AU aur kau ke iiA-makhtiiuo, tiini har waqt Ki'ih i Qudt* ki «a m lini karte b.01 jaiac tumhare bdpdade the, waise hi tum bhi ho.

52 Nabion men se kin ko tumhare biipdidon no na sataya? ban, unhorj ne Ua Ristbaz ke Ane ke khabar-denc- waloij ko qatl kiya; jis ke ab tum pakarnewale aur khfini huc:

53 Tum. ne firinhton ke waaile ao shari'at pai, par 'amal men na lic.

54 % We ye baUm sunte hi apne ji men kat gaye, aur us par dant ptnifl lage.

r>5 Par wuh Kuli i Quds se ma'mur bokcAainaH ki taraf dek h rahi tha>aur Khudi ki jalai, aur Yisu' ko Khudi ke dahine hath kkara bua dukba, 162

A'AMA'L, V 1 1 F. paUhrm karn-d.

5fi Aur kahi. Deklio, main asmin ko khula, aur lhn i A'daru ko Khudi ke dahine hath khare dokhti hiin.

57 Tab unhon no bnre sor so chil- lako apne kAn hand kiye, aur ck dil boke us par lapke,

58 Aur (dialir ke hihar nikalko, us par patthrAn ktya: aur gawabon M apne kapre Si'ilus name ck jaiv.-in fcfl panwnn pil rakh diye,

59 So unhon no Htafanus par patthran kiya, jo yih kabko du'a mingta tha, ki Ai klmdawand Yisii', nieri riib ko «jabal kar.

60 Fhip wuh gbntnc tekkar 7/.-r m pukara, ki Ai Klmda'wand, yih gunab un ko hisab men niat rakh. Aur yih kahke so gayA.

VIII BA'U.

A Uli Sulua us ke qatl par mattsSq hiia. Aur ua waqt kalisiyo nar, jo Ya rtlsalain men thi, bara zulmhiia; aur raadlon ko chhorkar baqi aab Yahfidiya aur Saiuariya ki har jagah men Ular bitar ho gaye.

2 Aur dindar mardon nc Stafanue ka dafan kiyA, aur ua par bara raatam kiya.

3 Aur Siilus kaiiaiyc ko tabdh karta iba, ki ghar ghar ghuske aur mardun aur 'auraton ko ghasitkar fjaid meg dalta tbi.

4 Pas ive, jo titar bitar huo the, har jagah jake kalim ki khiislikhabori dete tbe,

5 Aur Failbiis Samariya ke ek shabr men jako un ke fige Masih ki maniidi kartA tbA.

6 Aur lopirj re un mu'ajiaouko, jii Failbua karta t)ia, sunku aur dekhkc, ek-dil hokar us ki baton pai ji lagay.-i.

7 Kytfnki nipik riihen bahuton sc, jin par charhi thitj, hari awAz so chil- like utar gayirj ; aur bahut matiiij, aur langre, cliange kiye gaye.

S Aur ua sbahr men bari kbuthi ML

9 Ua ke j>able ua shabr meg roha-

A'AMA'L, V UI,

Shama'un jadugar H ina'un ndmeek shakhs jadugari kari:!, nur Samanya ko logoij lt* - « s l«. r i - ; r uk h t.;i , aur yih kahta iba, ki Main kuchli hun :

l'J Aur chboto se l>are tak sab ki taraf ruju' lake kahte the, ki Yih Klmdd ki haH rmdrat liai.

11 So w sabab uh k i' taraf rujii' Ide, ki uh ne ek muddat *e apui jadisan ke waeile se unhen dang kar rakha tha.

12 Par jab wc Failbiis i»r, jo Khn- dd ki bdd&hdhat aur Yisa' Masih ke iiiiLii l,i khiL^li-kbuhiiri deta tha, yaqin Ide, to kya 'aurat, kya mard, sabkon ne baplisma liya.

13 Tab Shama'iin bhi khud iman lava : aur baptisma pake Failbus ke sath rabi, aur mu'ajize aur bar! ban nishanidrj jo Kabir boti thfri dekhke

dttaa I fia,

14 Jab rasulon ne jo Yanlsalam men the suni, ki Mamariun ne Khuda ka kalam qabul kiyii hai, tab tinhon ne l'atrus aur Y ilhami a ko un ke pas Mir-ja:

15 Unhon ne jdke un ke liye dn'l inangi, ki Ruh i Quds pawen :

16 (Kyuriki ab tak wuh un men m kisfi par nazil ua lini tlii : unhon ne rirf Khiidawan.! Yisil' ke ndrn""par baptit,ma paya tha.)

17 Tab unhon ne un par bdth raklic, aur unhon ne Ruh i Qnds pai.

18 Jab Shama'un ne dekhd ki ra- .«ulon ke hath rakhne Be Ruh i Quds <li jdti hai, to un ke pas naqdi lake,

19 Kaha, ki Yih ikhtiyar mujhe bhi do, ki jia par main hath rakbun wuh Ruh i QudB pawe.

20 Par PatruB ne use kaha, Tere rf- piyo ton sath barbad hon, ia liye ki tti ne khiydl kiyd, ki Kbuda ki bakh- shish rfjpiyun H hftflU hoti hai.

21 Tera is bat men na bissa hai, na hakhra: kyunki terd dd Khuda ke dge sidhi nahin.

22 Pas apni is shardrat se tauba kar,

163

bsjd darkliwcUf. aur Kbuda ne minnat kar, ki aWyad tere dil ka yih kbiyal tujbe um'af h,.. L'.'I lu liye ki main dokbta hi'm, ki Tu pit ki karwakat, aur badi ke band mim giriftdr hai.

24 Tab Shama'iin ne jawab men kakfi, Tum mere liye Khudawand se du'd raango, ki jo cdtcn'tum nekahh, un men se KOf mujli par na awe

25 l'liir we gawati! deke, nur Khu- ddwand ka kalam sunake, tarfLaalaHi ko nkire, aur Sdinarion k( liohut si bastion men khuwlikliabari dete gaye.

2f> Tab Kbudawand ko flrfahte ne Failbiis so "kaldm kiyd, aur kaiti, ki Uth, aur dakhin taraf us rdh Dftr ia, |o Yariisalam bo 'Azah ko, jo bayiban men hai, jdti.

27 Wuh uthke rawaua Li'ia: aur, dekho, ek BaMhi khoja, Ilalishic.n ki malika Qandaqe ki waalr, jo ub ke sare khazane ka mukbtdr tlid, aur Y'an'iMalain nwtrj ba.ndagi kanie ko aya thd,

28 Phiriijdtd thd, aur apni rath par baithd Yaa'aiydb nabi ki kitab ku (liirii rahd thd.

W Tab Riih ne Failbiis Ba kah;i. Nazdft j», aur its rath ke nath ho k'.

.'50 Pas Failbiis no ustar.n use Yas'aiyah nabiki Maajparhtesuni, aur kahd, A'yd jo kuchh t"ii pafhtf hai samajhtd hai V

31 Us ne kahd, Yih kis tarah ho sake, jab tak kol meri hidayat na kara? Tab us ne Failbus Be darkliwast ki, ki Une sath lawir ho baithiye.

32 Uk kitab ki 'ibarat, jo wuli parhtd, tha, yih tlii, ki Wuh jaiee bher, jise zabh karno ko lc jate hairj, au'r jaiso barra, jo apno bdl-kataniowale ko Banihne be-zuban hai, usi tarah wuh apnd munh nahin kholtd :

33 Ub ki 'ajis! moa unhon nc ua ne insdf uthfi, liyd : aur kami uh ki pusbt kd bayan karegd? kyunki zamiu par bo us ki jdn uthdi jdti hai.

34 Khojc n'e Failbus ke jawab men

6'rtftw rahmat ihihi s« A'AMA'

kaha, ki M:uii teri miiinat kartA hiin k i nabi kis ke haqq men, yih kahid hai ¥ kyA apnc, yA kisi dusr» ke haqq men ?

85 Tab Failbi'm nc apni zuban kholko uaf nawishie h shurti' kiya, aur Yisii' ki kliuslikliauari use <ii.

36 Aur jAto jAte, rah ke darrniyAn, ok pan! par piuiunche : tab khnjo ne kahA, ki Dekfi, pdni.ab nmjhe baptis- mu pAne m kawi chu rokti Jiai ¥

37 Failbiis ne kahA, Agar tii apne taindru dil ku imAn Idtd hai, to rawi hai, Ub ne jawAb men kalni, Maig imAn lAtA luiu, ki Yhtn' Masih KhudA kA Beta hai.

3H Tali us Ee lnikm kiyd, ki raih khari karon : aur Failbiis aur khojd donon panf men utre : aur us ne us ko baptUma diyA.

39 Jal) wc pani se nikalkc (ipar Ao, KhudAwand ki Ruh Failbiis lio le gayi, aur klioje ne un ku phir na dekhA, aur khusbi se apni rAb ]f.

40 Tar Failbiis Azotus men mild: aur gnzarte hiie sah shahron ntan tab tak Qaisariya men nu Aya, khushkhsi- bari uetd rah A.

IX BA'B.

A UU hanoz Siilus, KhudAwand ke shAgirdon kedhamkAneaur qatl kurae nit-n dam mArtA Ju'iA, sardar kahin ke yabdn gayA,

2 Aur us M Dimalui ke 'ibAdat- khAnon ke liye is rnazrndii ke khatt mdnge, ki agar main kisi ko U tariq

S r pAiin, kyA mard kyA 'aurat use ndlike YaruMilaiii men laiin.

3 Aur jate jAte aisA hiiA, ki jab IliinistKj ku nudfk pahunchA, to ek bargi Asmdn se ck nur us ke chaugird chamka :

4 Aur wuh 7-amin par gir parA, aur uh ne ek fcwi* BUni, JO UM kahti thi, Ai Sdlus, Ai Huius, to nmjhe kyi'm eatAtd hai 'i

5 Tab u» ne piichha, Ai KhudA- wand, tii kauu hai? KhudAwand ne

164

T,, IX. taibhojdtd.

kuini. Main Yisif htin.jise tii sataUt liai ! paiae ki kil par IA t uiainA tere liye muBhkil hai.

6 Ua ne kdmpke aur hairAn liokar kahA, Ai KhudAwand, tu kyA ehAhtd hai ki main koruii? KhudAwand ne use kaliA, U$h, aur shahr men jA, aur jo tujhe kornd zarur hai, tujh ae kahA jAegA.

7 Aur weninrd jo uskehamrAh lho hairAn khare rah gaye, ki AwAz to .siinti', par kisu ko na dekhta the.

H Aur Sulus zaniin par se nthd; aur Ankh kholke kisii ko na <k'kha: tab we uu kA hdlh pakarke Dimishfj

il Aur wuh tin din tak dckh w. saka, aur na khdta na pita thd.

10 U iH ur PimWm TnfinHwHlnljTih ndrne ck uhagird thd, aur KhucUwnnd ne royA men us se kahA, Ai HanAni- yAh. Wuh bolA, Ai Kbudawaml, ik'];h, niuiij ba/:ir hiin.

11 Tab KhudAwand ne use kahA, Utu, aur us nnk par, jo Sidbi kalilati hai, jd, aur YahudAh ko ghar meg •Siilus ndme Tarsijsi ko dhiindh: ki dekh, wuh du'A mAugta hai,

12 Aur us do rnyA men Handniyah udine ek mard ko dekhA, jis ne andar dke us par hAth rakba, tA ki wuh pblr dek b n e lage.

13 Par HauamyAh no jawdb diyA, ki Ai KhudAwand, mairi ne balmion hb ifl sliakiis ke iiaq(| nmij sund, ki ns ne Yariisalam inon tere rauqaddason ke sat.li kaisi badi ki ha: :

14 Aur yahdrj bhi ua ne sarddr kdhinon ki taraf se iklitiydr pAyA, ki sab ko jo rerA nAm lete hain, bAndhe.

15 Par KhudAwand ne use kaha, Tu jA : kyunki wuli qautnon, aur had- Khdhon, aur bani IsrAel ke &%n mera nAm zdbir karno kd ek chund hfid wnhihi lini :

lti Ki main use <likhdunga ki &at niere nAm ke liye kalau didih uthina aarur hai.

liu

Aineas ka AAMA

17 Tab Handniydh gayd, aur us gbar m«Q dakhil hud; aur apne hdth tu pm rakhkar fcaua, Ai bhdi Bdhu, Khuddwand, ya'ne Yisii' ne, jo tujb

W ls rda menjis se tii aya, zahir la, mujho bnefc hai ki ui phir bina pac, aur Ruh i Quds ne bbar jde.

18 Aur wunhin. misi chhilke ke kuchb us ki ankhon sc ^ir para: aur wuh usi dam dekhuo laga, aur uthke baptisma paya.

19 Phir kuchh khdke taqat hasil ki. Aur Srtlus kai dia I>imishq_Tnen Bhagirdog. ko Bath rabd.

20 Aur fauran 'ibddatkhanon nien Masih ki inanadi karne laga, ki wuh Khudd kd BetA hai.

21 Aurwibhuumiwdludang hogayo, aur bolo, Kyd yih wuh nabiij hai, jo Yarusalam men 'm ndni ke lenuivalon ko tabdh kartd- thd, aur yahdri bhi irddo par dyd ki un ko bdudhke t ddr kahimm ke pas lo jde ?

22 Lekin Siilua ne aur bhi mazbut hoko aur dalilon se sdbit karke ki Masih yih hi hai, Yahiidlon ko, jo Dimisht] men rahte tho, ghabrd diyd,

23 ^ Atir jab bahut diu guzre, Ya htidton ue us ke qatl ki salah ki:

24 Aur un ki ghdt Srilua ko ma'lum ho gayi. Aur we rdt diu pbdtakon par nn raho, ki uao mdr daleii.

23 Tab shdgirdon ne rdt ko use lekar aur ek tokri nien bithdkar di- ivdr par se tale'latkd diyd.

26 Aur Sulus ne Yarusalam men [Mlmiirhke koshish ki ki Hha^inhm menmiijde: pursabus se rlarte the, k} - unkiyaqinna kiydki wuh shagird hai. "*27 Magar Barnabds use apuo adth rasnlon ke pas le gayd, aur un se baydn'kiyd, ki U6 ne" kis tarah roh meg Khuddwand ko dukhd, aur ki U: no ub se bdten kiri, aur kylinkar wuh I)imishq men be-dliarak Yisii' ke ndm par kaldm kartd t.hd.

28 So wuh Yarusalam men un ke satli dyd jaya kartd thd ;

IX. changd hona.

25) Aur Yisii' ke ndm par dileri se kalam kartd thd ; aur Yundiii-md.il Yahiidion ke siltli guftogd aur bahs bhi kartd thd: aur we U8 ke rffar ddlne kedarpai the.

30 Tab oh di yili malam karke use Qaisariya men lo gnye, aur Tareus ki taraf us ko rawdua kiyd.

31 Tab sdre Yahiidiya, aur Jalil, aur Samanya ki kalisiyaon 00 dr&iu pdya, aur mi ki taraqqi ki gayi, aur khuddwand ke khauf metj chalii bui lirih i Quds ki tasalli se haj h a i gayin.

32 f Auraisd hud, ki jab Patrus bar kabin phlrta thd, un muaadaason ke pds bhi, jo Luddd men rahte the, pa- hunehd.

33 Aur wahdg Aineda ndmo ek iliakhs ko pdyd, jo jholo ka mara dth baras se chdrpil pai para thd.

M Patroi ne use kahi, Ai Aiueds, Yisii' Masih tujbe cliangd kartd hai ; utli, aur apnd bichhaund sajd. "Wuh i.i.si dani u t ha.

35 Tab Luddd aur Sarnu ke sah mhnewdle use dokhkar Khuddwand ki taraf phire.

86 1 Aur Ydld men ek sbdgird Td- bitbd oatD thi, jis ka tarjuma Harui hai; wuh nek kiimon Be aur ktmi nil- on se, jo wuh karti thi, mdlamdl thi.

37 Aur aisd hiia, ki un dinon wuh bimdr boke mar gayi, aur unhori ne use nahlakar bdlakhaue par rakhd.

38 Aur is liye'ki Luddd Ydfa ke nazdik thd, jab shagirdon ne suni ki PatniH wahin hai, us pas do mard bhejke darkhwast ki, ki hamdre pas dne mtn der ua kar.

39 Tab PatntH uthke un ke sdth obatt. Jab pahunehd, usa bdldkhane

|par le gaye : aur aab bewden roti liui us ke pas d khari hiiln, aur kurte, aur kaprc, ju Harui ne, jab tm ke hdth thi,

Ibanae the, dikhdti thiij.

' 40 Tab Patrus ne"sab ko bahar karke nur ghutnt- tekku du'd mdngi ; phir Idsh ki t'aruf mutawajjih hoko

QttrntUm ka

kadi, Ai Tabithi, u{b.

in khen khol din : aur Patrus ko dekb

ke uth baithi.

41* Tali us ne hAth barliako use uth- Aya, aur rouciftddason aur bewog ko buUke uso zinda un ke uupurd kiya,

4'J Yih sAro Yafa men inashhur ho gayi: ME btbutere Khmlawaud par i man lae.

43 Aur yi'in hia, ki wuh kai dia tak YAfA men "Skama'iiu n a m dabbdg ke yakin rabi.

X BA'R AiSARPYA meri QuraeHi

me ek mard tbi, jo us paltan ki Iti'ilianS knblati thi, siiliadar

A'AMA'L, X. Patrus ko bulana.

Tab us nejpahuuclie, Patrus do pabar ke ijarib

9

2 Wuh npne s*ro gharine samct diudar aur Kkuda-lars tha, aur logoii ko babut kkairAt detA, aur nit KkudA se du'a mangtA tha.

3 Us tie c-k ro« lisrc pakar kt: aartb rnya m<m wif dokha ki Kkuda ke 6rishle ne us ke pas andar Ake u» kalid. Ai Qurnulius.

4 TJb no us ko gaur se dekili, aur darkc kaba, kl Ai Kliudawiind. kyA riai? TJb ne uae kuli A, Teri du'aeri aur teri kbair&t yAdgiri ke liye Kkuda k» buzik piikunekiii.

V, Ab YAi'a mrii ddmi bbej ki Skama'rin ko, jo PatriM kahlita lini, bula lAwcn :

(j Wuh Shania'un naini; ck dabbag ke yakin, jiw ka ghar sauiundar ke kinare lini, mihmin hai ; jo kuchk karsa tujh par wajib hai, wuh tujk ko hiiliega.

7 Aur iab firislita, jia ne Qurnclius sa baten kiri, chala gaya, us ne apne naakarog men su do ko, aur un men se, \o IH ke yaharj liar waqt ha/ir ralikt the, ek diudar sipihi ko bulake,

3 Aur sab bdten un w bayan kar- ke, uririnn Yafa mcri bhejs.

A 1 Diisre din, jab we rak men i kak [&ta the, aur sliakr ke uazdik 169

kotke ke upar du'a mau gue gaya:

10 Aur use bkiikh layi, aur ckihi ki kuchh khie : par jab we taiyar karte tke, wuh bo-klmdi men pari,

11 Aur dekha ki Asmiu khul gaya\, aur ck ckiz ban ekadar ki minimi, jis ke ekaron kone bandhe the, zatmu ki taraf lutkai hiii us ke pas utri :

12 Us men samin ke sab qism ke cliirp&ya, aur jangli jAnwar, aur kire roakure, aur hawA ke parinde tke.

13 Aur use ek awii/, ai, ki Ai Pnt- nis, uth ; zabh k«r, aur k ha ji.

14 Patrus ne kaba, Ai Kkuuawand bargiz nahin; kyi'inki uiaiii nekabbJ kol haram yi napak eh i/, uakiu khdi.

16 Diisri bar phir use awas; ai, ki jis ko Kluida ne pak kiyii hai, tii haram ruat kah.

10 Yib tiu bir kiid ; phir wuh chiz asrnan par kkinehi gayf.

17 Jab Patrus apue dil men kairdn tha, ki yih royft, jo main ne dekhi, kya hai, to dekho, we mard, jiuheii Qurnelius ne bhejd tha, Shama'iin ka ghar daryaTt kiyd tlid, aur darwaza par dke kkare hde,

18 Aur pukarke puchhte the, ki Sharna'un, jo Patrua kahlatd, yahin iniliman hai?

19 \ Jab Patrus ua roya ke khiydJ men thi, Rt5]i ae use kaha, Dekb, thi mard tujhe dliiunlhtc hain.

20 Pas uthke niche ji, aur be- kkalke un ke aatli rawdua ho : kyun- ki main ne un ko bheja hai.

21 Tab Patrus ne utarke un mard- oq se, jin ko Qurnelius ne us pas bhejd thd, kabi, Dekho, jis ko tum dliundhte ho, main hi hiin : tum U| liye dli lio ?

22 Unhon ne kabA, Qiu*nelius sft- badar ne, jo ristbiz aur Khuditars aur YahiiilioTj ki sdri qaum men nek- aim hai, pdk Srishte se htikm piya, ki tujlio apne ghar bulawe, aur tujh sc baten sunc.

Quntdiu*kd A'AMA'L, X

23 Tab na no unlie» bliitar buldke ira ki mihmani ki. Aur diisri; iin Patrus un ku s&th chald, aur kai Vjbai Yifa se ua ke, adth ho liye.

24 Aur dusre roz wo Qaisariya men ddkhil hue. Aur Qurnelius apoe rishtaddron aur dili doston ko ikat- the karke un k( rdh dekhta tha.

25 Aur aisd bud, ki jab Patrus dd- khil kone iaga, Qurnclius us se jd i'nild, aur u» ko qadamon par trirke sijda kiyd.

26 Lukin Patrus ne use uthdke ka- hd, Khard ho; main bhi b) insan b li n.

27 Aur us bo bdteri kartd andar gayd, aur bahuton ko ikatthe pdyd.

28 Tab us ne un se kahd, Tum jiin- m bo ki kyiinkar kisi Yahudi ko be- edju n suhbat rakhnS, yd us ke ya- han jan.i, rawi nahin ; rnagar Khudd ne'mujh par Bibir kiyd, ki main kini ddmi ko kannna ya ndpdk na kaln'm.

29 Ia liye main tumbdrc bulane par be-W chald dyd : ab main puchh- ta hi'in, ki imijho kis bdt ke liye bulaya '/

30 Tab Qinnelius ne kabi, Char roz b£e ki main no is ghari tak roza rakhd : aur tisre pahar ko apne ghar men du'd Trjdngtd Lhd, a»r kyd dekh- td Tnin, ki ok mard liarrdq posbdk pahtne mere sdmhne khard bai.

31 Tab ua ne kahd, Ai tjurnelius, teri du'd Buni gayi, aur teri khairdt Khudd ke hiwur yad hi'ii. ' 32 Ab kisi ko'Ydft men bhej, aur

SliainaYm ko, jo Patrus kauldtd hai, yahdn buld ; wuh Shama'un liubbdg ke yahdn, jis kd ghar sainundnr ke kindrc hai, rnihnidn hai : wuh dke tujh se kalam karegd.

;;:; Is liye u*i dam main no tere _ bheji; tii iic khiib kiyd, jo dyi. Ab ham nb Khudd ke age basir hain, td ki jo kuchh. Khudd ne tujhe farnidya bai, suuerj.

34 ■. Tab Putrus no zuban kholkc|bakh5msh jari nol 167 '

Fatnis ko b'ihi bhrj'ia, kabi, Ab mujhe yaqin hua ki Khuda zahir par nazar nabiu kartd :

35 Baiki bar quun HM&, jo na se dnrtd, aur rdstbdzi kartd, uh ko pasand dtd hai.

36 Yih wuh! kalam hai, jo us ne bani Israel ke pds bheja, jab Yisii' Masih ki ma'rifat, (jo sabliuti kdKhu- ddwand hai.) sulh ki khuslikhabari detd thd.

37 Tum is kalam ko jauto bn, Jo ba'd us ke ki Ynhannd ne bsptiama ki manddi ki thi, tamam Yahiidiya meg, Jali l «« shuui' karke, isbtihdr kiyd gayd ;

38 Ki kis tarah Kbuda ne Yisii' Ndsari ko Ruh i Qu'"Ih aur ijudi-at sa maniRuh kiyd; wub neki kartd, aur

sab ko, jo Shailan ki^ liatli ^o aulm utbiito tliu, ohangi kartd phird ; kyiin- ki Khudd us ke sdth thd.

Aur ham uu sab kdtnon ke, jo us ne Ythudion ke mulk Yartisalam mon kiye, gawdii hain; us ko unbon ne kdth par latkake mdr (Idld :

40 TJs ko Khudd ne tisre din iit.hdyi, aur use zdhir hono diyd ;

41 Sdri qaum p;ir iiiiliin, baiki un gawdliim par, ki dge se Khudd ke chune huethe, ya'ne, ham par, jiahoj) ne, TU ku murdon men wt jt utbno ke ba'd, us ke sdtli khdya aur piyA.

42 Aur uh uo hameii hukm diyd,ki logon men manddi karo, aur gawdhi do ki yih wubi hai, jo Khuda ki taraf se muqarrar bna, ki ssindofi aur mur- don kd insaf karriewdld ho,

43 Sab nabi ua par gawdhi dete hain, ki jo koi us par imdn ldwe, un ko ndm se apne gnndbon ki mu'ati pdwe.

44 T Patrus yo bdten kali ralid thd, ki Ri'ih i Quds un sab par jo kalam mute the. mi/j) bui.

45 Aur makhttin imanddr, jitne Patrus ko sdth'dc the, hairdn hiie ki gair-qauniOT} par bhi U uh i Qud3 ki

I'atrus kd A'^

4(3 Kyunki unhen tarah tarah ki inili huile, aur Klmdd ki bardi karte suhu. Tab l'atnia ne phir kahd,

■17 Kyd koi pani ko rok saktd ha ki ye, jinhon ne harnaii tarah Ruh Qmis pai, baptisma oa jidwen ?

■H Tab us ne hukm diya, ki we

Kiniduwund ke n ani jwir baptisma

pdwen. Tuli unbon ne us Be dar-

kliwast ki, ki kuclih din wahau ruko.

XI J UU.

AU K raaulon .iur bhdion ne jo Ya- bidiya mim the, aumi ki gKitvffitamofl ue bhi Khudii kd kalam qubul k iya.

2 Aur jab Patruu Yanisalam men dyd, to inakhtun us so bahs karut; lage,

3 Aur kahd, ki Tti nd-raakhtiinoii ke pas j^aya, aur un ke sdth khaya.

■1 Tab Patrus ne «huni' se «Usus ke sitli uti *u bayan kiyi, aur kaha, ki

o Jab main Yafd kesliuhr men du'd mang raba tba, ho-khudi men ake ek rovd deklii, ki «k chiK jaiae hari cha- dor, jU ke diaron kono dsmdn se latkde luio tho, utarke mujh tak di.

G Jab main ne khub dekhke gnur kiya, i;ib /uiiiiu ko chdrpdye, aur jiingli janwar, aur kire makore, aur hawa ke parinde, ub men dekhe.

7 Aur main ue ek iiwa/. .suni, ki tnujhi- kahti hai.Ai Patru», uth ; zabh ku, aur kha.

y Tab main bola, Ai Khuddwand, bargiz naluri ; kyunki kabid kol haram ya mipiik ehiz mere uiuijh men u gayi.

1) Tab jawab men di'wi bdr dsmau se mujhe awai di, ki Jiwe Khudd n(> pak kiyd, tii haram niat kab.

10 Yih tin bdr hiiu : phir sab kuchh asinin ki taraf khincha gaya.

1L Aur, dekho, usi dam iiu adnii, jo Oaisariym bu mere pas bheje gaye, us afaai ke pilu, jis rnen main tba, khare the.

12 Aur Ruh ne mujh ae kaha, ki 168

'L, XT. 'tur iurwi.

Tii be-kliatke ua ke B.ith ja. Chuniiu- chi ye chha bhai mere sath chide, aur ham us shakhs ku gliar men dakliii htie:

13 Aur ua ne ham ae bayan kiya. ki kis taruh tk tirishte ko apno o;3 1 n i men khara dckhtl, jis ne tae kaha, ki Yafa metj ddmi bhej, aur Shama'un ko, jiB kd Iaimb Patrus hai, bulwa ;

14 W u h tujhe we bdton kabega, jin ae td aur tera «drd ghar najat pnrega,

15 Jah maiij kalam kurne laga, llub i Quds un par u:'wil lu'ii, JaiH pahlo ham par.

18 Tab inujriu Khu^awaml ki bal yad di, jo ua ne kabi, Yiihaiina tM to pani ae baptisma rliya, par t uni rttili i Quds se baptisma pdogo.

17 Pasjabki Khudane uii ko waisi ni'amat di.jaifi ham ka Jo Kliuddwand Yisii' Masih par iman Ide, to main kaun tlid ki Kbuda ko rok saktd ?

18 We yih tmnkar uhup rahe, t\m Khudd ki ta'rifkarke kahd, Beslmkk Khudii ne gair-qaumon ko bhi zmdat;i ke liye tauba bakhshi hai.

10 t Pm w«i W ns jaur o jafd se ju ki Stelamu ke Mttab mt$6 hui thi'n, clilutar bitar lio gaye lho, pblrte jiliirii Fiafiu 0 Kupi-ua o Antakiy.i. men pa- hunche, magar Yahiidion ku aiwa kisi ku kalam na sundte the.

) Aur un men se kai ek Euprusi Qureni the, jinhon no Antdkiya men ake Yuiidin-nia.il Yahudion «e biii biileii kiri, aur Klmdawand YisiV ki khushkbabari aundi,

1 Aur Kbuddwaiid ka hdtli un ko saLli tba ; aur bahu t se log jo iman Ide Khuddwand ki taraf plure.

22 \ Tab un logon ki khabar Ya- rusalam ki kalisiyo ke kau meo pahunchi; aur unhoij ue Barnabaa ko bhejd, ki Antdkiyd tak jde.

'j;i VVuh pahunidike, aur Khudd ka fazl dekhke, khusb hud, aur un sab ko

;iliat, ki, ki Dil ki ma/.buti ke sdth Kliuddwam.l .se Uigo raho.

Aut^kii/i. m- n Injil suudnd. A'AMA'

2-i Kyugki wuh nek rnard tha, aur'

Itiih t Quds aur Unta n bhari i ftorek

bari guruh Khudawand ki taraf rujii'

m.

25 Tab Baraabaa StUtis ki talash men Tarsus ko chala :

2<> Aur «e pake Antikiyi men laya. Alir aisa hfia, ki we sil bhar kalisiye mag sbamil lini karte, aur bahut loffog ko sikhiya karte the. Aur pahle Aotikiya" nieri shigird Kristian kuhlao.

27 1 Uuhin dinon kai ck nabi Ya- rusalani se Antikiya uien ae.

28 Aur iitiincij Hc,ek ne.jia kandm Agabus tha, k hara hoke lltih ki hida- yat ae zahir kiyil, ki tamani niamlnkiil. umii bara kal paroga-, jo Qhudiua Qaiaar ke waqt men waqi' hiii.

29 Tuh shigiraon mes se har ck ne thanfi ki apiie rnaqdur ke inuwalii) uu bbaion k i' khidmat men, jo Yahtidiya nien rahte the, kuehh bhejft

30 So utiliun ne yih kiya, aur B&r> nabas aur Hulus ku hith buzurgon ke p&B biu'ja.

XII BA'B.

AURun dinon Herodls badsbah ne kaliaiye men so ba'zon jiar hith rtilu, ki unlien aatiwe.

2 Aur Yiihiuinako bhai Ya'ipib ko tatwar se mir d Al A.

3 Aur jub lickhi ki Yahiidion ko yih puma ay.-i, to aur bhi ziyoduli ki, ki Patrus ko bhi pakar HyA. (Yih be- khamiri roti ke dinon meg hui.)

4 Aur us ko pakarke qaid-kliaini men dalA, aur char cb'ar sipabioa ke

tilire men sompa, ki us ki nigahbaiu aren, aur chilii ki Fa&ah ke ba'd use logon ke satnhne le jie.

5 Pas (pii ' ' ' :iigahbiirii hoti'tlii

tar kalisiya us ke

5 Pas qaiil-kliaiiu incii Patrus ki : jiar i Uy<3 uit Khuda uu du'A mungil karti thi.

U Aur jab Herodis ne use hAzir karne chaha, ari rit, Patrus, do /.aii- :■•■] .-- Ii.iiulliii, do sipahion ke bich 169

'L, XII. Tlerutlis 'J'sdion ko sat<ifti. mcu soli tha; aur chankiwAlo darwAze par qaid-khAne ki cluuiki kar ralio the.

7 Aur, dekho, Khudawand ki ek firishta A khara hua, aur as makan men mlr chnmka, aur us uc Patrus ki pasli par marke jagiyA, aur kahA, ki Jald uth. Tab zanjiren us ko hathon se gir gayin,

H Aur us tirishee ne uee kalni, ki Kiimar bandl), mr apni jiiti pahin. Os ue yimhin kiya. l'liir uaneuac kaha, Apna kurhi pahin, aur mere pielihe lu» lc.

9 Wuh nikalkc us ke pichho lio liya; par na jarni ki yih, jo firilhta m" hi'iii, BBOrj hai; baiki tfamjhd ki roya il.-liiilii hl'ih.

10 Tab we pahle aur dilsro pahra men se nikalko luiie ke phatak tak, Jo shabr ki taraf hai, pahunehe ; wuh ip se iip un ko liyo khul [jaya; so wa nikalko ek gali se guzar gaye; aur usi dani firiahta uh ke pas so chalA gaya.

11 Tab Patrus ne hosh men Ako kahd, Ab main ue sach jana ki Kbu- diwand ne apnd firiahta bhejd, nur mtijhe Herodia ke hatii, aur Yahudi ipiura ki siiri tak se, baciia liya.

12 Aur tab yih sanijhii tha, tab Yil- linuna, jis ka laqab M»rqns hai, us ki ma Mariyam ke ghar aya ; wahan bahut log jaiu'a hiie, aur dii'ti maug nilu' the.

13 Jab Patrus phatak ki kliirki khatkhutata Lhd, Rotlu namo ekchhok- ti ai, ki chupke sune.

14 Aur Pulrus ki iiw;i/. nfcoh&ake maro khttflbi ku phatak im khola, par daurke aodar khabar di, ki Patrus phatak par kburi hai.

16 Tab unlion ne use kaha, Tii diwAni hai, Par wuh apni bit par (piini riilii, ki yiin hi hai. Tab unlion ue kahi, Us ki firiahta hoga.

Hi Magur I'atnis khiilkiialiiti rabi: j tab uuiiou no darwa/.a kholke UB ko [dekhi, aur dang ho gayet

Pilus o Bantalan ka A' AM A'

17 Us iif unheg hdth se. ishara kiyd, ki chup raben, aur un se bayan kiyd, ki Khuddwand kis tarah lis ko .|a"id-khane ae bahar !dyd. Phir kaba, ki Ya'qub aur bhdlon ko is bdt ki khabar do. Aur wuh a? bahar jake .h'isri jagah clia.a gayd.

ia Jab sul)h bdi, nipah! babut ghabrde, ki l'atrus kyd Ima.

19 Jab Ilcrodis ne ua ki talasb karke ua paya, to chaukidaron ki tahqiqdt kf, aur hukrn kiyd, ki lc jake unhe.ii jin so maro. Aur dp Yahudiya M riiwaua hoke Qaisariya men jd rahd.

20 T -Aur Herodis Sfir o Saidd ke logorj kc nibdyat nd-klmsh tha: tab we ck-dil hoke ua ke pas ae, aur Blastus ko,io badshdh ki khwdbgdli kd nazir tha, mildke sulh chdhi; kyiirjki un ke mulk ko bddahdh ko miilk se asbab i ma'aah muyassar ate the.

21 Tab Herodis ek din thahrdke aur bddsliahi poshak pahinke takht par baitlia, aur un se kaldin karnc lagd.

22 Tab log chillane lage, ki Yih Khuda ki dwdz hai, insan ki nahin. ' 23 Ubi dam Khudi ke. fnishte ne

use mdi'i, kyuijki us ae Khudd ki Luzurgi ua ki; aur wuh kire parke iuar gaya. "\ 1 Pa

24 J Par Khudi ka kalam barhd, ai» phaili.

25 Aur Barnahas aur Stflua apni khidmat puri karke, aur Yiihaund ko, jis ki laqab Marqus hai, fcit.li Lekfl, Yarusalam se phire.

XIII BA'B.

AUR Antakiya ki kalisiye men kai nabi aur muallim the; ya'ne, Barnabda, aur Sharaa'lia, jo Nigar kahldtd hai, aur Ltyioa Qureni, aur Mauden, jo chauthdi ke hdkiin Herodis ke sdth pald thi, aur Sdlus.

2 Jab we Khuddwand ki bandagi 170

L, XIII. agya.r pa* jami.

karte, aur roaa rakhte the, Biih i Quds ne kaha, Merc liye Bamabas aur Siilus ko akg karo, us kini ke liye jia ke wdsto main ne unhen buldyd.

3 Tab unhon^ne rona rakhke, aur du'd mdn.gke, un ]xir hdth raklic, aur unhen nikhsar. kiya.

i f Pas wo ltiih i Quds ke bheje hfle Sildkiyd ko gaye; aur wabiu se juhaz par Kuprus ko chale.

5 Aur uuhrn ne, jab ki Snlamis men the, Yahndioii ke 'ibddat-khdnon men Khudd kd kalam suudyd; aur Ytihannd un kd khddim tiid.

6 Aur ua tainiin tapu inen Pdfus tak sair karke unhorj ne ok Yahi'idi jddugar aur jhdthe nabi ko, jis kd udm Bar-Yisu' thi, p'iyd :

7 Wuh Sri ha ko Snrjius Pulus ke sdth tha, jo saMb i tamiz thd; us ne BttBabJB aur Siilus ko buldke chdhd ki Kliuda kd kaldm sune:

8* Par Windu jddugar ne, (ki yibi ua ke nam ka tarjuma hai,) un ki barkhildfi ki, aur chdhd ki Sdba ko [mu Be phor de.

0 Tab fidius, ya'ne, Pulus ne Pub i Quds se bhar jdkc use ghurakke

10 Kahd, Ai Shaitdn ke l'arz.and, hi j., tamani nmkkdri aur 'aiydri H bliara, aur B*b Uirah ki rasti kd dusb- man hai, kyd Khuddwaud ki sidhi rihog ko terhi karna na chhoregd?

lf Ab,'d'ekh, Kliuddwand kd hath tfljjh par h*L aur'td n.ndhd ho jd<'ga, aur muddat tak sdmj ko na dekbega. Wunhiij dhundhldpan aur andherd us iiar chhd gayd; aur dhiiiidlud phira, ki koi us kd hath pakarke 16 chale.

12 Tab Siiba yih rudjard dekhkfl Khudawand kl ta'lim se dang hokar i mau Idyi.

13 Ah Ptllus aur ub ke sdihi Pafus se jaha« kholke Pamfiiliya ke Pargi men ae : aur Ynhaiind un se judi hokar Yanisalam ko phird.

H t Aur we Pargd se guzarke l'isidiya ke Antdkiyd men pahunehe,

Putus Pmdiya ke Antakiya A'AMAX, XIII. nur sabt ke di» 'ibddat-kbdne men ja haitho.

15 Aur tauret aur iiabiim ki kitab ke parhne ke ba'd 'iMdat-khdne ke sardaruii ne unhen, kahlA bhejA, ki Ai bhiio, agar kuchh nasihat ki bit logon ko liye rakhtu ho, to bayan k&ro.

16 Tab PultM khara hiia, aur hdth se ishAra karke kahA* Ai Israelio, aur ai Khuda-tarso, u u mi,

1*7 Ih qaurn i Israel ke Khudd ne liamare bdpdadon ko chund, aur is qaum ko, jab Miar ke mulk men pardesi thi, barhdyi, aur /.abnrdast hdth se mihen wahdn se nikdl IdyA.

18 Aur baras cballs ok wuli ba- yAbdn men uii ko dai ki tarah liye phirA,

19 Aur Kau'an ki saraamtn men ■fU aanmofl ko haldk kiyd, aur un ka mulk qur'a se unhen baut diyd.

20 Aur ba'd ub ke, adrhe onar sau buru ke qarib, Sami'iel iiabi tak, uu men q&rf in.uqa.rnar kiye.

21 Ub WM}t se unhon lio badsh&h chaha: tab Khudd ne ek mani, Hinyamm ku ghardne se, Qis ke bete Sdiil ko, obalis baras tak uu muqarrar kiya,

22 Phir uae utdrke Daiid ko kb kiya, ki «n ka bddskdh ho : aur ub jawabi men. kaha, ki Main ne ek roard Yassi ke bet* Daud ko apue dil ke mnwAfiq pAyA; wuhi merf khwahisheij puri karega.

23 Uai ki nasi se Khuda no, apne wa'de ke muw4flq, Israel ke liye Najdt- denewale Yiai'i' ko uthaya :

24 Jis ke Auo so Age Yuhannd M total ki tamam qaum ke darmiyan tauba ke baptisma ki man&di ki,

25 Aur jab Yubannd apna danra piird karno par thd, uh ne kahA, Tuin mujhe kaun samajhte ho V Main wuh nuliin hiin; baiki, dekho, wuh ba'd ala bai, jis ko panwon. ki jiiti main kholuo ke laiq nahin hiin,

26 Ai bhiio, Abirahdra ko khandAn

men Injil sutiata.

171

ke farzando, aur timi meg se jit-ne Khuda so darte ho, tuiuhare liye ia najdt kd kalam bheja gaya.

27 Kyilnki Yar&aalam ke bAshind- on aur un ke Barddrnn ne, nso, aur nabion ki bdterj, jo iiar sabt ko parhi jati hain, na jAnke ua par fatwa dene se un ko piird kiya.

Agarchi ua ke qatl ki koi wajh i, tau bhi Pildtus se darkhwast ki ki use mAr dAIe.

29 Aur jab sab kuchh, jo us ko hai)'] un ij liklid tliA, piird kar chuke, t o use kath par se utdrke uabr men rak h d.

30 Lekiu Kliuda ne uae murdon men se u^hAyA :

31 Aur wuh bahut din un ko, jo ub ke sath Jalil se Yarusalnm men ie the, dikbai diya ; we M logon ke age us ke gaw&h haiu.

32 Aur ham tum ko khuslikhabari dete hain, ki un wa'de ko, jo bapdadori se kiyd gayd tba,

33 Khuda ne hainaro liye, jo un ki auldd hain, bilkull piird kiyd, ki Yisii' ko phir jildyd ; chundnclii inare Zabiir men likhd hai, ki Tii merd Betd hai, aj lii mai|i terd bdp hua.

34 Aur is ki bdbat, ki us no ubc murdon men se uthaya, la ki ba'd us ke na sare, ydn kahd, ki Main DAiid ki pak aiir sachchi ni'aiiiaten tiunherj ddngd.

35 Is liyo wuh dusri jagah bhi kahtd hai, ki Tu apne Quddns ko sarno ki hdlat dekhne na degd.

36 Kyunki T)dud U) apne waqt men Khudd ki mar?,! bajd Idke ao gaya, aur apne bdpdddon se jd mild, aur sarne ki hdlat dekhi j

37 Par yih, jisu Kliudd ne uthityd, sanie ki hdlat nahin dekhi.

88 lf Paa, ai bhAio, yih tumhon ma'liim ho jdwe, ki usi ke wasilo tum ko gunahon kl mu'Afi ki khabar di jdti hai :

39 Baiki ubi so har ek jo imdn laid,

PtUvi aur Jtarnnbds A'AMA'L, XIV

un sal) biton se, jin se tum M risi ki >li;»ri'.ii. k o r\\ se be-gunih uahin tkahar sakte the, bt-gundh thahartd.

40 Pas kbahnnbir rftho, aisd na ho ki jo nnbion ki kitab men likha hai tua par dwe ; ki

41 Ai tahqir kamewalo, dekho, aur ta'ajjub karo, »nr nest ho jio ; kyunki main tumhdre zamani; nii'ii ek kam kartd lniFj. aisi kam, ki koi tum H kaisd lii baydu karegi, tum kabin yanin na karwre.

42 Jab Yahudi 'iMdotkhane ke biliar jite tho, gair-qaumon ue un se darkbwaat ki, ki y« batuu aglo sabt ko uu bc kahi jdcn.

43 Jab majlifl uth gayi. babut Yahudi aur murid Khudi-parast Pul us aur Hama bda ke piclihe cliale: unhon iig uu bc kalam karke targib di, ki Khudd ki iii'amnt par qaim raheu.

4.4 1 Dnare sabt ko qaril> s&h shahr ko log ikattbe hio, ki Khudd ki kaliin suneu.

45 M agar itni hhlr dekhke Yahudi ddh se bhar gaye, aur kbikif kalue, aur kufr bakt.chue, Pulus ki bdtcn se niukhfthifat ki.

46 Tab Pulus aur Barnaba* nitlar hoko bolo, ki Zarur lini ki K hudd ka kalam pahle tumhen aunayajae; bkin j i.--, baiki tumne ua ko radd kiya, aur ap ko hameaba ki zindagi ko liiq ua «anijlii, to dekbo, ham phirke gair- iiaumon ki taraf mufawajjih hote ha m.

47 Kyunki Kliiidiiwanil ue yunhiij hanieo hukm diyd, ki Main ue tujh ko gair-qaumon ka nur muqarrar kiya, ta ki dunya ki intihi tak najiit kii ba'is b o.

48 Tab gair-qaumen in balon ko sunke k bus h huin, aur Khuda ko ka- lam ki ta'rii' kamc lagin : aur jitne bamesba ki ziuda«i ke liyo taiyar kiye gaye the, i min Ide.

49 Aur Khudi ki kalam ua tamani mulk men pliaila.

50 Par Yahiidion ne Khudd-parast

172

Iquiiivm w:t± <i!e. aur 'i//.arwdli 'aurat'm aur shahr ko raison ko ubhari, aur Pulus aur Barna- bas par fasad utliayi, aur unhen apni surbuddnn H nikal diyi.

5L Tab wc apne panwori ki klnik un par jhdrke Iqunitim men ie.

52 Aur sh&gird khuahi aur Riili i Quds ae bliar gaye.

XIV BA'B.

AUR Iqrmii.nu mari yuti ht'id, ki ive ek sith Yabudion ke 'ibidat- kbiiim nii'n gaye, aur aisc taur par k;i- Idm kiya, ki Yahiidion aur Yi'minioii ki ek bad jama'al iman lai.

2 Par un Yahiidion ne, jo iman na lae the, gair-qaumon ko ubhara, aur un ke dil L'liaiuii ki taraf bad kar diyc.

3 Is liyo WO bahut diu wiihin nilir, aur Khudawand ki bdba: be-dharak kalimkarte the; wuh apno fazl ki "bal. par gawAbJ deti, aur un ko bitbon se niahdnidn aur achambbc dikhata rahi.

4 Aur shahr ko \o#m mcn phi'it puri : ha'ze Yahiidion ki, aur ba'ze raaiilrm ki taraf ho gaye.

Par jab gair-qaumwakm aur Ya- hiidion Tiu iijine BBttMsoB samet fasad uthiyi, ki unhen be-'izzat aur un par jinUhrau kareij,

0 Wt y ih ma'liiin karke Luqiuniya ke shahr Lustri aur Darbo aur un k<: isy&s ke mulk nien libage;

7 Aur wahaii Injil sunate rahe.

8 )j Aur Luatra men ek shftkha, jis ke panwon meD taqat na thi, baitba thi : wuh apni mi ke pet hi se lunja thd, aur kabhi na chali ;

9 U» ne Piilue ko biten karte suni; jis ne ua ki taraf gaur se dekhke, aur darydt't karke ki us merj imin hai ki changi howe,

10 Bari iwiz se kabi, ki Apnc pdu- >n par 6ldhi khard bo; wuh uclihai-

ke chalne laga.

11 Logon ne yih, jo Pulus ne kiyd thd, dekhke, awa/. buland karke, Lu-

Wuhdn ke Tahudi A' A

i|imuiya ki boli men katul, Dewte fiil m t ke bL«B men ha.ui }«r utre haig.

12 Aur unhotj ne Baraabaa ko Zeus kaha, aur l'iilus kn Harmes, is liye ki wuh kalam men tahui karta thd.

13 Aur Zeij*, jo ki un ke shahr ke saroline tM, na ke pujari ne, bati aur ph u Ion ke bar phatakon. par lake iogonke sat.Ii cbaria ki ciurbani karcn.

14 Jali ilarnabas aur Pulus rasillon no yih suni, to apne. kapre phsrc, aur logon ko bicb men kiide, yih chillake,

15 Aurkahkc,ki Ai mardo, tum yih kya kaiti ho? Ham bhi insan hain, aur tatahan tarah hawass rakhtc, aur timihoii Injil Hunite hain, ti ki in IjA- tiloii se kln&ra karke zinda. Khuda ki taraf phiro, jis ne asomu, aur zauiin, aur samutidar, aur jo kuchh im men lini, patdd kiya .-

16 Uh MC agle zamAne mog sab fiaumon ku dibor diya, ki apiii apni rah par chalen,

17 Tis par bhi ua tie ihsan kuras, aur asmin ae haroare liye paiii barsane, aur mewon ki i'aslen ]iaiua karne, aur haindrc dikm ko khiuak aur khushi se bhar do u c se ap ko be-gawali ua chhori.

18 Aur ye batcn kakke logon ko bari musbMI nc baV. raklia, ki un ko ipiriiiiii na charhawep..

19 f Aur Ynhiidlon. ae AntAkiya aur Iqunimn bc Ake, aur logon ko mall karke, Pulus ko sangsAr kiya, aur yih BHHJhke ki wuh niar gaya, use shahr ke bahar ghasit 'c gaye.

20 Par jab tdiagird ua ki gird o pesh ikatthe luie, wuh u^hko shahr men aya ; aur dusrc din Barnabas ke satli Darbe ko chala gaya.

21 Aur us shahr men Injil sunake, aur bahut se ahAgird karke, LusItA aur Ifjiinium aur Autakiya ko phire.

22 Aur ahagirdon ke dilon ko taq- irlyat data, aur nasihat karte tbe, ki iman pir qaim rako, aur kaha, Zarur hai ki haru bahut rausihaten sah k e

173

L, XV, ijdl, at/at&d ii'Jidt-.

Khuda ki badsbabat men dakhil hou.

2.r! Aur tinhou ne har ek kalisiye men un kr liye buaurgon ko muijarrar karke, aur roza ke aath du'i roangke, unhetj Khudawaiul ko, jis par iman Ide the, BompA

24 Aur Pisidiya ao guKarke PaTTi- fuliya mag pahunohe.

25 Aur Parga men kaMia sunA"ku Attaliya ko gaye :

2li Aur wahan se jahA?, par charb- ke AntikiyA rnon ae, jahan ae U3 kam ke liye, jo unhog ne ab pura kiya, Khuda ke fiizl par aompa gaye the.

27 Aur unhori ne pahunehke kali- atvc ku ikatlhe kiya, aur sab kuchh jo Khuda ne un ke siath kiya, auT yili k i us ne gair-qnumon ke liye iman ka darwaza khol.i, bayan kiya.

28 Aur we ^li;igi'.dorj ke sath wahan bahut din ralie.

XV BA'B.

AU B \m'xe Yahudiya se ake bhaion ko ta'Hm dpne lage, ki Agar MdsA ki sunnat ke muwafiq turuhira khatna na ho, to tum tiajdt nahiii pa sakte.

2 Pas jab Piilus aur Barnahaa se un " bahut takrir o balu lidi rlii,

to unhon ne yih thahrAyd ki Piilus aur Barnabas, aur un men se chand aur iog, la ki tahqiq ke liye, rasiilog aur buzurgon ke pas Yarusakin men jaen.

3 So we kali«iye se kuchh dur pa- huuchae jake Eair-qaumon ke rujiV laue ka bayan Karte hi'ie Finike aur S&mariya se gii7,re. Aur sab bh&fojj ko bahut khush kiy.i,

i Aur jab Yariisalam nien pahunehe, kalisiye aur rastUon aur buzurgon ne un ko qabul kiya, aur unhon ne, jo luirhli Khuda ne un ke sath kiya tha, hayau kiva,

S Tab Parisiog ke nrqe mes se **" 'zon ne, jo iman Ide the, uthke kaha, ki Un ka khatua kuniii, aur Musa ki

Agy&r ke khatna ki babat

shai i'at par ckalne ka hukm deud,zarur

hai.

G ^ Tab rasul aur buzurgjam'ahue, ki ia bdt ko sochen.

7 Aurjabbiiri bahs hiii, Parru3 ne khard hoku un se kahA, Ai bhAio, tum jantii ho ki baUut diri hrio ki Khudd ne haru men. se mujhc ctumd, ki gair- ciaunieri mcri zuhdn se Injil ki bit suneg, aur imdn lAwen.

8 Aur Khudd nc.jodilki jdntdhai, un par gawahi di, ki un ko bhi hanidri tarah Kiih i Quds di ;

9 Aur iman se un ki dil pak karke ham raen aur un men kuchh farq na rokha,

10 Tas ab tum kyiin Khuda ko dz- mate ho, ki ahAgirdon ki gardan par jua rakhe, jis ka na hanidre bdpddde na hain uthfi sakte tbc ?

11 Aur h ani ko yaqfn hai k i ban Klnulawand Tim' Masih ke fazl sb liojdt p&weoge, aur uni tarah se we bbf pdwengo.

12 T Tab adri jamd'ftt chup rahi, aur Barnabaa aur Pfilus se yih bayAn aunne lap, ki Khuda ne kaiai nisha- nian aur kardmaten un ke waailo gair-qauinon men zdhir kin.

13 T" Jab we khAmoah hiie, Ya'qub kalme lagd, Ai bhdio, mati Huno ;

14 Shama'im nc bayan kiyd hai, ki kis tarah Khudd nopahiegair tytumi :j par nigdh ki, ki un men se ek guroh apne nam ke liyc chun le ;

15 Aur ia ae nabion ki baten inilti hain : chunanehi likhd bai, ki

16 Ba'd is ke main phir Alingi, aur DAdd ke gire hiie dera ko uthAungA : aur U6 ku trite phute ki maraniuiat karke use phir k hari kariingi:

17 Ki log kA bauiya, aur aab gair- OKimaft, Jo mere niin ki kahlili hain, Khudiiwund ko dhumlhcii. Khuda- wand, jo yih Bab kuchh kartd, aisA fani'ldl : i hai.

18 KhudA ko dunyd ke aburu' se apne sab kdm nia'lum hain.

174

A'AMAX, XV. takrar M kowi.

10 So merf aalAh yih hai, ki un par jo gair-na union men ae IChudi ki taruf phire hain, bera na (Ulen :

20 Par un ko likh bliejen, ki buton ki gandagiorj.aur ha nim k Ari, aur gald- ghonti hiii chizon, aur lu.li li se kindru rahen,

21 Kyiinkl Igle zamAne se har shahr men Musi" ki sluirl'at ke innnddi- karncwdlo hote Ae hain, aur har saht ke din wuh 'ibadut-khanon men parhi jAtf.

22 Tab rasulon aur buzurgon ne, sAri kalisiye aamet, bihtar jdnd ki apne men se kai shakhs chunke Pu- lua aur BaroabAs ke' «Ath AntdkiyA jnen bhejerj ; ya'ne, YahiidAh ko, ki jis kd laaab iiarsabi» bal, aur Silds ko, jo bhaion men muqaddam ddmi

tho;

23 Aur un ke hdtb yih likh bhcjd ; ki Un bhdion ko, jo gair-qaumon men M liiiin, aur Antakiya, aur Suri ya, aur Qihqiya men rahte, raaiilon aur bu- zurgon aur bhdion kd silam :

24 Azbaski hain ne auuA ki ham men se ba'zon ne, jin ko baui ne hukm nahin kiyd, jdke tumben anni bAton se ghalira diyd, aur tumhdre dilon ko yih kahke pareshdn kiyd, ki Khatna karo, aur sliari'at par chalo :

25 So ham nc ok-dil hoke bihtar jAni ki ba'z cliuue hfie ddmion ko apne 'azizon Barnabds aur Piilua ko sath,

26 ,To ki aise ddmi hain, ki unbon ne apni jdn hamAre Khudawand Y isi Masih ke ndm par fehatre men da'.i, tnmbdre pds bhejen.

27 ChunAnchi ham ne Yahud Ah aur SiUs ko bhejAjaur we jb bdten EUbinf bbi baydn karenge.

28 Kyunki TSiih i Quds ne aur bnn ne bihtar jinA ki in zaniri bAton ki! hiwA, tum par aur kuchh bojh na dAlen :

'Jlt Ki tum buton ke t'harbdwon, aur lahu, aur galdghonti hiii chizon, aur

Uli bal kdf-nsiil hond.

A'AMA'L, XVI.

haramkan se parhesi karo. Agar-tuml 2 Ai

PiUus aur Sila* H babat. Lustra nur Jqun:

chizon m ap ko bacha-e rakhoge, to Win bhaioii ke mudik nekn&iu tha.

khrth kiiroge. Salamat raho.

30 Tab wo rukhsat hoko Antikiya

Pulus ne chaha ki use apno sath chale ; tab us ko le jiike un Yahii-

iiioii io ; aur jiimd'&t ko ikat tha- karke dion ke «abah, jo un at.rdl" men the,

khatt de diyd.

" 31 We use parhke is tasalli ki bdt

si- kliimh hiie.

82 Aur Yuhiidih aur 806« ne, ki we blii nabi the, blnlinn ko halmt si bdton se nasihat karke taqwiyat di.

33 Aur we kuchh din rahko sahih salamat bhaion bu rukh.^it hoke rasiil- oii ke nas gaye.

34 Mngar Silds ne wahan rahnd bihtar jaili.

35 Aur Pulua aur Barnabds Anta- kiya rnen nih k e bahut aur logon ko satu Khudawand ka kalam sikhlate aur u» ki baahdrat dete the.

30 1 Aur kai KM ba'd Pulus no Barnabds se kaha, A 'o, har ek ahahr men, jahan ham nc Khuda ka kalam suiidya, phir jake apne bhaiott ko de- khen, ki k&isc hain.

37 Aur Barnabds ki ralah tlii, ki Yuhaima ko, jia ka laqal> Marqus hai, apne sath le jae.

38 Magar Pulus ne munasih na j;ina ki us shakhs ko, jo Pamluliya men un se judd liiia, aur us kara ke liye un ke sang na gay&j sdth le jae.

39 Tab un men aisi taknir hrii, k ek diisre se juda ho gaya; aur Barna- bas Marqus ko leke jahaz par Kupmu ko rawdna hua ;

40 Aur Pulus ne Silds ko pasand k iya, aur bhaion se Khudd ke fazl ke Mipurd hoke rawdna hiia.

41 Aur Suriya aur Qiliqiy& men guzarke kalisiyaon ko taqwiyat detA ph ini.

XVI BA-B.

W UU Darbe aur Lustra men pa- hunclia : aur, dekho, wahan

ka. khatna kiya, kyiinki we sab jAnte the ki is kA bdp Yunani th£.

4 Aur jab wo shahrun min guzarte e, to un hukraon ko, jo racafop aur

huzurgog ne Yiimsahun men thahrdyd tha, uiifieii pahunchAyd, ki un ki muhdfazat karen.

5 So kalisiyden Iman men mubut huiij, aur ginti men roz ba roa barhti gayin.

6 Jab we Friigiya aur Galatiya ke mulk ko guzre, to Ruh i Quda nc un- ben mnn'a kiya, ki Asia men kalam

. sundwon.

7 Tab we Mi'isiya. men Ake Bitii- niya men jdne ki tadbir raeri lage : par Ruh ne unhen jane na diya.

S Sowb Miisiya se guzarkar Troas u i ■ ■ f_ nur ia,

t) Aur Pulus ne rAt ko royi dekhi ; ki ek Maqaduni Adini khara hdi, aur us ki mienat karke kahta hai, ki Piir utar, aur Maqaddniya men dkebamari madad kar.

10 Jon us ne roya dekhi, ust dani ham ne Maqaddniya men jAnc ka i rada kiya, yih yaqin karke ki Kim- tUwand no hameg buldya, ki unben Injil snnawen.

11 Pas Troas se kishti kholko ham sidhe Samutiwjiya men, aur diisre din NiyApulia men, ae ;

12 Aur wahan so Filippi men ao, jo Maqadiiniya ki us qiBniat ka mu* qaddain sbulir aur ltumion ki basti hai : ham kuchh din usi shahr meij rahe.

13 Aur sabt ke din sbahr ko bahar nadi kinAre gaye, jahan du'a mdngne ka diistur tha; aur haitbke un 'aurat-

Timtaus nime ek «hagird tha, jis ki on se, jo ikatihi thin, kabiin karne mdYahudin tbi.juiindn lai; par us kajlage.

bap Yunani tba : | 14 T Aur Thuatira shahr ki ek,

176

Puitis o SUas M </<iid hoin'i. A' AMA'L, XVI. DArogn ka murid harui.

Kbudd-parant 'aurat LudiA nAm, qir- miz bechnewdli, Buuti thi : ub kd dil Khiidawnnd ne. kliolA, ki Piilus ki bAton par ji lagayA.

15 Aur jab uh nc apne gharAne Baruet baptiama paya, to minnat karke kaha, Agar tumben yaqin hai ki main KhudAwand ki imdndar MU, to ehalko mere ghar men nilio. Aur hamen zabardasti le gayi.

16 ^ Aur aisd hiid, ki jab ham du'A mingoe kl jagah Jfte Hip, ok chhokri, jis men gaib-dani ki ruh samai thi, hamen mil!, jo mib-sd :' apne mdlikon ke liyc bah u t kuchh peidft k arti thi :

17 Ub ne Pi'iIuh ke aur liamArc pichhe Ako chiUAke kahfi, ki Ye admi Khuda Ta'ild ko bande hain, jo ham lio najdt ki rih balAtc hain.

IB Yih us ne bahut dimm tak kiyA. A'khir Pulua ranjida lnia, aur phirke us'ruh se kahA, ki Main tujhe Yisu' Masih ke iiam par hukm karti hug, ki is so nikal jd. Wuh uni dam nikal gayi.

19 % Jab us ke mdlikon nc dekha ki thi ki kumai ki urwned jati rahi, to Piilus o Silau kn pakarke cljauk men sardArorj ke pas khinoh la chale.

20 Aur uiiln-n faiijdari ke hdkimon ke age le jake kahd, ki Ye Admi, jo Yahudi hain, hamare sdiahr ko bahut satAte hain,

21 Aur harn ko aisi rasmen batAto, jin ka rndniia aur uu par 'amal karna hamen, ki Rnmi hairj, rawA nahin.

22 Tab bhir milke un ki muklidlafat inen ut.lii : aur f nijddri ke hakinion ne un ke kapre phdrko un ko bet mdrne ka hukm tiiya.

f A'dhi rAt ko Ffilus aur Silds du'A mangto hue KhudA ki aiiAisli ke git gAte the; aur bandlme unhen aunte the.

26 Tab ekbArgi barA bhimchAl Ayd, nisA ki qaid-khAnc ki uew blii hil gayi : aur jiiat sab darwazo khul gaye, aur aab ki beriAn gir gayi n.

27 Aur qaid-khdne kA dAroga jdg utha, aur jab qaid-khdne ke darwAne khule dekhe, to yiiiVaimnlikc ki ban- dhue bhdg gaye,t«lwdr khinehko chAhA ki apne ta.in mdr ddle.

28 Tab Pului+ ne hari AwAz se pn- kdrkc kahA, Apno ta.in mii|sdn mat pahunelia: kyuiiki ham sah yahdn maujud hain.

29 Tab wuh chirag mangwAke hlii- tar daurA, aur kampS. huA IMlus aur SilAs ke pAnwon par girA,

30 Aur unhen bAhar lAke kahA, Ai Btlhibo, main kyA karian ki najit |.;iiinV

31 Unhon ne kaha, ki Khudiwand Yisii' Masih par imAu IA, ki hi aur t«rA gharAnA najAt pAwegA.

32 Tab unhun ne us ko, aur sab ko jo us ko ghar men thi', Khudawand Jiii kalam sunAyA.

S3 Aur us ne rat ki usi ghari unhen leke un ke zakhin dhoe: aur wunhin us ne, aur sab ue jo ub ke the, baj>- t isma pAyA.

34 Aur unhen apne ghar lAke un ke sAmhne dastarkhwAn biohhAyA, aur apno tamAm gbar aamet Khuda par iman lake khuwhi ki.

35 Jab din huA faujdAn' ke hakimon ne piyAdon sc kahla bliejA, ki Un admion ko chhor de.

36 Tab qaid-VhAne ke dAroga ne

23 Aur unhen bahu t mArke uaJd-'Pulus ko is bdt ki khabar di, ki Fauj- khine men ddld, mir f]aid-khane ke diri ke hdkimorj m kahlA bliejd, ki darogaso tiikid ki, ki hari hoshyAi'i sc'iumhen chhor den: pas ab nikalke un ki nigahbaui kar. [salAmat chale jdo.

■'i Ub ne aiaA hukm pAke unhen 37 Par Pulua ne un se kahA, ki andar ke qaid-khdne roen dala, aur un Unhon ne hamen, jo Ri'imi hain, It;- ke pdnw kAth inen t.hok di'ye. |guuah sAbit kiye, logon ke sAmhne bet

"176

TasmhmUji Tahudion ka marke qaid men dald : aur tb ham ko chupko nikalte h;im? aisa na hogd ; baiki wc iip ake hamen nikal h; dialon.

38 Tab piyadon ne ye biiten faujddri ke hakimon ko suniin : jab unhon sund ki ltuuii hain, todar gaye.

39 Aur ake nun ruandyd, aur bahar lake miituat ki, ki shahr chale jaejj.

40 Tab wa qaid-khdne se nikalkc Ludid ke yahan gaye : aur bhdion. ku dekhke unhen nasihat ki. aur rawfi.na hde.

XVII BATI.

TAB we Amfipulis aur Apullonid ae guzarke Taswaluuinc mon, ja- liiih Yaluulion ka ck 'ibddatkli&iia tiba,

A' AM' AL, XVII. mmhn paT fttad uthdnd. karke kahte hain, ki bddshah to dilari bai, ya'ue, Yisu'.

8 So unhon ne logon, aur shahr ke sardamn ko, yib sunakc ghabrd diya. *9 Tab unhon ne Yasiin aur baqion se zamiu leku unhen ehhor diya. ■

10 f Li;kin bhdion ne usi dam ratotj rat Pulua aur Silau ko Barid shahr rnen bhej diya; we wahai] pahunchkc Yab.vn.Uoti ku 'ibadat-khaiie

4e:

2 Aur Pulus apuc dasttSr par o paa andar gaya, aur tin sablon niuvishton ki baton ka charcha un ke sdth kiva."

3 Ki un ka bhed kholta, aur dalil lake kahta tha, ki Zariir tha ki Masih dukh ufliavve, aur murdon men se ji ut^he ; aur ki yih Yisil', jia ki mai tur.ihen manadi kartd hun, wuhi Masi hai.

4 Tab un men so ba'zon ne min liyd, aur Pulua aur Silas ke aharik htic : aur Khudd-parast Ytindnion. ki bui jaina'at, aur bahuteri ashraf ' rnteii bhi.

5 U Par Yahud ion ne jo iman lie, dab ae bharke bdzdriou uien se kai ek shariron ko apue sath liya, aur hliir higakc shahr mcn hangarua kiyd, aur Y7asiiri ka <;har ghtrfee unhen dhundba, ki logon ke samlme khinch Idwen.

(i Aur jjib unhen na paya, to YasYin

aur kai bhdion ko shahr ke aarddron

■ Nilliito Jiiir kh'njc-h lio, ki Ye

ihutlu, jinhon ne jahdii ko ula| diya,

yaharj bai ae hain |

7 Un ki mibmaol Y daun ne ki ; aur we aab Qaisar ko hukrnon ki bar khilafi 177

ahdg. ke log TassaIuniqlon se nok-zat the ; ki unhoij ne bare sliauq se kaldm ko qabfil kiya, aur roz roe nawjfihton mon dhftndhte rahe, ki yo baten yilnhi hnin, ya nahirj-

12 ls waKtc babutere un men se iman Ue ; aur Yunani sharif 'auraten aur mard bhi thrtre na the.

13 Jab Taa9aiuniqe ko Y'ahiidiori no jana, ki Piilua Khuda k a kalam Baria rnen bhi sunata bai, to wahan bhi ake logon ko ubhara.

14 Tab bhlion ne filfaur Pulus ko rukhnat kiya, ki samundar ki taraf jae; lekirt Silas aur Titntaus wabig raho.

S Aur we jo Pdlus ki rahbari karte the, usio Ateni tak lae : aur Si]as aur Timtaua ke liye hukru leke ki jis jaldi se ho sake us ke jida awen, iswina hue.

16 1 Aur jis waqt Pulus AUni zn un ki nih lakta tha, jab u« ne

dek ha ki shahr butorj se bhara hai, to us ka ji jal gaya.

17 Ia iiyo wuh 'ibailaf-khine men Yabddiorj aur Khndd-parastorj se, aur chauk mL-n un j>e Jo ruz use milte the, bjiliss ksirta tha.

18 Tab kai Afquri aur BtoioJ '4Um uaae bahasne la«a, aur ba'zon ne kaha, ki Yih Ivakwasi kya kaba cbabti hai ? auron ne k.ib.i, Yih gair dewton ka kiiaiwr-donewala ma'ldm partdhai ; is liye ki wtih unhcrj Yisd' aur idydmat ki klui^hkhabiiri dcta, thd.

10 Tab we use pakar ke Ariupagus

MAh Ateni m*n A'AMA'L, XVIII. Injil m >dt&.

par 1« gaye, aur kahd, A'yd hameiiiki KhudA sono, rtipe, yd patthar ki rna'liim lio «akta hai, ki yili uayi maulud hai, jo ddmi ki liunar o tadbir ta'Ifni, jo td detd hai, kyd hai ? j bc gariie.

20 Kyilnki M\ lnundre kanon mr-ri SG Uaraz ki KhudA, jahalat ko anokhi batin pahunchiUd hai ! sohami wutog u tarah HjSu ah sah adrnlon jatid cfaahtc hai r, ki iu n kyd garaz ! ko kir jngftfe bukin deta, bai, ki tauba hai. karen :

21 (Ia wdste ki sare Ateniwaio aur inusifir jo wahdii rahd? thi', apiii ftmtt kd waqt, siwa nayi bat kahni aur Buniie ke, dfisre kam men iiahin katt* the.)

22 T Tab Piilus Ariupagits ke bich men kkani hoko boli, Ai Ateniwaio, main dokhta huij l;i tua har surat H dewton ko bnre pujncwale ho.

23 Kyunki main ne sair karte, aur tunilidro ma'budnn par nazar kartc bne, ek qiirbdugdh pai, jis par vih likha thd.ki NA'-MA'I.U'M KHUDA' KB LIYB. Pas jis ko tumbcraa'lum kiyo pnjte ho, main tuni ko lisi ki khabar deta hiin.

24 Khuda, ju ne dunya aur Bab kuchh p its men hai [Midi kiya, ji.s hiU ki wuh dsinan aur Uimin ka Malik hai, ]ia(h ki batuli hiii haikalon men nabig rahtd ;

25 Na adtoion ke lt&th se khidmat leta, goyd ki kisii chiz kd inuhtaj hai, kyimid wuh to dp sah ko zindagi aur sdn» aur tab kuclih bakhshtd hai

26 Aur ek hi lahu Re admi^ii ki sab qauinen tamdni zamin ki sath par basrte ke liye paidfi kin, aur tnuqarrar waoton, aur uu ki sukr.nat ki haddon ko thahravd ;

27 T:i. ki Kimddwand ko dhundh- cn, shdyad ki totolkar use pdwen, a;>arehi wuh bani rarti kisi m dur nahin :

2y Kyfirjki usf se ham jito, aur chalte phirto, aur maujud haig ; jaisd

tutnhdre i-hd'iron nwg ne kahd hai, ki Ha: hain-

31 Kyunki un ne ek din thahraya hai, jis men wuh ra^ti ae dunyd ki 'addlat kar. gd, u* ddmi ki ma'rilat, jise us no muqarrar kiyd; aur use murdoij men n ufhake yih bat sab par sabit ki.

32 \ Aur jab unhon ne nmrdon ke ji nthne ki bdt suni, to ba'/e thatllid indnio lage ; aur baV.on ne kaiid, b* ki babat Iiaiu tujh se phir Buncnge,

33 Tab Pdlus un ku dariuiyan se c ha Ia gaya.

34 Par kitnc admi ua se milke imdu Ide : un men Diunusius Ariu- [«i'.tis kd ek Galdhkar, aur Damaris name ek 'aurat, aur kai aur un ke sdth the.

XVIII BA'B.

BA'D us ke Pulus Ateni se rawdna hoke Qurintua men dyd. Aur wahdn Atjula ndme ek Ta- hfidi ko pdyd, jia ki paiddish Puntus ki thi, aur uiihin dinon apni joru Prisqilla ke adth Italia se dyd thd : (kyi'mki Qlaiidius u« hukm diya thd ki no Yahudi Ram se nikal jdwen :) so wuh un ke pas gaya,

3 Aur is liyc ki wuh un ka hani- pesha thd, un ke sdlh raba, aur kdro karue lagi : kyiinki un kd peslia kliaima-ihfzi thd,

4 Aurwuh har eabt k^'ibiiiiat-khanc men bahs kartd, aur yahiidion aur Yiindnion ko q^il karri thd.

5 Aur jab Silas aur Timidns Ma- qndviiiiya se dc, Piilua ji men majbdr

Wii ha'zoji.hfid, aur Yahlidiw ku dge gawdhi di

i hi ki nasi ' 1

IlBd' wnlu Masih hai. (j Jab wo inwjdbala karne, aur kul'r

29 Pas Khuda ki aasl boke hamen bakne lage, uh ne apne kapre jhdrke muudaib nahin ki yih khiyal karcnjun ae kahd, Tumhdrd khun tumhiri

Qt*rintttt mt.n vn'z binti A'AMA'L gardau par; main pAk hiirj : ab so gair-qaumon ki taraf jdiingd.

7 f Wahdn bc wnh chald, aur Jiistus ndmu KhudA-parast koghar, jo 'ibAdat-khdnc so mild thii, gayA.

8 Aur 'ihadat-khanckdBarddr Kris- pus, apTie tamani ghar samet, Khudd- wand par iuidu layd : aur baliut se Qunnti suiiku imftn Ide, aur baptisma paya.

9 Tab Khuddwand ne rdt ko roya men Ptilus sc kahA, Mat dar, par kanta ja, aur clnip na ho;

10 Is liye ki main tere sdth hurj, nur koi tujh se bad-sul&ki karno na

Cawega; kyiinki is ahahr men mere ahut log kain.

11 So wuh derh bara« wahdn tha- barko u n ke darmiyau Khudd kd kaldni aikhdtA rahA.

12 ■( Aur jab GAllio Akhaia ka Bdba tlid, Yahudi ekd karkc Pi'ilus |iar charh Ae, aur usc 'adAlat men le gaye,

13 Aur kahA, Yih ahakha logon ko bahkdtA ki shari'at ke barkhildf Khudd ki jorastish harem

14 Aur jubPufusiiccbdhdkimunb khole, Gilho ne Yahudion w kabd, Ai Yahudio,agar kuchh mim ydshararat hoti, to* wajib thd ki main sabr karko tunihirf suntA;

15 Par agar yih suwal tutnhdrl ta'lim, aur rjdmon, aur sbari'at ke hann men hai, to tam bi jAno; kyi'mki main nahin chdhtA ki aisi h&ton ki raunsif hiin.

16 Aur ua no unhen 'addla-t-gAh ae nikdl diyd.

17 Tab eab Yimdnioii ne 'ibddflt- khdne ke sardAr Sostanes ko pakarke 'adalat-gah ke sdmhnc mara. P: GAllio nu in baton fei kuchh parwd na ki.

18 ^ Aur jab Piilus aur bhi baliut din wahdn rahA thd, tab bhdiun se rukhsat hoke, aur Qankrid men air uiundake, kyiuiki m ne tuaunat mini

' 179

XY[II. Apullus ki ioa'z foi.r„6.

thijahd/ par Suriya ku rawdnd lmn, aur Pritwulld aur Aujili. us ke &tith the.

L9 Aur Alasus men pahunehke us qa milieij wahin Dhhofd : aur dp 'iba- dat-kkduomenjdko Ya'ktidion se bdten kiri.

20 Tab unliorj ne ua se darkhwdst lu, ki mu kurhh din uu ku Batil rahe, par us ne na nidnA;

21 Baiki uu m; yih kahke rukksat liiid, ki bar hal men iiuijhe zanit hai ki Yarusaliim mm 'id i iyanda ko kanin; par agar Khud.i clidlie.to tum- bare pds pbir aungd. Aur Afasus se jaliaK par sawir boko cbala.

22 Aur Qaisariya men utarke Ujiar cbarh gayd, aur jab kaliajye se ^nldiii lialni tfni, Aatikiya ko utar gaya.

23 Aur kuchh diu rahku wahij K rawdnd hi'id, aur Galatiya aur Frdgiya ke m u Ikon men barabar i-u/urta, aur

b shdgirdon ko rjHpviyat deti fiMTd.

21 % Aur Apullua udnie ek Yahu- di, jiaki paidiisb Iskaudaria ki thi, jo zuhAii-dwarsliakJiHaur pdk nawishtoij men barA qdbil thd, Al'asus iuuii pa- huneba.

25 Is abjjfhi uv rpufcUwaad ki rah ki tarbiyat pai thi ; aur dil meu sar- ^arm lioke kalam karta, aur sihhal se rpmd&wand ki Mten «ikbAtA tha, piirsjirrYdbiiimAUAbaptiama jdntdtha,

2R Wuh ibAddt-klidne men be-dba- rak Imlue lagi: aur Aqnli aur Pria- i[illd ne, us ki suake use apoa tath liyA, aur us ko Khudd ki rah ziyada durusti se batdi.

27 Jab uh ne Akhaia niea utar jdne kA irdtla kiyd, to bhaion ue shAgirdou ko likhkc darkhwast kf ki us ko tjabul karen : us ne walian j>ahunclike un ki, jo fezl ke sabab im;in lae the, baii madad ki :

28 Kyurjki uu no pak namahtcig se sdhit kurke ki yih Yisii' wuh Masih l.ui, Yaiiddii'ii ki> sah ke age bari- zor shur xv ijdil kiyd.

Putus ke hdth m A'AMA'L, XIX.

xix ba'h.

AUB aisA Mi, ki jab Apullun Qurintii8 mon thA, Pilus lipnr ke mulkon bc guzarke Afaaua men AyA, aur kaf ahAgirdon ko pAko,

2 Un sg kalia, Kya tom ne, jab h iniAn 16«, Biih i Quds pai ? Unhorj ne nae kahA, Hara no to suni blii nahin. ki KiUi i Quds hai.

3 Ua no uu sk kuini, Pas tu.ni ne kia kA baptitiiiia paya? Wo bola, ki Y'ubannA kii baptiama,

4 Tab Piilua ne kaili, YuhannA no to tauba k£ baprisma diyi, logon ae y i b kabte hue Vi ua par jo ttum pi- chhe AtA hai, ya'ne liati' par, hnAn lawen,

5 tJnlion ne yib aunkarKhudawand Tisii' ke nAui par baptiama pAyi.

6 Aur jab TMIus ne un pat hath rakhe the, Ruh i Quds un mr Ai, aur tarah tarah ki ziibAuun bolne aur nubdwat karne lage.

7 We sab ddnii barali «k the.

8 Aur wali 'ibadat-kbAne mag jAke bo-dharak bolta, aur tin mahinon. tak bahs k'arta, aur KhudA ki liAdahihat ki bAtcti unhen samjhAt.A rahA :

9 Ltskin jab ba'zon ko dil sakht ho gaye, aur we be-imAn luie, baiki log* uii ku aAmhne ih rAli ko buni kahnc liigo, Ui ne un se kiiuire hoke elia-

?'irdon, ko ala» kiyA, aur bar roz kisi urannus nAme ko madrase merj bahs karii thA.

10 Tih do bara» tak hotA rahA ; aisa ki Asia ko sab rahnewalon no, kyd Yahudi kyd Yunani, KliudAwand Ti»ti' ka kuldni aumi.

11 Aur KhudA Pulus ke hAtaon as bare bare nm'ajize dikhAtAthA;

12 YahAn tak ki niniAl aur patke us ke badan ko ehhuwake biinAron par dAlte the, aur un ki hiraAriAn jAti ra.lit.iii, aur buri n'ihen uu se uikaljati thin.

13 K' Tab ba'ze AwAra jhArne pln'ink- newAle Yahudion ne iklu.ivAr kiyA ki

180

Ruh ka milna, uti par, jin iiieu buri n'ihoii samAi thin, Khudawaud Yisii' kA nAm phunkke kaheg, ki Ilam tuai ku UI Yla£' ki qasam dete hain, jis ki I'ulua umiiadi

Kartii bai

14 Aur un map Sqera Yahudi sar- dAr kAhin ko &&t beto the, jo yib. karte the,

15 Tab btiri ruh ne jawAb men kaliA, ki Yisii' ko main jAtitA, aur Pilus m bhi waqif hiiii ; l>ar tum kaun ho?

16 Aur wiih sbaklis, jis par buri nih thi, un par lapkA, aur galib Ako un par aisi ziyAdatl ki, ki wo natige aur ghAyal us gbar ae bha^e.

1" Aur yih bat sab Yahudion aur Y'iinauion ko, jo Afaaus niun mhte" the, tna'lum hui ; tab nabhon. merj dar samAyA, aur Kbudawand Yinu' ke nAin ki buzurgi ki gayi.

18 Aur bahuteron ne un men se, jo iman lAe tbe, ake apne kArnon ko qabul diyA, aur zAbir kiyA j

19 Aur luihutorj ne, jo jidiigari karte the, apni kitAbtn ikatthi karke sab logon ke Age jala din ; aiir jab un kC qiniat kA hiaAb kiyA, to pacliaa bazArrupiya t lin.li rt.

20 lui tarah Khud&wand ka kalAm uihayat barli gayA aur galib IiuA.

21 T Jab yih lio cliuka, l'iilua ne apne dil men t.bAtiA, ki Maqadimiya aur Akhaia se hoke Yaru&alam merj jAiin, aur kahA, ki WahAn jAne ko ba'd Iliiro ko bhi mujhe deklinA zarrir hai.

22 So un merj ho, jo us ki khidmat karte the, do nhaklis TimtAuK aur AraatuH ko Maqaduniya mag bhejko Ap kuchh din Asia men raba.

1'S Aur us waqt is riin ki babat bara fasAd uthA.

24 Ky6nki Demefehu iiaino ek bu- nAr jo Artamis ke rupable niandir banAta thA, aur u a ]ioshawAlon k o bahul kannva detA thA;

25 TJs ne un ko, aur gairon ko jo

Bumeiriu» Pulim par A'AMA'L, XX. fasiid harpa kartu.

wabd kilin karte the, jam'a karke ki Afasion kd nhahr ban devi Artamis kaha, ki Ai miirdo, tuni iante lio ki ki, nur us mirat ki Jo Zeua ki taraf se harndri fardgat isi kara ki badattlat giri, pi'ija-karnewdld hai ? hfH. 36 Pas jab koi m baton ku khildl

26 Aur tum dekhtu aur aunte ho nahiy. kali sakta, to wajib lini ki linu kl sirfAiasus men nabirj, baiki tamani thanie raho, aur be soche kuchh na ' 'karo.

37 Kyiinki ye mani jin ko turnya- hdn Ide, na mandir ke chor, na nun- hdri devi ke nimbi-karnewale hain,

38 Pas agar Deinetriua aur us ke haiii-pesha kisd par da'wd takhta bon, to 'audlat kiuili bai, aur Su.be haitlie

Asia ko aarib mon, ie 1'oIub ne bahut se logon ko targib dckar gumrdh kar diyd nai, ki kahtd hai, yili Jo hatli ke bando bain Khuild nahfn hain.

27 So Url yilii khatra nahin, ki hamdrd pesha be-qaar ho jde, baiki bari den Artamis kii mandir bUi , . _ jiiehi/. liu jde, aur us ki buzurgi, jiau hain: ek duBre par ndliah karen.

tamani Asia aur airi dunya piijti hai, jati rahc.

3W Par jis surat mcij tum kol aur bat tahqiq karne chahte ho, to dini

28 Jab unhoii no yih Bima, to gusne majlis men faisal hogd.

bhar gaye, aur chillakc kaha, ki Afttffan ki Artamis bari bai.

29 Aur i.;un;un ihidDf men balwa hua: aur Bab niilke CJahis aur Aris- tarkhus ko, jo, Magadouly» ke ralinc- wale aur l'tilus ke ham-safar the, pakarke tamashaedh ko daure.

30 Aur jab Pulus ne chahd ki log- on. ko darmiydn jdOj to shdgirdori ne iise jdne na diyi.

31 Aur Asia ke buzurgorj men se ba'aon ne, jo us ke dost the, us ke pas ddmi bhejke minnatki ki tamdshagdh men niat jd.

32 Aur bata kuchh ohillAe, aurba'- ze kuchh : kyunki jania'at barham darliain lio gayi tbi ; aur aksaron ne na jand ki baui kis liyo ikat^he huo hain.

33 Tab unhon ne Sikandar ko, jisa Yahudi dhakiyatethe, liliir inen se? kar diyd. Aur Sikandar ne lidth ishdra karke e-ha-hd ki logon ke sdnibne 'uzr kare.

34 Par jab unhon ne j&nd kt wuh Yahudi hai, to &ab ham-dwaz hoke do ghante ke qarib chilldte rahe, ki Afa- sion ki Artamis bari hai.

35 Aur jab ahanr ke muharrir logon ko tbandhd kiyd, to kabd, Ai Afasia, kami Admi bal jo nabin jduta

181

40 Kyiinki harami khatra hai ki iij ko liahve ke Waste akta pir ndlisb ho, isliyeki koi sabab nabin k i jis SC hara ia hangame kd jawdb de saken.

41 Aur yih kabke inajlia ko bar- khwdst kiyd.

XX BA"B.

JAB bullar uiauqilf hua, I'dlus ne sbdgirdoa ko bulako unbon sa- Idm kiyd ; tab wnhan tio raw&na hiia, ki Maijaduniya ko jae.

2 Aur un atrdf se guzarke, aur urihen bahut nasihat karke, Ydudii men dyd,

3 Aur tln mahitum tak wahdrj rahil. Phk jis waqt jahds par Suciya merj jdno ko tbd, Yahudi ua ki ghit men lage : tab um ki yih italah hul, ki Ma- qaduniya ki nih Ke phire.

4 Aur Sopatrun Haridi, aur Aris- tarkhuti aur Sikiin<luN, jo Tassaluniqe ko ' the, aur Gaius Darbe kd, aur TimlauB, aur Tukhikus aur Tnit'mius, jo Asia Ite tbc, Asia tak us ko sdth gaye.

5 Wc ige jdke hamdre liye Troaa men thahre.

B Aur fatir ke dinon ke ba'd liam Pilippi se jahdz pir rawana boko panoli i.l i 1 1 ke 'nrso men Troda men un

PtBvs A/afus ke •jiasisoii. lu. A'AMA ke pas pahuuclit; ; aur sAt din waktu thahre.

7 Aur hafte ke pahlc din, jab shA- L'in) r* -ti topM ko ikattho Ae, Puitis ne, ki dnare di'n jane ko thA, ini ko Bath kalam kiyi, aur apiul kalam Adhi rat tak barhAya.

8 Aiir us bilikhdne par, jahAn wo ikatthe thc, haluit uliirag jal ruLe.

S Anr Yiitakhus udin ek jawAn khirki jiar baithA thA; usko ban nind Af ; BU jab Palui dor lak biten kaita ralid, wuh mAre nind ke jhukko tinrc darje kg niche gir pard, aur murda utbAyd gaya.

10 Tab Pulne utnrke oh Upa^ gayA, aur galo lagake kaka, Siat ghabrAo; kyunki us ki jdn us mcrj bai.

11 Aur uparjAkeroti ton, aur khdko ittii der tak un se bAUm kartA rabd, kf bbor ho gnyi ,- isi tarah se wuh i'halA gayA.

I 'J Aur wc us jawan ko jttd Ide, aur nihAyat khAtirjarn'a htie.

13 ^ Aur hara jaluiz pol Acu AaSUB ke gaye, i? irAdo par ki wahAn Pulus k ' atuie wilb cliarhii b'n, kyinjki wuh wabari paidal jAno ka i rada karke yiSn fartnd gayA thA.

14 Jab wuh Ausun mcu hamerj niihi, hain usu cliarhdku Mitulene meji de.

1.1 Aur wahaij se jahil kholke dnsn diri Klinis ke ertinhiif Ae; aur tisre r#n Samus men dikail hiie; aur TroguUbun raon luarjAret karke ek diu ke ba'd Miletus men ae.

1G Kyunki PAlta us (bani thA ki Afcus ae guzar jde, aini na bo ki us ko Asia men rabnc ae der lage: is liye ki wuh jul.ii kartA thA, ta ki agar us se ho sake, to Pantek ust ko diu ko Yanisahtm nwu ^t6,

17 T Aur us ae Milctus sn Afnsua men kakld bbeike kaliniye ke bu- zurgoii ko buinya.

18 Aur jab wu di ko pai Ae, to un- hejj kalia, Tum jauto ho ki pahle diu bc jis ruen main Asia men AvA,

183

L, XX. «osi'Aac tarif,

ki* tarah har watit tumhdrc aAth rahd;

l'J Ki kamAl farotaui aur Angrion ke Hdth, aur uri Azmdishon ko nahke jin men Yahiidion ku ehat lagtne bo main phaoad tlid, KhudAwand ki khidmat kartA raha :

20 Ki kyi'inkar main. ne koi bit, jo tumbAro fAida ki dii, rakii na dibori : baiki tumben khabar di, aur tum "ko jamd'at men aur ghar ghs? sikhAi j

21 Aur Yahudion aur YunAnion ko sdnihue gawdhi di, ki Khudi ke Age tauba karo, aur hantare Khudawand Yi.-ii' ICatfb uar i mau lio.

22 Aur ab, dekbo, main ruh kd bandbii Yonisaliuji ko jdtd Jnin, aur ualun .jAntA ki wahdg mujli par kyi guzregA :

23 Magar itud, ki Bub i Quds bar sbabr meii yih kalike gawAbt detl hai ki qaid a uiuaibat mero liye UiivAr baig.

24 Lckin main uso kucbb nahiri ia- majhta, na apni jdn ko 'ani/, rakhta, ki apnA daura aur wuh khidmat bbi, jo main ne KhudAwand Yisd* ae pAi, ki Kliud:! ke fazl ki Injil pai gawahi dAn, khuslii su pura katun.

25 Aur ab, dekho, main jantd hiin ki tum sab, jin ko darmiyAn main KhudA ki bAdshAbat ki maiiAdi kartt phira, mcrA munb phir ua dokhoge.

20 Pas main aj ke din tumben avtfb nkhU lu'uj, ki main sab ko khun se pAk hur.

27 Kyunki main KhudA ki flAri maslahat Tunihen snuAno so biz n raiiA.

28 % Pas apni aur us sire galk ki khaburddri karo, jis par Bfih i Qud« ne. tumben nigahbdn thahrAya, ki KliudA ki kalisiyu ko, jiac us ne apue hi lahu we mol liyA, chardo.

29 Kyunki main yih jautA hiin ki mero jArie ke ba\l [jliaraewAle lilirriye tumhdre dnrniiyAn dwcnge, jiuhori galla par kuchh tara na AwogA.

Piilus Ya n't salam men A'AMA'

30 Aur khurt ttno merj so ddmi uthenge, ju ulti batrii kahensp\ ki dkAtprdeg ku ftpnf taraf kliiuch len.

31 ls liye jagte mho, aur yid ra- kho ki main tin baras rat, rlin ru rokc bar ek ko chitdne sg baz na dyd.

32 Ai bhiiio, ab main tu.mb.en Khu- da nur us ke fsujl ke kaum ko somptd, hiirj, j.i ki tumben kdmil knr «akta hai, aur sarn muqaddason men miras ik1 sakti.

33 Main ne kisi ke. riipo, yd sone, ya kapri; kd Idlach nahm kiyd.

84 lialki tum a p jdntc bn ki iiilun hdthon ne meri nur men sitbion ki zaniratan raf'n kiri.

35 Main ne sab b&ten batdm, ki yiin hi milmat karke kamz-oron ki madad karnd, aur Khuddwand Yisu' ki bdten rfd rakhua, zanir hai, ki us ne kabsi, Dcna lene se mubarak hai.

30 J Aur us ne yih kahke ghntnc teke, aur uu sah ke sath du'd mdugi.

37 Aur wc sab bahi.it roe, aur Piilus ke gale se Ing la^ko uge chuninc lage,

38 Aur khdsskar ia bdt par gamgin hne, jo us ne kahi thi, ki Turn BMf£ munh pbir na dokhoge. Aur unhon ne «se jahaz tak pahunchdya.

XXI BA'B.

AUR aied hiid, ki jab hain un se mushkil se judi boks rawan» hfio th*\ U' w'dbi rah Qi'ia inen de, aur diisre din Rudus, aur wnhan se Pateri men,.

2 Aur ek jahdz Fim'cm ko jdte bt'ie pako us par charlic, aur rawdna hue.

3 Aur jab Kuprus nazar dyd, «se baen hdth chhorkar Suriya ko chalo, aur Siar meti lagdyd: kyunki wabdn jaha/ kd bojh niirud thi.

i Aur jab shdgird khojne se mile the, to ham &&t PM wahari rahe : unhon ne Ruh ki raa'rifat Piilus se kalid, ki Yarusalam ko na jdna.

5 Par haru «n dinon ku purd karke nikle, aur cbalo gaye ; aur sabhon «o joriion aur larkon samt'.t dialir ke bdhnr 183

L, XXI. phirjdtd.

tak ham ko pahunchdya ; aur ham ne samundar ke kandre par ghutue tekko du'd mdiigi.

6 Aur ham ek dusrc se widd' hoke jahaz par charhe; aur wo npne apno gbar ko phire.

7 Aur ham Sur ro jabdz kd safar tamdin karko I'tulamais men pa- hunehe, aur bJi&iog ko salam karke ek din «n k? sath rahe.

8 Ihisrc din Prilus aur ham,jo us ke sdthf the, rawdna hoke Q,aisany;i men de: aur Failbiin khush-khabari deupwdlo ke yalidn, jo un aaton men bc tha, utarko us ke sdth rahe.

9 Aur us ki char kunwdri betidn t-hin, jo nubswiit karti thijj.

10 Aur j-»b ham wuhdn babut roz ralic, A-abus Edme ok nabi Yahudiya se utar dyd.

11 TTs ne hamdro pds dke Ptilus kd kamartmnd uthd liyd, aur apnc hdlh pdmv b:aidliki! knlid, Hrih ul Quds yi'nj kahti hai, L's mard ko, jis kd yih kjimnrband Jini, Yahudi Y'arnsalam men yiinhin bandherjge, aur gair- (p/amog ke bdthon incn hnwdla kar- engc.

12 Jab yih sunil, to ham nc aur wahdn ko logon ne us ki minnat ki ki Yarusalam ko niv jdwe.

13 Tar Puitis nc jawab diyd, ki Tum k ya karte ho, ki rote aur mori dil torte ho? kyunki main na sirf bdndhe jdne, baiki Yarusalam meu Kiiudiiwand Yi™' ko ndm pu matitie k'o bhi taiydr lnin.

14 So jab us no na mdnd, to ham yih kahko chup rahe, ki Jo Khudd ki uiarzi ho.

15 Aur un dinoj) ke ha'd ham npne safar ke asbdb ko taiydr karke Yuru- ailam k o gaye.

16 Aur bisanya se kai ek sh;igird bamdre satli chale, aur h&meg Mnason Kuprusi ek qadini shigird ke pas la gaye, ki ham us ke yahan inihmdn hone ko tbc.

We u» par hamla karte. A'AMA1

17 Aur jiil) ham Yartisahiin mei} pahuncho, bhaioij ne khushi se hanien ([aliri 1 kiya.

18 Aur ilusro din Puhishamdre sdth Ya'qiib ke pas gayd ; aur sab buzurg wahdn ikatt.ln; tfio.

19 Aur lis ne unherj salam karke, jo kuchh Khuda ne un ki khidmat ku wasile gair-qaumon men kiya tha, murasaal haydn kiya.

20 Aur unhon ne yih sunke Khu- ddwand ki sitaisli ki, aur vs ko kahd, Ai bhai, tu dekhtd hai ki Y&hiidion men se kitne hazdr haiij jo iman Ide: aur sab shari'at ke gairatmand hai n.

21 Aur unhon ne tore haqq mag khabar pai, ki tu sab Yahudlon ko, jo gair-qaunion ke darmiyan rahto hain, sikhata hai ki Musa se phir jaen, ki kahta hai, Apue larkon ka krmtns niat karo, na aharfat ke dasturon par chalo.

22 Ab kyd karun? Ing bo-shnkk kasratsc jam 'a honge ; kyunki sunenge ki t u ay-a hai.

23 s', i yih kir, jo ham tujh se kahte hain; HamAru pas char mard hain, jinli'-n nii/.r adA karui hai;

24 Unhen leke dp ko un ko sdth pak kar, aur uu ko liyo kuchh kharch kar, ta ki we apnd air mundAwcn: to wab janerjge ki jo baten bani ne tere haqq mon suni hain, su kuchh nahin ; baiki td ap bhi shari'at ko hifz karke durust etialtd hai,

25 Parjogair-qaumon men se iman lio, un ki babat ham ne Umbraku Hkha hai, ki we aisi aisi baten ua maneg: magar buton ko charhdwe, aur lahii, aur gala ghonti bui ohtepfe aur haranikdri se, ap ko mahfuz «kli- en.

~2G Tab PAlui un ruardon ko leke, aur dusre din ap ko un ku sdth pak kurku, haikal men dakhil h^d, aur khabar di ki pak karne ke diu, jab tak ki ia uien. se har ek ki uazr na charhai jae, pfire kareiige. 184

L, XXI, QiVa ka sarddr use bachaiii. | 27 Par jab aat din pure hone par the, Aaia ke Yahildion n e use hai k a 1 men dekhke sah loguii ko ubhdrd, aur us par hath dale,

28 Yon "chillako ki, Ai Israelj mardo, madad karo ; Yih wuhi admi hai, jo aab ko har jngah qaunt ke, aur shari'at ke, aur li makan ke khilaf sikhdtd lini : aur 'a lava ia ke Yunanion ko blii haikal meii laya, aur ia pak makan ko napdk kiya hai.

29 (Kyiitjki uiilinn ue ajje Trufinms A faai ko u» ke sdih shnhr men dekhd tha, jis ki babat unhon ne kbiydl kiyi, ki Pulus us ko haikal mon laya tha.)

30 Aur tamdm shahr men hangdma had, aur los daurke jam'a hilo; aur Pfilus ko pakarke haikal ke biliar ghafiitd; aur filfaur darwaze baud kiye gayo."

31 Aur jab we us ka qatl ke darpai tho, fauj ke sardar ko khabar pabun- chi, ki tamdm Vnrusala'm mett huilar ho rahii hai.

W' uh usi dam aipdhion aur au- baiiaron ko leke un par daurd : aur wo sarddr aur sipdhfon ko dpkhkc Piilus ke m Ani t.1 se hiz do.

Tab sardar no nazdik dkc uso giriftar kiya, aur do zanjinm sebdudh- no kd hukni diya ; aur puebhd, ki Yih kaun kai, aur us ne kya kiyd ?

34 Aur bhir racn ae ba'ze kuchh chillde, aur 1 '.iV, ■ kuchh : so jab shor

gul ke sabab kuchh haqiqat daiyaft na kar sakd, to hukm diya, ki Use qil'a men le jao.

35 Aur jab sErhi tak pahunehd, tu logon ke hujam ke sabab aipdhion ko use iitliaua para.

__ Kyurjki dangal cliilldta hua us

ke piekhe pard, ki Use utha dai.

37 Aur jab Piilus ko qil'a ke andar

jdoe bn, us ue sarddr se kabd, Kyd

ujbe ijdzat hai ki tujh se kuchh

kahiin? Us no kabd, Kyd Yunani

jdntd hai ?

Pilus layan' karta

38 Pas tu wuh Mieri nahin, jo iri dinon *o Age fanod uthAke un chAr bazar dakuon ku jan^a! men le gavA ?

39 £q1ub iie kahA, ki Main Yahudi Adini nun, Qiliqiya ke shaiir Tarsus nAme ki, jo kam mashhiir nahin hai, rahnewala hun ; main teri minnat kartd hiin, ki ratrjhe logon ae boluc ki ijazitt do.

40 Jab i«s ne use ijAzat di, Pfilue ne airlii par khare hoke togOBj ko Mtb se isfiArakiyd. Jab eab cnup chdp hi<c, wuk 'Ibrani z uban men bomfl lagd.aur kaki,

XXII BA'B.

Al bhASo, aur ai aba, mera 'uzr jo ab tuui M kartd hiit} sana.

2 Jab unhon no annA ki 'Ibrani zubAn rnen un M bolta hai, to aur bhi chup huo. S. i iis ne kahd,

3 Main to Yahudi admf hun, QiU- q>ya ke sbahr Tarsus men twiidd hiU, lekjn isi shahr men mori parwarit>h mil, nur Gamaliel ke aadamon par bapdadoii ki shari'at ki birffctcirj mes tarbiyat pdi, aur KhudA ko liyo aisa gairatiuand tha, jaise tum aib dj ko diri lio.

4 Chundnchi main ne mardon aur Guratan ko bamlbke aur qaii.}-kbaiic men dAlke is tariqa-\vAl<in koniaut tak satAyd.

5 Baiki sardar kabin, aur huzurgon ki s4ri jama'at, bhi mero gawAh hain : ki un se main tahimu ke liye kbatt loke Dimishq ko rawana hiiA, ki jitne wahAn bon, unhen bhi bandlikc Yarii- sakm men lilin, ta ki saza paivon.

6 Par jab main chala jAti, aur Dimishq ke nazdik pahuiicha thd, to aisi hf.d, ki do pahar ke qarib cki-ek bara nur Asmat, so mere girdAgird ckarnka.

7 Aur main zarnin par gir pari, aur AwAz suni, jo mujhe kabti tbi, ki Ai fitilus, Siilua, tti inujlio kviui satata hal?

8 ilain ne jawAb diyft, ki Ai Khu-

185

A'AMA'L, XXII. ki kyunkar mwid k&d.

dAwand, tii kauo hai? Us nc mujh .-t- kiil.a, Main Yisii' Nisan hi'nj, ji.st- tu Balita W.

9 AurmeresAthionne nurtodekhd, aur dar gayc; lekin us ki awaz, Jo mujhe bulat» thA, na suni.

10 Tab main ne kalis, Ai Khudd- wand, main kyikaruri? Khud'awand ne niujh se kaiti, Uth, aur Dimifchq mcrj jji; wahan Kib' kuclih jo tere ksite ki; liye muqarrar huA hai, tujho kahi jSega.

11 Aur jab main us mir ke jalai fce sabab na dekh sakA, to apne sAtbion ke mere hit h tbAmbno ac main Dimishq men AyA.

12 Aur Hautiniah ndm ok tnanj, jo shari'at ke muwifia <limliir, aur wahan ke Hb rahncwilo Yabudion ke nazdik nek-iiiiin thA,

13 Mere pas AyA, aur kbare hnke lujhe kaba, Ai bhai Silius, phir binA o. Aur usi gbari main ne us par

nigAli k S.

14 Aur us ne kahA, HamAre bAp- dadon ke KJiudA ne Lujh ko Age se barguzidaki.ya,ki tu tu ki niarni jAne, aur us KAstbdz ko dekbe, aur us ke muiih ki awdz auno ;

15 Kyunki t^ uskeliyesabAdmion ke Agc uu bAton ki, jo tii ne dekhfii",

r sunin, gawAh hogA.

10 Aur ab kytm der karta hai? uthke baptisma le, aur KbudAwm.] kA nam lgke apno gunihon ko dho dil.

17 Aur jab main Yarusalam men pbir AyA, aur haikal nten dn'A mAngtA thA, aisd hiia, ki main bekbud ho BW< ;

18 Aur na ko dokhA, jo mujho kahtd thA, Jaldi kar, aur shitab Yanisalam so nikal jd; kytinki teri gawdhi mere haqq men ipjn'il na karengc.

19 Aur main ne kaha, Ai Khtidi- wand, wo Ap jAnte h ain ki" main unben, jo tujh par iman Ide, qaid

Pulm bayan harta A'AMA'L, XXIII.

karla, aur har ek 'ibddat-khdne mvQ koro mdrtd thd :

20 Aur jab tere sbahid Staliinus kd khiin bahaya gityd, main bhi wahdn k Lara, aur us ke qat I par ra>,i tha, aur tis ku aatilon ko kapron ki khabarddri karti tha.

21 Aur us ne miijli H kahd, Ja, ki main tujhe {jair-qaunion ku pas diir bhejiirj^d.

22 We isi bdt tak uh ki sun rahe tab apni Awaz buland karke ciiilliic, ki Aise ko ramin par ko uthd dai, ki us ka jit-a raknd muuiihili uahhj.

23 Aur jab we chilldte, aur apno kaprc phciiktc, aur khdk nrato the,

24 Sard»r no hukm diya, ki Use qil'a niog le jdwen, aur faniiiiyd, ki Use kore marka azmawtii ; ta ki use ma'liim ho ki we kis sahab us ki zidd mm yt'ijj chillde.

2o Jab we use tasmon eo jakarte the, Piilus nc uh mibaddr sg, jo pds kbard tha, kaba, Kyd tumben jain hai ki ok ddmi ko, jo Riimi aur bc- qusur hai, kore maro ?

26 Subadar yili sunke aftyi, aur sarddr ko khabar di, aur kaha, Kha- bardar, tu kyd kiyd chalita hai kynuki yib ddmi Bdtni hai.

L'7 Aur fiarddr ne pas ake tu ko kaha, Mujbe linl-il, kyd tii Kuini hai? Uh qo kahd, Hdn.

28 Bardar u-' jawdh diya, ki Main ne bahut naqd deke yih rutba hasil kiyd. Pfilus ne kaha, Main tu alat hi puida lu'ia.

2!i Filfaur we, jo us ko dzniaya chdhto the, us ee ban ac; aur sarddr bhi, yih jdukar ki wuh TCumi hai, aur main ne use bdndhd, dai gayd.

30 Subh, ko ia irdua sc ki haqiqat ko jdne, ki Yahudi us par kyd da'wd rakhu: hain, ub ki Banjirag kholin, aur hukm diya, ki aardar kabin aur uu ki

ki ky-unkar murid Aiii't. XXIII BA'B. rjlAB P&lus ue Sadr Majlis ki taraf

I nazar karke kahd, Ai bhdio,

main aj tak kamal liikniyati m Khuda ke huzur chald.

2 Tab sarddr ktihin Flandnidh ne un ko, jo ub ko pas k hara the, Imkm diya, ki Us ke lnunh par thaperd mdren.

3 Tab Fulua no us ko kaha, Khudd tujhe maregd, ni sul'edi pheri hui diwdr: kyd ui hai thd. hai, ki shari'at kt- MHivviiti'j inera, infsdf ka», MI shari'at ko barkhildf mujlie rodrne ka hukm deta hai'?

4 Unlum no, jo pdfl khare the kahd, Kyd ni Khuda ko sardar kdhiu ko burd-kahtkhai?

5 Piilus nekaha, Ai bhdio, main ue na jana ki sarddr kahin hui ; kyunki likhi liai, ki Apni riaum ke sarddr ko burd mu t kau.

6 Aur Pulus yih janke ki ba'ze Sadiiqi aur ba'za Fariwi hain, Majlis men pukdrd, ki Ai bhdio, nuig Pa- risi, aur Farisi kd betd hiin ;

nilirdog kl babat umraed aur i|iy;i- niat ke sabab mujh j>ar ilzdm iiiti

iota

7 Jab us ne yib kaha, Farision aur Raduijiou men kikrdr hui : aur Majlis nioii plult pari.

y Kyunki Saduqi to kahte haig, ki qiydmat nahin, aur na iirislita, na ruh hai : par Fanai donon kd iqrdr karte hain.

9 Aur bard shor hud : aur FarUiou ko firqo ke fnqih uthe, aur yun kahke jhflgarne lage, ki Ham is ddtni men kuchh burdi nalitn pdte hain ; ]iar agar kifi ruli yd nrishte ne is se kaldm kiyd lin, to ham Khuda sc na lareii.

10 Aur jab bari takrir hiii, to sar- lar ne, is khauf sc ki inabadd Pulus u n

phara jawe, fauj ko hukm diyd, ki

Bari Badr Majlis jam'a howen; phir.Utarke use un ke liicli B6 zabardnsti

Piilus konSche le jake un ke bieh ineri nikdle, aurqiramcn le dwt*.

khard kiyd. | 11 Aur uni rat K huddwand ne us ke

Pulvs Sadr Mujtis ke age A'AMA'L, XXIII.

pas dke kaha, Ai Tulus, klidtir-jnrii'a

rakli : ki jaisa tii iic raeri bdbat Yani-

Mtam nien gawdhi di, waisa lii tujlii

1 Btiin mca bhi (jawabi dena zariir hai.

1L' Aur jab iJin luU, ba'ze Yahudion ne ckd karkc la'nat ki qasani khiU, aur kalut, ki Juli tak liam Tiilus ko nal! na kartm, mi kuclih khdegge na jiicijge.

18 Aur we, jinhon no dpas men yili pu mi kMf, ciiafiH so ziyai.ia tho.

14 So unhoij ne sarddr kahinoij aur buaurgon ke pas jake kuli», Haru ne la'nnt ki aanm khai, ki jab tak Palu* koqati na karen, kuehli nachakhorjge.

16 l'as ab tuni Sadr Majlis warnet

':■■ sardar se 'arz karo, ki IcaJ «u»

ure pas la.vc, p iya tum uh ki

i i ilr ki Laqfqat ziyada darvali fBji, chAlit*- ho : par ham taiyar hain ki us ke pahuuche ae pahlo use haldk karen,.

16 Aur Puitis kd bhdnjd im ki «hat ka hal Biinkc chaltt, aur qil'a men jake PtUuskokhaKu di.

17 Tab Piilus ne subaddron men. se pk ko bulakc kana, Ia jawdn ko sardar ku pas le jja ; ki wuh ubc kucbh kahd ohahta lif.i.

18 Pm wuli nse aardar ]ias le gflya, aur kahd, Piilus qaidi ne mtrjbe apne

E as bahikc darkhwdat ki, ki is jawan ci tere pas latin, ki tujh so kuchh kaha clialita hai.

19 Tah aardar nc us ka hath pa- karke, aur uae alag le jdke, jnidilia. 'k i W uh kvd hai, jo mujh se kala chahta hai?

20 Vb no kaha, Yahudion ne cka k iya hai, ki tujh sc diirkliwist karen, ki k:il l'iilus ko Sadr Majlis men, Idwe, §a?i kj we ns ke Ml kiaur bhi tahqi- qai kiya chdhtu hain.

21 Pas tu un ki namaniyo, kyiiiiki un merj chaiis shakhs se ziyada us ki AU mem lage hain, iiiiiii.u nc h'nat

... ..... M.'";: L_i i.: I.

ah t.'iiyar, |

hazii- kota, r tere wa'da ke muulazir

haiij.

22 Tab sardar ne jawdn ko rukh- sat kiya, aur hnkm diya, ki Kisi se niat kah, ki tii ne initjii par yih zahir kiya.

23 Aur do flubaddrnrj ko pas bulake kahd, Do sau aipahi, aur sattar sawar, aur do san blidlebardar, Mtt ki' tfjsri ^biiri taiyar kar rakho, ki Qaisariya ko jdwerj ;

21 Aur jiinwar bhi ha/ir karo, ki PtUuB ko aawttr karke Felikaa hakim ke pas sahih 0 ^alamat pahunchfiwcn.

25 Aur is mazrmin ka khatt likha :

26 Qlaudiu« Liisias ka Felikas hakim bahddurko salam.

27 Is mard ko Yahudion ue pakra, aur use halak karne par the ; par-main yih ma'him karkc ki Riimi hai, fauj samet charh gaya, aur OM chhura laya.

28 Aur jab cliaha" ki daryiift kar- i'in, ki uiihon ne kis Rabab se us par nalisli ki, to use un ki Sadr Majlis mcn. le gaytf ;

29 Aur daryaft kiya ki we npni shari'at ke maidorj ki babat us par udlisli kavle hain, p:ir us ka koi cpimir nahin thahrd jo o,atl ya qaid ke laiq fao.

Aur jab mujho ittila' hflf, ki Yahudi is mard ki [ikat mcB lajc ham, main nc use jal'l tere pas bht'j diya, aur us ke muilda'ion ko bin hukiu diyi, ki tere huziir us par da'wi karon. Ziyada salam,

31 Pas aipaliirm ne, hukm ke mu- wafin, Piilus ko Lftke ritofl rat Anti- patris men jiahunchayi.

32 Aur dttfre din sawaroi} ko us ke sath rawana karkc iip qil'a ko phire.

33 Uiihon ne Qaitciriya mag pa- hunoliko hAkim ko khatt diyA, aur Pulus ko bhi us ke age hazir kiya.

34 Hakim ne khatt parhke piichhd,

hai, k i jabtak use halak. ki Wuh kissiiba'ka hai? 'Aur rnaliim -akarcL>. na khaenge ua pienge ; aur (karkc ki Qiliqiya kd haij

Putus Fdikm ke dje

A'AMA'L, XXIV. apni ta'Um ki kytfai karta.

i Kflha.Jab tera mudda'i bhi bd/ir honge, main turi Buiuinga. Aur hukru diya, ki Uw Herodls ki bargdh men qaid raklum.

XXIV BA'B.

PA'NOH din ke be'd Harianlah sar- dAr kdhio ba'z buicurgon. nur Tar-

tullus nan» ok wakil ke sath wahdn. avd, aur hakim ke age PiIIub par naliBh ki.

2 Jab wuk butaya gaya, Tartullus larydd kame lagi, aur kahA, Ralihaz is ke ki tore waaflo hamen, hari cliain, aur teri rtur-andeshl ae is qaurn ke liyp intizdm ke achchhe BUJAm bottt hain,

3~Ai Felikas bahAdur, hani is ko liar waqt aur har jagah kamal sauki guzar! ke sAtu. mau lete hara-

4 Par is liye ki tujhe ziydda taklif n» dan, maini teri ruiuuai kartA hurj, ki tu apni milirbani ae hamari do ok baten ROH.

6 Ki ham iui is mard ko mufsid, aur tamam dnnya ke Hab Yaliudion men fitna-angez, aur Ndaarion ki bid'at kft ek sarda'r pAyA ;

6 Ua ne baikat ko nApAk karne kA bhi qaad kiyA, aur ham ne tine pakra, aur chaha ki apni shari'at ke muwd- fiq ub k! \iddiat karen.

7 Par Lusias sarddr alce bari zabar- dastl ko sath u«e h amar e hAtuon chhiu le gaya.

8 Aur ua ke nmdda'ion ko hukm diya, ki tere paa jaen : so td tfp tahqiq karke in sab baton ko, jin ki baru un par nali-h kartu ham, khud usi 88 daryaft kar «akta hai.

9 Aur Yalnidion no bhi mAn liya, aur kahd, ki Y.! hdlen. yiinhlri hain.

10 TnbPulus ne, jabhAkinisebolne ka jahara pitya, jawab diya, Azhaski main iauta bun ki td bahu t banci] §e is (janin ka hakim bai, main bari kbaiir-jiima'l se ftjmi'tUBr bayan karlii nun :

11 Ky utiki tu daryaft kar sakti

188"

hai, ki ti6rah diri se ziydda nahin luic ki main. Yarusalaiu uicy 'ibadat karne

gfty*-

12 Aur unhon ne haikal inenniujhe kiai ke sAth liahs karte, ya logon men

lawid nthdtena ]>aya, na 'ihddat-kbau- otj mtm, na shalir roeg ;

13 Aur na in bdton ko, jin ki we mujh _par ab nAlish. karte bain, sabit kar sakto hain.

14 Leldn turo edmhnc yih iqrdr kar- ti hdn, ki jia rab ko we bid'&t kahte hain, ils( men apOfl bapiiidon ke Khu- ,l(i ki bandagi kaiti, aur sab kuchh jo sliari'at aur iiabion ki kitaborj Uien tikba hai, yaqin janta:

15 Aur Kliiida 88 yih ummed rakh- tri hiin, jis ko we bhi mau leto hain, ki murdotj kt qiyamat hogi, ky& ra^toa kyii iia^rastoij ki.

16 Aur main i»i sababkoshitri kar- ta hi'in, ki hauiwha Kliuda aur atlmion ke age meia dii mujhe malimat na karo.

17 Ab kai baras ba'd main apni qaum ko khairiit [«ihunchino, aur nazr charhanc "aya lilin.

18 Is par Asia ke ba'ze Yahudion no mujhe haikal inon taharat kiye hiie paya, par na to dangal ko sdth bote, ua faaad uthate dekha,

19 8o iiaheri tere sfimhne Mzir hona, aur agar un ka m n j h par kuclih da'wa bo, nalish karmi wajib tia,

20 Ya yihi kbud kahiCB, ki jab main Sadr Majlis ke .samhuc kliara tha,

iUJh TUtfa kuchh badl pai ;

21 Magar isi ek bit ki bdbat, jo main neun men khara hoke pukani, ki Mtirdon ki qiyamat ke «bab aj mujh }iar iTzam lio tA hai.

•H 1'Vlikan ne, jo is tariqa ki biiten khiib jaiita tha, yih stinke unhen t'dkliir mm dala, aur kahi, Jab Lusi- as'fauj kd sarddr Awe, to main tum- hArc iouqaddamo ki *ab bal. n !;d(.al kaningd.

23" Aur Kubadar ko bukm diya, ki

A'AMAT,, XXV. HIT drAm

kisi

Putus ka,

?i';]us ki kbabardari kflr, aur ■_. rakh, siur uh ke logoti men. -■ m khidmat kanie,yA us paBAne m mau'a mat kar.

24 Aurchancl roz ba'd Felikas do »pni joni Prrisilla ke sAth, jo Yahndin ihi, Akc Ptfli.is ktf hu)a Meja, aur oaao llaalh ke dfn k! suni.

86 J';ir jad «uli rAstbazi, aur par- hezgdri, aur ayanda 'adAlat ki l>dbat bd«*n kar rabi tha, to Felikas Bfl khaufkluikc jawab diyd, Is waqtjA; fur*Rt pake tujhe phir bulatinga.

2R Pai us ko yib ummed bhi thi, ki Pulu« se kuchh naqd pAwe, ta ki us ko chhor de : is Bye uae aksar bti- lata, aur us ko sAth ptftogA kartA tha.

27 Aur jab do baras guzre, Purkius Festus, Felikas ka qAim ruaqam ho AyA: aur Felikas yih chAhko ki Ya- iuidion ko apna raanimin kare, Priius ko qaid iii men chhor paya.

XXY BA'B.

PAS Festus sfiba men ddkhil hoke tin roz ha'd Qa.isariya se Yaru- niarj) ko gaya.

2 Tab sarda-r kabin aur Yahiidion ko ra,ison ne us ke dge Ptilus par nA- lisli k i ;

3 Aur us ke muqaddanie men yih milirbani cbdhl ki use Yarfisalam men hnla bheje : aur ghfit rucn, tbe ki uh ko rAh men niar dalerj.

4 Par FtfftUB ne jawab diyd, k i Pfilua to Qai«iriya hi men qaid rabe, aur main ap jald wahAn jAurjga ;

5 Aur kaha, Pas tum men se jinben maqdu> ha sath ohakm ; aur agar is shnklis uien kuchh badi hai, us par B&Uu) karen.

6 8o un ke danniydn din daa ek rahko Qaisariya ko gayd ; aur dda- re din 'addlat ke takht par liaithke hulun diya, ki Pulus ko liwen.

7 Jab wuh hazir h<U, we Yahudi, jo Yartisalam su de the, us ke gird khare hoke Pulua par bahutorl aur

189

F\gtut ko agojand. bbftj'i nAJishen karne lape, jo sAbit na kar saken.

8 Us dg apnd 'nar knrke kabA, ki Main ne na Yahiidion ki ahnri'at ka, aur na haikal kA, aur n» Qais»r kA, koi gunAh kiyA hai.

9 Par Festua ne yih clidhkc ki Y;il)iiili- m ko ajuiii manmvm kare, PfiJus ku Jamih dek» kahd, KyA tu chahtd hai ki Yarfisalam ko jae, aur wahAn mere Ag« iri bdton ki bAbat terA insaf hn 't

10 Par Pulus ne kaha, Mairj Qaisar ke takht i 'adilat ku Age khnrA hurj ; chAhiye ki yakin merA ins&f ho; Ya- hudioQ kA main ne kuchli oitttil nahin kiyA, chunnncLi tti bhi kinib jAntA hai.

11 Par agar cjusurwAr hdn, aur maia n« kuchh qatl ka lAiq kiyA, to mArejAne ne inkAr nahin kartA; par jo un batori ki, jin ki we mujh par nAIish karte hain, kuchh asi nahin, to koi mujh ko un ke hawala nahin kar sakta. Main Qfttnr ki iluhAi detA hun.

12 Tab Festus ne salAhkAron se maslahat karke iawAb diya, ki Tu ne Qaiaar hi ki duliAi di; Qaisar hi ke I-as jAegA.

13 Aur kuchh diu "bito Agrippa badshAh aur Barnitn' Qais4iriya men Ae, ki Festus ko salam karun.

14 Aur jab ka,i din wahAn raho the, Festus ne Polo» kA hai bad«hah se zikr kiyA, aur kaba, Ek shakfut hai jise Felikas qaid men chhor guya :

15 Us par, jab main Yarfisalam men thA, sardAr kAhinTjii aur Ya- hfidion ko buzurgon no iiAlish ki, aur cbAhA ki uh par sazA ki hukm diyi jae.

16 Unhcn main ne jawab diyA, ki Rfimion kd dastfir naliin ki kisfAdmi ko halakat ke liye hawala kare-j, jab tak ki uiudda'i 'alaihi apne muddalta) ke rfi-ba-rt na ho, aur da'wd kA jawAb na dene pdwe.

17 So jab we yahan bdham hoe,

Qauar H <fnhdl dettd. A'AMA'L,

main ne kuchli dor na ki, baiki diisrc din takhl par baithkar liukm diya, ki L's niard ko lio.

18 Par jab us ke mwlda'i khare lilit?, unhon ne us ke haqq mm aisd koi ilxam pcsL na kiva, jia ka mujhe khiydl tlia:

19 Baiki apne din aur kisi Yisii' ki bdbat, jo uiar gaya, jiso Pulus kahta. thd ki zinda hai, ns ne bahs kartu the.

20 Jab main is tarah ki takrir se shakk men para Iba, us se piichbd, Eyii tu Yarusala.ni nien jdne ko razi hai, ki waliari in batoii ka faisala lio?

21 Par jab Piilus no duhai di, ki mera insaf Jandb i 'A'li hi ki tahi]jq par nmuquf rabo, main ne liukm diya, ki jab lak use Qaisar ku pas na bbej liun, us ki nlgahbani karcii.

22 Tab Agrippa ne Fwstwa se kaki. Main bhi chahta liun ki is admt ki sunun. W uh bola, Kiil tu us ki siuiega.

23 Pas diare din, jab Agrippa aur Baniiqi hari uban o uhaukat se, sardar- on aur ubahi ke ra.ison ke siilh, di- wankbino nien dakbil Liic, Festus ke lmkiii se Pulus ko lac.

24 Tab Festus ne kaba, Ai Agrippa bddshah, aur sab mardo jo hamare sath hazir ho, tnm is ko dekhte lio, jis ki babat YahVidiim ki sari guroli Yani- ealam men aur yaban more pichlie pari, aur duU&Li bai, ki Us ki age ko jita rahnd wajib nahin.

25 Par jab mujh se daryitft hud ki us no kuchh qatl ke laiq nahin kiya, aur us ne dp Jaiiab i 'A'li ki duhai di. to main nc thand, ki use bbej dun.

26 Aur mujhe us ke haqq mori ki^i bat kd yaqiu nahin, ki apne khuda- wand ho likhi'm. Is waste main no use tumhare age, aur kbass kar terw huzur, ai Agrippa badsbah., b.a»ir kiya bai, \i ki tahqiqat ke ba'd kuehh likli sakiin :

27 Kyunki qaidi ko bhejnd, aur nalishen bhi, jo us par hain, na batdna, mujhe na-munisib ma'h'mi liota liai.

190

xxvi r.A'ii.

1AB Agrippa ne Pulus se knhi. .L Tujhe apnd 'uar karne ki ijdzat bab Tab Pulus hith phaildke apni 'uzr yiin bayan fcartie Ingd:

2 Ki Al had.shdh Agrippa, mi Bab baton ki bdbat, jin ka Yahudi mujh j»r da'wa karte hain, aj tero s;imhne uzr ksirua apni sa'id'at jdnla bfin ;

;I Khasa is liye ki tu Yahudion ki Bab raamon aur maslon se waqif hai; is fiabab main teri rninnat kartii hiin, ki tahammurne merf sun.

4 Pas nierl ciial ko jawdni sg, ki kis tarah ehuru' so ipnl qanm ke darmiyau Yariisalaru nn:ii nibahta raha, yih aab Yabiidi jantf hain :

5 8o we mujhe shurii' xo janke a^ar chahen to grawahi defl, ki maiij Farisi lioke ham logori ke mazhab ke sab se parhezgar firqc ku muwdfiq z'mdagi kfttta thd.

fi Aur ab us wa'de ki ummed ke eabab, jo Khuda ne hamare MpdadcO se kiya tha, nniin 'lulalat men bazir k iya gaya- hun :

I "Us bl wa'de ko pAne ki ummed par hamare barah firqe dil o jan 6e rat din banda-zi kiya karto hain. Isi ummed ko Siibab, ai bailsliah Agripp;i, Vulimli !ii'.ij!i par ffcryAd karte bain.

y Yih bat kyi'iy r»-4'atibar samajhte ho, ki Kliudti murdon ko jilat-a. hai?

9 Han, main ne bhi eamjha ki Yisii' Kasari ke nam ki liahut bar- kbilafi karna mujh i«r wajib hai.

10 So bhi main ue Yaruaalam meg kiya : aur sardar kdbinon ne ikhtiyiir pako liahut se muqadd:ison ko ijiiid- kbaiio men band kiya; aur Jab qail iiiye jdtn. the, main ham i bliartd tlia.

II Aur bar 'ibai.lat-kluuic men ak- sar unhen sana dilake zabardastl un se kufr kahwata ; aur uu par nibayat janin knrke begauon ke shahron tak aatdta tbd.

12 Is hal men jab sardar kdhi

J'jrijip'i ke httzir

W ikhtiydr aur parw.

&faalabq kn jdtd thd;

13 Do pahar ko, ai badsh&h, main ne rdh men dekhd, ki dsnidn no ok nur, siinij se barraq, mere aur mere B&thion ke gird chamaktd bni.

14 Jab ham sab zamhi par <-ir ]«trc, main ne ok awdz suni, jo niujli w bolti, anr 'Ibrani y.uUlu men kahti tbf, ki Ai yubin, Sdlus, tfi mujhu kyun satata hai? paiue ki kil par irit in&rniL tore liye mu&hkii b&i

15 Main. ne kaha, Ai Khuddwand, tu bina hai V Wub bold/Main Stoff hurj, jise tu satata hai.

113 Lekin uth, aurapnepdnwoTi par khani ho: kyiinki maiii ia liye tujh imr zdhir lnia, ki tujho uu chizoii kd khidini aur gawdh tjialir:ivm, jinbey tu ne dekhd, aur jo main tujh par z.iiliir kariingd;

17 Aur maiii tujhe bachdiirjgd U qaum aur gair-qaumon ae, jin ke pas ah tujhe bhejta hiiii,

IH Ki tn" ao k/ dukhen kliol de, ti ki andherc se ujalo, aur Shaitdu ke ikhtiydr se Khuda ki taraf ph iren, aur gundhon ki nni'afi, aur inuqaddatiun men miras pdwen, tu inidu ke Vttfle jo mujh par hai.

19 Ih liye, ai badshab Agrinpa, main us aumani royd kd mi-farmdii na luidT

20 Baiki pakde utihog.jo Dimisbq, aur Yarrtsalani, aur sdre mulk Valid- diya men haiu, aur gair-<{iHiii]'m ko bhi, chitdyd, ki tauba karen, aur Khudi ki taraf phireQ, aur tauita ke muwdiiq 'amal karen.

21 Iiihin baton ke sabab Yalnidiori no uiujbe hnikal men jwkarke mere qatl ka qasd kiyii.

22 Par Khudd so madad pdkc aj tsk khard Mrfl, nur cbhote )>are pir piwahi detd, aur kuchh naluri kasta In'm, magac we bdterj jiu ke wdtu' hono ki khabar nabit bin di hai':

191

VAMA'U XXVII. gi l«ike

apitA 't'zr bayan ketrna.

23 Ki Masih dukii uthdwcgd, aur murdofl mm ae pahli ji uthuga, aur ia qaum aur guir-qaumi>n ko nur dikbld- wegd.

21 Jab wub iipnd "uar yi'm kartd tba, Fostus nu bari liwaz se kahd, Ai 1 lulus, tu di wan a hai ; bubut 'ilm ne tujh o diwana kiya.

25 Wuh bola, Ai Fcs'tus bahddur, main diwdna uahin ; Iwiiki Kacbdi aur lioshydri ki baten kiihta liun ;

26' Ki bddfihdii, jis ke samiiue ;ib main lit-dliaralc boltd bui), y ih baton i:inia hmj | baLki luujbe yaqia hai, ki in bdton men se koi nu par ohUpi na- hin ; kyiinki yih mdjard to kom: meij nsag htm.

27~Ai badshdh Agrip]M, kyd td nabiorj par yaipn lata¥ main jantd hrin ki yaqiu iatd hai.

28 Tab Agrippe ne Piilua se kabd, Nazdik bal ki teru samjluiiie se main Masilii ho jdfin.

29 Pulus bold, Khudd kare, ki sirf tu bi nnbin, baiki sab jo dj muri suut« bain, faqat naatiik uahin, luilki hilkull aiwe howen, JalsA main b\in, bagair in zanjiron ke.

30 Jab ub ne yih kaba tba, bddalidh, aur hikiin, aur Harniqi, aur un ky hani-niahiD utho :

31 Aur alag jake ok diisrc se baton karne aur kahne lage, ki Yih ddtni aisa kucbii nahin karld, jo qfltl yd qaid ke ldiq ho.

32 Aur AfilipMi nu Fesfcuj se kahd. Agar Qaisar ki iluhdi na detd, to yih ddmi cltlnit Kaktd.

XXVII BA/B.

AUR jab muqarrar hua ki hamja- bdz |ar Iidlia ko jden, uuhon no l'ulua aur kitue aur qatdion ku Jiilius ndin AusustUBi paltan. ke ek siibadar ke hawdla kiyi.

2 Aur ham Adramutteui jahdz par,

aur Muad ue jo Asia ke kiitdra kindre jdiie par thd,

[tliarhke rawdna hue ; aur Aris tarkhua

PtWws ka jahae y<w

Macmdilm TMoahadaakf hnmAre sAth

tha.

3 Drisre din hnvn Bsldi Tm _ hunche. Aur J61iii8 ne Piilus «e khusli-suluki karke ijAzat di, ki apne doston ke pas jake cliain kare.

i WaMfl n rawAna hokfi Kupn ke niche niche guzre, ia liyo ki hawA mukhdlif thi.

5 Alir jab ham Qiliqiya aur Pamfii- liyriki: ssitmmdarfloguCTO the, to Munl nam Luqm ke shahr men Ae.

6 Wahan subadAr ne IskandariA ka ek jahaz Italia ko jfito hue pako ha- men iis par bithaya.

7 Aur jab bam bahut din Abis t a AliiHta ciiiilo, aur mushkil se Kuidi ke sAmhne Ae, to is Jiye ki hawa b; men Age barhuo na doti thi, Qretc ke niche niche Salmone ke sAnihne hoke

8 Aur us se ba-mushkU guzarkc kisi maqam men, jo Husn-Bandar kiihlata hai, ao: LasoiA shahr iis ke nazdik thA.

H Itne men, jab bahut waqt guzrd, aur ab jahaz ke cbalne men khatra parA, is liyo ki roza ka din bhi guzar gaya thA, Pulus no unhnn chitAyA,

10 Aur unhen kahA, Ai mardo, main dekht.A Ini n ki is safar ke «Ath taklif aur bahut nuqsAn hogA, 11:1 sirf bojh aur jahaz ka, baiki hamAri janon k;i bhi.

11 Par srfibadAr no nAkliuda aur jahAz ke mAlik ki bdton ko Pulus ki baton se ziyada niAnA.

12 Aur is liyc ki wuh bandar jArA kiit-iii' ke liy<: achchhA na thA, aksaron ini salah ki ki wahan H bhi rawan» hon, ki agar ho sake to Finlke men pahuuchko JArA kAten: ki wuh Q.ret« kA ek bandar thA, jo dakkhin ]adt- chhim aur u Uar pachchhim ke rukh tiiA.

13 Jab kuchh kuchh dakkini hawA cbalne lagi, un hon ne yih samajhke ki apne matlab ko pahunehe langar | tApii men jA pnrenge.

192

A'AMA'L, XXVII. Rum ku j,\„,\

uthayA, aur Qrete kA kinAra pakarke rawAna h u e.

14 Lekin thori dur ba'd ek barl tri- fAni hawa, jo Yiirukludon kablat.i hai, us par se utbke un par ]>ari.

15 Aur jab jahil/, ikhtiyar men na rahA, aur hnw.ika sAmhnA na kar «aka, to hain ne use chhor diyA, ki clialA jAe.

16 Aur ek tAprt ke tale, jis kA nAm Qlaudu hai, bah gaye, aur hari inush- kil se dongi ko qabu men lAo.

17 Use unlion no pas lake tadbiren kiri, aur jahaz ko niche se bAndhA; aur chor-bAlu mcn dha.s jAno ke dar Be ham no jaliAz ki pAl wAI utar diyA, aur yiirdii (-halo gWW.

18 Par jab Andhi nc liamcn. nihA- yat satAyA, to diisre din unhon ne jiihAz ka bojb phcnk diyA.

19 Aur tisro din ham ne apne hath- on se jahil kA asbAb bhi pheukA,

20 Aur jab bahut dinon tnk na s\\- raj aur na Ure nazar Ae, aur bari Andhi chalti rahi, Akhir ko bachne ki urnmed hamen bilkull na rahi.

21 Aur bahut fAqnn ke ba'd Pulus ne un ke bich men khare hoke kaM, Ai mardo, lAzim to thA ki tum meri bAt mdnke Qrelo «e rawAna na hotc,

ir yih taklif aur muptau ua uthAte.

22 Par ab tumhari miniiat kartA hiin ki khAtir-jaiu'a nkliu ; ki tum men, se kisi k! jan lui noqsrfll na hogA, faqnt jahAa kA;

n 'Kyunki KhudA, jis kA main hun, jis ki baudagi karta hun, us kA firishta isi rAt ko mere pAs AyA,

24 Aur kahA, Ai Piilus, mat dar; kyiinki zarnr hai, ki tu Qaisar ke dge hAzir ho ; aur, dekh, KlmdA no sah ko, jo tero sAth jahAz men sawAr liain, i-ujhi! ba.khsh diyA.

25 Is liye, ai mardo, kli.itir-jam'a ho, kyi'mki main KhudA pBt i'atiqad rakhtA hun ki jaisA mujh se kahA jin y A, waisA h i hogA.

26 Lekin zariir hai ki ham kivi

■ t/, u

■ ;<*!lhl A'AilA']., XXViH

Jali chandahwin rat ai, ki jiw

/i, ;./.■

.,.(„.

darya e Adrii BMB takra rahe the, iwllu rdt, ko mallaliim m atkal bc malam ki.v:i, ki kiwi vmilk ke .... '!ii. bfltn j'iilmnche .

28 Aur pdui ki tuah leko bis pursa (•ayil : nur thori age barhke aur phir

■ «• ]»ndrah pursa paya.

29 Aur ia gar ac ki mabada chatan- "'J I'iir j* P*i«lh jahaz ko pichhe «e <bar lancar drile, aursubh ki khwahiah inea Ingc roho,

30 Aur jab mallalion na chaha ki jahil/, pir M bhag ja-eri, aur i* bahan* sg ki gttlahi tc langar dalcn, ooiiire ku samundar men utanic lagc,

31 Pulus db bundar aur sipahion se kaha, Agar ye jaliaz par ua raheri, lo tum unhin bach nakte,

82 Tt\h Bipfhiofl Iie donge kf rassf katko asa gira diya.

;1S Aur din hone na pay.i ki Polusi ne eab ki mhmat ki, ki Kuchh khao, aur kaha, A'j chaudah din hut ki turn rak dekhto ho, aur ftioa kiya, aur kuchb kbilna na liyi.

34 h liye turahari udnnat knrta nun, ki kuchli khaiyo, ki is mon tuni- iiart nalatnati hai ; kyt'inki tum mon H ttiKi ke Bir ka ek bal jhar ua jaega.

35 Aur yih kahke U ne roti li, aur mi sal i ke wimhnc Khuda ka nhukr kiya, aur torke khano laga.

36 'lidi we pab kbatir-jam'a ht'ic, aur ap blii kuclib kliaya.

37 Aur sab railake jahaz men do mu cbibattnr adini tlie.

'> Aur unbon m khake aur ser hnke anaj ko samundar incn phenk . .a. a ir jahaz halka kiya.

39 Aur jab din hd&, unhorj ne ua ramin ko na pahchaiia : par ek kol dekha, jis ka kinara hamwar tlia, aur

I cq m- chahi ki agu ho aake, to >aliiz ko uh par charha le jiien.

10 Sn langar kfttke saniundar mon, chhor diye, aur patwaron ki nwsian 193

bhi kholin, nur pai hawa kn rukh par charhakc kbiftre ki taraf chulo.

•11 Aur ek jabali, jah(in do «imun- dar mite tbe, pahuncliku jabat ko «amin par dauri diya; so galabi to dliakka khakw |ibaijKgayl, |>ar pichhal lahron ke zor ao tiit gayii.

42 Aur Hipiilui.ii ki yih sahih thi.ki rini'liiaj kn m.'ir dili'ti, U ho k) kol pairke bbagjaa

43 Lokin siibnd&r ne, yih chahkc ki Pul uh ko baohawo, un kois iradese baz rakhil, aur hukm diya, ki J» log [.air eakte baiti jiaiilo ki'idke kinare par jAeij :

44 Aur baqi, ha'7.0 takbton par, aur ba'ze jahiz ke aur asbab ur. Aur yrinliiii ini», ki sah ko Bab aalimat kbusliki ]iar pahunehe.

XXVIII BA'C.

AUR jab bach nikle the, tab jari gaye ki us tapii ka uam Malite

2 Aur ub ke jangli Mshiiulou 11« ham pai uiltayat udhrbani ki : kyiin- ki menh ki j hari aur jare ke Sftbab unhon ne ag itulgai, aur baui eablion ko pan bulaya.

3 Aur jab Piilus ne likri ka gflttha jam'a karkc ag mon dala, ek nag gar- mi pako riikla, aur us ke hath par lipat gaya.

4 Jynnhin un janglion ne wuli kira us ko hatii par lipta dekhd, ek nts diisre se kaha, Yti^inan yib Adini kiuini liai, ki agarehi samiindar se bach gaya, pH Ilahi iriti^am un jhw naluri rfetA hai.

5 Par us no kfre ko ag men jhatak diyi, aur kuchli sara oa paya,

6 Par we rounlazir the ki wuh toj jaegd, ya ekaek marke gir parcga : lekin jab der tak intiaar kiy:i, aur dckba ki tu ko kuclib zarar na pahuneba, to aur khiyal karke kaha, ki Yih ek dewt;i hal,

7 Aur us jagah ke dspas Publiua name us tapii ko sardar ki milkiyat

N

Pilus Rum men

A'AMA'L,

thi ; ub ne hiimerj j*har le jAke tin din t&k bsiri dosti ne min mani ki.

8 Aur yiln huA, ki Publius kd bdp tap aur jiryin i lahu se bimAr parA thA: Pulus ne lis ke pAs jake du'A mAngl, aur ub par hath mkhke ufie changa kiyA.

U Pas jab yih mnshhur buA, tab aur log, jo taptl men blmJr the, ae, aur change hue:

10 Aur unhon ne hamari bart 'izzat ki ; aur chalte waqt, jo kuchh h amen darkAr thi, lAd diya.

Jl Aur tin mnhine ba'd Iskaudari jahAz ]>ar, jo jare bhitr ua tapii men raba, aur jis kA nishAn Bfftflknri Iba, rawAna hm

12 Aur BirAipis men lagAke ttn din rahe.

13 Aur wahan Be Rcghim men ghiim Ae : aur jab ek ros ba'd dakha- niyachali, dusru diu Putiuii meii ae:

14 Walian ham bhaion ku pake un ki minnat se sat din un ke pas rahe: aur yunhin Rum ko chale.

10 Wal.an ae bhii hamar! khabar sunke Appius ke diarik aur Tin-SarA tak hamaro istiabal ko Ae: aur Pulus ne unbes dekhkar Khuda kA ahukr luyii. .uii klmnijiun'a ln'iA.

10 Jab ham Rum men pnhunche, su hadir ne qaidion ko risau i khAsu ke eiirdar ke hawai a kiya: par Piilua ko ijAzat bui ki ukelA ek upahi ke uith, jo us kA nigahbAn thA, raba

17 Aur ynn hiiA, ki titi ro?, ba'd Fulua ne Yahudiun ke ra,ison ko bfi- ham bulaya: aur jab ikatthe biie, un se kaha, Ai bhlio, harchand main no ijamn ki aur bApdAdon ki tariqon ke khilAf kuchh na kiyA, tau bhi qaidi hoke Yanisalam re Rnmton ke hathem men hawaJa kiyA gaya.

18 Unhon ne merA bAl daryAft karke chAha, ki mujhe chhor den, kyunki mere qatl kA koi wabah ua tha.

19 Par jab Yabudion ne inukhA- lafat ki, main ne lachAri bc Q«isar ki

194

XXVIII. Injil U manadi kartd.

duhfii di; par la waste tiahin, ki apui qaum par faryad karae kA mori koi sabab hal.

20 So isi liyo main no tumben bulaya, ki tumben dekhtin, aur guft- ogii karun ; kyunki larAol bi ki ummcd ko eabab main ia zanjir Be bandhi

L'l Tnbon ne us sti kahi, Ham ne mi Valu'uiiya so tere haqq men khatt pAe, na bhaion men so kiai ne Akc teri kuchh khabar uundi, >A Itadi bayan k(.

22 Par ham chahte bain ki tujh ae sunen, ki lu kyA winiajhtA hai : kyunki is firqe ki babat ham ko ma'luni b"ii, ki sab kahin use burd kahtc haiii.

23 Aur jab unhon ne ua ko liye ek din thuhnlya, bshaten ua ke dere par Ae; us ne un ko Kliuda ki badahAbat par gawAbi dy deko, aur MiisA ki ahari'at aur nabion kl kitab ge Mastilt ke liaqf[ men dab'len IA Jake, aubh se shani tak ta'Iim diya kiya.

24 Aur ba'zoii ne us ki Mttsn ko man liya, aur ba'ze be-iniAn rahe.

25 Jab apa.s men inuttnfi'i na ln'ie, we PiihiH ke yih ek bAtkahte hi cliah* gaye, ki Riib i Quda ne Yaa'aiyah uahi ki ma'rifat hamare bdpdadon ae kbub kaha,

26 Aur farmAya, ki Is qaum ke pds jA, aur knh, ki T uni k.inoii ne aunoge, par na samjhope : aur Atikhon *<■■ '.lekh- oge, par daryAft na karoge :

27 Kytinki is qaum k£ dil inota huA, aur we apnc kAnon Be lincbA sunte hain, nur unhon ne apni Ankhcii ini'ind lin : ai.sA na ho, ki ankhon Be dekhen, aur kanon H Ktiuen, aur dil se sarujhen, aur ruju' lAwon, aur main iitilien changA karun.

2S Paa tum ko malfim liowc, ki KbudA ki uajAt gair-qauuion ke pda bheji gayi, aur we use aun bhi lengi.

29 Jab us ne yih bAten kahi thiii, Yahudi Apas men bahut bahs kartu ciialc gaye.

"■) Aur Piilua puro do baras apne

Piiln* Injil ki labat RU'MI'ON, I. layan harta,.

kirae ko ghar mon rnlid, aur eab ko joltok Klmda ki hfclslialiat k( nmnMi ua pas Ate th<? qabul klya, ko.rtd, nur Khudawnnd Yisii' Masih ki

31 Anr kamal be-parw&l m bini rok jbatoij sikhata nih».

20 seconds for Fellow Christians - Dear Lord,

Thank you thatthis PDF Ebook

has been released s o that we are able

to learn more about you and wiser versions.

Please help itto have wide circulation

Please help the people responsible for

making this Ebook available.

Please help them to be able to have more

resources available to help others.

Please help them to have all the resources,

the funds, the strength and the time that they

need and ask for in order to be able

to keep working for You.

I pray that you would encourage them and

that you protect them physically and

spiritually, and the work & ministry that

they are engaged in.

I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual or other Forces that could harm them or their work and projects, or slowthem down.

Please help them to find Godly friends who

are able to help. Provide helpful transportation

for their consistent use.

Remind me to pray for them often as this

will help and encourage them.

Please give them your wisdom and understanding sothey can better followyou, and I ask you to do these things in the name of Jesus, Amen,

Prayers

a Few Resources

Ideas and Ebooks (Livres / Libros) For your Consideration

Glad to have this New Testament ?

Help us by PRAYING for us !!

Invest in your own Eternity Spend time praying !

(thank you)

SHARE THIS PDF (E-Book) with your Friends

So thatthey will have a stronger

Spiritual Life ALSO

Concerning Christians and Christianity

1. Christians are those who follow the teachings ofJesusChrist.

2. The Teachings of Jesus Christ are explained in the book called the Gospel (Injil) or the New Testament.

3. The New Testament is the First Place to find and record

the teachings of Jesus Christ, by those who actually knew Him.

4. The New Testament has never been disproved archeologically or historically. It has and remains accurate.

5. The New Testament P redicts thatcertainevents will happen in the Future,

7. The ReliabilityoftheOld Testament and the New Testa menta re clear indications of the accuracy ofthe New Testament,

8. J esus C hrist did Notfail in His missionon Earth.

9. Jesus Christ P re-existed, This means thatHeexisted BEFORE the Creation ofthe World.

10. When C hristians worship J esus C hrist, they are NOT worshiping another Human being,

11. J esus C hrist did notbecomeGod by performing good works,

12. Christians cannotperform good works in order to go to Heaven. Those who wantto find God mustadmit they are notable to be PerfectorHoly, and that they need the helpofGod to helpthemgetridoftheirSins,

14, More than 500 M illion Christians around the world todayare NOT Roman Catholic, The Vaticandoes NOT speakfor C hristianity in many situations.

Concerning Christians and Christianity (2)

1 5. Judas did NOT die in the place of Jesus Christ on the cross.

16. Jesus Christ had no motive to escape his fate. Jesus Christ was born to communicate His message of Hope and Redemption for mankind.

1 7. Without the Blood of Jesus, it would be impossible for those who believe in Jesus Christ to be saved, to have Eternal Life.

18. Christians worship ONE God, NOT three Gods,

19. InTrue Christianity, Historically, the Trinity is =

a) God the Father

b) God the Son

c) God the Holy Spirit

20. The worship of Angels orCreated Beings, orCreatures oranything exceptGod (God the Father, God the Son [Jesus Christ],

and God the Holy Spirit, isforbidden.

21. The Trinity IS NOT = Mary, J oseph and J esus

22. The Trinity is NOT = J esus, J oseph and God the Father

23. Gabriel is NOTanothernameforJesus Christ.

24. Anyone can become a Christian if they wantto.

25. Christianity IS notsomething thatcan bedone EXTERNALLY. A person is a Christian becauseof whatthey believe in theirHeart, inside of them.Theirown sincerity before God is the true test.

26. Those who acceptan electronic mark[666] forthe purchaseofgoods, in their right hand orforehead are NOT able to become Christians.

Concerning Christians and Christianity (3)

Peopleare innocent if they do not know and have no wayofknowing that theyaredoing wrong.The Christian God places theknowledgeofgood and bad in the hearts of each and every individual.

NooneexceptGod is Holy.

Itis wrong to murder innocent people.

It is wrong to kill Christians who have notactively harmed anyone.

People are NOT Christians simply because theirfamily is "Christian".

Peopleare NOT Christian because they are born INTO a "Christian"family.

Apersoncannotbecomea Christian "AUTOMATICALLY".

Noonecan beBORN a Christian, butbecominga true Christian will guarantee Eternal Life, in Heaven and with God.

ThePresumptionthata person is a Christian simply because they are going into a Church and sitting there is False.

Churches have people inside of them thatare NOT Christian, butthey wantto learn more aboutGod.

A Church, or a Church Official CANNOT MAKE anyone a Christian.

Christians do NOT convertanyone by Force, because this action is a violationoftheCHOlCES thatGOD alone is abletomake.To force others would suggestthatGod is weak, and cannotdothis by H imself. The Christian God has much Strength butuses ittoshow loveand help in this life, notunkindness.

OnlyGod could FORCE someone to do something againsttheir will, and the C reator of the Universedoes NOT behavein thatmanner.

The Choice of whatto believe or notto believe is up to Each individual, who mustmake uptheirown mind, oftheirfree will.

There is no way to impose Christianity on anyone by Force.

Conversions by Force to Islam are NOTrecognized byGOD or Christians.

Concerning Christians and Christianity (4)

Those who are converted from Christianity to Islam by Force or coercion, are Still Christian, AND STILL considered Christian.

Once a person is recognized by God as a genuine Christian, they are "sealed" permanently. There is no way for any Human to change this.

Forcing any Christian to say that they convert or accept Islam simply makes that Christian to state something which is FALSE. There is no such thing as Genuine conversion that God can recognize OUT of Christianity, if that person was a Christian.

To suggest that Christians could be converted by Force, actually means (signifies) that there are actions that humans can take that can FORCE God somehow to UNDO or ALTER what He has done. This is not the case. Actions that Humans Force other Humans to take are not recognized by God as a true Change of Mind, ora Change of Heart

Once a person becomes a Christian, Ali of their sins (past, present, and future) are forgiven. They are reconciled to God for Eternity, and nothing can change this. Forced Conversionsto Islam are not considered Valid eitherby God or Christians. No one can undo in the Heart of a person, what God can do. The link between a Christian and God is a link that Cannot be broken. Saying anything to the contrary will not alter or change this.

Christians do not Depend on their sanctuaries or Church buildings in order to meet with God. Harming a building againsttheGod who made the Universe is not a genuine sign of success or progress. Christians simply make use of any buildings. Christians are able to meet and pray and talk to God by themselves, wit a Church building and without a Priest or Pastor. God is always with them.

Harming a Church building simply proves that some people are afraid of Church Buildings. That is all. The Earliest Christians did not have Churches or Buildings for Hundreds of Years.

Harming a Church Building does not harm God, and itdoes not harm Christians. It simply makes them go and use a different building, or to meet without one.

Concerning Christians and Christianity (5)

Some people have not examined churches very much. MANY are very simple and do NOT have decorations or much inside of them. In Christianity, this is intentional. This symbolism is on purpose, intending to signify that the INNER LIFE of the Christian, is what is importantto God, and NOT the building in which people worship.

Man looks on the external and outward appearance. GOD looks on the inner heart of each individual.

There would be no reason for anyone to become upset, if they did not think that Christianity was making progress. Those who are upset are upset because Christianity has answers, reasons and arguments that do not seem to be defeated. God is big enough to defend himself.

If Christianity is false, it should be possible to explain to Christians why and how Christianity is false. Killing or harming Christians is only an excuse, a method of hiding from the reality that intellectual conversation and explanations of those who are violent do NOT have the answers to defend with kindness or reason what they believe.

Christians believe that almost all violence is a waste of time. It does not accomplish what it is "supposed" to accomplish. Those who have arguments are able to advance those and explain them to others Those who do not use violence instead. This method does not convince Christians or others to adopt methods of violence.

People become like the God they serve. If the God they serve is unkind and unmerciful, that is what the followers become. If the God being worshiped is cruel and mean to women and children, then that is what the followers of that God usually will become. Jesus Christ is love. Christians try to be loving.

People have the option of accepting to believe in the Teachings of Jesus Christ in the New Testament or rejecting those teaching. The choice in this life is up to each person. God is the one who makes His own rules. Thankfully, the God of this world decided to use Love and kindness to explain Himself so that all of us would have a chance to learn and to experience the unconditional love of Jesus Christ. (books are listed in this Ebook. Those who want to refute Christianity may want to start by refuting the books listed in this PDF)

Concerning Christians and Christianity (6)

True Christians are NOT afraid to have conversations with those who are not Christians. Christians are NOT afraid to have conversations with those who are islamic or from any other faith.

Christians are NOT afraid to talk aboutthe weakness of Christianity, ifthatis a topic someone else wants to discuss.

Christians willnotstoneyou orharmyou becauseyou disagree with them.

Christian will notmakeyouslave IF you do NOT convertto Christianity.

Those who truly believe in theTRUTH ofwhattheyclaim to believe are NOT afraid to discuss the contentof whatthey believe with other people.

Christians mayshare with you thatyou are not 100% perfectand Holy, and Christians will Admitand acknowledge thatTHEY are NOT perfectorHoly.

Christians admitthattheyneed asavior, thattheycannotbegoodenough on their own.andthattheycannotperform ENOUGH good and HOLY actions to pleaseGod. Thatis thestarting pointforanyonetobecomea Christian.

Those who engage Christians in discussions aboutreligion should be willing to look atthe history, the archeology, the science and all of the aspects of religion and the books thattheyuseordefend. Thatis simplybeing honest. And those who seek spiritual truth are NOT afraid to discuss honestiy issues of religion.

IF GOD is GOD, then GOD will STILL be GOD after a conversation takes place. Those who follow God should be willing to think and use the mind thatGod gave to them. IF God gave people a mind, HE expects them to use it. Discussions are part of the use of the mind.

There is a lot of history about OTHER religions thatcan befound in the West. In other nations, FEAR ofbeing wrong induces and provokes censorship. But history can be proven and demonstrated. The Dead Sea Scrolls were found in 1947-48. Those scrolls contained the J ewish Old Testament. They were dated scientifically tobe 200yearsOLDER than the time of J esus Christ. The J ewish Old Testament has NOTbeenchangedoraltered.This issimplya scientific and historic Fact.

God Preserves His Word. His word is the Old and New Testament. IF you are seeking truth, what do you have to fear from Truth ?

Concerning History and the Early Church

Christians do NOT pray to MARY. The Bible never teaches to Pray to Mary. Mary was born a human sinner, and became a Christ-follower.

Prayers to ANY Human (Except Jesus Christ, who was God who became Human for a short time) is IDOLATRY

Christians do not pray To Statues, which is IDOLATRY

Christians do not pray To Icons, which is a Graven Image, which is ALSO IDOLATRY.

The Early Church and the Early Christians did NOT pray to Mary.

The Early Church and the Early Christians did NOT pray to Saints, as this would be blasphemy, and taking worship and adoration away from God.

It is the Mediation of Jesus Christ alone which serves to communicate between God and Man, and NOT any other Human.

Christians know which books of the Bible are part of the Bible and belong in the Bible. There is a great deal of evidence and documentation over the whole world for the conclusion, about which books belong in the Bible.

Some books mav help to clarifv or explain (these are Free Books):

Forthose who read English:

1) The Seventh General Council (held 787 AD) in which the Worship of Images was established, by John Mendham - 1850

2) Image worship in the Church of Rome by James Endell Tyler

3) Primitive Christian Worship by James Endell Tyler

4) The worship of Mary [proven to be Unbiblical] by James Endell Tyler

THESE BOOKS are AVAILABLE For FREE ONLINE

Concerning History and the Early Church

We recommend, foryour potential consideration, the following books:

1) The Seventh General Council (held 787 AD) in which the Worship of Images was established, with copious notes from the Caroline books compiled by order of Charlemagne by Rev John Mendham - 1850

2) Image worship in the Church of Rome by James Endell Tyler

The image-worship of the Church of Rome : proved to be contrary to Holy Scripture and the faith and discipline of the primitive church and to invoive contradictory and irreconcilable doctrines within the Church of Rome itself (1847)

3) Primitive Christian Worship by James Endell Tyler

Primitive christian worship, or, The evidence of Holy Scripture and the church, concerning the invocation of saints and angels, and the blessed Virgin Mary (1840)

4) The worship of Mary by James Endell Tyler

5) The Pope of Rome and the popes of the Oriental Orthodox Church

by Caesarious Tondini (1875) also makes for interesting reading, even though it is a Roman Catholic work which was approved with the Nihil Obstat (not indexed by the inquisition) notice.

THESE BOOKS are AVAILABLE For FREE ONLINE

Concerning History and the Roman Catholic Church

Historic Information on the Roman Catholic Church can be found - in online searches - under the words:

papai, roman catholic, papist, popish, romanist, vatican, popery, romish,

There are many free Ebooks available online and at Google that cover these topics.

There is of course the Standard

works on the proven history of the Vatican:

The Two Babylons by Alexander Hislop, which uses more than 200 ancient Latin and Greek sources.

The Roman Schism illustrated from the Records

of the Earlv Roman Catholic Church

by Rev. Perceval.

Those who have trouble with Vatican documents concerning early Church Councils should conduct their own research into a document called the "Donation of Constantine", which was the false land grant from the Roman Emperors to the Vatican.

Saved - How To become a

Christian

how to be saved

A Christian is someone

who believes the

following

Steps to Take 'm order to become a

true Christian, to be Saved & Have a

real relationship & genuine

experience with the real God

Read, understand, accept and

believe the following verses from

the Bible:

1. AM men are sinners and fail short of God's perfect Standard

Romans 3: 23 states that

For all have sinned, and come short of

the glory of God;

2. Sin - which is imperfection in our lives - denies us eternal life with God. But God sent his son Jesus Christ as a gift to give us freely Eternal Life by believing on Jesus Christ.

Romans 6: 23 states For the wages of sin is death; but the gift of God is eternal life through Jesus Christ our Lord.

3. You can be saved, and you are saved by Faith in Jesus Christ. You cannot be saved by your good works, because they are not "good enough". But God's good work of sending Jesus Christ to save us, and our response of believing - of having faith - in Jesus Christ, that is what saves each of us.

Ephesians 2: 8-9 states

8 For by grace are ye saved through faith; and that not of yourselves: it is the gift of God:

9 Not of works, lest any man should boast.

4.God did not wait for us to become perfect in order to accept or unconditionally love us. He sent Jesus Christ to save us, even though we are sinners. So Jesus Christ died to save us from our sins, and to save us from eternal separation from God.

Romans 5:8 states

But God commendeth his love toward us, in that, while we were yet sinners, Christ died for us.

5. God loved the world so much that He sent his one and only Son to die, so that by believing in Jesus Christ, we obtain Eternal Life.

John 3: 16 states

For God so loved the world, that he gave his only begotten Son, that whosoever believeth in him should not perish, but have everlasting life.

6. If you believe in Jesus Christ, and in what he did on the Cross for us, by dying there for us, you know for a

fact that you have been given Eternal Life.

I John 5: 13 states These things have I written unto you that believe on the name of the Son of God; that ye may know that ye have eternal life, and that ye may believe on the name of the Son of God.

7. If you confess your sins to God, he hears you take this step, and you can know for sure that He does hear you, and his response to you is to forgive you of those sins, so that they are not remembered against you, and not attributed to you ever again.

I John 1 : 9 states

If we confess our sins, he is faithful and

just to forgive us our sins, and to

cleanse us from all unrighteousness.

If you believe these verses, or want

to believe these verses, pray the

following:

" Lord Jesus, I need you. Thank you

for dying on the cross for my sins. I

open the door of my life and ask you

to save me from my sins and give me eternal life. Thank you for forgiving me of my sins and giving me eternal life. I receive you as my Savior and Lord. Please take control of the throne of my life. Make me the kind of person you want me to be. Help me to understand you, and to know you and to learn how to follow you. Free me from all of the things in my life that prevent me from following you. In the name of the one and only and true Jesus Christ I ask all these things now, Amen".

Does this prayer express your desire to know God and to want to know His love ? If you are sincere in praying this prayer, Jesus Christ comes into your heart and your life, just as He said he would.

It often takes courage to decide to become a Christian. It is the right decision to make, but It is difficult to fight against part of ourselves that wants to hang on, or to find against that part of our selves that has trouble changing. The good news is

that you do not need to change yourself. Just Cry out to God, pray and he will begin to change you. God does not expect you to become perfect before you come to Him. Not at alL.this is why He sent Jesus...so that we would not have to become perfect before being able to know God.

Steps to take once you have asked Jesus to come into you r life

Find the following passages in the Bible and begin to read them:

1. Read Psalm 23 (in the middle of the Old Testament - the 1st half of the Bible)

2. Read Psalm 91

3. Read the Books in the New Testament (in the Bible) of John, Romans & I John

4. Tell someone of your prayer and your seeking God. Share that with someone close to you.

5. Obtain some of the books on the list of books, and begin to read

them, so that you can understand more about God and how He works.

6. Pray, that is - just talk to and with God, thank Him for saving you, and tell him your

fears and concerns, and ask him for help and guidance.

7. email or tell someone about the great decision you have made today m

Does the "being saved" process only work for those who believe ?

For the person who is not yet saved, their understanding of 1) their state of sin and 2) God's personal love and care for them, and His desire and ability to save them....is what enables anyone to become saved.

So yes, the "being saved" process works only for those

who believe in J esus Christ and Him only, and place their faith in Him and in His work done on the Cross.

■ ■■and if so , then how does believing save a person?

Believing saves a person because of what it allows God to do in the Heart and Soul of that person.

But it is not simply the fact of a "belief". The issue is not having "belief" but rather what we have a belief about.

IF a person believes in Salvation by Faith Alone in Jesus Christ (ask us by email if this is not clear), then That belief saves them. Why ? because they are magical ? No, because of the sovereignty of God, because of what God does to them, when they ask him into their heart & life. When a person decides to place their faith in Jesus Christ and ask Him to forgive them of

their sins and invite Jesus Christ into their life & heart, this is what saves them - because of what God does for them at that moment in time.

At that moment in time when they sincerely believe and ask God to save them (as described above), God takes the life of that person, and in accordance with the will of that human, having requested God to save them from their sins through Jesus Christ - God takes that person's life and sins [all sins past, present and future], and allocates them to the category: of "one of those people who Accepted the Free Gift of Eternal Salvation that God offers".

From that point forward, their sins are no longer counted against them, because that is an account that is paid by the shed blood of Jesus Christ. And there is no person that could ever sin so much, that God's love would not be good enough for them, or that would somehow not be able to be covered by the penalty of

death that Jesus Christ paid the price for. (otherwise, sin would be more powerful than Jesus Christ - which is not true).

Sometimes, People have trouble believing in Jesus Christ because of two extremes:

First the extreme that they are not sinners (usually, this means that a person has not committed a "serious" sin, such as "murder", but God says that all sins separates us from God, even supposedly-small sins. We - as humans - tend to evaluate sin into more serious and less serious categories, because we do not understand just how serious "small" sin is).

Since we are all sinners, we all have a need for God, in order to have eternal salvation.

Second the extreme that they are notgood enough for Jesus Christ to save them. This is basically done by those who reject the Free offer of Salvation by Christ Jesus because those people are -literally - unwilling

to believe. After death, they will believe, but they can only chose Eternal Life BEFORE they die. The fact is that all of us, are not good enough for Jesus Christ to save them. That is why Paul wrote in the Bible "For all have sinned, and come short of the glory of God" (Romans 3:23).

Thankfully, that is not the end of the story, because he also wrote " For the wages of sin is death; but the gift of God is eternal life through Jesus Christ our Lord. "(Romans 6: 23)

That Free offer of salvation is clarified in the following passage:

John 3: 16 For God so loved the world, that he gave his only begotten Son, that whosoever believeth in him should not perish, but have everlasting life. 17 For God sent not his Son into the world to condemn the world; but that the world through him might be saved.

Prayers that count

The prayers that God hears

We don't make the rules any more than you do. We just want to help others know how to reach God, and know that God cares about them personally.

The only prayers that make it to Heaven where God dwells are those prayers that are prayed directly to Him "through Jesus Christ" or "in the name of Jesus Chrisf.

God hears our prayers because we obey the method that God has established for us to be able to reach him. If we want Him to hear us, then we must use the methods that He has given us to communicate with Him.

And he explains - in the New Testament - what that method is: talking to God (praying) in accordance with God's will - and coming to Him in the name of Jesus Christ. Here are some examples of that from the New Testament:

(Acts 3:6) Then Peter said, Silver and gold have I none; but such as I have give I thee: In the name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth rise up and walk.

(Acts 16:18) And this did she many days. But Paul, being grieved, turned and said to the spirit, I command thee in the name of Jesus Christ to come out of her. And he came out the same hour.

(Acts 9:27) But Barnabas took him, and brought him to the apostles, and declared unto them how he had seen the Lord in the way, and that he had spoken to him, and how he had preached boldly at Damascus in the name of Jesus.

(2 Cor 3:4) And such trust have we through Christ to God-ward: (i.e. toward God)

(Gal 4:7) Wherefore thou art no more a servant, but a son; and if a son, then an heir of God through Christ. (Eph 2:7) That in the ages to come he might show the exceeding [spiritual] riches of his grace in his kindness toward us through Christ Jesus.

(Phil 4:7) And the peace of God, which passeth all understanding, shall keep your hearts and minds through Christ Jesus.

(Acts 4:2) Being grieved that they taught the people, and preached through Jesus the resurrection from the dead.

(Rom 1:8) First, I thank my God through Jesus Christ for you all, that your faith is spoken of throughout the whole world.

(Rom 6:11) Likewise reckon ye also yourselves to be dead indeed unto sin,

but alive unto God through Jesus Christ our Lord.

(Rom 6:23) For the wages of sin is death; but the gift of God is eternal life through Jesus Christ our Lord.

(Rom 15:17) I have therefore whereof I may glory through Jesus Christ in those things which pertain to God.

(Rom 16:27) To God only wise, be glory through Jesus Christ for ever. Amen.

(1 Pet 4:11) ...if any man minister, let him do it as of the ability which God giveth: that God in all things may be glorified through Jesus Christ, to whom be praise and dominion for ever and ever. Amen.

(Gal 3:14) That the blessing of Abraham might come on the Gentiles through Jesus Christ; that we might receive the promise of the [Holy] Spirit through faith.

(Titus 3:6) Which he shed on us abundantly through Jesus Christ our Saviour;

(Heb 13:21) Make you perfect in every good work to do his will, working in you that which is wellpleasing in his sight, through Jesus Christ; to whom be glory for ever and ever. Amen.

Anyone who has guestions is encouraged to contact us bv email, with the address that is posted on our website.

Note for Foreign Language and International Readers & Users

Foreign Language Versions of the Introduction and Postcript/Afterword will be included (hopefully) in future editions.

IF a person wanted to become a Christian, what would they pray ?

God, I am praying this to you so that you will help me. Please help me to want to know you better. Please help me to become a Christian.

God I admit that I am not perfect. I understand that you cannot allow anyone into Heaven who is not perfect and Holy. I understand that if I believe in Jesus Christ and in what He did, that God you will see my life through the sacrifice of Jesus Christ, and that this will allow me to have eternal life and know that I am going to Heaven.

God, I admit that I have sin and things in my life that are not perfect. I know I have sinned in my life. Please forgive me of my sins. I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God, that He came to Earth to save those who ask Him, and that He died to pay the penalty for all of my sins.

I understand that Jesus physically died and physically arose from the dead, and that God can forgive me because of the death and resurrection of Jesus Christ. I thank you for dying for me, and for paying the price for my sins. I accept to believe in you, and I thank you Lord God from all of my heart for your help and for sending your Son to die and raise from the Dead.

I pray that you would help me to read your word the Bible. I renounce anything in my life, my thoughts and my actions that is not from you, and I do this in the name of Jesus Christ. Help me to not be spiritually deceived. Help me to grow and learn how to have a strong Christian walk for you, and to be a good example, with your help. Help me to have and develop a love of your word the Bible, and please bring to my life, people and situations that will help me to understand how to live my life as your servant. Help me to learn how to share the good news with those who may be willing to learn or to know. I ask these things in the name of Jesus Christ, and I thank you for what you have done for me, Amen.

Please Remember: Christianity is NEVER forced. No one can

force anyone to become a Christian. God does NOT recognize

any desire for Him, unless it is genuine and motivated from

the inside of each of us.

Prayers for help to God

In MANY LANGUAGES

For YOU, for US, for your Family

Dear God,

Thank you that this New Testament has been released so

that we are able to learn more about you.

Please help the people responsible for making this Electronic book available. Please help them to be able to work fast, and make more Electronic books available Please help them to have all the resources, the money, the strength and the time that they need in order to be able to keep working for You.

Please help those that are part of the team that help them on an everyday basis. Please give them the strength to continue and give each of them the spiritual understanding for the work that you want them to do. Please help each of them to not have fear and to remember that you are the God who answers prayer and who is in charge of everything.

I pray that you would encourage them,

and that you protect them, and the work & ministry that they

are engaged in. I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual Forces or other obstacles that could harm them or slow them down.

Please help me when I use this New Testament to also think of the people who have made this edition available, so that I can pray for them and so they can continue to help more people

I pray that you would give me a love of your Holy Word (the New Testament), and that you would give me spiritual wisdom and discernment to know you better and to understand the period of time that we are living in. Please help me to know how to deal with the difficulties that I am confronted with every day. Lord God, Help me to want to know you Better and to want to help other Christians in my area and around the world.

I pray that you would give the Electronic book team and those who work on the website and those who help them your wisdom.

I pray that you would help the individual members of their family (and my family) to not be spiritually deceived, but to understand you and to want to accept and follow you in every way. and I ask you to do these things in the name of Jesus, Amen,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

5 minutos a ayudar excepto otros - diferencie eterno

Dios querido,

gracias que se ha lanzado este nuevo testamento

de modo que poder aprender mas sobre usted.

Ayude por favor a la gente responsable de hacer este Ebook disponible.

Ayudele por favor a poder trabajar rapidamente, y haga que

mas Ebooks disponible por favor le ayuda a tener todos los recursos,

los fondos, la fuerza y el tiempo que necesitan

para poder guardar el trabajar para usted.

Ayude por favor a los que sean parte del equipo que

les ayuda sobre una base diaria. Por favor deles la fuerza para continuar

y para dar a cada uno de ellos la comprension espiritual para el trabajo que usted quisiera que hicieran. Ayude por favor a cada uno de ellos a no tener miedo y a no recordar que usted es el dios que contesta

a rezo y que esta a cargo de todo.

Ruego que usted los animara, y que usted los proteja,

y el trabajo y el ministerio que estan contratados adentro.

Ruego que usted los protegiera contra las fuerzas espirituales

que podrian danarlas o retardarlas abajo. Ayudeme por favor cuando

utilizo este nuevo testamento tambien para pensar en ellas de modo

que pueda rogar para ellas y asi que pueden continuar ayudando a mas gente Ruego que usted me diera un amor de su palabra santa, y que usted me daria la sabiduria y el discernimiento espirituales

para conocerle mejor y para entender los tiempos que estamos adentro y como ocuparse de las dificultades que me enfrentan con cada dia. Senor God, me ayuda a desear conocerle mejor y desear ayudar a otros cristianos en mi area y alrededor del mundo. Ruego que usted diera el Web site y los de Ebook el equipo y los que trabajan en

que les ayudan su sabiduria. Ruego que usted ayudara a los miembros individuales de su familia (y de mi familia) espiritual a no ser engahado,

pero entenderle y desear aceptarle y seguir de cada manera. y pido que usted haga estas cosas en el nombre de Jesus, amen, i

(por que lo hacemos tradujeron esto a muchas idiomas?

Porque necesitamos a tanto rezo como sea posible,

y a tanta gente que ruega para nosotros y el este ministerio

tan a menudo como sea posible. Gracias por su ayuda.

El rezo es una de las mejores maneras que usted puede ayudarnos mas)

Hungarian

Hungary, Hungarian, Hungary Hungarian Maygar PrayerJ ezus Krisztus

Imadsag hoz Isten Hogyan viselkedni Imadkozik hoz tud hall az en m

viselkedni kerdez ad segitszamomra

Hungarian - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God - explained in Hungarian Language

Beszelo -hoz Isten , a Alkoto -bol Vilagegyetem , a Lord :

1. amit 6n akar ad szamomra a batorsag -hoz imadkozik a dolog amit Vennem kell imadkozik

2. amit 6n akar ad szamomra a batorsag -hoz hisz 6n es elfogad amit akrsz fgy csinalni eletemmel , helyett en felemel az en -m sajat akarat ( szandek ) fenti one.

3. amit 6n akar add nekem segit -hoz nem enged az en -m fel -bol ismeretlen -hoz valik a kifogas , vagy a alap ertem nem -hoz szolgal you.

4. amit 6n akar add nekem segit -hoz lat es -hoz megtanul hogyan viselkedni volna a szellemi ero Szuksegem van ( atmeno -a szo a Biblia ) egy ) reszere a esemeny elore es b betii ) reszere az en -m sajat szemelyes szellemi utazas.

5. Amit 6n Isten akar add nekem segit -hoz akar -hoz szolgal On tobb

6. Amit 6n akar emlekeztet en -hoz -val beszel 6n prayerwhen ) En csalodott vagy -ban nehezseg , helyett kiprobalas -hoz hatarozat dolog en magam egyetlen atmeno az en -m emberi ero.

7. Amit 6n akar add nekem Bolcsesseg es egy sziv toltott - val Bibliai Bolcsesseg azert EN akar szolgal 6n tobb hatekonyan.

8. Amit 6n akar adjon nekem egy -t vagy -hoz dolgozoszoba -a szo , a Biblia ,( a Uj Vegrendelet Evangelium -bol Budi ), -ra egy szemelyes alap

9. amit 6n akar ad segitseg szamomra azert En kepes -hoz eszrevesz dolog -ban Biblia ( -a szo ) melyik EN tud szemelyesen elmond -hoz , es amit akarat segitsen nekem ert amit akrsz en -hoz csinal eletemben.

10. Amit 6n akar add nekem nagy itelokepesseg , -hoz ert hogyan viselkedni megmagyaraz -hoz masikak ki 6n , es amit EN akar kepesnek lenni megtenni megtanul hogyan viselkedni megtanul es tud hogyan viselkedni kiall mellett 6n es en -a szo ( a Biblia )

1 1 . Amit 6n akar hoz emberek ( vagy websites ) eletemben ki akar -hoz tud 6n es en , ki van eros -ban -uk pontos megertes -bol 6n ( Isten ); es Amit 6n akar hoz emberek ( vagy websites ) eletemben ki lesz kepes -hoz batorit en -hoz pontosan megtanul hogyan viselkedni feloszt a Biblia a szo - bol igazsag (2 Komocsin 215:).

12. Amit 6n akar segitsen nekem -hoz megtanul -hoz volna nagy megertes korulbelul melyik Biblia valtozat van legjobb , melyik van a leg— bb pontos , es melyik birtokol a leg— bb szellemi ero & ero , es melyik valtozat egyeztet -val a eredeti kezirat amit 6n ihletett a froi hivatas -bol Uj Vegrendelet -hoz fr.

13. Amit 6n akar ad segit szamomra -hoz hasznal idom -ban egy jo ut , es nem -hoz elpusztit idom -ra Hamis vagy iires modszer kozelebb keriilni -hoz Isten ( de amit van nem

hiisegesen Bibliai ), es hol azok modszer termel nem hosszu ideje vagy tartos szellemi gyiimolcs.

14. Amit 6n akar ad segitseg szamomra -hoz ert mit tenni keres -ban egy templom vagy egy istentisztelet helye , mi fajta -bol kerdes -hoz kerdez , es amit 6n akar segitsen nekem -hoz talai hivok vagy egy lelkesz -val nagy szellemi bolcsesseg helyett konnyii vagy hamis valaszol.

15. amit 6n akar okoz en -hoz emlekszik -hoz memorizal -a szo a Biblia ( mint Romaiak 8), azert EN tud volna ez szivemben es volna az en -m torodik elokeszitett , es lenni kesz ad egy valaszol -hoz masikak -bol remel amit Nekem van koriilbelul 6n.

16. Amit 6n akar hoz segit szamomra azert az en -m sajat teologia es tetelek -hoz egyeterteni -a szo , a Biblia es amit 6n akar folytatodik segiteni neki en tud hogyan az en -m megertes -bol doktrina lehet kozmiivesitett azert az en -m sajat elet , eletmod es megertes folytatodik -hoz lenni zaro - hoz amit akrsz ez -hoz lenni ertem.

17. Amit 6n akar nyit az en -m szellemi bepillantas ( kovetkeztetes ) tobb es tobb , es amit hol az en -m megertes vagy eszrevetel -bol 6n van nem pontos , amit 6n akar segitsen nekem -hoz megtanul ki Jezus Krisztus hiisegesen van.

18. Amit 6n akar ad segit szamomra azert EN akar kepesnek lenni megtenni szetvalaszt akarmi hamis ritusok melyik Nekem van fiigges -ra , -bol -a tiszta tanitas -ban Biblia , ha akarmi mibol En alabbiak van nem -bol Isten , vagy van ellenkezo -hoz amit akrsz -hoz tanit minket koriilbelul alabbiak 6n.

19. Amit akarmi kenyszerit -bol rossz akar nem eltesz akarmi szellemi megertes melyik Nekem van , de elegge amit EN akar megtart a tudas -bol hogyan viselkedni tud 6n es en nem -hoz lenni tevedesben lenni ezekben a napokban - bol szellemi csalas.

20. Amit 6n akar hoz szellemi ero es segit szamomra azert EN akarat nem -hoz lenni resze a Nagy Eses El vagy -bol akarmi mozgalom melyik akar lenni lelkileg utanzott -hoz 6n es en -hoz -a Szent Szo

21. Amit ha van akarmi amit Nekem van megtett eletemben , vagy barmilyen modon amit Nekem van nem alperes -hoz 6n ahogy ettem kellet volna volna es ez minden megakadalyozas en -bol egyik gyaloglas veled , vagy birtoklas megertes , amit 6n akar hoz azok dolog / valasz / esemeny vissza bele az en -m torodik , azert EN akar lemond oket neveben Jezus Krisztus , es mind az osszes -uk hat es kovetkezmeny , es amit 6n akar helyettesit akarmi uresseg ,sadness vagy ketsegbeeses eletemben -val a Orom - bol Lord , es amit EN akar lenni tobb fokuszalva tanulas - hoz kovet 6n mellett olvaso -a szo , a Biblia

22. Amit 6n akar nyit az en -m szemek azert EN akar kepesnek lenni megtenni vilagosan lat es felismer ha van egy Nagy Csalas korulbelul Szellemi tema , hogyan viselkedni ert ez jelenseg ( vagy ezek esemeny ) -bol egy Bibliai perspektiva , es amit 6n akar add nekem bolcsesseg - hoz tud es lgy amit EN akarat megtanul hogyan viselkedni segit barataim es szeretett egyek ( rokon ) nem lenni resze it.

23. Amit 6n akar biztosit amit egyszer az en -m szemek van kinyitott es az en -m torodik ert a szellemi jelentoseg -bol idoszerii esemeny bevetel hely a vilagon , amit 6n akar elokeszit szivem elfogadtatni magam -a igazsag , es amit 6n akar segitsen nekem ert hogyan viselkedni talai batorsag es

ero atmeno -a Szent Szo , a Biblia. Neveben Jezus Krisztus , En kerdezek mindezekert igazol kivansagom -hoz lenni -ban megallapodas -a akarat , es En kerdezes reszere -a bolcsesseg es kocsit berelni szerelem -bol Igazsag Amen

Tobb alul -bol Oldal Hogyan viselkedni volna Orokelet

Vagyunk boldog ha ez oldalra dol ( -bol imadsag kereslet - hoz Isten ) van kepes -hoz tamogat 6n. Mi ert ez majus nem lenni a legjobb vagy a leg— bb hatasos forditas. Mi ert amit vannak sok kiilonbozo ways -bol kifejezheto gondolkodas es szoveg. Ha onnek van egy javaslat reszere egy jobb forditas , vagy ha tetszene neked -hoz fog egy kicsi osszeg -bol idod -hoz kiild javaslatok hozzank , lesz lenni eteladag ezer -bol mas emberek is , ki akarat akkor olvas a kozmiivesitett forditas. Mi gyakran volna egy Uj Vegrendelet elerheto -ban -a nyelv vagy -ban nyelvek amit van ritka vagy regi. Ha 6n latszo reszere egy Uj Vegrendelet -ban egy kulonleges nyelv , legyen szives fr hozzank. Is , akarunk hogy biztosak legyiink es megprobal -hoz kommunikal amit neha , megtessziik felajanl konyv amit van nem Szabad es amit csinal ar penz. De ha 6n nem tud ad nehanyuk elektronikus konyv , mi tud gyakran csinal egy cserel -bol elektronikus konyv reszere segit -val forditas vagy forditas dolgozik. Csinalsz nem kell lenni profi munkas , csak keves szabalyos szemely akit erdekel eteladag. Onnek kellene volna egy szamitogep vagy onnek kellene volna belepes -hoz egy szamitogep -on -a helyi konyvtar vagy kollegium vagy egyetem , ota azok altalaban volna jobb kapcsolatok -hoz Internet.

Tudod is altalaban alapft -a sajat szemelyes SZABAD elektronikus posta szamla mellett halado mail.yahoo.com

Legyen szives fog egy pillanat -hoz talai a elektronikus posta cim elhelyezett alul vagy a veg ebbol oldal. Mi remel lesz kiild elektronikus posta hozzank , ha ez -bol segit vagy batoritas. Mi is batorit 6n -hoz kapcsolat minket vonatkozolag Elektronikus Konyv hogy tudunk felajanl amit van nelkiil ar , es szabad.

MegtessziAk volna sok konyv -ban kiAlfoldi nyelvek , de megtesszuk nem mindig hely oket -hoz kap elektronikusan ( letolt ) mert mi egyetlen csinal elerheto a konyv vagy a tema amit van a leg— bb kereslet. Mi batorit 6n -hoz folytatodik - hoz imadkozik -hoz Isten es -hoz folytatodik -hoz megtanul rola mellett olvaso a Uj Vegrendelet. Mi szivesen lat -a kerdes es magyarazat mellett elektronikus posta.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Italian

Italian- Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God - explained in Italian Language

italian prayer jesus Cristo Preghiera come pregare al del dio il dio puo sentirsi preghiera come chiedere dio di dare allaiuto me

Parlando al dio, il creatore dell'universo, il signore:

1. che dareste me al coraggio pregare le cose di che ho bisogno per pregare

2. che dareste me al coraggio crederli ed accettare che cosa desiderate fare con la mia vita, anziche me che exalting il miei propri volonta (intenzione) sopra il vostro.

3. che mi dareste l'aiuto per non lasciare i miei timori dello sconosciuto transformarsi in nelle giustificazioni, o la base per me per non servirlo.

4. che mi dareste l'aiuto per vedere ed imparare come avere la resistenza spiritosa io abbia bisogno (con la vostra parola bibbia) di a) per gli eventi avanti e b) per il mio proprio viaggio spiritoso personale.

5. Che dio mi dareste l'aiuto per desiderare servirli di piu

6. Che mi ricordereste comunicare con voi (prayer)when io sono frustrati o in difficolta, invece di provare a risolvere le cose io stesso soltanto con la mia resistenza umana.

7. Che mi dareste la saggezza e un cuore si e riempito di saggezza biblica in modo che li servissi piu efficacemente.

8. Che mi dareste un desiderio studiare la vostra parola, la bibbia, (il nuovo gospel del Testamento di John), a titolo personale,

9. che dareste ad assistenza me in modo che possa notare le cose nella bibbia (la vostra parola) a cui posso riferire personalmente ed a che lo aiutera a capire che cosa lo desiderate fare nella mia vita.

10. Che mi dareste il discernment grande, per capire come spiegare ad altri che siate e che potrei imparare come imparare e sapere levarsi in piedi in su per voi e la vostra parola (bibbia)

1 1 . Che portereste la gente (o i Web site) nella mia vita che desidera conoscerla e che e forte nella loro comprensione esatta di voi (dio); e quello portereste la gente (o i Web site) nella mia vita che potra consigliarmi imparare esattamente come dividere la bibbia la parola della verita (2 coda di todo 2:15).

12. Che lo aiutereste ad imparare avere comprensione grande circa quale versione della bibbia e la cosa migliore, che e la piu esatta e che ha la resistenza & l'alimentazione piu spiritose e che la versione accosente con i manoscritti originali che avete ispirato gli autori di nuovo Testamento scrivere.

13. Che dareste l'aiuto me per usare il mio tempo in un buon senso e per non sprecare il mio tempo sui metodi falsi o vuoti di ottenere piu vicino al dio (ma a quello non sia allineare biblico) e dove quei metodi non producono frutta spiritosa di lunga durata o durevole.

14. Che dareste l'assistenza me capire che cosa cercare in una chiesa o in un posto di culto, che generi di domande da chiedere e che lo aiutereste a trovare i believers o un pastor con saggezza spiritosa grande anziche le risposte facili o false.

15. di che lo indurreste a ricordarsi per memorizzare la vostra parola la bibbia (quale Romans 8), di modo che posso averlo nel mio cuore e fare la mia prepararsi mente ed e

aspetti per dare una risposta ad altre della speranza che ho circa voi.

16. Che portereste l'aiuto me in modo che la mie proprie teologia e dottrine per accosentire con la vostra parola, la bibbia e che continuereste a aiutarli a sapere la mia comprensione della dottrina puo essere migliorata in modo che la miei propri vita, lifestyle e capire continui ad essere piu vicino a che cosa lo desiderate essere per me.

17. Che aprireste la mia comprensione spiritosa (conclusioni) di piu e piu e che dove la mia comprensione o percezione di voi non e esatta, che lo aiutereste ad imparare chi Jesus Christ allineare e.

18. Che dareste l'aiuto me in modo che possa separare tutti i rituali falsi da cui ho dipeso, dai vostri insegnamenti liberi nella bibbia, se c'e ne di che cosa sono seguente non e del dio, o e contrari a che cosa desiderate per insegnarli - circa quanto segue.

19. Che alcune forze della malvagita non toglierebbero la comprensione affatto spiritosa che abbia, ma piuttosto che mantennrei la conoscenza di come conoscerli e non essere ingannato dentro attualmente di inganno spiritoso.

20. Che portereste la resistenza spiritosa ed aiutereste a me in modo che non faccia parte del ritirarsi grande o di alcun movimento che sarebbe spiritual falsificato a voi ed alla vostra parola santa.

21. Quello se ci e qualche cosa che faccia nella mia vita, o qualsiasi senso che non ho risposto a voi come dovrei avere e quello sta impedendomi di camminare con voi, o avere capire, che portereste quei things/responses/events nuovamente dentro la mia mente, di modo che rinuncerei

loro in nome di Jesus Christ e tutte i loro effetti e conseguenze e che sostituireste tutta la emptiness, tristezza o disperazione nella mia vita con la gioia del signore e che di piu sarei messo a fuoco sull'imparare seguirli leggendo la vostra parola, bibbia.

22. Che aprireste i miei ocehi in modo che possa vedere e riconoseere chiaramente se ci e un inganno grande cirea i soggetti spiritosi, come capire questo fenomeno (o questi eventi) da una prospettiva biblica e che mi dareste la saggezza per sapere ed in modo che impari come aiutare i miei amici ed amavo ones (parenti) per non fare parte di esso.

23. Che vi accertereste che i miei ocehi siano aperti una volta e la mia mente capisce l'importanza spiritosa degli eventi correnti che avvengono nel mondo, che abbiate preparato il mio cuore per accettare la vostra verita e che lo aiutereste a capire come trovare il coraggio e la resistenza con la vostra parola santa, la bibbia. In nome di Jesus Christ, chiedo queste cose che confermano il mio desiderio essere nell'accordo la vostra volonta e sto chiedendo la vostra saggezza ed avere un amore della verita, Amen.

Piu in calce alla pagina come avere vita Eterna

Siamo felici se questa lista (delle richieste di preghiera al dio) puo aiutarli. Capiamo che questa non puo essere la traduzione migliore o piu efficace. Capiamo che ci sono molti sensi differenti di esprimere i pensieri e le parole. Se avete un suggerimento per una traduzione migliore, o se

voleste occorrere una piccola quantita di vostro tempo di trasmettere i suggerimenti noi, aiuterete i migliaia della gente inoltre, che allora leggera la traduzione migliorata. Abbiamo spesso un nuovo Testamento disponibile in vostra lingua o nelle lingue che sono rare o vecchie.

Se state cercando un nuovo Testamento in una lingua specifica, scriva prego noi. Inoltre, desideriamo essere sicuri e proviamo a comunicare a volte quello, offriamo i libri che non sono liberi e che costano i soldi. Ma se non potete permettersi alcuni di quei libri elettronici, possiamo fare spesso uno scambio di libri elettronici per aiuto con la traduzione o il lavoro di traduzione.

Non dovete essere un operaio professionista, solo una persona normale che e interessata nell'assistenza. Dovreste avere un calcolatore o dovreste avere accesso ad un calcolatore alla vostra biblioteca o universita o universita locale, poiche quelli hanno solitamente collegamenti migliori al Internet. Potete anche stabilire solitamente il vostro proprio cliente LIBERO personale della posta elettronica andando al ### di mail.yahoo.com prego occorrete un momen to per trovare l'indirizzo della posta elettronica situato alla parte inferiore o all'estremita di questa pagina. Speriamo che trasmettiate la posta elettronica noi, se questa e di aiuto o di incoraggiamento. Inoltre vi consigliamo metterseli in contatto con riguardo ai libri elettronici che offriamo quello siamo senza costo e

che libero abbiamo molti libri nelle lingue straniere, ma non le disponiamo sempre per ricevere elettronicamente (trasferimento dai sistema centrale verso i satelliti) perche rendiamo soltanto disponibile i libri o i soggetti che sono chiesti. Vi consigliamo continuare a pregare al dio ed a continuare ad imparare circa lui leggendo il nuovo

Testamento. Accogliamo favorevolmente le vostre domande ed osservazioni da posta elettronica

Preghiera al dio Caro Dio, Grazie che questo gospel o questo nuovo Testamento e stato liberato in modo che possiamo impararvi piu circa. Aiuti prego la gente responsabile del rendere questo litaro elettronico disponibile. Conoscete che chi sono e potete aiutarle.

Aiutile prego a potere funzionare velocemente e renda i libri piu elettronici disponibili Aiutili prego ad avere tutte le risorse, i soldi, la resistenza ed il tempo di che hanno bisogno per potere continuare a funzionare per voi. Aiuti prego quelli che fanno parte della squadra che le aiuta su una base giornaliere. Prego dia loro la resistenza per continuare e dare ciascuno di loro la comprensione spiritosa per il lavoro che li desiderate fare. Aiuti loro prego ciascuno a non avere timore ed a non ricordarsi di che siete il dio che risponde alla preghiera e che e incaricato di tutto. Prego che consigliereste loro e che li proteggete ed il lavoro & il ministero che sono agganciati dentro.

Prego che li proteggereste dalle forze spiritose o da altri ostacoli che potrebbero nuoc o ritardarli giu. Aiutilo prego quando uso questo nuovo Testamento anche per pensare alla gente che ha reso questa edizione disponibile, di modo che posso pregare per loro ed in modo da puo continuare a aiutare piu gente.

Prego che mi dareste un amore della vostra parola santa (il nuovo Testamento) e che mi dareste la saggezza ed il discernment spiritosi per conoscerli meglio e per capire il

periodo di tempo ou stiamo vivendo. Aiutilo prego a sapere risolvere le difficolta che sono confrontato con ogni giorno. II signore God, lo aiuta a desiderare conoscerli piu meglio e desiderare aiutare altri cristiani nella mia zona ed intorno al mondo.

Prego che dareste la squadra elettronica e coloro del libro che le aiuta la vostra saggezza.

Prego che aiutereste i diversi membri della loro famiglia (e della mia famiglia) spiritual a non essere ingannati, ma capirli e desiderare accettarli e seguire in ogni senso. Inoltre diaci la comodita ed il consiglio in questi periodi ed io vi chiedono di fare queste cose in nome di Jesus, amen,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

PORTUGUESE PORTUGUESE

Portuguese PrayerCristo Pedidoa DeusComoorara Deus podemouvirmy pedido perguntar Deus darajuda a me Portuguese - Prayer Requests (praying / Talkin g) to God - explained in Portugues (Portugues) Language

Falando ao deus, o criador do universo, senhor:

1 . que voce daria a mim a coragem pray as coisas que eu necessito pray

2. que voce daria a mim a coragem o acreditar e aceitar o que voce quer fazer com minha vida, em vez de mim que exalting meus proprios vontade (intencao) acima de seu.

3. que voce me daria a ajuda para nao deixar meus medos do desconhecido se transformar as desculpas, ou a base para mim para nao lhe servir.

4. que voce me daria a ajuda para ver e aprender como ter a forca espiritual mim necessite (com sua palavra o bible) a) para os eventos adiante e b) para minha propria viagem espiritual pessoal.

5. Que voce deus me daria a ajuda para querer lhe servir mais

6. Que voce me lembraria falar com voce (prayer)when me sao frustrados ou na dificuldade, em vez de tentar resolver coisas eu mesmo somente com minha forca humana.

7. Que voce me daria a sabedoria e um coracao encheu-se com a sabedoria biblical de modo que eu lhe servisse mais eficazmente.

8. Que voce me daria um desejo estudar sua palavra, o bible, (o gospel do testament novo de John), em uma base pessoal,

9. que voce daria a auxflio a mim de modo que eu pudesse observar coisas no bible (sua palavra) a que eu posso pessoalmente se relacionar, e a que me ajudara compreender o que voce me quer fazer em minha vida.

10. Que voce me daria o discernment grande, para compreender como explicar a outro que voce e, e que eu

poderia aprender como aprender e saber estar acima para voce e sua palavra (o bible)

1 1 . Que voce traria os povos (ou os Web site) em minha vida que querem o conhecer, e que sao fortes em sua compreensao exata de voce (deus); e isso voce traria povos (ou Web site) em minha vida que podera me incentivar aprender exatamente como dividir o bible a palavra da verdade (2 timothy 2: 15).

12. Que voce me ajudaria aprender ter a compreensao grande sobre que versao do bible e a mais melhor, que sao a mais exata, e que tem a forca & o poder os mais espirituais, e que a versao concorda com os manuscritos originais que voce inspirou os autores do testament novo escrever.

13. Que voce me daria a ajuda para usar meu tempo em uma maneira boa, e para nao desperdicar minha hora em metodos falsos ou vazios de comecar mais perto do deus (mas daquele nao seja verdadeiramente biblical), e onde aqueles metodos nao produzem nenhuma fruta espiritual a longo prazo ou duravel.

14. Que voce me daria o auxflio compreender o que procurar em uma igreja ou em um lugar da adoracao, que tipos das perguntas a pedir, e que voce me ajudaria encontrar believers ou um pastor com sabedoria espiritual grande em vez das respostas faceis ou falsas. 15. que voce faria com que eu recordasse memorizar sua palavra o bible (tal como Romans 8), de modo que eu pudesse o ter em meu coracao e ter minha mente preparada, e estivessem pronto para dar uma resposta a outra da esperanca que eu tenho sobre voce.

16. Que voce me traria a ajuda de modo que meus proprios theology e doutrinas para concordar com sua palavra, o

bible e que voce continuaria a me ajudar saber minha compreensao da doutrina pode ser melhorada de modo que meus proprios vida, lifestyle e compreensao continuem a ser mais perto de o que voce a quer ser para mim.

17. Que voce abriria minha introspeccao espiritual (conclusoes) mais e mais, e que onde minha compreensao ou percepcao de voce nao sao exata, que voce me ajudaria aprender quem Jesus Christ e verdadeiramente.

18. Que voce me daria a ajuda de modo que eu possa separar todos os rituals falsos de que eu depender, de seus ensinos desobstruidos no bible, se alguma de o que eu sou seguinte nao sao do deus, nem sao contrarias a o que voce quer nos ensinar - sobre o seguir.

19. Que nenhumas forcas do evil nao removeriam a compreensao espiritual que eu tenho, mas rather que eu reteria o conhecimento de como o conhecer e nao ser iludido nestes dias do deception espiritual.

20. Que voce traria a forca espiritual e me ajudaria de modo que eu nao seja parte da queda grande afastado ou de nenhum movimento que fosse espiritual forjado a voce e a sua palavra holy.

21. Isso se houver qualquer coisa que eu fiz em minha vida, ou alguma maneira que eu nao lhe respondi como eu devo ter e aquela esta impedindo que eu ande com voce, ou ter a compreensao, que voce traria aqueles things/responses/events para tras em minha mente, de modo que eu os renunciasse no nome de Jesus Christ, e em todas seus efeitos e consequencias, e que voce substituiria todo o emptiness, sadness ou desespero em minha vida com a alegria do senhor, e que eu estaria focalizado mais na aprendizagem o seguir lendo sua palavra, o bible.

22. Que voce abriria meus olhos de modo que eu possa ver e reconhecer claramente se houver um deception grande sobre topicos espirituais, como compreender este fenomeno (ou estes eventos) de um perspective biblical, e que voce me daria a sabedoria para saber e de modo que eu aprenderei como ajudar a meus amigos e amei (parentes) nao ser parte dela.

23. Que voce se asseguraria de que meus olhos estejam abertos uma vez e minha mente compreende o significado espiritual dos eventos atuais que ocorrem no mundo, que voce prepararia meu coracao para aceitar sua verdade, e que voce me ajudaria compreender como encontrar a coragem e a forca com sua palavra holy, o bible. No nome de Jesus Christ, eu peco estas coisas que confirmam meu desejo ser no acordo sua vontade, e eu estou pedindo sua sabedoria e para ter um amor da verdade, Amen.

Mais no fundo da pagina como ter a vida eternal

Nos estamos contentes se esta lista (de pedidos do prayer ao deus) puder lhe ajudar. Nos compreendemos que esta nao pode ser a mais melhor ou traducao a mais eficaz. Nos compreendemos que ha muitas maneiras diferentes de expressar pensamentos e palavras. Se voce tiver uma sugestao para uma traducao melhor, ou se voce gostar de fazer exame de um pouco de seu tempo nos emitir sugestoes, voce estara ajudando a milhares dos povos tambem, que lerao entao a traducao melhorada. Nos temos frequentemente um testament novo disponivel em sua lingua ou nas linguas que sao raras ou velhas. Se voce estiver procurando um testament novo em uma lingua especifica, escreva-nos por favor.

Tambem, nos queremos ser certos e tentamos comunicar as vezes isso, nos oferecemos os livros que nao estao livres e que custam o dinheiro. Mas se voce nao puder ter recursos para alguns daqueles livros eletronicos, nos podemos frequentemente fazer uma troca de livros eletronicos para a ajuda com traducao ou trabalho da traducao. Voce nao tem que ser um trabalhador profissional, only uma pessoa regular que esteja interessada na ajuda.

Voce deve ter um computador ou voce deve ter o acesso a um computador em sua biblioteca ou faculdade ou universidade local, desde que aqueles tem geralmente conexoes melhores ao Internet.

Voce pode tambem geralmente estabelecer seu proprio cliente LIVRE pessoal do correio eletronico indo ao ### de mail.yahoo.com faz exame por favor de um momento para encontrar o endereco do correio eletronico ficado situado no fundo ou na extremidade desta pagina. Nos esperamos que voce nos emita o correio eletronico, se este for da ajuda ou do incentivo. Nos incentivamo-lo tambem contatar-nos a respeito dos livros eletronicos que nos oferecemos a isso somos sem custo, e

que livre nos temos muitos livros em linguas extrangeiras, mas nos nao as colocamos sempre para receber eletronicamente (download) porque nos fazemos somente disponivel os livros ou os topicos que sao os mais pedidos. Nos incentivamo-lo continuar a pray ao deus e a continuar a aprender sobre ele lendo o testament novo. Nos damos boas- vindas a seus perguntas e comentarios pelo correio eletronico.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Estimado Dios , Gracias aquel esto Nuevo Testamen to has estado disparador a fin de que nosotros estamos capaz a aprender mas acerca de usted. Por favor ayudeme la gente responsable por haciendo esto Electronica litaro disponible. Por favor ayudeme esten capaz de obra ayuna , y hacer mas Electronica libros mayor disponible Por favor ayudeme esten haber todo el recursos , el dinero , el potencia y el tiempo aquel ellos necesidad para poder guardar laboral para ti. Por favor ayudeme esos aquel esta parte de la equipo aquel ayuda ellas en un corriente base.

Por favor dar ellas el potencia a continuar y dar cada de ellas el espiritual comprension por lo obra aquel usted necesidad esten hacer. Por favor ayudeme cada de esten no haber miedo y a acordarse de aquel usted esta el Dios quien respuestas oracion y quien es el encargado de todo. Oro aquel usted haria animar ellas , y aquel usted amparar ellas , y los trabajadores & ministerio aquel son ocupado en. Oro aquel usted haria amparar ellas desde el Espiritual Fuerzas o otro obstaculos aquel puedes dano ellas o lento ellas down.

Por favor ayudeme cuando YO uso esto Nuevo Testamento a tambien creer de la personas quien haber hecho esto edicion disponible , a fin de que YO lata orar por ellas y asi ellos lata continuar a ayuda mas personas Oro aquel usted haria deme un amor de su Santo Palabra ( el Nuevo Testamento ), y aquel usted haria deme espiritual juicio y discernimientos saber usted mejor y a comprender el tiempo aquel nosotros estamos viviente en.

Por favor ayiideme saber como a tratar con el dificultades aquel Estoy confrontar con todos los dias. Senor Dios , Ayiidame querer saber usted Mejor y querer a ayuda otro Cristianos en mi area y alrededor del mundo. Oro aquel usted haria dar el Electronica libro equipo y esos quien obra en la telas y esos quien ayuda ellas su juicio.

Oro aquel usted haria ayuda el individuo miembros de su familia ( y mi familia ) a no estar espiritualmente enganado , pero a comprender usted y querer a aceptar y seguir usted en todos los dias camino. y YO preguntar usted hacer estos cosas en nombre de Jesus , Amen ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Kjsere God , Takk skal du ha det denne Ny Testamentet

er blitt befridd i den grad at vi er dugelig a h0re flere om du. Behage hjelpe folket ansvarlig for gj0r denne Elektronisk bestille anvendelig. Behage hjelpe seg a bli kj0pedyktig arbeide rask , og lage flere Elektronisk b0ker anvendelig Behage hjelpe seg a ha alle ressursene , pengene , det styrke og klokken det de n0d for at vsere i stand til oppbevare arbeider til deres.

Behage hjelpe dem det er del av teamet det hjelpe seg opp pa en hverdags basis. Behage gir seg det styrke a fortsette og gir hver av seg det sprit forstaelse for det arbeide det du 0nske seg a gj0re.

Behage hjelpe hver av seg a ikke ha rank og a erindre det du er det God hvem svar b0nn og hvem er i ledelsen av alt. JEG be det du ville oppmuntre seg , og det du beskytte seg , og det arbeide & ministerium det de er forlovet inne. JEG be det du ville beskytte seg fra det Sprit Presser eller annet obstacles det kunne skade seg eller langsom seg ned.

Behage hjelpe meg nar JEG bruk denne Ny Testamentet a likeledes tenke pa folket hvem ha fremstilt denne opplag anvendelig , i den grad at JEG kanne be for seg hvorfor de kanne fortsette a hjelpe flere folk JEG be det du ville gir meg en kjserlighet til din Hellig Ord ( det Ny Testamentet ), og det du ville gir meg sprit klokskap og discernment a vite du bedre og a oppfatte perioden det vi lever inne. Behage hjelpe meg a vite hvor a beskjeftige seg med problemene det JEG er stilt overfor hver dag. Lord God , Hjelpe meg a vil gjerne vite du Bedre og a vil gjerne hjelpe annet Kristen inne meg omrade og i nserheten verden. JEG be det du ville gir det Elektronisk bestille lag og dem hvem arbeide med det website og dem hvem hjelpe seg din klokskap. JEG be det du ville hjelpe individet medlemmer av deres slekt ( og meg slekt ) a ikke vsere spiritually narret , bortsett fra a oppfatte du og a vil gjerne godkjenne og f0lge etter etter du inne enhver vei. og JEG anmode du a gj0re disse saker inne navnet av Jesus , Samarbeidsvillig ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

SWEDISH - SUEDE - SUEDOIS

Swedish - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God - explained in Swedish Language

Swedish Prayer Bon till Gud Jesus Hur till Be Hur kanna hora min Hur till fraga Gud till ger hjalp finna ande Ledning Talande till Gud , skaparen om Universum , den Var Herre och Fralsare :

1 . sa pass du skulle ger till jag tapperheten till be sakerna sa pass Jag nod till be

2. sa pass du skulle ger till jag tapperheten till tro pa du och accept vad du vilja till gor med min liv , i stallet for jag upphoja min aga vilja ( avsikt ) over din.

3. sa pass du skulle ge mig hjalp till inte lata min radsla om okand till bli den ursakta , eller basisten for jag inte till tjana you.

4. sa pass du skulle ge mig hjalp till se och till lara sig hur till har den ande styrka Jag nod ( igenom din uttrycka bibeln ) en ) for handelsen fore och b ) for min aga personlig ande resa.

5. Sa pass du Gud skulle ge mig hjalp till vilja till tjana Du mer

6. Sa pass du skulle paminna jag till samtal med du prayerwhen ) JAG er frustrerat eller i svarigheten , i stallet for forsokande till besluta sakerna mig sjalv bara igenom min mansklig styrka.

7. Sa pass du skulle ge mig Visdom och en hjartan fyllt med Biblisk Visdom sa fakta at JAG skulle tjana du mer effektivt. 8. Sa pass du skulle ge mig en onska till studera din uttrycka , bibeln , ( den Ny Testamente Evangelium av John ), pa en personlig basis 9. sa pass du skulle ger hjalp

till jag sa fakta at JAG er kopa duktig marka sakerna inne om Bibel ( din uttrycka ) vilken JAG kanna personlig beratta till , och den dar vill hjalpa mig forsta vad du vilja jag till gor i min liv.

10. Sa pass du skulle ge mig stor discernment , till forsta hur till forklara till sjalvaste vem du er , och sa pass JAG skulle kunde lara sig hur till lara sig och veta hur till lopa upp for du och mig din uttrycka ( bibeln )

1 1. Sa pass du skulle komma med folk ( eller websites ) i min liv vem vilja till veta du och mig , vem de/vi/du/ni ar stark i deras exakt forstandet av du ( Gud ); och Sa pass du skulle komma med folk ( eller websites ) i min liv vem vilja kunde uppmuntra jag till ackurat lara sig hur till fordela bibeln orden av sanning Timothy 215:).

12. Sa pass du skulle hjalpa mig till lara sig till har stor forstandet om vilken Bibel version ar bast , vilken ar mest exakt , och vilken har mest ande styrka & formaga , och vilken version samtycke med det original manuskripten sa pass du inspirerat forfattarna om Ny Testamente till skriva.

13. Sa pass du skulle ger hjalp till jag till anvanda min tid i en god vag , och inte till slosa min tid pa Falsk eller tom metoderna till komma narmare till Gud ( utom sa pass blandar inte sant Biblisk ), och var den har metoderna produkter ingen for lange siden tid eller varande ande frukt.

14. Sa pass du skulle ger hjalp till jag till forsta vad till blick for i en kyrka eller en stalle av dyrkan , vad slagen av sporsmalen till fraga , och sa pass du skulle hjalpa mig till finna tro pa eller en pastor med stor ande visdom i stallet for latt eller falsk svar.

15. sa pass du skulle orsak jag till minas till minnesmarke din uttrycka bibeln ( sadan som Romersk 8), sa fakta at JAG kanna har den i min hjartan och har min sinne beredd , och vara rede till a ger en svar till sjalvaste om hoppa pa att Jag har omkring du.

16. Sa pass du skulle komma med hjalp till jag sa fakta at min aga theology och doktrin till samtycke med din uttrycka , bibeln och sa pass du skulle fortsatta till hjalpa mig veta hur min forstandet av doktrin kanna bli forbattrat sa fakta at min aga liv , livsform och forstandet fortsatt till vara nojer till vad siut du vilja den till vara for jag.

17. Sa pass du skulle oppen min ande inblicken ( sluttningarna ) mer och mer , och sa pass var min forstandet eller uppfattningen av du ar inte exakt , sa pass du skulle hjalpa mig till lara sig vem Jesus Christ sant ar.

18. Sa pass du skulle ger hjalp till jag sa fakta at JAG skulle kunde skild fran nagon falsk ritual vilken Jag har bero pa , fran din klar undervisning inne om Bibel , eventuell om vad JAG foljer ar inte av Gud , eller ar i strid mot vad du vilja till undervisa oss omkring foljande du.

19. Sa pass nagon pressar av onda skulle inte ta bort nagon ande forstandet vilken Jag har , utom hellre sa pass JAG skulle halia kvar kunskap om hur till veta du och mig inte till bli lurat i den har dagen av ande bedrageri.

20. Sa pass du skulle komma med ande styrka och hjalp till jag sa fakta at Jag vill inte till bli del om den Stor Stjarnfall Bort eller av nagon rorelse vilken skulle bli spiritually forfalskad till du och mig till din Helig Uttrycka

21. Sa pass om dar er nagot sa pass Jag har gjort det min liv , eller nagon vag sa pass Jag har inte reagerat till du sa JAG

skulle har och den dar er forhindrande jag fran endera vandrande med du , eller har forstandet , sa pass du skulle komma med den har sakerna / svaren / handelsen rygg in i min sinne , sa fakta at JAG skulle avsaga sig dem inne om Namn av Jesus Christ , och all av deras verkningen och konsekvenserna , och sa pass du skulle satta tillbaka nagon tomhet ,sadness eller fortvivlan i min liv med det Gladje om Var Herre och Fralsare , och sa pass JAG skulle bli mer focusen pa inlarningen till folja du vid lasande din uttrycka , den Bibel

22. Sa pass du skulle oppen min oga sa fakta at JAG skulle kunde klar se och recognize om dar er en Stor Bedrageri omkring Ande amnena , hur till forsta den har phenomenon ( eller de har handelsen ) fran en Biblisk perspektiv , och sa pass du skulle ge mig visdom till veta och sa sa pass Jag vill lara sig hur till hjalp min vannerna och alskat en ( slaktingen ) inte bli del om it.

23. Sa pass du skulle tillforsakra sa pass en gang min oga de/vi/du/ni ar oppnat och min sinne forstar den ande mening av strom handelsen tagande stalle pa jorden , sa pass du skulle forbereda min hjartan till accept din sanning , och sa pass du skulle hjalpa mig forsta hur till finna mod och styrka igenom din Helig Uttrycka , bibeln. Inne om namn av Jesus Christ , JAG fraga om de har sakerna bekraftande min onska till vara i folje avtalen din vilja , och JAG fragar till deras visdom och till har en karlek om den Sanning Samar betsvillig

Mer pa botten av Sida Hur till har Oandlig Liv

Vi er glad om den har lista over ( bon anmoder till Gud ) ar duglig till hjalpa du. Vi forsta den har Maj inte bli den bast eller mest effektiv oversattning. Vi forsta det dar de/vi/du/ni ar manga olik vag av yttranden tanken och orden. Om du har en forslagen for en battre oversattning , eller om du skulle lik till ta en liten belopp av din tid till sanda forslag till oss , du vill bli hjalpande tusenden av annan folk ocksa , vem vilja da lasa den forbattrat oversattning. Vi ofta har en Ny Testamente tillganglig i din sprak eller i spraken sa pass de/vi/du/ni ar sallsynt eller gammal. Om du er sett for en Ny Testamente i en bestamd sprak , behaga skriva till oss. Ocksa , vi behov till vara saker och forsok till meddela sa pass ibland , vi gor erbjudande bokna sa pass blandar inte Fri och sa pass gor kostnad pengar. Utom om du kan icke har rad med det nagot om den har elektronisk bokna , vi kanna ofta gor en byta av elektronisk bokna for hjalp med oversattning eller oversattning verk.

Du hade inte till vara en professionell arbetaren , enda et par regelbunden person vem er han intresserad i hjalpande. Du borde har en computern eller du borde ha ingang till en computern pa din lokal bibliotek eller college eller universitet , sedan dess den har vanligtvis har battre forbindelserna till Internet. Du kanna ocksa vanligtvis grunda din aga personlig FRI elektronisk sanda med posten redovisa vid gar till mail.yahoo.com

### Behaga ta en stund till finna den elektronisk sanda med posten adress lokaliserat nederst eller sluten av den har sida. Vi hoppas du vill sanda elektronisk sanda med posten till oss , om den har er av hjalp eller uppmuntran. Vi ocksa uppmuntra du till komma i kontakt med oss angaande Elektronisk Bokna sa pass vi erbjudande sa pass de/vi/du/ni ar utan kostnad , och fri.

Vi gor har manga bokna i utlandsk spraken , utom vi inte alltid stalle dem till ta emot elektronisk ( data overfor ) emedan vi bara gora tillganglig bokna eller amnena sa pass de/vi/du/ni ar mest begaret. Vi uppmuntra du till fortsatta till be till Gud och till fortsatta till lara sig omkring Honom vid lasande den Ny Testamente. Vi valkomnande din sporsmalen och kommentarerna vid elektronisk sanda med posten.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Anwylyd Celi , Ddiolch 'eh a hon 'n Grai Destament gollyngwyd fel a allwn at ddysg hychwaneg amdanat. Blesio chyfnertha 'r boblogi 'n atebol achos yn gwneud hon Electronic llyfr ar gael.

Blesio chyfnertha 'u at all gweithia ymprydia , a gwna hychwaneg Electronic llyfrau ar gael Blesio chyfnertha 'u at ca pawb 'r adnoddau , 'r arian , 'r chryfder a 'r amsera a hwy angen er all cadw yn gweithio atat. Blesio chyfnertha hynny sy barthu chan 'r heigia a chyfnertha 'u acha an everyday sail.

Blesio anrhega 'u 'r chryfder at arhosa a anrhega pob un chanddyn 'r 'n ysbrydol yn deall achos 'r gweithia a 'eh angen 'u at gwna.

Blesio chyfnertha pob un chanddyn at mo ca arswyda a at atgofia a ach 'r Celi a atebiadau arawd a sy i mewn chyhudda chan bopeth. Archa a anogech 'u , a a achlesi 'u , a 'r gweithia & gweinidogaeth a ]n cyflogedig i mewn. Archa

a achlesech 'u chan 'r 'n Ysbrydol Grymoedd ai arall rhwystrau a could amhara 'u ai arafa 'u i lawr. Blesio chyfnertha 'm pryd Arfera hon 'n Grai Destament at hefyd dybied chan 'r boblogi a wedi gwneud hon argraffiad ar gael , fel a Alla gweddi'o am 'u a fel allan arhosa at chyfnertha hychwaneg boblogi Archa a anrhegech 'm anwylaeth chan 'eh 'n gysegr-lan Eiria ( 'r 'n Grai Destament ), a a anrhegech 'm 'n ysbrydol callineb a ddirnadaeth at adnabod gwellhawch a at ddeall 'r atalnod chan amsera a ]m yn bucheddu i mewn. Blesio chyfnertha 'm at adnabod fel at ymdrin 'r afrwyddinebau a Dwi wynebedig ag ddiwedydd. Arglwydd Celi , Chyfnertha 'm at angen at adnabod gwellhawch a at angen at chyfnertha arall Cristnogion i mewn 'm arwynebedd a am 'r byd. Archa a anrhegech 'r Electronic llyfr heigia a hynny a gweithia acha 'r website a hynny a chyfnertha 'u 'eh callineb. Archa a chyfnerthech 'r hunigol aelodau chan 'n hwy deulu ( a 'm deulu ) at mo bod 'n ysbrydol dwylledig , namyn at ddeall 'eh a at angen at chymer a canlyn 'eh i mewn 'n bob ffordd. a Archa 'eh at gwna hyn bethau i mewn 'r enwa chan lesu , Amen ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Iceland -\ Icelandic

Icelan d

Icelandic Icelandic - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking)

to God - explained in Icelandic Language

Prayer Isceland Icelandic Jesus Kristur Baen til Guo Hvernig til Bioja Hvernig geta spyrja gefa hjalpa andlegur Leiosogn

Tal til Gu5 the Skapari af the Alheimur the Herra :

1 . bessi bu vildi gefa til mig the hugrekki til biSja the hlutur pessi EG porf til bi9ja

2. pessi pu vildi gefa til mig the hugrekki til trua pu og piggja hva5a pu vilja til komast af me5 minn lif , i staSinn af mig upphefja minn eiga vilja ( asetningur ) yfir pinn.

3. pessi pu vildi gefa mig hjalpa til ekki lata minn ogurlegur af the opekktur til verSa the afsokun , e5a the undirstaSa fyrir mig ekki til bera fram you. 4. J)essi J)u vildi gefa mig hjalpa til sja og til lsera hvernig til hafa the andlegur styrkur EG J)6rf ( i gegnum J)inn or5 the Biblia a ) fyrir the atburSur a undan ) og b ) fyrir minn eiga personulegur andlegur fer5.

5. E>essi J)u Gu5 vildi gefa mig hjalpa til vilja til bera fram M fleiri 6. E>essi J)u vildi minna a mig til tala me5 f)u prayerwhen ) EG er svekktur e5a i vandi , i staSinn af erfiSur til asetningur hlutur eg sjalfur eini i gegnum minn mannlegur styrkur.

7. E>essi J)u vildi gefa mig Viska og a hjarta fiskflak me5 Bibliulegur Viska svo bessi EG vildi bera fram J)u fleiri a ahrifarikan hatt.

8. l^essi bu vildi gefa mig a longun til nema binn or5 the Biblia the Nyja testamentiS GuSspjall af Klosett ), a a personulegur undirstaSa

9. J)essi J)u vildi gefa a5sto5 til mig svo J)essi EG er fser til taka eftir hlutur i the Biblia ( binn or5 ) hver EG geta personulega segja fra til , og J)essi vilja hjalpa mig skilja hvaSa pu vilja mig til gera ut af vi5 minn lif.

10. J>essi J)u vildi gefa mig mikill skarpskyggni , til skilja hvernig til litskyra til annar hver J)u ert , og J)essi EG vildi vera fser til lsera hvernig til lsera og vita hvernig til standa me5 J)u og f>inn or5 the Biblia )

1 1 . f>essi bu vildi koma me5 folk ( e5a websites ) i minn lif hver vilja til vita bu , og hver ert sterkur i beirra nakvsemur skilningur af J)u ( gu5 ); og E>essi J)u vildi koma me5 folk ( e5a websites ) i minn lif hver vilja vera fser til hvetja mig til nakvsemur lsera hvernig til deila the Biblia the or5 gu5s sannleikur (2 HrseSslugjarn 215:).

12. J>essi J)u vildi hjalpa mig til lsera til hafa mikill skilningur 65ur i hver Biblia utgafa er bestur , hver er nakvsemur , og hver hefur the andlegur styrkur & mattur , og hver utgafa samj)ykkja me5 the frumeintak handrit J)essi J)u biasa i brjost the ritstorf af the Nyja testamentiS til skrifa.

13. l>essi J)u vildi gefa hjalpa til mig til nota minn timi i g65 kaup vegur , og ekki til soa minn timi a Falskur e5a tomur a5fer5 til fa loka til Gu5 ( en J)essi ert ekki hreinskilnislega Bibliulegur ), og hvar bessir a5fer5 avextir og grsenmeti neitun langur or5 e5a varanlegur andlegur avoxtur.

14. E>essi J)u vildi gefa a5sto5 til mig til skilja hvaSa til leita a5 i a kirkja e5a a staSur af dyrkun , hvaSa g65ur af spurning til spyrja , og J)essi J)u vildi hjalpa mig til finna trumaSur e5a a prestur me5 mikill andlegur viska i staSinn af J)segilegur e5a falskur svar.

15. J)essi J)u vildi orsok mig til muna til leggja a minniS J)inn or5 the Biblia ( svo sem eins og Latneskt letur 8), svo J)essi EG geta hafa ba5 i minn hjarta og hafa minn hugur tilbuinn , og vera tilbuinn til gefa oakveSinn greinir i ensku svar til annar af the von bessi EG hafa 65ur i J)ii.

16. E>essi J)u vildi koma me5 hjalpa til mig svo pessi minn eiga guSfrseSi og kenning til vera i samrsemi vi5 J)inn or5 the Biblia og bessi bu vildi halda afram til hjalpa mig vita hvernig minn skilningur af kenning geta vera bseta svo bessi minn eiga lif lifestyle og skilningur halda afram til vera loka til hvaSa bu vilja ba9 til vera fyrir mig.

17. J>essi bu vildi opinn minn andlegur innsyn ( endir ) fleiri og fleiri , og bessi hvar minn skilningur e5a skynjun af bu er ekki nakvsemur , J)essi J)u vildi hjalpa mig til lsera hver Jesus Kristur hreinskilnislega er.

18. J>essi J)u vildi gefa hjalpa til mig svo pessi EG vildi vera fser til aSskilinn allir falskur helgisiSir hver EG hafa 6sjalfstse5i a , fra J)inn bjartur kennsla i the Biblia , ef allir af hvaSa EG er hopur stuSningsmanna er ekki af Gu5 , e5a er gegn hvaSa bu vilja til kenna okkur 65ur i hopur stuSningsmanna J)u.

19. E>essi allir herafli af vondur vildi ekki taka burt allir andlegur skilningur hver EG hafa , en fremur J)essi EG vildi halda the vitneskja af hvernig til vita J)u og ekki til vera blekkja i bessir sem minnir a gomlu dagana) af andlegur blekking.

20. E>essi bu vildi koma me5 andlegur styrkur og hjalpa til mig svo pessi EG vilja ekki til vera hluti af the Mikill Bylta Burt e5a af allir hreyfing hver vildi vera andlegur folsun til J)u og til J)inn Heilagur Or5

21. E>essi ef there er nokkuS J)essi EG hafa buinn minn lif , e5a allir vegur J)essi EG hafa ekki sa sem svarar til J)u eins og EG 6x1 hafa og bessi er sem koma ma i veg fyrir e6a afstyra mig fra annar hvor gangandi me9 J)u , e6a having skilningur , J)essi J)u vildi koma me5 J)essir hlutur / svar /

atbur9ur bak inn i minn hugur , svo bessi EG vildi afheita ba i the Nafn af Jesiis Kristur , og ekki minna en beirra ahrif og aflei9ing , og bessi bii vildi skipta um allir tomleiki ,sadness e9a orvsnting i minn lff me9 the Gle9i af the Herra , og pessi EG vildi vera fleiri brennidepill a lserdomur til fylgja bu vi9 lestur binn or9 the Biblia

22. J>essi bu vildi opinn minn augsyn svo pessi EG vildi vera fser til greinilega sja og bekkjanlegur ef there er a Mikill Blekking 65ur i Andlegur atri9i , hvernig til skilja this q ( e9a pessir atbur9ur ) fra a Bibliulegur yfirsyn , og bessi bii vildi gefa mig viska til vita og svo bessi EG vilja lsera hvernig til hjalpa minn vinatta og ast sjalfur ( settingi ) ekki vera hluti af it.

23. E>essi bii vildi tryggja J)essi einu sinni minn augsyn ert opnari og minn hugur skilja the andlegur merking af straumur atbur<3ur hrifandi sta5ur i the verold , J)essi J)u vildi undirbiia minn hjarta til biggja binn sannleikur , og J)essi J)ii vildi hjalpa mig skilja hvernig til finna hugrekki og styrkur i gegnum J)inn Heilagur Or9 the Biblia. I the nafn af Jesiis Kristur , EG spyrja fyrir J)essir hlutur staSfesta minn longun til vera i samkomulag J)inn vilja , og EG er asking fyrir J)inn viska og til hafa a ast af the Sannleikur Mottsekilegur

Fleiri a the Botn af Bla9si9a Hvernig til hafa Eilifur Lif

Vi5 ert gla5ur ef this listi ( af bsen bei9ni til Gu9 ) er fser til a5sto9a J)ii. Vi9 skilja this mega ekki vera the bestur e9a arangursrikur J)y9ing. Vi9 skilja J)essi there ert margir olikur lifha9arhaettir af tjaning hugsun og or9. Ef J)ii hafa a uppastunga fyrir a betri J)y9ing , e9a ef J)ii vildi eins og til

taka a litill magn af binn timi til senda uppastunga til okkur , pu vilja vera skammtur pusund af annar folk einnig , hver vilja pa lesa the bseta bySing.

Vi5 oft hafa a Nyja testamen ti5 laus i binn tungumal e5a i tungumal pessi ert sjaldgsefur e5a gamall. Ef pu ert utlit fyrir a Nyja testamentiS i a serstakur tungumal , poknast skrifa til okkur. Einnig , vi5 vilja til vera viss og reyna til miSla J)essi stundum , vi5 gera tilboS bok J)essi ert ekki Frjals og J)essi gera kostnaSur peningar. En ef J)u geta ekki hafa efni a sumir af J)essir raftseknilegur bok , vi5 geta oft gera oakveSinn greinir i ensku skipti af raftseknilegur bok fyrir hjalpa me5 pySing e5a pySing vinna. M gera ekki ver5a a5 vera a faglegur verkamaSur , eini a venjulegur manneskja hver er ahugasamur i skammtur. M 6x1 hafa a tolva e5a bii 6x1 hafa aSgangur til a tolva a J)inn heimamaSur bokasafn e5a haskoli e5a haskoli , siSan bessir venjulega hafa betri tengsl til the. M geta einnig venjulega stofnsetja binn eiga personulegur FRJALS raftseknilegur postur reikningur vi5 a5 fara til mail.yahoo.com

E>6knast taka a augnablik til finna the raftseknilegur postur heimilisfang staSgreina a the botn e5a the endir af this bla5si5a. Vi5 von bu vilja senda raftseknilegur postur til okkur , ef this er af hjalpa e5a hvatning. Vi5 einnig hvetja pu til snerting okkur viSvikjandi Raftseknilegur Bok J)essi vi5 tilbod bessi ert an kostnaSur , og frjals.

Vi5 gera hafa margir bok i erlendur tungumal , en vi5 gera ekki alltaf staSur J)a til taka a moti electronically ( ssekja skra af fjarlsegri tolvu ) J)vi vi5 eini gera laus the bok e5a the atri5i J)essi ert the beiSni. Vi5 hvetja bu til halda afram til bi5ja til Gu5 og til halda afram til lsera 65ur i Hann vi5

lestur the Nyja testamenti9. Vi9 velkominn J)inn spurning og athugasemd vi9 raftseknilegur postur.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Danish - Danemark

Danish - Prayer Requests (praying / T alking) to God - e x p I a i n e d in Danish Language

Prayer Danish Dannish Denmarkjesus Bon hentilGod HvorBed kunne hore mig Hvoropfordre indromme haelp hen mig

Taler hen til God , den Skaberen i den Alt , den Lord : 1. at jer ville indr0mme hen til mig den mod hen til bed den sager at JEG savn hen til bed

2. at jer ville indr0mme hen til mig den mod hen til tro jer og optage hvad jer ville gerne lave hos mig liv , istedet for mig ophoje mig besidde vil ( hensigt ) ovenfor jeres.

3. at jer ville indr0mme mig hjselp hen til ikke lade mig skrsek i den ubekendt hen til blive den bede om tilgivelse , eller den holdepunkt nemlig mig ikke hen til anrette you.

4. at jer ville indr0mme mig hjselp hen til se efter og hen til laere hvor hen til nyde den appel krsefter JEG savn ( igennem jeres ord den Bibel ) en ) nemlig den begivenheder foran og b ) nemlig mig besidde personlig appel rejse.

5. At jer God ville indr0mme mig hjselp hen til ville gerne anrette Jer flere

6. At jer ville erindre mig hen til samtale hos jer prayerwhen ) Jeg er kuldkastet eller i problem , istedet for pr0ver hen til l0se sager selv bare igennem mig human krsefter.

7. At jer ville indr0mme mig Klogskab og en hjerte fyldte hos Bibelsk Klogskab i den grad at JEG ville anrette jer flere effektive.

8. At jer ville indr0mme mig en lyst hen til lsese jeres ord , den Bibel , ( den Ny Testamente Gospel i John ), oven pa en personlig holdepunkt

9. at jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig i den grad at Jeg er k0bedygtig mserke sager i den Bibel ( jeres ord ) hvilke JEG kunne jeg for mit vedkommende henh0re til , og at vil hjselp mig opfatte hvad jer savn mig hen til lave i mig liv.

10. At jer ville indr0mme mig stor discernment , hen til opfatte hvor hen til forklare hen til andre hvem du er , og at JEG ville vaere i stand til laere hvor hen til laere og kende hvor hen til rage op nemlig jer og jeres ord ( den Bibel )

1 1 . At jer ville overbringe folk ( eller websites ) i mig liv hvem ville gerne kende jer , og hvem er kraftig i deres n0jagtig opfattelse i jer God ); og At jer ville overbringe folk ( eller websites ) i mig liv hvem vil vaere i stand til give mod mig hen til akkurat lasre hvor hen til skille den Bibel den ord i sandhed Timothy 215:).

12. At jer ville hjaelp mig hen til laere hen til nyde stor opfattelse hvorom Bibel gengivelse er bedst , hvilke er h0jst n0jagtig , og hvilke har den h0jst appel kraefter & kraft , og hvilke gengivelse indvilliger hos den selvstasndig handskreven at jer inspireret den forfatteres i den Ny Testamente hen til skriv.

13. At jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig hen til hjselp mig gang i en artig made , og ikke hen til affald mig gang oven pa Falsk eller indholdsl0s metoder hen til komme nsermere hen til God ( men at er ikke sandelig Bibelsk ), og der hvor dem metoder opf0re for ikke sa lsenge siden periode eller varer appel fruit.

14. At jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig hen til opfatte hvad hen til kigge efter i en kirke eller en opstille i andagts0gende , hvad arter i sp0rgsmal hen til opfordre , og at jer ville hjselp mig hen til hitte tro eller en sidst hos stor appel klogskab istedet for nemme eller falsk svar.

15. at jer ville hidf0re mig hen til huske hen til lsere udenad jeres ord den Bibel ( sasom Romersk 8), i den grad at JEG kunne nyde sig i mig hjerte og nyde mig indre forberedt , og vsere rede til at indr0mme en besvare hen til andre i den habe pa at Jeg har omkring jer.

16. At jer ville overbringe hjselp hen til mig i den grad at mig besidde theology og doctrines hen til samtykke med jeres ord , den Bibel og at jer ville fortssette hen til hjselp mig kende hvor mig opfattelse i doctrine kan forbedret i den grad at mig besidde liv lifestyle og opfattelse fortssetter at blive n0jere hvortil jer savn sig at blive nemlig mig.

17. At jer ville lukke op mig appel indblik ( afslutninger ) flere og flere , og at der hvor mig opfattelse eller opfattelsesevne i jer er ikke n0jagtig , at jer ville hjselp mig hen til lsere hvem Jesus Christ sandelig er.

18. At jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig i den grad at JEG ville vsere i stand til selvstsendig hvilken som helst falsk rituals hvilke Jeg har afhsenge oven pa , af jeres slette lserer i den Bibel , eventuel hvoraf Jeg er nseste er ikke i God

, eller er imod hvad jer ville gerne belsere os omkring nseste jer.

19. At hvilken som helst tvinger i darlig ville ikke holde bortrejst hvilken som helst appel opfattelse hvilke Jeg har , men nsermest at JEG ville beholde den kundskab i hvor hen til kende jer og ikke at blive narrede i i denne tid i appel bedrag.

20. At jer ville overbringe appel krsefter og hjselp hen til mig i den grad at Ja ikke at blive noget af den Stor Nedadgaende Bortrejst eller i hvilken som helst bevsegelse som kunne vsere spiritually counterfeit hen til jer og hen til jeres Hellig Ord

2 1 . At selv om der er alt at Jeg har skakmat mig liv , eller hvilken som helst made at Jeg har ikke reageret hen til jer nemlig JEG burde nyde og det vil sige afholder mig af enten den ene eller den anden af omvandrende hos jer , eller har opfattelse , at jer ville overbringe dem sager / svar / begivenheder igen i mig indre , i den grad at JEG ville afsta fra sig i den Bensevne i Jesus Christ , og al i deres effekter og f0lger , og at jer ville skifte ud hvilken som helst tomhed ,sadness eller opgive habet i mig liv hos den Glsede i den Lord , og at JEG ville vsere flere indstille oven pa indlasring hen til komme efter jer af lsesning jeres ord , den Bibel

22. At jer ville lukke op mig ojne i den grad at JEG ville vsere i stand til klart se efter og anerkende selv om der er en Stor Bedrag omkring Appel emner , hvor hen til opfatte indevaerende phenomenon ( eller disse begivenheder ) af en Bibelsk perspektiv , og at jer ville indr0mme mig klogskab hen til kende hvorfor at Ja laere hvor hen til hjaelp mig bekendte og elske ones ( slasgtninge ) ikke vaere noget af it.

23. At jer ville sikre sig at nar f0rst mig 0jne er anlagde og mig indre forstar den appel vsegt i indevserende begivenheder indtagelse opstille pa jorden , at jer ville lsegge til rette mig hjerte hen til optage jeres sandhed , og at jer ville hjselp mig opfatte hvor hen til hitte mod og krsefter igennem jeres Hellig Ord , den Bibel. I den bensevne i Jesus Christ , JEG anmode om disse sager bekrseftende mig lyst at blive overensstemmende jeres vil , og Jeg er bede om nemlig jeres klogskab og hen til nyde en kserlighed til den Sandhed Amen

Flere forneden S ide Hvor hen til nyde Evig Liv

Vi er glad selv om indevserende liste over ( b0n anmoder hen til God ) er kan hen til hjselpe jer. Vi opfatte indevserende ma ikke vsere den bedst eller hojst effektiv gengivelse. Vi er klar over, at der er mange anderledes veje i gengivelse indfald og ord. Selv om du har en henstilling nemlig en bedre gengivelse , eller selv om jer ville gerne hen til holde en ringe bel0b i jeres gang hen til sende antydninger hen til os , jer vil vsere hjalp tusindvis i andre ligeledes , hvem vil sa er der ikke mere lsese den forbedret gengivelse.

Vi ofte nyde en Ny Testamente anvendelig i jeres sprog eller i sprogene at er sjselden eller forhenvserende. Selv om du er ser ud nemlig en Ny Testamente i en specifik sprog , behage henvende sig til os. Ligeledes , vi ville gerne vsere sikker og pr0ve hen til overf0rer at engang imellem , vi lave pristilbud b0ger at er ufri og at lave omkostninger penge. Men selv om jer kan ikke afgive noget af dem elektronisk b0ger , vi kunne ofte lave en udveksle i elektronisk b0ger nemlig

hjselp hos gengivelse eller gengivelse arbejde. Jer som ikke har at blive en professional arbejder , kun fa sand pagseldende hvem er interesseret i hjalp.

Jer burde nyde en computer eller jer burde have adgang til en computer henne ved jeres lokal bibliotek eller kollegium eller universitet , siden dem til hverdag nyde bedre slsegtskaber hen til den indre. Jer kunne ligeledes til hverdag indrette jeres besidde personlig OMKOSTNINGSFRIT elektronisk indlevere beretning af igangvserende hen til mail.yahoo.com

###

Behage holde for et ojeblik siden hen til hitte den elektronisk indlevere henvende placeret nederst eller den enden pa legen indevserende side. Vi hab jer vil sende elektronisk indlevere hen til os , selv om indevserende er i hjaslp eller ophjaelpning. Vi ligeledes give mod jer hen til henvende sig til os med henblik pa Elektronisk B0ger at vi pristilbud at er uden omkostninger , og omkostningsfrit.

Vi lave nyde mange b0ger i udenlandsk sprogene , men vi lave ikke altid opstille sig hen til byde velkommen elektronisk ( dataoverf0re ) fordi vi bare skabe anvendelig den b0ger eller den emner at er den h0jst anmodede.

Vi give mod jer hen til fortssette hen til bed hen til God og hen til fortssette hen til laere omkring Sig af laesning den Ny Testamente. Vi velkommen jeres sp0rgsmal og bemaerkninger af elektronisk indlevere.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Norway - Norway - Norwegian -

Norway - Prayer Requests (praying ) to God - explained in Norwegian Language

Norway Norwegian Nordic Prayer Jesus Christ a God Hvor Be kanne hore meg bonn anmode gir hjelpe meg finner sprit Som kan ledes

Snakker a God , skaperen av det Univers , det Lord :

1. det du ville gir a meg tapperheten a be tingene det JEG n0d a be

2. det du ville gir a meg tapperheten a mene du og godkjenne hva du vil gjerne gj0re med meg livet , istedet for meg opph0ye meg egen ville ( hensikten ) over din.

3. det du ville gir meg hjelpe a ikke utleie meg rank av det ubekjent a bli det be om tilgivelse , eller grunnlaget for meg ikke for a anrette you.

4. det du ville gir meg hjelpe a se og a hore hvor a har den sprit styrke JEG n0d ( igjennom din ord bibelen ) en ) for begivenhetene for ut og b ) for meg egen personlig sprit reise.

5. Det du God ville gir meg hjelpe a vil gjerne anrette Du flere

6. Det du ville minne meg a samtalen med du prayerwhen ) JEG er frustrert eller inne problemet , istedet for pr0ver a l0se saker meg selv bare igjennom meg human styrke.

7. Det du ville gir meg Klokskap og en hjertet fylte med Bibelsk Klokskap i den grad at JEG ville anrette du flere effektivt.

8. Det du ville gir meg en 0nske a studere din ord , bibelen , ( det Ny Testamentet Gospel av John ), opp pa en personlig basis

9. det du ville gir assistanse a meg i den grad at JEG er kj0pedyktig legge merke til saker inne bibelen ( din ord ) hvilke JEG kanne personlig fortelle til , og det vill hjelpe meg oppfatte hva du 0nske meg a gj0re inne meg livet.

10. Det du ville gir meg stor discernment , a oppfatte hvor a forklare a andre hvem du er , og det JEG ville vsere i stand til h0re hvor a h0re og vite hvor a sta opp for du og din ord ( bibelen )

1 1 . Det du ville bringe folk ( eller websites ) inne meg livet hvem vil gjerne vite du , og hvem er kraftig inne deres akkurat forstaelse av du God ); og Det du ville bringe folk ( eller websites ) inne meg livet hvem ville vsere i stand til oppmuntre meg a akkurat h0re hvor a dividere bibelen ordet av sannhet (Timothy 215:).

12. Det du ville hjelpe meg a h0re a ha stor forstaelse om hvilken Bibel versjon er best , hvilke er h0yst akkurat , og hvilke har de fleste sprit styrke & makt , og hvilke versjon avtaler med det original manuskriptet det du inspirert forfatternes av det Ny Testamentet a skrive.

13. Det du ville gir hjelpe a meg a bruk meg tid inne en fint vei , og ikke for a sl0seri meg tid opp pa False eller tom emballasje metoder a komme naermere a God ( bortsett fra

det er tkke virkelig Bibelsk ), og der hvor dem metoder tilvirke for ikke sa lenge siden frist eller varer sprit fruit.

14. Det du ville gir assistanse a meg a oppfatte hva a kikke etter inne en kirken eller en sted av -tilbeder , hva arter av sp0rsmal a anmode , og det du ville hjelpe meg a finner mene eller en fortid med stor sprit klokskap istedet for lett eller false svar.

15. det du ville anledning meg a erindre a huske din ord bibelen ( som Romersk 8), i den grad at JEG kanne ha den inne meg hjertet og ha meg sinn ferdig , og vsere rede til a gir en svaret a andre av det hape pa at JEG ha om du.

16. Det du ville bringe hjelpe a meg i den grad at meg egen theology og doctrines a vsere enig i din ord , bibelen og det du ville fortsette a hjelpe meg vite hvor meg forstaelse av doctrine kan forbedret i den grad at meg egen livet lifestyle og forstaelse fortsetter a bli n0yere hvorfor du 0nske den a bli for meg.

17. Det du ville apen meg sprit innblikk ( konklusjonene ) flere og flere , og det der hvor meg forstaelse eller oppfattelse av du er ikke akkurat , det du ville hjelpe meg a h0re hvem Jesus Christ virkelig er.

18. Det du ville gir hjelpe a meg i den grad at JEG ville vsere i stand til separat alle false rituals hvilke JEG ha avhenge opp pa , fra din helt lserer inne bibelen , eventuell av hva JEG f0lger er ikke av God , eller er i motsetning til hva du vil gjerne lsere oss om fulgte du.

19. Det alle presser av darlig ville ikke ta fjerne alle sprit forstaelse hvilke JEG ha , bortsett fra temmelig det JEG ville selge i detalj kjennskapen til hvor a vite du og ikke for a vsere narret inne i disse dager av sprit bedrag.

20. Det du ville taringe sprit styrke og hjelpe a meg i den grad at Jeg vil ikke for a vsere del av det Stor Faller Fjerne eller av alle bevegelse hvilket kunne vsere spiritually counterfeit a du og a din Hellig Ord

21. Det hvis det er alt det JEG ha gjort det meg livet , eller alle vei det JEG ha ikke reagert a du idet JEG burde ha og det er forhindrer meg fra enten den ene eller den andre av gaing med du , eller har forstaelse , det du ville bringe dem saker / svar / begivenheter rygg i meg sinn , i den grad at JEG ville renonsere pa seg inne navnet av Jesus Christ , og alle av deres virkninger og konsekvensene , og det du ville ombytte alle tomhet ,sadness eller gi opp hapet inne meg livet med det Glede av det Lord , og det JEG ville vsere flere fokusere opp pa innlsering a f0lge etter etter du av lesing din ord , det Bibel

22. Det du ville apen meg eyes i den grad at JEG ville vsere i stand til klare se og anerkjenne hvis det er en Stor Bedrag om Sprit emner , hvor a oppfatte denne phenomenon ( eller disse begivenheter ) fra en Bibelsk perspektiv , og det du ville gir meg klokskap a vite hvorfor det Jeg vil h0re hvor a hjelpe meg venner og elsket seg ( slektningene ) ikke vsere del av it.

23. Det du ville sikre det en gang meg eyes er apen og meg sinn forstar det sprit vekt av aktuelle begivenheter tar sted pa jorden , det du ville forberede meg hjertet a godkjenne din sannhet , og det du ville hjelpe meg oppfatte hvor a finner tapperheten og styrke igjennom din Hellig Ord , bibelen. Inne navnet av Jesus Christ , JEG anmode om disse saker bekreftende meg 0nske a bli i f0lge avtalen din ville , og JEG sp0r til deres klokskap og a har en kjserlighet til det Sannhet Samarbeidsvillig

Flere pa bunnen av S ide Hvor a ha Evig Livet

Vi er glad hvis denne liste over ( b0nn anmoder a God ) er dugelig a hjelpe du. Vi oppfatte denne kanskje ikke vsere det best eller h0yst effektiv oversettelse. Vi forsta det der er mange annerledes veier av gjengivelsen innfall og ord. Hvis du har en forslag for en bedre oversettelse , eller hvis du ville like a ta en liten bel0pet av din tid a sende antydninger a oss , du ville vsere hjalp tusenvis av andre mennesker likeledes , hvem ville sa lese det forbedret oversettelse. Vi ofte har en Ny Testamentet anvendelig inne din omgangssprak eller inne sprakene det er sjelden eller gamle. Hvis du er ser for en Ny Testamentet inne en spesifikk omgangssprak , behage skrive til oss. Likeledes , vi vil gjerne vsere sikker og pr0ve a meddele det en gang imellom , vi gj0re tilbud b0ker det er ufri og det gj0re bekostning pengene.

Bortsett fra hvis du kan ikke by noen av dem elektronisk b0ker , vi kanne ofte gj0re en bytte av elektronisk b0ker for hjelpe med oversettelse eller oversettelse arbeide. Du som ikke har a bli en profesjonell arbeider , kun fa stamgjest personen hvem er interessert i hjalp. Du burde har en computer eller du burde ha adgang til en computer for din innenbys bibliotek eller universitet eller universitet , siden dem vanligvis ha bedre forbindelser a det sykehuslege. Du kanne likeledes vanligvis opprette din egen personlig LEDIG elektronisk innlevere regningen av gar a mail.yahoo.com

Behage ta en 0yeblikk a finner det elektronisk innlevere henvende seg lokalisert nederst eller utgangen av denne side. Vi hape du ville sende elektronisk innlevere a oss ,

hvis denne er av hjelpe eller oppmuntring. Vi likeledes oppmuntre du a sette seg i forbindelse med oss angaende Elektronisk B0ker det vi tilbud det er uten bekostning , og ledig.

Vi gj0re ha mange b0ker inne utenlandsk sprakene , bortsett fra vi ikke alltid sted seg a fa elektronisk ( dataoverf0re ) fordi vi bare lage anvendelig b0kene eller emnene det er de fleste anmodet. Vi oppmuntre du a fortsette a be a God og a fortsette a h0re om Seg av lesing det Ny Testamentet. Vi velkommen din sp0rsmal og kommentarer av elektronisk innlevere.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Modern Greek

IlpooetOT oto 0e6 Aya7mx6c; 0e6<;, Eac; et)xapioxorjLie 6xt aox6 to Erjayyeko f) ao-cf) r) vea 5ia9f)Kn exet oaieXerj9epco9ei exot cboxe eiuaoxe oe 9eor| va ud9ot)ue 7ieptoo6xepcflv yta oa;. ITapaKaM) Por|9f|oxe xovq av9pd)7iorj<; apuoStorjc; yta va Kaxaoxf|oei aox6 xo rjIeKipoviKo Pipiio 5ta9eotuo. Eepexe 710101 eivat Koa eioxe oe 9eor) va xovq Por|9f|oexe. ITapaKaM) xovq Por|9f|oxe yta va eioxe oe 9eor) va a7taoxoXr|9ei ypf)yopa, Kat va KaraoTrioei oe 7ieptoo6xepa r|XeKxpoviKd Pipiia 5ta9eot|ia ITapaKaM) xovq Por|9f|oxe yta va exexe olouc; xovq 7t6porj<;, ia xpTHiaxa, xn 5i3vaur| Kat xo xpovo 6xt xp£tdCovxai 7tpoiceiuevorj va eivat oe 9eor) va oi)vexioot)v yta oa;. ITapaKaM Por|9f|oxe eKeivot 7torj eivat uepoc; xnc; oudSac; 7tot) xovq Por)9d oe Ka9r|uepivr| pdor). ITapaKaM xovq 5cboxe xn 5i3vaur| yta va ouvexioexe Kat va 5cboexe oe Kd9e evav ajco xovq xo O7upixoorjal kov> KoraMpaivet yta xnv

epyaoia 6xi xox>q 9eXexe yia va K&veie. riapaKaM) Por|9f|oxe Kd9e evac; oaio xovq yia va lit|v exexe xo (p6(3o Kai yia va 9i)Lir|9eixe 6xi eioxe o ©eoc; ran) ajiavid oxr|v 7tpooeuxii Kai 7iou eivai iwiei)9i)voc; yia 6Xa. npooei3xo(iai 6xi 9a xovq ev9appi3vaxe, Kai 6xi xouc; 7tpooxaxei)exe, Kai r) epyaoia & xo raoupyeio 6xi (Tumieieyouv.

llpooeDxoLiai 6xi 9a xorx; 7tpooxaxeDaxe ajt6 tt? 7rvei)LiaxiKec; SuvdLieic; f) dXXa eLira>5ia ran) 9a Lutoporjoav va zovc, pXdv|/ouv f) va xouc; emPpaSwouv. IlapaKaM) Lie Por|9f|oxe 6xav xpT)oi|i07ioicb ao-ciiv xnv vea 5ia9f|KT| yia va oKecprcb 87iiori<; xovq av9pcbran)c; ran) exouv Kaxaoxf|oei auxf|V xnv 8k5ooti 5ia9eoiLir|, exoi cboxe Lutopcb va 7tpooer|9cb yia xouc; Kai exoi Lutoporjv va oi)vexioouv va Por|9oi3v 7iepioo6xepouc; av9pcbran>c

npooei)xo(iai 6xi 9a liou 5ivaxe Liia ayd7tr| xou iepoi3 Word oac; (r) vea 5ia9f|KT|), Kai 6xi 9a liou 5ivaxe xnv 7rveuLiaxiKec; (ppovr|OT| Kai xn 5idKpior| yia va oac; ^epexe Kalurepa Kai yia va KaxaXdpexe xn xpoviKf) 7iepio5o 6xi (^ouLie Lieoa. IlapaKalcb Lie Por|9f|oxe yia va ^epexe rak; va e^exdoei xicj SuoKoMec; 6xi epxoLiai avxiLiexcora)c; Lie Kd9e rpepa. O A6p5ocj God, Lie Por)9d yia va 9eXf|oei va oacj ^epei Kalrjiepa Kai va 9eXf|oei va Por|9f|oei dlloucj Xpioxiavoucj oxr|v 7iepioxT) uou Kai oe 6X0 xov koolio. ITpooeuxoLiai 6xi 9a 5ivaxe xnv r|XeKxpoviKf| OLidSa Pipiicov Kai eKeivoi ram xoucj Por|9ouv r) (ppovr|of| oacj. ripooeuxoLiai 6xi 9a Por|9ouoaxe ia LieLiovcoLieva Lielr) xncj oiKoyeveidcj xoucj (Kai xr|<; oiKoyeveidcj liou) yia va e^a7taxr|9eixe 6x1 7tvei)uaxiKd, dkla na va oac KaialaPeie Kai na va 9eXf|oexe va oac 5exxeixe Kai va aKoXou9f|oexe Lie Kd9e xpo7io. Eraoric raxpexexe lio; xnv dveor) Kai o5r|yiec oe aurouc xouc xpovouc Kai oac (^rrccb yia va kovco auxd xa 7tpdyLiaxa 0x0 ovoLia xou Inoou, Amen,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

German - Deutch - Allemand

German Prayers Gebet zum Gott wie man wie horen kann dass meinem Gebet wie bittet Hilfe zu mir zu geben wie man geistige Anleitung

German - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God - explained in German Language

Mit Gott sprechen, der Schopfer des Universums, der Lord:

L, die Sie zu mir dem Mut, die Sachen zu beten geben wiirden, die ich benotige, um 2. zu beten, die Sie zu mir dem Mut, Ihnen zu glauben und anzunehmen geben wiirden, was Sie mit meinem Leben tun mochten, anstelle von mir meine Selbst erhebend Wille (Absicht) uber Direm.

3., denen Sie mir Hilfe geben wiirden, um meine Furcht vor dem Unbekannten die Entschuldigungen nicht werden zu lassen oder die Grundlage fur mich, zum Sie nicht zu dienen.

4., der Sie mir Hilfe, um zu sehen geben wiirden und zu erlernen, wie man die geistige Starke ich hat, benotigen Sie (durch Ihr Wort die Bibel) A) fur die Falle voran und B) fur meine eigene personliche geistige Reise.

5. DaB Sie Gott mir Hilfe geben wiirden, um Sie mehr dienen zu wiinschen

6. DaB Sie mich erinnern wiirden, mit Ihnen zu sprechen (prayer)when mich werden frustriert oder in der Schwierigkeit, anstatt zu versuchen, Sachen selbst nur durch meine menschliche Starke zu beheben.

7. DaB Sie mir Klugheit und ein Herz geben wiirden, fullten mit biblischer Klugheit, damit ich Sie effektiv dienen wiirde.

8. DaB Sie mir einen Wunsch geben wiirden, Ihr Wort, die Bibel zu studieren, (das neues Testament-Evangelium von John) auf personlicher Ebene

9. das Sie Unterstutzung zu mir geben wiirden, damit ich bin, Sachen in der Bibel (Ihr Wort) zu beachten der ich auf und der personlich beziehen kann mir hilft, zu verstehen, was Sie mich in meinem Leben tun wunschen.

10. DaB Sie mir groBe Einsicht geben wiirden, um zu verstehen wie nian anderen erklart, die Sie sind, und daB ich sein wiirde, zu erlernen, wie nian erlernt und kann fiir Sie und Ihr Wort (die Bibel) oben stehen

11. DaB Sie Leute (oder Web site) in meinem Leben holen wiirden, die Sie kennen mochten und die in ihrem genauen Verstandnis von Ihnen stark sind (Gott); und das wiirden Sie Leute (oder Web site) in meinem Leben holen, das ist, mich anzuregen, genau zu erlernen, wie nian die Bibel das Wort der Wahrheit (2 Timotheegras 2: 15) teilt.

12. DaB Sie mir helfen wiirden zu erlernen, groBes Verstandnis uber, welche Bibelversion zu haben am besten ist, die am genauesten ist und die die geistigste Starke u. die Energie hat und dem Version mit den ursprunglichen Manuskripten ubereinstimmt, daB Sie die Autoren des neuen Testaments anspornten zu schreiben.

13. DaB Sie mir Hilfe, um meine Zeit in einer guten Weise zu verwenden geben wiirden, und meine Zeit auf den falschen oder leeren Methoden nicht zu vergeuden, naeher an Gott (aber dem, zu erhalten nicht wirklich biblisch seien Sie) und wo jene Methoden keine lange Bezeichnung oder dauerhafte geistige Frucht produzieren.

14. DaB Sie mir Unterstiitzung geben wiirden, was zu verstehen, in einer Kirche oder in einem Ort der Anbetung zu suchen, welche Arten der Fragen zum zu bitten und daB Sie mir helfen wiirden, Glaubiger oder einen Pastor mit groBer geistiger Klugheit anstelle von den einfachen oder falschen Antworten zu finden.

15. den Sie mich veranlassen wiirden, mich zu erinnern, um sich Ihr Wort zu merken die Bibel (wie Romans ist 8), damit ich es in meinem Herzen haben und an meinen Verstand sich vorbereiten lassen kann, und bereit, eine Antwort zu anderen der Hoffnung zu geben, die ich uber Sie habe.

16. DaB Sie mir Hilfe damit meine eigene Theologie und Lehren holen wiirden, um mit Ihrem Wort, die Bibel ubereinzustimmen und daB Sie fortfahren wiirden, mir zu helfen, zu konnen, mein Verstandnis der Lehre verbessert werden kann, damit mein eigenes Leben, Lebensstil und Verstehen fortfahrt, zu sein naeher an, was Sie es fur mich sein wunschen.

17. DaB Sie meinen geistigen Einblick (Zusammenfassungen) mehr und mehr offnen wiirden und daB, wo mein Verstandnis oder Vorstellung von Ihnen nicht genau ist, daB Sie mir helfen wiirden, zu erlernen, wem Jesus Christ wirklich ist.

18. DaB Sie mir Hilfe geben wiirden, damit ich in der LageSEIN wiirde, alle falschen Rituale zu trennen, denen ich von, von Hirem freien Unterricht in der Bibel, wenn irgendwelche abgehangen habe von, was ich folgend bin, ist nicht vom Gott, oder ist kontrar zu, was Sie uns unterrichten wiinschen - uber das Folgen Sie.

19. DaB keine Krafte des Ubels nicht irgendwie geistiges Verstandnis wegnehmen wiirden, das ich habe, aber eher, daB ich das Wissen behalten wiirde von, wie man Sie kennt und nicht an diesen Tagen der geistigen Tauschung betrogen wird.

20. DaB Sie geistige Starke holen und zu mir helfen wiirden, damit ich nicht ein Teil von groBen weg fallen oder irgendeiner Bewegung bin, die zu Ihnen und zu Ihrem heiligen Wort Angelegenheiten nachgemacht sein wiirde.

21. Das, wenn es alles gibt, das ich in meinem Leben getan habe oder irgendeine Weise, daB ich nicht auf Sie reagiert habe, wie ich haben sollte und die mich entweder am Gehen mit Ihnen hindert oder Haben des Verstehens, daB Sie jene things/responses/events zuriick in meinen Verstand, damit ich auf sie im Namen Jesus Christ verzichten wiirde, und alle ihre von und von Konsequenzen holen wiirden und daB Sie jede mogliche Leere, Traurigkeit oder Verzweiflung in meinem Leben mit der Freude am Lord ersetzen wiirden und daB ich mehr auf das Lernen, Ihnen zu folgen gerichtet wiirde, indem man Ihr Wort las, die Bibel.

22. DaB Sie meine Augen offnen wiirden, damit ich in der LageSEIN wiirde, offenbar zu sehen und zu erkennen, wenn es eine groBe Tauschung uber geistige Themen gibt, wie man dieses Phanomen (oder diese Falle) von einer biblischen Perspektive und daB Sie mir Klugheit geben wiirden, um zu wissen und damit ich erlernt versteht, wie

man meinen Freunden und liebte eine (Verwandte) ein Teil von ihm nicht zu sein hilft.

23 DaB Sie sicherstellen wiirden, daB einmal meine Augen und mein Verstand geoffnet sind, versteht die geistige Bedeutung der gegenwartigen Falle, die in der Welt stattfinden, daB Sie mein Herz vorbereiten wiirden, um Ihre Wahrheit anzunehmen und daB Sie mir helfen wiirden, zu verstehen, wie man Mut und Starke durch Ihr heiliges Wort, die Bibel findet. Im Namen Jesus Christ, bitte ich um diese Sachen, die meinen Wunsch bestatigen, Ihr Wille iibereinzustimmen, und ich bitte um Hire Klugheit und eine Liebe der Wahrheit zu haben, Amen.

Mehr an der Unterseite der Seite wie man ewiges Leben u. Hat

Wir sind froh, wenn diese Liste (der Gebetantrage zum Gott) in der LagelST, Sie zu unterstutzen. Wir verstehen, daB diese moglicherweise nicht die beste oder wirkungsvollste Ubersetzung sein kann. Wir verstehen, daB es viele unterschiedliche Weisen des Ausdriickens von von Gedanken und von von Wortern gibt. Wenn Sie einen Vorschlag fiir eine bessere Ubersetzung haben oder wenn Sie etwas Ihrer Zeit dauern mochten, Vorschlage zu schicken uns, werden Sie Tausenden der Leute auch helfen, die dann die verbesserte Ubersetzung lesen. Wir haben haufig ein neues Testament, das in Ihrer Sprache oder in den Sprachen vorhanden ist, die selten oder alt sind.

Wenn Sie nach einem neuen Testament in einer spezifischen Sprache suchen, schreiben Sie uns bitte. Auch wir mochten sicher sein und versuchen, das manchmal mitzuteilen, bieten wir Biicher an, die nicht frei sind und die Geld kosten. Aber, wenn Sie nicht einige jener elektronischen Biicher sich leisten konnen, konnen wir einen Austausch der elektronischen Biicher ftir Hilfe bei der Ubersetzung oder bei der Ubersetzung Arbeit haufig tun. Sie miissen nicht ein professioneller Arbeiter sein, nur eine regelmaBige Person, die interessiert ist, an zu helfen.

Sie sollten einen Computer haben, oder Sie sollten Zugang zu einem Computer an Ihrer lokalen Bibliothek oder Hochschule oder Universitat haben, da die normalerweise bessere Anschliisse zum Internet haben. Sie konnen Ihr eigenes personliches FREIES Konto der elektronischen Post, indem Sie zum mail.yahoo.com

auch normalerweise herstellen gehen dauern bitte einen Moment, um die Adresse der elektronischen Post zu finden befunden an der Unterseite oder am Ende dieser Seite. Wir hoffen, daB Sie uns elektronische Post schicken, wenn diese hilfreich oder Ermutigung ist. Wir regen Sie auch an, mit uns hinsichtlich der elektronischen Biicher in Verbindung zu treten, die wir dem sind ohne Kosten und freies

anbieten, die, wir viele Biicher in den Fremdsprachen haben, aber wir nicht sie immer setzen, um elektronisch zu empfangen (Download) weil wir nur vorhanden die Biicher oder die Themen bilden, die erbeten sind. Wir regen Sie an fortzufahren, zum Gott zu beten und fortzufahren, uber ihn zu erlernen, indem wir das neue Testament lesen. Wir

begriiBen Dire Fragen und Anmerkungen durch elektronische Post.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Caro Deus , Obrigada que esta Novo Testamento tem sido lancado de modo a que nos somos capaz aprender mais sobre a ti. Por favor ajudar a gente responsavel por fazendo esta Electronico livro disponivel.

Por favor ajudar eles estarem capaz de trabalho rapidamente , e fazer mais Electronico livros disponivel Por favor ajudar eles haverem todos os recursos , o dinheiro , a forca e as horas que elas precisar a fim de ser capaz de guardar trabalhando para si.

Por favor ajudar aquelas esse are parte da equipa essa ajuda lhes num todos os dias base. Por favor dar lhes a forca continuar e dar cada deles o espiritual comprendendo para o trabalho que voce quer eles fazerem. Por favor ajudar cada um deles para nao ter medo e lembrar que tu es o deus o qual respostas oracao e quem e encarregado de todas as coisas.

EU orar que a ti would encorajar lhes , e que voce protege lhes , e o trabalho & ministerio que elas sao comprometido em. EU orar que voce protegeria lhes de o Espiritual Forcas ou outro barreiras isso podeia ser maleficio lhes ou lento lhes abaixo.

Por favor ajudar a mim quando Eu uso esta Novo Testamento para tambem reflectir a gente o qual ter feito esta edicao disponivel , de modo a que eu possa orar para eles e por conseguinte eles podem continuar ajudar mais

pessoas EU orar que voce daria a mim um amar do seu Divino Palavra ( o novo Testamento ), e que voce daria a mim espiritual sabedoria e discernment conhecer a ti melhor e para comprender o periodo de tempo que nos somos vivendo em.

Por favor ajudar eu saber como lidar com as dificuldades que Eu sou confrontado com todos os dias. Lorde Deus , Ajudar eu querer conhecer a ti Melhor e querer ajudar outro Christian no meu area e pelo mundo. EU orar que voce daria o Electronico livro equipa e aquelas o qual trabalho no Websters e aqueles que ajudar lhes seu sabedoria. EU orar que voce ajudaria o individuo membros do seu familia ( e a minha familia ) para nao ser espiritual enganar , mas comprender a ti e querer aceitar e seguir a ti em todos bastante. e Eu pergunto voce fazer estas coisas em nome de Jesus , Amen ,

Dear God,

Thank you that this New Testament has been released so that we are able to learn more about you.

Please help the people responsible for making this Electronic book available. Please help them to be able to work fast, and make more Electronic books available Please help them to have all the resources, the money, the strength and the time that they need in order to be able to keep working for You.

Please help those that are part of the team that help them on an everyday basis. Please give them the strength to continue and give each of them the spiritual understanding for the work that you want them to do. Please help each of them to not have fear and to remember that you are the God who

answers prayer and who is in charge of everything.

I pray that you would encourage them, and that you protect them, and the work & ministry that they are engaged in. I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual Forces or other obstacles that could harm them or slow them down.

Please help me when I use this New Testament to also think of the people who have made this edition available, so that I can pray for them and so they can continue to help more people

I pray that you would give me a love of your Holy Word (the New Testament), and that you would give me spiritual wisdom and discernment to know you better and to understand the period of time that we are living in.

Please help me to know how to deal with the difficulties that I am confronted with every day. Lord God, Help me to want to know you Better and to want to help other Christians in my area and around the world.

I pray that you would give the Electronic book team and those who work on the website and those who help them your wisdom.

I pray that you would help the individual members of their family (and my family) to not be spiritually deceived, but to understand you and to want to accept and follow you in every way.

and I ask you to do these things in the name of Jesus, Amen,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Croatian Croatian Croatian

Croatian - Prayer Requests (praying ) to God - explained in Croatian Language

Croatian Croatia Prayer Isus Krist Moljenje to Bog Kako to Moliti moze cuti moj pitati popustanje ponuditi mene

Govorenje to Bog , Stvoritelj dana Svemir , Gospodar :

1. taj te ce popustanje meni u hrabrost to moliti predmet taj Trebam to moliti

2. taj te ce popustanje meni u hrabrost to vjerovati te i prihvatiti sto koji zelite za napraviti sa mojim zivot , umjesto mene uznijeti moj posjedovati htijenje ( namjera ) iznad tvoj.

3. taj te ce popustanje mene ponuditi ne pustiti moj strahovanje dana nepoznat postati isprika , ili baza za mene ne to posluzitelj you.

4. taj te ce popustanje mene ponuditi vidjeti i nauciti kako to imati duhovni snaga Trebam ( preko tvoj rijec Biblija ) ) za jedan dan dogadaj ispred i b ) za moj posjedovati osobni duhovni putovanje.

5. Taj te Bog ce popustanje mene ponuditi istanje to posluzitelj Te vise

6. Taj te ce podsjetiti mene to pricati sa te prayerwhen ) Ja sam frustriran ili u problemima , umjesto tezak to odluka predmet ja osobno jedini preko moj covjecji snaga.

7. Taj te ce popustanje mene Mudrost i srce ispunjen sa Biblijski Mudrost tako da JA ce posluzitelj te vise efektivno.

8. Taj te ce popustanje mene zelja to studirati tvoj rijec , Biblija , ( novim Oporuka Evandelje od John ), na osobni baza

9. taj te ce popustanje pomoc meni u tako da Ja sam u mogucnosti to obavijest predmet in Biblija ( tvoj rijec ) sto Ja mogu osobni povezivati se , i da htijenje pomoc mene shvatiti sto koji zelite mene za napraviti u mojem zivot.

10. Taj te ce popustanje mene velik raspoznavanje , to shvatiti kako to objasniti to ostali tko ti si , i da JA bi bilo u mogucnosti nauciti kako nauciti i znati kako to pristajati uza sto te i tvoj rijec ( Biblija )

1 1 . Taj te ce donijeti narod ( ili websiteovi ) u mojem zivot tko istanje to znati te , i tko jesu jak in njihov tocnost sporazum od te ( bog ); i da te ce donijeti narod ( ili websiteovi ) u mojem zivot koji ce biti u mogucnosti to hrabriti mene to precizan naucite kako podijeliti Biblija rijec od istina (2 Plasljiv 215:).

12. Taj te ce pomoc mene nauciti to imati velik sporazum o sto Biblija inacici je najbolji , sto je vecina tocnost , i sto je preko duhovni snaga & Power PC , i sto inacici sporazum sa izvorni rukopis taj te nadahnut autorstvo dana Nov Oporuka to pisati.

13. Taj te ce popustanje ponuditi mene koristenje moj vrijeme in dobar put , i ne to prosipati moj vrijeme na Neistinit ili prazan Metodije da biste dobili Zatvori to Bog ( ali koji nisu vjerno Biblijski ), i gdje svi oni Metodije stvarajuci nijedan ceznuti uvjeti ili trajan duhovni voce.

14. Taj te ce popustanje pomoc meni u to shvatiti sto uciniti traziti in Churchill ili mjesto od moliti se , sto rod od pitanje to pitati , i da te ce pomoc mene pronaci onaj koji vjeruje ili pastor sa velik duhovni mudrost umjesto lahak ili neistinit odgovoriti.

15. taj te ce nanijeti mene to sjecati se to sjecati se tvoj rijec Biblija ( kao sto je Rumunjski 8), tako da Ja mogu imati Internet u mojem srce i imati moj imati sto protiv spreman , i biti spreman to popustanje odgovoriti to ostali dana uzdanica taj Imam o te.

16. Taj te ce donijeti ponuditi mene tako da moj posjedovati teologija i doktrina to poklapati se tvoj rijec , Biblija i da te ce nastaviti to pomoc mene znati kako moj sporazum od doktrina moze poboljsati tako da moj posjedovati zivot , stil zivota i sporazum nastaviti biti Zatvori to sto koji zelite Internet biti za mene.

17. Taj te ce OpenBSD moj duhovni unutar ( zakljucak ) vise i vise , i da gdje svi moj sporazum ili percepcija od te nije tocnost , taj te ce pomoc mene nauciti tko Isus Krist vjerno je.

18. Taj te ce popustanje ponuditi mene tako da JA bi bilo u mogucnosti to odijeljen bilo koji neistinit ritualni sto Imam zavisnost na , from tvoj jasan pomoc u ucenju in Biblija , ako postoje od sto Ja sam sljedece nije od Bog , ili je ugovor to sto koji zelite to vas nauciti nas o sljedece te.

19. Taj bilo koji sila od zlo ce ne oduteti bilo koji duhovni sporazum sto Imam , ali radije taj JA ce cvrsto drzati znanje kako to znati te i ne biti lukav in te dani od duhovni varka.

20. Taj te ce donijeti duhovni snaga i ponuditi mene tako da JA nece biti dio ognjevit Jesen Daleko ili od bilo koji pokret sto bi bilo produhovljeno krivotvoren novac vama i u vas

S vet Rijec

21. Da ako ima je ista taj Imam ispunjavanja u mojem zivot , ili bilo koji put taj Imam ne odgovaranje vama kao JA trebaju imati i da je koji se moze sprijeciti mene sa ili hodanje sa te , ili vlasnistvo sporazum , taj te ce donijeti oni predmet / reakcija / dogadaj leda u moj imati sto protiv , tako da JA ce odreci se njima in ime od Isus Krist , i svi od njihov efekt i posljedica , i da te ce opet staviti bilo koji praznina ,sadness ili izgubiti nadu u mojem zivot sa Ono sto pruza uzitak dana Gospodar , i da JA bi bilo vise fokusirati na znanje to udarac te mimo citanje tvoj rijec , Biblija

22. Taj te ce OpenBSD moj oci tako da JA bi bilo u mogucnosti to jasno vidjeti i prepoznati ako ima Velik Varka o Duhovni tema , kako to shvatiti ovaj fenomen ( ili te dogadaj ) from Biblijski perspektiva , i da te ce popustanje mene mudrost to znati i tako dalje taj JA htijenje naucite kako pomoc moj prijatelj i voljen sam sebe ( odnosni ) ne biti dio it.

23. Taj te ce osigurali da jedanput moj oci jesu OpenBSD i moj imati sto protiv shvatiti duhovni izrazajnost od tekuci dogadaj uzimanje mjesto u svijetu , taj te ce pripremiti moj srce to prihvatiti tvoj istina , i da te ce pomoc mene shvatiti kako pronaci hrabrost i snaga preko tvoj Svet Rijec , Biblija. In ime od Isus Krist , JA traziti te predmet potvrditi moj

zelja biti slozno tvoj htijenje , i Ja sam iskanje tvoj mudrost i to imati hatar dana Istina Da

Vise podno Stranica Kako to imati Vjecan Zivot

Mi jesu veseo ako ovaj rub ( od moljenje molba to Bog ) je u mogucnosti to pomoci te. Mi shvatiti ovaj mozda nece biti najbolji ili vecina djelotvoran prevodenje. Mi shvatiti koji su mnogobrojan razlicit putevi od istiskivanje misao i rijec. Ukoliko imati sugestija za bolji prevodenje , ili ukoliko ce voljeti uzeti malolitrazan iznos od tvoj vrijeme to poslati sugestija nama , te htijenje biti pomoc tisuca od ostali narod isto tako , koji ce onda citanje oplemenjen prevodenje. Mi vise puta imati Nov Oporuka raspoloziv u vas jezik ili in jezik koji su rijedak ili star. Ako ste oblicje za Nov Oporuka in specifican jezik , ugoditi korespondirati nas. Isto tako , mi istanje istinabog i pokusati komunicirati taj katkada , mi obaviti ponuda knjiga koji nisu Slobodan i da obaviti trosak novac.

Ali ukoliko ne moci priustiti neki od oni elektronski knjiga , mi moze vise puta obaviti izmjena od elektronski knjiga za pomoc sa prevodenje ili prevodenje funkcionirati. Nemate biti koji se odnosi na zvanje radnik , samo jedan dan pravilan osoba tko je zainteresirana za pomoc. Te trebaju imati racunalo ili te trebaju imati pristup to racunalo at tvoj lokalni knjiznica ili fakulteti ili sveucilista , otada oni obicno imati bolji povezivanje to Internet. Mozete isto tako obicno utemeljiti tvoj posjedovati osobni SLOBODAN elektronicka posta racun odlaskom na mail.yahoo.com

Ugoditi uzeti tren pronaci elektronicka posta adresa smjestiti na dnu ili kraj od ovaj stranica. Nadamo se te htijenje poslati elektronicka posta nama , ako ovaj je od pomoc ili hrabrenje. Mi isto tako hrabriti te to kontakt nas zabrinutost Elektronski Knjiga koju nudimo koji su sa trosak , i slobodan.

Mi obaviti imati mnogobrojan knjiga in stran jezik , ali mi ne uvijek mjesto njima to primiti elektronski ( preuzimanje datoteka ) jer mi jedini izraditi raspoloziv knjiga ili tema koji su preko molba. Mi hrabriti te to nastaviti to moliti to Bog i to nastaviti nauciti o Njemu mimo citanje novim Oporuka. Mi dobrodosli na tvoj pitanje i komentirajte mimo elektronicka posta.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

CZECH CZECH TCHEK

Czech Prayer Modlitba Kristian jezuita Kristus az k Buh Jak Modlit Buh pocinovat slyset modlitba k ptat Buh darovat pomoci mne

Czech - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God - explained in Czech Language

Mluveni az k Buh , clen urcity Stvof itel of clen urcity Soubor , clen urcity Hospodin :

1 . aby tebe chtel bych darovat az k mne clen urcity kuraz az k modlit clen urcity majetek aby Nemusim az k modlit

2. aby tebe chtel bych darovat az k mne clen urcity kuraz az k domnivat se tebe a pfijmout jaky tebe potfeba az k jednat ma duch , misto mne povysit ja sam vule ( cfl ) nad tvuj.

3. aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne pomoci az k ne dovolit ma bat se of clen urcity neznama az k stat se clen urcity odpustit , ci clen urcity baze do mne rozchazet se v nazorech slouzit you.

4. aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne pomoci az k videt a az k dostat instrukce jak? az k mit clen urcity duchovni sfla Nemusim ( docela tvuj slovo clen urcity Bible ) jeden ) do clen urcity pfihoda vpfed a b ) do ja sam osobni duchovni cesta.

5. Aby tebe Buh chtel bych darovat mne pomoci az k potfeba az k slouzit Tebe vice 6. Aby tebe chtel bych pfipomenout komu mne az k rozmlouvat s tebe prayerwhen ) JA am zmafeny ci do nesnaz , misto trying az k analyzovat majetek ja sam ale docela ma lidsky sfla.

7. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne Moudrost a jeden srdce nakyp s Biblicky Moudrost tak, ze JA chtel bych slouzit tebe vice efektivni. 8. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne jeden porucit az k uceni tvuj slovo , clen urcity Bible , ( Novy zakon Evangelium of Jan ), dale jeden osobni baze

9. aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoc az k mne tak, ze J A am schopny az k oznameni majetek do clen urcity Bible ( tvuj slovo ) kdo Dovedu co se me tyce byt v pomeru k sem tam , to postaci pomoci mne dovidat se jaky tebe potfeba mne az k zavrazdit ma duch.

10. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne celek bystrost , az k dovidat se jak? az k jasne se vyjadf it az k jini kdo tebe ar , a aby JA chtel bych byt schopny az k dostat instrukce jak? az k dostat instrukce a vRdRt jak? az k postavit se za tebe a tvuj slovo ( clen urcity Bible )

1 1 . Aby tebe chtel bych nest lid ( ci websites ) do ma duch kdo potfeba az k vRdRt tebe , a kdo ar silny do jejich pfesny dohoda of tebe ( buh ); a Aby tebe chtel bych nest lid ( ci websites ) do ma duch kdo vule byt schopny az k dodat mysli mne az k pfesny dostat instrukce jak? az k delit clen urcity Bible Pismo svate pravda (2 Bazlivy 215:).

12. Aby tebe chtel bych pomoci mne az k dostat instrukce az k mit celek dohoda kolem kdo Bible liceni is nejlepe , kdo is nejcetnejsi pfesny , a kdo 3sg.prez.od have clen urcity nejcetnejsi duchovni sila & mnozstvi , a kdo liceni souhlasi jit s duchem casu original rukopis aby tebe dychat clen urcity spisovatele of Novy zakon az k psat.

13. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoci az k mne az k cviceni ma cas do jeden blaho cesta , a rozchazet se v nazorech zpustosit ma cas dale Chybny ci hladovy metody az k brat blizky az k Buh ( kdyby ne ar ne opravdu Biblicky ), a kde those metody napsat ne dlouha hlaska cas ci {lastingllstalylltrvaly} } duchovni nest ovoce.

14. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoc az k mne az k dovidat se jaky az k hledat do jeden cirkev ci jeden bydliste of uctivani , jaky rody of otazky az k ptat se , a aby tebe chtel bych pomoci mne az k nalez vef fci ci jeden duchovni s celek duchovni moudrost misto bezstarostny ci chybny odpovida.

15. aby tebe chtel bych byt pficinou mne na pametnou az k memorovat tvuj slovo clen urcity Bible ( jako takovy Riman 8), tak, ze Dovedu mit ono do ma srdce a mit ma mysl pfipraveny , a byt hbity az k darovat neurc. clen byt v souhlase s jini of clen urcity nadeje aby Mam u sebe tebe.

16. Aby tebe chtel bych nest pomoci az k mne tak, ze ja sam bohoslovi a doktrina az k souhlasit s tvuj slovo , clen urcity

Bible a aby tebe chtel bych stale byt pomoci mne vRdRt jak? ma dohoda of doktrina pocfnovat byt opravit tak, ze ja sam duch lifestyle a dohoda odrocit az k byt blizky k jakemu licelu tebe potfeba ono az k byt pro mne.

17. Aby tebe chtel bych nechraneny ma duchovni jasnozfenf ( konec ) cim dale, tim vice , a aby kde ma dohoda ci chapavost of tebe is ne pfesny , aby tebe chtel bych pomoci mne az k dostat instrukce kdo Jezuita Kristus opravdu is.

18. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoci az k mne tak, ze JA chtel bych byt schopny az k oddeleny jakykoliv chybny obfad kdo J A mit duvera dale , dle tvuj cely doktrina do clen urcity Bible , jestli vubec of jaky JA am nasledujici is ne of Buh , ci is proti cemu jaky tebe potfeba az k ucit us kolem nasledujici tebe.

19. Aby jakykoliv dohnat of nestesti chtel bych ne odebrat jakykoliv duchovni dohoda kdo JA mit , aby ne dosti aby JA chtel bych drzet clen urcity znalost ceho jak? az k vRdRt tebe a rozchazet se v nazorech byt kiamat do tezaury days of duchovni klam.

20. Aby tebe chtel bych nest duchovni sila a pomoci az k mne tak, ze JA vule rozchazet se v nazorech byt cast of notablove Klesani Pryc ci of jakykoliv pohyb kdo chtel bych byt duchovo falsovat az k tebe a az k tvuj Svaty Slovo

21. Aby -li tam is cokoli aby JA mit utahany ma duch , ci jakkoli aby JA mit ne dotazovana osoba az k tebe ackoliv Sel bych mit a to jest opatfeni mne dle jeden nebo druhy kraceni s tebe , ci having dohoda , aby tebe chtel bych nest those majetek / citlivost pfistroje / pfihoda bek do ma mysl , tak, ze JA chtel bych nectit barvu je jmenem koho Jezuita Kristus , a celek of jejich dojem a dosah , a aby tebe chtel bych dat na dfivejsi misto jakykoliv emptiness ,sadness ci

beznadejnost do ma duch jit s duchem casu Radost of clen urcity Hospodin , a aby J chtel bych byt vice lozisko dale ucenost az k doprovazet tebe do cetba tvuj slovo , Bible

22. Aby tebe chtel bych nechraneny probuh tak, ze J A chtel bych byt schopny az k jasne videt a pochopit -li tam is jeden Celek Klam kolem Duchovni namet , jak? az k dovidat se tato pfechodny ( ci tezaury pfihoda ) dle jeden Biblicky perspektiva , a aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne moudrost az k vRdRt a tak, ze JA vule dostat instrukce jak? poslouzit jidlem ma druh a Amor sam ( pfibuzni ) ne byt cast of it.

23. Aby tebe chtel bych pojistit aby druhdy probuh ar nechraneny a ma mysl dovidat se clen urcity duchovni vyznam of beh pfihoda dobyti bydliste do clen urcity svet , aby tebe chtel bych chystat se ma srdce az k pfijmout tvuj pravda , a aby tebe chtel bych pomoci mne dovidat se jak? az k nalez kuraz a sila docela tvuj Svaty Slovo , clen urcity Bible. Jmenem koho Jezuita Kristus , JA tazat se na tezaury majetek bifmovat ma porucit az k bjH; doma souhlas tvuj vule , a JA am ptani se do tvuj moudrost a az k mit jeden laska ke komu clen urcity Pravda Amen

Vice v clen urcity Dno of Blok Jak? az k mit Nekonecny Duch

My ar rad -li tato barevny pruh of modlitba dotaz az k Buh is schopny az k pomahat tebe. My dovidat se tato moci ne byt clen urcity nejlepe ci nejcetnejsi efektivni desifrovani. My dovidat se tamhleten ar mnoho neobvykly cesty of interpretace domneni a slova. -li tebe mit jeden navrh do jeden lepe desifrovani , ci -li tebe chtel bych do teze mfry az

k brat jeden maly cinit of tvuj cas az k poslat navrhy az k us , tebe vule byt porce jidla tisic of druhy lid rovnez , kdo vule nekdy cist clen urcity opravit desifrovani. My casto mit jeden Novy Posledni vule pfistupny do tvuj jazyk ci do jazyk aby ar nedovafeny ci davny. -li tebe ar hledet do jeden Novy Posledni vule do jeden specificky jazyk , byt pfijemny psat az k us. Rovnez , my potfeba az k jiste a namahat az k byt ve styku aby nekdy , my cinit nabidka blok aby ar ne Drzy a aby cinit cena penize.

Aby ne -li tebe delostfelectvo pfitok nejaky of those elektronicky blok , my pocinovat casto cinit neurc. clen burza of elektronicky blok do pomoci s desifrovani ci desifrovani prace. Tebe cinit ne mit az k bjH; jeden odborny delnik , ale jeden pofadny osoba kdo is obchod do porce jidla. Tebe pozadovat mit jeden pocitac ci tebe pozadovat mit pfistup az k jeden pocitac v tvuj lokalka knihovna ci akademie ci univerzita , od te doby those obvykly mit lepe klientela az k clen urcity internovana osoba. Tebe pocinovat rovnez obvykly upevnit tvuj drahy osobni DRZY elektronicka posta ucet do existujici az k mail.yahoo.com

BjH; pfijemny brat jeden dulezitost az k nalez clen urcity elektronicka posta adresovat nalezt v clen urcity dno ci clen urcity cfl of tato blok. My nadeje tebe vule poslat elektronicka posta az k us , -li tato is of pomoci ci podpora. My rovnez dodat mysli tebe az k dotyk us pokud jde o Elektronicky Blok aby my nabidka aby ar bez cena , a drzy.

My cinit mit mnoho blok do cizi jazyk , aby ne my cinit nekdy bydliste je az k dostat electronically ( zavadeni ) ponevadz my ale delat pfistupny clen urcity blok ci clen urcity namet aby ar clen urcity nejcetnejsi dotaz. My dodat mysli tebe az k stale byt modlit az k Buh a az k stale byt

dostat instrukce kolem Jemu do cetba Novy zakon. My vftat tvuj otazky a poznamky do elektronicka posta.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Drogi Bog , Dzigkujg 6 w ten Nowy Testament

ma byl zwolniony byle tylko jestesmy able wobec nauczyc si§ liczniejszy okolo ty. Prosz§ mi pomoc ludzie odpowiedzialny pod katem wykonaniem ten Elektroniczny ksiazka rozporzadzalny.

Prosz§ mi pomoc im zostac wyplacalny praca umocowany , i zrobic liczniejszy Elektroniczny ksiazki rozporzadzalny Prosz§ mi pomoc im wobec miec wszystko ten zasoby , ten pieniadze , ten sila i ten czas 6w oni potrzebowac w klasa zostac wyplacalny utrzymywac dzialanie pod k^tem Ty. Prosz§ mi pomoc 6w 6w jestescie obowi^zek od ten druzyna 6w wspolpracownik imuan codzienny podstawa.

Podobac si§ dawac im ten sila wobec kontynuowac i dawac kazdy od im ten duchowy zgoda pod katem ten praca 6w ty potrzeba im wobec czynic. Prosz§ mi pomoc kazdy od im wobec nie miec strach i wobec zapamietac 6w jestes ten Bog ktory odpowiedzi modlitwa i ktory jest w koszt od wszystko. JA blagac 6w ty bylby zach^cac im , i 6w ty ochraniac im , i ten praca & ministerstwo 6w oni sa^ zaj^ty. J A blagac 6w ty bylby ochraniac im z ten Duchowy Sily zbrojne albo inny przeszkody 6w kulisy szkoda im albo powolny im w dol. Prosz§ mi pomoc podczas JA uzywac ten Nowy Testament wobec takze pomyslec od ludzie ktory miec wykonane ten wydanie rozporzadzalny , byle tylko JA

puszka metalowa modlic si§ za im i tak oni puszka metalowa robic w dalszym ciaj>u wspolpracownik

liczniejszy spoleczeristwo JA blagac 6w ty bylby dawac mi pewien milosc od twoj Swi^ty Wyraz ( ten Nowy Testament ), i 6w ty bylby dawac mi duchowy madrosc i orientacja wobec znac ty polepszyc i wobec rozumiec ten okres 6w jestesmy zyjacy w. Prosz§ mi pomoc wobec znac jak wobec zawierac z transakcj^ ten trudnosci 6w JA jestem skonfrontowany rezygnowac codziennie.

Lord Bog , Wspolpracownik mi wobec potrzeba wobec znac ty Polepszyc i wobec potrzeba wobec wspolpracownik inny Chrzescijanie w moj powierzchnia i wokolo ten swiat. JA blagac 6w ty bylby dawac ten Elektroniczny ksiazka druzyna i 6w ktory praca od pajeczyny i 6w ktory wspolpracownik im twoj madrosc. JA blagac 6w ty bylby wspolpracownik ten indywidualny czlonki od ich rodzina ( i moj rodzina ) wobec nie byc duchowo zwodzil , oprocz wobec rozumiec ty i ja wobec potrzeba wobec uznawac i nastepowac po ty w na wszelki sposob. i JA zapytac ty wobec czynic tych rzeczy na Boga Jezus , Amen ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Slovenian

Slovenian

Slovenian - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God - explained in Slovenian Language

slovenian prayer jezuit Kristus molitev Bog kako prositi kako moci slisati svoj zaprositi podati ponuditi komu kaj mi

pri aparatu imeti se za boga , tvorec od vsemirje , bog :

1 . to vi hoteti izrociti mi pogum prositi stvari to rabim prositi

2. to vi hoteti izrociti mi pogum v vernik vi ter uvazevati kaksen hoces vzdrzati svoj zivljenje , namesto mi navdusenje svoj lasten hoteti ( namen ) zgoraj vas.

3. to vi hoteti izrociti mi ponuditi komu kaj ne pustiti svoj grozen od neznano v postati opravicilo , ali osnova navzlic ne streci you.

4. to vi hoteti izrociti mi ponuditi komu kaj zagledati ter zvedeti kako imeti bozji zakon cvrstost rabim ( skozi vas izraziti z besedami biblija ) a ) zakaj pripetljaj spredaj ter b ) zakaj svoj lasten oseben netelesen potovanje.

5. to vi Bog hoteti izrociti mi ponuditi komu kaj biti brez streci vi vec

6. to vi hoteti spomniti se mi pogovarjati se vi prayerwhen ) jaz sem unicen ali v tezava , namesto tezaven odlociti stvari sebi sele skozi svoj cloveski cvrstost.

7. to vi hoteti izrociti mi modrost ter a srcika poin Biblical modrost tako da jaz hoteti zacetni udarec z zogo vi vec razpolozljiv.

8. to vi hoteti izrociti mi a zahteva studirati vas izraziti z besedami , biblija , ( novi testament evangelij od John ), naprej a oseben osnova

9. to vi hoteti izrociti pomoc mi tako da morem opaziti stvari v biblija ( vas izraziti z besedami ) kateri morem osebno tikati se cesa , ter to zadostuje pomoc mi razumeti kaksen vi biti brez mi uganjati v svoj zivljenje.

10. to vi hoteti izrociti mi velik bistroumnost , v razumeti kako razlagati drugim kdo vi ste , ter to jaz domisljavec zmozen zvedeti kako zvedeti ter znanje kako stati pokoncu zakaj vi ter vas izraziti z besedami ( biblija )

1 1. to vi hoteti privleci narod ( ali websites ) v svoj zivljenje kdo biti brez znati vi , ter kdo ste krepek v svoj natancen razumeven od vi ( Bog ); ter to vi hoteti privleci narod ( ali websites ) v svoj zivljenje kdo hoteti obstati zmozen v podzigati mi v natancen zvedeti kako razpreti biblija izraziti z besedami od resnica (2 plasljiv 215:).

12. to vi hoteti pomoc mi zvedeti imeti velik razumeven priblizno kateri biblija prevod je najprimernejsi , kateri je najvec natancen , ter kateri has najvec netelesen cvrstost & sila , ter kateri prevod strinjati se s samorasel rokopis to vi vdihniti pisec od novi testament pisati.

13. to vi hoteti izrociti ponuditi komu kaj mi rabiti svoj cas v a dober izuriti za hojo ali jezo po cesti , ter ne v razsipavati svoj cas naprej napacen ali puhel metoda zadobiti sklepnik v Bog ( ce ze ne ste ne resnicno Biblical ), ter kraj oni metoda predelki ne dolg pogoj ali trajen netelesen sadje.

14. to vi hoteti izrociti pomoc mi v razumeti kaksen iskati v a cerkvica ali a mesto od castiti , kaksen milosten od vprasanje zaprositi , ter to vi hoteti pomoc mi najti vernik ali a pastor s velik netelesen modrost namesto neprisiljen ali napacen odgovor.

15. to vi hoteti vzrok mi spomniti se nauciti se na pamet vas izraziti z besedami biblija ( kot na primer retoromanski 8), tako da morem zivljati to v svoj srcika ter zivljati svoj srce

pripravljen , ter obstati radovoljen podati odgovor drugim od upanje to imam priblizno vi.

16. to vi hoteti privleci ponuditi komu kaj mi tako da svoj lasten teologija ter nauk ujemati se s vas izraziti z besedami , biblija ter to vi hoteti vzdrznost v pomoc mi znanje kako svoj razumeven od nauk moci obstati izpopolniti tako da svoj lasten zivljenje lifestyle ter razumeven vzdrznost to live at warefare with s. o. sklepnik eemu vi biti brez to v obstati navzlic.

17. to vi hoteti plan svoj netelesen vpogled ( sklep ) bolj in bolj , ter to kraj svoj razumeven ali zaznavanje od vi ni natancen , to vi hoteti pomoc mi zvedeti kdo jezuit Kristus resnicno je.

18. to vi hoteti izrociti ponuditi komu kaj mi tako da jaz domisljavec zmozen razstati se poljuben napacen cerkveni obredi kateri imam odvisnost naprej , s vas veder poucevanje v biblija , ce sploh kateri od kaksen jaz sem sledec ni od Bog , ali je nasprotno eemu kaksen hoces uciti nas priblizno sledec vi.

19. to poljuben vojna sila od zlo hoteti ne odvzeti poljuben netelesen razumeven kateri imam , sele precej to jaz hoteti obdrzati znanost od kako znati vi ter ne v obstati goljufati dandanes od netelesen prevara.

20. to vi hoteti privleci netelesen cvrstost ter ponuditi komu kaj mi tako da nocem v obstati del od velika gospoda padanje stran ali od poljuben tok kateri domisljavec netelesen ponarejen vam na uslugo ter v vas svet izraziti z besedami

21. to ce je nic to imam velja v svoj zivljenje , ali vsekakor to imam ne odgovor vam na uslugo kot jaz should zivljati ter to je preprecljiv mi s vsak izmed obeh pesacenje z vami , ali imetje razumeven , to vi hoteti privleci oni stvari / odgovor / pripetljaj prislon v svoj srce , tako da jaz hoteti odreci se jih v imenu ljudstva, usmiljenja itd. jezuit Kristus , ter prav do svoj vrednostni papirji ter posledica , ter to vi hoteti nadomestiti poljuben puhlost ,sadness ali obup v svoj

zivljenje s veselje od bog , ter to jaz domisljavec vec zarisce naprej ucenje slediti vi z citanje vas izraziti z besedami , biblija

22. to vi hoteti plan svoj oci tako da jaz domisljavec zmozen v jasno zagledati ter pred sodiscem se pismeno obvezati ce je a velik prevara priblizno netelesen predmet , kako v razumeti to fenomen ( ali od this pripetljaj ) s a Biblical perspektiven , ter to vi hoteti izrociti mi modrost znati ter tako da bom se ucil kako v pomoc svoj prijateljstvo ter ljubezen sam sebe, sebi, se ( zlahta ) ne obstati del od it.

23. to vi hoteti zavarovati to nekoc svoj oci ste odpirac ter svoj srce razumeti bozji zakon pomen od tok pripetljaj taking mesto na svetu , to vi hoteti pripraviti se svoj srcika vzeti vas resnica , ter to vi hoteti pomoc mi razumeti kako najti pogum ter cvrstost skozi vas svet izraziti z besedami , biblija. v imenu ljudstva, usmiljenja itd. jezuit Kristus , jaz prositi od this stvari potrditi svoj zahteva v biti znotraj pogodba vas hoteti , ter vprasam zakaj vas modrost ter imeti a ljubezen od resnica Amen.

vec pravzaprav od stran kako imeti vecen zivljenje

mi smo vesel ce to zapisati v seznam ( od molitev prosnja v Bog ) je zmozen pomagati vi. mi razumeti to maj ne obstati najboljsi ali najvec uspesen prevod. mi razumeti to so veliko razlicen ways od iztisljiv mnenje ter izraziti z besedami. ce vi zivljati a nasvet zakaj a rajsi prevod , ali ce vi hoteti vsec biti zavzeti a tesen znesek od vas cas posiljati nasvet v nas , bos pomaganje tisoc od drugi narod tudi , kdo hoteti torej citanje izpopolniti prevod. mi pogosto zivljati a nova zaveza

pri roki v vas jezik ali v jezik to ste redek ali star. ce isces a nova zaveza v a poseben jezik , prosim napisati rabiti. tudi , mi biti brez v obstati varen ter zaceti v biti obhajan to vcasih , mi delati oferirati knjiga to ste ne prost ter to delati strosek penez.

sele ce vi ne morem privosciti si nekaj tega oni elektronski knjiga , mi moci pogosto delati mena od elektronski knjiga zakaj pomoc s prevod ali prevod opus. vi nikar ne zivljati to live at warefare with s. o. a poklicen delavec , sele a reden oseba kdo je zavzet v pomaganje. vi should zivljati a racunalo ali vi should zivljati postranski v a racunalo v vas tukajsnji knjiznica ali visja gimnazija ali univerza , odkar oni navadno zivljati rajsi vez v stazist v bolnisnici. vi moci tudi navadno ustanoviti vas lasten oseben prost elektronski verizna srajca racun z tekoc v mail.yahoo.com

prosim zalotiti a vaznost za odkriti elektronski verizna srajca ogovor poiskati pravzaprav ali prenehati od to stran. mi upanje bos poslal elektronski verizna srajca v nas , ce to je od pomoc ali encouragement. mi tudi podzigati vi v zveza nas zadeven elektronski knjiga to mi oferirati to ste ce ne strosek , ter prost.

mi delati zivljati veliko knjiga v tuji jeziki , sele mi nikar ne zmeraj mesto jih sprejeti electronically ( travnato gricevje ) zato ker mi sele izdelovanje pri roki knjiga ali predmet to ste najvec prosnja. mi podzigati vi v vzdrznost prositi v Bog ter v vzdrznost zvedeti priblizno njega z citanje novi testament. mi izreci dobrodoslico vas vprasanje ter razloziti z elektronski verizna srajca.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

srckan Bog , the same to to nova zaveza has been izpusttakodamismo

zmozen zvedeti vec priblizno vi. prosim pomoc preprosti ljudje odgovoren zakaj izdelava to elektronski knjiga pri roki.

prosim pomoc jih premoci opus nagel , ter izdelovanje vec elektronski knjiga pri roki prosim pomoc jih imeti vsi sredstvo , penez , cvrstost ter cas to oni potreba zato da obstati zmozen vzdrzevati ki dela zakaj vi. prosim pomoc oni to ste del od skupina to pomoc jih naprej vsakdanji osnova. prosim izrociti jih cvrstost v vzdrznost ter izrociti vsakteri od jih bozji zakon razumeven zakaj opus to vi biti brez jih uganjati. prosim pomoc vsakteri od jih v ne zivljati strah ter spomniti se to vi ste Bog kdo odgovor molitev ter kdo je v ukaz od vse.

jaz predlagati da vi hoteti podzigati jih , ter to vi zavarovati jih , ter opus & ministrstvo to oni so zaposlen s cim. jaz predlagati da vi hoteti zavarovati jih s netelesen vojna sila ali drugi zapreka to strjena lava skoda jih ali pocasi vozite jih niz. prosim pomoc mi cas jaz raba to nova zaveza v tudi pretehtati od preprosti ljudje kdo zivljati narejen to naklada pri roki ,

tako da morem prositi za jih ter tudi oni moci vzdrznost v pomoc vec narod jaz predlagati da vi hoteti izrociti mi a ljubezen od vas svet izraziti z besedami ( novi testament ), ter to vi hoteti izrociti mi netelesen modrost ter bistroumnost

znati vi rajsi ter v razumeti epoha od cas to mi smo zivljenje v.

prosim pomoc mi znati kako v obravnavati tezek to jaz sem soociti s vsak dan. lord Bog , pomoc mi hoteti znanje vi rajsi ter hoteti pomoc drugi krscanski v svoj area ter po svetu. jaz predlagati da vi hoteti izrociti elektronski knjiga skupina ter oni kdo opus naprej tkalec ter oni kdo pomoc jih vas modrost. jaz predlagati da vi hoteti pomoc poedinec clanstvo od svoj rodbina ( ter svoj rodbina ) v ne obstati netelesen goljufati , sele v razumeti vi ter hoteti uvazevati ter slediti vi v sleherni izuriti za hojo ali jezo po cesti. ter jaz zaprositi vi uganjati od this stvari v imenu ljudstva, usmiljenja itd. jezuit , Amen ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

llltlhal diyOS , pasalamatan ka atipan ng pawid ito bago testamento may been pakawalan pagayon atipan ng pawid tayo ay able sa mag-aral laling marami buongpaligid ka. masiyahan tumulong ang mga tao may pananagutan dahil sa making ito Electronic book makukuha. masiyahan tumulong kanila sa maaari able sa gumawa ayuno , at gawin laling marami Electronic books makukuha masiyahan tumulong kanila sa may lahat ang mapamaraan , ang salapi , ang lakas at ang takdaan ng oras atipan ng pawid sila mangilangan di iutos sa maaari able sa tago gumawa dahil saka.

masiyahan tumulong those atipan ng pawid ay mahati ng ang itambal atipan ng pawid tumulong kanila sa isa pang- araw-araw batayan. masiyahan bigyan kanila ang lakas sa mapatuloy at bigyan bawa't isa ng kanila ang tangayin pang- unawa dahil sa ang gumawa atipan ng pawid ka magkulang

kanila sa gumawa. masiyahan tumulong bawa't isa ng kanila sa hindi may katakutan at sa gunitain atipan ng pawid ka ay ang diyos sino sumagot dasal at sino ay di pagbintangan ng lahat ng bagay.

ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka would palakasin ang loob kanila , at atipan ng pawid ka ipagsanggalang kanila , at ang gumawa & magkalinga atipan ng pawid sila ay kumuha di. ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka would ipagsanggalang kanila sa ang tangayin pilitin o iba sagwil atipan ng pawid could saktan kanila o slow kanila itumba. masiyahan tumulong ako kailan ako gumamit ito bago testamento sa din isipin ng ang mga tao sino may made ito edisyon makukuha , pagayon atipan ng pawid ako maaari magdasal dahil sa kanila at pagayon sila maaari mapatuloy sa tumulong laling marami mga tao ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka would bigyan ako a ibigin ng mo banal salita ( ang bago testamento ), at atipan ng pawid ka would bigyan ako tangayin dunong at discernment sa malaman ka lalong mapabuti at sa maintindihan ang tukdok ng takdaan ng oras atipan ng pawid tayo ay ikinabubuhay di. masiyahan tumulong ako sa malaman paano sa makitungo kumuha ang mahirap hindi madali atipan ng pawid ako ay confronted kumuha bawa't araw. panginoon diyos , tumulong ako sa magkulang sa malaman ka lalong mapabuti at sa magkulang sa tumulong iba binyagan di akin malawak at sa tabi-tabi ang daigdig. ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka would bigyan ang Electronic book itambal at those sino gumawa sa ang website at those sino tumulong kanila mo dunong.

ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka would tumulong ang isang tao pagkakasapi ng kanila mag-anak ( at akin mag-anak ) sa hindi maaari spiritually dayain , datapuwa't sa maintindihan ka at sa magkulang sa tanggapin at sundan ka di bawa't daan. at ako humingi ka sa gumawa tesis bagay di ang pangalanan ng heswita , susugan ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Armas Jumala , Kiittaa te etta' nyt kuluva Veres Jalkisaados has esittamislupa joten etta me aari eteva jotta kuulla enemman jokseenkin te.

Haluta auttaa ihmiset edesvastuullinen ajaksi ansaitseva nyt kuluva Elektroninen kirjanpidollinen saatavana. Haluta auttaa heidat jotta olla eteva jotta aikaansaada paastota , ja ehtia enemman Elektroninen luettelossa saatavana Haluta auttaa heidat jotta hankkia aivan varat , raha , kesto ja aika etta he kaivata kotona aste jotta olla eteva jotta elatus tyoskentely ajaksi Te.

Haluta auttaa ne etta aari erita -lta joukkue etta auttaa heidat model after by jokapaivainen kivijalka. Haluta kimmoisuus heidat kesto jotta jatkaa ja kimmoisuus joka -lta heidat henki- ymmartavainen ajaksi aikaansaada etta te haluta heidat jotta ajaa.

Haluta auttaa joka -lta heidat jotta ei hankkia pelata ja jotta muistaa etta te aari Jumala joka tottelee nimea hartaushetki ja joka on kotona hinta -lta kaikki. I-KIRJAIN pyytaa hartaasti etta te edistaa heidat , ja etta te suojata heidat , ja aikaansaada & ministerikausi etta he aari varattu kotona. I- KIRJAIN pyytaa hartaasti etta te suojata heidat polveutua Henki- Joukko eli toinen este etta haitta heidat eli hitaasti heidat heittaa. Haluta auttaa we jahka I-KIRJAIN apu nyt kuluva Veres Jalkisaados jotta kin ajatella -lta ihmiset joka hankkia kokoonpantu nyt kuluva painos saatavana , joten etta I-KIRJAIN kanisteri pyytaa hartaasti ajaksi heidat ja

joten he kanisteri jatkaa jotta auttaa enemman ihmiset I- KIRJAIN pyytaa hartaasti etta te kimmoisuus we lempia -lta sinun Pyha Sana ( Veres Jalkisaados ), ja etta te kimmoisuus we henki- viisaus ja arvostelukyky jotta osata te vedonlyoja ja jotta kasittaa aika -lta aika etta me aari asuen kotona. Haluta auttaa we jotta osata kuinka jotta antaa avulla hankala etta I-KIRJAIN olen asettaa vastakkain avulla joka aika. Haltija Jumala , Auttaa we jotta haluta jotta osata te Vedonlyoja ja jotta haluta jotta auttaa toinen Kristitty kotona minun kohta ja liepeilla maailma.

I-KIRJAIN pyytaa hartaasti etta te kimmoisuus Elektroninen kirjanpidollinen joukkue ja ne joka aikaansaada model after kudos ja ne joka auttaa heidat sinun viisaus. I-KIRJAIN pyytaa hartaasti etta te auttaa yksilo jasenmaara -lta heidan heimo ( ja minun heimo ) jotta ei olla henkisesti eksyttaa , ainoastaan jotta kasittaa te ja jotta haluta jotta hyvaksya ja harjoittaa te kotona joka elamantapa. ja I-KIRJAIN anoa te jotta ajaa nama tavarat kotona maine -lta Jeesus , Vastuunalainen ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Raring Gud , Tack sjalv sa pass den har Ny

Testamente er blitt befriaren sa fakta at vi er duglig till lara sig mer omkring du. Behag hjalpamig folk ansvarig for tillverkningen den har Elektronisk bok tillganglig.

Behag hjalpa mig dem till vara kopa duktig verk fort , och gora mer Elektronisk bokna tillganglig Behag hjalpa mig dem till har alla resurserna , pengarna , den styrka och tiden sa pass de behov for att kunde halia arbetande till deras. Behag hjalpa mig den har sa pass de/vi/du/ni ar del om spannen sa pass hjalp dem pa en daglig basis. Behaga ger dem den styrka till fortsatta och ger var av dem den ande forstandet for den verk sa pass du vilja dem till gor. Behag hjalpa mig var av dem till inte har radsla och till minas sa pass du er den Gud vem svar bon och vem er han i lidelse av allting.

JAG be sa pass du skulle uppmuntra dem , och sa pass du skydda dem , och den verk & ministaren sa pass de er forlovad i.

JAG be sa pass du skulle skydda dem fran den Ande Pressar eller annan hinder sa pass kunde skada dem eller langsam dem ned. Behag hjalpa mig nar JAG anvanda den har Ny Testamente till ocksa tanka om folk vem har gjord den har upplagan tillganglig , sa fakta at JAG kanna be for dem och sa de kanna fortsatta till hjalp mer folk JAG be sa pass du skulle ge mig en karlek om din Helig Uttrycka ( den Ny Testamente ), och sa pass du skulle ge mig ande visdom och discernment till veta du battre och till forsta den period av tid sa pass vi er levande i.

Behag hjalpa mig till veta hur till ha att gora med svarigheten sa pass JAG er stillt overfor var dag. Var Herre och Fralsare Gud , Hjalpa mig till vilja till veta du Battre och till vilja till hjalp annan Kristen i min areal och i omkrets det varld. JAG be sa pass du skulle ger den Elektronisk bok sla sig ihop och den har vem arbeta pa den spindelvav och den har vem hjalp dem din visdom. JAG be sa pass du skulle hjalp individuellt medlemmen av deras familj ( och min familj ) till inte bli spiritually lurat , utom till forsta du och mig till vilja till accept och folja du i varje vag. och JAG fraga du till gor de har sakerna inne om namn av Jesus , Samarbetsvillig ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Allerkserest God , Tak for lan at indevaerende Ny Testamente er blevet l0st i den grad at vi er kan hen til lasre flere omkring jer. Behage hjaelp den folk ansvarlig nemlig g0r indevaerende Elektronisk skrift anvendelig. Behage hjselp sig at blive k0bedygtig arbejde holdbar , og skabe flere Elektronisk b0ger anvendelig Behage hjaslp sig hen til nyde en hel ressourcer , den penge , den krasfter og den gang at de savn for at vaere i stand til opbevare i orden nemlig Jer.

Behage hjaelp dem at er noget af den hold at hjaslp sig oven pa en hverdags holdepunkt. Behage indr0mme sig den krasfter hen til fortsastte og indr0mme hver i sig den appel opfattelse nemlig den arbejde at jer savn sig hen til lave. Behage hjaelp hver i sig hen til ikke nyde skrask og hen til huske at du er den God hvem svar b0n og hvem star for arrangementet i alt.

JEG bed at jer ville give mod sig , og at jer sikre sig , og den arbejde & ministerium at de er forlovet i. JEG bed at jer ville sikre sig af den Appel Tvinger eller anden hindring at kunne afbrask sig eller sen sig nede.

Behage hjaelp mig hvor JEG hjaelp indevaerende Ny Testamente hen til ligeledes hitte pa den folk hvem nyde skabt indevaerende oplag anvendelig , i den grad at JEG kunne bed nemlig sig hvorfor de kunne fortsastte hen til hjaelp flere folk JEG bed at jer ville indr0mme mig en

kserlighed til jeres Hellig Ord ( den Ny Testamente ), og at jer ville indr0mme mig appel klogskab og discernment hen til kende jer bedre og hen til opfatte den periode at vi er nulevende i.

Behage hjselp mig hen til kende hvor hen til omhandle den problemer at Jeg er stillet over for hver dag. Lord God , Hjselp mig hen til ville gerne kende jer Bedre og hen til ville gerne hjselp anden Christians i mig omrade og omkring den jord.

JEG bed at jer ville indr0mme den Elektronisk skrift hold og dem hvem arbejde med den website og dem hvem hjselp sig jeres klogskab. JEG bed at jer ville hjselp den individ medlemmer i deres slsegt ( og mig slsegt ) hen til ikke vsere spiritually narrede , men hen til opfatte jer og hen til ville gerne optage og komme efter jer i al mulig made. og JEG opfordre jer hen til lave disse sager i den bensevne i Jesus , Amen ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

MojiHTBa k 6ory ,3,oporoii Bor, Bm hto Swjih BbinymeHbi oto Gospel hjih otot hobmh testament TaK, ^rro Mbi GyaeM BbiyHHTb 6ojrbiiie o Bac. Ilo5KajryHCTa noMorHTe jikwim OTBercTBeHHbiM ajih /jenaTb OTy 3jieKTpoHHyio KHHry HMeiomeiica. Bbi 3HaeTe ohh h bm M05KeTe noMOHb hm. rio5KajryHCTa noMorHTe hm MOHb pa6oTaTb 6bicrpo, h c/tejiaiiTe 6onee aneKTpoHHbie khhth HMeiomeiica rio5KajryHCTa noMorHTe hm HMerb Bce

pecypcbi, AeHbr, npoHHOCTb h BpeMa Koropbie ohh ajih roro ^rroGbi MOHb #ep>KaTb pa6oTaTb ajih Bac. ItoKanyiiCTa noMorHTe tcm dyjjyr nacTbio KOMaimM noMoraeT hm Ha e5KeAHeBHoe ocHOBamie. nroicajiyHCTa Rawre hm npoHHOCTb jxm roro MTo6bi npo^oiDKaTb h /jaBaTb KaayjOMy H3 hx AyxoBHoe BHHKaHne jxm pa6oTbi mto bm xothtc hx c^enaTb. Ilo5KajiyHCTa noMorHTe KaayjOMy H3 hx He HMeTb crpax h He BcnoMHHaTb mto bm oy^eTe 6oroM OTBeHaiOT MOJiHTBe h in charge of bcc il mojho mto bm o6oaphjih hx, h mto bm 3amHmaeTe hx, h pa6oTa & MHHHcrepcTBO mto

OHH BKJUOHeHM BHyTpH.

il MOJIK) MTO BM 3aiHHTHJIH HX OT #yXOBHMX yCHJIHH HJIH

Apyrnx npenoH CMornn noBpeAHTb hm hjih 3aMeAJnrrb hm bhh3. Ilo5KajiyHCTa noMorHTe MHe Kor/ia a Hcnojib3yio stot hobmh testament raioKe jxm roro mto6m /jyMaTb mo^eH AenajiH stot BapnaHT HMeiomeHca, TaK, mto a CMory noMOJiHTb jxm hx h no3TOMy hx CMorHTe npoAOJDKaTb noMOHb 6onbHie mo/ieH.

JI Momo mto bm ziajiH MHe Bjno6jieHHOCTb Baniero CBaTeHHiero cnoBa (HoBbraa 3aBeT), h mto bm /iaJiH MHe AyxoBHbie npeMy/ipocTb h pacno3HaHHe jxm roro mto6m 3HaTb Bac 6onee jryHine h noroiTb nepno/io BpeMeHH kotopom mm 5KHBeM b. Ilo5KajiyHCTa noMorHTe MHe cyMerb KaK o6maTbca c 3arpyAHeHHHMH mto a confronted c KaayiMM /iHeM. JlopA Bor, noMoraeT MHe xoTerb 3HaTb Bac 6onee nyHHie h xoTeTb noMOHb /ipyrHM xpHcraaHKaM b Moen o6nacTH h BOicpyr MHpa.

il MOJIK) MTO BM /lajIH 3JieKTpOHHyK) KOMaH/iy H Te KHHrH

noMoraiOT hm Bania npeMy/ipocTb. il mojho mto bm

nOMOrjIH HH^HBH/iyajIbHMM HJieHaM HX CeMbH (h Moen

ceMbn) /iyxoBHOCT 6biTb o6MaHyTMM, ho noHaTb Bac H xoTeTb npHHaTb h nocneAOBaTb 3a Bac b icaawH ^opore. TaK5Ke Aanre HaM komiJiopt h HaBe^eHKe b sth BpeMeHa h a

cnpaniHBaeM, mto bm jiejiaere oth Bemji in the name of CbfflOK 6ora, jesus christ, aMHHb,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

,3,par Bor , Ejiaroaapa th to3h to3h Hob 3aBemaHne has p.p. ot be ocBoSoacaaBaM TaKa to3h Hne CTe cnocoSeH kbm yna ce noBene HaOKOJiO th. XapecBaM noMaraM onpeflejiHrejieH hjich xopa OTroBopeH 3a npnroTBaHe to3h Electronic KHHra HajiineH.

XapecBaM noMaraM rax ki>m 6i>Aa cnoco6eH kt>m pa6oTa nocra , h npaBfl noBene Electronic KHiDKapHHHa HainmeH XapecBaM noMaraM rax ki>m HMaM uhji onpeAejiHrejieH HjieH cpeACTBO , onpeAejiHTejieH hikh napn , onpeAejiHTeneH hjich ycTOHHHBOCT h onpeAejiHrejieH hjich BpeMe to3h Te wyama in pe# ki>m 6i>Aa cnoco6eH ki>m /rbp5Ka /TBH5KeHHe 3a Th. XapecBaM noMaraM ot that to3h cre nacT Ha onpeAejiHrejieH hjich Birpar to3h noMaraM rax Ha an BceKH^HeBeH 6a3a.

XapecBaM ^aBaM rax onpe/tejiHreneH hjich yctohhhboct ki>m npo^tiDKaBaM h /laBaM BceKH Ha rax onpe/tejinTeneH HjieH /ryxoBeH cxBamaHe 3a oirpeaejiHTejieH hjkh pa6oTa TO3H th jnmca Tax ki>m npaBa.

XapecBaM noMaraM BceKH Ha Tax ki>m He HMaM crpax h ki>m noMHH to3h th cre onpeAejiHrejieH HjieH Bor koh OTroBop MOJiHTBa h koh e in m>jiHH Ha bchhko. A3 mojih to3h th yac Haci>pHaBaM Tax , h to3h th 3aiHHraBaM Tax , h

onpe^ejnrreneH hjich pa6oTa & MHHHcrepcrBO to3h Te cre 3am>iDKaBaM in. A3 mojih to3h th yac 3amHTaBaM rax ot onpe^ejiKTeneH HjieH ,HyxoBeH Cnna hjih /ipyr npenKa to3h p.t. ot can Bpe^a rax hjih 6aBeH rax rono Bi>3BHiiieHHe. XapecBaM noMaraM me Kora A3 ynoTpe6a to3h Hob 3aBemaHHe kt>m cbiho mhcjih Ha onpeAejnrrejieH hjich xopa

KOH HMaM p.t. H p.p. OT make T03H H3£aHHe HajIHHeH , TaKa

TO3H A3 Mora mojih 3a rax h TaKa Te Mora npo^tJCKaBaM kt>m noMaraM noBene xopa A3 mojih to3h th yac AaBaM me a jho6ob Ha your Cbot JfyMa ( onpe^ejinTeneH HjieH Hob 3aBemaHHe ), h to3h th yac /jaBaM me /ryxoBeH Mi>/rpocT h pa3JiHHaBaHe ki>m 3Haa th no-Ao6i>p h ki>m pa36npaM onpe^ejiHreneH HjieH nepno/i Ha BpeMe to3h HHe cre 5khb in. XapecBaM noMaraM me ki>m 3Haa Kaic ki>m pa3AaBaM c onpe^ejiKTeneH HjieH MbHen to3h A3 cbm ronpaBaM npeA c BceKH Ren.

JlopA Bor , IloMaraM me kt>m jnmca ki>m 3Haa th no-Ao6i>p h ki>m jnmca ki>m noMaraM /ipyr Xphcthhhckh in my iuiom h HaoKono onpe^ejiKTeneH HjieH cbot.

A3 MOJiH to3h th yac ^SBaM onpeAejnrrejieH HjieH Electronic KHHra Bnpar h ot that koh pa6oTa Ha onpeAejnrrejieH HjieH website h ot that koh noMaraM Tax your Mi>/rpocT. A3 mojih to3h th y5K noMaraM onpe^ejiHreneH HjieH jnmeH HjieHCTBO Ha TexeH ceMeiicTBO ( h my ceMeiicTBO ) ki>m He 6i>Aa /ryxoBeH H3MaMBaM , ho ki>m pa36npaM th h ki>m jnmca kt>m npneMaM h cjie^BaM th in BceKH m>T. h A3 mrraM th ki>m npaBa Te3H Hemo in onpeflejnrrejieH hjich HMe Ha He3yHT , Amen ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

sevgili mabut , eyvallah adi. §u bu Incil bkz.

have be serbest brrakmak taki biz are giiclii -e dogru ogrenmek daha hakktnda sen. mutlu etmek yardim etmek belgili tanimlik insanlar -den sorumlu icin yapim bu elektronik kitap elde edilebilir. mutlu etmek yardim etmek onlan -e dogru muktedir i§ hizli , ve yapmak daha elektronik kitap elde edilebilir mutlu etmek yardim etmek onlan -e dogru -si olmak tiim belgili tanimlik kaynak , belgili tanimlik para , belgili tanimlik gue ve belgili tanimlik zaman adi.

su onlar liizum icin muktedir almak calisma icin sen. mutlu etmek yardim etmek o adi. su are boliim -in belgili tanimlik takim adi. su yardim etmek onlan ustunde an her temel. mutlu etmek vermek onlan belgili tanimlik gue -e dogru devam etmek ve vermek her -in onlan belgili tanimlik ruhani basiret icin belgili tanimlik i§ adi. su sen istemek onlan -e dogru yapmak. mutlu etmek yardim etmek her -in onlan -e dogru degil -si olmak korkmak ve -e dogru animsamak adi. su sen are belgili tanimlik mabut kim yanit dua ve kim bkz. be icinde fiyat istemek -in her sey. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti ylireklendirmek onlan , ve adi. su sen korumak onlan , ve belgili tanimlik i§ & bakanlik adi. su onlar are me§gul icinde. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti korumak onlan —dan belgili tanimlik ruhani gue ya da diger engel adi.

su -ebil zarar onlan ya da yava§ onlan asagi. mutlu etmek yardim etmek beni ne zaman I kullanma bu Incil -e dogru da dusun belgili tanimlik insanlar kim -si olmak -den yapilmi§ bu baski elde edilebilir , taki I -ebilmek dua etmek icin onlan vesaire onlar -ebilmek devam etmek -e dogru yardim

etmek daha insanlar I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek beni a ask -in senin kutsal kelime ( belgili tammlik Incil ), ve adi. su sen -cekti vermek beni ruhani akillihk ve discernment -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve -e dogru anlamak belgili tanimlik dondiirmemem adi. su biz are canh iginde. mutlu etmek yardim etmek beni -e dogru bilmek nasil -e dogru dagitmak ile belgili tammlik muskulat adi. su I am kar§i koymak ile her giin. efendi mabut , yardim etmek beni -e dogru istemek -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve -e dogru istemek -e dogru yardim etmek diger Hristiyan icinde benim alan ve cevrede belgili tanimlik diinya. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek belgili tammlik elektronik kitap takim ve o kim i§ iistiinde belgili tanimlik website ve o kim yardim etmek onlari senin akilhlik. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti yardim etmek belgili tammlik bireysel aza -in onlarin aile ( ve benim aile ) -e dogru degil var olmak ruhani aldatmak , ama -e dogru anlamak sen ve -e dogru istemek -e dogru almak ve izlemek sen icinde her yol. ve I sormak sen -e dogru yapmak bunlar e§ya adma Isa , amin ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

sevgili mabut , eyvallah adi. su bu Incil bkz. have be serbest brrakmak taki biz are gu^lii -e dogru ogrenmek daha

hakkinda sen. mutlu etmek yardim etmek belgili tanimlik insanlar -den sorumlu icin yapim bu elektronik kitap elde edilebilir. mutlu etmek yardim etmek onlari -e dogru muktedir i§ hizli , ve yapmak daha elektronik kitap elde edilebilir mutlu etmek yardim etmek onlari -e dogru -si olmak timi belgili tanimlik kaynak , belgili tanimlik para , belgili tanimlik gue ve belgili tanimlik zaman adi. su onlar liizum icin muktedir almak calisma icin sen. mutlu etmek yardim etmek o adi. su are boliim -in belgili tanimlik takim adi. su yardim etmek onlari ustiinde an her temel. mutlu etmek vermek onlari belgili tanimlik gue -e dogru devam etmek ve vermek her -in onlari belgili tanimlik ruhani basiret icin belgili tanimlik i§ adi.

su sen istemek onlari -e dogru yapmak. mutlu etmek yardim etmek her -in onlari -e dogru degil -si olmak korkmak ve -e dogru animsamak adi. su sen are belgili tanimlik mabut kim yanit dua ve kim bkz. be icinde fiyat istemek -in her sey. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti yureklendirmek onlari , ve adi. su sen korumak onlari , ve belgili tanimlik i§ & bakanlik adi. su onlar are me§gul icinde. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti korumak onlari —dan belgili tanimlik ruhani gue ya da diger engel adi.

su -ebil zarar onlari ya da yava§ onlan asagi. mutlu etmek yardim etmek beni ne zaman I kullanma bu Incil -e dogru da dusun belgili tanimlik insanlar kim -si olmak -den yapilmi§ bu baski elde edilebilir , taki I -ebilmek dua etmek icin onlan vesaire onlar -ebilmek devam etmek -e dogru yardim etmek daha insanlar I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek beni a ask -in senin kutsal kelime ( belgili tanimlik Incil ), ve adi. su sen -cekti vermek beni ruhani akillihk ve diseernment -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve -e dogru anlamak belgili tanimlik dondurmemem adi. su biz are canh icinde. mutlu etmek yardim etmek beni -e dogru bilmek nasil -e dogru dagitmak ile belgili tanimlik muskulat adi.

su I am kar§i koymak ile her giin. efendi mabut , yardim etmek beni -e dogru istemek -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve -e dogru istemek -e dogru yardim etmek diger Hristiyan icinde benim alan ve cevrede belgili tanimlik diinya. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek belgili tanimlik elektronik kitap takim ve o kim i§ iistiinde belgili tanimlik website ve o kim yardim etmek onlari senin akillilik. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti yardim etmek belgili tanimlik bireysel aza -in onlarin aile ( ve benim aile ) -e dogru degil var olmak ruhani aldatmak , ama -e dogru anlamak sen ve -e dogru istemek -e dogru almak ve izlemek sen icinde her yol. ve I sormak sen -e dogru yapmak bunlar e§ya adina Isa , amin ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Serbia - Servia - Serbian

Serbia Serbian Servian Prayer Isus Krist Molitva Bog Kako Moliti moci cuti moj molitva za pitati davati ponuditi mene otkriti duhovni Vodstvo

Serbia ■ Prayer Requests (p r a y in g ) to G od ■ e x p la in e d in

Serbian (servian) L anguage

Molitva za Bog ## Kako za Moliti za Bog Kako Bog moci cuti moj molitva Kako za pitati Bog za davati ponuditi mene Kako otkriti duhovni Vodstvo

Kako za naci predaja iz urok Raspolozenje

Kako za zasluga odredeni clan istinit Bog nad Nebo

Kako otkriti odredeni clan Hriscanin Bog Kako za moliti za Bog droz Isus Krist JA imati nikada molitva pre nego Vazan za Bog Bog zeljan ljubavi svaki osoba osoba

Isus Krist moci pomoc Se Bog Biti stalo moj zivot Molitva Trazenju

stvar taj te moc oskudica za uzeti u obzir govorenje za Bog okolo Molitva Trazenju kod te , okolo te

Govorenje za Bog , odredeni clan Kreator nad odredeni clan Svemir , odredeni clan Gospodar :

1 . taj te davati za mene odredeni clan hrabrost za moliti odredeni clan stvar taj JA potreba za moliti 2. taj te davati za mene odredeni clan hrabrost za verovati te pa primiti sta te oskudica raditi s moj zivot , umjesto mene uznijeti moj vlastiti volja ( namera ) iznad vas.

3. taj te davati mene ponuditi ne career moj bojazan nad odredeni clan nepoznat za postati odredeni clan isprika , inace odredeni clan osnovica umjesto mene ne za sluziti you.

4. taj te davati mene ponuditi vidjeti pa uciti kako za imati odredeni clan duhovni sway JA potreba ( droz tvoj rijec

Biblija ) jedan ) umjesto odredeni clan dogadaj ispred pa P ) umjesto moj vlastiti crew duhovni putovanje.

5. Taj te Bog davati mene ponuditi oskudica za sluziti Te briny

6. Taj te podsetiti mene za razgovarati sa te prayerwhen ) JA sam frustriran inace u problemima , umjesto tezak za odluka stvar ja sam jedini droz moj ljudsko bice sway.

7. Taj te davati mene Mudrost pa jedan srce ispunjen s Biblijski Mudrost tako da JA sluziti te briny delotvorno.

8. Taj te davati mene jedan zelja za ucenje tvoj rijec , Biblija , ( odredeni clan Novi Zavjet Evandelje nad Zahod ), na temelju jedan crew osnovica 9. taj te davati pomoc za mene tako da JA sam u mogucnosti za obavestenje stvar unutra Biblija ( tvoj rijec ) sta JA moci osobno vezati za , pa taj volja pomoc mene shvatiti sta te oskudica mene raditi unutra moj zivot.

10. Taj te davati mene velik raspoznavanje , za shvatiti kako za objasniti za ostali tko te biti , pa taj JA moci uciti kako uciti pa knotkle kako za pristajati uza sto te pa tvoj rijec ( Biblija )

11. Taj te donijeti narod ( inace websites ) unutra moj zivot tko oskudica za knotkle te , pa tko biti jak unutra njihov precizan sporazum nad te ( Bog ); pa Taj te donijeti narod ( inace websites ) unutra moj zivot tko ce biti u mogucnosti za ohrabriti mene za tocno uciti kako za podeliti Biblija rec nad istina (2 Timotej 215:).

12. Taj te pomoc mene uciti za imati velik sporazum okolo sta Biblija prikaz 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu najbolji , sta 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu vecina precizan , pa sta je preko

duhovni sway & snaga , pa sta prtkaz sloziti se s odredeni clan izvorni rukopis taj te nadahnut odredeni clan autorstvo nad odredeni clan Novi Zavjet za pisati.

13. Taj te davati ponuditi mene za korist moj vrijeme unutra jedan dobar put , pa ne za uzaludnost moj vrijeme na temelju Neistinit inace prazan metod za dobiti zaglavni kamen za Bog ( ipak taj nisu vjerno Biblijski ), pa kuda tim metod proizvod nijedan dug rok inace trajan duhovni voce.

14. Taj te davati pomoc za mene za shvatiti sta za traziti unutra jedan crkva inace jedan mjesto nad zasluga , sta rod nad sumnja za pitati , pa taj te pomoc mene za naci vernik inace jedan parson s velik duhovni mudrost umjesto lak inace neistinit odgovor.

15. taj te uzrok mene za secati se za sjecati se tvoj rijec Biblija ( takav kao Latinluk 8), tako da JA moci imati pik na moj srce pa imati moj pamcenje spreman , pa biti spreman za davati dobro odgovarati ostali nad odredeni clan nadati se taj JA imati okolo te.

16. Taj te donijeti ponuditi mene tako da moj vlastiti teologija pa doktrina za slagati tvoj rijec , Biblija pa taj te nastaviti za pomoc mene knotkle kako moj sporazum nad doktrina moci poboljsati tako da moj vlastiti zivot , stil zivota pa sporazum nastavlja da bude zaglavni kamen za sta te oskudica to da bude umjesto mene.

17. Taj te otvoren moj duhovni uvid ( zakljucak ) sve vise , pa taj kuda moj sporazum inace percepcija nad te nije precizan , taj te pomoc mene uciti tko Isus Krist vjerno 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu.

18. Taj te davati ponuditi mene tako da JA moci za odvojen iko neistinit obredni sta JA imati zavisnost na temelju , iz

tvoj jasan poucavanje unutra Biblija , ako postoje nad sta JA sam sledece nije nad Bog , inace 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu u suprotnosti sa sta te oskudica za poucavati nama okolo sledece te.

19. Taj iko sile nad urok ne oduteti iko duhovni sporazum sta JA imati , ipak radije taj JA zadrzati odredeni clan znanje nad kako za knotkle te pa ne da bude lukav unutra ovih dan nad duhovni varka.

20. Taj te donijeti duhovni sway pa ponuditi mene tako da JA volja ne da bude dio nad odredeni clan Velik Koji pada Daleko inace nad iko pokret sta postojati produhovljeno krivotvoriti za te pa za tvoj Svet Rijec

21. Taj da onde 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu bilo sto taj J A imati ispunjavanja unutra moj zivot , inace iko put taj JA ne imate odgovaranje za te ace JA treba imati pa taj 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu sprjecavanje mene iz oba hodanje s te , inace imajuci sporazum , taj te donijeti tim stvar / odgovor / dogadaj leda u moj pamcenje , tako da JA odreci se njima u ime Isus Krist , pa svi nad njihov vrijednosni papiri pa posledica , pa taj te opet staviti iko praznina ,sadness inace ocajavati unutra moj zivot s odredeni clan Radost nad odredeni clan Gospodar , pa taj JA postojati briny usredotocen na temelju znanje za sledii te kod citanje tvoj rijec , odredeni clan Biblija

22. Taj te otvoren moj oci tako da JA moci za jasno vidjeti pa prepoznati da onde 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu jedan Velik Varka okolo Duhovni tema , kako za shvatiti danasji fenomen ( inace ovih dogadaj ) iz jedan Biblijski perspektiva , pa taj te davati mene mudrost za knotkle i tako taj JA volja uciti kako za pomoc moj prijatelj pa voljen sam sebe ( rodbina ) ne postojati dio nad it.

23. Taj te osigurati taj jednom moj oci biti otvoreni pa moj pamcenje shvatiti odredeni clan duhovni izrazajnost nad trenutni zbivanja uzimanje mjesto unutra odredeni clan svet , taj te pripremiti moj srce prihvatiti tvoj istina , pa taj te pomoc mene shvatiti kako za naci hrabrost pa sway droz tvoj Svet Rijec , Biblija. U ime Isus Krist , JA traziti ovih stvar potvrdujuci moj zelja da bude slozno tvoj volja , pa JA sam iskanje tvoj mudrost pa za imati jedan ljubav nad odredeni clan Istina Da

Briny podno Stranica Kako za imati Vjecan Zivot

Nama biti dearth da danasji foil ( nad molitva trazenju za Bog ) 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu u mogucnosti za pomoci te. Nama shvatiti danasji ne moze biti odredeni clan najbolji inace vecina delotvoran prevod. Nama shvatiti taj onde biti mnogobrojan razlicit putevi nad izraziv misao pa reci. Da te imati jedan sugestija umjesto jedan bolji prevod , inace da te slican za uzeti jedan malen kolicina nad tvoj vrijeme za poslati sugestija nama , te ce biti pomaganje hiljadu nad ostali narod isto , tko volja onda citanje odredeni clan poboljsan prevod. Nama cesto imati jedan Novi Zavjet raspoloziv unutra tvoj jezik inace unutra jezik taj biti redak inace star.

Da te biti handsome umjesto jedan Novi Zavjet unutra jedan specifican jezik , ugoditi pisati nama. Isto , nama oskudica da bude siguran pa probati za komunicirati taj katkada , nama ciniti ponuda knjiga taj nisu Slobodan pa taj ciniti kostati novac. Ipak da te ne moci priustiti neki od tim elektronicki knjiga , nama moci cesto ciniti dobro razmena

nad elektronicki knjiga umjesto pomoc s prevod inace prevod posao.

Te ne morati postojati jedan strucan radnik , jedini jedan pravilan osoba tko 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu zainteresiran za pomaganje. Te treba imati jedan racunar inace te treba imati pristup za jedan racunar kod tvoj mestanin biblioteka inace univerzitet inace univerzitet , otada tim obicno imati bolji spoj za odredeni clan Internet. Te moci isto obicno utemeljiti tvoj vlastiti crew SLOBODAN elektronski posta racun kod lijeganje mail.yahoo.com

Ugoditi uzeti maloprije otkriti odredeni clan elektronski posta adresa smjesten podno inace odredeni clan kraj nad danasji stranica. Nama nadati se te volja poslati elektronski posta nama , da danasji 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu nad pomoc inace hrabrenje. Nama isto ohrabriti te za dodir nama u vezi sa Elektronicki Knjiga taj nama ponuda taj biti van kostati , pa slobodan.

Nama ciniti imati mnogobrojan knjiga unutra stran jezik , ipak nama ne uvijek mjesto njima za primiti elektronski ( skidati podatke ) zato nama jedini napraviti raspoloziv odredeni clan knjiga inace odredeni clan tema taj biti preko zatrazen. Nama ohrabriti te za nastaviti za moliti za Bog pa za nastaviti uciti okolo Njemu kod citanje odredeni clan Novi Zavjet. Nama dobrodosao tvoj sumnja pa primedba kod elektronski posta.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Draga Dumnezeu , Multumesc that this Nou Testament

has been released so that noi sintem capabil la spre learn mai mult despre tu.

Te rog ajuta-ma oamenii responsible pentru making this Electronic carte folositor. Te rog ajuta-ma pe ei la spre a fi capabil la spre work rapid , §i a face mai mult Electronic carte folositor Te rog ajuta-ma pe ei la spre have tot art.hot. resources , art.hot. bani , art.hot. strength §i art.hot. timp that ei nevoie inauntru ordine la spre a fi capabil la spre a pastra working pentru Tu.

Te rog ajuta-ma aceia that esti part de la team that ajutor pe ei on un fiecare basis. A face pe plac la a da pe ei art.hot. strength la spre a continua §i a da each de pe ei art.hot. spirit understanding pentru art.hot. work that tu nevoie pe ei la spre a face.

Te rog ajuta-ma each de pe ei la spre nu have fear sj la spre a-§i aminti that tu esti art.hot. Dumnezeu cine answers prayer §i cine este el inauntru acuzatie de tot. I pray that tu trec.de la will encourage pe ei , §i that tu a proteja pe ei , §i art.hot. work & ministru that ei sint ocupat inauntru. I pray that tu trec.de la will a proteja pe ei de la art.hot. Spirit Forces sau alt obstacles that a putut harm pe ei sau lent pe ei jos.

Te rog ajuta-ma cind I folos this Nou Testament la spre de asemenea think de la oameni cine have made this a redacta folositor so that I a putea pray pentru pe ei §i so ei a putea a

continua la spre ajutor mai mult oameni I pray that tu trec.de la will da-mi o dragoste de al tau Holy Cuvint ( art.hot. Nou Testament ), §i that tu trec.de la will acorda-mi spirit wisdom §i discernment la spre know tu better §i la spre understand art.hot. perioada de timp that noi sintem viu inauntru.

Te rog ajuta-ma la spre know cum la spre deal cu art.hot. difficulties that I sint confronted cu fiecare zi. Lord Dumnezeu , Ajuta-ma help la spre nevoie la spre know tu Better §i la spre nevoie la spre ajutor alt Crestin inauntru meu arie §i around art.hot. lume. I pray that tu trec.de la will a da art.hot.

Electronic carte team §i aceia cine work pe website §i aceia cine ajutor pe ei al tau wisdom. I pray that tu trec.de la will ajutor art.hot. individual members de lor familie ( §i meu familie ) la spre nu a fi spiritually deceived , numai la spre understand tu §i eu la spre nevoie la spre accent §i a urma tu inauntru fiecare way. §i I a intreba tu la spre a face acestia things in nume de Jesus , Amen ,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Russian - Russe - Russie

Russian Prayer Requests -

MojIHTBa K

6ora KaK noMOJiHTb k

6ora KaK 6or mtokct ycjibmiaTb MoeMy

MOJiHTBe KaK cnpocHTb, mto 6or min noMomb k MHe

KaK HaiiTH ;ryxoBHoe naBejieime

KaK Hairra deliverance ot 3Jieiiniero

;ryxoB KaK noKjiOHHTbca noncTHHe 6or

paa KaK Hairra xpHCTHaHCKoe

6ora KaK noMOJiHTb k 6ory ro

jesus christ a mncorjia He MOJinna nepeA

BaacHbiM k Bino6jieHHOCTaM 6ora

6ora KajK^oe HHAHBH/ryajibHoe

jesus, kotop nepcoHbi christ M05KeT noMOHb

AenaeT BHHMaTenbHOCTb 6ora o mohx Bemax

3anpOCOB MOJiHTBe

5KH3HH Bbl MOrjIH XOTeTb JJJIH paCCMOTpeHHH nOrOBOpHTb K

6ory o 3anpocax MOJiHTBe BaMH, o mc

ToBopam k 6ory, co3/jaTejib BcejieHHoro, jiop/j: 1. bbi /jajiii 6bi k MHe CMejiocTii noiviojiHTfc itemn h /jjih

TOrO HT06bI nOMOJIHTfc

2. Bbl JjaJIH 6bl K MHe CMejIOCTH BepHTb BaM H npHHHMaTb

bm xoTHTe CAenaTb c Moen >KH3Hbio, BMecTO MeHa exalting moh bojih (HaMepne) Han tbohm.

3. bm jjaJiH 6bi MHe noMOHjb jxm roro mtoGm He npenaTCTBOBaTb mohm CTpaxaM HencBecTHa craTb

OTrOBOpKaMH, HJIH OCHOBa JlJUl MeH3, KOTOp Hy5KHO He

cjry5KHTb bm. 4. bm jjajiH 6m MHe noMomb jxm roro mtoGm

yBjmeTb h BbiyHHTb KaK HMeTb /ryxoBHyio npoHHOCTb a (nepe3 Banie cjiobo 6h6jihh) a) /via cjiynaeB Bnepea h 6) jxm Moero co6cTBeHHoro jnmHoro /ryxoBHoro nyTeniecTBHH.

5. ^to bm 6or ziajiH MHe noMomb jxm toto hto6m xoTeTb cny5KHTb bm 6onbnie

6. ^to bm remind, mto a pa3roBapHBan c BaMH (prayer)when a ce6a paccrpobre hjih b 3aTpy/nieHHH, bmccto m>rraTbca pa3peniHTb Benin TOJibKO nepe3 mok> jnoACKyio npoHHOCTb.

7. ^to bm AajiH MHe npeMy/ipocTb h cepaue 3anojiHHjio c 6h6ji6hckoh npeMy/ipocTbio Taic HOIT a cjiy>KHji 6m bm

3(J)(J)eKTHBHO.

8. ^to bm ziajiH MHe 5KenaHHe royHHTb Bame cjiobo, 6h6jihk>, (HoBbina 3aBeT Gospel john), on a personal basis,

9. Bbl flaJIH 6bl nOMOIHH K MHe TaK, MTO a 6y/Ty 3aMeTHTb

Benin b 6h6jihh (BameM cnoBe) a Mory jihhho orHecra k, h KOTopoH noM05KeT MHe noHaTb bm xoTHTe MeHa c/ienaTb b

MOeH 5KH3HH.

10. ^to bm /jajiH MHe 6ojibmoe pacno3HaHHe, jxm roro MTo6bi noHaTb KaK o6i>acHHTb k /ipyrHM KOTopbie bm, h mto a Mor BbiyHHTb KaK BbiyHHTb h cyMeTb KaK croaTb BBepx AJia Bac h Bamero cnoBa (6h6jihh)

1 1 . ^to bm npHHecjiH moAeH (hjih websites) b Moen 5kh3hh

XOTaT 3HaTb BaC, H KOTOpbK CHJIbHM B HX TOHHOM

BHHKaHHH Bac (6or); h to bm npHHecjiH 6m jnoAen (hjih websites) b Moen 5kh3hh dyjier 060/rpHTb MeHa tohho BbiyHHTb KaK pa3AejiHTb 6h6jihk> cjiobo npaB/rbi (2 timothy 2:15).

12. ^to Bbi noMorjiH MHe BbiyHHTb HMeTb 6onbnioe BHHKaHne o KOTopbiH BapnaHT 6h6jihh caMbie jryHHrae,

KOTOpbIH CaMbIH TOHHbIH, H KOTOpbIH HMeeT CaMbK

AyxoBHbie npoHHOCTb & cnny, h KOTopaa BapnaHT cornaniaeTca c nepBOHanajibHO pyKonncaMH mto bm BOOAynieBHjiH aBTopbi HoBbina 3aBeT HanncaTb.

13. ^to bm p,ajm noMomb k MHe jxm Hcnojib30BaHiui Moero BpeMeHH b xopomeH Aopore, h jxm roro mtoGm He

paCTOHHTejIbCTBOBaTb MOe BpeMfl Ha JK»KHbIX HJIH nyCTbK

MeTOAax nonyHHTb closer to 6or (ho to He 6y/rbre noHCTHHe 6h6ji6hck), h rae Te MeroAbi He npoH3BOAflT

HHKaKOH AOJirOCpOHHbIH HJIH lastillg /iyXOBHbIH

njiOAOOBom.

14. ^to bm /jajiH noMomb k MHe noHHTb look for b nepicoB

HJIH MeCTe nOKJIOHeHHa, HTO BH/Tbl BOnpOCOB, KOTOp Hy5KHO

cnpocHTb, h mto bm noMorjiH MHe HaHTH BepyiomHx HJIH pastor c 6ojibHiOH /ryxoBHOH npeMy/rpocTbio bmccto jierKHx

HJIH JI05KHbIX OTBeTOB.

15. Bbi npHHHHHJIH 6bl MeHH BCnOMHHTb /TJIH TOrO MT06bI

3anoMHHTb Bame cjiobo 6h6jihh (such as Romans 8), Taic, mto a CMory HMeTb ero b MoeM cep/me h HMeTb moh pa3yM 6biTb noAroTOBjieHHbiM, h totobo #aTb otbct k /ipyroMy H3 ynoBaHHa KOTopoe a HMeio o Bac.

16. ^to bm npHHecjiH noMomb k MHe TaK HOn MOH co6cTBeHHbie Teojioraa h ^OKrpHHbi jxm roro mto6h corjiacHTbca c BaniHM cjiobom, 6n6jiHeH h mto bm npoAOJDKajiHCb noMOHb MHe cyvieTb KaK Moe BHHKaHne

AOKTpHHbl M05KHO yjiyHHIHTb TaK, MTO MOH C06CTBeHHbie

5KH3Hb, lifestyle h noHHMaTb 6y/ryT npoAOJDKaTbca 6biTb closer to Bbi xoTHre hx 6biTb jxm measi.

17. ^TO Bbl paCKpbIJIH MOK) flyXOBHyK> npOHHIjaTejIbHOCTb

(3atcjiK)HeHHJi) 6onbnie h 6onbnie, h mto rae moh BHHKainie hjih BoenpHHaTHe Bac He tohhm, mto bm noMornn MHe BbiyHHTb jesus christ noncTHHe.

18. ^to bm p,ajm noMomb k MHe Taic HOI1 a Mor 6m OT/iejiHTb ino6bie jio>KHbie pHTyanbi a 3aBHceji Ha, ot BaniHx acHbK npenoAaBaTenbCTB b 6h6jihh, ecnn jno6oe H3, to a following He 6ora, hjih npoTHBonoji05KHbi k bm xoTHTe jxm Toro MTo6bi HayHHTb HaM - o cne^OBaTb 3a BaMH.

19. ^to jno6bie ycHjma 3Jia take away HHCKOJibKO /ryxoBHoe BHHKaHne a HMeio, ho aobojh>ho mto a coxpaHHji 3HaHHe KaK 3HaTb Bac h 6biTb o6MaHyTbiM BHyTpn these days AyxoBHoro o6MaHa.

20. ^to bm npHHecjiH /ryxoBiryio npoHHOCTb h noMorjiH k MHe TaK HOn a He oy/ry Hacrbio 6ojh>hioh nanaTb nponb hjih jno6oro ABiDKeHHa 6bijio 6m /ryxoBHOCT counterfeit k BaM h k BanieMy CBaTeraiieMy cjiOBy.

21. To ecjiH MTO-HH6bmb, to a ^ejiaji b Moen 5kh3hh, hjih jno6aa ^opora mto a He OTBenaji k BaM no Mepe roro KaK a AOjraceH HMeTb h to npeAOTBpamaeT MeHa ot hjih ryjiaTb c

BaMH, HJIH HMeTb nOHHMaTb, MTO Bbl npHHecjiH Te

things/responses/events back into moh pa3yM, TaK HOI1 a OTpenbjica 6bi ot hx in the name of jesus christ, h Bce H3 hx

BJIHaHHH H nOCJieACTBHH, H MTO Bbl 3aMCHHJIH jno6bie

emptiness, TOCKjiHBOCTb hjih despair b Moen 5KH3HH c yTexoii jiopaa, h mto a 6ojibnie 6mji c<J)OKyciipoBaH Ha yHHTb nocjieAOBaTb 3a BaMH nyreM HHraTb Bame cjiobo, 6n6jiHa.

22. ^to bm pacKpbijiH moh rjia3a TaK HOn a Mor 6m acHO yBH/ieTb h y3HaTb ecjiH 6y#eT 6ojh>hioh o6MaH o /ryxoBHbix TeMax, to KaK noHaTb 3to aBjieHHe (hjih 3th cjrynaH) ot

6H6neiiCKOH nepcneKTHBM, h mto bm muai MHe npeMy/ipocTb ajih roro hto6m 3HaTb h TaK HOn a Bbiyny

KaK nOMOHb MOHM ^py3b3M H nOJIK)6HJI OAHH

(poACTBeHHHKH) £jih roro MTo6bi He 6biTb HacTbio ee.

23 ^to bm o6ecneHHjiH mto pa3 moh raa3a pacicpbiHbi h moh pa3yM noHHMaeT #yxoBHoe 3HaneHHe TeKymHe co6mthji npHHHMaa Mecro b Mnpe, mto bm ikwotobhjih Moe cep/me jxm roro MTo6bi npn3HaBaTb Bamy npaB/iy, h mto bm noMorjiH MHe noiwTb KaK Hairra CMenocTb h npoHHOCTb nepe3 Banie CBaTeraiiee cjiobo, 6h6jihio. In the name of jesus christ, a npomy 3th BemH noATBep5K/iaa Moe jKejiamie 6biTb b cooTBeTCTBHH Banieii BOJien, h a npomy Bania npeMy/ipocTb h HMeTb Bjno6jieHHOCTb npaB/iM, AMHHb.

Bojibine Ha /me cTpaHHHM

KaK HMeTb BeHHaaa }KH3Hb

Mbl paUOCTHM eCJIH 3TOT CnHCOK (3anpOCOB MOJIHTBe K

6ory) M05KeT noMOHb BaM. Mbi noHHMaeM sto He mtokct 6biTb caMMH nyHHiHH hjih caMMH 3(J)(J)eKTHBHMH nepeBOA. Mbi noHHMaeM mto 6y#yT MHoro no-pa3HOMy ^opor BbipaacaTb mmcjih h cnoBa. Ecjih bm HMeeTe npeAJi05KeHHe jxm 6onee jryHiiiero nepeBOAa, hjih ecjin bm xoTen 6mjih 6m npHHHTb Manoe KOjnmecTBO Baniero BpeMeHH nocnaTb npeAJi05KeHHa k HaM, to bm oy^eTe noMoraTb TbionaM jnoAax TaioKe, KOTopbie nocne 3Toro npoHHraiOT yjryHHieHHMH nepeBOA. Mbi nacTO HMeeM hobmh testament HMeiomHHca b BanieM a3bnce hjih b a3bncax pe/pco hjih CTapo. Ecjih bm CMOTpHTe jxm hoboto testament b cneijHiJiHHecKH a3bnce, to nwKajryHCTa HanHHiHTe k HaM.

Taioice, mm xothm 6biTb yBepeHbi h nbiraeMca CBa3MBaTb to HHor/ia, mm npeAJiaraeM khhfh KOTopbie He cbo6oaho h

KOTOpbK CTOHT /KJHbr. Ho eCJIH Bbl He M05KeTe n03BOJIHTb HeKOTOpbK H3 Tex 3JieKTpOHHbIX KHHr, TO Mbi M05KCM MaCTO

ZienaTb o6mch 3jieKrpoHHbix KHHr ajih noMOimi c nepeBOAOM hjih pa6oTOH nepeBOAa. Bbi He aojdkhm 6biTb npoiJieccHOHajibHbiM pa6oTHHKOM, TOJibKO peryjiapHO nepcoHa KOTopaa 3aHHTepecoBaHa b noMoraTb.

Bbl AOJDKHbl HMeTb KOMnblOTep HJIH Bbl /K)JI5KHbI HMCTb

AOCTyn k KOMnbiOTepy Ha BaniHx MecTHbix apxHBe hjih KOJiJie5Ke hjih yHHBepcHTeTe, b Bimy Toro mto Te oGhhho HMeiOT 6ojiee jryHHine coe/niHeHiDi k HHTepHeTy.

Bbi M05KeTe TaK5Ke oGhhho ycTaHaBjiHBaTb Bani co6cTBeHHbiH jnpiHbiH CBOBO^HO yner sjieKipoHHaaa noHTa nyTeM h^th k mail.yahoo.com no5KajryHCTa npHHHMaeTe momcht ajih Toro hto6m CHHraTb a/ipec nocjie Toro KaK 3jieKTpoHHaaa noHTa Bbi pacnojKraceHM Ha /me

HJIH KOHIje 3T0H CTpaHHHM.

Mbi HaneeMca bm nonuieT ajieKipoHHaaa noHTa k HaM, ecjni 3to noMOHjH hjih noompeHiui. Mbi Taioice oGo^paeM Bac

CB33aTbCa Mbi OTHOCHTejIbHO 3JieKTpOHHbIX KHHr Mbi

npeAJiaraeM TOMy 6e3 ijeHbi, h cbo6oaho, kotop mm HMeeM MHoro KHHr b HHoerpaHHbK a3MKax, ho mm Bcer/ia He ycTaHaBjiHBaeM hx ajih Toro mto6m nojryHHTb sjieKTpoHHO (download) noTOMy mto mm TOJibKO ^eJiaeM HMeiomeca KHHrH hjih TeMM KOTopbie cnpaniHBaTb. Mbi o6oApaeM Bac

npOAOJDKaTb nOMOJIHTb K 6ory H npOAOJDKHTb BbiyHHTb o

eM nyTeM HHraTb HoBbina 3aBeT. Mbi npHBeTCTByeM Baiira BonpocM h KOMMeHTapHH ajieKipoHHaaa noHTa.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

ARABIC -LANGUEARABE

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

l(_£»l ljjt_l i

IJjd* ^I^jcjoI ^iXs I j ^!jj JjlAJ* tA-S It^fd mj^j^5 ' I Jjd* ^I^jcjoI ^iXs £?afc_ I 4>jUj j' Jj*y <J ' jl3js jl Jjj1-^ l<-!\?

J j i lP '<-!<J> 'd\s i^jm» i Ji^J» J Jf>L>"jj<-! £j 4J Jkjs*.

i^j I JJs i j Cj-i^Jcjf ^yb^Caj, ? j I JjjlCJ I Jjj^l£° Ij £l£J»I f j

lj£ji_j|cj I Jc^ L^f^j I j igo^jp? 'j M^>* ft>l 'cis L>*-*i

Ijjrl* ^jJ^JCJ^ ^ j^l l(j*l£jf oil £oJ £A,£J Jj— *^J 'l£i><='

'^MJ f j ' Jj'lK

I^j IJ<J> I j liljCJ C^-ia^ j_£ ^i_j Jd! liljf* IJfjJ^ia (IJ^oJ 'J^A,^)

' jlj^ Lyj-* ^£^t£ jl£ '<Jjj^l£° j'<-t^f>s jlJUijo Ij C^jUi Ijtii

IlJ^J J— ay jl JljCJJS Ijjf j_£o l<_K^_£ tl^l/L^ M^0'.

I JjtI* ^I^JCJ^ L-q_£ f£j-£ *4;5M^S I J^lfJ (£ I Jo^jM^

I Ji^_£ Cjjl^o I jj_£ ii!J ^j^. I JJjjJ I J<J> lSi^'^JLS ^JL^ 'j

CI^JLJ I ji! IlJ^J JjjLf^ 'j jjJ£^ ' J'^JlS j '<JfL>uL5C'^'^'J ^-^S

MiJ^ 'JfjKj5 J^jJ '<-fe.'<Jf.

I^j I J<J> Jii!j> I j l£^-H,£ I Jii!cj|i_j I Jl Jii!cjjj j_£ IJ^ jC£i_j jl Ji^ j

I^j I JJs Jii!j> I j lSijJ£„j lUijb I^jCjsI (j^I^Jcj^) Jl lSC^S-

^.1 ^Ja^ jl I Jj»C^O jl JcJjtlJO L-q_£ sio I JjjlCJ 4 jUaJlJ j» j^j> 'j IU£-J sio I Jijiki* U)^ Ijj^ l£i>"j£. ' '(>l£ j

Prayer to God

Dear God,

Thank you that this Gospel or this New Testament has been released so that we are able to learn more about you.

Please help the people responsible for making this Electronic book available. You know who they are and you are able to help them.

Please help them to be able to work fast, and make more Electronic books available

Please help them to have all the resources, the money, the strength and the time that they need in order to be able to keep working for You.

Please help those that are part of the team that help them on an everyday basis. Please give them the strength to continue and give each of them the spiritual understanding for the work that you want them to do.

Please help each of them to not have fear and to

remember

that you are the God who answers prayer and who is

in charge of everything.

I pray that you would encourage them, and that you protect them, and the work & ministry that they are engaged in.

I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual

Forces or other obstacles that could harm them or slow them down.

Please help me when I use this New Testament to also think of the people who have made this edition available, so that I can pray for them and so they can continue to help more people.

I pray that you would give me a love of your Holy Word (the New Testament), and that you would give me spiritual wisdom and discernment to know you better and to understand the period of time that we are living in.

Please help me to know how to deal with the difficulties that I am confronted with every day. Lord God, Help me to want to know you Better and to want to help other Christians in my area and around the world.

I pray that you would give the Electronic book team and those who help them your wisdom. God, help me to understand you better. Please help my family to understand you better also.

I pray that you would help the individual members of their family (and my family) to not be spiritually deceived, but to understand you and to want to accept and follow you in every way.

Also give us comfort and guidance in these times and I ask you to do these things in the name of Jesus , Amen,

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

A FEW BOOKS for NEW CHRISTIANS &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

King James Version - The best and ideal would be the text of the 1611, [referring to the 66 books of the Old and New Testaments] as produced by the original translators.

Geneva Bible - Version of the Old Testament and New Testament produced starting around 1560. Produced with the help of T (Beza)., who also produced an accurate LATIN version of the New Testament, based on the Textus Receptus.

The Geneva Bible (several Editions of it) are available - as of this writing at www.archive.org in PDF

Bible of Jay Green - Jay Green was the Translator for the Trinitarian Bible Society. His work is based on the Ancient Koine Greek Text (Textus Receptus) from which he translated directly. His work encompasses both Hebrew as well as Koine Greek (The Greek spoken at the time of Jesus Christ).

The Translation of the New Testament [of Jay Green] can be found online in PDF for Free

R-La grande charte d'Angleterre ; ouvrage precede d'un Precis - This is simply the MAGNA CHARTA, which recognizes liberty for everyone.

Gallagher, Mason - Was the Apostle Peter ever at Rome

Cannon of the Old Testament and the New Testament or Why the Bible is Complete without the Apocrypha and unwritten Traditions by Professor Archibald Alexander Princeton Theological Seminary

1851 - Presbyterian Board of Publications. [available online Free ]

Historical Evidences of the Truth of the Scripture Records WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE DOUBTS AND DISCOVERIES OF MODERN TIMES, by George Rawlinson - Lectures Delivered at Oxford University [available online Free ]

The Apostolicity of Trinitarianism - by George Stanley Faber - 1 832 - 3 Vol / 3 Tomes [available online Free ]

The image-worship of the Church of Rome : proved to be

contrary to Holy Scripture and the faith and discipline of the

primitive church ; and to involve contradictory and

irreconcilable doctrines within the Church of Rome itself

(1847)

by James Endell Tyler, 1789-1851

Calvin defended : a memoir of the life, character, and principles of John Calvin (1909) by Smyth, Thomas, 1808- 1873 ; Publish: Philadelphia : Presbyterian Board of Publication. [available online Free ]

The Supreme Godhead of Christ, the Corner-stone of Christianity by W. Gordon - 1855[available online Free ]

A history of the work of redemption containing the outlines

of a body of divinity ...

Author: Edwards, Jonathan, 1703-1758.

Publication Info: Philadelphia,: Presbyterian board of

publication, [available online Free ]

The origin of pagan idolatry ascertained from historical

testimony and circumstantial evidence. - by George Stanley Faber - 1816 3 Vol. / 3 Tomes [available online Free ]

The Seventh General Council, the Second of Nicaea, Held A.D. 787, in which the Worship of Images was established - based on early documents by Rev. John Mendham - 1850 [documents how this far-reaching Council went away from early Christianity and the New Testament]

Worship of Mary by James Endell Tyler [available online Free ]

The Papai System from its origin to the present time

A Historical Sketch of every doctrine, claim and practice of

the Church of Rome by William Cathcart, DD

1 872 - [available online Free ]

The Protestant exiles of Zillerthal; their persecutions and expatriation from the Tyrol, on separating from the Romish church - [available online Free ]

An essay on apostolical succession- being a defence of a genuine ministry - by Rev Thomas Powell - 1846

An inquiry into the history and theology of the ancient Vallenses and Albigenses; as exhibiting, agreeably to the promises, the perpetuity of the sincere church of Christ Publish info London, Seeley and Burnside, - by George Stanley Faber - 1838 [available online Free ]

The Israel of the Alps. A complete history of the Waldenses and their colonies (1875) by Alexis Muston (History of the Waldensians) - 2 Vol/ 2 Tome - Available in English and Separately ALSO in French [available online Free ]

Encouragement for Women

Amy Charmichael

AMY CARMICHAEL - From Sunrise Land [available online Free ]

AMY CARMICHAEL - Lotus buds (1910) [available online Free ]

AMY CARMICHAEL - Overweights of joy (1906) [available online Free ]

AMY CARMICHAEL -Walker of Tinnevelly (1916) [available online Free ]

AMY CARMICHAEL -After Everest ; the experiences of a mountaineer and medical mission (1936) [available online Free ]

AMY CARMICHAEL -The continuation of a story ([1914

[available online Free ]

AMY CARMICHAEL -Ragland, pioneer (1922) [available online Free]

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& HISTORY OF HUNGARIAN CHRISTIANS &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

fflSTORY OF THE PROTESTANT CHURCH IN HUNGARY By J. H. MERLE D'AUBIGNE - 1 854 [available online Free ]

Hungary and Kossuth-An Exposition of the Late Hungarian

Revolution by Tefft

1852 [available online Free ]

Secret history of the Austrian government and of its ... persecutions of Protestants By Joseph Alfred Michiels - 1859 [available online Free ]

Sketches in Remembrance of the Hungarian Struggle for Independence and National Freedom Edited by Kastner (Circ. 1853) [available online Free ]

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& HISTORY OF FRENCH CHRISTIANS &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

La Bible Francaise de Calvin V 1 [available online Free ]

La Bible Francaise de Calvin V 2 [available online Free ]

VAUDOIS - A memoir of Felix Neff, pastor of the High Alps [available online Free ]

La France Protestante - ou, Vies des protestants francais par Haag - 1 856 - 6 Tomes [available online Free ]

Musee des protestans celebres

Ftude sur les Academies Protestantes en France au xvie et au xviie siecle - Bourchenin - 1 882 [available online Free ]

Les plus anciennes melodies de l'eglise protestante de Strasbourg et leurs auteurs [microform] (1928) [available online Free ]

L'Israel des Alpes: Premiere histoire complete des Vaudois

du Piemont et de leurs colonies

Par Alexis Muston ; Publie par Marc Ducloux, 1 85 1

(2 Tomes) Lavailable online Free J

GALLICA - http://gallica.bnf.fr

Histoire ecclesiastique - 3 Tomes - by Theodore de Beze, [available online Free ] |

][

]

BEZE-Sermons sur l'histoire de la resurrection de Notre- Seigneur Jesus-Christ [available online Free ]

DE BEZE - Confession de la foy chrestienne [available online Free ]

Vie de J. Calvin by Theodore de Beze, [available online Free ]

Confession d'Augsbourg (francais). 1550-Melanchthon [available online Free ]

La BIBLE-1'ed. de, Geneve-par F. Perrin, 1567 [available online Free ]

Hobbes - Leviathan ou La matiere, la forme et la puissance d'un etat ecclesiastique et civil [available online Free ]

L'Eglise et l'Etat a Geneve du vivant de Calvin Roget, Amedee (1825-1883). [available online Free ]

LUTHER-Commentaire de l'epitre aux Galates [available online Free ]

Petite chronique protestante de France [available online Free ]

Histoire de la guerre des hussites et du Concile de Basle 2 Tomes [recheck for accuracy]

Les Vaudois et l'Inquisition-par Th. de Cauzons (1908) [available online Free ]

Glossaire vaudois-par P. -M. Callet [available online Free ]

Musee des protestans celebres ou Portraits et notices biographiques et litteraires des personnes les plus eminens dans l'histoire de la reformation et du protestantisme par une societe de gens de lettres [available online Free ]

( publ. par Mr. G. T. Doin; Publication : Paris : Weyer : Treuttel et Wurtz : Scherff [et al.], 1821-1824 - 6 vol./6 Tomes : ill. ; in-8 Doin, Guillaume-Tell (1794-1854). Editeur scientifique)

Notions elementaires de grammaire comparee pour servir a l'etude des trois langues classiques [available online Free ]

Thesaurus graecae linguae ab Henrico Stephano constructus. Tomus I : in quo praeter alia plurima quae primus praestitit vocabula in certas classes distribuit, multiplici derivatorum serie...

( Estienne, Henri (1528-1598). Auteur du texte Tomus I, II, III, IV : in quo praeter alia plurima quae primus praestitit vocabula in certas classes distribuit, multiplici derivatorum serie; Thesaurus graecae linguae ab

Henrico Stephano constructus ) [available online Free ]

La liberte chretienne; etude sur le principe de la piete chez Luther ; Strasbourg, Librairie Istra, 1922 - Will, Robert [available online Free ]

Bible-N.T.(francais)-1523 - Lefevre d'Etaples [available online Free ]

Calvin considere comme exegete - Par Auguste Vesson [available online Free ]

Reuss, Rodolphe - Les eglises protestantes d'Alsace pendant laRevolution (1789-1802) [available online Free ]

WEBBER-Ethique_protestante-L'ethique protestante et l'esprit du capitalisme (1904-1905) [available online Free ]

French Protestantism, 1559-1562 (1918) Kelly, Caleb Guyer -[available online Free ]

History of the French Protestant Refugees, from the Revocation of the Edict of Nan tes 1 854 [available online Free ]

The History of the French, Walloon, Dutch and Other Foreign Protestant Refugees Settled in 1846 [available online Free ]

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Italian and/or Spanish/Castillian/ etc &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Historia del Concilio Tridentino (SARPI) [available online Free ] [

rm

Aldrete, Bernardo Jose de - Del origen, y principio de la lengua castellana 6 romace que oi se usa en Espana

SAVANAROLA-Vindicias historicas por la inocencia de Fr. Geronimo Savonarola

Biblia en lengua espanola traduzida palabra por palabra de la verdad hebrayca-FERRARA

Biblia. Espanolll602-translaciones por Cypriano de Valera ( misspelled occasionally as Cypriano de Varela ) [available online Free ]

Reina Valera 1602 - New Testament Available at www.archive.org [available online Free ]

La Biblia : que es, los sacros libros del Vieio y Nuevo Testamento

Valera, Cipriano de, 1532-1625 Los dos tratados del papa, i de la misa - escritos por Cipriano D. Valera ; i por el publicados primero el a. 1588, luego el a. 1599; i ahora fielmente reimpresos [Madrid], 1 85 1 [available online Free ]

Valera, Cipriano de, 15327-1625

Aviso a los de la iglesia romana, sobre la indiccion de

jubileo, por la bulla del papa Clemente octavo.

English Title = An answere or admonition to those of the

Church of Rome, touching the iubile, proclaimed by the

bull, made and set foorth by Pope Clement the eyght, for the

yeare of our Lord. 1600. Translated out of French [available

online Free ]

Spanish Protestants in the Sixteenth Century by Cornelius August Wilkens French [available online Free ]

Historia de Los Protestantes Espanoles Y de Su Persecucion Por Felipe II - Adolfo de Castro - 1 85 1 (also Available in English) [available online Free ]

The Spanish Protestants and Their Persecution by Philip II

- 1851 - Adolfo de Castro [available online Free ]

Institvcion de la religion christiana; Institutio Christianae religionis. Spanish Calvin, Jean, 1509-1564

Instituzion religiosa escrita por Juan Calvino el ano 1536 y traduzida al castellano por Cipriano de Valera. Calvino, Juan.

Catecismo que significa: forma de instrucion, que contiene

los principios de la religion de dios, util y necessario para

todo fiel Christiano : compuesto en manera de dialogo,

donde pregunta el maestro, y responde el discipulo

En casa de Ricardo del Campo, M.D.XCVI [1596] Calvino,

Juan.

Tratado para confirmar los pobres catiuos de Berueria en la catolica y antigua se, y religion Christiana: y para los consolar con la Palabra de Dios en las afliciones que padecen por el evangelio de lesu Christo. [...] Al fin deste tratado hallareys un enxambre de los falsos milagros, y illusiones del Demonio con que Maria de la visitacion priora de la Anunciada de Lisboa engano a muy muchos: y de como fue descubierta y condenada al fin del ano de .1588 En casa de Pedro Shorto, Ano de. 1594 Valera, Cipriano de,

Biblia de Ferrara, corregida por Haham R. Samuel de Casseres

The Protestan t exiles of Madeira (c 1860) French [available online Free ]

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

HISTORY OF VERSIONS of the NEW TESTAMENT PartA - Foryour consideration &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

For Christians who want a serious, detailed and historical account of the versions of the New Testament, and of the issues involved in the historic defense of authentic and true Christianity.

John William Burgon [ Oxford] - 1 The traditional text of the Holy Gospels vindicated and established (1896) [available online Free ]

John William Burgon [ Oxford] -2 The causes of the corruption of the traditional text of the Holy Gospel [available online Free ]

John William Burgon [ Oxford] - The Revision Revised (A scholarly in-depth defense of Ancient Greek Text of the New Testament) [available online Free ]

Intro to Vol 1 from INTRO to MASSORETICO CRITICAL by GINSBURG-VOL 1 [available online Free ]

Intro to Vol 1 from INTRO to MASSORETICO CRITICAL by GINSBURG-VOL 2 [available online Free ]

Horse Mosaicse; or, A view of the Mosaical records, with respect to their coincidence with profane antiquity; their

internal credibility; and their connection with Christianity; comprehending the substance of eight lectures read before the University of Oxford, in the year 1801; pursuant to the will of the late Rev. John Bampton, A.M. / By George Stanley Faber -Oxford : The University press, 1801 [Topic: defense of the authorship of Moses and the historical accuracy of the Old Testament] [available online Free ]

TC The English Revisers' Greek Text-Shown to be Unauthorized, Except by Egyptian Copies Discarded [available online Free ]

CANON of the Old and New Testament by Archibald Alexander [available online Free ]

An inquiry into the integrity of the Greek Vulgate- or, Received text of the New Testament 1815 92mb [available online Free ]

A vindication of 1 John, v. 7 from the objections of M. Griesbach [available online Free ]

The Burning of the Bibles- Defence of the Protestant Version - Nathan Moore - 1 843

A dictionarie of the French and English tongues 1611 Cotgrave, Randle - [available online Free ]

The Canon of the New Testament vindicated in answer to the objections of J. T. in his Amyntor, with several additions [available online Free ]

the paramount authority of the Holy Scriptures vindicated (1868)

Histoire du Canon des Saintes-ecritures Dans L'eglise Chretienne ; Reuss (1863) [available online Free ]

Histoire de la Societe biblique protestante de Paris, 1818 a 1 868 [available online Free ]

L'academie protestante de Nimes et Samuel Petit

Le manuel des chretiens protestants : Simple exposition des croyances et des pratiques - Par Emilien Frossard - 1 866

Jean-Frederic Osterwald, pasteur a Neuchatel

David Martin

The canon of the Holy Scriptures from the double point of view of science and of faith (1862) [available online Free ]

CODEX B H. Hoskier

E

ALLIES by 1914)2Vol[

Jniversity of M

vailable online 7ree ]

chigan Scholar

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& HISTORY OF VERSIONS of the NEW TESTAMENT Part B - not Recommended &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Modern Versions of the New Testament, most of which were produced after 1910, are based upon a newly invented text, by modern professors, many of whom did not claim to believe in the New Testament, the Death and Physical

Resurrection of Jesus Christ, or the necessity of Personal Repentance for Salvation.

The Translations have been accomplished all around the world in many languages, starting with changeover from the older accurate Greek Text, to the modern invented one, starting between 1904 and 1910 depending on which edition, which translation team, and which publisher.

We cannot recommend: the New Testament or Bible of Louis Segond. This man was probably well intentioned, but his translation are actually based on the 8th Critical edition of Tischendorf, who opposed the Reformation, the Historicity of the Books of the Bible, and the Greek Text used by Christians for thousands of years.

For additional information on versions, type on the Internet Search: "verses missing in the NIV" and you will find more material.

We cannot recommend the english-language NKJV, even though it claims to depend on the Textus Receptus. That is not exactly accurate. The NKJV makes this claim based on the ecclectic [mixed and confused] greek text collated officially by Herman von Soden. The problem is that von Soden did not accomplish this by himself and used 40 assistants, without recording who chose which text or the names of those students. Herman Hoskier [Scholar, University of Michigan] was accurate in demonstrating the links between Sinaiticus, Vaticanus, and the Greek Text of Von Soden. Thus what is explained as being "based on" the Textus Receptus actually was a departure from that very text.

The Old Testaments of almost all modern language Bibles, in almost all languages is a CHANGED text. It does NOT conform to the historic Old Testament, and is based instead on the recent work of the German Kittel, who can be easily considered an Apostate by historic Lutheran standards. (more in a momen tf).

The Old Testament of the NKJV is based on the New Hebrew Translation of Kittel. [die Biblia Hebraica von Rudolf Kittel ] Kittel remains problematic for his own approach to translation.

Kittel, the translator of the Old Testament [for almost all modern editions of the Bible]:

1. Did not believe that the Pentateuch he translated was accurate.

2. Did not believe that the Pentateuch he translated was the same as the original Pentateuch.

3. Did not believe in the inspiration of the Old Testament or the New Testament.

4. Did not believe in what Martin Luther would believe would constitute Salvation (salvation by Faith alone, in Christ Jesus alone).

5. Considered the Old Testament to be a mixture compiled by tribes who were themselves confused about their own religion.

Most people today who are Christians would consider Kittel to be a Heretical Apostate since he denies the inspiration of the Bible and the accuracy of the words of Jesus in the New Testament. Kittel today would be refused to be allowed to be a Pastor or a translator. His translation work misleads

and misguides people into error, whenever they read his work.

The Evidence against Kittel is not small. It is simply the work of Kittel himself, and what he wrote. Much of the evidence can be found in:

A history ofthe Hebrews (1895) by R Kittel - 2 Vol

Essentially, Kittel proceeds from a number of directions to undermine the Old Testament and the history of the Hebrews, by pretending to take a scholarly approach. Kittel did not seem to like the Hebrews much, but he did seem to like ancient pagan and mystery religions. (see the Two Babylons by Hislop, or History of the Temple by Edersheim, and then compare).

His son Gerhard Kittel, a "scholar" who worked for the German Bible Society in Germany in World War II, with full aproval of the State, ALSO was not a Christian and would ALSO be considered an apostate. Gerhard Kittel served as advisor to the leader of Germany in World War II. After the war, Gerhard Kittel was tried for War Crimes.

On the basis of the Documentation, those who believe in the Bible and in Historic Christianity are compelled to find ALTERNATIVE texts to the Old Testament translated by Kittel or the New Testaments that depart from the historic Ancient Koine Greek.

Both Kittel Sr and Kittel Jr appear to have been false Christians, and may continue to mislead many. People who cannot understand how this can happen may want to read a few books including :

Seduction of Christianity by Dave Hunt.

The Agony of Deceit by Horton

Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by C. Cumbey

The Battle for the Bible by Harold Lindsell (Editor of

Christianity Today)

Those who want more information about Kittel should consult:

1) Problems with Kittel - Short paper sometimes available online or at www.archive.org

2) The Theological Faculty of the University of Jena during the Third .... in PDF [can be found online sometimes]

by S. Heschel, Professor, Dartmouth College

3) Theologians under .... : Gerhard Kittel, Paul Althaus, and Emanuel Hirsch / Robert P. Ericksen.

Publish info New Haven : Yale University Press, 1985. (New Haven, 1987)

4) Leonore Siegele - Wenschkewitz, Neutestamentliche Wissenschaft vor der Judenfrage: Gerhard Kittels theologische Arbeit im Wandel deutscher Geschichte (Miinchen: Kaiser, 1980).

5) Rethinking the German Church Struggle by John S. Conway [online]

http://motlc.wiesenthal.com/resources/books/annual4/chapl8.html

6) Betrayal: German Churches and the Holocaust

by Robert P. Ericksen (Editor), Susannah Heschel (Editor)

Questions about (PDF) Ebooks:

I notice that you have lists of Ebooks here.

I understand that you may want others to know about

the books, but why here ?

There are several reasons why this was done.

1) so that people who know nothing about Christianity have a place to start. There are now thousands of books about Christianity available. Knowing where to begin can be difficult. These books simply represent ideas and a potential starting place.

2) so that people can learn what other Christians were like, who lived before. We live in a world that still concentrates on the tasks of the moment, but pays little attention to the past. Today, many people do not know HOW other Christians lived their daily lives, in centuries past. Some of these books are from the past. They offer the struggles and the methods of responding through their Christian faith, in their own daily lives, some from hundreds of years ago. In addition, many of those books are documented and have good sources. This seems to be a good way for Christians from the past to encourage those in the present.

3) Histories of certain Christians DO belong to those who are those who are native to those churches, those geographic areas, or who speak those languages.

But although that is true, many churches today have communities or denominations that have transcended and surpassed the local geographic areas from where they initially or originally arose. It is good for believers who are from OTHER geographic areas, to learn more about foreign languages and foreign cultures. Anything that can help to accomplish this, is movement

in the right direction.

4) It is normal for people to believe that if their church or their denomination is in one geographic location, that The history of that place is best expressed by those who are LOCAL historians. Unfortunately, today, this is often NOT accurate.

The reason is that many places have suffered from wars and from local disasters. This is especially true in Africa and the Near and Middle East. The Local historic records and documents were destroyed. Those documents that have survived, has survived OUTSIDE of those Areas of conflict. Much of their earlier history of the Eastern portion of the Roman Empire, is mostly known because of the record keepers of the West, and because of the travelers from the areas of Western Christianity. In many ways, Western Christianity is often still the record keeper of those from the East.

There is a great deal of historical records in the West, about the Near East. Those who live there today in the near East and Middle East know almost nothing about. We suggest some sources that may be of assistance.

- So you want to bring people closer, and that is a good answer, but why include records or books from England or from French speaking authors ?

1) Much of the material dealing with Eastern Orthodoxy OR dealing with the matters of Syria, The Byzantine Empire, Africa or Asia, were written about, in French. Please remember that until very recently, FRENCH was the language of the educated classes around the world, AND that it was the MAIN language for diplomats, consuls and ambassadors and envoys. As a result, there is value in helping those who

have an interest in French ALSO know where to start, concerning matters of Faith and History.

Some of the material listed in French simply gives people a starting point for learning about Christianity in Europe, from a non-English point of view. Other books are listed so that people can read some of those sources firsthand, for themselves and come to their own conclusions.

English Christians should be happy that they have a great spiritual heritage and examples, and rejoice also that the French can say the same. The examples of the strong and good Christians that have come before belong to everyone to all Christians, to all those who aspire to have good examples.

About the materials that deal with England, most of the world STILL does not realize that the records in England are usually MUCH older than the ecclesiastical records of OTHER areas of the world. England was divided up into geographic areas and Churches had great influence in the nation. That had not changed in England until the last few decades. Some of the records about Christianity in England Go back for more than one thousand years, in an UNBROKEN line. One can follow the changes to the diocese through the different languages, through the different or changing legal documents and through the Rights confirmed to the churches.

Other areas of the world are claimed to be very ANCIENT in dealing with Christianity, but there is very little of actual documentation, of actual agreements, of actual legal descriptions, of actual records of local ceremonies, of actual local church councils, of the relationship between the secular State law, and the guidelines or rules of the Church. England was never invaded by those who posed a direct threat to its church institutions. The records were kept, so the records and documentation are in fact a much stronger Basis for the documenting of Christianity in earlier times.

Most Christians from the East do not know about this, and it would be good for them to learn more. In addition, there are also records in the Nations and Provinces of Europe, that have been kept where Roman Catholic Records demonstrate the authenticity of earlier Christian groups that pre-date the authority of the Bishop of Rome, even in the Western half of the Roman Empire. Some of those sources are listed herein also.

Finally, in the matter of suggesting books about Christianity and Other languages, please remember that each group likes to learn about its own past, and its own progress.

The French should be humbly proud of those Christians who were in France and who were brave and wise and demonstrated courage and a strong faithfulness to God. The Germans should learn and know the same thing about their history, as should the Spaniards and the Germans, and each and every other Nation and People-group. No matter who we are or where we are from, we can find something positive and good to encourage us and be glad that there were some who came before us, to show us a better way to live, by their faith and their Godly examples.

In closing it would be good perhaps to state what is obvious:

This ebook is likely to travel far and wide. Feel free to post online and use and print.

In many parts of the world, Christianity is deliberately falsely represented. It is represented as IF faith in God would make

someone "anti-intellectual" or somehow afraid of ideas or thinking. Nothing could be further from the truth.

Many people today do not know that the history of science today is edited to leave out the deep Christianity that most of the top scientists have held until very recent times.

Since God created the World and the scientific laws that govern it, it makes sense that God is the designer. No one is more scientific than God.

Many of the great scientists in the World are still Active Christians, with a consciously DEEP faith in God. Christians are not afraid of thinking for themselves. There are many secularists today who attempt to suggest that Christianity is for those who are feeble. The truth is that many of those are too feeble and too intellectually unprepared to answer the questions that Christianity asks of each man and each woman.

Those who do not have faith in Jesus Christ and who are secular simply often worship themselves, under the disguise of the theory of Evolution. But the chaos of the world today leaves most who are secular WITHOUT a guide or a method to explain either purpose in life, or the events that are taking place across the planet. Christianity with its record of 2000 years - (and please do not confuse the Vatican with Christianity, they are often not the same) - has a record of helping people navigate in difficult times.

Christianity teaches leaders to be humble and accountable, it helps merchants to trade honestly, and fathers to love their children and their wife. Christianity finds no value in doing harm to others for the purpose of self-interest. Usually doing harm to others is a method of expressing that ones faith in God is insufficient, therefore [the logic goes, that] harm must be done to others.

Behaving in that wrong manner is simply a Lack of faith in God, and therefore those who harm others from Other faiths and other religions are usually demonstrating a Lack of Faith in the God that THEY worship.

If God is all powerful, and if God can change the minds of others, and if God can reveal himself, then WHY harm anyone else who does not agree ? During THIS lifetime, it seems that each of us has the right to be wrong ,and the right to make up his own mind. Is it not up to God to deal with others in the afterlife ?

We provide answers, and help for those who seek truth (yes actual truth can be actually found and discovered, which is a shocking statement to many people who thought this was not genuinely possible).

God is a loving God. He offers Eternal Life to those who repent and believe in his message in the New Testament. But God also allows each individual to decide for themselves. This does not allow any of us to change or decide the rules. God is still God. We all are under his rules every time we are breathing, with each pulse that continues to beat in our heart.

God does not convince people against their Will. That annoys some people also, because they would like God to make decisions for them. But if people want to be Free, let them demonstrate this by exercising their own Freedom of choosing whether to follow God or not. (being able to chose to accept or reject God is not the same as being able to chose the consequences. Only the choice of which direction to Go is up to us. The consequences are whatever God has Actually declared them to be. Agreeing with Him or not will not change this.

Christianity is a source of internal strength and provides answers that almost no other religious system even claims to provide or attempts to provide.

Something usually happens to those who are intellectually honest and investigate Christianity. Many times, they find that Christianity is the most authentic, accurate and historic account of the history of the world.

It is the genuine answers and the genuine internal peace and help that Christians can find through their God which bothers those who are afraid to search for God. We only hope that each person will embrace their spiritual j ourney And take the challenge upon themselves to ask the question about how to find Truth and accurate answers.

The answers CAN be found. Some of these books are simply provided to help people find a few of the pieces that will serve as a means to encourage them in thinking and in having their inner questions answered.

We continue to find more answers every day. We have not arrived and we certainly are not perfect. But if we have helped others to proceed a bit farther on their own journeys, certainly the effort will not have been in vain.

Psalm 50:15

15 And call upon me in the day of trouble: I will deliver

thee, and thou shalt glorify me.

Psalm 90

91:1 He that dwelleth in the secret place of the most High

shall abide under the shadow of the Almighty.

2 I will say of the LORD, He is my refuge and my fortress: my God; in him will I trust.

3 Surely he shall deliver thee from the snare of the fowler, and from the noisome pestilence.

4 He shall cover thee with his feathers, and under his wings shalt thou trust: his truth shall be thy shield and buckler.

5 Thou shalt not be afraid for the terror by night; nor for the arrow that flieth by day;

6 Nor for the pestilence that walketh in darkness; nor for the destruction that wasteth at noonday.

7 A thousand shall fail at thy side, and ten thousand at thy right hand; but it shall not come nigh thee.

8 Only with thine eyes shalt thou behold and see the reward of the wicked.

9 Because thou hast made the LORD, which is my refuge, even the most High, thy habitation;

10 There shall no evil befall thee, neither shall any plague come nigh thy dwelling.

1 1 For he shall give his angels charge over thee, to keep thee in all thy ways.

12 They shall bear thee up in their hands, lest thou dash thy foot against a stone.

13 Thou shalt tread upon the lion and adder: the young lion and the dragon shalt thou trample under feet.

14 Because he hath set his love upon me, therefore will I deliver him: I will set him on high, because he hath known my name.

15 He shall call upon me, and I will answer him: I will be with him in trouble; I will deliver him, and honour him.

16 With long life will I satisfy him, and show him my salvation.

Psalm 23

23: 1 A Psalm of David. The LORD is my shepherd; I shall

not wan t.

2 He maketh me to lie down in green pastures: he leadeth me beside the still waters.

3 He restoreth my soul: he leadeth me in the paths of righteousness for his name's sake.

4 Yea, though I walk through the valley of the shadow of death, I will fear no evil: for thou art with me; thy rod and thy staff they comfort me.

5 Thou preparest a table before me in the presence of mine enemies: thou anointest my head with oil; my cup runneth over.

6 Surely goodness and mercy shall follow me all the days of my life: and I will dwell in the house of the LORD for ever.

With My Whole Heart - With all my heart

"with my whole heart"

lf we truly expect God to respond to us, we must be willing to make the commitment to Him with our whole heart.

This means making a commitment to Him with our ENTIRE, or ALL of our heart. Many people do not want to be truly committed to God. They simply want God to rescue them at that moment, so that they can continue to ignore Him and refuse to do what they should. God knows those who ask help sincerely and those who do not. God knows each of our thoughts. God knows our true intentions, the intentions we consciously admit to, and the intentions we may not want to admit to. God knows us better than we know ourselves. When we are truly and honestly and sincerely praying to find God, and wanting Him with all of our heart, or with our whole heart, THAT is when God DOES respond.

What should people do if they cannot make this commitment to God, or if they are afraid to do this ? Pray :

Lord God, I do not knowyou well enough, please help me to know you better, and please help me to understand you. Change my desire to serve you and help me to want to be committed to you with my whole heart. I pray that you would send into my life those who can help me, or places where I can find accurate Information about You. Please preserve me and help me grow so that I can be entirely committed to you. I n the name of Jesus, Amen.

Here are some verses in the Bible that demonstrate that God responds to those who are committed with their whole heart.

(Psa 9:1 KJV) To the chief Musician upon Muthlabben, A Psalm of David. I will praise thee, O LORD with my whole heart; I will show forth all thy marvellous works.

(Psa 111:1 KJV) Praise ye the LORD. I will praise the LORD with my whole heart, in the assembly of the upright, and in the congregation. (Psa 1 19:2 KJV) Blessed are they that keep his testimonies, and that seek him with my whole heart.

(Psa 119:10 KJV) With my whole heart have I sought thee: O let me not wander from thy commandments.

(Psa 1 19:34 KJV) Give me understanding, and I shall keep thy law; yea, I shall observe with my whole heart.

(Psa 1 19:58 KJV) I entreated thy favour with my whole heart: be merciful unto me according to thy word.

(Psa 1 19:69 KJV) The proud have forged a lie against me: but I will keep thy precepts with my whole heart.

(Psa 119:145 KJV) KOPH. I cried with my whole heart; hear me, O LORD: I will keep thy statutes.

(Psa 138:1 KJV) A Psalm of David. I will praise thee with my whole heart: before the gods will I sing praise unto thee.

(Isa 1 :5 KJV) Why should ye be stricken any more? ye will revolt more and more: the whole head is sick, and the whole heart faint.

(Jer 3:10 KJV) And yet for all this her treacherous sister Judah hath not turned unto me with her whole heart, but feignedly, saith the LORD.

(Jer 24:7 KJV) And I will give them an heart to know me, that I am the LORD: and they shall be my people, and I will be their God: for they shall return unto me with their whole heart.

(Jer 32:41 KJV) Yea, I will rejoice over them to do them good, and I will plant them in this land assuredly with my whole heart and with my whole soul.

I Peter 3:15 But sanctify the Lord God in your hearts: and be ready always to give an answer to every man that asketh you a reason of the hope that is in you with meekness and fear:

II Timothy 2: 15 Study to show thyself approved unto God, a workman that needeth not to be ashamed, rightly dividing the word of truth.

Christian Conversions - According to the Bible - Can NEVER be forced.

Any Conversion to Christianity which would be "Forced" would NOT be recognized by God. It is in His True and KIND nature, that those who come to

Him and choose to believe in Him, must come to Him OF THEIR OWN FREE WILL.

Don't Let anyone tell you that Christians support Forced Conversions.

That is False. True Christianity is NEVER forced.

Co re Universal Rights

The right to believe, to worship and witness

The right to change one's belief or religion

The right to join together and express one's belief

PROPHECY, THE END of DAYS, and the WORLD the Next Few Years.

What you may need to know

There is much talk these days in the Islamic world about the Time of Jacob, also known as the End Times or the End of Days'.

The records of Christianity and the records of Islam both seem to speak about the End Times. But the records of the Old and New Testaments have a record in the area of prophecy of events that are predicted to occur hundreds of years before they happen, and that record is 100% accurate.

According to Christianity, in order for a prophet or a writer or an author to truly be a prophet of God, that individual must be 1 00% correct 1 00% of the time.

This Standard is applied to the Old and New Testaments (the Bible), and the verdict is that the Bible is 1 00% accurate, 1 00% of the time. History and Archeology confirms this, for those with the patience And courage to seek truth and accuracy.

What has been done sometimes in the name of Christianity, is not always good. But true Christians and Christian examples remain strong, solid and encouraging. True Christians have nothing to regret

nor be ashamed of. Offereing help to others is not wrong.

There are many perspectives on the return of Jesus Christ. The New Testaments seems to predict the return of Two Messiahs BOTH of whom both claim to be Jesus Christ.

The first Messiah who returns to help those who believe in Him actually does not come to Earth. His feet do NOT touch Jerusalem at that point in time. That first Messiah calls his followers (Christ-followers) to Him, and they are caught up or meet Jesus Christ in the air, where their time with God starts at that moment.

The second Messiah is the one who announces that "He" is the one who has returned to Earth to establish His Kingdom. He establishes a Temple in the location of the Dome of the Rock [Temple Mount] in Jerusalem, also re-institutes the jewish sacrifices of the Old Testament, and proclaims that He is going to rule on Earth. Only this Messiah who will call himself "Christ" will be a false Messiah, in other words the False Christ, the Wrong Christ.

During this time, Christians believe that they are to continue to be kind to their friends and neighbors, whether those neighbors and friends are Christians or Moslems or Hindus or anything else. This remains true in the End Times.

In the End Times according to Christianity, Christians are mostly the observers of the greatness of God, explaining to those who want to know, what is taking place in the world and why these things are happening.

In every generation of humans, there are many who claim that they WANT to live in a world without God. For that reason, God is going to give them what they want. Those people will have 1) a world without God, but where 2) a false Messiah arrives claiming to be Christ, and only an understanding of accurate Christianity will be able to help and show those people how to have Eternal Life.

The false Messiah comes onto the world stage and exercises power and dominion [over the entire world], ruling from the geographic location of the Ancient Roman Empire.

The false Messiah (obviously) denies that he is false, and institutes a system of global economic domination of a global economic system of money.

That money is a "symbolic" currency. As Christians today understand this, the currency of the False messiah is not based on Gold or Silver.

The currency that the False messiah establishes is "cashless". It does not require paper currency. In fact, the new currency will be global, and it is expected to be cashless, without actual currency.

But it will be based on banking principles in the West, and this False Messiah will cause those who are jewish to believe that their Messiah has returned. Like much of the rest of the world, many will be deceived by the False Messiah who will accomplish many miracles and will institute his system of global economic domination.

The False Messiah will cause that the entire world and governmental structure will cause the implementation of his false economic system of currency.

That economic system is a system of global dominance and global slavery. The global bankers will endorse this plan, believing that they will reap even greater profits than they currently do based on their system of unjust usury.

This global currency will depend on computers to work, and computers will be used to keep records of all economic transactions all over the world. This will be a closed economic system, one that can only be used by those who have accepted the false currency of the False Messiah.

The False Messiah will cause each person to be obligated to accept to use the new currency, and each individual will be required to give homage, or attention, or reverence or adoration or some kind of worship, or allegiance or loyalty to the false messiah, in order to be able to use the new cashless currency.

The new cashless currency will have one feature that those "who have wisdom" will recognize: the new

cashless system in order to be used will require each human to have a particular mark or "identifier" or system of individual identification for each and every single separate person on the planet.

That may seem impossible. But even now, there are millions and billions of computer records that are kept on the populations of all nations that are already using modern banking. Therefore it is not difficult to understand that keeping track of 7 billion humans around the world is not anything that is difficult, even at this moment.

This system may seem impossible to establish especially for those not familiar with the details of power inside the European Union or the West. But then if all of this is only fiction, then it should not harm anyone to read this, and then prove many years from now that all of these concerns were false.

The new cashless system will incorporate a number within itself, as part of its numbering system. That number has been identified and predicted for two thousand years: it is the number "six hundred and sixty six" or 666.

That may seem impossible, but actually this number is already used as a primary tracking number within the computer inventory systems of the world, long before you have read these few pages.

The number is already incorporated in almost all goods and products that are sold around the world: the

number is within something called the Bar Code that can be found on all products for sale around the world.

Please remember that in order for all of this to be significant, it must be part of an economic system that requires each human to receive or accept their own numbering on their right hand or their forehead. The mark could be visible, but it is likely to be invisible to the eyes, but visible to machines, scanners and computers.

This bar code has a formal name: it is called the UPC or Universal Product Code.

An individual UPC number is assigned to each physical product that is sold on this planet. The UPC or Universal Product Code already does incorporate that number 666 in all products.

The lines [vertical lines] and the spacing between them, and the lines themselves, their own symetry determine the numbers and how those lines [the UPC bar code] are read or scanned by the computers used today.

The UPC has 666 built within it, and it is simply the two long lines on the left of the bar code, the two long lines on the right of the bar code, and the two long lines in the middle of the bar code. The two long lines on the left are read by computers and scanners as the number "six" [ 6 ], and so are the two long lines in the middle and the right side. Together, they form a part of the bar code that in fact is 6 - 6 - 6 or six hundred and sixty six.

Well it will not take long for some to dispute this. Even some theologians have taken to dispute the disclosure of the number 666, suggesting instead that the correct number to watch for prophetically is not 666 but 61 6.

That is simply foolishness and a distraction. When this economic system is implemented, one of the signs that will accompany this will be the leaders of all faiths and all religions who will falsely state that there is no problem and no risk in accepting the mark of the slave, the mark of those who accept to worship the False Messiah.

These events were discussed a long time ago in the Old Testament book of Daniel, and in the Final and last book of the New Testament which is also called the Revelation of the Apostle Saint John, or simply "Revelation".

The Apostle John was the last living apostle of Jesus Christ. He lived until around the year 95 A. D. and he is the one who taught the early church and the early Christians which books of the Bible were written by his fellow Apostles (and remember he wrote five books of the New Testament himself, the gospel of John, the small Epistles of 1 John, 2 John and 3 John, and the book of Revelation), and could be used and trusted.

The early Christians knew which books were to be included in the Bible and which books were not.

] :

: [

A modern book has explained much of this. It was simply called "Jesus is coming" and was written by W. E. B Blackstone.

It is easy to dismiss Christians as zionists. (Not all Christians are zionists in anycase). [ and obviously, being pro-jewish is NOT the same thing as being in favor of the official government of israel. And one can be a Christian and desire good for both Jews and Arabs]. But Christian Zionists are not perceived friends of the jews when they are warning the Jews, even about their Jewish state, that the Messiah who comes to tell them that he is their Messiah, will be the False Messiah.

The Ancient Book of Daniel is in the Old Testament. It must be read alongside the New Testament book of Revelation, in order to give understanding to those who want to understand prophecy and the events predicted in the End Times or the End of this Age.

Christians understand that God is the one who is God, and He brings about the End Times because the planet does not belong to itself. The planet does not belong to Humans, or to the false [demonic] beings who pretend to come from other planets.

The planet belongs to God and He is the one who causes everyone rich and poor, to understand through the events in the End of Days, that God is serious about being God, and humans do not have much time to get their own life in order, and to give an account to God who is going to return and require that account of each Human, on a personal and individual basis.

That task is so impossible to understand that all that humans can do is understand and come to God, with the understanding that God may or may not require their sacrifice, but He does require those who seek Him to read and understand and follow the words and doctrines of Jesus Christ as explained in the New Testament. [The Gospel of John is a good place to start].

All those who have come before can do, is leave a few things around, for those who will be left to try to understand these events in a very short period of time.

The literal understanding of the Times of the End is that they will last seven years, and that much of humanity will perish during that time through a variety of catastrophes and disasters, all of which God refuses to stop for a planet that has been saying that they do not need Him anymore.

If they do not need Him, then they should not complain when these events occur. If they Do need God, then they should be honest enough to admit this, try to find God, pray to find God and that they will not be deceived and that God would help them to find Him.

The economic system that requires a mark may have a different formulation for the number 666. It may stay the same as it is now, or it may change. But at this current time, no one is [yet] required to have this mark personally on their mark or forehead, though if the dollar dies or is replaced by a new currency, the new currency may be the one that is either an interim

currency, or the new currency of the mark, to be used only by those who accepted to be marked [electronically branded], so they can then use their mark along with the mark of the new economic system.

A "beast" is a monster, but one that at the same time is

usually both 1 ) ferocious and \

2) evil in addition to being overpowering and strong.

The new economic system will be ferocious and overpowering. It will be directed by the False Messiah and the Beast. (There are 3 Evil guys described in the book of Revelation). The economic system using the mark, becomes the "mark of the beast", because of two factors:

1) the one who runs and directs the system is a beast who is ruled by Evil and by Satan

2) the economic system of the mark of the beast takes on those characteristics of the beast also.

[the system for those who refuse to go along will not be kind nor tolerant, but more likely a combination of the worst of the roman empire, the worst of stalinist soviet communist USSR, and the worst of the the time under Hitler.]

It will be impossible to buy anything without the mark of the beast. Most likely, it may start out as optional and quickly become mandatory. As soon as the economic mark will be made mandatory, itwill become a crime of life or death to try to conduct economic transactions without the official government

permission, from the millions and millions of people who have foolishly already decided to consent to accept the mark. It will also be a capital crime to help or assist anyone who would refuse to accept the mark. Therefore the system of the beast will prevent neutrality: it will prevent people from having the choice of being able to "not make a choice". For that reason, all humans will chose, and then God will classify each person according to the choice that they have made, that choice having Eternal consequences.

You can be assured that there will be billion dollar contracts by public relations firms to convince you that accepting your individual mark on your right hand or forehead will help you, will save civilization, will help mother earth, will help us all work collectively, will allow to work, and oh yes, would allow you, incidentally to be able to buy food to eat.

The book of Revelation says those who accept the mark undergo a "deception", the implication being that those who accept the mark are spiritually deceived into acceptance of the upside-down universe: where evil is viewed as good, and good is viewed as evil. At that point, the new Messiah would be perceived as real and genuine by those who have accepted the mark, until later on when they will realize that they have been deceived, but at that point it will be impossible for them to change their mind or their commitment to the false Messiah, and this would have Eternal Consequences for them. The time to decide therefore is before that time. Now would probably be a good time, in case these things matter to you, who are reading this.

Didyoujustlaugh ?

Those sillly bar codes...

That was pretty funny ...

But seriously... What does your laughter tell you about yourself ?

Does it tell you that the idea of tracking you is so strange, that you have really never thought about it before ?

Do you think that other people may have thought about it, even though you might not ?

England has more than 2 Million cameras right now.

Do they track everything because all things are a strong danger ?

Or. . .do the cameras track people. . just in case ?

So what do you think would happen if someone

could track you 1) 100% of the time 2) with 100% certainty

3) with 100% accuracy 4 ) with 100% of all that you do ?

If Tracking with a mark on your right-hand or forehead becomes mandatory by law, and it will be a crime to not have that mark, and it will also be impossible to buy or sell without it, do you know how you would respond ?

What would you do if your eternal destiny largely depended on your answer to this question ?

If you are still here when these questions are valid, you should know your eternal destiny (after death. . .for eternity) does depend on your answer.

Satan-worship on a Planetary Scale: When ?

The Characteristics of the First Beast How Ali humans will be the ones Deceived and

actually ALL Humans [with one exception] Worship the Beast

The Power of the Beasi comes from Satan

Satan

Revelation 13:1 2 And the beast which I saw was like unto a leopard, and his feet were as the feet of a bear,

and his mouth as the mouth of a lion: and the dragon gave him

his power, and his seat, and great authority.

Oops: Satan-worship is not a good idea

Revelation 13:

4 And they worshipped the dragon which gave power unto the beast: and they worshipped the beast,

saying, Who is like unto the beast? who is able to make war with him?

Revelation 13: The Beast

6 And he opened his mouth in blasphemy against God.jd blaspheme his name, and his tabernacle, and them thatdwell in,>reaven.

7 And it was given unto him to make war with the#aints, and to overcome them: and power was given him **

over all kindreds, and tongues, and nations.

5 minutes of Information to change vourEtemal destination ?

Revelation 13:

The Beast

8 And all that dwell upon the earth shall worship himfr

whoseriames are not written

in tbe book of life of the Lamb slain from the foundation of the world.

Evefy single human worships the beast, infesstheir individual name is written in God's book of life

Revelation 13:

9 If any man have an ear, let him hear.

IttzkBsaspecialirdsrslancfrglDLrd&stardwhBtisbeirgsaid.

Note: The First Beast is the Anti-C hrist

666 and YOUR taking the Mark || QQQ^ Qf Revelation

The C haracteristics of the Second Beast and 666

rhe False Prophet

Revelation 13: ▼

13:11 And I beheld another beast coming up out of the earth

and he had two horns like a lamb, and he spake as a dragon.

Revelation 13J

False Prophet

The AntiChrist

1 2 And he exerciseth all the power of the first beast before him, and causeth the earth and them which dwell therein to worship the first beast, whose deadly wound was healed.

Revelation 13:

13 And he doeth great wonders, so that he maketh fire come down

from heaveSvon the earth in the sight of men,

^

Revelation 13:14 And dfeeeiveth them that dwell on the earth by the means of those miracIeVvuhich heJjad power to do in the sight of the beast; saying to them thaSoIwerism the earth, that they should make an image to the beast, which nBdtne wound by a sword, and did live.

Revelation 13:15 And he had power t^give life unto the image of the beast, that the image of the beast should both speak, and cause that as many as would/fot worship the image of the beast should be killed.

Image of the beast may bea R obotor Computer image,or a hologram, Butit isanerip'tvthrouori which the Beast [Antj-C hristl exterids power overmankind

Revelation 13:16 And he causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads:

1 7 And that no man might buy or sell, save [except] he that had the mark, or the name of the beast, or the number of his name.

"Man" = Mankind, menAND women

Revelation 13:18 Here is wisdom. Let him that hath understanding count the number of the beast: for it is the number of a man;

and his number is Six hundred threescore and six. [GGvj

The Book of Revelation needs to

understanding on E

c alono with the O.T. Book of Daniel in order to make sense. r or n R-ive 5:inn m the bu: T-s "woEicylorisbyH ;l:p

What is the "Book of Life" ? Is YOUR name in it ?

(Phil 4:3 KJV) [Saint Paul Knewofthe Book of Life:] And I entreat [ask] thee also, true yokefellow, [fellow-worker] help those women which laboured with me in the gospel, with Clement also, and with other my fellow labourers, whose names are in the boc

(Rev 3:5 KJV) He that overcometh, the same shall be clothed in

white raiment; and I will not blot out his name out of the book of Mfe,

but I will confess his name before my Father, and before his angels.

(Rev 13:8 KJV) And all that dwell upon the earth shall worship him* whose names are not written in the book of Mfe of the Lamb slain from the foundation of the world.

(Rev 17:8 KJV) The beast that thou sawest was, and is not; and shall ascend out of the bottomless pit, and go into perdition: and they that dwell on the earth shall wonder^zz

whose names were not written in the book of Mfe

of the world, when they behold the beast that was, and i

and the books were opened: and another book was opened, which is the book of I ife: and the dead were judged out of those things which were written in the books, according to their works.

(Rev 20:15 KJV) And whosoever was not found written in the book of Mfe was cast into the lake of fire.

(Rev 21 :27 KJV) And there shall in no wise enter into it any thing defileth, neither whatsoever worketh abomination. or maketh a lie: but they which are written in the Lamb's book of Mfe

(Rev 22: 19 KJV) And if any man shall take away from the words

of the book of this prophecy, God shall take away his part out of the book of I ife, and out of the holy city, and from the things

Which are Written in thiS bOOk. ™Sw.rnlr<,lnRe,!2:19referStoln!lUmiorTran!J.tDni«l»[)vi»,Bme»Dr«oriheBDIe Note:The Lamb slain f:o" jj ; I Fthe i ■ i is I esus Christ lesus Christwas the pre-existen: C-eator of the L.r.ivefse (lohn II

God claims that He knows each of our hearts. God also claims to know everything about us, all of our accomplishments and all of our sins also. But God sends Jesus Christ to save us through His words in the New Testament. Those who ignore them take a heavy risk to themselves, especially where this risk is one of Eternity.

As the saying goes, Eternity is a long time to be wrong. For that reason, it is important to understand who Jesus Christ truly is and who He actually claimed to be.

Here is where all of this connects back to the End of Days: Those who accept to take and participate in the economic system that incorporates the use of the number "six hundred and sixty six" on their right-hand or their forehead forfeit [give u p] their opportunity for Eternal Life and Heaven, and Eternity with God.

According to the Bible, Satan is not some clever guy meant to give people just " a little bit of harmless fun". Satan is not your budy. Satan is not your friend, simply out to help you have a "good time".

Satan is a real being, who is one of the most powerful and intelligent beings ever created.

He used to be an Angel, but turned against God. Satan is the one who will be in charge of the planet during the time of the false Messiah.

This is Standard historic Christian doctrine, and this is the doctrines that have been proclaimed since the Early Christians. These are NOT innovations, these are not anything new. [sources - Free - provided at the of this for those who want to know more in PDF Download]

You may ask: Well, what does this have to do with the End of Days and the Economic System ?

God wants people to worship him Freely, but if they want to oppose God, God will allow them to make that choice. But making a choice, is not the same thing as being able to chose the consequences of that choice.

There is no one in Christianity who will convince anyone against their Will to worship God. God tells each person they are responsible. From that point on, the burden is on them, they can respond to God or not, and their own response determines their own fate and consequences, especially for Eternity.

The nature of a God is that He makes the rules and is not required to explain anything to anyone. However because God loves each person and wants them to chose Him (and not chose to follow Satan), God wrote roughly 1500 pages of material in the Old and New Testament (the Bible) to help people make their own choice.

The specific characteristic of accepting to use the Economic [most likely cashless] system is that those humans who use it must agree to accept the False messiah as their own savior.

The Bible refers to this as worship. Let us not loose track of definitions: It does not matter whether the person will admit this or not. Worship consists of doing the actions that a deity, such as God, would understand worship to be.

God says that those who accept to take the economic mark in their right-hand or their forehead will forfeit their Life with Him, and will never be able to be saved.

From that point on, those who have accepted to use the economic system by the mark on their right hand or forehead have declared themselves - by their action - to be the enemy of God.

But God is the one who deals with those who are His enemies. The presumption is also that those who have agreed to accept the new economic cashless system which uses the mark have undergone an internal change. By their action, they have agreed to be under the dominion of evil (just like those who accepted Sauron in the Lord of the Rings) and this new allegiance to the False Messiah, His economic system of the mark, and the acceptance of the ruler of the False Messiah who will accomplish many false miracles (through the power of the fallen angel Satan) has consequences: it will change the person who takes this mark, even while they will deny that inner transformation to the willing acceptance of evil has taken place.

In anycase, it will not be enough to reject the Mark. People who decide to reject the mark, and there will be

millions, are hardly okay or alright. They will have very little time to actually decide and accept to believe the words of Jesus Christ in the New Testament. if they can find New Testaments that are accurate.

The New Testament that is accurate is that which has been used by the Historic Christian Church for thousands of years. If it was good enough for the Earlier Christians, it remains good enough today.

This would be the New Testaments that are based on the received text of the Koine Greek New Testament. This would include the Scrivener Version of 1860 [FH A Scrivener] [do not use versions of his, published after his death], and the Standard Koine Greek version of the New Testament published by Cura. P. Wilson, such as the version of 1833.

These two Ancient Koine Greek Testaments are based on the {western calendar} 1550-51 greek textof Robert Estienne, sometimes called Stephens or Stephanus.

The False Messiah in the New Testament has another name. He is not the true Christ, therefore by falsely claiming to be the true one, he reveals himself to be the AntiChrist. But rem ember at that point in time where He rules, he will not be officially claiming to be evil. On the contrary, he will claim to be the true Messiah of love, miracles and peace.

These facts then are what missionaries may share. Missionaries do not work for any government of the West, as this is prohibited and illegal in the West.

[Missionaries in Islam often ARE funded by their own islamic republic].

Christian Missionaries have only one goal which is to inform and acquaint you with facts that you may find interesting and that may save your Eternal life for you and your family.

Listening to any missionary will not make you a Christian. Missionaries are ordinary people. They have decided that they will try to help others by presenting truth and kindness to others. Those who hear what they have to say are free to accept or reject what they say. That is all.

Missionaries are usually very educated and devote much time (often many years) to learning about other people and about other cultures. They do not try to do this in order to gain their Eternal Life. By definition, Christians already have accepted and received Eternal Life.

Christians do not need to worry about Salvation by doing good works. For the true Christian, there is no relationship between good works and obtaining salvation. Salvation for each individual on the planet is Free, Christians are those who have understood and accepted to believe this. They already possess this from the instant that they become Christians and accept the words of Jesus in the New Testament.

Missionaries do NOT earn their way to heaven by saving or converting other people.

Missionaries agree to share the good news of Christianity, because of the individual and personal good that this same message has accomplished for them, on the inside of who they are. Missionaries risk a lot to communicate the Love of God to others. Most people cannot even understand this. Many people today have lives that are without hope and without purpose. Millions are aimless and without goals on the larger scale. But Christians will risk much to share the gospel with others, because that is what God commands them to do and wants them to do.

In England the challenge is not that people are ignorant of how to be saved and have Eternal life. Many are, but the challenge is for those who have already heard this to understand that this is really true, genuinely accurate. It is easy to hide doubts behind the walls of the propaganda that is falsely called "science" these days.

People think they must not admit to being religious, since this might not be "sophisticated". But God is the most sophisticated one of all. As the saying goes: He is no fool to give up that which cannot keep, in order to gain that which he cannot loose [referring to Eternal Life offered by God through Christ].

As they will admit, Missionaries are sinners also. If you do not believe this, ask them. Then ask them what they have done about their own sins, and listen to their answers. Missionaries do not claim to be better than others. They only claim that the mercy of God that has

been given to them, can be given to everyone else also.

Missionaries could be anywhere else in the world. They may not have to come to your area of the planet. But if God sends them there, maybe you should thank God that he cares enough to send those who risk hardship and difficulty for being brave enough to try to obey God and give you information that may save your Eternal life.

Most missionaries have given up a life of comfort and riches that they could have had in their own nations. They have made this choice to try to show the love of God to others. This example is worthy of kindness and respect.

Christians usually are there to help, or to establish schools or hospitals. Christians do not do these things in order to earn or merit their eternal life. They do these things as a result of being transformed and changed for the betterment [amelioration] of others, by God

Christians are not a witness to themselves, but to the God that they serve. Those who worship a mean and cruel God will become mean and cruel. Those who worship a God of love and help and mercy and kindness will demonstrate love, help, mercy and kindness to others. People become like the God they serve.

Some people say that if a person has harmed a Christian, that they cannot become a Christian. But

that is NOT true. Saint Paul, even before he became a Christian persecuted Christians. Then God showed Him how Paul was acting against God. Paul became a Christian.

Jesus Christ came to save everyone including murderers and prostitutes. No one is holy enough to be allowed into Heaven with any sins or imperfection in their life. God is too Holy to allow this. God can regenerate and change anyone if they are sincere when they repent, and if they are seeking God with all of their heart. Read it for yourself in the New Testament gospel of John.

There is no need to be afraid, or to allow fear to be in control. Christianity teaches a life of inner peace, not a life ruled by fear.

No one in true Christianity will ever convert you by force, since that would be disrespectful to God, and an infringement upon His dominion. There are many people in religions that are very rich because they try to censor and keep information from reaching those who would benefit most by it.

Many of those same people are rich, and do not want their positions to be affected. They would rule by fear and the threat of force and violence. Humans who try these methods bring greatcurses upon themselves. Ouestions that have been raised legitimately require answers. The events which have been predicted will occur. They cannot be stopped by humans (though they may be delayed by prayer).

There are some books listed along with this New Testament. We would urge you to consider them so that you may find the answers you are seeking:

Historic Mainstream Books that may be of use:

Jesus is Corning by W. E. B. Blackstone

available online for Free [PDF] at www.archive.org

How to study the Bible by R.A. Torrey available online for Free [PDF]

The Canon of the Old and New Testaments by Archibald Alexander - available online for Free [PDF]

Pilgrim's Progress - An explanation of the life as a Christian, in narrative. Very good, Other language versions are known to exist in French, German; Dutch, Arabic, and Chinese. Available online for Free Pdf and maybe from Google Books.

an explanation of the number 666 = " Recapitulated apostasy the true rationale of the concealed" name of the Roman empire by George Stanley Faber - best for those Christians and/or for those who know English

language well Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books

Versions of the Bible that are sound and accurate include:

Ethiopic New Testament - 1 857

Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books

Italian Diodati Edition - Original

Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books

Spanish - 1 602 Reina Valera Edition - Original

Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books

The Arabic Bible - 1869 Cornelius Van Dyke [We recommend the original editions of 1 867 and 1 869 only] - Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books

Sanskrit / Sanscrit Bible - Yes, Sanskrit is still used today in India. The Sanscrit 3dition that is accurate is the version by Wenger. Available forFree online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Uoogle books

Tamil - (Tamou) Edition of 1859 (India)

Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books

Karen - The Karen New Testament (Sgau Karen)

Available for Free o iline [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books

Burmese - Myanmar - Burma - New Testament avaiiabie. Edition of i 650.

Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books

Hindi - The New Testament in Hindi, also called Hindustani. Editions preferable before 1881 .

Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books

Le Nouveau Testament - Ostervald - 1 868-72 (be cautious as many Ostervald and David Martin versions in French have been altered). The french

version of Louis Segond is popular but is actually based on the text of Westcott and Hort.

Accurate Osterval version available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books

Hungarian Bible - 1 692 - Original

Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books

The Persian New Testament - 1 837 version of Henry Martyn - Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books

Ali the Messianic Prophecies of the Bible by Lockyer.

The Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by C. Cumbey.

The Case for Christ - Strobel

Eines Christen reise nach der seligen ewigkeit : welche in unterschiedlichen artigen sinnbildern, den gantzen zustand einer bussfertigen und gottsuchenden seele vorstellet in englischer sprache beschrieben durch Johann Bunjan, lehrer in Betford, um seiner furtrefflichkeit willen in die hochteutsche sprache ubersetzt

Le voyage du Chretien vers l'eternite bienheureuse : ou l'on voit representes, sous diverses images, les differents etats, les progres et l'heureuse fin d'une ame Chretienne qui cherche dieu en Jesus-Christ

Auteur(s) : Bunyan, John (1 628-1 688). Auteur du texte

Le pelerinage d'un nomme Chretien - ecrit sous l'allegorie d'un songe / [par John Bunyan] ; trad. de l'anglais avec une pref. [par Robert Estienne]

Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books

Baxter, Richard Title Die ewige Ruhe der Heiligen. Dargestellt von Richard Baxter.

Pilgerreise zur seligen Ewigkeit. Von Johann Bunyan. Aus dem Englischen neu ubersetzt

Der himlische Wandersmann : oder Eine Beschreibung vom Menschen der in Himmel kommt: Sammt dem Wege darin er wandelt, den Zeichen und der Spure da er durchgehet, und einige Anweisungen wie man laufen soli das Kleinod zu ergreifen / Beschrieben in Englischer Sprache durch Johannes Bunyan.

II pellegrinaggio del cristiano / tradotto da.ll' inglese di John Bunyan dai Stanislao Bianciardi Firenze : Tipografia e. Libr. Claudiana

Author Bunyan, John, 1 628-1 688

Title Tian lu li cheng

[China] : Mei yi mei zong hui, 1857

El viador, bajo del simil de un sueno por Juan Bunyan

"Everyone has the right to freedom of

thought, conscience and religion; this right

includes freedom to change his religion or

belief, and freedom, either alone or in

community with others and in public or

private, to manifest his religion or belief in

teaching, practice, worship and observance."

- Article 18 of the U. N. Universal Declaration of Human Rights -

Christian Conversions - According to the Bible Can NEVER be forced.

Any Conversion to Christianity which would be "Forced" would NOT be recognized by God. It is in His True and KIND nature, that those who come to

Him and choose to believe in Him, must come to Him OF THEIR OWN FREE WILL.

Don't Let anyone tell you that Christians support Forced Conversions.

That is False. True Christianity is NEVER forced.

Co re Universal Rights

The right to believe, to worship and witness

The right to change one's belief or religion

The right to join together and express one's belief

The subject of the End Times in the west is called Biblical Prophecy. For more information on this topic, feel free to consult the Standard books on this including: The Late Great Planet Earth (Lindsey), and the Charts of Clarence Larkin may give someone a quick overview. Things to come by Dwight Pentecost is interesting though technical. Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by Cumbey will offer a quick read to those who are able to obtain a rare copy. The Christian in Complete Armor by Gurnall [Free Online] will offer a source of spiritual strength to those who have the courage and wisdom to read it.

Some of Larkin's Material is available for Free online.

Remedv and Help for Occult & Demonic Forces

We include this short section for those who would like to take immediate action, in order to help their life or the life of someone that they care about.

The following covers a topic called the topic of "disembodied spirits" or the topic of Spirits in the world around us.

Christianity teaches that there are 1) spiritual forces that are created by Him, and that work with God, and 2) that there are spiritual forces that rebelled against God, and try to use their influence to harm the good that God accomplishes.

Christianity does NOT recognize that there are neutral spiritual forces. Christianity does not recognize that there are spirits thatroam the earth with no destination or purpose. Christianity teaches that spiritual forces may attempt to contact or respond those who seek them, and that those forces are evil and will do harm to humans.

The reason is that Humans can be deceived by spiritual forces that would claim to be good, but are not. The Christian solution is to simply have nothing to do with forces that are not part of the Kingdom of God and of Jesus Christ.

Those who disagree have the right to chose, but should not complain if they find out that the spiritual forces they contact truly are evil and deceive them. Most people do NOT find this out for many years, until their life is wasted and it is too late to do much for God. THAT is exactly the purpose of those forces, to cause humans to spend their life and their time chasing things which do not matter instead of investing in their own spiritual future, in the afterlife.

Some people think that life is to be lived on Earth, while others understand that life here is simply a down-payment. Life here is simply time to prepare for the next thousands of years, with God and others who serve Him.

Christianity does NOT recognize the category of spiritual entities (spirits) that are full of Mischief, or mischievous.

Christianity would conclude that those spirits, where they actually exist, are causing mischief as a trick to prompt humans to become involved with them, in the same manner as a human will puli a piece of string in front of a CAT in order to watch the cat react.

There are humans who have ALREAD Y found out that certain spiritual forces are Evil. These people have tried to get rid of them but do not know how. There is no solution thatexists other than to genuinely become a Christian and then take the steps that the Bible instructs.

Incantations and rituals do not "force" any spiritual entity to do anything. No ritual by a priest was ever effective BECAUSE it was a ritual, or because it contained certain words. However, spirits DO respond to those who are truly Chrsitians, and THEY can certainly tell those who are genuinely Christians (followers of the true Jesus Christ), and those who are faking this or are insincere. It is a BAD idea to attempt to fool or deceive a Demon. THAT does not work, AND humans who try this only end up with much ensnarement by those demonic forces.

There are solutions to these dilemmas. None of them will work for those who are not saved or for those who are NOT Christian. Try it if you want, but be prepared for the consequences.

Demonic Spirits play by the rules that GOD lays down and NOT by the rules that you may have been mis-led into believing by some slick occult publishing company.

Witches have precious little power in fact, and the few that do are under such oppression and such personal bondage that they have no freedom, but they will not speak this truth to others.

The price of their freedom (they have been told) is the ensnarement or seduction of others. The following prayers are provided in case they are of assistance. Those who use them must be true Christians, and recognized by God as such.

Having said that, spiritual warfare and spiritual conflict (since this IS that area: the conflict in spiritual realms between spiritual forces) is very much like running or any other long distance task: it is long term preparation that makes the difference.

A new Christian is NOT to be dealing with demonic forces, and would be well advised to seek advice from those who are serious, sober, and committed genuine Christians for many years, before dealing with these areas.

Many books have been written on this topic. Many of them are written by those who are occultists who are possessed and seeking to mislead others. We will recommend OTHER Christian books at the end of this section for those who wish to pursue these matters with the seriousness they deserve. Most of the books available in these areas for Christians are written in English or German.

Also, it may not be enough to pray these prayers once. It may take much time to have the impact desired. In order to have personal victory in these areas over demonic spirits:

1) One must be a Genuine Christian

2) One must seek to actively follow God

3) One must spend much TIME reading the Bible, and

4) One must spend much TIME praying and learning HOW to pray to God in the name of Jesus Christ, in accordance (agreement) with the information and principles explained in the New Testament.

prayer of renunciation of Demonic Forces

Prayer to renounce witchcraft and/or any spiritual practice contrary to God and His given instructions

{Whether you have decided to become a Christian 20 years ago or five minutes ago, you can still pray this prayer. If you are not a Christian believer, or if you are confused about what this means, no problem. Just go to the section on how to become a Christian, pray that prayer, and then come back and pray this one}

Lord God, I do not come always to talk with you when I should Lord, I find this prayer difficult and I pray that you would give me the grace, strength and courage that I need to pray it and mean it.

Lord, I come to you because I am a true Christian believer, I

(your name here) , being under the Blood of Jesus,

claiming the Mind of Jesus, and the Spirit of Jesus, do hereby present my request to you boldly before your Throne of Grace (Ephesians 2:3/Hebrews 4:14-16/Philippians 2: 1-1 1). I ask that you would neutralize and prevent any force or evil presence from acting that might try to keep me from praying this prayer, in the name of Jesus and in the power of your blood. I pray that you would give me your spiritual strength and your spiritual protection. I thank you for what you did for me by dying on the cross for me.

I come before you in prayer today In the name of Jesus Christ because I want to renounce any and all practices that are contrary to you or to your teachings. I come before you today in the name of Jesus Christ.

I come before you today because I want to renounce any contact or seeking of any spirit or spiritual entity other than

the Christian Triune God or the Son of God, Jesus Christ. I want to renounce any and all of my behaviors and practice of allowing myself to contact the spiritual world or pray to/ through spiritual entities or people, that are not Jesus Christ.

I recognize that the Bible states that we can only come to God through Jesus Christ, and through no other persons or spirits.

I come before you today because I want to renounce any and all of my spiritism, spirit-contact, witchcraft and occult practices, as well as any spiritual or other practice which is against you or contrary to you, and I ask for your favor and help to help me renounce these activities.

At this moment, I choose by my own will to renounce and reprove all works of darkness in my life and the lives of the generations of those whom I have joined. I include blood relatives as well as adoptive relatives and any mates, or any others whom I have joined such as lovers, seducers whether these were my (whichever applies to you - if you are not sure... include them all) wife/wives, husband/husbands, and children/grand-children/great-grandchildren. In the name of Jesus Christ, I hereby renounce any and every oath, commitment, covenant, decision, curse, fetish, decision, intention, word or thought, or gesture, and I hereby renounce any and every fleshly and immoral intimacies and unions that encouraged or brought about iniquity in my own life, or anyone meeting the above stated requirements for bringing works of darkness to my own life.

Lord God, in the name of Jesus Christ, I hereby choose to renounce all unfruitful works of darkness, and have no further fellowship with them from this time forth (Romans 13: 12/Ephesians 5: 11)

I do this through the Name of Jesus Christ, my Savior,

through His Blood that was shed for me,

through his precious Body given for me,

through his Mind that suffered beyond anything I could ever suffer,

I do this so that my whole being - body, mind, soul and spirit, may be completely set free from every sinful work of the past brought about by the sins of those before me.

I do this so that no Luciferian, Satanic, Spiritually wrong promise, or evil covenant, curse, action, word, or deed or attitude - from my actions or my past be laid against my account - in heaven or in or on the earth. By this action today, I hereby serve notice that the handwriting of ordinances written against me and my generations are blotted out in my life - effective as far back as needs be to the very first though, word, deed or gesture. (Ephesians 2: 13-14).

I do this so that from this day forward, I may go about serving You God, in reverence of You and seeking your counsel in everything I do. I submit my life unto You as a living sacrifice - holy and acceptable in Your sight, which is my reasonable service. (Romans 12:1)

Dear Heavenly Father, and Judge of the Universe, as I present this petition before you today, I thank You that You have heard me this day, and granted my every expression in accordance with Your will. I know that You have done this solely because of what Your Son, the true and only Jesus Christ, accomplished for me, by dying and paying the price for my sins on the cross.

Thank You from the depth of all of my being, for hearing my prayers and granting my petition. Please remind me of your grace and love on a daily basis. Please help me to seek to

serve and follow you, and help me to continue to remember that you have forgiven me, and that I can take you at your word and trust what you have given to me in your Bible. I pray that you would help me to not do wrong, and to decide to do what is right, and to take active steps to follow you. I pray that you would fiil me with joy, comfort and hope and bring true Christian friends in my life who will strengthen my walk with You and encourage me to grow in the right spiritual path with you. You know Lord that I have asked all of these things in the name of Jesus, and I thank you that I am now free in deed, according to what you have shared with you in the Bible (Romans 6:22, Galatians 5:1, Romans 8:1, Romans 7:24, 8:1, John 8:36, 1 Corinthians 12:27).

(Note: take time to look up these verses in the Bible which can be found in the Bible. You may want to write them down, and memorize them as well. It is good practice and will serve you well).

I pray Lord that you would help me to remember that each time I am tempted, that I can come back and talk with you, and read the Bible for strength and encouragement.

In the name of Jesus Christ I have asked all of these things, and I thank you for giving them to me, Amen.

The Spiritual Problems caused by Spiritual Explorations of Witchcraft & Dark Spirituality - HereditaryWitchcraft

There is such a thing as occult forces that try to force families to serve them, for many decades, and for many generations. Some families did not KNOW how to fight the demonic spirits. Therefore they gave in to them, and serve those forces, and try to force their other family members to do this.

This needs to be resisted, but true freedom and true resistance can only be found in those who truly accept and believe the message of Jesus Christ as the New Testament confirms and explains. This is only ONE book of many portions of the New Testament. The New Testament is comprised of 27 books.

Prayer to be forgiven for sins committed while exploring darkness and/or evil and prayers to be forgiven for sins committed in & during witchcraft

Some people will wrongly tell you that this prayer cannot or will not have a good impact on your life. Whether they consciously know it or not, those who say that are people who are trying to trick you. But if this prayer would really have no effect on your life, then it certainly cannot hurt to pray it.

Lord God, I do not come always to talk with you when I should. Lord, I find this prayer difficult and pray that you would give me the grace, strength and courage that I need to pray it and be totally sincere. Lord, I come to you because I am now a true Christian believer, and because I, (your name here) . being under the Blood of Jesus, claiming the Mind of Jesus, and the Spirit of Jesus, do hereby present my request to

you boldly before your Throne of Grace (Ephesians 2:3/Hebrews 4:14-16/Philippians 2: 1-11).

I ask that you would neutralize and prevent any force or evil presence that might try to keep me from praying this prayer, in the name of Jesus and in the power of your blood. I pray that you would strengthen me as I pray this and that my mind would be clear, and that I would be able to concentrate on talking with you and on what I would like to pray. I thank you for coming to my help as you said you would in the Bible, and despite the tricks of any evil forces to convince me of the opposite. I thank you that you Love me Lord, even if I do not always feel as though you do because I am notperfect.

I thank you for what you did for me by dying on the cross for me. I thank you Lord, because I know that you are more powerful than the forces which may have been controlling my life, and which were exercising influence in my life that I want to be sure is terminated and over. I come to you in prayer today Lord, because I want to be delivered from all consequences of hereditary involvement in the occult or any occult curses which have impacted my life and/or hereditary witchcraft and all of the sins and curses which have come from those activities. I choose by my own will and I do now renounce and reprove all works of darkness in my life and the lives of the generations of those past and present whom I have joined.

Choosing by my own will Lord Jesus Christ, I renounce any and all curses or effects of my past actions, habits, thought processes and any other activity or intention contrary to your character and contrary to your word the Bible. any relatives of mine who have been in the occult which you know about Lord, and whereby I am or have been affected by any of their actions, thoughts, words or deeds. In your name and by my will with your help and depending upon you, I renounce all occult blessings, all occult heritage and all occult consequences, as well as any demonic spirits or inspiration,

which have a basis for interference or influence in my life, either because of my own actions or because of the actions of any of my ancestors or relatives which has an effect on me- whatever evil effect that might be.

In this renunciation Lord, I include blood and adoptive relatives and any mates, such as lovers, seducers andrapists wife/wives, husband/husbands, and children/grand- children/great-grandchildren. I hereby renounce any and every oath, commitment, covenant, decision, action, curse, fetish, gesture, and fleshly and immoral intimacies and unions that encouraged or brought about iniquity in my own life, or anyone meeting the above stated requirements for bring works of darkness to my own life.

[ you should take time out at this point, recalling to your mind any known names or circumstances - especially if there have been rapes or seductions that you know about, from or towards you, or that you participated in or witnessed. Take each situation and person individually and ask the Lord to forgive you of your involvement and participation in each of these situations. Where the situation applies instead to others, ask that they would come to realize the wrongness of their action, and that they would be drawn to the Lord and that they would repent and be saved ]

Lord, I hereby choose to renounce all unfruitful works of darkness, and have no further fellowship with them from this time forth (Romans 13: 12/Ephesians 5: 11) I do this through the Name of Jesus Christ, my Savior, through His Blood that was shed for me, through his precious Body given for me, through his Mind that suffered beyond anything I could ever suffer. I do this so that my whole being - body, mind, soul and spirit, may be completely set free from every sinful work of the past brought about by my sins or the sins of those before me. I do this so that no Luciferian, Satanic, or evil covenant, curse, or fetish from the past be laid against my account - in heaven or in or on the earth.

By this action right now today, I hereby serve notice that the handwriting of ordinances written against me and my generations are blotted out - effective as far back as needs be to the very first though, word, deed or gesture. (Ephesians 2: 13-14).I do this so that from this day forward, I may go about serving You, Father, in reverence of You and seeking your counsel in everything I do. I submit my life unto You here and now as a living sacrifice - holy and acceptable in Your sight, which is my reasonable service. (Romans 12:1) Dear Heavenly Father, and Judge of the Universe, as I present this petition before you today, I thank You that You have heard me today, and granted my every expression in accordance with Your will.

I know that You have done this solely because of what Your Son, the true and only Jesus Christ, accomplished for me, by dying and paying the price for my redemption on the cross. Thank You from the depth of all of my being, for hearing my prayers and granting my petition. Please remind me of your grace and love on a daily basis. Please help me to seek to serve and follow you, and help me to continue to remember that you have forgiven me, and that I can take you at your word and trust what you have given to me in your Bible. I pray that you would help me to not do wrong, and to decide to do what is right, and to take active steps to follow you.

I pray that you would fiil me with joy, comfort and hope and bring friends in my life who will strengthen my walk with You and encourage me to grow in the right spiritual path with you. I ask Lord that you would give me spiritual discernment so that I would not be deceived by others, and so that I would follow you in the ways that you want me to. I pray that you would help me to understand you and know you better and that you would help me be an effective messenger of yours to communicate the truths of the Gospel and live and stand up for You. You know Lord that I have asked all of these things in the name of Jesus Christ, and I thank you that I am now free in

deed, according to what you have shared with me in the Bible (Romans 6:22, Galatians 5:1, Romans 8:1, Romans 7:24, 8:1, John 8:36, 1 Corinthians 12:27). In the name of Jesus Christ, Amen.

LIST OF ACCURATE BOOKS on the OCCULT / DEMONIC SPIRITS for those who are CHRISTIANS and who sincerely want to know more to help themselves, and their family members

These books are available at a bookstore online at www.amazon.com . They MAY be available through other places online (on the internet).

Demonology Past and Present by Kurt Koch- Available ALSO in German

Occult ABC by Kurt Koch - Available ALSO in German

Other Books by Kurt Koch - Available ALSO in German

Demons in the World Today: A Study of Occultism in the Light of God's Word by Merril Unger

The Beautiful Side of Evil by J. Michaelsen

Inside the New Age Nightmare: For the First Time Ever...a Former Top New Age Leader Takes You on a Dramatic Journey by Baer

Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by Constance Cumbey

Die sanfte Verfiihrung (Cumbey Constance) Book Description: 1987. Die Autorin beschreibt in diesem Standardwerk Entstehung, Lehren, Ziele und okkulte Wurzeln der New-Age-Bewegung. Sie enthiillt beklemmende

Parallelen zur ....biblischer Endzeitprophezeiungen. Hardcover, guter Zustand, Verlag Schulte & Gerth, Taschenbuch Neues Zeitalter (Geheimwissen), Religiose Zeitfragen S. 300,

A Planned Deception: The Staging of a New Age Messiah (ISBN: 0935897003 / 0-935897-00-3) Cumbey, Constance Pointe Publishers

The Adversary by Marc Bubeck

Overcoming the Adversary by Marc Bubeck

Destroying the Works ofWitchcraft Through Fasting & Prayer by Ruth Brown

Orthodoxy & Heresy: A Biblical Guide to Doctrinal Discernment by Robert Bowman

Beyond Seduction: A Return to Biblical Christianity by D. Hunt

Pilgrim's Progress by John Bunyan - The most widely translated Christian book after the Bible. (Yes, an edition in German, Dutch, French, Italian, Spanish, Portugues, and Arabic have all been made). Note: Pilgrim's Progress by John Bunyan is available for FREE online.

The Christian in Complete Armour, or, A treatise of the Saints by Pastor (Rev.) William GURNALL - in One Volume or in Three Volumes - available for FREE online (the term "saints" used here simply means Christians).

i i'"> ' 'iiifiiii siM

*r ^«rg «O ^ tf*y

Bgg®5r

J?V

' -

'*=*->;-:

lesa®**

5=T** ■'■■■

0_S fl_i_e © P.

	\^>W?i ijcj xj.A iybSJiJi 4^.1	|
1 "* ■	uoV:»|r*	■ ilo'^1	! 1 I i j i 1 i
i	l*&?r n	o	irV^
* ■	u-Wirs-	'	^>J^
i ,
1 *	o^ifi	•	fc-*J*'
IT	* Ojtf l^j**	TA	•	^JW
0		n	ir	v?j
e	U-> '	ii	r	U-Jr-J? '
r	UV*! >	w;	■	Lr>L>.r f
0	' ^°"_r. *	"	*	tfcfe
\	Uji r	i	r	u— Jl
\	U-j, r	t	*	^
\	***	i	•	&lf
rr ■		o	■	iQ^ L; i
	J'* Ojj—s'3 *■*— < 4*^.?	V	w	^j^i i-j r
			i ! 1

^ y- i 1 ■ v> -^ c W. ^ ■ f *>jt ■£> Buiijfj . waa^ Jj uTj * . v_T '&>%% 3£\

4~^ fp. V' ^S ty {.J' J^-i-JK ^JS^^J^-vijfiij SSj^'-uS ^j

JAS £„ J! *,& &y.*fe'jif W/ j£b til ^o* J WV\ j^i iv*g~M Jp_J ^■'.A* *?.s g~vl ci^ J^S t?- o'j ■ asv1* **'.y

,-^j tjtgt i.1, ^ ^.'Ai . i2S i-\Sj «-w *,_, siV, u >

W^ii.u

■ U" **' £>>' ^_7' J» V S J;- t^-^^ o"^ ■ 2tfc)j«l (.j' Jo-fe iSl v-ii ^ i^b afl

J» L^*; (T, r»* i"\^\ j.i\, ^,J\ ihKi. '^.\ ^J«» fjp\ 0. 'JL.J, iii:U»\ \Jj rt

»*<J

</> </-' e^ ^ -^

. urv

->-rtV'^"'V

(J~A * "T

503 . ^'-.ubuLujJ r»i*» *J)^ *!^

507 516 522 526 528 552 561

570 . u^lj* o^,L=j ^JjJ |»lc J<tiL,

576 . i_SjJ_y»- ^yU»-^ J}' j»* *A\mj

585 . i^)l^ t^^-y. (_s^ /x **N«*|

586 . l£|Ijs>- u*^3-^ f^"1 (•** ^""V

587 .. . !_£;'_)=- ^Ii^vi #(* *<Jwy 590 ..^1 i_s'^>-y. CUUiliU L-jUi"

1 ***&?*

83 u^lr* JsWF'

135 Isj! JjustI

221 iL-jj Jjjk-'I

288 ... . ^V.;^ lM Sr>^ 371 . j»j i (J"*V i-S/^*- l/"k"-V> *«"; 405 . |-/w-«r> t>-»'u lJjI}*- c/*"JV '*'(->a7

9

437 U~-^y

459 . . jjUHL i^lja- (jJjJ *<db; 470 . ^luw^ilj '-S''^ \J^3i ^"J 481 ui^. <J-&Ij ^Ija» ,jjjj 'aSL,

489 . ujLuAaj i^Ijjs» (jJ^J; J<KlUy

- / - j

496 . ^UhjJLjJo |j*>Ijj J;l <*!L>

II nnn

-&LA-

mi iiii.ii imiiiei'ii IHOCA XPII€TA,

BtpHO h tomho nptseAeH'B OTT. ntpEOC6pa3H0-TO.

Bi KiiHroneraTnmi^s-Ts Ha A. X. Eomariiraa. 1ST4.

ii-^° •= =

1" l>jj J&jiSgfr Js*fl

76 s^l i/S^i ^~i^ J^*

124 5^1 t/i^jU B^'y J^'

204 iijj,! ^jb eeli^ J**M

266 Jl^f'd/Jj-;

34 5 . . . . • jujdjlwo j a Jjj los , ^iJj**»! (V*y ?i

377 Li"^ *<ft*> s^jL-jl^js CilJj^ u-y!#

407 >*aJ\j ''iiUj, sJjl-jjni.js WjM. (j^jj

428 ^..JLj, s^jJa-L!^ ffiUj-j, ijijijj

438 ^jjiiL», s^lJLy^il isJJy-, (j-y!j)

449 ^uJU, i^LLi isJJj^ u^JJ

457 * *»*aJI**>i 5y«LwJ«9 i^Uj«*jj (^j^^i

464 l*"^' *A\mj a^jL&jILJ (itllj-^ (j^jj

471 ^jaJ\j •'aIU., 5^jLxJj!L-j isuj-i, (j^jijJ.

475 i*?"^ **^"»i *-<jljy*A> eUj->, (j-j!_>5

484 , ^Ajlj ■'aIL., 4-jjIjj*1j l£l!j-Jj u"J^JJ

49 1 -oiJLii iWLJ isUj-^ L^iJyi

495 juajLj, ii^i-J ("ilJyu, fj»yjl

496 ^»>a!1-, s^LjL^c isJJj-jj (j-yijj

521 ^)u«j? ''aIL^ i£l!j-^ tjj"i

530 jj-Vjl ***•$? *4W> isUj-; (j^u

539 ,j»^ '*i*>?'*^ dJy-, ,j-^u

544 ^Vjl *a?>j? 'JU; «sU}-, l$5

553 ^^ **J^) <^_r^ ^

534 ^AilU'JU, eUU, ^«s

555 ^i~»jf- ^JL-, idj^-, \±jV,

558 ^^-a-j <*l*,jS€

1 ...Evangile seion Matthieu */jj\ ^^i ^^» Jrf^

76 ...Evangile seion Marc t/jj^ t&^h ^~L^ J-~?^

1 24.., Evangile seion Luc ijjy\ ^oijU eli^ J-sM

904 .. Evangile seion Jean s^jjl l?1-^ ^L?* lW1'

266,. les Actes des Apotres, JLfl bKUyu,

345.. Epitre auxRomains .«aJU, s^Ujj CsU».-, (j-j!jj

377 * . Premiere epitre aux Corinthiens . . . ^mA«1 AJU*». 8 J oImjb&J . ifi (£tUa>*J, , uiojaJ 407. Deuxreme epitre aux Corinthiens. ^wA-JJ iJW, 8 >i r.lwj ojlj j «9 £)JewJ, (yjjjj

428.. Epitre aux Galates ~>a)Lj, s^liJj^c (sUj»», (j"j!j{

438..Epitreaux Ephesiens -jaIU, sJJUj^il l£)Jj-, (_>-y!jJ

449., Epitre aux Philippiens -.aIU, s^LJL» eUj-, (j-jljj

457. . Epitre aux Colossiens ^>a)L-, s^jL.-jJjii dJ^u, (j^Ji

464 Premiere epitre aux Thessaloniciens jmJbI ^aJLai. II j r J* tf jtwi (!iJJ***i r wijo

471 Deux'emeepitre-Thessaloniciens, ^AJIJ ^AjL*»» sJoLX-Jfl]L*J (£U«*j, /jrfjJV.

■i i O . Premiere epitre a Timothee -u* J «I jJw, AuU^be^Ot? (iiija*u, (Uji!»)

484. Deuxieme epitre a Timothee j^A*JU AJu*i. Am^Ua^Oo (£a]*-j, ^ujaja^

49 1 . .Epitre a Tite ^»a!Lu, *-yio eMj-^, (j^J_ji

495..Epitrea Philemon ^.aIUj. AJji-J l£)Jw, <j*j!jJ

49e,.L'EpttreauxHebreux >*a!L^ s^J^ dJ^-, y-j5j>

52 1 . . Epitre de Jacques ^i^^f- *a1Lj. uAlj»,. uji«

530.. Premiere epitre de Pierre.. Ji^'^jf- *a!L, (sl)j«^ ^-^o 539. Deuxieme epitre de Pierre. ,uAJt) sa~oj£ ''aJLj, miiyj \j»Ja\

544. .Premiere epitre de Jean «"^j' f**»jSi 'J^j isljvui .ts;

553_>Deuxieme epitre de Jean ^uajIj ^aSL», Uillj-». ,,•*;

554..Troisieme epitre de Jean ^uasTC *a1U>, e)JLj, ,£*■•

555.. Epitre de Jude ^fi^j? *A*| ^j^j^jH

558 •• l'Apocalypse. nommte parfois Revelations, ,.,,,,,,- •(•..■••••*•••• m*>5>h 1!£aJ . £*£".

Neues Testament / New Testament / Le Nouveau Testament

JOt^s- J^S-

■/"*

,ur

0 0 -'t,-**

jJkk* i (jjlj |^lj ^ (j^1 jV- JJ1 ^y.^-1 I Al. J *_—>

IN THE

HINDUSTAN! LANGUAGE.

jfjf-n 3 -«j j^c / - - - - - - <*><*

ffjf-n ^ -«j c^fc^-n ^ _.---•«

?fjf~o o (ifp/f -c^ tm^f-r\ / - - - - - s"°l

*flf-n a ^ -^ f^"0 f - - - - - <■'*

ff!f"n fl ^ jpr^0 / - - - - ' - kv-i

ff^n ^ -^ jjrffn ^ - - - - -

jCjT»n ^ pf^ -pj j^vrfP / " " " " " alaW

fflf"n 3 ^ "^ f^°f - - - " " MJ

ffjf«n ^ -«^ T»rfn ^ ^J

'W1 F l**lr ------ -"J

«Wi /^ ir^ff ------- ,AI

fa f' \rv - - - - - - ~"'

^n p l(iffi . . - - - - ji

•/* Z1 ic*T - - - - '

re**

^

w, - - - - - - - la*- K y^e

^^ - . - - - ki- 11^ K i_r^;:

ji:1t,_ _ .. - - - iai- 1wj«i) o ij^jis^

fw - - - - - - s*=- ir^ ^ ^*-y.

i«vi - - - - " " 1==- j/"^ » V°-}t

is», - - - - - - " lai- £ 'i^j-yi

P, 3 - - - - i_>U/ ^ CiAai&o J_ ^y.

INJIL I MUQADDAS,

YA NE,

HAMARE KHUDAWAND AUR NAJAT-DENEWALE

YISIJ' MASIH

KA NAYA 'AHD-NAMA.

IS KA TARJUMA YUNANI ZUBAN SE ZUBAN I URDU MEN BANA.RAS TRANSLATION COM1IITTEE SE K1YA GAYA, J1SE TAS.HIH KARKE AB TISRI'bAR CHHAPWATE.

U

LONDON:

PRINTED FOR THE

BRIT1SH AND FOREIGN BIBLE SOCIETY, INSTITUTED IJST THE YEAR 1804.

MDCCCLX.

THE

NEW TESTAMENT

OF OUB

LORD AND SAVIOUR

lE'SUS CHR'IST.'

isr SGAU KAREJV.

II CoS OO5) 33l£ cSl S c8l 93 S »

2d Edition.— 4000.

Translated by Francis Mason

MAULMAIN,

AMERICAN MISSION PRESS, THOS. S. RANNEY.

1850.

«coSs»

ul«

«scib

u'iojs

ojioof> • • \S\oop . . . oo^«i8«ioo^ 801 • • • •

C06JSoj8iiou . . .

oo^pojsuji . . .

O3C0100 . . <SSS<980S • •

ISCOIOS . •

cocSab • • 008BlCOJf»On . .

oosbico^djo . . ooiooo8«o« . .

o

00100088 j n . . 00008 - • • •

oicoSS . . ai(3i . - - ■ ooicBS . -

0800 0813» . - OtOOfflglJl • •

oSioo^oSjSoAo»

oSlCofSoSfoO^g j d «SlOO^oS^aA^n 0J31 .'.'.,

OjfcSptf) . . .

. «3 . . . . • ■ o

. u^ ..... . <IJ

C01 . . . • - • 03E

. tSi • s°n

«100^ . • . . JjS

. 8 3=1

• oo^ao . . . . qj<>

- ro^«j . . . . <?<>j

cocoi 9°J

038 9 = 3

o

13COI 9J9

COc88 9?J

008110 95°

ODSHJ 991

O0l»0 > • • • 98' O0X«J • • ■ 9G3*

00 ■ - 131 .

ai •

9

ooi .

o8«o . o8nj • 081» o cSnj d8i«5

°8 •

c8p .

9G0*

i ■ 9«

9Jo*

9<15

9»P.

96J

9«<l

jos

30E

500

930

I

■coSsoC

«u

«soc-

«Sojs

OOlCOp • • .

oo^oiSwioo^ . «jol

CD^SojSlOii . . .

ooe^ojsijo . . . rocoioo . .

OESC3508 . . (SCOIOS . .

cocSsb • • oo!eicol»o» . .

C03©TCO|dJ1 . . 001BOD8I1O1I . .

o O31«0088_/n . ■

OOOJ! . . •

oicoSS . . ffii^t ... ooifSS . . .

O800ffl8o 3« • .

caco ^8j j » • • oSioojSoSfjoD^oa o8icof>o9£cctf« J n

oSlCO^oSfioo^i Cg3t . . .

o&SPfll . . .

tf} . , Matthew . 3 «S. . Marc- . w cm . Luke - . , 33g c8i . John ' . . ooo

BlCoS Acts of APostles J9S

Q . . Romans , roqS«0 ICorinthians . COQp0 I l' Corinthians COCOl . Galatians, . Ephesians Phlippians , Colossians .

93C1 990 <3"J

5°J 9==. 9J9 S3J 99° 991 93° 9 Co 9G0

9«

9S»

919

9»o,

osnj . ",'8ter . . . 9£j

COl « O I [ Epistle I Letter of] John 511 cSlHj " 1 Epistle - Letter of] John go^ c8l«3 '" t Epistle-Letter of] John «0g CO . JHde • • • ■ *8on CO p , Revelation ■ • * 330

008 .

O

13C01

oocSs

COSH O ' Thessalonians .

a

CO 2 D I 1 1' Thessalonians

__»

COIO ITimothy •

OOIbJ "Timothy

00 • - Titus

QX • Philemon , . (21 • Hebrews

001 . .James ,

OSfiO . I Peter . . II Peter . _

«coSaafitt

OOaSoosnon . . • OO^^C^Haj» . . • OOCOICO . .

nivv • • •

.00

OC01OS . .

cocSsb . •

008ST.CO|iOn . • C08ST.CO|l J « • • OO1UOO80O» . .

o

ooiacos» jn . •

0O0O8 • • • ■

csicgSS . . si(9)i ... . - ooicBS ...

0800 080 O» . . 0100 08» J U • •

c8ioo|3c8r>oAoi o8icojSc8£atfi j ■ oSioo^oS^oo^i casi . . . .

a&s^ . . .

iyg v Evangile seion Matthieu 3 «y5| , .Evangile seion Marc <1J

C01 .Evangile seion Luc • ^^E f\Ri ,, Evangile seion Jean , o o o (2X001 , Actes des Apotres. J 5 B 8 , Epitrs aux Romains , ^0*X

OOG) S« O P^mtere opltre alJ. Crin.hiens 39 " OOQpO /Douniimoipitro Corinthlens 9°J

QQQ31 m EpitreauxGalates, £oj

<}Qg # Epttre aux Ephesiens $d^

o (3 COl Epltre aux Philippiens pjc

G3COS EpTtre aux ColossienscOl

00 "U O Promi4ra api*™ Thessalonlclens CCO **\T°fl I ^euK'^me ^P'_tre Thessaloniciens

001 'l O prem,J"? ^P"*6 iTIniotluSe, OOlll I Deux^'rB_6f,ttrB «Timothee ,

qj . Epttre a Tite , m <31_ BEpitre a Philemon , /•■^ -L'Epttreaux Hebreux £93 001 . Epitre de Jacques , 919 OS«0 • * epitredePierre pa^ OSflJ Deuxieme -dePierre pgj

fKjT B D premiere epltre de Jean # CffO tfVjltf I Oeuxiemc cpitrc- dc Jean* 9^9

/jH^K^ Troisieme epltre de Jean • f)OQ

EpTtre de Jude' • 900

'ApNatypse. nommae pirfois Rsvelations 430

9J1 93 = pEos SEo* M**

Neues Testament / New Testament / Le Nouveau Testament

THE

NEW TESTAMEN!

OF 01- K

LORD AND SAVIOUR JESUS CHRIST,

IN TAMIL:

WBH REFERENCES, CONTEKTS 0E III E CHAPTEES AND CHRONOLOGY, FROM THE EKGLISH.

e_*«5 faJiTL-jj^.TaiiU

fip go su rr 3, & iu ih ^Giresfliti&s.jiuurTGb

& f& JZ5! IU Q <5iJ <£ dF/Bdfi^^TJTSU U ffl Q & T $ ^ ^

MADRAS: THE MADRAS AUXILIARY BIBLE SOCIETY.

PRINTEDATTHE AMERICAN ttlMIOH PRESS.

1859.

oo©£gco5)S)G|8(S oooo6oq|5sn

THE NEW TESTAMENT

IN BURMESE.

oo©£cco^3G|S(^i ogco8oqj5sr»

	THE
New	Testament
	OF
OTTR	LORD AED SAVIOTJR
	JESUS OHRIST:
.■SEransIatrti into tfjc Butmesc, tam tljt ©ciginiil ffimft,
E	y Rev. A. JUDSON, D. D.
ANU EDITED, WITH CONTENTS 0» CHAPTERS ANU REFERENCES,
B	r Rev. E. A. STKVRNS, D. I).
	-^^^3=^^=
	R A. N GO 0 N:
2PUBL1SHED BY :Seeond Edition,-5,000.	1-HE AMERICAN BAPTIST MISSIONAEV VStOK, AT THEIR MISSION PRESS. F. D. PHINNEV, SUPT. l885.

ogGooo£scq|5s ^>g cq]5sc§dJ330gS^ooi^)os

ooSgcpojSe

OOGp8GOOOGpCO]&8

GOOooBoSeo . . .

ODSp80J^8JoSsD

sgcpoioSogoGSoS

OgCpfflioS^cSoDKSoS

ogGpoioSooc8c»ci>o8

Qg£peioS©opcoc©oS

ept>ioSg"]£ogyG©:>S

G^Oo8qo5©0

aoooSogSs . .

G0OD^Draj&8 GJ|DCO<f^c8gS8

GCOjpooos^oocBrajjSa

GO3Qu9S^0Oc8cq)&8 GCK>E[8ggSoD£8©ro3! . . . GOD0l>GCqj<X>C»^3Oj^CI3j58 OGt»OOOB^OO^C(J)tS8 . . .

GOSOGjos^ooj^rag&a

onraSsnSecigtSsojSi aj]58^o«uo)c4 oao|a:x>oSjje!»5i ocraJpjS

■ic58|£oj8(:)§8c5]£l Q^e^C3008D£BD£|l S»3C0?8(t^8r^ iijScfjS =O^llC^33OJI053lc^£80cSs|6c^8C0^!»3CT?8^8t^^aigSl1 OCloSp

sSSJoScoeoos (i) §e:»5i (cgf&e^ec03c»3a>5'8(o§8§ c^5coSc^^c^

CD^II^oSjf§8 (l) C»gS(§S^oSlSoOS^8n^(3COgSl[

QgooSoqj<5s j \ oq]<Ssc§(i32»g5$o«
5l£aoi)3C|goS .... Matthew ....
5l£«Dr^sc|go6 .... Marc - jSojodoosjEoS .... Luke-- ■■•■ 5)Eeco3co^3G|So£. . John - ....	«D Gt.VSS
•oow^GODSoggj .... Acts of Apostles ....	OD
GGp«(3 c03©9 .... Romans ....	GGp
Eroo&j^-lgcflgeoogueeDS .... J Corinthians	0 GCOO>
efDO^^lSoIsso^cStOCBoS . . II Corinthians ocdDo8gol38D .... .... Galatians . .	J GC03> oco
GisoS|3ol383 .... .... Ephesians	c
ScS8[oqo1o§)D .... .... Phlipplans .	8
Gro3GCODob(oDOl3©D ' .... Colossians	sodo
0300COOeCOD§oSSorlo©0030e©o£ ' Thessalonians	3 COoS
CX>o530:>GCOD§o5|o3cn3809c8eoc©D£ " Thessalonians	J 030§
c8GWDCCOjo3ol96)OOC«G©^£ .... 1 Timothy . ,	o o9
cBGGOGCcgdlgSD^cfiuOGSoS . . II Timothy	j c8
cfiojgdloeo .... .... Titus . . . 8gCO(^S(3o)q©0 . . .... Philemon	c8 8cco-
GOOgS5ol3©^ .... .... Hebrews. , .	GOO
5|£a50trjiyffiol3SO .... James. .	COO
C|£G0ro<j)[3dl380OgUG8DS .... IPeter . . .	0 GO
J|£GOOD^jffiol3S0qc8o0Ge3S .. MPeter.	J GCi n 3 GO>3
G)£GOD0COS[Scn3©0OM«G©D£ .. 1 [ Epistle / Letter of] Joh
a£G030coEScno©03c8oDG©o£ " [Epistle-Letterof] Joh
5|£GO53C0ifficn3B0ODcS(X)SSD£ I" [Epistle-Letterof] John ^ c<a3
5j£a^rj(p3cf)3B3 .... .... Jude .... <g03cr$ag&8 .... . . Revelation ....

ca>3coc»po£§ag&8 . .

g«8o3po£§reg& . ,

«°33?°83l

8cgDDS^ooc8ra]&

GGiS^i03^0od3oDj&8 . . UDCo8oS^DO£§r>3j&8 . .

33Wp5^DUC^p;ii

scOdoo

§

C033^>

8

p

(»0

e»

•*>%

0)0 «OCO

THE

NEW TESTAMENT

OF OUE

LORD AND SAVIOUR JESUS CHRIST

TBANSLATED INTO TELDGU

FROM THE ORIGINAL GREEK.

§T_g $ » o ■ # tf.

e8s6 ^ So ^rsler^A&o-O H 33 76 «T* tf -O o -iS w <S tf 8. J?,;» ^sio oO"E_o tSoII

			MADRAS:
		PEINTED AT THE AMEKICAN MISSION	PBESS
FOE	THE	MADKAS	AUIHIAET	BIBLE	S 0 C I E T T,
		And sold at their	Depository, 155 Popham's Broadway
			18 60.

THE BOOKS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT.

^°3& ,jf,o&>S&>, 3{£sSue>aMS'jr_ "3tfR>.

5o"g

&*&(,_

-W"^ ...- ... :3Sr-tf«Sb

5^S^

O §"8o§

J> §"8o§

K'aScK)

^lsl>

pS&i

S"eS"^\ ...

O •^Sj«5>"6j • • •

. . . -30~

oa. . . . -stf

jn . . .s><y

ClSL

. . . Oe_ o3

_9 ^^tf^S^

-s 8"»»q5c55cD. ©e&> . . .

^"A • • •

z» 3 Serasi

s5SCsk>.

b' 3 n o3 >«

3

n o

ftEjIiTUP'

XCIV9":

pa:fnr : P «»» R3\,t ¥l!

ppi>fi:Ticntfi«

0>TVA ! VX.fl:

PitiTCPWP» : ooj(Ai£*::

These texts conforms to the T. R. as far as we know. Anyone having questions about this text should compare it to the Stephens / Estienne Version in Koine (Ancient) Greek of 1 550/1 551 , which is the root Standard historic Ancient Greek text of the New Testamen t

LE

NOUVEAU TESTAMENT

D E

NOTRE SEIGNEIffi JESTJS-CHBIST

d'apres la veesion revce

Par J. F. OSTERVALD

PARIS

SOCIETE BIBLIQUE DE FRANCE

41, RUE LA BRUYBRE 1872 One of the Reliable copies of the French New Testament - Une Bible fidele. Available sometimes [and Free (gratis) ] atwww.archive.org

TABLE DES LIVRES

DU NOUVEAU TESTAMENT

Evangile seion saint Matthieu . EVanfrile seion saint Marc . . . Evangile seion saint Lue . . . . Evaiigile seion saint Jean . . .

Les Actes des Apotres

Epitre de saint Paul aux Ko-

mains

I" E-pttre aux Corinthiens . . . II* Epitre aux Corinthiens . . .

Epitre aux Galates

Epitre aux Ephesiens

Epitre aux Philippiens

Epitre aux Colossiens

I" fipitre aux Thessalonicieus.

rlcd chap.	P»6e»
28	1
1G	52
24	85
21	139
23	179
18	232
16	253
13	277
6	292
6	300
4	307
4	313
5	318

Itc Epitre aux Thessaloniciens.

£re Epitre a Timothee

H* Epitre k Timothee

Epitre a Tite

Epitre a Philemon

Epitre aux Hebreux

Epitre de saint Jaeques

lre Epitre de saint Pierre .... IIe Emtre de saint Pierre ....

Irt Epitre de saint Jean

He fipitre de saint Jean

III1 Epitre de saint Jean

Epitre de saint Jude

Apoealypse de saint Jean . ... 22

Nombre d» chap. 3	Page* 323
6	326
4	332
3	336
1	339
13	340
5	357
5	362
3	369
5	37-3
1	379
1	380
1	381

Le signe f indique la division du texte en paragraphes. La Bible la plus fidele = Texte Recu - Grec Koine - d'Estienne (1550-51)

BOOKS OF THE SBW TESTAMENT.

Matthew 28

Mark ... 16

Luke 24

John 21

The Acts 28

Epistle to the Eomans ... 16

I. Corinthians ... ... ... 16

II. Corinthians... ... ... 13

Galatians ... ... ... 6

Ephesians 6

Philippians ... ... ... 4

Colossians 4

I.'Thessalonians ... ... 5

II. Thessalonians ... ... 3

L Timothy ... 6

II. Timothy 4

Titus 3

Philemon ... ... ... 1

Hebrews ... 13

Epistle of James ... ... 5

I. Peter 5

II. Peter 3

I. John ... 5

II. John 1

Ht. John 1

Jude 1

Kevelation .. 22

imMmt

mA+ntt

3|£>\"Tpf

.PT

SHtr

SHft ^5ft

'W'—' pT

stii^a»

■SLjfj-jji. n ..

«Alfjgii FfJA£#ff&

«a«».hs

mA&Mm

ftAjfeEBSttiH ■&Aae£&«ttii

•gAmmm

m:

mmmm

Chinese Simplified - Request to God

isgw±ifr, wms&mmT ummnm^^M^^^

m%mij]miMmm^mnmm«y3Xft,immi t.

«at^jf#^#,{nsiHjtt#,{nfgii^ftBas#AR a»f«f, /s

Chinese Traditional - Talking to the Lord of Heaven

mm, Mtmmmi mEjmmMi mj.x^& §m«5#

tm&mi£mmmmtmmmmmMmm^A&, & immtmmmmmmmmmmmm^A& mm, t

Chinese Traditional - Request to God

ss«±#, mmmmmmmjtmmm^

mm, i&mmtMi mRimm^n M_ax#& mwm& n0 mm, Mtimm mmm^m^msLimTM^

tm&mismmmmimmmmMmm^A&, & immtm^m^mmmmmmmmm^A& mm, m

God mr, mmmmmM^mMMmintMmfcfen

'-A4

•ff

Bii

;?«KfPSP*

^Jl«;m«*Wi?P»W«*, HP1,

Korean - Request to God
5 J , &	9	5 ?
5	(	)
1	.God
(	)	•
1 5	5 ,Amen	)

Gebet zum Gott

Lieber Gott, Danke, daB dieses Evangelium oder dieses neue Testament freigegeben worden ist, damit wir in der LageSIND, mehr uber Sie zu erlernen. Helfen Sie bitte den Leuten, die fiir das Zur Verfiigung stellen dieses elektronischen Buches verantwortlich sind. Sie wissen, daB wem sie sind und SieSIND in der Lage, ihnen zu helfen.

Helfen Sie ihnen bitte, in der Lage zu SEIN, schnell zu arbeiten, und stellen Sie elektronischere Biicher zur Verfiigung Helfen Sie ihnen bitte, alle Betriebsmittel, das Geld, die Starke und die Zeit zu haben, die sie zwecks sein miissen fiir, Sie zu arbeiten zu halten.

Helfen Sie bitte denen, die ein Teil der Mannschaft sind, das ihnen auf einer taglichen Grundlage helfen. Geben Sie ihnen die Starke bitte, um jedem von ihnen das geistige Verstandnis fiir die Arbeit fortzusetzen und zu geben, daB Sie sie tun wiinschen. Helfen Sie bitte jedem von ihnen, Furcht nicht zu haben und daran zu erinnern, daB Sie der Gott sind, der Gebet beantwortet und der verantwortlich fiir alles ist.

Ich bete, daB Sie sie anregen wiirden und daB Sie sie schiitzen und die Arbeit u. das Ministerium, daB sie innen engagiert werden. Ich bete, daB Sie sie vor den geistigen Kraften oder anderen Hindernissen schiitzen wiirden, die sie schadigen oder sie verlangsamen konnten.

Helfen Sie mir bitte, wenn ich dieses neue Testament benutze, um an die Leute auch zu denken, die diese Ausgabe zur Verfiigung gestellt haben, damit ich fiir sie und also, sie beten kann kann fortfahren, mehr Leuten zu helfen.

Ich bete, daB Sie mir eine Liebe Ihres heiligen Wortes (das neue Testament) geben wiirden und daB Sie mir geistige Klugheit und Einsicht, um Sie besser zu kennen geben wiirden und den Zeitabschnitt zu verstehen, dem wir in leben. Helfen Sie mir bitte, zu konnen die Schwierigkeiten beschaftigen, daB ich mit jeden Tag konfrontiert werde.

Lord God, helfen mir Sie besser kennen und zu wiinschen anderen Christen in meinem Bereich und um die Welt helfen wiinschen. Ich bete, daB Sie die elektronische Buchmannschaft und -die geben wiirden, die ihnen Ihre Klugheit helfen. Ich bete, daB Sie den einzelnen Mitgliedern ihrer Familie (und meiner Familie) helfen wiirden nicht Angelegenheiten betrogen zu werden, aber, Sie zu verstehen und Sie in jeder Weise annehmen und folgen zu wiinschen. Geben Sie uns Komfort auch und Anleitung in diesen Zeiten und ich bitten Sie, diese Sachen im Namen Jesus zu tun, amen,

Prayer to God

Dear God,

Thank you that this Gospel or this New Testament has been released so that we are able to learn more about you.

Please help the people responsible for making this Electronic book available. You know who they are and you are able to help them.

Please help them to be able to work fast, and make more Electronic books available

Please help them to have all the resources, the money, the strength and the time that they need in order to be able to keep working for You.

Please help those that are part of the team that help them on an everyday basis. Please give them the strength to continue and give each of them the spiritual understanding for the work that you want them to do.

Please help each of them to not have fear and to remember that you are the God who answers prayer and who is in charge of everything.

I pray that you would encourage them, and that you protect them, and the work & ministry that they are engaged in.

I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual Forces or other obstacles that could harm them or slow them down.

Please help me when I use this New Testament to also think of the people who have made this edition available, so that I can pray for them and so they can continue to help more people.

I pray that you would give me a love of your Holy Word (the New Testament), and that you would give me spiritual wisdom and discernment to know you better and to understand the period of time that we are living in.

Please help me to know how to deal with the difficulties that I am confronted with every day. Lord God, Help me to want to know you Better and to want to help other Christians in my area and around the world.

I pray that you would give the Electronic book team and those who help them your wisdom.

I pray that you would help the individual members of their family (and my family) to not be spiritually deceived, but to understand you and to want to accept and follow you in every way.

Also give us comfort and guidance in these times and I ask you to do these things in the name of Jesus, Amen,

Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these books can be obtained [downloaded] for Free and without cost

Nfiw Tfistamfint

E

Arabic New Testament - P d lt # 1

B

Arabic New Testament - P d lt # 2

CT

Arabic New Testament - Pait #3

GREEKNEWTESTAMENT

NOUVEAU TESTAMENT GRECQUE

New Testament- CLASSIC KOINE - GREC ANCIENT -

ISEWTESTAlVENr in LATIN

NOUVEAU TESTAMENT -LATIN

Telecharaez d o u r en a r r i v e r au oaaes IGratuit-evidement)

Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these bookscan beobtained [downloaded] [telecharaer] forFreeand withoutcost

PERSIAN - PERSE - IRANIAN - FARSI

Nfiw Tfistamfint

Nouveau Testament persan [Perse - Iran] - Farsca Yeni Ahit- Nuevo Testamento pers a Persisch Neuen Testament -Testamento Novo persa

Persian Farsi New Testament - P art # 1

Persian Iranian New Testament - P art #2

i

Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #3

i Z

Persian Iranian New Testament - Part #4 Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #5 Persian Iranian New Testament - Part #6

Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #7

Persian Iranian New Testament - Part #8

Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #9

ETHIOPIC - AMHARIC

Nfiw Tfistamfint

EthiODic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt # 1

Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #2

E thiODic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #3

EthiODic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #4

Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #5

Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #6

Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #7

C licking on these links will take you to pages where these bookscan be obtained fdownloadedlfor Free and withoutcost

■URKISH NEWTESTAMENT

Neuen Testaments in turkischer

Classic Turkish in ARABIC Scrio

New Testament - TURKISH in Arabic Scrip

Turkish New Testament (Arabic Scrip / Scriptj-Tiirk Yeni Ahit - Neuen Testaments in turkischer- Nuevo Testamento en turco- Nouveau Testament en turc ■ Nieuwe Testament in hetTurks

Classic Turkish New Testament -
1 Classic	Turkish New Testament -
I Classic	Turkish New Testament -
Classic	Turkish New Testament -
Classic	Turkish New Testament -
Classic	Turkish New Testament -
Classic	Turkish New Testament -
Classic	Turkish New Testament -
1 Classic	Turkish New Testament -
1 Classic	Turkish New Testament -
Classic	Turkish New Testament -
Classic Turkish New Testament -

Part#1

Part#2

Part#3

Part#4

Part#5

Part#6

Part#7

Part#8

Part# 9

Part# 1

U

Part#11

Part# 12

NOUVEAU TESTAMENT HONGROIS - HONGRIE

HUNGARIAN N.T. Matthew - #1

hungarian - II Thes saloiiians - #14

HUNGARIAN N.T. Marc

HUNGARIAN- 1 Timothy-* 15

HUNGARIAN N.T. Luke

HUNGARIAN N.T. J ohn

-#4

HUNGARIAN N.T. Acts

-#5

HUNGARIAN N.T. Romans -#6

HUNGARIAN- 1 Corinthians -#7

HUNGARIAN- II Corinthians - #8

HUNGARIAN- Galatians - #9

■

HUNGARIAN- E phesians -#10

■

HUNGARIAN -Philippians -#11

HUNGARIAN -Colossians -#12 ■

HUNGARIAN - 1 Thessalonians - # 13

HUNGARIAN- II Timothy- #16

HUNGARIAN N.T.TITUS -#17

HUNGARIAN -Philemon-* 18

HUNGARIAN -Hebrews- #19

HUNGARIAN -James - #20

HUNGARIAN- 1 Peter -#21

HUNGARIAN- II Peter -#22

HUNGARIAN- 1-3 J ohn -#23

HUNGARIAN N.T. J ude

HUNGARIAN -Revelation -#25

Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these books can beobtained [downloaded]forFreeand withoutcost

C licking on these links will take you to pages where these bookscan be obtained fdownloadedl for F ree and without

Classic Tamil New Testament

Neues Testament des Tamil -Tamil dilinde yeni vasiyetname

Nieuwe Testament in het Tamil-taal -

An accurate & lasting translation

TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament

Part#l

TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament

TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament

TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament

TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament

TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament

TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testam

TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament

TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament

TAMIL NT-Part#13

TAMIL NT-Part#15

TAMIL NT-Part#14

TAMIL NT-Part#16

Clickto goto pages where books can beobtained [downloaded]- Free

i

KAREN (Sgau)NEWTESTAMENT

New Testament

3

URDU - PAKISTAN / INDIA

'ew Testament

URDU New Testament- P art#l

H

rt#2 [T

URDU New Testament - P a

URDU New Testament- P art #3

E

URDU New Testament

-Part#4

HINDI ■ HINDUSTANI New Testament

O

B

TELEGU New Testament

n

TAMIL New Testament

KAREN New Testament

BURMA MYANMAR New Testament

ASSAMESE New Testament

Chinese New Testament

GUI ARAT NewTestamenl

Sanscrit Sanskrit New Testament

Anc ient G reek New Testament

Indonesia New Testament

Arabic New Testament

T

I I

izerbanan Azan Azen New Testamen

Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these bookscan be obtained fdownloadedl for F ree and without

BURMA MYANMAR Part#13

BURMA MYANMAR Part#15

BURMA MYANMAR \M Part#14

BURMA MYANMAR

FJ Part#16

Click to goto pages where books can be obtained [downloaded]-Free

Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these books can beobtained [downloaded]forFreeand withoutcost

MODERN GREEKNEWTESTAMENT

Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these books can beobtained [downloadedl for F ree and without cost

20 seconds for Fellow Christians - Dear Lord,

Thank you thatthis PDF Ebook

has been released s o that we are able

to learn more about you and wiser versions.

Please help itto have wide circulation

Please help the people responsible for

making this Ebook available.

Please help them to be able to have more

resources available to help others.

Please help them to have all the resources,

the funds, the strength and the time that they

need and ask for in order to be able

to keep working for You.

I pray that you would encourage them and

that you protect them physically and

spiritually, and the work & ministry that

they are engaged in.

I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual or other Forces that could harm them or their work and projects, or slowthem down.

Please help them to find Godly friends who

are able to help. Provide helpful transportation

for their consistent use.

Remind me to pray for them often as this

will help and encourage them.

Please give them your wisdom and understanding sothey can better followyou, and I ask you to do these things in the name of Jesus, Amen,